The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About025204 - Construction-Related - Contract - Oscar Renda Contracting, Inc.� � �! � � ' , � � � City of Fort Worth CITY SECRETARY CONTRACT fV0 . � 5� �- Contract documents for construction of South Holly Water Treatment Plant Coagulant Feed System Improvements Project PW77-060770 5 00090 Volume 1 of 2- Technica! Specifications Divisions 0 through 17 JUNE, 1999 MONTGOMERY WAT�ON In Association with CARSON-SALCEDO-McWILLIAMS, INC. MATEO CONSULTING ENGINEER� INC. �f��0�9Q� °1�� Q� [�o �G�, �. �� O � � U a � � � � a � � � a Q a D � a CITY OF FORT WORTH, TX WATER DEPARTMENT CONSTRUCTION OF SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PW 77-060770500090 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS VOLUME I- BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS VOLUME II - DRAWINGS Montgomery Watson Americas, Inc. 7557 Rambler Road Suite 1050 Dallas, Texas 75231 Bids will be received at the office of the Purchasing Manager, City of Fort Worth Iocated at Lower Level of Municipal Building, 1000 Throckmorton, Fort Worth, TX 76102 until 1:30 PM on July 8,1999. 110298 1333018 — South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements TITLE PAGE PAGE 00010-1 � � � I � � � �' � � � I � � � � ,� � � CITY OF FORT WORTH, TX WATER DEPARTMENT CONSTRUCTION OF SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS Divisions 0,1,2,11,10520,13653,13675 � 15000,15005,15006,15046,15060,15065, 15075,15084,15145,15200,15201,15203,15204, 15205,15206,15215,15230,15430,15440 ��:;i1,'T Fx�s *;' � * ...r .................�.. S. IRRINKI ...:.................... 'a :_ 84348 �.� �.,, � 15450,15800,15850,15900,15990 15600 �,;;'A'Y:1Y��0��,� �'��P�E OF T��.�'�. _ R� NO � s '� �.....:4s .a 72690 ; � �1 �sr�R;:° ��c.` := �•...•• G .� !NAL �� '"'� �2 f.! 9 16482, Division 17 � �� Divisions 3,5,6,7,8,9 and 13122 )A IS �G. PARS d �% �W �'j�/ �+ �)2�1� °� 16010,16050,16400,16500,16670, 16850,16950 a • • �S r.� .� � tl . • �' �' * ' . ...:............... ...:.. .. DANILO D. ROA�� ........�.�..2816.. ...h,. : .. '�.t •�� Y, g,T�,��,.G��vt, �rurjr� SSS�a 5 � 2 � ��1,°l 1 , . � aSection Pages Section A � p Notice to Bidders .............................................................................................................................1 Special Instructions to Bidders ........................................................................................................ 3 � Section B Proposal............................................................................................................................. 3 � MWBE Section MWBESpecifications ......................................................................................................... 1 MWBEUtilization Form ...................................................................................................... 3 MWBE Prime Contractor Waiver Form .............................................................................. 1 � MWBE Good Faith Effort Form .......................................................................................... 3 . MWBE Ordinance 11923 .................................................................................................... 2 MWBE Ordinance 13471 14 I�I u L�' li1 I�I �� I�I � � I� � � Section C General Conditions Section CS Supplementary Conditions.,,,,,,, Section D SpecialConditions ............................................................................... WageRates ......................................................................................... Section E TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS , 01010 Summary of Work ............................................................. 01010-1 01014 Trench Safety System,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,„ 01014-1 01025 Measurement and Payment 01025-1 ............................................. 01070 Abbreviations of Institutions ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 01070-1 01090 Reference Standards ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 01090-1 01300 Contractor Submittals,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 01300-1 01301 Schedule of Values � 01301-1 .......................................................... 01311 Scheduling and Reporting,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 01311-1 01400 Quality Control ......................................................... 01400-1 ......... 01505 Mobilization .......................................................................01505-1 01510 Temporary Utilities,,,,,,,,,,,,,, .,.,,.,,.,,..,.,,..,,.,..,,, 01510-1 .................. 01520 SecuritY ............................................................................. 01520-1 01530 Protection of Existing Facilities ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 01530-1 01550 Site Access and Storage,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 01550-1 01580 Project Sign ....................................................................... 01580-1 01590 Field Offices, Equipment, and Services ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 01590-1 SECTION 00020 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS .......................... 51 ................. � ..................15 ................... 1 - 01010-4 - 01014-2 - 01025-2 - 01070-3 - 01090-2 - 01300-6 - 01301-2 - 01311-4 - 01400-2 - 01505-2 - 01510-4 - 01520-1 - 01530-4 - 01550-3 - 01580-1 - 01590-4 1�10298 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS D 1333018 — South Holiy WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 00020-1 SECTION 00020 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS 01600 Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 01600-1 - 01600-4 01660 Testing and Equipment Startup ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 01660-1 - 01660-4 01700 Project Closeout ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 01700-1 - 01700-2 ................................... DIVISION 02 - SITEWORK 02050 Demolition and Salvage ................................................... 02050-1 02140 Dewatering ........................................................................02140-1 02200 Earthwork ..........................................................................02200-1 02460 A.C. Pavement and Base,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 02460-1 PVC Pressure Pipe, Rubber Joint (AVWVA C900, Modified) .................................................. 02597-1 02643 Water Pipeline Testing and Disinfection,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 02643-1 02831 Chain Link Fences and Gates,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 02831-1 02900 Seeding and Fertilizing,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ,..., 02900-1 ......................... DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE . 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 03300-1 03315 Grout ................................................................ 03315-1 ................. DIVISION 04'- MASONRY Not Used DIVISION 05 - METALS . 05210 Steel Joists ........................................................................ 05210-1 05310 Steel Deck ......................................................................... 05310-1 05500 Miscellaneous Metalwork,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 05500-1 05510 Metal Stairs ....................................................................... 05510-1 DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06402 Interior Architectural Wood Work,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,06402-1 06610 Fiberglass Composite Stairs,.. .,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,06610-1, DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 07901 Joint Sealants ...................................................................07901-1 DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors and Frames ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 08110-1 08710 Door Hardware ................................................................. 08710-1 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES - 02050-8 - 02140-2 - 02200-14 - 02460-5 - 02597-6 - 02643-4 - 02831-3 - 02900-5 - 03300-15 - 03315-6 - 05210-4 - 05310-4 - 05500-8 - 05510-8 - 06402-6 - 06610-4 - 07901-8 - 08110-5 - 08710-9 09255 Gypsum Board Assemblies,,,,,,,,;,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 09255-1 - 09255-7 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings,,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 09511-1 - 09511.-5 09800 Special Coatings ............................................................... 09800-1 - 09800-11 09900 Painting ............................................................................. 09900-1 - 09900-15 110298 � CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TABLE,OF CONTENTS 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 00020-2 L�i � SECTION 00020 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES � � 10520 Five Protection Specialties ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 105201-1 - 105201-2 � DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT ,� �1 � � � � �. � � � � � � 1 11000 11149 11258 11259 11267 Equipment General Provisions ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 11000-1 - 11000-12 Submersible Sump Pump ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 11149-1 - 11149-3 Chemical Feeding Equipment, General ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 11258-1 - 11258-5 Metering Pumps ............................................... ....... 11259-1 - 11259-4 ......... Lime Feed Systems .......................................................... 11267-1 - 11267-9 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS Not Used DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13122 13653 13675 Pre-Engineered Concrete Building,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,13122-1 Welded Stainless Steel Tanks,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 13653-1 Polyethylene Tanks,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,, 13675-1 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS Not Used DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15000 Piping, General ................................................................. 15000-1 15005 Piping Identification Systems ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 15005-1 15006 Pipe Supports ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ..,,.... 15006-1 .................................... 15046 Corrosion Resistant Cast Iron Soil Pipe . (ASTM A861, Modified) .................................................... 15046-1 15060 PVC Pressure Pipe, Solvent-Welded (ASTM D 1785, Modified) ................................................. 15060-1 15065 Chlorinated Poly Vinyi Chloride Pressure Pipe, Solvent Welded (ASTM F 441, Modified) , 15065-1 15084 Rotameters . . ........ . . .. ............................................. 15084-1 .. . .... ... . . 15145 Pipe and Equipment Isolation ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 15145-1 15183 Pressure Gauges and Switches ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 15183-1 15200 Vaives, General ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,, 15200-1 .............................. 15201 Vaive and Gate Actuators ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 15201-1 15203 Check Valves ........................... ................... 15203-1 ...................... 15204 Ball Valves . . .................................................................. 15204-1 15205 Diaphragm Valves ............................................................ 15205-1 15206 Gate Valves ...................................................................... 15206-1 15215 Pressure Reducing Valves,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 15215-1 15230 Miscellaneous Valves,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ,.,, 15230-1 .......... 15430 Plumbing Piping and Specialties ..................................... 15430-1 15440 Plumbing Fixtures ............................................................. 15440-1 110298 � � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements � r 13122-9 13653-3 13675-7 15000-7 15005-3 15006-5 - 15046-2 � - 15.060-3 15065-3 15084-2 15145-3 15183-2 15200-4 15201-3 15203-3 15204-2 15205-2 15206-4 15215-2 15230- 2 15430-9 15440-2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 00020-3 SECTION 00020 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS 15450 Basic Mechanical Requirements ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 15450-1 15600 Heating Equipment,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ,.,,.,.,.,,,, 15600-1 ........... 15800 HVAC Equipment — Air Side ............................................ 15800-1 15850 Ductwork and Accessories,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 15850-1 15900 Temperature Controls ...................................................... 15900-1 15990 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (HVAC) ...................... 15990-1 DIVfSION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 16010-1 16050 Basic Materials & Methods (Electrical),,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 16050-1 16400 Power Distribution ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,;,, ,.,,, 16400-1 16482 DC-SCR Drives ................................................................ 16482-1 16500 Lighting ..............................................................................16500-1 16670 Lightning Protection Systems ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 16670-1 16850 Electric Heat Tracing ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ' ..., 16850-1 ................................. 16950 Electrical Testing .............................................................. 16950-1 DIVISION 17 - INSTRUMENTATION 17100 Process Control and Instrumentation Systems,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 17100-1 17120 Field Instrumentation,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,;,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 17120-1 17300 Control Strategies,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,;,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 17300-1 17510 PLC Based Control System Hardware,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,;,, 17510-1 Section F InsuranceForm ................................................................................................ WorkersComp Form ........................................................................................ PerformanceBond ........................................................................................... PaymentBond .................................................................................................. MaintenanceBond ........................................................................................... Section G ' Contract.............................................................. � - 15450-11 - 15600-1 - 15800-4 - 15850-3 - 15900-3 - 15990-2 16010-11 16050-15 16400-6 16482-3 16500-3 16670-3 16850-2 16950-3 - 17100-23 - 17120-6 - 17300-6 - 17510-11 ........................... 2 ...........................1 ........................... 2 ........................... 2 ........................... 2 ........................... Z 110298 . CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 00020-4 i� 0 � � 0 � � L�1 L�J I� + LJ � � '� � � � .I�l PART A NOTICE TO BIDDERS � � � (� Sealed proposals are requested for the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, and ali �� necessary appurtenances and incidental work for the South Holly Water Treatment Plant Coagulant Feed System Improvements, Water Department Project Number PW77- � 060770500090. Such proposals, addressed to Mr. Robert Terreli, City Manager of the City of Fort V�orth, will be received until 1:30 p.m. on the date of the bid opening, at the Office of the Purchasing Manager, City of Fort Worth, in the lower level of the Municipal Building, 1000 � Throckmorton, Fort Worth, Texas, 76102. The bids will be publicly opened and read aloud in the City Council Chambers at ��', � The project includes installation of: new hydrated lime feed system on existing silos; new liquid ferric sulfate feed system with two new bulk storage tanks; relocation of existing polymer feed system with new storage tanks; associated chemical feed piping; electrical � work; instrumentation and controls. Also, includes construction of a new pre-cast Coagulant Building to enclose the new chemical feed systems and modifications to the existing plan storage room in the Chemical Building. �� f� � � Q Pre-qualification according to the Fort WoYth Water Department Special Instructions to Bidders is required. All bidders must be submit pre-qualification documentation with the City of Fort Worth Water Department a minimum of seven (7) days prior to the bid opening. � � 1�J � Publication: 6/10/99 6/17/99 NOTICE TO BIDDERS 2:00 P.M., Thursday, Julv 8.1999 Any bids received after the closing time will be returned unopened. Contract Documents, including plans and specifications, have been prepared for these projects and may be obtained at the office of Montgomery Watson, 7557 Rambler Road, Suite 1050, Dallas Texas, 75231, Telephone (214) 360-9929, for non-refundable fees as fo��ows: $100 per full-size set $100 per half-size set The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids and waive any or all irregularities. Bidders shall be allowed to modify and/or withdraw bids prior to bid opening. No bid may be withdrawn until the expiration of 90 days from the date bids are opened. A pre-bid meeting will be conducted at the South Holly WTP SCADA Building on June 23, 1999 at 10:00 am. ' Robert Terrell City Manager Alice Church City Secretary l�! u � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements Section A— Notice to Bidders PAGE 1 � L�J L�J LJ L�; li9 iJ � � lJ � L�J L�J t�J � !�' L�1 � � SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PREQUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS. All contractors submitting bids are required to be prequalified by the Fort Worth Water Department prior to submitting bids. This prequalification process will establish a bid limit based on technical evaluation and financial analysis of the contractor. It is the bidder's responsibility to submit the following documentation: a current financial statement, current financial statement, an acceptable equipment schedule and any other documents the Department may deem necessary, to the Director of the Water Department at least seven (7) calendar days prior to the date of the opening of bids. a) The financial statemerit required shall have been prepared by an independent certified public accountant or independent public accountant holding a valid permit issued by an appropriate State licensing agency and shall have been so prepared as to reflect the financial status of the submitting company. This statement must be current and not more than one (1) year old. In the case that a bidding date falls within the time a new statement is being prepared, the previous statement shall be updated by proper verification. b) For an experience record to be considered to be acceptable for a given project, it must reflect the experience of the firm seeking qualification in the work of both the same nature and technical level as that of the project for which bids are to be received. c) The Director of the Water Department. shall be the sole judge as to the acceptability for financial qualification to bid on any Fort Worth Water Department project. d) Bid received in excess of the bid limit shall be considered non-responsive and will be rejected as such. e) The City, in it's sole discretion, may reject an bid for failure to demonstrate experience and/or expertise. f) Any proposals submitted by a non-prequalifed bidder shall be returned unopened, and if inadvertently opened, shall not be considered. g) The City will attempt to notify prospective bidders whose qualifications (financial or experience) are not deemed to be appropriate to the nature and/or magnitude of the project on which bids are to be received. Failure to notify shall not be a wavier of any necessary prequalification. 11. BID SECURITY. A cashier's check, or an acceptable bidder's bond, payable to the City of Fort Worth, in the amount of not less than five (5%) percent of the largest possible total of the bid submitted must accompany the bid, and is subject to forfeiture in the � event the successful bidder fails to execute the Contract Documents within ten (10) days after the contract has been awarded. To be an acceptable surety on the bond, (1) the name of the surety company shall be included on the current U.S. Treasury list of acceptable sureties, or (2) the surety company must have capital and surplus equal to ten times the limit on the bond. The surety must be licensed to do business in the State of Texas. The a�nount of the bond shall not exceed the amount shown on the U.S. Treasury list or one-tenth (1/10) the total capital and surplus. 1333018 — South Holly WTP Section A— Special Instructions to Bidders Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 1 12. BONDS. A performance bond, a payment bond, and a maintenance bond each for one hundred (100%) percent of the contract price will be required. Reference C3-3.7. 13. WAGE RATES. Not less that the prevailing wage rates established by the City of Fort Worth, Texas, and as set forth in the Contract Documents. must be paid on this project. 14. AMBIGUITY: In the case of ambiguity c Proposal, the City reserves the right to thereof to the City or to reject the Proposal. r lack of clearness in stating prices in the adopt the most advantageous construction 15. BIDDER LICENSE: Prior to the award of contract to an out-of-state bidder, the bidder shall be licensed to do business in the State of Texas. For licensing procedures, contact the Texas Secretary of State.Offices (Telephone Number 1-512-463-5555 or 1-900-263- 0060) 16. NONRESIDENT BIDDERS: Pursuant to Article 601 g, Texas Revised Civil Statues, the City of Fort Worth will not �award this contract to a nonresident bidder unless the nonresident's bid is lower that the lowest bid submitted by a Texas resident bidder by the same amount that a Texas resident would be required to underbid a nonresident bidder to obtain a comparable contract in the state in which the nonresident `s principal place of business is located. ; � "Nonresident bidder" means a bidder whose principal place of business is not in this state, but excludes a contractor whose ultimate parent company or majority owner has a place of business in the State of Texas. This provision does not apply if this contract involves federal funds. The appropriate blanks of them Proposal must be filled out by all nonresident bidders in order for the bid to meet specifications. The failure of a nonresident contractor to do so will automatically disqualify that bidder. 10. PAYMENT: If the contract amount is $25,000 or less, the contract amount shall be paid within forty-five (45) days after the completion and acceptance by the City. 11. AGE: In accordance with the policy ("Policy") of the Executive Branch of the Federal Government, Contractor covenants that neither it nor any of its officers, members, agents, employees, program participants or subcontractors, while engaged in performing this contract, shall, in connection with the employment, advancement or discharge of employees or in connection with the terms, conditions or privileges of their employment, discriminate against persons because of their age except on the basis of a bona fide occupational qualification, retirement plan or statutory requirement. Contractor further covenants that neither it nor its officers, members, agents, employees, subcontractors, program participants, or persons acting on their behalf, shall specify, in solicitations or advertisements�for employees to work on this contract, a maximum age limit for such employment unless the specified maximum age limit is based upon a bona fide occupational qualification, retirement plan or statutory requirements. Contractor warrants it will fully comply with the policy and will defend, indemnify and hold City harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractors against the City arising out of the Contractor's and/or its subcontractors' alleged failure to comply with the above referenced Policy concerning age discrimination in the performance of the contract. � E�' � �J C+�� I�'l (� � � L`, � --, I�, L� l*J � L�J I C�' 1333018 — South Holly WTP Section A— Special Instructions to Bidders Coagulant Feed System Improvements - PAGE 2 � � L■J � � u I� C#J l+!! � l�J � L*"J L] � � � u ,I,, � 10. DISABILITY: In accordance with provisions of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 ("ADA"), Contractor warrants that it and any and all of its subcontractors will not unlawfully discriminate on; the basis of disability in the provision of services to the general public, nor in the availability, terms and/or conditions of employment for applicants for employment with, or employees of the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. Contract warrants it will fully comply with ADA's provision and any other applicable Federal, State, and local laws concerning disability and will defend, indemnify and hold harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractors against the City arising out of the Contractor's and/or its subcontractors' alleged failure to comply with the above referenced Policy concerning disability discrimination in the performance of this contract. 11. MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES:. In accordance with the City of Fort Worth Ordinance Nos. 11923 & 13471, the City of Fort Worth has goals for the participation of minority business enterprises and women business enterprises in City contracts.. A copy of these Ordinances can be obtained from the Office of the Ciry Secretary. In order for a bid to be considered responsive, the bidder shall submit the MBE/WBE UTILIZATION FORM, PRIME CONTRACTOR WAIVER FORM, and/or the GOOD FAITH EFFORT FORM ("Documentation") as applicable. The documentation must be received no later than 5:00 PM, five (5) City business days after the bid opening date. The bidder shall obtain a receipt from the appropriate employee of the managing �department to whom delivery was made. Such receipt shall be evidence that the documentation was received by the City. Failure to comply shall render the bid non- responsive. � Upon request, Contractor agrees to provide the Owner complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed by a Minority Business Ente�prise (MBE) and/or Women Business Enterprise (WBE) on a contract and payment thereof. Contractor further agrees to permit any audit and/or examination of any books, records or files in its possession that will substantiate the actual work performed by an MBE and/or WBE. The misrepresentation of facts (other than a negligent misrepresentation) and/or the commission of fraud by the Contractor will be grounds for termination of the contract and/or initiating action under appropriate federal, state or local laws or ordinances relating to false statements. •Further, any such misrepresentation (other than a negligent misrepresentation) and/or commission of fraud will result in the Contractor being determined to be irresponsible and barred from participating in City work for a period of time of not less than three (3) years. . 12. ADDENDA: Bidders wanting further information, interpretation or clarification of the contract documents must make their request in writing to the Fort Worth Water Department Engineering Services, at least 96 hours prior to bid opening. Answers to all such requests will be bound and made a part of the Contract. Documents. No other explanation or interpretation will be considered official or binding. Should a bidder find discrepancies in, or omissions from, the Contract Documents, or should the bidder be in doubt as to their meaning, the bidder should at once notify tlie Fort Worth Water Department Engineering Services, in order that a written addendum may be sent to all bidders. Any addenda issued will be mailed or be delivered to each prospective bidder. The bid proposal as submitted by the bidder must be so constructed as to include any addenda issued by the Fort Worth Water Department, prior to 24 hours of the opening of bids with appropriate recognition of addenda so noted in the bid proposal. 1333018 — South Holly WTP Section A— Special Instructions to Bidders Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 3 � E� a � a � d� � O a O a a C� C.� � � C�I ��! I� �l � C� Q C.� �1 i� G� � �t [� � �i Q TO: � u � South Holly Water Treatment Plant Coagulant Feed System Improvements Project Number PW77-06Q77Q500090 � Pursuant to the foregoing Notice to Bidders, the undersigned Bidder, having thoroughly examined the Contract Documents, including plans, special contract documents and the General Specifications for Water Department Projects, the site of the project and understanding the amount of work to be done, and the prevailing conditions hereby � proposes to do all the work, furnish all the labor, equipmenX and material, except as specified to be furnished by the City, which is necessary to fully complete the work as provided in the plans and contract Documents and subject to the inspection and approval of � the Director of the City Water Department of the City of Fort Worth, Texas; and binds himself upon acceptance of this proposal to execute a contract and furnisn an approved Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Maintenance Bond, and such other bonds, if any, as � may be required by the Contract Documents for the performing and completing of the said work. Contractor praposes to do the work within the time stated and for the following sums: � � O � � � � � PART B-PROPOSAL Bob Terrell City Manager Fort Worth, Texas Fort Worth, Texas PROPOSAL FOR: furnishing of all materials and equipment and labor and ali necessary appurtenances and incidental work to provide a complete and operable project designated as: Item Approx. Description of Items with No. Quantitv Bid Prices Written in Words l_!I � 1 Construction of the South Holly L.S. Coagulant Feed System Improvements C��lE ��/l, w�,.� �`-aciR J�Fuu1��Q�D 7J{IRi'`�Tu�o THoLIsAnrD - ti.l,�u.�- �" �aOrz �,�'� nt Dollars and y � � Cents Per Lump Sum Unit Price Total Amount (Fipuresl Bid in Fiaures $1 32 9 D$ �, 5�32, 9/O 100 Trench Safety System: Sloping/ L.F. Benching method; Trench Box Method; or Shoring, Sheeting and Bracing Method I F�) �--1 `-----� N P� Per iinear foot. Dollars Cents ov � oc, $ 1 v - $ �� DUD ' 13330t 8- South Holly WTP Section B- Proposal [� _ Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 1 U� Y C. Allowance Three-duai head metering Pump System And accessories from Pulsa Feeder Inc. $ 17.030 $51.090 TOTAL BID PRICE (Items A through C inclusive). dl�r� Mi LL-/DiV ��s� � � (in words) ,/�,��iP�U � rLr F'Lv_� 7'/ft�i.��t1N D� N.v eE rvrs ($) �i rS�i o00 (in figures) Within ten days after acceptance of this Proposal, the undersigned will execute the formal contract for the faithful performance of the Contract. No bid security is required and bonds will be required. The undersigned bidder certifies that he has been furnished at least one set of the General Contract Documents and General Specifications for Water Department Projects dated January 1, 1978 and all addendum thereto, and that he has read and thoroughly understands all the requirements and conditions of those . General Documents and the Specific Contract Documents and appurtenant plans. The undersigned assures that its employees, and applicants for employinent and those of any labor organization, subcontractors, anci employment agency in either furnishing of referring employee applicants to the undersigned are not discriminated against as prohibited by the terms of City Ordinance No 7278 as amended by City Ordinance No 7400. The Bidder agrees to begin construction within 10 calendar days after issue of the work order, and to complete the contract within 180 calendar days after beginning construction as set forth in the written work order to be furnished by the Owner. State of Residency: (Complete A or B below, as applicable:) A. e principal place of busir�ess of our company is in the State of �� Non resident ' s in the State of , our principal place of business, are required to rcent lower than resident bidders by state law. A copy of the statute is ed. Non r' nt bidders in the State of , our ''c�pal place of iness, are not required to underbid resident bidders. � B. The principal place of business of our company or our parent company or � majority holder is in the State of Texas. I(We), acknowledge receipt of the following addenda to the plans and specifications, all of � •• the provisions and requirements of which have been taken into consideration in preparation of. the foregoing bid: Addendum No. 1 (Initials) S�.� � �� 99 Addendum No. 2 (lnitials) Addendum No. 3 (initials) 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed�System Improvements � � Section B - Proposal � PAG E 2 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � V ) (� ST�-vE'•✓ I�Dw ►�w4nJ U �'� `��' Seal If Bidder is Corp ration Date: `� 9 0 � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements Signature of Principal 1,�� t P �S��,T-- Title or Position �scg„e f��.,aa �oN,n,t�r�c T - Contractor SZ � l�Cn�so.v �c Street j2o�No�+�', 1 �. �s 7C� �l� � City, State Zip � r7 /�9/- a�o3 Telephone Number Section B - Proposal PAGE 3 � l�7 � � � � 0 0 � 0 1� � � � 0 0 Q � B� S.�C.�Ior� M� L �� 0 [�; city of Fort wortn Minority and Women Business Enterprises Specifications SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS iJ � �� l�; L�� APPLICATION OF POLICY If the totai dollar valu� o� thg'contract� is $25,000 or mote; fhe MWBE goals� are applicabt'e�: If the total. doilar value•of the contract isY less:�tharr $25;000, tf�e MWBE"goafs are:not applicable � POLICY STATEMENT It is the policy of the City of Fort Worth to ensure the full and equitable participation by Minority/Women Business Enterprises (M/WBE) in the procurement of all goods and services to the City on a contractual basis. The objective of the Policy is to increase the use of M/WBE firms to a level comparable to the availability of qualified M/WBEs which provide goods and�services directly or indirectly to the City: MNVBE PROJECT GOALS The City's MBE/WBE goal for this project is 25 % of the base bid value of the contract. � COMPLIANCE TO BID SPECIFICATIONS On the Ciry contract of $25,000 or more, bidders are required to comply with the intent of the City's M/WBE Ordinance by either of the following: � LJ ��' I+�' f!J l� � �J � 1. Meet or exceed the above stated Minimum MlWBE goals, or 2. Good Faith Effort documentation, or, 3. Waiver documentation. SUBMISSION OF REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION, The applicable documents must be received by the Managing Department, within the following times allocated, in order for the entire bid to be considered responsive to the specifications. 1. M/WBE Utilization Form 2. MIWBE Goals Waiver Form 3. M/WBE Good Faith Effort Form IF�ILCJRE'`��COM� received by 5:00 PM, five (5) City business days after the bid opening date, exclusive of the bid opening date. received by 5:00 PM, five (5) City business days after the bid opening date, exclusive of the bid opening date. received by 5:00 PM, five (5) City business days after the bid opening date, exclusive of the bid opening date. �R�IN�YN:�E::1�[�� G�ES�1�'�'xII� XkIE Bli� BEltVCx �;` � IS1��T�St�EEIFI�ATIQN� s ° � ° � � � Any question, please contact the M/VVBE Office at (817-871-6104) 1333018 — South Holly WTP MWBE Specifications � Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 1 08/16/88 HON 08:42 FAa 8175716744 ��: . � .. � � OSCAR RENDA CONTRAGTING City of Fort Wonh Minority and Women Business Enterprise Specifications MBE/WB� UTILIZATiON FARM Oscar T�enda Cvntxact�ag, Ync. July 8, 1999 . PRIME COMPANY NAME �ID DATE � South Hol].y Water Trgatment Plant . PW7I7�060770500090 � PROJ�CT NAME coagulanc Feed Systeza �mpravements PROJEC'f` NUMBEH I CITY'S NUWBE PROJ�CT GOAL 25X , I M/WBE P��iCENTAGE ACHiIEVED 32. 31� I �. � �� . � Failure to complete this form, in its entirety with supparting dc��um�ntation, �nd received by the Managing Department on or befoce 5:00 p.m. five (5} Clty bus�ness days after �he bid opening� exclusive of the bid opening date� wii! result tn the bid being considered non-resportsive to bid specifications. � The undersigned bidder agrees to enter inio a formal agreement with the MBE andlor WBE firms for work listed in this sahedule� condltfoned upon executiott ai a contc�ct with the City af Fo�t Worth. The intentional a�d/or knowing misrepresentatlon of facts ls grounds for conslderation of disq�alification and wisl result�tn the bid being considered non-responsive to speciiications. Campany Narne, Gontact Name. � Address. �and Telephone No: �1003 ATTACHMENT 1 A PAG E 1 of 3 Doila� Amount �� : � ..m� :�� ist 46�,�00.00 d Bebar Services and Suaaly DTCTRC ' Reinforcing steel 1st 12,500.00 Cer�fte . . � Specity Au � . ' . d . � Contracting • �:� . , U � Scope of Work("�, � �.a � x �.�.�=:.:� �-� � :. : . � .. z � � �� . . � _ � . Specify al1(tems to . be:'.':'. .. -.: :.Supptied(7�•, � S&,T ElectXi�a1 Service NCTTtC Div.160U & 1700 � I,ynda Dodson WFSD Electr�cal and P 0 Box 1215i6 1264Y05�� strumentati�u Ft. Worth, TX 76121 TxI}OT 817-560-OOOQ. VIQ3036 Joy Thompson WFSD 1390__ Gilman Ros.d � - 2712Y02_ Ft. Worth. TX 76140 817-48�-4h�'� � , ,.� N 0 �� M/WBEs must be located in 9(nine) county marfcetplace or currentEy daing business in the marketplace at the time of bid. �} Specifi► aN area5,,n which M1WBEs are to t►e utilized andl�r itQm.s to be supp ied. 1333018 - South Moily VYTP Coagulant Feed System lmprovements MWBE Utilizatio� Form PAGE 1 � �� OS/18/88 HUN�08:4� H'Ab 2117571ff744 U5(:AK !(�NllA CUN'11(A(:l'11VG l¢J004 � fi� ' ATTACHMENT 1A � � PAGE 2 of 3 ed credit toward _/WBE Goat. � �(� A Compiete listing of items ta be supplied is required in orcter ta receiv . the M _ (") {dentify each Tier levet. � Tier. Means the level oi suboontracting below the prime contractodconsultant, i.e. a direct payment from tt�e prime contractor to subcontractor is considered 1" tier, payment'by a ._.- -' subcontractor to its suppiie� is considered 2"` tier. TH1S FORM MUST BE RECESVED 9Y 7HE MANAGtNG DEPARTMENT BY 5:00 p.m., FiVE (5) CITY �USIN�SS DAYS AFTER Bip OP�NING, EXCLUSIVE OF BID OPENING DA7EOPENING. City oi Fo�t worth Mino�ity and Women Susiness �nterprise Speciiications Ccmpany Name, Contact J Certi�ie Specify Afl Specity A11, (tet'r�s to • Doflar Amount Name, . • f Conuacting • - -_ - be :-:.. _ � •c; � . . , Address, and Telephone No. , � �...� Scope of WarK('). . ; �� Suppiieii("};^;.;.�:' v.. ` ."• - . ; � . • � � O ' ' • = ' � �'' .`�• '"��^�"'- 'Q•m • • '�• . ' • �-- - O • • ;,,r_' • : ,,:,' ' �'�`'+: '•:• �- : N F— ' . . - • U X ' . • _ • • • ,_ �::. �a�..:. _:.�.. . �' 'tr_ �• .?."' . ' � �. • • .. .. .iia,v'::v�� _ . . . . r;i:. •• . . . , .. � The biddef turther ag�s to provlde, directty to the City apon request, complete and accurate int'ormation regarding acttsal work performed by atl subcontr�ctors, incfuding MBE (s) and/or WBEts) a�rattgemants submitted with this bid. The bidder also agrees to altow an �udit and/or exsmination of any books, records and flles hetd by their Company that wili substantiate the actual worlc peKormed by the MBE(s) and/or W8E(s) on this contract� by an authortzed ofticer or employee of ihe Ctty. AnY intentional and/or kr'towing misrepresentation of facts wfll be g�aunds for terminating the contract or debatment trom City work toc a pe�iod of not less than three (3) years and fo� lnitiatitlg actian under Federat� State or Local laws concerni�g false statements. Any failure to eomply with this ordinance and c�eates a rrate�iai breach of eontract may resutt in a dete:mination of a� irresponsible otferor and �arred itom particlpatirg in City work for a periad of time not less than one {7) yea�. ALL MHEs and WBEs MUST BE CERTiFIEU BY TME CiTY BEFORE CONTF�ACT AWARD 1333018 — South Holly WTP ' � MWBE Utilization Farm Caaguiant Feed System ImprovemeRts PAGE 2 � � VO/ iVi a0 �Vl\ V0.9J i'AA O11 i7/1V 1�!y VJIiAl( 1(L'j9UA liUiVll(AlillPll7 �(�05 � � � � � � � TEtle �, Oecar Senda CantYaCting, Inc. Company Name 522 Bensan Laae Address xoanoke, Texas 76262 City/StatelZip Code . ATTACHMENT 1A PAGE 3 Of 3 S .pv -n .. BOWm3ri • Prtnted Signature Stephen Welch - Project Manager Contact Name and Tit{e (li ditfecent) 817-571-9391 . Tslephone Number (s) 817-571-6744 Fax Numbet July 9, i999 Date THIS FORM MUST BE RECElVED BY TFi� MAtSAGING DEPARTM�N7 BY 5:00 p.m., FlVE (5) CI'CY BUSlNESS DAYS AFTER B{D OPENiNG� FXCLUS�VE �� B{D OPENING DATEOPENING 0 � � 2 1 33301 8 - 8outh Holly W7P � Cvagulant Feed System tmp�vements � _ . . _ -•-- MWBE Utilization Form PAG E 3 c � � u l�!; � � l!J L+�' f�` L,� �J '�' LJ � L�' � �s' City of Fort Worth Minority and Women Business Enterprise Specifications Prime Contractor Waiver Prime Company Name Bid Opening Date Project Name Project Number ATTACHMENT 1 B Page 1 of 1 If both answers to this form are YES, do not complete ATTACHMENT 1C(Good Faith Effort Form). All questions on this form must be completed and a detailed explanation provided, if applicable. If the answer to either question is NO, then you must complete ATTACHMENT 1C. Thls form is only applicable if both answers are yes. Failure to complete this form in its entirety and be received by t�ie. Manaaina Department on or before 5:00 a.m. five (51 Citv business days after bid°oaeni�cr, exclusi�eeof. the bid opening,�date� wil� result in the� bid being considerecf non-responsive ta�bid`specifications:� -0 wk c F= , 3�, . W i l l y o u p e rf o r m t h i s e n t i r e c o n t r a c t w i t h o u t s u b c o n t r a c t o r s? Y e s N o If yes, please provide a detailed explanation that proves based on the size and scope of this project, this is your normal business practice and provide an operational profile of your business. WIII you pertorm this entire contract without suppliers? Yes No If yes, please provide a detailed explanation that proves based on the size and scope of this project, this is your normal business practice and provide an inventory profile of your business. The bidder further agrees to provide, directly, to the City upon request, complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed by all subcontractors, inciuding MBE(s) and/or WBE(s) on this contract, the payment therefore and any proposed changes to the original MBE(s) and/or WBE (s) arrangements submitted with this bid. The bidder also agrees to allow an audit and/or examination of any books, records and files held by their company that will substantiate the actual work performed by the MBE(s) and/or WBE(s) on this contract, by an authorized officer or employee of the Clty. Any intentional and/or knowing misrepresentation of facts will be grounds for terminating the contract or debarment from City work for a period of not less than three (3) years and for initiating action under Federal, State or Local laws concerning false statements. Any fallure to comply with this ordinance and creates a material breach of contract may result in a determination of an irresponsible offeror and barred from participating in City work for a period of time not less than one (1) year. Authorized Signature Title Company Name Address Printed Signature Contact Name (if different) Contact Te(ephone Number (s) Fax Number 1333018 — South Holly WTP � MWBE Prime Contractor Waiver Form � Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 1 � � l+�' C;J � � � L�J L�' � � � � l�l l�� ls7 ATTACHMENT 1 C Page 1 of 3 City of Fort Worth Minority and Women Business F�nterprise Specificatlons GOOD FAITH EFFORT Prime Company Name Bid Date Project Name , Project Number If you� hav� failec�� ta�° secure� M/WBE� Par�icip�ation� a° d�, yat��hav�;syubcontracting,�oanci/or;;.�°supplier , opportunities or� if°your° MMFBE`participation=�is�less�than t(i�C�t�'s= projectrgoal��ryou�mustkCamplete� this form�. ` 9 . , � , . , • � � 3 v ,� � � .�� , . . , _ � , . � If the bidder's method of compliance with the M1WBE goal is based upon demonstration of a"good faith effort", the �bidder will have the burden of correctly and� accurately preparing and submitting the documentation required by the City. Compliance with each item, 1 thru 6 below, shali satisfy� the Good Faith Effort requirement absent proof of fraud, intentional and/or knowing misrepresentation the facts or intentionai discrimination by the bidder. i . Failuret to" completet tFiis �forr�� m ifs=� entiret�° witt� its Ss'upportin��documer�tatio� an'� he� r,ece�v�ci� b��gthe M'anaging Departmer�t�on�or°before 5:00'p.m..five (S�City��,usines�Fc�a�s%a ��b�c�open�rrg�;eXc�usive�ofhth� � a�. �.� � ,� bid�opening date� wiff��resuita i�t� the bid��being cons��erec�� on�respqns�ve��to� �i�`�pecifr�`ati�n:s� ��, � 1.) Please list each and every subcontracting and/or supplier opportunity (DO NOT LIST NAMES OF FIRMS) which will be used in the completion of this project, regardless of whether it is to be provided by a M/WBE or non-M/WBE. i (Use additiona! sheefs, if necessary) List of : Subcontractina Opnortunities � Llst of : Supplier Oaportunities i � 1333018 — South Holly WTP MWBE Good Faith Effort Form � Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 1 ATTACHMENT � Page 2 of 3 . � 2.) Did you obtain a current list of M/WBE firms from the City's M/WBE Office? The list is considered in compliance, if it is not more than 3 months old from the date of the bid opening. � Yes Date of Listing / / No � 3.) Did you solicit bids from M/WBE firms, within the subcontracting and/or supplier areas previous� listed, at least ten calendar days prior to the bid opening by mail, exclusive of the day the bids a��j opened? Yes � if yes, attach M/WBE mail listing to include name of firm and address and a � No � dated copy of the letter mailed. 4.) Did you solicit bids from M/WBE firms, within the subcontracting and/or suppller areas previous� listed, at least ten calendar days prior to the bid opening by telephone, exclusive of the day the bids are opened? � Yes If yes, attach list to include name of M/WBE firm, ep rson contacted . No ahone number and date and time of contact. w � Note: A facsimile�may be used to comply with either 3 or 4, but may not be� used for both. If a�facsimile is used, attach a fax confirmation, which is to provide M/WBE name, date, fax�number 'and,documentati faxed. . � � ' - � . ' � questions'w3� and<' i ist°,�b ut:iiot� le'ss� .��,� _ , � .._. - - -��.o .< �: <�n .m� _�,._� ti-��r....�. .�� ,.. .., �:�- �... ro��.s ..�,, . � � 5.) Did you provide plans and specifications to potential M/WBEs or information regarding the location of plans and specifications in order to assist the M/WBEs? � � Yes No � D 6.) If the M/WBE bids were received and rejected, you must: (1) List the M?WBE firms and reason(s) for rejection (l.e. quotation not commercially reasonab� qualifications, etc.) and (2) Attach affidavit and/or documentation to support the reason(s) listed below (i.e.' letters, memos, � bids, telephone calis, meetings, etc.) Q � �� 1333018 — South Holly WTP MWBE Good Faith Effort Form Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 2 Q �•1 � �� ;�� L�J � L�J (Please use additional sheefs, if necessary, and attach) Company Name Telephone Contact Person Scope of Work ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: ATTACHMENT 1 C Page 3 of 3 Reasonfor Rejection Please provide additional information you feel will further explain your good and honest efforts to obtain M/WBE participation on this project. The bidder further agrees to provide, directly to the City upon request, compiete and accurate information regarding actual work pertormed on this contract, the payment therefore and any proposed changes to the original arrangements submitted with this bld. The bidder also agrees to allow an audit and/or examination of any books, records and files held by their company that will substantiate the actual work performed on this contract, by an authorized officer or employee of the City. , O Any intentional and/or knowing misrepresentation •of facts will be grounds for terminating the contract or debarment from City work for a period of not less than three (3) years and for initiating action under Federal, State or Local laws concerning false statements. Any failure to comply with this ordinance and � creates a material breach of contract may result in a determination of an irresponsible offeror and barred from participating in Cfty work for a period of time not less than one (1) year. � The undersigned certifies that the information provided and the M/WB�(s) listed was/were contacted in good faith. It is understood that any M/WBE(s) listed in Attachment 1C will be contacted and reasons for not us(ng them will be verified by the City's M/WBE Office. � L�1 � LJ Authorized Signature Title Company Name Address City/State2ip Printed Signature Contact Name and Title (if different) Contact Telephone Number (s) Fax Number Date 1333018 — South Holly WTP MWBE Good Faith Effort Form � Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 3 � � ORDINANCE N0.11923 � REPEALING ALL MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE POLICIES AND DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE POLICIES PREVIOUSLY ADJUSTED; ADOPTING AN ORDINANCE TO REMEDY THE UNDERUTILIZATION OF MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESSES, AND TO � ENHANCE THE UTILIZATION OF SAME; DEFINING MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE, AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE FOR PURPOSE OF � CERTIFICATION; REQUIRING MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE AND � WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PARTICIPANTS TO BE QUALIFIED AND DOING BUSINESS IN LOCALITY FROM W.HICH THE CITY REGULARLY SOLICITS; ADOPTING THE U.S. SMALL BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION'S DEFINITION FOR A SIZE STANDARD; �STABLISHING SEPARATE GOALS FOR D MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISES AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES IN THE SPECIFIC AREAS OF CONS�'RUCTION, PROFESSIONAL SERVICES AND PURCHASING; ESTABUSHING P�OCEDURES FOR PROJECT SPECIFIC � � GOALS; PROVIDING GENERALLY FOR THE PROCEDURES TO BE FOLLOWED � IN THE BID/PROPOSAL PROCESS; REQUIRING BIDDERS TO SUBMIT DOCUMENTATION OF COMPLIANCE IN ORDER TO BE RESPONSIVE TO BID/PROPOSAL SPECIFICATIONS; ESTABLISHING WAIVER OF GOALS PROCEDURES; ALLOWING FOR DEBARMENT FOR MISREPRESENTATION OF � FACTS AS IT RELATES TO COMPLIANCE; PROVIDING SEVERABILITY CLAUSE; AND PROVIDING AN EFFECTIVE DATE. � (� � rL*9 ' iJ� � L�J � L�J � � �� WHEREAS, the City Council commissioned an Availability/Disparity Study (Study) conducted by Browne, Bor#z & Coddington, Inc. (BBC) and a Public Hearing (Hearing) conducted by Carl Anderson, Esq., and found disparities in the utiliza�ion of minority and women business enterprises in contracts awarded by the City of Fort Worth (City); and WHEREAS, the Study and Hearing four��d that discrimination occurred in the major contracting areas (construction, purchasing, and professional services) of the City of Fort Worth and resulted in significant underutilization of minority and women business enterprises; and WHEREAS, minority and women business enterprises have had and continue to have difficulties in obtaining financing, bonding, credit, insurance, and assistance programs have not been effective in either remedying the effects of underutilization iin City contracting or in preventing ongoing underutilization; and � WHEREAS, the Study and the Hearing determined that race-neutral alternatives for enhancing minority and women business enterprise contracting are not completely sufficient; aind WHEREAS, the City has also been a passive participant in discriminatory behavior practiced by private industry within the relevant Marketplace in the award of contracts to minbrities and women businesses, the purpose of this ordinance is to overcome the effects of this past underutilization and prevent any ongoing discrimination in the City's contracting processes; and 1333018 — South Holly WTP MWBE Ordinance Coagulant Feed System Improvements � . PAGE 1� m WHEREAS, the provisions of this ordinance may increase the utilization of minority and women business enterprises in contracts awarded by the City of Fort Worth; and , WHEREAS, the City Council now desires to provide a narrowly tailored remedy for past underutilization of minority and women businesses through the annual setting and defining of percentage goals for different categories of contracts, providing penalties for fraudulent misuse of this ordinance, requiring regular review of the necessity for the provisions of this ordinance, limiting those minority and women's business enterprises that participate under this ordinance to those that qualify and do business in the City's Marketplace, providing for post bid submission of required information about minority and women business enterprises and establishing waiver of goa�s procedures; NOW THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS, THAT: ; SECTION 1. It is the policy of the City of Fort Worth to attempt to provide a remedy for past underutilization of qualified minority and women businesses and prevent ongoing underutilization of minority and women business enterprises�, in the City's contracting process by ensuring the full and equitable participation of minority and women business enterprises in the provision of goods and services to the City on a contractual basis in .the manner identified in Attachment I of this ordina'nce. m x� �� 1333018 — South Holly WTP . Coagulant Feed System Improvements MWBE Ordinance PAGE 2 L■J L+'�7 � � ORDINANCE NO. 13471 AN ORDINANCE AMENDING CITY OF FORT WORTH ORDINANCE NO. 11923 BY AMENDING SECTIONS 2, 3, AND AMENDING ATTACHMENT I; PROVIDING A SEVERABILITY CLAUSE; AND PROVIDING AN EFFECTIVE DATE. BE IT ORDAINED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS, THAT: SECTION 1. Section 2 of Ciry of Fort Worth Ordinance No. 11923 is hereby amended to read as follows: �j The ultimate goal of this ordinance is to remedy the effects of past underutilization in the U Marketplace by increasing the use of minority and women business enterprises above the present low level to one more comparable to their availability in the Fort Worth � Marketplace. The City Manager shall recommend an annual goal for MBE/WBE participation in City procurement activities, based upon the availability within the Marketplace. The goals, based upon availabiliry, shall be thirteen percent (13%) for � minority businesses and twelve percent (12%) for women businesses and shall be reviewed as provided for elsewhere herein. These goals are not quotas. LwJ � � l�!J L�J L�"J a �� L� � � SECTION 2. Section 3 of City of Fort Worth Ordinance No. 11923 is hereby amended to read as follows: The provisions of this ordinance shall apply to all contracts awarded by,the City, except as may be hereafter specifically exer�pted. Where contracts involve the expenditure of federal or state funds, the state or federal policy related to MBE/V1/BE or DBE participation may take precedence ou� r this ordinance. The provisions of this ordinance shall be liberally construed for the acdomplishment of its policies and purposes. Specific goals shall be established in the areas of construction, professional services and purchases of other goods and servic�s. A goal may be set on individual projects based on the type of work or services to be performed, or goods to be acquired and the availability of minority and women buiinesses in the City's Marketplace. SECTION 3. • Attachment I to Ciry of Fort Worth Orc�inance No. 11923 is� hereby amended to read as follows: DEFINITIONS` ATTACHMENTI "Applicable ContracY' means any co�tract of $25,000 or more for construction projects and professional services and $15,000 r more for purchase agreements, as well as any other contracts that the Ciry Council or City Manager deem appropriate. • 2. "Certified" means those firms, within the Marketplace, that have been determined to be a bonafide minority or women business enterprise by either the North Central Texas Regional Certification Agency (NCTRCA), or the Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT), highway division. In the event of denial of certification by either of these entities, the City reserves the right to grant its own certification for use in City contracts. � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements MWBE Ordinance PAG E 1 �J 3. "City" means the City of Fort Worth� Texas. 4. "City business day" means Monday through Friday, inclusive, excluding legal holidays. Legal holidays shall be observed as prescribed by the City Council for observance as follows: New Year's Day M. L. King, Jr. Birthday Memorial Day Independence Day Labor Day Thanksgiving Day Thanksgiving Friday Christmas Day � January 1 � Third Monday in January • Last Monday in May . July 4 � First Monday in September , Fourth Thursday in November Fourth Friday in November December 25 f�� ' �� j�� When one of the above named holidays falls on a Saturday, the holiday shall be observed on the preceding Friday. When one of tFie above named holidays falls on a Sunday, the holiday shall be observed on the following Monday. 5. "Construction" means the erection, rehabilitation, alteration, conversion, extension, demolition, improvement, remodeling or repair to any real properry, including streets, storm drains and facilities providing utility service owned by the City. 6. "Contract" means a binding agreement whereby the City either grants a privilege or is committed to expend or does expend its funds or other resources for or in connection with a) construction of any public improvement, and b) purchase of any services (including professional services). The term includes "purchase order". .. 7 E.'•' E "Contract Officer" means the person employed by the City to oversee the performance of the contract. • "Contracting Department" means the department responsible for payment of contract obligations. "Contractor" means the Offeror with whom the City has entered into an agreement. Includes the terms "Vendor" and "Prime Contractor". 10. "Coordinator" means the administrator of the MBE/WBE Office. 11. "Goal" means the percentage of minority business enterprise and/or women business enterprise participation on an applicable project as determined by the City, based on the availability of such businesses in the marketplace and the subcontracting/supplier opportunities of the project. 12. "Good Faith Effort" means having absence of malice or any intentions to deceive, good intentions and sincerity to meet the goal of this ordinance. Documentation submitted by the Offeror to explain why its good and honest efforts did not meet or exceed the stated Goal. Compliance with each of the following steps shall satisfy the Good Faith Effort requirement absent proof of fraud, misrepresentation, or intentional discrimination by the Offeror: 12.1. List each and every subcontracting and/or supplier opportunity for the completion of this project. > 12.2. Obtain a current (not more than three (3) months, old from the bid open date) list of MBE/WBE subcontractors and/or suppliers from the City's MBE/WBE Office. 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements �� '� �� L"J ��, i� � �� i �� MWBE Ordinance PAGE 2 � � � � � �. � � � � � �, � � � 1 �I �I LaJ 12.3. Solicit bids from MBE/WBEs, within the subcontracting and/or supplier areas previously listed, at least ten calendar days prior to bid opening by mail, exclusive of the day the bids are opened. 12.4. Solicit bids from MBFJWBEs, within the subcontracting and/or supplier areas previously listed, at least ten calendar days prior to bid opening by telephone, exclusive of the day the bids are opened. Note: A facsimile may be used to comply with either 12.3 or 12.4, bufi�may not be used for both. Note: If the list of MBE/VVBEs for a particular subcontracting/suppller opportunity is ten or less, the Offeror must contact the entire list within such area of opportunity to be in compliance with 12.3 and 12.4. If the list of MBFJWBEs for a particular subcontracting/supplier opportunity is more than ten, the Offeror must contact at least two-thirds of the list within such area of opportunity, but not less than ten, to be in compliance with 12.3 and 12.4. 12.5. Provide plans and specifications or information regarding the location of plans and specification to MBE/WBEs. 12.6. Submit affidavit and/or documentation if MBFJWBE bids were rejected on the basis of quotation not being commercially reasonable, qualifications, etc. Documents may be requested to be produced for an in camera inspection. 13. "Joint Venture" means an association of two or more persons or businesses to carry out a single business enterprise for profit for which purpose they combine their property, capital, skills, knowledge and management in an agreed to proportionate share. 14. "Managing Department" means the department responsible for overseeing the day to day completion of the contract. � 15. 16. 17 ff:� "Manufacturer" means one that manufactures a product by hand or machinery suitable for uses; the process of making wares. "Marketplace" means the geographic market area as defined in the Availability and Disparity Study represented by the counties of Tarrant, Parker, Johnson, Collin, Dallas, Denton, Ellis, Kaufman and Rockwall. • "Minority" means a citizen of the United States or lawfully admitted permanent resident that is Asian American, American Indian, Black or Hispanic. "Minority Business Enterprise" is defined as a qualified business concern located in the Marketplace or providing proof of doing business in the Marketplace at the time of bid opening or the opening of responses to requests for proposals, meeting the following criteria: a. which is at least 51 percent owned by one or more minority persons, or, in the case of any pubticly owned business, at least 51 percent of the stock is owned by one or more minoriry persons; and . b. whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one or more minority persons who own it. 19. "Offeror" means any person, firm, corporation, or partnership that submits a bid or proposal to provide labor, goods or services to the City where funds are expended. The term includes the term�bidder and proposer. 1333018 — South Holly WTP _ MWBE Ordinance Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 3 �J L*J 20. "Procurement" means the buying, renting, leasing or otherwise obtaining or acquiring any supplies, materials, equipment or services. �j �.j 21. "Professional Services" means services which require predominantly mental or intellectual labor and skills, includes, but is not necessarily limited to, architects, engineers, surveyors, � doctors, attorneys, and accountants. 22. "Project Manager" see Contract Officer. 23. "Purchasing" means the buying, renting, leasing or otherwise obtaining or acquiring any supplies, materials, equipment or services excluding construction and professional services previously defined. 24 25 3� 27. 28 "Qualified" means an individual or business entity having previously performed or received training in the work, industry or profession required. "Regular Dealer" is defined as a firm that owns, operates, or maintains a store, a warehouse, or other establishment in which the materials or supplies required for the contract are bought, kept in stock, and are regularly sold retail or wholesale. "Subcontract" means an agreement between the contractor and another business entity for the performance of work. � "Subcontract/Supplier Opportunity" means an area where there is more than one MBE or WBE subcontractor/supplier in the market place. "Tier" means the level of subcontracting below the prirrie contractor/consultant, i.e., a direct payment from the prime contractor to a subcontractor is considered 1 St tier, a payment by a subcontractor to its supplier is considered 2"d tier. 29. "Women Business Enterprise" is defined as a qualified business concern located in the Marketplace or provide proof of doing business in the Marketplace at the time of bid opening or the opening of responses to requests for proposals, meeting the following criteria: a. which is at least 51 percent owned by one or more women, or, in the case of any publicly owned business, at least 51 percent of the stock is owned by one or more women; and b. whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one or more women who own it. II. PROGRAM GOAL A. A Citywide goal for the utilization of minority business enterprises (MBE) and women business enterprises (WBE) shall be reviewed and approved annually by the City Council. 1. The City Manager shall, on or before October 31 of each year, beginning October 31, 1996, conduct an analysis of the availability of MBEs and WBEs and present to the City Council an annual report on MBE/WBE availability and utilization. 2. Based on the availability of MBE/WBEs in the Marketplace and the City's most recent goal attainment and with the advice and counsel of the MWBEAC, the City Manager shall recommend to the City Council a reasonable goal for the remainder of the current fiscal year. 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements MWBE Ordinance PAGE 4 L+�J � LJ � � L�J L�l LiJ � � � � 3. The goal shall be expressed in terms of a percentage.of the total dollar value of all applicable contracts awarded by the City. Goals shall be established separately for categories of construction, professional services, and purchasing as well as any other categories that the City Council or City Manager deems appropriate. ' B. Individual project goal shall be set by the MBE/WBE Office in collaboration with the Contract Officer and Risk Management (where appropriate) prior to solicitation. The project goal shall be reasonable and shall be based upon: 1. Specific subcontracting and/or materials opportunities required to complete the project, and 2. The availability of MBE/WBE in the identified subcontracting and/or materials opportunities in the Marketplace. III. COUNTING MBE/WBE PARTICIPATION A. MBE/WBE participation shall be counted toward meeting Goal in accordance with the following provisions: . , 1. For the purpose of determining compliance with the goal requirements established in this ordinance, businesses will be counted as MBE or WBE only when they have been certified as sueh prior to a recommenda#ion for award being made to the City Council. a) Any business listed by an Offeror that is not certified at the time of bid/response opening must file an application for certification within a reasonable time for the City to consider the dollar amount towards meeting the goal. b) If a business described in the immediate subparagraph fails to submit an application for certification within a reasonable time, or if the business is denied certification, the Offeror shall be afforded five (5) City business days to secure additional certified/certifiable MBE/WBE participation, starting the next City business day following the day the written notification was received from the Managing Department. c) Evidence of the additional certified/certifiable MBE/V1IBE participation shall be delivered to and received by the Managing Department within five (5) City business days after the notification was received by the Offeror, exclusive of the date that the notification was received. 2. Except as provided for in paragraph 3 below, if the Offeror is ruled non-responsive to the �. requirements of this ordinance, the Managing Department will provide written notification to the Offeror stating the specific basis for the ruling. The Offeror may submit documentation that it will either meet or exceed the stated goal, and may be considered for an award of contract. � ��1 3. If the Offeror is ruled non-responsive solely for its failure to identify a subcontracUsupplier opportunity and that opportunity is less than three (3%) percent of the total bid, the Offeror may submit documentation that an MBE/WBE will be utilized for that subcontract/supplier opportunity, and may be considered for an award of contract. 4. Documentation required under either paragraph A or B above must be received by the Managing � Department within five (5) City business days, exclusive of the date that the Offeror was ruled non-responsive. If the documentation is not received within the stated time, the Offeror shall be � deemed to have withdrawn its bid. The City will not communicate with another Offeror regarding award of the contract until five (5) City business days after the original offer has been ruled non- a � responsive. 1333018 — South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements MWBE Ordinance PAGE 5 � L�J 5. The Offeror may count toward the goal any tier of MBE or WBE subcontractors and/or suppliers. It is the sole responsibiliry of the Offeror to report and document all subcontracting and/or supplier participation dollars counted towards the goal, irrespective of tier level. Failure to submit documentation as required in this subparagraph, shall entitle the City to withhold payments until compliance is attained. 6. The Offeror will be given credit toward the goal only when the MBE or WBE subcontractor performs a commercially useful function. An MBE or WBE subcontractor is considered to have performed a commercially useful function when: a) It is responsible for the execution of a distinct element of the work by actually performing, managing and supervising the work involved in accordance with normal business practice; and b) When the firm receives due compensation as agreed upon for the work performed. 7. The Offeror will be given credit toward the MBE/WBE contract goal only when the MBE or WBE supplier performs a commercially useful function. A MBE or WBE supplier is considered to have performed a commercially useful function when the MBE/WBE supplier is a manufacturer or a regular dealer. 8. . Regardless of whether an arrangement between the contractor and the MBE/WBE represents standard industry practice, if the arrangement erodes the ownership, control or independence of the MBE/WBE or does not meet the commercially useful function requirement, the Offeror shall receive no credit toward the goal. 9. An Offeror may count toward its goal a portion of the total dollar value of a contract with a joint venture equal to the percentage of MBE or WBE participation in the joint venture. a) The Managing Department must receive the Joint Venture form from the Offeror within five (5) City business days after the date of bid/proposal opening, exclusive of the day of the bid/proposal opening, for certification by the MBE/WBE Office. b) The MBE or WBE involved in the joint venture must be responsible for a clearly defined portion of the work to be performed, equal to a share in the ownership, control, knowledge, management, responsibility, risks, and profits of the joint-venture. � B. Except for joint ventures, the prime contractor and any work performed by the prime contractor is not considered for determining compliance with this ordinance. C. The Offeror may not count toward the goal any agreement with a MBE or WBE that does not meet the requirements of this ordinance. IV. MBE/WBE UTILIZATION REQUIREMENTS A. In addition to the requirements set forth elsewhere, bid conditions and requests for proposals shall include a statement of the MBE/WBE goal established for the project. B. Bid conditions, requests for proposals, and all other specifications for applicable contracts to be awarded by the City shall require that offers make a good faith effort (GFE) to subcontract with or purchase supplies from MBE and/or WBE firms. Such specifications shall require the Offeror to meet or exceed the stated goal or submit documentation of GFE for all applicable contracts to permit a determination of compliance with the specifications. 1333018 = South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements � u � L�'J LfJ �� L�'J L��, '�� I �� li� �� J MWBE Ordinance PAGE 6 � a � C. Construction and Professional Services contracts and such other contracts which may be competed � for under sealed proposal procedures (estimated cost of $25,000 or more) and Purchasing contracts (estimated cost of $15,000 or more) shall be awarded and administered in accordance with the following standards and procedures: �#J � � � L�J � ��J L�J l�J 1. Competitive bids for applicable contracts shall include the MBE/WBE specifications in the bid specifications. MBE/WBE specifications consist of the SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, MBE/WBE UTILIZATION FORM, PRIME CONTRACTOR WAIVER FORM, the GOOD FAITH EFFORT FORM, and, if appropriate, the JOINT VENTURE FORM. a) Competitive bids that equal or exceed the project goal must submit the MBE/WBE UTILIZATION FORM. b) Competitive bids that do not have subcontracting and/or supplier opportunities must submit the PRIME CONTRACTOR WAIVER FORM. c) Competitive bids that have subcontracting and/or supplier opportunities but do not include MBE/WBE participation in an amount which equals or exceeds the project goal, must submit the MBE/WBE UTILIZATION FORM and the GOOD FAITH EFFORT FORM and documentation. � d) Competitive bids that have subcontracting and/or supplier opportunities but do not include any MBE/WBE participation must submit the GOOD FAITH EFFORT FORM and documentation. e) The Offeror shall submit the MBE/WBE UTILIZATION FORM, PRIME CONTRACTOR WAIVER FORM and/or tlie GOOD FAITH EFFORT FORM ("Documentation") as appropriate. The managing department must receive the Documentation no later than 5:00 p.m., five (5) City business days after the bid opening date, exclusive of the bid opening date. The Offeror shall obtain a receipt from the appropriate employee of the managing department to whom delivery was made. Such receipt shall be evidence that the City received the Documentation. f) The submission of the applicable completed form(s) within the allotted time will be n considered when determining the responsiveness of the bid. Failure to comply with the bid � specifications, inclusive of the MBE/WBE specifications, shal{ . render the Offeror non- responsive. � L�J �� 2. Other than responses to Requests for Proposals for those professional services defined in Chapter 2254 of the Texas Government Code, responses to Request for Proposals shall include a section which identifies the particular MBE and/or WBE to be utilized in performing the contract. a) Specify as to MBE or WBE, the estimated percentage of the MBE or WBE participation, the type of work to be performed by the MBE or WBE, and such �other information as may reasonably be required to determine the responsiveness to the Request for Proposal. b) Responses `that do not meet or exceed the utilization goal, as required by the Request for Proposal, must submit a GFE explanation. Failure to include such GFE explanation shall render the response non-responsive. � 3. Initial responses to requests for proposals for those professional services defined in Chapter 2254 of the Texas Government Code shall not include a response to the requirements of this 1333018 — South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements MWBE Ordinance PAG E 7 � ordinance. The City shall comply with the requirements of said Chapter and rank the professional on the basis of demonstrated competence and qualifications. During negotiating the contract with the highest ranked professional, the professional shall respond to this ordinance in the manner specified in paragraph 2(a) above. 4. The GFE documentation shall demonstrate the Offeror's commitment and honest efforts to utilize MBE or WBE. The burden of preparing and submitting the GFE information is on the Offeror and will be evaluated as part of the responsiveness to the bid/proposal. An Offeror who intentionally and/or knowingly misrepresents facts on the documentation submitted will constitute a basis for classification as non-responsive and possible debarment. � 5. The contracting department may request the MBE/WBE Office to waive the goal requirements of this subsection, or to reduce the amount of the goal, in accordance with the provisions of the Exceptions and Waivers section. D. The City Manager, with the advice and counsel of the MWBEAC in accord with City of Fort Worth Resolution No. 1148, shall adopt regulations governing the purchase of goods and services under $15,000. V. POST-AWARD COMPLIANCE A. In addition to such other requirements as may be set forth elsewhere, the following shall apply to applicable contracts awarded by the City: : 2. 3 Contracfs shall incorporate this ordinance by reference, and shall provide that the contractor's violation of this ordinance shall constitute a breach of such contract and result in debarment in accord with the procedures outlined in this ordinance. From and after the date of bid opening, any proposed change or deletion in MBE/WBE participation identified in the bid, proposal or contract shall be reviewed by the MBE/WBE Office to determine whether such change or deletion is justified in accord with paragraphs 3 and 4 immediately below. Any unjustified change or deletion shall be a material breach of contract and may result in debarment in accord with the procedures outlined in this ordinance. From and after the date of bid opening, the contractor shall: a) Make no unjustified changes or d�letions in its MBE/WBE participation commitments submitted with the bids, proposal or during negotiations; b) If substantial subcontracting and/or substantial supplier opportunities arise during the term of any contract when the contractor represented in its bid to the City that it alone would perform the subcontracting/supplier opportunity work, the contractor shall notify the City before subcontracts for work and/or supplies are let and shall be required to comply with Article I, subsections 12.3 and 12.4 of this Attachment 1, exclusive of the time requirements stated in such subsections; c) Maintain records reasonably necessary for monitoring their compliance with the provisions of this ordinance; . d) After the first payment and beginning with the second application for payment, submit required M/WBE Periodic Payment Reports, including proof of payment documentation, to the MBFJWBE Office. Further, upon request of the M/WBE Office, submit such other documentation as may be reasonably required to verify proof of payments. Failure to submit these reports and other requested information, if any, as required shall authorize the City to withhold payment from the contractor until compliance with this ordinance is attained. 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements � � �� `i � � 1� L+�J L�J l__.�- J L�J � �� L�� L�� L!, MWBE Ordinance PAGE 8 � � � � L�J � li7 L!J LJ � � � l�J � LJ L#J L�J L■J L�J 4. The contractor shall submit to the MBE/WBE Office for approval a M/WBE REQUEST FOR APPROVAL OF CHANGE FORM if, during the term of any contract, a contractor wishes to change or delete one or more MBE or WBE subcontractor(s) or supplier(s). a) Within three (3) City business days after receipt by the MBE/WBE Office, exclusive of the date of receipt, the Request shall be reviewed. The Request shall be approved if the change or deletion is justified. The following shall constitute justification for the requested change or deletion: 1) A MBE or WBE's failure to provide workers' compensation insurance evidence as required by state law; or - , 2) A MBE or WBE's failure to provide evidence of gen�ral liability or other insurance under the same or similar terms as contained in the contra t documents with limits of coverage no greater than the lower of 1) the limits required of' the contractor by the City; or 2) the limits contained in the contractor's standard subco 'tract or supply agreements used on other projects of similar size and scope and with�n the contractor's normal business practice with non MBE or WBE subcontractor's or suppliers; or 3) A MBE or WBE's failure to execute the contractor's $tandard subcontract form, if e�tering a subcontract is required by the contractor in its normal course of business, unless such failure is due to: i i. A change in the amount of the previously agreec� to bid or scope of work; pr I ii. The contract presented provides for payment once a month or longer and the contractor is receiving payment from the City tw�ce a month; or iii. Any limitation being placed on the ability of the MBE or WBE to report violations of this Ordinance or any other ordinance or violations of any state or federal law or other improprieties to the City or to provide nbtice of any claim to the contractor's surety company or insurance company. 4) An MBE or WBE defaults in the performance of thC executed subcontract. In this event, the contractor shall: i. Request bids from all MBE and/or WBE subcontractors previously submitting bids for the work, ii. If reasonably practicable, request bids from previously non-bidding MBEs and WBEs, and iii. Provide to the M/WBE office documentation of compliance with (i) and (ii) above. 5) Any other reason found to be acceptable by the MBE/WBE Office in its sole discretion. NOTE: The contractor shall submit such documentatton as may reasonably be requested by the MBE/WBE Office to support the contractor's request. The time between the request by the MBE/WBE Office for additional documentation and the delivery of such documentation shall not be included within the time period that the MBE/WBE Office is required to respond as stated in subparagraph (a) above. 1333018 — South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements MWBE Ordinance PAGE 9 � b) If the MBE/WBE Office approves the deletion of a MBE or WBE and replacement by a non- MBE or WBE, such approval shall constitute a post award waiver to the extent of the value of the deleted subcontract. c) If the MBE/WBE Office denies the request for change or deletion, the contractor may appeal the denial to the City Manager whose decision will be final. 5. Whenever contract, amendments, change orders, or extra work orders are made individually or in the aggregate, the contractor shall comply with the provisions of this ordinance with respect to the alternates, amendments, change orders, or extra work orders. a) If the amendment, change order, or extra work affects the subcontract of an MBE or WBE, such MBE or WBE shall be given the opportuniry to perform such'amendment, change order or extra work. � � . b) If the amendment, change order or extra work is not covered by any subcontractor performing like or similar work, and the amount of such amendment, change order or extra work exceeds ten percent (10%) of the original contract amount, the contractor shall comply with Article 1, subsections 12.3 and 12.4 of this Attachment 1(exclusive of the time requirements stated therein) with respect to such amendment, change order, or extra work. 6. ff �the contractor in its bid included any second or lower tier subcontractor/supplier towards meeting the goal, it is the responsibility of the contractor to report and document all subcontracting and/or supplier participation dollars irrespective of tier level. Failure to comply - with the City's request to provide the required documentation shall entitle the Ciry to withhold payments (but only to the extent of the subcontractor's payments related to the MBE/WBE participation dollars which are not documented) and/or to reject future bids from the contractor until compliance with this ordinance is attained. 7. Upon completion of the contract and within ten (10) City business days after receipt of final payment from the City, exclusive of the date the contractor receives payment, the contractor shall provide the MBE/WBE Office with the M/WBE FINAL SUMMARY PAYMENT REPORT FORM to reflect the final participation of each subcontractor and/or supplier (including non- M/WBEs) used on the project. Failure to comply with the City's request to provide the required documentation shall entitle the City to reject future bids from the contractor until compliance with this ordinance is attained. 8. In the event a contractor is in non-compliance with either paragraph 6 or 7 above, and such non- compliance is solely the result of an act or omission by an MBE or WBE, the MBE/WBE Office shall consider such in determining what action, if any, to take. VI. EXCEPTIONS AND WAIVERS A. If an Offeror is unable to comply with the goal requirements established in the Program Goal section of this ordinance, such Offeror shall submit one of the two forms listed below within the allotted time. A Prime Contractor Waiver Form (Attachment 1 B) is submitted if the Offeror will perform the entire contract without subcontractors or suppliers. 2. A Good Faith Effort Form (Attachment 1 C) is submitted if the Offeror has subcontracting and/or supplier opportunities but was unable to meet or exceed the project goal. The Offeror will submit requested documentation that demonstrates a good faith effort to comply with the goal requiremerlts as described in the Program Goal section above. 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements � [�j `�� E� �' �� l� � � � ` � L__; L�"J � C �� C�� L!'� MWBE Ordinance PAGE 10 � � � � �J u � L�J � � � � L'J � � � �J L■J L� B. A contracting department may request the MBE/WBE Office to waive or modify the goal requirements for MBE or WBE by submitting a Departmental Waiver Form, in writing, prior to solicitation of bids or proposals. The MBE/WBE Office may grant such a waiver or reduction upon determination that: 1. The reasonable and necessary requirements of the contract render subcontracting or other participation of business other than the Offeror infeasible; or 2. A public or administrative emergency exists which requires the goods or services to be provided with unusual immediacy; or 3. Sufficient MBE/WBE providing the services required by the contract are unavailable in the marketplace of the project, despite attempts to locate them; or � 4. The application of the provisions of this ordinance will impose an unwarranted risk on the Ciry or unduly delay acquisition of the goods or services. C. Whenever the MBE/WBE Office denies a request to waive a goal, the contracting department may appeal that denial to the City Manager whose decision on the request shall be final. VII. PROGRAM ADMINISTRATION A. The City Manager, with the advice and counsel of the MWBEAC in accord with City of Fort Worth Resolution No. 1148, is authorized to establish and implement the regulations set forth in this ordinance. The MBE/WBE Office shall be responsible for the overall administration of the City's MBE/WBE Program, and its duties and responsibilities shall include: 1. Recommending rules and regulations to effectuate this ordinance; 2. Maintaining a current listing of certified MBE and WBE firms for distribution internally and externally on contracts; 3. Providing information and needed assistance to MBE/WBEs to increase their ability to compete effectively for the award of City contracts; 4. Investigating alleged violations of this ordinance and making written recommendations to appropriate City authorities for remedial action when appropriate; 5. Developing and distributing all necessary forms, applications, and documents necessary to comply with this ordinance; 6. Reviewing, on a regular basis, the progress of departments toward achieving the category goals for the utilization of minority and women business enterprises; 7. Making recommendations to appropriate City staff regarding methods to further the policies and goals of this ordinance; 8. Determining MBE/WBE compliance on contracts before they are submitted to the City Council for award; 9. Maintaining accurate contract performance reporting system; and 10. Compiling a report reflecting the progress in attaining the City's annual goal, quarterly and annually. 1333018 — South Holly WTP aCoagulant Feed System Improvements MWBE Ordinance PAGE 11 � B. It shall be the responsibility of the cdntracting department to ensure that bids or proposals emanating from the department adhere to the procedures and provisions set forth in this ordinance. 1. The department director or designee shall assume primary responsibility for achieving the goals of this program and shall review, on a continuing basis, all aspects of the program's operations to assure that the purpose is being attained. � 2. The contracting department shall take the following action to ensure that MBEs and WBEs have the maximum opportunity to participate on City contracts: a) A written notification shall be sent to minority and women trade associations, contractor's associations, and minority and women chambers of commerce about the availabiliry of formally advertised contracting opportunities no less than 28 days before bids are due; b) All applicable contract solicitations shall include the requirements contained in this ordinance; c) All contracting opportunities shall be evaluated in an effort to divide the total requirements of a contract to provide reasonable opportunities for MBE/WBE; d) For construction and professional service oontracts, establish procedures to ensure that all contractors' invoices are paid twice a month and that subcontractors are paid within five (5) Ciry business days after receipt of payment. A contractor's failure to make payments within five (5) City business days shall authorize the City to withhold future payments from the contractor until compliance with this ordinance is attained. e) Establish guidelines to ensure that a notice to proceed is not issued until signed letters of intent evidencing receipt by the MBE/WBE or executed agreements with the MBEJWBE have been submitted; f) Ensure that all required statistics and documentation are submitted to the MBE/WBE Office as requested; and ` g) If circumstances prevent the contracting department from meeting the 28-day advertising and notification requirements, the contracting department shall perform extensive outreach to MBE/WBE associations or other relevant organizations to inform them of the contracting opportunity. . ' VIII. CERTIFICATION The City will recognize MBE/WBE that are certified by the Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT), highway division or the North Central Texas Regional Certification Agency (NCTRCA). In the event of denial of certification by either of these entities, the City reserves the right to grant its own certification for use in City contracts. IX. CONTRACT MONITORING, AND REPORTING A. The MBE/WBE Office shall monitor compliance with these requirements during the term of the contract. If it is determined that there is cause to believe that a contractor or subcontractor has failed to comply with any of the requirements of this ordinance, or the contract provisions pertaining • to MBE/WBE utilization, the MBE/WBE Office shall notify the contracting department and the contractor. The MBE/WBE Office shall attempt to resolve the noncompliance through conciliation. If the noncompliance cannot be resolved, the Coordinator and the contracting department shall submit 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements n L+�J �� C ,a, �u � L�'J LJ � � � � � � � �� MWBE Ordinance PAGE 12 � � LJ � � � written recommendations to the City Manager or designee, and if the City Manager concurs with the findings, sanctions shall be imposed as stated in ordinance. B. Whenever the MBE/WBE Office finds, after investigation, that a contracting department has failed to comply with the provisions of this ordinance, a written finding specifying the nature of the noncompliance shall be transmitted to the contracting department, and the MBE/WBE Office shall attempt to resolve any noncompliance through conference and conciliation. Should such attempt fail to resolve the noncompliance, the Coordinator shall transmit a copy of the findings of noncompliance, with a statement that conciliation was attempted and failed, to the City Manager who shall take appropriate action to secure compliance. C. The MBE/WBE Office may require such reports, information, and documentation from contractors, � offers, contracting agencies, and the head of any department, division, or office of the City of Fort Worth, as are reasonably necessary to determine compliance with the requirements, within ten (10) days after the notice of noncompliance. l�,' � D. Contracting departments shall maintain accurate records for each contract awarded, including dollar value, the nature of the goods or services to be provided, the name of the contractor awarded the contract, the efforts it employed to solicit bids from MBE/WBE, identifying for each its dollar value, the nature of the goods or services provided, and the name of the subcontractor. E. The City Manager, with the advice and counsel of the MWBEAC in accord with City of Fort Worth a Resolution No. 1148, shall submit an annual report to the City Council on the progress of the City toward the utilization goals established by this ordinance, together with an identification of problems and specific recommendations for improving the City's performance. � X. DEBARMENT � A. An Offeror who intentionally and/or knowingly misrepresents facts shall be determined to be an irresponsible Offeror and barred from participating in City work for a period of time of not less than three (3) years. a B. The failure of an Offeror to otherwise comply with this ordinance and which constitutes a material breach of contract as stated herein, may result in the Offeror being determined to be an irresponsible Offeror and barred from participating in City work for a period of time of not less than one (1) year. � � L!1 C. The MBE/WBE Office will send a written statement of facts and a recommendation for debarment to the City Manager. The City Manager, after consultation with the Department of Law, will make the decision regarding debarment and send a certified notice to the Offeror. D. An Offeror that receives notification of debarment may appeal to an Appeal Board, hereinafter created, by giving written notice within_ ten (10) days from the date of receipt of the debarment notice, to the City Manager of its request for appeal. ' E. An Appeal Board, consisting of not less than three members appointed by the City Manager with the � approval of the City Council, will meet within thirty (30) days from the date of receipt of the request for appeal of debarment, unless Offeror requests an extension of time. The Offeror will be notified of the meeting time and location. F. The Offeror will be afforded an opportunity to appear with Counsel if they so desire, submit documentary evidence, and confront any person that the City presents. a G. The Appeal Board will render its decision not more than thirty (30) days of the hearing and send a certified notice to the Offeror. 1333018 — South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements MWBE Ordinance PAGE 13 n � H. If the Appeal Board upholds the original debarment, the Offeror may appeal to the City Council within ten (10) days from the date of receipt of the Appeal Board's decision by giving written notice to the City IVlanager. I. The appeal will be placed on the Ciry Council agenda within thirty (30) days from receipt of written notice, unless Offeror requests an extension in writing. J. From the date of notification of debarment and during the pendency of any appeal, the City will not . consider offers from, award contracts to, renew or otherwise extend contracts with, or contract directly or indirectly through subcontracts with the Offeror pending the Appeal Board's decision. K. Any MBE or WBE subcontractor or supplier who intentionally and/or knowingly misrepresents facts or otherwise violates the provisions of this ordinance may be determined to be irresponsible for a period of time not to exceed one (1) year, and if deemed irresponsible, such MBE or WBE shall not be included in calculating an Offeror's responsiveness. , XI. SEVERABILITY • . If any provision of this attachment or ordinance, the application thereof to any person or circumstance is held invalid for any reason in a court of competent jurisdiction, such invalidity shall not affect the other provisions of any other application of this.attachment or ordinance which can be given effect without the invalid provision or application, and to this end, all the provisions of this attachment or ordinance are hereby declared to be severable. � , � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements � a � � o 0 0 MWBE Ordinance PAGE 14 � . j�, R �� h � " . � . � � � � � � PART C GENERAL CONDITIONS � � � � Q a � � � Q � �� l�J � PART C - GENERAL CONDITIONS, TABLE OF CONTENTS' NOVEMBER 1, 1987 TABLE OF CONTENTS L� � �� LI L�J O � u !J � � � �� C1-1 C1-1.1 C1-1.2 C1-1.3 C1-1.4 C1-1.5 C1-1.6 C1-1.7 C1-1.8 C1-1.9 C1-1.10 C1-1.11 C1-1.12 C1-1.13 C1-1.14 C1-1.15 C1-1.16 C1-1.17 C1-1.1.8 C1-1.19 C1-1.20 C 1-1.21 C1-1.22 C1-1.23 C1-124 C1-1.25 C1-1.26 C1-1.27 C1-128 C1-1.29 C1-1.30 C1-1.31 C1-1.32 C2-2 C2-2.1 C2-2.2 C2-2.3 C2-2.4 C2-2.5 C2-2.6 C2-2.7 C2-2.8 C2-2.9 C2-2:10 DEFINITIONS Definition of Terms Contract Documents Notice to Bidders Proposal Bidder General Conditions Special Conditions Specifications Bonds Contract Plans City City Council ,. Mayor City Manager City Attorney Director of Public Works Director, Ciry Water Department Engineer Contractor Sureties The Work or Project Working Day Calendar Days Legal Holidays Abbreviations ' Change Order Paved Streets and Alleys Unpaved Streets or Alleys City Street Roadway Gravel Street INTERPRETATION AND PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL Proposal Form Interpretation of Quantities Examination of� Contract Documents and Site of Project Submitting of Proposal Rejection of Proposals Bid Security Delivery of Proposal Withdrawing Proposals Telegraphic Modifications of Proposals Public Opening of Proposal C1-1 (1) C1-1 (1) C1-1 (2) C1-1 (2) C1-1 (2) C1-1 (2) C1-1 (2) C1-1 (2) C1-1 (2) C1-1 (2) C1-1 (3) C1-1 (3) C1-1 (3) C1-1 (3) C1-1 (3) C1-1 (3) C1-1 (3) C1-1 (4) C1-1 (4) C1-1 (4) C1-1 (4) C1-1 (4) C1-1 (4) C1-1 (4) C1-1 (4) C 1-1 (4) C1-1 (5) C1-1 (6) ,C1-1 (6) C1-1 (6) C1-1 (6) C1-1 (6) C1-1 (6) C2-2 (1) C2-2 (1) C2-2 (2) C2-2 (3) C2-2 (3) C2-2 (3) C2-2 (4) C2-2 (4) C2-2 (4) C2-2 (4) � 1333018 - South Holly WTP Table of Contents � Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 1 � C2-2.11 C2-2.12 C3-3 C3-3.1 C3-3.2 C3-3.3 C3-3.4 C3-3.5 C3-3.6 C3-3.7 C3-3.8 C3-3.9 C-3-3.10 C3-3.11 C3-3.12 C3-3.13 C3-3.14 C3-3.15 Irregular Proposals �, Disqualification of B�.�ders' "n Y 4 AWARD AND EXE�UTION OF DOCUMENTS: Consideration of Proposals Minority Business E'nterprise/Women Business Enterprise Compliance Equal Employment PFrovisions Withdrawal of Propos�ls Award of Contract_ °" Return of Proposal Securities Bonds ' � Execution of Cantract� C Failure to Execute Contract Beginning Work � Insurance " Contractor's ObligatiQ�s . Weekly Payrolls a Cont�actor's Contract Administration Venue i C4-4 SCOPE OF WORK ,� C4-4.1 Intent of Contract Doctlments C4-4.2 Special Provisions C4-4.3 Increased or Decreased Quantities C4-4.4 Alteration of Contract Documents C4-4.5 Extra Work C4-4.6 Schedule of Operation� C4-4.7" Progress Schedules fo� Water andeSewer Plant Facilities �� , C5-5 CONTROL OF WORKaAND MATERIALS C5-5.1 Authority of Engineer �� C5-5.2 Conformity with Plans ''y . C5-5.3 Coordination of Contract Documents C5-5.4 Cooperation of Contractor C5-5.5 Emergency and/or Rectifcation Work C5-5.6 Field Office : S� C5-5.7 'Construction Stakes ' C5-5.8 Authoriry and Duties of ��ity Inspector C5-5.9 Inspection C5-5.10 Remaval of Defective and Unauthorized Work C5-5.1�1 Substitute Materials or �quipment C5-5.12 Samples and Tests of Materials C5-5.13 Storage of Materials � C5-5.14 Existing Structures and �Jtilities C5-5.15 Interruption of Service `� C5-5.16 Mutual Responsibility of�Contractors C5-5.17 Clean-Up � C5-5.18 Finallnspection � 1333018 - South Holly WTP 'Coagulant Feed System Ir�provements ;� C2-2 (4) C2-2 (5) C3-3 (1) C3-3 (1) C3-3 (1) C3-3 (2) C3-3 (2) C3-3 (2) C3-3 (2) C3-3 (4) C3-3 (4) C3-3 (4) C3-3 (4) C3-3 (7) C3-3 (7) C3-3 (7) C3-3 (8) C4-4 (1) C4-4 (1) C4-4 (1) C4-4 (2� C4-4 (2) C4-4 (3) C4-4 (4) C5-5 (1) C5-5 (1) C5-5 (2) C5-5 (2) C5-5 (3) C5-5 (3) C5-5 (3) C5-5 (4) C5-5 (5) C5-5 (5) C5-5 (5) C5-5 (6) C5-5 (6) C5-5 (7) C5-5 (7) C5-5 (8) C5-5 (8) C5-5 (9) Table of Contents PAGE 2 � � C' I�� lil L�1 L*9 l�� L�!1 LJ lJ 1�1 � �� C6-6 C6-6.1 C6-6.2 C6-6.3 C6-6.4 C6-6.5 C6-6.6 C6-6.7 C6-6.8 C6-6.9 C6-6.10 C6.6.11 C6-6.12 C6-6.13 C6-6.14 C6-6.15 C6-6.1.6 C6-6.17 C6-6.18 C6-6.19 C6-6.20 C6-6.21 C7-7 C7-7.1 C7-7.2 C7-7.3 C7-7,4 C7-7.5 C7-7.6 C7-7J C7-7.8 C7-7.9 C7-7.10 C7-7.11 C7-7.12 C7-7.13 C7-7.14 C7-7.15 C7-7.16 C7-7.17 LEGAL RELATIONS AND PUBLIC RESPONSIBILITY Laws to be Observed Permits and Licenses . Patented Devices, Materials, and Processes Sanitary Provisions Public Safety and Convenience Privileges of Contractor in Streets, Alleys, and Right-of-Way Railway Crossings Barricades, Warnings and Flagmen Use of Explosives, Drop Weight, Etc. Work Within Easements Independent Contractor Contractor's Responsibility for Damage Claims Contractor's Claim for Damages Adjustment or Relocation of Public lJtilities, Etc. Temporary Sewer and Drain Connections Arrangement and Charges for Water Furnished by the City Use of a Section or Portion of the Work Contractor's Responsibiliry for the Work, No Waiver of Legal Rights Personal Liability of Public Officials State Sales Tax PROSECIJTION AND PROGRESS Subletting Assignment of Contract Prosecution of The Work Limitation of Operations Character of Workmen and Equipment Work Schedule Time of Commencement and Completion Extension of Time Completion Delays , Time of Completion Suspension by Court Order Temporary Suspension � Termination of Contract due to National Emergency Suspension or Abandonment of the Work and Annulmeht of the Contract: Fulfillment of Contract Termination for Convenience of the Owrier ' Safety Methods and Practices 1333018 - South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements C6-6 (1) C6-6 (1) C6-6 (1) C6-6 (2) C6-6 (2) C6-6 (3) C6-6 (4) C6-6 (4) C6-6 (4) C6-6 (5) C6-6 (6) C6-6 (8) C6-6 (10) C6-6 (10) C6-6 (10) C6-6 (11) C6-6 (11) C6-6 (11) C6-6 (12) C6-6 (12) C6-6 (12) C7-7 (1) C7-7 (1) C�-� (� ) C7-7 (2) C7-7 (2) C7-7 (3) C7-7 (4) C7-7 (4) C7-7 (4) C7-7 (5) C7-7 (6) C7-7 (6) C7 7 (7) C7-7 (7) C7-7 (9) C7-7 (10) C7-7 (13) Table of Contents PAGE 3 L�A �� [!I PART C - GENERAL CONDITIONS C1-1 DEFINITIONS SECTION C1-1 DEFINITIONS � C1-1.1 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS: Whenever in these Contract Documents the following terms or pronouns in place of them are used, the intent and meaning shall be understood and interpreted as follows: � � {J C1-12 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Contract Documents are in all of the written and drawn documents, such as specifications, bonds, addenda, plans, etc., which govern the terms and performance of the contract. These are contained on the General Contract Documents and the Special Contract Documents. a. GENERAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The General Contract Documen'ts govern all Water Department Projects and Include the following Items PART A- NOTICE TO BIDD,ERS PART B - PROPOSAL PART C - GENERAL CONDITIONS � � � � � � s � � �� [�� PART.D - SPECIAL CONDITIONS PART E - SPECIFICATIONS PERMITS/EASEMENTS PART F - BONDS� PART G - CONTRACT (Sample) (Sample) (CITY) (Developer) (Sample) (Sample) White White Canary Yellow Brown Green E1-White E2-Golden Rod E2A-White Blue White White b. SPECIAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Special Contract Documents are prepared for each specific project as a supplement to the General Contract Documents and include.the following i��ms: PART A- NOTICE TO BIDDERS (Advertisement) same as above PART B - PROPOSAL (Bid) PART C - GENERAL CONDITIONS PART D - SPECIAL CONDITIONS ' PART E - SPECIFICATIONS PERMITS/EASEMENTS PART F - BONDS PART G - CONTRACT �� PART H- PLANS (Usually bound separately} 1333018 — South Holly WTP C1-1 Definitions j'� Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAG� 1 u � '� a 15 � C1-1.3 NOTICE TO BIDDERS: All of the legal publications either actualiy published in public advertising mediums or furni�hed direct to interested parties pertaining to the work contemplated under the Contract Documents constitutes the notice to bidders. C1-1.4 PROPOSAL: The comple�ed written and signed offer or tender of a bidder to perform the work which the Owner��esires to have done, together with ttie bid security, constitutes the Proposal, which be omes binding upon the Bidder when it i$ officially received by the Owner, has been pub icly opened and read and not rejected by the Owner. C1-1.5 BIDDER: Any person;j persons; firm, partnership, company, association, corporatie�n, acting directly or through a duly authorized representative, submitting a proposal for performing the work contemplated under the Contract Documents, constitutes a bidder. : C1-1.6 GENERAL CONDITIONS: The General Conditions are the usual construction and contract requirements which govern thewperformance of the work so that it will be carried on in accordance with the customary procedure, the local statutes, and requirements of the City of Fort Worth's charter and promulgat�ed ordinances. . n9 Whenever there may be a conflic�� between -the General Conditions and the Special Conditions, the latter shall take prece�ence.. Y ,! C1-1.7 SPECIAL CONDITIONS: Special conditions are the specific requirements which are necessary for the particular pr��,1'ect covered by the Contract Documents and not specifically covered in the Generaf Conditions. When considered with the General Conditions and other elements of tFie Contract Documents they provide the information which the Contractor and Owner shoujd have in order to gain a thorough knowledge of the project. . � C1-1.8 SPECIFICATIONS: The Specifications is that section or part of the Contract Documents which set forth� in detail the requirements which must be met by all materials, construction, workmanship, equipment�nd services in order to render a completed an useful project. Whenever reference is made�Fto standard specificatibns, regulations, requirements, statutes, etc., such referred to documents shall become a part of the Contract Documents just as though they were embodied the�ein. C1-1.9 BONDS: The bond or bonds "are the written guarantee or security furnished by the Contractor for prompt and faithful perfor�nance of the contract and include the following: �� a. Performance Bond (se��paragraph C3-3.7) b. Payment Bond (see par�graph C3-3.7) c. Maintenance Bond (see paragraph C3-3.7) d. Proposal or Bid Securitjr (see Special Instructions to Bidders, Part A and C2-2.6) �' � b o� 1333018 — South Holly WTP � &� Coagulant Feed System Improvements ° � C1-1 Definitions PAGE 2 '� L'�1 L"'J � l�J � f�] *] � ,� L'!J � �J LwJ �' �+ 'l.�' � a O C1-1.10 CONTRACT: The �Contract is a formal signed agreement between the owner and the Contractor covering the mutual urlderstanding of the two contracting parties about the project to be completed under the Contract Documents. C1-1.11 PLANS: The plans are the drawings or reproductions therefrom made by the Owner's representative showing in detail the location, dimension and position of the various elements of the project, including such profiles, typical cross-sections, layout diagrams, working drawings, preliminary drawings and such supplemental drawings as the Owner may issue to clarify other drawings or for the purpose of showing changes in the work hereinafter authorized by the Owner. The plans are usually� bound separately from the other parts of the Contract Documents, but they are part of the Contract Documents just,as though they were bound therein. C1-1.12 CITY: The City of Fort Worth, Texas, a municipal Corporation, authorized and chartered under the Texas State Statutes, acting by and through its governing body or its City Manager, each of which is required by charter to perform specific duties. Responsibiliry for final enforcement of the Contracts involving the City of Fort Worth is by Charter vested in the City Manager. The�terms City and Owner are synonymous. C1-1.13 CITY COUNCIL: The duly elected and qualified governing body of the City of Fort Worth, Texas. . C1-1.14 MAYOR: The officially elected Mayor, or in his absence, the Mayor Pro tem of the Ciry of Fort Worth, Texas. C1-1.15 CITY MANAGER: The officially appointed and authorized City Manager of the City of Fort Worth, Texas,-or his duly authorized representative. C1-1.16 CITY ATTORNEY: The officially appointed City Attorney of th2 City of Fort Worth, Texas, or his duly authorized representative. C1-1.17 DIRECTOR OF PUBLIC WORKS: The officially appointed official of the Ciry of Fort Worth, Texas, referred to in the charter as the City Engineer, or his duly authorized representative. C1-1.18 DIRECTOR. CITY WATER DEPARTMENT: The officially appointed Directo� of the City Water Department of the City of Fort Worth, Texas, or his duly authorized representative, assistant, or agents. C1-1.19 ENGINEER: The Director of Public Works, the Director of the Fort Worth City Water Department, or their duly authorized assistants, agents, engineers, inspectots, or superintendents, acting within the scope of the�particular duties entrusted to them. C1-1.20 CONTRACTOR: The person, person's, partnership, company, firm, association, or corporation, entering into a contract with the Owner for the execution of work, acting directly or through a duly authorized representative. A sub-contractor is a person, firm, corporation, supplying labor and materials or only labor, for the work at the site mf the project. C1-1.21 SURETIES: The Corporate bodies which are� bound by such bonds as are required with and for the Contractor. The sureties engaged are ta be fully responsible for the 1333018 — South Holly WTP � C1-1 Definitions Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 3 entire and satisfactory fulfillment of.t�e Contract and for any and ail requirements as set forth in the Contract Documents and approved changes therein. n� C1-1.22 THE WORK OR PROJECT: The completed work contemplated in and covered,by the Contract Documents, including rbut not limited to the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals �ecessary to produce a completed and serviceable project. , �� C1-1.23 WORKING DAY: A wo�king day is defined as a calendar day, not �including Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays, in which weather or other c'onditions not under the control of the Contractor permit the p�rformance of the principal unit of work for a period of not less than seven (7) hours between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m., with exceptions as permitted in paragraph C7-7.6 C1-124 CALENDAR DAYS: A. c�Jendar day is any day of the week or month, no days being excepted. a C1-1.25: LEGAL HOLIDAYS: Leg�l holidays shall be observed as prescribed by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth for o6servance by Ciry employees as follows: B� 1. New Year's day "ry January 1 2. M.L. King, Jr. Birthday �� Third Monday in January 3. Memorial Day `� Last Monday in May 4. Independence Day ; July 4 '5. Labor Day �` �'lrst Monday in September 6. Thanksgiving Day �� Fourth Thursday in November 7. Thanksgiving Friday Forth Friday in November 8. Christmas Day "� December 25� 9. Such other days in lieu of�holidays as the City Council may determin�� When one of the above named holiday��s or a special holiday"is declared by the City Council, falls on a Saturday, the holiday shall b� observed on the preceding Friday, or if it falls on Sunday, it shall be observed on the ��ollowing Monday, by those employees, working on working day operations. Employees 'yvorking calendar day operations will consic�er the calendar as the holiday. Y! C1-1.26 ABBREVIATIONS: When�i�er the abbreviations defined herein appear in the Contract Documents, the intent and m�aning shall be as follows: dA AASHTQ - American Associat'lon of State MGD - Million Gallons Highway Transportatidn Officials per Day ASCE - American Society of �ivil Engineers CFS - Cubic Foot per � , Second LAW ASTM AIIVWA ASA - In Accordance With +� - American Society of T�sting Materials - American Water VUorks Association �p - American Standards Association `e Min. Mono. % R I.D. O.D. - Minimum - Monolithic - Percentum' - �Radius - Inside Diameter - Outside Diameter „�� 1333018 — South Holly WTP `a' C1-1 Definitions Coagulant Feed System Improvements i PAGE 4 � 1=J � LJ � a �� [J �ti a -�-� � ��l � � L"J � t'J l'�J 1r1 [•� � O � � �� O L�J L�:J � � C�� HI Asph. Ave. Bivd. CI CL GI Lin. Ib. MH Max. Hydraulic Institut� Asphalt Avenue Boulevard Cast Iron Center Line Galvanized Iron Linear or Lineal Pound Manhole Maximum Elev F C In. Ft. St. CY Yd. SY L. F. D.I. Elevation Fahrenheit Centigrade Inch Foot Street Cubic Yard Yard Square yard Linear Foot Ductile Iron C1-1.27 CHANGE ORDER: A"Change Order" is a written supplemental agreement between the Owner and the Contractor covering some added or deducted item or feature which may be found necessary and which was not specifically included in the scope of the project on which bids were submitted. Increase in unit quantities stated in the proposal are not the subject matter of a Change Order unless the increase or decrease is more than 25% of the amount of the particular item or items in the original proposal. All "Change Orders" shall be prepared by the City from information as necessary furnished by the Contractor. C1-1.28 PAVED STREETS AND ALLEYS: A paved street or alley shall �be defined as a street or alley having one of the following types of wearing surfaces applied over the natural unimproved surface: 1. Any type of asphaltic concrete with or without separate base material. 2. Any type of: asphalt surface treatment, not including an oiled surface, with or without separate base material. 3. Brick, with or without separate base material. 4. Coracrete, with or without separate base material. 5. Any combination of the above. C1-1.29 UNPAVED STREETS OR ALLEYS: An unpaved street, alley, roadway or other surface is any area except those defined for "Paved Streets and Alleys." C1-1.30 CITY STREET: A city street is defined as that area between the right-of-way lines as the street is dedicated. C1-1.31 ROADWAY: The roadway is defined as the area between parallel lines two (2') feet back of the curb lines or four (4') feet back of the average edge of pavement where no curb exists. , ) � C1-1.32 GRAVEL STREET: A gravel street is an unimproved street to which has been added one or more applications of gravel or similar matetial other than the natural material found on the street surface before any improvement was made. 1333018 — South Holly WTP C1-1 Definitions Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 5 L"�9 I�J L�J ls; a � ��i� I�J � SECTION C - GENERAL CONDITIONS C2-2 INTERPRETATION AND PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL SECTION C2-2 INTERPRETATION AND PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL C2-2.1 PROPOSAL FORM: The Owner will furnish bidders with Proposal form, which will contain an itemized list of the items of work to be done or materials to be furnished and upon which bid prices are requested. The Proposal form will state the Bidder's general understanding of the project to be completed, provide a space for furnishing the .amount of bid security, and state the basis for entering into a formal contract. The Owner will furnish forms for the Bidder's "Experience Record," "Equipmen,t , Schedule," and "Financial Statement,"• all of which must be properly executed and filed with the Director of the City Water Department one week qrior to the hour for openinp of'bids. The financial statement r�quired shall �Have been prepare� by an independent certified public accountant or an independent public accountant holding a valid permit issued by an appropriate state licensing agency, and shall have been so pre�ared as to reflect the current financial status. This statement must be current and no more than one (1) year old. In the case that bidding date falls within .the time a new statement is being prepared, the previous statement shall be updated by proper verification. Liquid assets in the amount� of ten (10) percent of the estimated project cost will be required. For an experience record to be considered to be acceptable for a given project, it must � reflect the experience of the firm seeking qualification in wor�C of both the same nature and magnitude as that of the project for which bids are to be received, and such experience must have been completed not more than five (5) years prior to the date on which Bids are to be � received. The Director of the Water Department shall be sole judge as to the acceptability of � experience for qualification to bid on any Fort Worth Water Department project. � � � !�"J � � � 0 The prospective bidder shall schedufe the equipment he has available for the project and state that he will rent such additional equipment as may be required to compl"ete the project on"which he submits a bid. C2-2.2 INTERPRETATION OF QUANTITIES: The quantities of work and materials to be furnished as may be listed in the proposal forms or other parts of the Contract 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements C2-2 Interpretation and Preparation of Proposal PAGE 1 6 9 �� m Documerits will be considered as approximate .only and will be used for the purpose of comparing bids on a uniform basis.'Payment will be made to the Contractor for only the actual quantities of work performec�°or materials furnished in strict accordance• with the Contract Documents and Plans. The °�uantities of work to be performed and materials to be furnished may be increased or de�reased as hereinafter provided, without in any way invalidating the unit prices bid or any other requirements of the Contract Documents. ,. C2-2.3 EXAMINATION OF CONTR�i�T DOCUMENTS AND SITE�OF PROJECT: Bidders are ad4ised that the Contract Docum�nts on file with the Owner shall constitute all of the information which the Owner will furnish. All additional information and data which the Owner will supply after promulgation �� the formal contract documents shall be issued in the form of written addenda and shall become pa►t of the Contract Documents just as though such addenda were actually written into the original Contract Documents. � Bidders are required, prior to filing ;�f proposal, to read and become familiar with the Contract Documents, to visit the site of the project and examine carefully all local conditions, to inform therriselves by their own independent research and investigations, te'sts, boring, and by such other means as may be necessary to gain a complete knowledge of �the conditions which will be encountered t�uring construction of the project. They must judge for themselves the difficulties of the worl�oand all attending circumstances affecting the cost of doin,g the work or the time required fo� its completion, andaobtain all information required to make an intelligent proposal. No infor ation given by the Owner or any representative of the Owner other than that contained in�the Contract Documents and officially promulgated addenda thereto, shall be binding upor� the Owner: Bidders shall rely exclusively and solely upon their own estimates, investigation, research, tests, explorations, and other data which are necessary for full and complete inf'ormation upon which the proposal is to be based. It is mutually agreed that°the submission �f a proposal is prima-facie evidence that the bidder has made the investigation, examinati�ns and tests herein required. Claims for additional compensation due to variations between conditions actually encountered in construction and as indicated in the Contract Documents will not be allowed. v� The logs of Soil Borings, if any, on the plans are for general information only and may not be correct. Neither the Owner nor-the Enq�neer guarantee that the data shown is representative of conditions which actually exist. '� L � +, � ta re o+ ,� . $� . � � 1333018 — South Holly WTP a� � r� Coagulant Feed System Improvements �� ! t C2-2 Interpretation and Preparation of Proposal PAGE 2 � � L'J � � � � L�I �i f� L' � � � �� L'J � LJ � � � � � � � � L�J O � � � �� C2-2.4 SUBMITTING OF PROPOSAL: The Bidder shall submit his Proposal on the form furnished by the Owner. All blank spaces applicable to the project contained�in the form shall be correctly filled in and the Bidc��c.tshall state the prices, written in ink in both words and numerals, for which he proposes to do work contemplated or furnish the materials required. All such prices shall be written legibly. In case of discrepancy between price written in words and the price written in numerals, the price most advantageous to the City shall govem. If a proposal is submitted by an individual, his or her name must be signed by him (her) or his (her) duly authorized agent. If a proposal is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member of the"firm, association, or partnership, or by person duly authorized. If a proposal is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporation name and business address must be given, and the proposal signed by an official or duly authorized agent.'The corporate seal must be affixed. Power of Attorney authorizing agents or others to sign proposal must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the proposal. C2-2.5 REJECTION OF PROPOSALS: Proposals may be rejected if they show any alteration of words or figures, additions not called for, condition�l or uncalled for alternate bids, erasures, or irregularities of any kind, or contain unbalanced v�lue of any items. Proposal tendered or delivered after the official time designated for receipt� of proposal shall be returned to the Bidder unopened. C2-2.6 BID SECURITY: No proposal will be considered unless it is accompanied by a "Prbposal Security" of the character and the amount indicated in the "Notice to Bidders" and the "Proposal." The Bid Security is required by the C�wner as evidence of good faith on the part of the Bidder, and by-way of a guaranty that if awarded the contract, the Bidder will within the required time execute a formal contract and furnish the required performance and other bonds. The bid security of the three lowest bidders will be retained until the contract is awarded or other disposition is made thereof. The bid security of all other bidders may be returned promptly after the canvass of bids. � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvem�nts C2-2 Interpretation and Preparation of Proposal PAGE 3 � .r d C2-2.7 DELIVERY OF PROPOSAL: No proposal will be considered unless it is delivered, accompanied by its proper Bid Security, to the City Manager or his representative in the official .place of business as se� forth in the "Notice to Bidders." It is the- Bidder's sole responsibil,ity to deliver tt�e propbsal at the proper time to the proper place. The mere fact that a proposal was dispatched 6wiIL not be considered. The Bidder must have the proposal actually delivered. Each proposal shall be in a sealed envelope plainly marker with the word "PROPOSAL," and the name o�- description of the project as designated in the "Notice to Bidders." The envelope shall be addressed to the City Manager, City Hall, Fort Worth, Texas. 9 � , , C2-2.8 WITHDRAWING PRbPOSALS: Proposals actually filed with. the City Manager cannot be wittrdrawn prior to the time set for- opening, proposals. A request for non- consideration must be mad�'�in writing, addressed to the City Manage`r, and filed with him prior to the time set for opening of proposals. After all proposals not requested for non- considerati�n are opened an�i publicly read aloud, the proposals for which non-consideration requests have been properly filed �, at the option of the Owner, be returned unopened. a C2-2.9 TELEGRAHIC MODIFICATIONS OF PF�OPOSAL�S: Any Bidder may modify his proposal by telegraphic �ommunication at any time prior to the time set for opening proposals, provided such telegtaphic communication is receive,d by the City Manager prior to the said proposal� opening tim"e, and provided further, thaf the City Manager is satisfied that a written and duly �uthenticated confirmation of such telegraphic communication over the signature of the bidder was� mailed prior to the proposal opening time. If such confirmation is not receiV'ed within forty-eight �48) hours after the proposal opening time, no further consideration wills�be given to the p�oposal. d C2-2.10 PUBLIC OPENING (�F PROPOSAL: Proposals which have been properly filed and for which no "No�=consideration RequesY' has been recejved will be publicly open�d and read aloud by the `City Manager or his authorized represenfative at the time and place indicated in the "Notice to Bidders." All: proposals which have been opened and read will remain on file with �he Owner until the contract has been awarded. ,Bidders. or their authorized represent�tives are invited to be present for the opening of bids. ' C2-2.11 IRREGULAR PROPOSALS: Proposals stiall be considered as "Irregular" if they show any omissions; alterations of form,nadditions, or conditions not called for, unauthorized altemate bids, or irr�gularities of any kin�: However, the Owner reserves the right to waive any all irregularities and to make the award of the contract to the best interest of the City. Tendering a propos�al after the closing hoc�r'is an irregularity which can not be waived. .# .� x �� ,R � �1333018 — $buth Holly WTP ., K� Coagulant Feed S.ystem Improvements o� � C2-2 Interpretation an Preparation of Propos I PAG 4 L�� . C2-2.12 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS: Bidders may be disqualified and their ("� proposals not considered for any of� �ut not, limited to, the following reasons: ' (,�,,! a) Reasons for believing that collusion exists among bidders. b) Reasonable grounds for believing that any bidder is interested in more than � one proposal for work contemplated. c) The bidder being interested in any litigation against the�Owner or where the Owner may have a claim against or be engaged in litigation against the �� , � � � u �, �� C� � � L] � �+ L� L1 bidder. d) The bidder being jn arreafs on any existing contract or having defaulted on a previous contract. e) The bidder having performed a prior contract in an unsatisfactory manner. f) Lack of competency as revealed by financial statement, experience statement, equipment schedule, and such inquiries as the Owner may see fit to make. g) Uncompleted work which, in the judgment of the Owner, will prevent or hinder the prompt completion of additional work if awarded. h) The bidder not filirig with the Owner, one week in advance of the hour of the opening of proposals the following: 1. Financial Statement showing the financial condition of the bidder as . specified in. Part "A" - Special Instructio s 2. A current experience record showing�especially the projects nature similar to the one under con�ideration, which have successfully completed by the Bidder. � 3. An equipment schedule showing th� equipment the bidder available for use on the project. I of a been has The Bid Proposal of the bidder who, in the judgment of the �ngineer, is disqualified under the requirements stated herein, shall be set aside and not ope�ed. i i , , i I � � . � � i � i i � i � � i i � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements C2-2 Interpretation and Preparation of Proposal PAGE 5 LJ � O L*J PART C - GENERAL CONDITIO�IS C3-3 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF DOCUMENTS SECTION C3-3 AWA�RD �1ND EXECUTION OF DOCUMENTS: C3-3.1 CONSIDERATION OF PROPOSALS: After proposals��have been opened and read � aloud, the proposals will be tabulated on the basis of the quoted prices, the quantities shown in the proposal, and the application of such formulas or other metliods of bringing items to a common basis as may be established in the Contract Documents I�J �1 � � �� The total obtained by taking the sum of the products of the unit prices quoted and the estimated quantities plus any lump sum items and such other quoted amounts as may enter into the cost of the completed project will be considered �s the amount of the bid. Until the ward of the contract is made by the Owner, the right will be reserved to reject any or all proposals and waive technicalities, to re-advertise for new proposals, or to proceed with the work in any manner as may be considered for the best inte`rest.,of the Owner. C3-3.2 MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISEM/OMEN-OWN�D BUSINESS ENTERPRISE COMPLIANCE: Contractor agrees to provide to Owner, upon request, complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed by a Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and/or a Woman-owned Business Enterprise (WBE) on the contract and the payment therefor. Contractor further agrees, upon request by the Owner; to allow and audit and/or an examination of any books, records, or files in the possession of the Contractor that will substantiate the actual work performed by an MWE or WBE. Any material misrepresentation of any nature will be grounds for termination of the contract and for initiating any action under appropriate federal, state or local laws and ordinances „relating• to false statements; further, any such �misrepresentation may be grounds for disqualification of' Contractor at Owner's discretion for bidding on future Contracts with the Owner for a period of time of not less than six (6) months. C3-3.3 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT PROVISIONS: The Contractor shall comply with Current City Ordinances prohibiting discrimination in employment practices. The Contractor shall post the required notice to that effect on the project site, and at his request, will be provided assistance by the City of Fort Worth's Equal Employment Officer who will r�fer any qualified applicant he may have on file in his office to the Contractor. Appropriate notices may be acquired from the Equal Employment�Officer. � C3-3.4 WITHDRAWAL OF PROPOSALS: After a proposal has been read by the Owner, it cannot be withdrawn by the Bidder within forty-five (45) days after the date on which the proposals were opened. � � � t#J C 3-3.5 AWARD OF CONTRACT: The Ow�er reserves the right to withhold final action on the proposals for a reasonable time, not to exceed forry-five (45) days after the date of opening proposals, and in no event will an award be made until after investigations have been made as to the responsibility of the proposed awardee. The award of the contract, if award is made, will be to the lowest and best res�onsive bidder. 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements C3-3 Award and Execution � of Documents PAGE 1 , � 0 �w The award of the contract shall not��become effective until the Owner has notified the Contractor in writing of such award. °s � C3-3.6 RETURN OF PROPOSAL SE�CURITIES: As soon as proposedyprice totals have been determined for comparison of ` bids, the Owner may, at its discretion, return the proposal security which accompanied�the proposals which,, in its judgment, would not be considered for the 'award. All other p�oposal securities, usually those of the three lowest bidders, will be retained by the Owner until the required contr,act has been executed and bond furnished or the Owner has oth2rwise disposed of the bids, after which they will be returned by the City Secretary. A � C3-3.7 BONDS: With the execu�ion Contractor shall furnish to, and file with following bonds: � .y � I� � and delivery of the ContraCt Documents, the the owner in the amounts herein required, the � a. PERFORMANCE BOND: A good and sufficient performance bond in the amount of not less tffan 100 percent of the amount of the contract, as evidenced by the proposal tabulatioc� or othen�vise, guaranteeing the full and faithful execution of the workwand performance of the contract, and for the protection of the Owner and all other persons against damage by reason of negligence of the Coh�ractor, or improper execution of the work or use of inferior materials. This performance bond shall guarantee the payment for>all labor, materials, equipment, supplies, and services used in th�e construction of the work, and shall re�main in full force and effect until provisions as above stipulated are accomplis�hed and final payment is made on>the project by the Ciry. '' L7 C. C� MAINTENANCE BONdA A good and sufficient maintenance bond, in the amount of not less9 �han 100 percent of the amount of the contract, as evidenced by the proposal tabulation or otherwise, guaranteeing the prompt, full and �faithful perforrri�ance of the general guaranty which is set forth in paragraph C8-8.1 a. ' �9 PAYMENT BOND: � A good and sufficient payment bond, in the amount of not less th�n 100 percent of the amount of the contract, as evidenced by Xhe proposal tabulation or otherwis'e; guaranteeing the prompt, full and faithful payment of all cl�imants a� defined in Article 5160, Revised Civil Statutes of Texasf 1925, as amended by House Bill 344, Acts 56`� Legislature; Regular Se'ssion, 1959, effective April.27, 1959, and/or the latest version thereof, supplying labor and materials in the prosecu�ion of the work provided for in the co�tract being constructed under these speaifications. P'ayment Bond shall remain in force until all payments as above stipulated are made. , ' � OTHER BONDS: Such other bonds as may be required b�r these Contract Documents sh°all be`furnished by the Contractor. No sureties will be accepted by the Ow�er which are at the time in default or delinquent on any bonds or which are interested in ,any litigation against the Owner. All bonds shall be made on the forms furnished by the Owner and shall be executed by an approved surety company doing business in the City ofi Fort Worth, Tex�s, and which is acceptable to the 13330j 8— South Holly WTP � C3-3 Award and Execution � � of Documents Coagulant Feed System Improvements�� PAGE 2 .a C r � � � � L+■�J � � � L�] � � L�" � �1 �' � � Owner. in order to be acceptable, the name of the surety shall be included on the current U.S. Treasury list of acceptable sureties, and the amount of bond written by any one acceptable company shall not exceed the amount shown on the Treasury list for that company. Each bond °shall be properly executed by both the Contractor and Surety Company. Should any surety on the contrac# be determined unsatisfactcry at any time by the Owner, notice will be given the Contracto,r to that effect and the Contra�,tor shall immediately provide a new surety satisfactory to the Owner. No payment will be ma�e under the contract until the new surety or sureties, as required, have qualified and have een accepted by the Owner. The contract shall not be operative nor will any payments be due or paid until approval of the bonds by the Owner. C3-3.8 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT: Within ten (10) days after the Owner has appropriate resolution, or otherwise, awarded the contract, the 'Contractor shall execute and file with the Owner, the Contract and such bonds as may be required in the Contract Documents. No Contract shall be binding upon the Owner until it has been attested by the City Secretary, approved as to form and legality by the City Attorney, and executed for the Owner by either the Mayor or City Manager. � C3-3.9 FAILURE TO EXECUTE CONTRACT: The failure of the Awardee to execute the required bond or bonds or to sign the required contract within ten (10) days after the contract is awarded shall be considered by the owner as an abandonment of his proposal, and the owner may annual the Award. By reason of the uncertainty of the market prices of material and labor, and it being impracticable and difficult to accurately determine the amount of damages occurring to the owner by reason of said awardee's failure to execute said bonds and contract within ten (10) days, the proposal security accompanying the proposal shall be the agreed amount of damages which the Owner will suffer by reason of such failure on the part of the Awardee and shall thereupon immediately by forfeited to the Owner. � The filing of a proposal will be considered as acceptance of this provision by the Bidder. C-3-3.10 BEGINNING WORK: The Contractor shall not commence work until authorized in writing to do so by the Owner. Should the Contractor fail to commence work at the site of the project within the time stipulated in the written authorization usually termed "Work Order" or "Proceed Order", it is agreed that the Surety Company will, within ten (10) days after the commencement date set forth` in such written authorization, commence the physical execution of the contract. C3-3.11 INSURANCE: The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has.obtained all insurance required under the Contract Documents, and such insurance has been approved by the Owner. The prime Contractor shall be.responsible for delivering to the Owner the sqb-contractor's certificate of insurance for approval. The prime Contractor shall indicate on the cer�ificate of insurance included in the documents for execution whether or not his insurance covers sub-contractors. It is the intention of the Owner that the insurance coverage required herein shall include the coverage of all sub-contractors. 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements� C3-3 Award and Execution of Documents PAGE 3 . a. COMPENSATION INSURANCE: The Contractor shall rimaintain, during the life of this contract, Worker's Compensation Insurance on all of his employees to be enga�ed in work on the project under this contract, and for all sub-contractors. Ir� case any class of employees engaged in hazardous work on the project under this contract is not protected under the Worker's Compensation Statute, the Contractor shali provide adequate empioyer's general liabiliry insura�ce for the protection of such of his employees not so protected. ;„ w � 'Q b. COMPREHENSIVE GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE: The Contractor Shall procure and ,"shall maintain during the life of this contract, Comptehensive General Liability `lnsurance (Public Liability and. Prope,rty Dam�ge Insurance) in„ the amount not less than $500,000 covering each occurrence on account of bodily injury, including death, and in an amount not less than $500,000 covering each occurrence on account of property damage with $2,000,0�0 umbrella policy coverage. c. ADDITIONAL LIABILIY�f: The Contractor shall furnish insurance as a separate �policies or �by additional endorsement to one of the above- mentioned policies, atld in the amount as set forth for public liability and property damage, the following insurance: 2. 3. 4. 5. ea � Contingent Liability (covers General Contractor's Liability for acts of sub-contractors�. b Blasting, prior to any blasting being done. «� Collapse of b�uildings or structures adjacent to excavation �if excavation are berformed adiacent to samel. � Damage to underground utilities for $500,000. Builder's risk (where above-qround structures are involvedl. 6. Contractual Liability (covers all indemnification requirements of Contract). ,d d. AUTOMOBILE INSURANCE - BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE: The Contractor shall procure and maintain during the' life of this Contract, Comprehensi�e Automobile Liability �Insurance in an amount not less than $250,000 for Snjuries including accidental death to any one person and subject to the same limit for each person an amount not less than $500,000 on account of one accident, :and automobile property damage insurance in an amount,�ot less than $100,000. � e. SCOPE OF INSURANGE AND SPECIAL HAZARD: The insurance required under the above paragraphs shall provide adequate protection for the Contractor and his sub,-contractors, respectively, against damage cfaims which may arise from operations under this contract, whether such operations be by the insured or by anyone directly or indirectly emplo�red by e'' 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements � d 4 e C3-3 A,ward and Execution of Documents PAGE 4 �� l�] � Ln"J �� L�1 L�!': I� '� � .� L�J � � L�J �,:. him, and also agaiii�t any of the following special hazards which may be encountered in the performance of the Contract. PROOF OF CARRIAGE OF INSURANCE: The Contractor shall furnish the owner with satisfactory proof of coverage by insurance required in these Contract Documents in the amounts and by carriers satisfactory to the Owner. (Sample attached.) All insurance requirements made upon the Contractor shall apply to the sub-contractors, should the Prime Contractor's insurance not cover the sub-contractor's work operations. g. LOCAL AGENT FOR �INSURANCE AND BONDING: The insurance and bonding companies with whom the Contractor's insurance and performance, payment, maintenance and �II such other bonds are written, shall be represented by an agent or agents having an office located within the city limits of the City of Fort Worth. Tarrant County, Texas. Each such agent shall be a duly qualified, one upon whom authority and power to act on behalf of the insurance and/or bonding company to negotiate and settle with the City of Fort Worth, or any other claimant, and claims that the City of Fort Worth or otheK claimant or any property owner who has been damaged, may have against the Contractor, insurance, and/or bonding company. If the local insWrance representative is not so empowered by the insurance or bonding �companies, then such authority must be vested in a local agent or claims officer'residing in the Metroplex, the Fort Worth-Dallas area. The name of the agent, or agents shall be set forth on all such bonds and certificates of insurance. ' C3-3.12 CONTRACTOR'S OBLIGATIONS: Under the Contract, the Contractor shall pay for all materials, labor and services when due. � C3-3.13 WEEKLY PAYROLLS: A certified copy of each payroll covering payment of wages to all persons engaged in work on the project at the site of the project shall be furnished to the Owner's representative�within seven (7) days after the close of each payroll period. A copy or copies of�the applicable minimum wage rates as set forth in the Contract Documents shall be kept posted in a conspic,uous place at theysite of the project atall times during the course of the Contract. Copies of the wage rates will be furnished the Contractor, by the Owner; however, posting and protection of the wage rates shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. C3-3.14 CONTRACTOR'S CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION: �Any Contractor, whether a person, persons, partnership, company, firm, association, corporation or other who is approved to do business with and enters into a contract with the City for construction of water and/or sanitary sewer facilities, will have or shall establish a fully operational business office within the Fort Worth-Dallas metropolitan area. The Contractor shall charge, delegate, or assign this office (or he may delegate his Project Superintendent) with full authority to 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements C3-3 Award and Execution of Documents PAG E 5 � transact all business actions required�in the performance of the Contract. This local authority shall be made responsible to act for the Contractor in all matters made responsible to act for the Contractor in all matters pertaining to�the work governed by the Contract whefher it be administrative or other wise and as si�ch shall be empowered, thus delegated and directed, to s�ttle all material, labor or other expenditure, all claims against work or any other mater associated such as maintaining adequate and appropriate insurance or security coverage for the project. Such local authority �for the administration of the� work under the Contract shall be maintained until all busines�s transac#ions executed as part of the Contract are complete. � N Should the Contractor's principat base of operations be other than in the Fort Worth-Dallas metropolitan area, notification of the Contractor's assignment of local authority shall be made in writing to the Engineer in advance of any work on the project, all appropriately signed, and sealed, as applicable„.; by the Contractor's responsible offices with the understanding that this written assignment of authoriry to the local representative shall become part of the project Contract as though bound directly into the �project documents. The intent of these requirements i'"s that all matters associated with the Contractor's administration, whether it be oriented;in furthering the work, or other, be governed direct by local authority. This same requiremsnt is imposed on insurance �and' surety coverage. Shoultl the Contractor's local repre5entative fail to perform to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the Engineer, at his sole di�,cretion, may demand that such local representative be replaced and the Engineer may, at his sole discretion, stop all work until a new local authority satisfactory to the Engineer is assigned. No credit of working time will be allowed for periods in which work stoppages are in effect for this reason. ft C3-3.15 VENUE: Venue of any �ction hereinunder shall be exclusively in Tarrant County, Texas. , a M$ .� a d� r "k � � b� e� .� � �� A 1333018 — South Holly WTP a� C3-3 Award and Execution �� of Documents Coagulant Feed System Improvements °q PAGE 6 O \"'� O O � L!J i� � �� f� �I � � � PART C - GENERAL CONDITIONS C4-4 SCOPE OF WORK SECTION C4-4 SCOPE OF WORK C4-4.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: it is the definite intention of these Contract Documents to provide for a complete, useful project which the Contractor undertakes to construct or furnish, all in full compliance with the requirements and intent of the Contract Documents. It is definitely understood that the Contractor shall tlo all work as provided for in the Contract Documents, shall do all extra or special work as may be considered by the Owner as necessary to complete the project in a satisfactory and acceptable manner. The Contractor shall, unless otherwise specifically stated in these Contract Documents, furnish all labor, tools, materials, machinery, equipment, special services, and incidentals necessary to the prosecution and completion of the project. C4-4.2 SPECIAL PROVISIONS: Sliould any work or conditions which are not thoroughly and satisfactorily stipulated or cov�ered by General or Special Conditions of these Contract Documents be anticipated, or shoul� there be any additional proposed work which is not covered by these Contract Documents,�the "Special Provisions" covering all such work will be prepared by the Owner previous to �he time of receiving bids or. proposals for any such work and furnished to the Bidder in the form of Addenda. All such "Special Provisions" shall be considered to be part of the Contrac Documents just as though they were originally written therein. C4-4.3 INCREASED OR DECREASED QU�NTITIES: The Owner reserves the right to alter the quantities of the work to be performed or to extend or shorten the improvements at any time when and as found to be neces ary, and the Contractor shall perform the work as altered, increased or decreased at the u it prices. Such increased or decreased quantity shall not be more than twenty-five (25) perc nt of the contemplated quantity of such item or items. When such changes increase or decr ase the original quantity of any item or items of work to be done or materials to be furnishe�by the 25 percent or more, then eifher parry to the contr�ct shall upon written request �4o the other party be entitled to a revised consideration upon that portion of the wor above or below the 25 percent of the original quantity stated in the proposal; such revi ed consideration to be determined by special agreement or as hereinafter provided for " xtra Work." No allowance will be made for any changes in anticipated profits not shall such changes be considered as waiving or invalidating any conditions or provisions�of t�ie Contract Documents. Variations in quantities of sanitary sewer ipes in depth categories, shall be interpreted herein as applying to overall quantities of ,anitary sewer pipe in each pipe size, bu� not to the various depth categories. � 133301� — South Holly WTP C4-4 - Scope of Work � Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 1 .� C4-4.4 ALTERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: Bq Change order, the owner reserves the right to make �uch changes in the Contract Documents and in the character or quantities of the work as'may be-necessary or desirable to insure completion in the most satisfactory manner„ provi�ed such changes do not materially alter the original Contract Documents or change the �eneral nature of the project as a whole. Such changes shall not be considered as waiving or� invalidating any condition or provision of the Contract Documents. �+ � C4-4.5 EXTRA WORK: Additio;hal work made necessary by changes and alterations of the Contract D,ocuments or of q��ntities or for other reasons for which no prices are provided in the Contract Documen,t�s, shall be defined as "Extra Work" and shall be performed by the Contractor in accordance with these Contract Documents or approved additions thereto; provided� however, °that before any extra work is begun a"Change orde�' shall be executed' or written ord'er i��sued by the Owner to do the work for payments or credits as shall bQ determin�d by onewor more combination of the following rriethods: � a. Unit bid price previously approved. b. An �greed lump sum.'� � f c. The actual reasonable�cost of (1) labor, (2) rental of equipment used on the extra work. for the ti�ne so used at Associated General Contractors of America current equip�rnent rental rates, (3) materials entering permanently,. into the project, and (4) actual cost of insurance, bonds, and social security as determined by the ewner, plus a fixed fee to be agreed upon but not to exceed 10 percent of tl�e a�tual cost.of such extra work. The fixed fee �is not to „include any additidnal profit to the Contractor for rental of equipment owner by� him and use�l for extra work. The fee shall be full and complete compensation to cover=the cost of superintendence, overhead, other profit, general"and all other ex�ense not included in (1), (2), (3), and (4) above�. The Contractor shall keep �ccurate cost records on the form and�in the method s,uggested by the Owner and shall give the Owner acc�ss to all accounts, bills, vouchers, and records relating to the Extra Work. .� ,� No "Change Order" shall become effective� until it has been approved and signed by each of the Contracting Parties. Q No claim for Extra Work of any kind wil� be allowed unless ordered in writing by the bwner. In case any orders or instructions, eitf��r oral or written, appear to tfie Contractor to involve Extra Work for"which he should receiv� compensation, he shall make writtert request to the Engineer for �ivritten orders authorizing �uch Extra Work, prior to beginning such work. a Should a difference arise as to what ��es or dose not constitute Extra Work, or as to the payment thereof, and the Engineer i�sists upon its performance, the �ontractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written orders and shall keep accurate account of the actual reasonable cost tl��reof as provided under method (Item C). Claims for extra work will not be paid unless the a�ontractor shall file his claim with the Owner within five (5) days before the time for making�the first estimate after such wor"k is done and unless the claim is supported by satisfactory vguchers and certified payrolls covering all labor and materials expended upon said Extra Wq�k. s i�333018 — South Holly WTP = • C4-4 - Scope of Work Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 2 LsJ ►�I �. ..-�, `�� ' The Contractor shall furnish the Owner such installation records of all deviations from the original Contract Documents as may be necessary to enable the Owner to prepare for permanent record a corrected set o>f,.pla�s showing the actual installation. � The compensation agreed upon for "Extra Work" whether or not initiated by a"Change Order" shall be a full, complete and final payment for all costs Contractor incurs as a result or relating to the change or extra work, .whether said costs are known, unknown, foreseen or unforeseen at that time, including without limitation, any costs for delay, extended overhead, ripple or impact cost, or any other eff�ct on changed or unchanged work as a result of the change or extra work. C4-4.6 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION: Before commencing any work under this � contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner and receive the Owner's approval thereof, a"Schedule of Operations," showing by a straight line method the date of commencing and finishing each of the major elements of the Contract. There shall be also shown� the J� estimated monthly cost of work for which estimates are to be expected. There shall be �•� presented also a composite graph showing the anticipated progress of construction with the time being plotted horizontally and percentage of completion plotted vertically. The progress � charts shall be prepared on 8-1/2" x 11" sheets and at least five black or blue line prints shall be furnished to the Owner. �s.' � � � �*�J � t�J � C4-4.7 PROGRESS SCHEDULES FOR WATER AND SEWER PLANT FACILITIES: Within ten (10) days prior to submission of the first monthly progress payment, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to�the owner for approval six copies of the schedule in which the Contractor proposes to carry on activities (including procurement of materials, plans, and equipment) and the contemplatezi dates for completing the same. The schedule shall be in the form of a time schedule Critical Path Method (CPM) nefinrork diagram. As the work progresses, the Contractor shall enter on the diagram the actual progress at the end of each partial payment period or�at such intervals as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall also revise the schedule to reflect any adjustments in contract time approved by the Engineer. Three copies of the updated schedule shall be delivered at such intervals as directed by the Engineer. . As a minimum, the construction schedule shall incorporate all work elements and activities � indicated in the proposal and in the technical specifications. � Prior to the final drafting of the detailed construction schedule, the Contractor shall review the draft schedule with the Engineer to ensure the Contractor's understanding of the contract requirements. The following guidelines shall be adhered to in preparing the construction schedule: a. Mi�estone dates and final proje,ct completion dates shall be developed to conform to the time constraints, sequencing requirements and completion time. b. The construction progress shall be divided into activities with time durations � of approximately fourteen days (14) days and construction values not to exceed $50,000. Fabrication, delivery and submittal activities are exceptions to this guideline. � 1333018 — South Holly WTP C4-4 - Scope of Work � Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 3 . E C. Durations shall be in calendar days and normal holidays and weather conditiohs over the duration of the contract shall; be accounted for within the duration of each activit�y. , d. One critical path shall�be shown on the construction schedule. � e; Float time is defined ��s the amount of time between the earliest start date and th'e latest start �iate of a chain of activities of the CPM construction schedule. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or the Owner. � f. Thirty days shall be used for submittal review unless otherwise specified. The construction schedule shall a�� a minimum be divided into general categories as indicated in the Proposal and Technical Specifications and each general category shall be broken down into activities in enough„ detail to achieve activities of approximately fourteen (14) days duration. ;„ , For each general category, the construction schedule shall ide�tify`all trades or subcontracts whose wo�k is represented by activiti�s that follow the guidelines of this Section. For each of the trades or subcontracts� the construction schedule shall indiaate the follawing procurements, construction and preacceptance activities and events in their logical sequence for equipment and materials: .� s 1, Preparation and transmittal of submittals 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Submittal review periods. Shop fabrication and d�livery. Erection or installation �� Transmittal of manufact�rer's operation and maintenance instructions. p Installed equipment and materials testing. . ;� Owner's operator instruction (if applicable). Final inspection. .9. Operational testing. "$ K If, in the opinion of the Owner, work accomplished falls behind that scheduled, the Contractor shall take such action as necessary to improve his progress. In addition, the Owner may require the Contractor to submit a revised schedule demonstrating his program and proposed plan to make up lag in'scheduled progress and to insure completion of the work within the contract time. If the owher finds the proposed plan not acceptable, he may require the Contractor to increase the �ivork force, the construction plant"and equipment, the number of work shifts or overtime operations without additional cost to the Owner. 1333018 — South Holly WTP "� C4-4 - Scope of Work Coagulant Feed System Improvements� � PAGE 4 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � ;t Failure of the Contractor to comply with these requirements shall be considered grounds for determination by the Owner°that the Contractor is failing to prosecute the work with diligence as will insure its completion within the time specified. , i � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements C4-4 - Scope of Work PAGE�5 � � � I� � � � L�' J �� u l�' L1 PART C - GENERAL CONDITIONS C5-5 CONTROL OF WORK AND MATERIALS SECTION C5-5 CONTROL OF WORK AND MATERIALS C5-5.1 AUTHORITY OF ENGINEER: The work shall be performed to the satisfaction. of the Engineer and in strict compliance with the Contract Documents. The Engineer shall decide all questions which arise as to the quality and acceptabiliry of the materials furnished, work performed, .rate of progress of the work, overall sequence of the construction, interpretation of the Contract Documents, acceptable fulfillment of the Contract, compensation, mutual rights between Contractor and Owner under these Cor�tract Documents, supervision of the work, resumption of operations, and all other questions or disputes which may arise. Engineer will not be r.esponsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequence or procedures of construction, or the safety precaution and programs incident thereto, and he will not be responsible for Contracto�'s failure to perform the work in accordance with the contract documents. The Engineer shall determine the amount and quality of the work completed and materials furnished, and his decisions and estimates shall be final. His estimates in such ,event shall be�a condition to the right of the Contractor to receive money due him under the Contract. The Owner shall have executive authority to enforce and make effective such necessary decisions and orders as the Contractor fails to carry out promptly. In the event of any dispute between the Engineer and Contractor over the decision of the Engineer on any such matters, the Engineer must, within a reasonable time, upon written request of the Contractor, render and deliver to both the owner and Contractor, a written decision on the matter in'controversy. C5-5.2 CONFORMITY WITH PLANS:The finished project in all cases shall conform with lines, grades, cross-sections, finish, and dimensions shown�,on the plans or any other requirements other wise described in the Contract Documents. Any deviation from the approved Contract Documents required by the Engineer during construction will in all cases be determined by the Engineer and authorized by the Owner by Change Order. C5-5.3 COORDINAkTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Contract Documents are made up of several sections, which, taken together, are intended to describe and provide for a complete and useful project, and any requirements appearing in one of the sections is as binding as though it occurred in all sections. In case of discrepancies, figured dimension shall govern over scaled dimensions, plans shall govern over specifications, special conditions shall gove,rn over general eonditions and standard specification, and quantities shown on the plans shall govern over those shown in the �proposal. The Contractor shall not take advantage of any apparent error or omission in the Contract Documents, and the owner shall be permitted to make such corrections or interpretations as may be deemed necessary for fulfillment of the intent of the Contract Documents. In the Cevent the Contractor discovers an apparent error or discrepancy, he shall immediately call t�is condition to the attention of the Engineer. In the event of a conflict in drawings, specifir�ations, or other portions of the Contract Documents which were not reported prior t9 the award of Contract, the Contractor shall be deemed to have quoted the most expensive resoluti In of the conflict. 1333018 — South Holly WTP � C5-5 Control of Work and Materials Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 1 C5-5.4 COOPERATION OF CONTR�CTOR: The Contractor wiil be furnished with three sets of Contract Documents and shall have available on the site of the project at all times, one set of such Contract Documents�� , . �� The Contractor shall give to the �rork the constant attention necessary to facilitate the progress thereof and shall cooperate with the Engineer, �iis inspector, and other Contractors in every possible way. The Contractor shall at all times hav� competent personnel available to the project site for proper performance of the work. The �ontractor shall provide and maintain at all times at the site of the project a competent, English-speaking superintendent and an assistant who are fully authorized to act as the Contractor's agent on the work. Such superintendent and his assistant shall be capable of reading0and understanding the Contract Documents and shall receive and fulfill instructions frQm the Owner, the Engineer, or his authorized representatives. Pursuant to this r8sponsibility of the Contractor,., the Contractor shall designate in writing to the project s�perintendent, to act as the Contractor's �agent on the wor"k. Such. assistant project superin, endent shall be a resident of Tarrant County, Texas, and shall be subject to call, as is the�roject superintendenf, at any time of the day or night on any day of the week on which the Engineer determines that circumstances require the presence on the project site of a rep�esentative of the Contractor to adequately provide for the safety o� convenience� of the traveling public or the owners of property across which the project extends or the safery of the property contiguous to the project routing. The Contractor shall provide all fa��lities` to enable the Engineer and his inspector to examine and inspect the workmanship and rrtaterials entering into the worR. aa C5-5.5 `EMERGENCY AND/OR REC�IFICATION WORK: When, in the opinion of the Owner or Engineer, a condition of emergency exists related to any part of tMe work, the Contractor, or the Contractor through his designated representative, shall respond with dispatch to a verbal request made bjr the Owner or Engineer to. alleviate the emergency condition. Such a response shall occur day or night, whether the project is scheduled on a calendar-day or an wor�cing-day basis. �., Should ttie Contractor fail to respo�id to a request from the Engineer to rectify any discrepancies; omissions, or correctio�t, necessary to conform with the requirements of the project specifications or plans, the Engineer shall give the Contractor written, notice that such work or changes are to be performed. The written notice shall d�rect attention to the discrepant condition and request the Contractor to take remedial action to correct ttie condition. In the event the Contractor does not take positive steps to fulfill this written request, or does not shoe just cause f�r not taking the proper action, within 24 hours, the City may take'such remedial action wit� City forces or by contract. Th�e Ciry shall deduct an amount equal to the entire costs for suC,� remedial actiori, plus 25%, from any funds due the Contractor on the project. � C5-5.6 FIELD OFFICE: The Contractor shall provide, at no extra compensation, an adequate field office far use of the Engir�eer, if specifically called for. The field office shall be not less than 10 x 14 feet in floot m area, substantially constructed, well heafed, air conditioned, lighted, and weather proof, so that documents will not be damaged by the elements. 1333018 — South Holly WTP C5-5 Control of Work and'Materials Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 2 � C"'J � � L�J f� [�' � � #, � � �] � � F ;- 05-5.7 CONTRUCTION STAKES: The City, through its �Engineer, will furnish the Contractor with all lines, grades, and measurements necessary to the proper prosecution and control of the work contracted under these Contract Documents, and lines, grades and measurements will be established by means of stakes or other customary method of marking as may be found consistent with good practice. These stakes or markings shall be set sufficiently in advance of construction operations to avoid� delay. Such stakes or markings as may be established for Contractor's use or guidance shall be preserved by the Contractor until he is authorized by the Engineer to remove them. Whenever, in the opinion of the Engineer, any stakes or markings have been carelessly or willfully destroyed, disturbed, or removed by the Contractor or any of his employees, the full cost of replacing such stakes or marks plus 25% will be charged against the Contractor, and the full amount will be deducted from payment due the Contractor. C5-5.8 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF CITY INSPECTOR: Ciry Inspectors will be authorized to inspect all work done and to be done and all materials furnished. Such inspection may extend to all or any part of the work, and the preparation or manufacturing of the materials to be used or equipment to be installed. A�Cit}� Inspector may be stationed on the work to report to the Engineer as to the progress of the work and the manner in,which it is being performed, to report any evidence that the materials being furnished or the work being performed by the Contractor fails to fulfill the requirements of the Contract Documents, and to call the attention of the Contractor to any such failure or other infringements. Such inspection or lack of inspection will not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. In case of any dispute arising between the Contractor and the City Inspector as to the materials or equipment furnished or the manner of performing the work, the City Inspector will have the authoriry to reject materials or equipment, and/or to suspend work until the question at issue can be referred to and decided by the Engineer. The Ciry Inspector will not, however, be authorized to revoke, alter, enlarge, or release ,any requirement of these Contract Documents, nor to approve or accept any portion or section of the work, nor to issue any instructions contrary tot he requirement s of the Contract Documents. The City Inspector will in no case act as superintendent or foreman or perform any other duties for the Contractor, or interfere with the management or operation of the work. He will not accept from the Contractor any compensation in any form for performing any duties. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of the City Inspector or Engineer when the same are consistent with the obligations c�f the Contract Documents of the Contract Documents, provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders or instructions or the City Inspector, the Contractor may within six days make written appeal to the Engineer for his decision on the matter in Controversy. C5-5.9 INSPECTION: The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with every reasonable � faciliry for ascertaining whether or not the work as performed is in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. If the Engineer so �requests, the Contractor shall, at any time before acceptance of the work, remove or uncover such portion of the finished (� work as may be directed. After examination, the Contractor shall restore said portions of the �„�l work to the standard required by the Contract Documents. u � � Should the work exposed or examined prove acceptable, the uncovering or removing and replacing of the covering or making good of the parts removed shall be paid for as extra work, but should Work so exposed or examined prove to be unacceptable, the uncovering or removing and reptacing of all adjacent defective or 'damaged parts shall be at the 1333018 — South Holly WTP� C5-5 Control of Work and Materials Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 3 � �b Contractor's expense. No worli shallAbe done or materials used without suitable supervision or inspection. C5-5.10 REMOVAL OF DEFEGTIV� AND UNAUTHORIZED WORK: All work, materials, or equipment which has been rejected shall be remedied or removed and replaced in an acceptable manner by the Contract�r at this expense. Work done beyond the lines and grades given or as shown on the plans, except as herein specially provided, or any Extra Work done without writtert' authoriry; "will be considered as unauthorized and done at the expense of the Contractor and" will not be paid for by the Owner. Work so done may be ordered removed at the Contractor's expense. Upon the failure on the part of the Contractor to �omply with any order of the Engii�eer made under the provisions of this paragraph, the Engineer will have the authority to �ause defective work to be remedied or removed and replaced and unauthorized work to beo removed, anci the cost thereof may be deducted from any money due or to become due to� he Contractor. Failure to require the removal of any defective or unauthorized work shall not�constitute acceptance of such work. � a. C5-5.11 SUBSTITUTE MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT: If the Specifications, law, ordinance, codes or regulations permit Contractor to furnish or use a substitute that is equal to any material'or equipment specified� and if Contractor wishes to furnish or use a proposed substitute, he shall, prior to the pre�onstruction conference, make written application to ENGINEER for approval of such substitute certifying in writing that the proposed substitute will perform adequately the function �alled for by the general design, be similar and of equal substance to that specified and be suited to the same use and capable of performing the same function as that specified ; and identifying all variations of the proposed substitute from that specified and. indicating available �maintenance service. No substitute shall be ordered or installed without written approval o� Engineer" who will be the judge of the equality and may require Contractor to furnish such other data about the proposed substitute as� he considers pertir�ent. No substitute sh�ll be ordered or installed without such performance guarantee and bonds as Or�vner may require which shall be furnished at Contractor's expense. Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer and„ anyone directly or indirectly employees by either of them from and against the ctaims, damages, losses and expenses (including attorneys fees) arising out of the use of substituted materials or equipment. � � C5-5.12 SAMPLES AND TESTS OF (VI�ATERIALS: Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, or as called for in the Contract Docum�nts, tests of materials or equipment are necessary, such tests will be made at the expense of and paid for direct to th,e testing agency by the Owner unless other wise specifically provided. The failure of the Owner to make any tests of materials shall in no way relieve the contractor of his responsibility of furnishing materials and equipment fully conforming to the Fequirements of the Contract Documents. Tests and sampling of materials, unless otherwise specified, will be made in accordance with the latest methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing ,Materials or specific requirements of the Owner. The Contractor shall provide such facilities as the Engineer may require for collecting and forwarding samples and shall not, without specific written permission of the Engineer, use materials represented b�r the samples until tests have been made and the materials approved for use. The Contractor will furnisli adequate samples without charge to the Owner. ' In case of concrete, the,aggregates, ;design minimum, and the mixing and transporting equipment shall be approved by the Engineer before any concrete is placed, and the Contracto� shall be responsible for replacing any concrete which does not meet �the 1333018 — South Holly WTP C5-5 Control of Work and Materials Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 4 � � C+�J L�' � � � L�] L�� requirements of the Contract Documents. Tests shall be made at least 9 days prior to the placing of concrete, using sample��from the same aggregate, cement, and mortar which are � . ,; to be used later in the concrete. Sttould the source of supply change, new tests shall be made prior to the use of new materials. C5-5.13 STORAGE OF MATERIALS: All materials which are to be used in the construction contract shall be stored so as to insure the preservation of qualiry and fitness,of the work. When directed by the Engineer, they shall be placed on wooden � platforrris or other hard, clean durable surfaces and not on the ground, and� shall be placed under cover when directed. Stored materials shall be placed and located so as to facilitate prompt inspection. C5-5.14 EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES: The location and dimensions shown on the plans relative to the existing utilities are based on the best information available. Omission from, the inclusion of utility locations on the Plans is not to be considered. as nonexistence of, or a definite location of, existing underground utilities. The location of many gas mains, water mains, conduits, sewer lines and service lines for all utilities, etc., is unknown to the Owner, and the Owner assumes no responsibility for failure to show any or .all such stru�tures and utilities on the plans or to show them in their exact IoCation. It is mutually agreed that such failure will not be considered sufficient basis for claims 'for additional compensation for Extra Work or for increasing the pay quantities in any manner whatsoever, unless an obstruction encountered is such as to necessitate changes in the lines and grades of considerable magnitude or requires the building of special works, provision of which is not made in these Contract Documents, irr which case the provision in these Contract Documents for Extra Work shall apply. � It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify locations of the adjacent and/or conflicting utilities sufficiently in advance of construction in order that he may negotiate such local � adjustments as necessary in the construction process to provide adequ,ate clearances. The � Contractor shall� take all necessary precautions in order �to protect all existing utilities, structures, and service lines. Verification of existing utilities, structures, and service lines shall include notification of all utility companies at least forty eight (48) hours in advance of � construction including exploratory excavation if necess�ry. All verification of utilities and their adjustment shall be considered subsidiary work. � �� L�; C5-5.15 INTERRUPTION OF SERVICE: a. Normal Prosecution: In the normal, prosecution of work where the interruption of service is necessary, the Contractor, at least 24 hours, in advance, shall be required to: I 1. Notify the Water Department's Distribution Division as to location, time, and schedule of service interruption. 2. Notify each customer personally through responsible personnel as to „ the time and schedule of the inferruption of their seniice, or 1333018 — South Holly WTP C5-5 Control of Work and Materials � Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 5 � � �� 3. In the event ttiat personal� notificatiori of a customer cannot be made, a prepared ta� form shali be attached to the customer's door knob. The tag shall be durable in cQmposition, and in large bold letters shall 5� say: • "NOTICE" Due t� Utility Improvement in your neighborhood, your (water) •(sewer) service will be interrupted on „w betwee�n the hours of and . �� This irl�onvenience will be as short as possible. �� .ti „� Thank You, Contractor Addres� Phone b. Emeraencv: I� the �vent that an unforeseen service interruption occurs, notice shall be as above, but immediate. � C5-5.16 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY9�JF CONTRACTORS: If, through act or neglect on the part of the Contractor, or any other Contractor or any sub-contractor shall suffer loss or damage of the work, the Contractor��grees to settle with �uch other Contractor or sub- contractor by agreement or arbitration:'If such other Contractor or sub-contractor shall assert any claim against the owner on accq�nt of damage alleged to have been sustained, the owner wifl notify the Contractor, who shall indemnify and save� harmless the owner against any sucl� claim. �� ;� C5-5.17 CLEAN-UP: Clean-up of sur�lus and/or waste materials accumulated on the job site during the prosecution of the �work under these Contract Documents shall be accomplished in keeping with a daily �outine established to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Twenry-four (24) hours after written notice is given the Contractor that the clean-up on the job site is proceeding in a manner un�atisfactory to the Engineer, if the Contractor fails to correct the unsatisfactory procedure, the Ciry may take such direct action as the Engineer deems appropriate to correct the cleany up deficiencies cited to the Contractor in the written notice, and the costs of such direct action, plu� 25 % of such costs, shall be deduct�d from the monies du� or to become- due to the Contr`actor. .� Upon the completion of the projecf assa whole as covered by these Co�tract Documents, and before final acceptance and final �ayment will be made, the Contractor shall clean and remove from the 'site of the project all surplus and discarded materials, temporary structures, and debris of every kind. He shall lea�i� the site of all work in a neat and orderly condition equal to that which originally existed. Surp�us and waste materials removed from the'site of the work shall be disposed of at locatidns satisfactory to the Engineer. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and m�terials installed by him and shall deliver over such materials and equipment in a bright, clean, polished and new appearing condition. No extra compensation will�be niade to the Contractor for any clean-up required on the project. . � sa 1333018 — South Holly WTP � Goagulant Feed System Improvements � � ,! Q� C5-5 Control of Work and Materials PAGE 6 � � D � � � � � � � _ � � � � � � 1��+T Q � � �, i. C5-5.18 FINAL INSPECTION:Whenever the work provided for in and contemplated under the Contract Documents has been satisfactorily completed and final clean-up performed, the Engineer will notify the proper offic�ials of the Owner and request that a Final Inspection be made. Such inspection will be ma�e �vifhin 10 days after such notification. After such final inspection, if the work and materials and equipment are found satisfactory, the Contractor will be notified in writing of the acceptance of the same after the proper resolution has been passed by the City Council. No time charge will be made against the Contractor between said date of notification of the Engineer and the date of final inspection of the work. 0 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements C5-5 Control of Work and Materials PAG E 7 � � L+*'J � �� Li1 [� �#J � � � � � PART C - GENERAL CONDITIONS C6-6 LEGAL RELATIONS AND PUBLIC RESPONSIBILITY SECTION C6-6 LEGAL RELATIONS AND PUBLIC RESPONSIBILITY C6-6.1 LAWS TO BE OBSERVED: The Contractor shall at all times, observe and comply with all Federal and State Laws and City ordinances and regulations which in any way affect the conduct of the work or his operations, and shall observe and comply with all orders, laws, ordinances and regulations which exist or which may be enacted later by bodies having jurisdiction or authority for such enactment. No plea or misunderstanding or ignorance thereof will be considered. The Contractor and his Sureties shall indemnify and save harmless the City and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any and all claims or liability arising from or based on the violation of any such law, ordinance, regulation, or order, whether it be by himself or his employees. C6-6.2 PERMITS AND LICENSES: The Contractor shall procure all permits and licenses, pay all charges, costs and fees, and give all notices necessary and incident to the due and lawful prosecution of the work. C6-6.3 PATENTED DEVICES. MATERIALS.AND PROCESSES If the Contractor is required or desir�s to use any design, device, material, or process covered by letter, patent, or copyright, he shall provide for such use by suitable legal agreement with the patentee or owner of such patent, letter, or copyrighted design. It is mutually agreed and understood that without exception the contract price shall include all royalties or cost arising from patents, trade-marks, and copyrights in any way involved in the work. The Contractor and his sureties shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner from any and all claims for infringement by reason of the use of any such �trade-mark or copyright in connection with the work agreed to be performed un�er these Contract Documents, and shall indemnify the Owner for any cost, expense, or damage which it may be obliged to pay by reason of such infringement at any time during the prosecution of the work or after completion of the work, provided, however, that the Owner will assume the responsibility to defend any and all suits brought for the infringement of any patent claimed to be infringed upon the design, type of construction or material or. equipment specified in the Contract Documents furnished the Contractor by the Owner, and to hold the Contractor harmless on account of such suits. C6-6.4 SANITARY PROVISIONS: The Contractor shall establish and� enforce among his � employees such regulations in regard to cleanliness and disposal of garbage and waste as will tend to prevent the inception and spread of infectious or contagious diseases and to effectively prevent the creation of a nuisance about the work on any property either public or private, and such regulations as are required by Law shall be put into immediate force and � effect by the Contractor. The necessary sanitary conveniences for use of laborers on the work, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor and their use shall be strictly enforced by the Contractor. All such facilities shall �be kept in a clean and sanitary condition, free from objectionable odors so as not to cause a .. nuisance. All sanitary laws and regulations of the State of Texas and the City shall be strictly complied with. f�J � �1 C6-6.5 PUBLIC SAFETY AND CONVENIENCE: Materials or equipment stored about the work shall be placed and used, and the work �hall at all times be so conducted, as to cause no greater obstruction or inconvenience to the public than is considered to be absolutely 1333018 — South Holly WTP C6-6 Legal Relations and Public Responsibity Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 1 necessary by the Engineer. The Contractor is required to maintain at all times all phases of his work in such a manner as not to iriipair the safery or convenience of the public, including, but not limited to, safe and convenient ingress and egress to the properry contiguous tot he work area. The Contractor shall make adequate provisions to render reasonable ingress and egress for normal vehicular� traffic, except during actual trenching or pipe installation operations, at all driveway crossings: Such provisions may include bridging, placement or crushed stone or gravel or such othe�r means of providing proper ingress and egress for the property served by the driveway as the Engineer may approve as appropriate. Such other means may include the diversion of driveway traffic, with specific approval by the Engineer, If diversion of traffic is approved by t'he Engineer'at any location, the Contractor may make arrangements satisfactory to the Er%qineer for the diversion of traffic, and shall, at his expense, provide all materials and perform all. work necessary for the construction and maintenance of roadways and bridges for such diversion of traffic. Sidewalks must not be obstructed except by special permission of the Engineer. The materials excavated and the construction materials such as pipe used in construction of the work shall be placed so as not tb' endanger the work or prevent free access to all fire hydrants, fire alarm boxes, police call�boxes, water valves, gas valves, or manholes in the vicinity. The Owner reserves the right to remedy any neglect on the part of the Contractor as regards to public convenience and safety which may come to its attention, after twenty-four hours notice in writing to the Contractor, save in cases of emergency when it shall have the right to remedy any neglect without r�otice, and in either case, the cost of such work or materials furnished by the Owner or by the City shall be deducted from`the monies due or to become due to the Contractor. .° � The Contractor, after approval of �the Engineer, shall notify the Fire Department Headquarters, Traffic Engineer, and Rolice Department, when any street or alley is requested to be closed or obstructed or any fire hydrant is to be made inaccessible, and when so directed by the Engineer, shall keep any street, streets, or highways in condition fdr unobstructed use by fire apparatus. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Fire Department Headquarters when all� such obstructed streets, alleys, or hydrants are placed back in service. � Whe�e the Contractor is required °to construct temporary bridges or make other arrangements for crossing over ditches or streams, his responsibility for accidents in connection with such crossings shall include the roadway approaches as well as the structures of such crossings. „ ` The Contractor shall at all times conduct his operation and use of construction machinery so as not to damage or destroy trees and �crubs located in close proximity to or on the site of the work. Wherever any such damage may be done, the Contractor shall immediately satisfy all claims of property owners, and no p�yment will be made by the O'i►vner in settlement of such claims. The Contractor shall file wi�h the Engineer a written statement showing all such claims adjusted. C6-6.6 PRIVILEGES OF CONTRACTOR IN „STREETS. ALLEYS. AND RIGHT-OF-WAY: For the performance�of the contract, the Contractor will be permitted to use and occupy such portions of the public streets and "alleys, or other public places or other rights-of-way as provided for in the ordinances of the City, as show� in the Contract Documents, or as may be specifically authorized in writing by the �ngineer. A reasonable amount of tools, materials, and equipm�nt for construction purposes may be stored in such � 1333018�— South Holly WTP ` C6-6 Legal Relations and Public Responsibity Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 2 L+�' � � !� � L�J L�J � � � .�- , �, o ., p � space, but no more than is necessary to avoid delay in the construction operations. Excavated and waste materials shall be piled or staked in such a way as not to intertere witfi the use of spaces that may be designated to be left free and unobstructed and so as not to inconvenience occupants of adjac�rif prop8rty. If the street•is occupied by railroad tracks, the work shall be carried on in such manner as not to interfere with the operation of trains, loading or unloadin� of cars, etc. Other contractors of the Owner may, for all purposes required by the contract, enter upon the work and premises used by the Contractor and shall be provided all reasonable facilities and assistance for the completion of adjoining work. Any additional grounds desired by the Contractor for his use shall 6e provided by him at his own cost and expense. C6-6.7 RAILWAY CROSSINGS: When the work encroaches upon any right-of-way of any railroad, the City will secure the necessary easement for the work. Where the railroad tracks are to be crossed, the Contractor shall observe all the regulations and instructions of the railroad company as to the methods of performing the work and take all precautions for the safety of property and the public. Negotiations with the railway companies for the permits shall be done by and through the City. Yhe �ontractor shall give the City Notice not less than five days prior to the time of his intentions t begin work on that portion of the project which is related to the railway properties. The Contractor will not be given extra compensation for such railway crossings unless specifically set forth in the Contract Documents. C6-6.8 BARRICADES. WARNINGS AND WATCHMEN: Where the work is carried on in or adjacent to any street, alley, or public place, the Contractor shall at his own expense furnish, erect, and maintain such barricades, fences, lights, and danger signals, shall provide such watchman, and shall take all such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons or property and of the work as are necessary. Barricades and fences shall be painted in a color that will be visible at night. From sunset to �sunrise the Contractor shall furnish and maintain at least one easily visible burning light at each barricade. A sufficient number of barricades shall be erected and maintained to keep pedestrians away from, and vehicles from being driven on or into, any work under construction or being maintained. The Contractor shall furnish watchmen and keep them at their respective assignments in sufficient numbers to protect the work and prevent accident or damage. All installations and procedures shall be consistent with provisions set forth in the "1980 � Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways" issued under the authority of the "State of Texas Uniform Act Regulating Traffic on Highways", codified as Article 6701d Veron's Civil Statues, pertinent section being Section Nos. 27, 29, 30 and 31. � � � LJ L�] The Contractor will not remove any regulatory sign, instructional sign, street name sign, or other sign which has been erected by the City. If it is detQrmined that a sign must be removed to permit required construction, the Contractor shall contact the Transportation and Public Works Department, Signs and Markings Division (phone number 871-8075), to remove the sign. In case of regulatory signs, the Contractor must replace the permanent sign with a temporary sign meeting the requirements of the above referred manual and such temporary sign must be installed prior to the removal of the permanent sign. If the temporary sign is not installed correctly or if it does not meet the required specifications, the permanent sign shall be left in place until the temporary sign requirements are met. When construction work is completed to the extent that the permanent sign can be re-installed, the Contractor shall again contact the Signs and Markings Division to re-install the permanent� sign and shall leave his temporary sign in place until such re-installation is completed. 1333018 — Sou#h Holly WTP C6-6 Legal Relations and Public Responsibity Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 3 , � � , . Y. The, Contractor will be held respon�ible foe all damage to the work or the public due to failure of barricades, signs, fences, lights, or watchmen to protect them. Whenever evidence is found of such damage to the .�nrork the Engineer may order the damaged portion immediately removed and replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor's own expense. The Contractor's responsibility for the maintenance of barricades, signs, fences and lights, ,and for providing watchmen shall not cease until ;the project shall have been completed and `accepted by the Owner. �y No compensation,,, except as specifically provided in these Contract Documents, will be paid to the Contractor for the Work and ��naterials involved in the constructing, prov,iding, and maintaining of barricades, signs, f2nces, and lights or salaries of watchmen, for the subsequent removal and disposal of such barricades, signs, or for any other incidentals necessary for the pr�per protection� safety, and convenience of the public during the contract period, as this work is considered to be subsidiary to the several items for which unit or lump sum prices are requested in the Proposal. � � C6-6.9 USE OF EXPLOSIVES. DROP WEIGHT. ETC.: Should the Contractor elect to use explosives, drop weight, etc., in the` °prosecution of the work, the utmost care shall be exercised at all times so as not to eridanger life or propert�r. The Contractor shall notify the proper representative of any public s�nrice corporation, any company, individu,al, or utility, and the Owner, not less than twenty- our hours in advance of the use of any activity which might damage or �ndanger their or his�property along or adjacent to the wo�k. F Where the use of explosives �is to be�permitted on the project, as specified in the Special Conditions Documents, or the use o��explosives is requested, the Contractor shall submit notice to the Engineer in writing twenty-four hours prior to commencing and shall furnish evidence that he has insurance coverage to protect against any damages and/or injuries arising out of such use of explosives. � C5-6.10 WORK WITHIN EASEMEN�7S: Where the work passes over, through, or into private property, the Owner will provide such right-of-way or easement privileges as the City may deem necessary for the prosecu�ion of the work. Any additional rights-of-way or work �rea considered necessary by the Con�ractor shall be provided by him at his expense. Such 0.additional rights-of-way or work area s%all ,be acquired for the benefit of the City. The City shall be notified in writing as to the rights so acquired before work begins in the affected area. The Contr"actor shall not enter u�on private property for any purpose without having previously obtained permission from tfie owner of such property. The Contractor will not be allowed to store equipment or materiaj on private properry" unless and until the specified approval of the property owner has been secured in writing by the Contractor and a copy furnished to the Engineer. Unless specifically provided otherwise, the Contractor shall clear all rights-of-way or easements of obstructions which must be removed to make possible proper prosecution of the work as �; part of the project constructiorr operations. The Contractor shall be responsible for th� preservation of and shall use every precaution to prevent damage to, all= tress, shrubbery, plants, lawns, fences, �culverts, curbing, and all other types of structures or improvements, to all water, sewer, and gas lines, to all conduits, overhead pole lines, or appurtenances thereof, including the construction of temporary fences and�to all otl�er public or private �roperty adjacent to the work. � The Contractor shall notify the proper .�epresentatives of the owners or occupants of the public or private �lands of interest in lands which .might be affected by the work. Such notice shall be made at least 48 hours in adv�nce of the beginning of the work. Notices shall be 1333018 — South Holly WTP � C6-6 Legal Relations and PubJic Responsibity Coagulant Feed System Improvements a PAGE 4 r • CY �� . P Y��y �^±r $ � � L�� L� u � L;� ��J � t!1 � � applicable to both public and private utility companies or any corporation, company, individual, or other, either as owners or occupants, whose land or interest in land might be affected by the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage or injury to property of any character resulting from any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the manner or method or execution of the work, or at any time due to defective work, material, or equipment. When and where any direct or indirect or injury is done to public or private property on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the execution of the work, or in consequence of non-execution thereof on the part of the Contr�ctor, he shall restore or have restored as his cost and expense such property to a condition at least equal to that existing before such damage or injury was done, by repairing, rebuildirig, or otherwise replacing and restoring as may be directed by the Owner, or he shall make g��od such damages or injury in a manner acceptable to the owner of the property and the Engineer. All fences encountered and removed during const�uction of tr�is project shall be restored to the original or a better than original condition upon completion of this project. When wire fencing, either wire mesh or barbed wire is to be crossed, the Contractor shall set cross brace posts on either side of the permanent easement before the fence is cut. Should additional fence cuts be necessary, the Contractor shall provide cross braced posts at the point of the proposed cut in addition to the cross braced posts provided at the permanent easements limits, before the fence is cut. Temporary fencing shall be erected in place of the fencing removed whenever the work is not in progress and when the site is vacated overnight, and/or at all times to prevent livestock from entering the construction area. The cost for fence removal, temporary closures and replacement shall be subsidiary to the various items bid in the project proposal. Therefore, no separate payment shall be allowed for any service associated with this work. In case of failure on the part of the Contractor to restore such property or to make good such damage or injury, the Owner may, upon 48 hour written notice under ordinary circumstances, and without notice when a nuisance or hazardous condition results, proceed to repair, rebuild, or otherwise restore such property as may be determined by the Owner to be necessary, and the cost thereby will be deducted from any monies due to or to become due to the Contractor under this contract. C6.6.11 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR: It is understood and agreed by the parties � hereto that the Contractor shall perform all work and services hereunder as an independent contractor, and not as an officer, agent, servant, or employee of the Owner. Contractor shall • have exclusive control of and exclusive right to control the details of all work and services Q � performed hereunder, and all persons performing the same, and shall be solely responsible for the acts and omissions of its officers, agenfs, servants, employees, contractor, subcontractors, licensees and invitees. The doctrine of respondeat superior shall not apply as between Owner and Contractor, its officers, agents, employees, contractors and �subcontractors, and nothing herein shall be construed as� creating a partnership or joint . enterprise between Owner and Contractor. L�J L�J L�J C6-6.12 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE CLAIMS: Contractor covenants and agrees to, and does hereby indemnify, hold harmless and defend Owner, its officers, agents, servants, and employees from and against any and all claims or suits for property damage or loss and/or personal injury, including death, to any and all persons, of 1333018 — South Holly WTP � C6-6 Legal Relations and Public Responsibity Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 5 � whatsoever kind or character, whether real or asserted, arising out of or in connection with, directly or indirectly, the work and ser'vices to be performed hereunder by the Contractor, its officers, agents, employees, contractbrs, subcontractors, licensees or invitees, whether or not caused, in whole or in apart, by' alleged negligence on the part of officers, agents, employees, contractors, subcontractors, licensees or invitees of the Owner; and said Contractor does hereby covenant and' agree to assume all liability and responsibility of Owner, its officers, agents, servants;".and employees for property damage or loss, and/or personal injuries, including death, to any and all person of whatsoever kind or character, whether real or asserted, arising out a`f or in connection with, directly or indirectly, the work and services to be performed hereunder by the Contractor, its officers, agents, employees, contractors, subcontractors, licensees or invitees, whether or not caused, in whole or in apart, by alleged negligence of offic�rs, ,agents, employees, contractors, subcontractors, licensees or invitees of the Owner. CQntractor likewise covenants and agrees to, and does hereby, indemnify and hold harmless �wner from and against any and all injuries, loss or damages to property of the Owner :during the performance of any of the terms and conditions of this Contract, whether a�ising ,out of or in connection with or resulting from, in whole or in apart, any and all alleg�d acts of omission of officers, agents, employees, contractors, subcontractors, licensees„; or invitees of the Owner. In the event a written claim for damages against the contractor or its subcontractors remains unsettled at the time all work on the �"roject has been completed to the satisfaction of the Director of the Water. Department, as „evidenced by a final inspection, final payment to the Contractor shall not be recommended to the Dire�tor of the Water Department for a period of 30 days after the date of such final ihspection, unless the Contractor shall submit written evidence satisfactory to the Director that the claim has been �ettled and a release has been obtained from the claimant involved. a If the claims concerned remains unsett�ed as of the expiration of�the above 30-day period, the Contractor may be deemed to be entitled to a semi-final payment for work completed, such semi-final payment to be in the at"nount equal to the total dollar amount then due less the dollar value of any written clair�s pending against the Contractor arising out of performance of such'work, �and such semi-final payment may then be recommended by the Director. "� The Director shall not recommend final payment to a Contracto� against whom such a claim for damages is outstanding for a period of six months following the date of the acceptance of the work performed unless the Contractor submits evidence in writing satisfactory tot he Director that: � 1. 2. The claim has been settled and a release has been obtained from the claimant involved, or • � Good faith efforts have ;been made to settle such outstanding claims, and such good faith efforts ha'�e failed. If condition (1) above is met at any time within the six month pe,riod, the Director shall recommend that the final payment to the Contractor be made. If condition (2) above is met at any time within the six month period; �the Director may recommend that final payment to the Contractor be made. At the expiration of the six month period, the Director may recommend that final payment be made if all other work has been performed and all'other obligations of the Contractor have been met to the satisfaction of the Director. 1333018 — South Holly WTP E C6-6 Legal Relations and Public Responsibity Coagulant Feed System Improverrients ° PAGE 6 � `'� � f� � ,�� -�� . � � � � � � � �� 5� L� � The Director may, if he deems it appropriate, refuse to accept bids on other Water �`j Department Contract work from a Contractor against whom a claim for damages is (.� outstanding as a result of work perf�rmed under a City Cont�act. � C6-6.13 CONTRACTOR'S CLAIM FOR DAMAGES: Should the Contractor claim compensation foe any alleged damage by reason of the acts or omissions of the Owner, he shall within three days after the actual sustaining of such alleged damage, make a written � sta�ement to the Engineer, setting out in detail the nature of the alleged damage, and on or before the 25'" day of the month succeeding that in which ant such damage is claimed to have been sustained, the Contractor shall`file with the Engineer an itemized statement of the details and the amount of such �Ileged damage and, upon request, shall give the Engineer � access to all books of account, receipts, vouchers, bills of lading, and other books or papers containing any evidence as to the amount of such alleged damage. Unless such statements shall be filed as hereinabove required, the Contractor's claim for compensation shall be � waived, and he shall not be entitled to payment on account of such damages. ' C6-6.14 ADJUSTMENT OR RELOCATION OF PUBLIC UTIL.ITIES. ETC.: In case it is � necessary to change, move, or alter in any manner the property of a public utility or others, the said property shall not be moved or interfered�with until orders thereupon have�been issued by the Engineer. The right is reserved to the owners of public utilities to enter the � geographical limits of the C�ntract for the purpose of making such changes or repairs to the property that may be necessary by the performance of this Contract. � C6-6.15 TEMPORARY SEWER AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS: When existing sewe� lines have to be taken up or removed, the Contractor shall, at his own expense and cost, provide and maintain temporary outlets and connections for all private or public drains and sewers. � The Contractor shall also take care of all sewage and drainage which will be received from � th�se drains and sewers, and for this purpose he shall provide and mai�tain, at his own cost and expense; adequate pumping facilities and temporary outlets or divisions. � The Contractor, at his own cost and expense, shall construct such troughs, pipes, or other structures necessary, and be prepared at all times to dispose of drainage and sewage received from these temporary connections until such times as the permanent connections °are built and are in service. The existing sewers and connections shall be kept in service �� and maintained undei� the Contract, except when specified or ordered to be abandoned by the Engineer. All water, sewage, and other waste shall be disposed of in a satisfactory � manner so that no nuisance is created and so that the wo�k under construction will be adequately protected. u ��) sJ C6-6.16 ARRANGEMENT AND CHARGES FOR WATER FURNISHED BY THE CITY:, When the Contractor desires to use City water in connection with any construction work, he shall =make complete and satisfactory arrangements with =the Fort Worth City Water Department for so doing. City water furnished to the Contractor shall be delivered to the Contractor from a connection on an existing City main. All piping required beyond the point of delivery shall be installed by the Contractor at his own expense. � , 1333018 — South Holly WTP C6-6 Legal Relations and Public Responsibity QCoagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 7 The Contractor's responsibility in the:use of all existing fire hydrant and/or�valves is detailed in Section EL-1.2 USE OF FIRE HYDRANTS� AND VALVES iri these General Contract Documents. � When meters are used to measure th"e water, the charges, if any, for water will be made at the regular established rates. Whena�meters are not used, the charges, if any, will be as prescribed by the City ordinance, or �ivhere no ordinances applies, payment shall be made on estimates and�rates established by`the Director of the Fort Worth Water Department. �«k C 6-6.17 USE OF A SECTION OR PbRTION OF THE WORK: Whenever, in the opinion of the Engineer, any section or portion af the work or any structure is. in .suitable condition,, it may be put into use upon �the written ndtice of the� Engineer, and such usage shall� not be held to be�in any way an acceptance� of said work or structure or any part thereof or as a waiver of any of the provisions of these Contract Documents. All necessary repair,s and removals of any section of the wo"rk so put into use, due to defective materials or workmanship, equipment, or deficient operations on the part of the Contractor, shall be performed by the Contractor at his expense. � C6-6.18 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE V1/ORK: Until written acceptance by the Owner as provided for in these Contract Documents, the work shall be under the eharge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution to prevent injury or damage to the work or any pa"rt thereof by action of the elements or from any cause whatsoever, whether arising from the execution or nonexecution of the work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore, and make good at his own expense all injuries or damage to any portion of the work occasioned by �ny of the�hereinabove'causes. C6-6.-1"9 NO WAIVER OF LEGAL RIGHTS: Inspection by the Engineer or any order by the Owner by payment of mon�y or any payrnent for or acceptance of any work, or any extension of time, or any possession taken by the City shall not operate as a waiver of any provision of the Contract Documents. Any waiver of any breach or Contract shall not•be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach. . : R The Owner reserves� the right to correct any error that may be discovered in any estimate that may have been paid and to adjust the same to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. � s, C6-620 PERSONAL LIABILITY OF P�IBLIC OFFICIALS: In carrying out the provisions of these Contract C�ocument� or in exercising, any power of authority granted thereunder, there shall be no liability upon the authorized representative of the Owner, either personally or other wise as they are agents and representatives of the City. C6-6.21 STATE SALES TAX: On a contract awarded by the City of Fort Worth, and organization which qualifies for exemption pursuant th�provisions of Article 20.04 (H) of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise, and Use Tax Act, the Contractor may purchase, rent or lease- all materials, supplies and equipment used or consumed in the performance of this contract by issuing to his supplier an exemption certificate in tieu Qf ihe tax, said exemption certificate to comply with State Comptroller's Ruling .007. Any such exemption certificate issued to the Con#ractor in lieu of the tax shall be subject to and shall comply with the provision of State Comptroller's Ruling .011, and any othet� applicable'StatexComptroller's rulings pertaining to the Texas Limited Sales, Excise, and Use Tax Act. � 1333018 — South Holly WTP C6-6 Legal Relations and Public Responsibity Coagulant Feed Sfystem Improvements PAGE 8 �, � � � � � � � � � � � � Q � � � � Q ., . + c On a contract awarded by a developer for the construction of a publicly-owner improvement in a street right-of-way or other easement which has been dedicated to the public and the City of Fort Worth, an organization,;which qualifi�es for exemption pursuant the provisions of Article 20.04 (H) of the Texas Limif�d �Sales, Excise, and Use Tax Act, the Contractor can probably be exempted in the same manner stated above. Texas Limited Sales, Excise, and Use Tax Act permits and information can be obtained from: Comptroller of Public Accounts Sales Tax Division Capitol Station Austin, TX 0 1 a 1333018 — South Holly WTP C6-6 Legal Relations and Public Responsibity � Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 9 � L�J � � � � L�7 L�J � L+!' L■�' � � PART C - GENERAL CONDITIONS C7-7 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS SECTION C7-7 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS: C7-7.1 SUBLETTING:The Contractor shall perform with his own organization, and with the assistance of workmen under his immediate superintendance, work of a value of not- less than fifty (50%) percent of the value embraced on the contract. If the Contractor sublets any part of the work to be done under these Contract Documents, he will not under any circumstances be relieved of the responsibility and obligation assumed under these Contract Documents. All transactions of the Engineer will be with the�Contractor. Subcontractors will be considered only in the capacity of employees or workmen of the Contractor and shall be subject tot he same requirements as to character and competency. The Owner will not recognize any subcontractor on the work. The Contractor shall at all times, when the work is in operation, be represented either in person or by a superintendent or other designated representatives. • C7-7.2 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT: The Contractor shall not assign, transfer, sublet, or otherwise dispose of the contract or his rights, title, or interest in or to the same or any part thereof without the previous consent of the Owner expressed by resolution of the �ity Council and concurred in by the Sureties. If the Contractor does, without such previous consent, assign, transfer, sublet, convey, or otherwise dispose of the contract or his right, title; or interest therein or any part thereof, to any person or persons, partnership, company, firm, or corporation, or does by bankruptcy, voluntary or involuntary, or by assignment under the insolvency laws of any states, attempt to dispose of the contract may, at the option of the Owner be revoked and annulled, unless the Sureties shall successfully complete said contract, and in the event of any such revocation or annulment, any monies due or to become due under or by virtue Qf said contract shall be retained by the Owner as liquidated damages for the reason that it would be impracticable and extremely difficult to fix the actual damages. C7-7.3 PROSECUTION OF THE WORK: Prior to beginning any construction operations, � the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in five or more copies, if requested by the Engineer, a progress schedule preferably in chart or diagram form, or a brief outlining in detail and step by step the manner of prosecuting the work and ordering materials and � equipment which he expects to follow in order to complete tre project in the scheduled time. There shall be submitted a table of estimated amounts to be earned by the Contractor during each monthly estimate period. C� L�J The Contractor shall commence the work to be performed nder this contract within the time limit stated in these Contract Documents and shall conduct he work in a continuous manner and with sufficient equipment, materials, and labor as is n cessary to insure its completion within the time limit. The sequence requested of all construction operations sh<tll be at all times as specified in a the Special Contract Documents. Any Deviation from such �equencing shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval. Con raeor sliall not proceed with any deviatian until he has received written approval from the �ng �neer. Such specification or approval by the Engineer � (� 1333018 — South Holly WTP � C7-7 Prosecution and Progress Coagulant Feed System Improvem�nt$ PAGE 1 I � shall not relieve the Ct�ntractor from full responsibility of the complete performance of the Contract. a The contract time may be changed �n,ly as set forth in Section C7-7.8 EXTENSION OF TIME OF,COMPLETION of this Agre�ment, and a progress schedule shall not constitute a change in the contract time. e� C7-7.4 LIMITATION OF OPERATIONS: The working operations shall at all times be conducted by the Contractor so as t� create a minimum amount of inconvenience to the public. At any time when, in the judgment of the Engineer, the Contractor has obstructed or closed or is carrying on operations irf a portion of a street or public way greater than is necessary for proper execution of the work, the Engineer may require the �Contractor to finish the section on which operations are in progress before the work is commenced on any additional section or street. � � � C7-7.5 CHARACTER OF WORKMENsAND EQUIPMENT: Local labor shall be used by the Contractor when it is available. Tfie Contractor may bring from outside the City of Fort Worth his key men and his super�,r�tendent. All other workmen, including equipment` operators, may be imported only afte�,the locat supply is exhausted. The Contractor shall employ only such superintendents, fore�men, and workmen who are careful, competent, and fully qualified to perform the duties and tasks assigned to them, and the Engineer may demand and secure the summary dismissal of any person or pe�sons employed by the Contractor in or about or on the work who, in the opinion of the Owner, shall misconduct himself or to be found to be incompeter�t, disrespectful, intemperate, dishonest, or otherwise objectionable or neglectful in the prope� performance of his or their duties, or who neglect or refuses to comply with or carry out the:;,direction of the owner, and such person or persons shall not be employed again thereon without written consent of the Engineer. , .� All workmen shall have sufficient skill,��bility, and experier�ce to properly perform the work assigned to them and operate any�. equipment necessary to properly carry out the performance of the assigned duties. � , The Contractor shall furnish and maint�in on the work all such equipment as is considered to be necessary for the prosecution �of th�e work in an acceptable manner and at a satisfactory rate of progress. All eq�ipment, tools, and machinery used for handling materials and executing any part of the,work shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and shall be maintained in a satisfactory, safe and efficient working condition. Equipment on any portion of the work shall be such� that no injury to the work. Workmen or adjacent properry will result from its use. � �� C7-7.6 WORK SCHEDULE: Elapsed �vorking days shall be computed starting with the first day of the work completed as defined in��CT-1.23 "WORKING DAYS" or the date stipulated in the "WORK ORDER" for beginning work, whichever com�s first. 9� e Nothing in these Contract Documents s�iall be construed as prohibiting the Contractor from working on Saturday, Sunday or Legala Holidays, providing that the following requirements are met: � . � a. A request to work on a specific Saturday, Sundal� or Legal Holiday must be made to the Engineer na �ater that the preceding Thursday. m ,� e, 1333018 — South Holly WTP �� Coagulant Feed System Improvements „� � C7-7 Prose�ution and Progress PAGE 2 � L�J L�J �� b. Any work to be done on the project on such a specific Saturday, Sunday or Legal Holiday must be; in the opinion of the Engineer, essential to the timely completion of the projec�. The Engineer's decision shall be final in response to such a request for approval to work on � a specific Saturday, Sunday or Legal Holiday, and no extra compensation shall be allowed to the Contractor for any work performed on such a specific Saturday, Sunday or Legal Holiday. �� u �'+�J � Calendar Days shall be defined in C1-1.24 and the Contractor may work as he so desires. � C7-7.7 TIME OF COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION: The Contractor shall commence the working aperations within the time specified in the Contract Documents and set forth in ltie Work Order. Failure to do so shall be considered by the owner as abandonment of the Contract by the Contractor and the Owner m�y proceed as he sees fit. The Contractor shall maintain a rate of progress such as will insure that the whole work will be performed and the premises cleaned up in accordance with the Contract Documents and within the time established in such documents and such extension of time as may be properly authorized. � C7-7.8 EXTENSION OF TIME COMPLETION: The Contractor's request for an extension of time of completion shall be considered only when the request for such extension is submitted in writing to the �ngineer within seven days from and after the time alleged cause � of delay shall occurred. Should an extension of the time of completion be requested such request will be forwarded to the City Council for approval. �� L�J ��J In adjusting the contract time for completion of work, consideration will be given to unforeseen causes b.eyond the control of and� without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, fire, flood, tornadoes, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, embargoes, or delays of sub-contractors due to such causes. When the date of completion is based on a calendar day bid, a request for extension of time because of inclement weather will not be considered. A request for extension of time due to inability to obtain supplies and materials will be considered only when a review of the Contractor's purchase order dates and other pertinent data as requested by'the Engineer indicates that the Contractor has made a bonafide attempt to secure delivery on schedule. This shall include efforts to obtain the supplies and materials' from alternate sources in case the first source cannot make delivery. � If satisfactory execLtion and completion of the contract should require work and materials in greater amounts or quantities thar� those set forth in the approved Contract Documents, then the contract time mat be increased by Change Order. � L�' L� C7-7.9 DELAYS: The Contractor shall receive no compens�tion for delays or hindrances to the work, except when direct and unavoidable extra cost to the Contractor is caused by the failure of the City to provide information �or material, if any, which is to be furnished by the City. When such extra compensation is claimed, a written statement thereof shall be presented by the Contractor to the Engineer and if by the Engineer found correct, shall be approved and referred by the Engineer to the City Council for final approval or disapproval; and the action thereon by the City Council shall be final and binding. If delay is caused by� 1333018 — South Holly WTP C7-7 Prosecution and Progress Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 3 ,� specific orders given by the Engineer to stop work, or by the performance of extra work, or by the failure of the City to provide material or necessary instructions for carrying on the work, then such delay will entitle the Contractor to an equivalent extension of time, his application for shall, however, be subjec� to the approval of the �ity Council: and no such extension of time shall release the �ontractor or the surety on his performance bond from all �his obligations hereunder which shall remain in full force until the discharge of the contract. C7-7.10 TIME OF COMPLETION: •�The time of completion is a� esser�tial element of the Contract. Each bidder shall indic�,te in the appropriate place on the last page of the proposal, the number of working days or calendar days that he will require to fully complete this contract or the time of completion will be specified by the City in the proposal section of the Contract Documents. x� ,_ The number of days indicated shall be a realistic estimate of the time required to complete the work covered by the specific contract being bid upon. The amount of time so stated by the successful bidder or the City will become the time of completion specified in the Contract Documents. w ,t For each calendar day that any work shall remain uncompleted after the time specified in the Contract Documents, or increased tirr�,e granted by the Owner, or as automatically increased by additional work or materials ordereti after the contract is signed, the sum per day given in the following schedule, unless otherwise specified in other parts of the Contract Documents, wil� be deducted from the monies due the Conttactor, not as a penalty, but as liquid�ted damages suffered by the Owner. n� - , AMOUNT O� CONTRACT Less than $ 5,001 to $ 15,001 to $ 25,001 to $ 50,001 to $ 100,001 to $ 500,001 to $ �,000,001 to $ 2,000,000 and over � 5,000 $ 15,000 $ 25,000 � 50,000 $ 100,000 $ 500,000 $f 1,000,000 $ 2,000,000 inclusiye inclusive inclusive inclusive inclusive inclusive inclusive inclusive AMOUNT OF LIQUIDATED DAMAGES PER DAY � $ $ $ $ $� $ $� $ 35.00 45.00 63.00 105.00 154.00 210.00 315.00 420.00 630.00 �� The parties hereto understand and `�gree that any harm to the City caused by the `Contractor's delax in completing the v�ork hereunder in the time specified by the Contract Documents would be incapable or v�ery difficult to calculate due to lack of accurate information, and that the "Amount of Liquidated Damages Per Day", as set out above, is a reasonable forecast of just compensati�n due the City for harm caused by any delay. �g � °a Q 0 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements�� -��- C7-7 Prosecution and Progress F'AGE 4 � LL�'1'1 � � � � '�� ,, L�J i� � � L�] � � � L �I u � � C7-7.11 SUSPENSION BY COURT ORDER: The Contractor shall suspend operations on such part or parts of the work ord�red by any court, and will not be entitied to additional compensation by virtue of such court order. Neither will he be liable to the City in the vent the work is suspended by a Court Order. Neither will the Owner be liable to the Contractor by virtue of any Court Order or action for which the Owner is not solely responsible. C7-7.12 TEMPORARY SUSPENSION: The Owner shall have the right to suspend the work operation wholly or in part for such period or periods of time as he may deem necessary due to unsuitable weather conditions or any other unsuitable conditions which in the opinion of the Owner or Engineer cause further prosecution of the work to be unsatisfactory or detrimental to the interest of the project. During temporary suspension of the work covered by this contract, for any reason, the Owner will make no extra payment for stand-by time of construction equipment and/or construction crews. If it should become necessary to suspend work for an indefinite period, the Contractor shall store all materials in such manner that they will not obstruct or impede the public unnecessarily nor become damaged in any way, and he shall take every precaution to prevent damage or deterioration of the. work performed; he shall provide suita�le drainage about the work, and erect temporary structures where necessary. Should the Contractor not be able to complete a portion of the project due to causes beyond the control of and without the fault or negligence of the Contractbr as set forth in Paragraph C7-7.8 EXTENSION OF THE TIME OF COMPLETION, and should it be determined by mutual consent of the Contractor and the Engineer that a solution to allow construction to proceed is rlot available within a reasonable period of time, tiien the Contractor may be reimbursed for the cost of moving his equipment off the job and returning the necessary equipment to the job when it is determined by the Engineer that construction may be resumed. Such reimbursement shall be based on actual cost to the Contractor of moving the equipment and no profit will be allowed. No reimbursement shall be allowed if the equipment is moved to another construction project for the City of Fort Worth. � The Contractor shall not suspend work without written notice from the Engineer and shall proceed with the work operations promptly when notified by the Engineer to so resume operations. C7-7.13 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT DUE TO NATIONAL• EMERGENCY: Whenever, because of National Emergency, so declared by the president of the United States or other lawful authority, it becomes impossible for the Contractor to obtain all of the necessary labor, materials, and equipment for the prosecution of the work with reasonable continuity for a period of two months, the Contractor shall within seven days notify the Ciry in writing, giving a detailed statement of the efforts which have been made and listing all necessary items of labor, materials, and equipment not obtainable. If, after investigations, the owner finds that such conditions existing and that the inability of the Contractor to�proceed is not attributable in whole or in part to the fault or neglect of the Contractor, than if the Owner cannot after reasonable effort assist� the Contractor in procuring and making avaifable the necessary labor, materials, and equipment within thirty days, the Contractor my request the owner to terminate the contract and the owner may comply with the request, and the termination shall be conditioned and based upon a final settlement mutually acceptable to both the Owner and the Contractor and final payment shall be made in accordance with the terms of the 1333018 — South Holly WTP� C7-7 Prosecution and Progress Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 5 tl $ m B agreed settlem�nt, which shall inCl�de. But not be limited to the payment for all work executed but not anticipated profit�;on work which has not been performed. C7-7.14 SUSPENSION OR ABAN�ONMENT OF THE WORK'AND ANNULMENT OF THE, CONTRACT: The work operationas_ on all or any portion or section of the work under Contract shall be suspended immediately on written order of the Engineer or the Contract may be declared canceled by the� City Council for any good and sufficient cause. The following, by way of example, but not of limitation, may be considered grounds for suspension or cancellation: �.. � Q � c. � Failure of the Contractor to commence work operations within the time specified in the Work�Order issued by the Owner. ,s Substantial evidencC;that progress of the work operations by the Contractor is insufficient to complete the work within the sp�cified time. s� Failure of the Cont�actor to provide and maintain sufficient labor and equipment to prope[ly execute the working operations. b Substantial evidence�that the Contractor has abandoned the work. �� . e. Subsfantial evidence��hat the Contractor has become insolvenf or bankrupt, or otherwise financial�� unable to carry on the work satisfactorily. a so , f. Failure on the part of the Contractor to observe any requirements of the Contract Documents �or to comply with any orders given by the Engineer or Owner provided for in�these Contract Documents. g. Failure of the Contra�tor promptly to make good .any defect in materials or workmans,�ip, or any �efects of any nature the correction of which has been directed in writing by t�e Engineer or the Owner. a �� h. Substantial evidence of collusion for the purpose of illegally procuring a contract or perpetratinq fraud on ,the City in the construction of work uhder contract. , p „ i. A substantia� indicatiQn that the Contractor has made an unauthorized assignment of the contract or any funds due therefrom for the benefit of any creditor or for any other purpose. 1• k. nh If the Contractor shallp�or any cause whatsoever not carry on the working operation in an accept�ble� manner. � If the Contractor commences legal action against the Owner. A Copy of the suspension order or " ction of the City Council shall be served on the Contractor's Sureties. When work is :�uspended for any cause or causes, or when the contract is canceled, the �ontractor shall discontinue the work or such part, thereof as the owner shall designate, whereupon the Sureties may, at their option, assume the contract or that portion thereof which the Owner k��as ordered the Contractor to discontinue, and may 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements � � C7-7 Prosecution and Progress PAG E 6 Q �� !J � L�� '� i LJ f■' �.. _. I� � � � C#J � L�J � IJ D� � .� perfo�m `the same or may, with written consent of the owner, sublet the work or that portion of the work as taken over, provided however, that the Sureties shall exercise their option, if at all, within two weeks after the wtit�en notice to discontinue the work has been served upon the Contractor and upon the Sureties or their,authorized agents. The Sureties, in such event 'shall assume the Contractor's place in all respects, and shall be paid by thg Owner for all work performed by them in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents. All monies remaining due the Contractor at the time of this default shall thereupon become due and payable to the Sureties as the work progresses, subject to all of the terms of the Contract Documents. In case the Sureties do not, within the hereinabove specified time, exercise their right and option to assume the contract responsibilities, or that portion thereof which the Owner has ordered the Contractor to discontinue, then the Owner shall have the power to complete, by contract or otherwise, as it may determine, the work herein described or such work thereof as it may deem necessary, and the Contractor hereto agrees that the Owner shall have the right to take possession of �nd use any materials, plants, tools, equipment, supplies, and property of any kind provided by the Contractor for the purpose of carrying on the work and to procure other tools, equipment, materials, labor and property for the completion of the work, and to charge to the account of the Contractor of said contract expense for labor, materials, tools, equipment, and all expenses incidental thereto. The expense so charged shall be deducted by the owner from such monies as may be due or may become due at any time thereafter to the Contractor under and by virtue of the Contract or any part thereof. Tfie Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest bid for the work completing the contract, but the expense to be deducted shall be the actual cost of the owner of such work In case such expenses shall exceed the amount which would have been payable under the Contract if the same had been completed by the Contract, then the Contractor antl his Sureties shall pay the amount of such excess to the City on notice from the Owner of the excess due. When any particular part of the work is being carr.ied on by the Owner by contract or otherwise under the provisions of this section, the Contractor shall continue the remainder of the work in conformity with the terms of the Contract Documents and in such a manner as to not hinder or interf�re with the performance of the work by the Owner. C7-7.15 FULFILLMENT OF CONTRACT: The Contract will be considered as having been fulfilled, save as provided �in any bond or bonds or by law, when all the work and all sections or parts of the project covered by the Contract Documents have been finished and completed, the final inspection made by the Engineer, and the final acceptance and final payment made by the Owner. � C7-7.16 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE OF�THE OWNER:, The performance of the work under this contract may be terminated by the Owner in whole, or from time to time in part, i� accordance with this section, whenever the Owner shall determine that such termination is in the best interest of the Owner. A. NOTICE OF TERMINATION: Any Termination shall be effected by mailing a notice of the termination to the.. Contractor specifying the extent to which performance of work under the contract is terminated, and the date upon which such termination becomes effective. Receipt of the notice shall be deemed'conclusively presumed and established when the letter is placed in the United States Postal Service Mail by the Owner. Further, it shall be deemed conclusively presumed and established that such termination is 1$33018 — South Holly WTP , C7-7 �Prosecution and Progress � Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 7 A� � � .made with just cause as therein stated; and no proof in an.y claim, demand or suit shall be required �f the Owner regarding such discretionary action �� CONTRACTOR ACT�ON: After receipt of a notice of termination, and except as otherwise direct�d by the Engineer, the Contractor shall:° ' � ��- 1. Stop v�1',ork under the contract on the date and to the extent � specified in the notice of termination; 2.• place n�o furth�r orders or subcontracts for materials, services or faci(ities except as may be necessary for completion of such portion of the work under the contract as is not terminated; �� 3. termin�te all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate t� the performance of the work terminated by notice of termina�ion; � 5.. � transfer� title to the Owner and deliver in the manner, at the times, a�d to the extent, if any, directed by the �ngineer: �r • a. ,�he fabricated or unfabricated parts, work in progress, ,Completed work, supplies and qther material �produced as a part.of, or acquired in connection with ��he performance of, the work terminated by the notice �of the termination; �and �E b: ��'he completed, or partially completed plans, idrawings, informatiori and other property which, if the contract had been completed, would have been r�quired to be furnished to the Owner. ,, comple�e performance� of such work as shall not have been terminated, by the notice of termination; and t��y itl Take s�ch action as maX� be necessary, or as the EngineeF may dire'�t, for the protection and preservation of the property' �elated ;to its contra�t which is in• the possession of the Contractor and in which the owner has or may acquire the rest. � At a time not later than 30 days after the t'ermination date specified in the � notice of termination, the Contractor° �may submit to the Engineer a list, certified as to quantity and quality, of any or all items of termination inventory not previously disposed, of, exclusive of items the disposition of which has been directed or authorized by Engineer, Not later than 15 days thereafter, the owner shall accept.+title to such items provided, that the� list submitted shall be subject to verification by the Engineer upon removal of the items or, if the items are stored, w;ithin 45 days from the• date of submission of the list, �° a 1333018�— South Holly WTP ,� �C7-7 Prosecution and Progress Coagulant.Feed System Improvements °i PAG� 8 � L!' L� (J i�J � � � �� L�' L�' L�' � ��]� *J u � � � �� lsJ and any necessary adjustments to correct the list as submitted, shall be made prior to .final settlement. C. TERMINATION CLAIM: Within 60 days after the notice of termination, the Contractor shall submit his termination claim % the Engineer in the form and with the certification prescribed by the Engineer. Unless one or more extensions in writing are granted by the Owner upon request of the Contractor, made in writing within such 60-day period or authorized extension thereof, any and all such claims shall be conclusively deemed waived. D. AMOUNTS: Subject to the provisions of Item C7-7.1(C), the Contractor and the Owner may agree upon the whole or any part of the amount or amounts to be paid to the Contractor by reason of the total or partial termination of the work pursuant hereto; provided, that such agreed amount or amounts shall never exceed the total contract price reduced by the amount of payments otherwise made and as further re�duced by the contract price work not terminated. The contract shall be amended �ccordingly, and the Contractor shall be paid the agreed amount. No amount shall be due for lost or anticipated profits> Nothing in C7-7.16(E) hereafter, prescribing the amount tz� be paid to the Contractor by reason of the termination of work pursuant to this section, shall be deemed to limit, restrict or otherwise determine or affect the amount� or amounts which may be agreed upon to be paid to the Contractor pursuant to this paragraph. E. FAILURE TO AGREE: In the event of the failure of the Contractor and the Owner to agree as provided in C7-7.16(D) upon the whole amount to be paid to the Contractor by reason of the termination of the work pursuant to this section, the Owner shall determine, on the basis of information available to it, the amount, if any, due to the Contractor by reason of the termination and shall pay to the Contractor the amounts determined. No amount shall be due for lost or anticipated profits. • . F. DEDUCTIONS: In arriving at the amount due the Contractor under this section there shall be deducted; � � 1. all unliquidated advance or other payments on account theretofore made to the Contractor, applicable to the terminated portion of this contract; 2. any claim which the Owner may have against the Contractor in connection with this contract; and 3. the agreed price for, or the proceeds of the sale of, any materials, supplies or other things kept by the Contractor or sold, pursuant to the provisions of this clause, and not otherwise r,ecovered by or credited to the Owner. G. ADJUSTMENT: If the termination hereunder be partial, prior to the settlement of the terminated portion of this contract, the Contractor may file 1333018 — South Holly WTP C7-7 Prosecution and Progress Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 9 � eB 9r with the Engineer a request in writing for an equitable adjustment of`the price or prices specified in the contract relating to the continued ,portion of the contract (the portion not terminated by notice of termination), such equitable adjustment as may be �greed upon shall be made in such price or prices; noting contained herein; however, shall limit the right of the owner and the Contractor to agree upon the amount or amounts to be paid to the Contractor for the completion of the continued portion of the contract when said contract does not contain an established contract price for such continued portion. H. NO LIMITATION OF RIGHTS: Noting contained in this section shall limit or alter the rights which the Owner may have for termination of this contract � under C7-7.14 hereof eiititled "SUSPENSION OR ABANDONMENT OF THE WORK AND ANNULM�NT OF CONTRACT' o� any other right which the Owner may have for de��ult or breach of contract by Cont�actor. C7-7.17 SAFETY METHODS AND PF��CTICES: The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervisi�ig all safety precautions and' programs in connection with the work at all times and shall assul�ne all responsibilities for their enforcement. The Contractor shall comply with fede�l, state, and local laws, ordinances, and regulations so as to protect person and property from injury, including death, or damage in connection with the work. �� . .� �� F �� r 'I � '� 1 eR e� 4 R 1333018 — South Holly WTP g; Coagulant Feed System Improvements, �� C7-7 Prosecution and Progress PAGE 10 � L■kJ t�J C�� lsl lsl � L �, � L�] l�: I� Lf.l �� L� � C LJ PART C - GENERAL CONDITIONS• C8-8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT SECTION C8-8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT C8-8.1 MEASUREMENT OF �UANTITIES: The determination of quantities of work performed by the Contractor and authorized by the Contract Documents acceptably cbmpleted under the terms of the Contract Documents shall be made by the Engineer, based on measurements made by the Engineer. These measurements will be made according to the United states Standard Measurements used in common practice, and will be the actual length, area, solid contents, numbers, and �ieights of the materials and item installed. C8-8.2 UNIT PRICES: When in the Proposal a"Unit Price" is.set forth, the said "Unit Price" shall include the furnishing by the Contractor of all labor, tools, materials, machinery, equipment, appliances and appurtenances necessary for the construction of and the completion in a manner acceptable to the Engineer of all work to be done under these ` Contract Documents. The "Unit Price" shall include all permanent and temporary protection of overhead, surf�.ce, and underground structures, cleanup, finishing costs, overhead expense, bond, insurance, patent fees, royalties, risk due to the elements and other clauses, delays, profits, injuries, damages claims, taxes, and all other items not specifically m�ntioned that may be required to fully construct each item of the work complete in place and in a satisfactory condition for operation. C8-8.3 LUMP SUM: When in the Proposal a"Lump Sum" is set forth, the said "Lump Sum" shall represent the total cost for the Contractor to furnish all labor, tools, materiats, machinery, equipment, appurtenances, and all subsidiary work necessary for the construction and completion of all the work to provide a complete and functional item as -detailed in the Special Contract Documents and/or Plans. C8-8.4 SCOPE OF PAYMENT: The Contractor shall receive and accept the compensation as herein provided, in full payment for furnishing all labor, tools, materials,. and incidentals for performing all work contemplated and embraced under these Contract Documents, for all loss and damage arising out of the nature of the work or from the action of the elements, for any unforeseen defects or obstructions which may arise or be encountered during the prosecution which may arise or be encountered during the prosecution of the work at any time before,its final acceptance by the Owner, (except as provided in paragraph C5-5.14) for all risks of whatever description connected with the prosecution of the work, for all expenses incurred by or in consequence of the suspension or discontinuance of such prosecution of the working operations as herein specified, or any and all infringements of patents, trademarks, copyrights, or other legal reservations, and for completing the work in an acceptable manner according to the terms of the Contract Documents. The payment of any current or partial estimate prior to the final acceptance of the work by the Owner shall in no way constitute an acknowledgment of the acceptance of the �work, materials, or equipment, nor in any way prejudice or affect the obligations of the Contractor to repair, correct, renew, or replace at his own and proper expense any defects or imperfections in the construction or in the strength or quality of the material used or 1333018 — South Holly WTP C8-8 Measurement and Payment Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 1 equipment or machinery furnished in nr about the�constr�ction of the work under �ontract and its appurtenances, or any damage due or attributed to such defects, which defects, imperfections, or damage shall have been discovered on or before the finai inspection and acceptance of the work or during th� one year guaran.ty period after the final acceptance. The Owner shall be the sole judge bf such defects, imperfections, or damage, and the Contractor shall be liable to the Owne'r for failure to correct the same as provided herein. C8-8.5 PARTIAL ESTIMATES AND I�ETAINAGE: , Between the 1S` and the 5'h day o.f each month, the Contractor shall submit to �h� Engineer a statement showing an estimate of the value of the work done during the previous month, or estimate period under the Contract Documents. Not later than the 10`� day of the month, the Engineer shall verify such estimate, and if it is found to be acceptable and �the value.of the work performed since the last partial payment was made exceeds one hGndred dollars ($100.00) inn amount, 90% of such estimated sum will be paid to the Contractor if the total contract amount is less than $400,000.00, or 95% of such estimate� sum will be paid to the Contractor if the total contract amount is $400,000.00 or greater, within twenty-five (25) days after the regular estimate period. The City will have the option o� preparing estimates on forms furnished by the City. The partial estim�tes may include acc�ptable nonperishabl� materials delivered to the work which are to be iricorporated� into the v�ork as a permanent part thereof, but which at the time of the estimate have not been installe� (such payment will be allowed on a basis of 85% of the net invoice value thereof): The Corltractor shall furnish the Engineer such information as he may request to aid him as a guide in the verification or the preparation of partial estimates. It is understood that partial estimate�.from month to month will be approximate only, all partial monthly estimates and paymenf µwill be subject to correction in the estimate rendered following the discovery of an error in any previous estimate, and such estimate shall not, in any respect, be taken as an admission of the Owner of the amount of work done or of its quantity of sufficiency, or as an acceptance of the work done or the release of the Contractor of any of his responsibilities under the �ontract Documents. The City reserves the right to withhold the payment of any monthly estimate if the .Contracto[ fails to perform the work strictfy in acaordance with the specifications or provisions of this Contract. ! C8-8.6 WITHHOLDING PAYMENT: P,ayment on any estimate or estimates may be held in abeyance if the performance of the construction operations is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Document$. 4 C8-8.7 FINAL ACCEPTANCE: Whenever the improvements provided for by the� Contract Documents shall have been• complete� and all requirements of the Contract Documents shall have been fulfilled on the part�;of the Contractor, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing that the improvements are ready for final• inspection. The Engineer shall notify the appropriate officials of the Owner, will within a reasonable time make such final inspection, and if the work is satisfactory, in an acceptable condition, and has been completed in accordance with the� te�ms of the Contract Documents and, all approved modifications thereof, the Engineer will initiate the processing of the final estimate and recommend final acceptance of the project and final payment thereof as outlines in paragraph C8-8.8 below. ' 1333018 — South Holly WTP ` C8-8 Measurement and Payment Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 2 �i .a Ir� I �._ _, �I � � L�J '#J � �I] � L�J u L�J � u � � I�l �I C8-8.8 FINAL PAYMENT: Whenever all the improvements provided for by the Contract Documents and all approved rpbdifications thereof shall have qeen completed and all requirements of the Contract Docurrients have been fulfilled on the part of the Contractor, a final estimate showing the value of the work will be prepared by..the Engineer as soon as the necessary measurements, computations, and checks can be made. All prior estimates upon which payment has been made are subject to necessary corrections or revisions in the final payment. � The amount of the final estimate, less previous payments and any sums that have been deducted or retained under the provisions of the Contract Documents, will be paid to the Contractor within 60 days after the final acceptance by the Owner on a proper resolution of the City Council, provided the Contractor has furnished to the owner satisfactory evidence of compliance as follows: Prior to submission of the final estimate for payment, the Contractor shall execute an affidavit as furnished by the City, certifying that; � � C. all persons, firms, associations, corporations, or other organizations furnishing labor and/or materials have been paid in full, that the wage scale established by the City Council in the City of Fort Worth has been paid, and that there are no claims pending for personal injury and/or property damages. The acceptance by the Contractor of the last or final payment as aforesaid shall operate as and shall release the owner from all claims, or liabilities under the Contract for anything done or furnished or relating to the work under the Contract Documents or any act or neglect of said City relating to or connected with the Contract. The making of the final payment by the Owner. shall not relieve the Contractor of any guarantees or other requirements of tt�e Contract Documents which specifically continue thereafter. � � C8-8.9 ADEQUACY OF DESIGN: It is understood tha� the Owner believes it has employed competent engineers and designers to prepare the Contract Documents and all modifications of the approved Contract Documents. It is, therefore, agreed that the Owner shall be responsible for the adequacy of its own design features, sufficiency of the Contract Documents, the safety of the structure, and �the practicability of the operations of the completed project, provided the Contractor has complied with the requirements of the said Contract Documents, all approved modifications thereof, and additions and alterations thereof approved in writing by the Owner. The burden of proof of such compliance shall be upon the Contractor to show that he has complied with the Contract Documents, approved modifications thereof, and all alterations thereof. . C8-8.10 GENERAL GUARANTY: Neither the final certificate of payment nor any provision in the Contract Documents nor partial or entire occupancy or use of the premises by the Owner shall constitute an acceptance of the work not done in ac�ordance with the Contract Documents or relieve the Contractor of liability in respect to any express warranties or responsibiliry for faulty materials or workmanship. The Contractor shall remedy any defects or damages in the work and pay for any damage to the other work resulting therefrom which 1333018 — South Holly WTP C8-8 Measurement and•,Payment Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 3 � shall appear within a period of one ye�r from the date of final accep�ance of the work unless a longer period is specified and shall furnish a good and sufficient maintenance bond in the amount of 100 percent of the amounts of the contract which shall ass�are the performance of the general guaranty as above�outlined. The Owner will give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. �� C8-8.11 SUBSIDIARY WORK: Any:eand all work specifically governed by documentary requirements for the project, such as nditions imposed by the Plans, the General Coritract Documents or these Special Contract�ocuments, in which no specific item for bid has been provided for in the Proposal, shall be"considered as a subsidiary ifem of.,work, the cost of which shall be included in the price bid in the Proposal, for each bid item. Surface r�storation, rock excavation and clean;�p are general items of work which fall in the category of subsidiary work. � � C8-8.12 MISCELLANEOUS PLACEMENT OF MATERIAL: Material may be allocated under various bid items in the Propos�� to establish unit prices for miscellaneous placement of material. These materials shall be used only when directed by the Engineer, depending on field conditions. Payment for miscellaneous placement of material will be made for only that amount of material used, measured tot he nearest one-tenth unit. Payment for rniscellaneous placement of material' �shall be in accordance with the General Contract Documents regardless of the actual amount used for the Project. . � C8-8.13 RECORD DOCUMENTS: '�he Contractor shall keep on record a copy of all specifications, plans, addenda, modifj�ations, shop drawings and samples at the site, in good order and annotated to show all changes made during the construction process. These shall be delivered to the Engineer upon�completion of the work. E .� L'J l "'1 ��- I.�J -��- LJ � �J � � � � Z � � ;�� n� � � fk �e °� . � � �6 i� . y 1333018 — South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements �. i 1� C8-8 Measurement and Payment PAG E 4 � � 1 ' 1 1 � � � 1 � � 1 � ' ' 1 1 ' 1 1 PART CS SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 0 � � �u C PART CS - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FORT WORTH, WATER DEPARTMENT WATER AND WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT PROJECTS June 1, 1998 1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: In Section C1-1.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, delete Paragraph C1-1.2b SPECIAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS and add the following: "b. SPECIAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Special Contract Documents are prepared for each specific project as a supplement to the General Contract Documents and include the following items: � PART A- NOTICE TO BIDDERS (Advertisement) SPECIAL INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS PART B - PROPOSAL (Bid) .- M/WBE BID SPECIFICATIONS � PART C - GENERAL CONDITIONS PART CS- SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS � PART D - SPECIAL CONDITIONS PART E - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PERMITS/EASEMENTS (Some Permits are Multicolored) PART F- BONDS AND INSURANCE � PART G - CONTRACT � PART H- PLANS/FIGURES (may be bound separately) White White White Golden Rod Canary Yellow Green Green White White White White White" ' 2. DIRECTOR OF TRANSPORATION AND PUBLIC WORKS: Delete entire Paragraph C1- �,,; 1.17, and replace with the following: C1-1.17 DIRECTOR OF TRANSPORATION AND PUBLIC WORKS: The officially � appointed Director of the Transportation and Public Works Department of the City of Fort Worth, or his duly authorized representative, assistant, or agents. 3. DIRECTOR OF ENGINEERING: Add the following paragraph after C1-1.17 and before C1-1.18: ' C1-1.17A DIRECTOR OF ENGINEERING: The officially appointed Director of the � Department of Engineering of the City of Fort Worth, referred to in the charter as the City Engineer, or his duly authorized representative assistant, or agents. � � � � �. �., 4. ENGINEER: Delete entire Paragraph C1-1.19, and replace with the following: The Director of the Fort Worth Department of Engineering, the Director of Fort Worth Transportation and Public Works Department, the Director of the Fort Worth Water Department, or their duly authorized assistants, agents, engineers, inspectors, or superintendents, acting within the scope of the particular duties entrusted to them. 5. PROPOSAL FORM: In Section C2-2.1, Paragraph 1, revise last sentence to read as follows: "The Bidder shall furnish a Financial Statement, Equipment Schedule, and Experience Record, all of which must be properly executed and filed with the Director of the Water Department one week prior to the hour for opening of bids. Information shall be on forms provided by the Bidder and acceptable to the City. 1333018 — South Holly WTP Section SC — Supplementary Conditions Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAG� 1 � 6. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE OF PROJECT: In Section C2-2.3, Paragraph 2, add the following to the last sentence: "except for changes in the site conditions caused by factors outside of the control of the Contractor which occur after the Contractor's inspection and prior to installation." 7. INTERPRETATION AND PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL: Part C- General Conditions, Section C2-2, exchange paragraphs C2-2.7, C2-2.8, and C2-2.9 with the following: � � � C2-2.7 DELIVERY OF PROPOSAL: No proposal will be considered unless it is delivered, accompanied by its proper Bid Security and other required material, to the � Purchasing Manager or his representative at the official location and stated time set forth ` in the proposal at the proper time to the proper place. The mere fact that a proposal was dispatched will not be considered. The Bidders must have the proposal actually delivered. Each proposal shall be in a sealed envelope plainly marked with the word �` "PROPOSAL" and the name or description of the project designated in the "Notice To Bidders". The envelope shall be addressed to the Purchasing Manager, City of Fort � Worth Purchasing Division, PO Box 17027, Fort Worth, Texas 76102. � C2-2.8 WITHDRAWING PROPOSALS: Proposals actually filed with the Purchasing Manager cannot be withdrawn prior to the time set for the opening of proposals. A � request for non consideration of a proposal must be made in writing, addressed to the City Manager, and filed with him prior to the time set for the opening of proposals. After all proposals not requested for non-consideration are opened and publicly read aloud, � the proposals for which non-consideration requests have been properly filed may, at the option of the Owner, be returned unopened. C2-2.9 TELEGRAPHIC MODIFICATION OF PROPOSALS: Any bidder may modify his � proposal by telegraphic communication at any time prior to the time set for opening proposals, provided such telegraphic communication is received by the Purchasing � Manager prior to the said proposal opening time, and provided further, that the City Manager is satisfied that a written and duly authenticated confirmation of such telegraphic communication over the signature of the bidder was mailed prior to the proposal opening time. If such confirmation is not received within forty-eight (48) hours � after the proposal opening time, no further consideration will be given to the proposal. ' ' 1 1 ' 1333018 — South Holly WTP Section SC — Supplementary Conditions Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 2 � � �. L 8. MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE/WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE COMPLIANCE: Delete entire Paragraph C3-3.2, and replace with the following: C3-3.2 MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISENVOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE COMPLIANCE: Upon request, Contractor agrees to provide to Owner complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed by a Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and/or a Woman Business Enterprise (WBE) on the contract and payment therefore. Contractor further agrees to permit an audit and/or examination of any books, records or files in its possession that will substantiate the actual work performed by an MBE and/or WBE. The misrepresentation of facts (other than a negligent misrepresentation) and/or the commission of fraud by the Contractor will be grounds for termination of the contract and/or initiating action under appropriate federal., state or local laws or ordinances relating to false statements; further, any such misrepresentation (other than a negligent misrepresentation) and/or commission of fraud will result in the Contractor being determined to be irresponsible and barred from participating in City work for a period of time of not less than three (3) years. 9. C3-3.5 AWARD OF CONTRACT is modified to read as follows: � '`The Owner reserves the right to withhold final action on the proposals for a reasonable time, not to exceed the period stated for the duration of the Bid Security stated in the Notice to Bidders or 90 days, whichever is shorter." �� 10. C3-3.7 BONDS. For the Paragraph after Paragraph C3-3.7d OTHER BONDS, which begins with "No sureties", change the entire paragraph to read as follows: �_ "No Sureties will be accepted by the Owner which are at the time in default or delinquent on any bonds or which are interested in any litigation against the Owner. All bonds shall be made on the forms furnished by the Owner and the surety shall be acceptable to the � Owner. In order for a surety to be acceptable to the Owner: (1) the name of the surety shall be included on the current U.S. Treasury List of Acceptable Sureties {Circular 870}, or � (2) the surety must have capital and surplus equal to ten times the amount of the bond. The surety must be licensed to do business in the State of Texas. The amount of the � amount of the bond shall not exceed the amount shown on the treasury list or one-tenth (1/10) of the total capital and surplus. If reinsurance is required, the company writing the reinsurance must be authorized, accredited or trusteed to do business in the State of � Texas. Each bond shall be properly executed by both the Contractor and the Bonding Company." � ' � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Section SC — Supplementary Conditions � Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 3 11.0 INSURANCE. Change the following portions of C3-3.11 Insurance as shown below: 11.1 INSURANCE FOR SUBCONTRACTORS: At the end of the first paragraph of Section C3-3.11, after "and for all subcontractors", insert the following sentence: "The General Contractor may require all subcontractors to be insured and submit documentation ensuring that the requirements of C3-3.11 are met for all subcontractors." 11.2 INSURANCE LIMITS. In Section C3-3.11, after the word "occurrence", add "/aggregate". 11.3 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE: In Paragraph C3-3.11 b: Replace the word "Comprehensive" with "Commercial" Add the following to Paragraph C3-3.11 b: "Certificates of insurance shall state that Insurance is on an "occurrence" basis." Certificate shall also contain a statement that no exclusions by endorsement have been made to the Commercial General Liability Policy". 11.4 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY (CGL) POLICY: Amend Paragraph C3-3.11 c, Additional Liability, by adding the following: "7. When required by the Contract Documents, Environmental Impairment Liability Coverage must be provided in the limits of $1,000,000 per occurrence and $2,000,000 annual aggregate. The Environmental Impairment Liability (EIL) must contain coverage for sudden and accidental contamination or pollution, liability for gradual emissions, and clean-up costs. The EIL coverage shall include two year completed operations coverage on a per Project basis. A separate insurance policy may be needed to fulfill this requirement. EIL for damages incurred in the course of transporting sludge shall be covered under the contractor's insurance policy(s)." 11.5 AUTOMOBILE INSURANCE LIMITS: Revise Paragraph C3-3.11d so that the insurance limits are as follows: Bodily Injury $250,000 each person Bodily Injury $500,000 aggregate Property Damage $100,000 aggregate 11.6 LOCAL AGENT FOR INSURANCE AND BONDING: For Paragraph C3-3.11 g, delete entire paragraph beginning "Local Agent for Insurance and Bonding". 12. LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL CHARGES (Fieference C4-4.5c): The Contractor agrees that should any change in the work of extra work be ordered, the following applicable percentage shall be added to Material and Labor Costs to cover overhead and profit: 1. Allowance to the Contractor for overhead and profit for extra work performed by the Contractor's own forces shall not exceed 15%. 2. Allowance to the Contractor for overhead and profit for extra work performed by a subcontractor and supervised by the Contractor shall not exceed 10%. 1333018 — South Holly WTP Section SC — Supplementary Conditions Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 4 � � Contractor shall be reimbursed for direct field overhead when the change requires an � extension of the Contract period. Contractor shall not be reimbursed for indirect overhead or indirect costs related to changes to this contract. 13. TESTING COSTS: Section 5-5.12, revise the first sentence to read as follows: "Where, as called for in the Contract Documents, tests of materials or equipment are � necessary, such tests will be made at the expense of and paid for by the Contractor � unless otherwise specifically provided for in the Technical Specifications." 14. LAWS TO BE OBSERVED: Section C6-6.1, delete "or which may be enacted later". �� After the word "exist" add "at the time of the Contract or may be hereafter exist during the performance of the Contract." �- 15. BUILDING PERMITS: Paragraph C6-6.2 Insert the following at the end of the paragraph; � "Contractors are responsible for obtaining construction permits from the governing agencies. Contractor shall schedule all code inspections with the Code Inspection Department in accordance with the permit requirements and submit copy of updated � schedule to the Engineer weekly. Building, plumbing, electrical and mechanical building permits are issued without charge. Water and sewer access fees will be paid by the Water Department. Any other permit fees are the responsibility of the Contractor." 16. BARRICADES, WARNINGS AND FLAGMEN: In Paragraph C6-6.8, replace the word "watchmen" wherever in appears with the word "flagmen". In the first paragraph, lines five (5) and six (6), replace "take all such other precautionary measures" with "take � all reasonable necessary measures". � � � � r i�. � 17. STATE SALES TAX: A. Delete Paragraph C6-6.21 STATE SALES TAX in its entirety. B. This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption pursuant to the provisions of Article 20.04 (F) of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise, and Use Tax Act. All equipment and materials not consumed by or incorporated into the project construction are subject to State Sales Tax under House Bill 11, enacted August 15, 1991. all such taxes shall be included in the various amounts on the Proposal Form. The successful Bidder shall be required to submit a breakdown between costs of labor, consumable material and other construction costs and costs of material incorporated into the project construction prior to execution of this contract. B. At the time of execution of the Contract Documents by the Contractor, the Contractor shall complete the "Statement of Materials and Other Charges" which identifies the project costs anticipated in the Project into "Materials Incorporated into the ProjecY' and "All Other Charges". The Contract shall be a"Separated Contract". C. The City of Fort Worth will issue appropriate Certificates of Resale to the Contractor. D. All Change Orders to the Contract will separate charges for materials and labor and will contain the following statement: 1333018 — South Holly WTP Section SC — Supplementary Conditions Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 5 "For purposes of complying with Texas Tax Code, the Contractor agrees that the charges for material incorporated into the project in excess of the estimated quantity provided for herein will be no less than the invoice price for such material to the Contractor." 18. PARTIAL PAYMENTS: Change Paragraph C8-8.5 to read as follows: "Partial pay estimates shall be submitted by the Contractor 5th day and the 20th day of the month that work has been is in progress. The estimate shall be processed by the City on the 10th day and 25th day respectively. Estimates will be paid within 25 days following the end of the estimate period, less the appropriate retainage as set out below. Partial pay estimates may include acceptable nonperishable materials delivered to the work place which are to be incorporated into the work as a permanent part thereof, but which at the time of pay estimate have not been so installed. If such materials are included within a pay estimate, payment shall be based upon 85% of the net invoice value thereof. The Contractor will furnish the engineer such information as may be reasonably requested to aid in the verification or the preparation of the pay estimate. For contracts of less than $400,000.00 at the execution, retainage shall be ten percent (10%). For contracts of $400,000.00 or more at the time of execution, retainage shall be five percent (5%). Contractor shall pay subcontractors in accord with subcontract agreement, within five (5) business days after receipt by the Contractor of the payment by the City. Contractor's failure to make the required payment to subcontractors will authorize the City to withhold future payments from the Contractor until compliance with this paragraph is accomplished. It is understood that the partial pay estimates will be approximate only, and all partial pay estimates and payment of the same will be subject to correction in the estimate rendered following the discovery of an error in any previous estimate. Payment of any partial pay estimate shall not, in any respect, be taken as an admission of the Owner of the amount of work done or of its quality of sufficiency, or as an acceptance of the work done or the release of the Contractor of any of his responsibilities under the Contract Documents. The City reserves the right to withhold the payment of any partial estimate if the Contractor fails to perform the work in strict accordance with the specifications or other provisions of this Contract." 19. RIGHT TO AUDIT: Add the following to Section C8-8: C-8-8.14 RIGHT TO AUDIT: "(a) The Contractor agrees that the Ciry shall, until the expiration of three (3) years after final payment under this contract, have access to and the right to examine and photocopy any directly pertinent books, documents, papers, and records of the Contractor involving transactions relating to this Contract. Contractor agrees that the Ciry shall have access during normal working hours to all necessary Contractor facilities and shall be provided adequate and appropriate work space in order to conduct audits in compliance with the provisions of this section. The City shall give Contractor reasonable advance notice of intended audits. (b) Contractor further agrees to include in all its subcontracts hereunder a provision to the effect that the subcontractor agrees that the City shall, until the expiration of three (3) 1333018 — South Holly WTP Section SC — Supplementary Conditions Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 6 � r �. � years after final payment under this contract, have access to and the right to examine ' and photocopy any directly pertinent books, documents, papers, and records of such �" subcontractor, involving transactions to the subcontract, and further, that City shall have ,�.. access during normal working hours to all subcontractor facilities, and shall be provided adequate and appropriate work space in order to conduct audits in compliance with the provisions of this article together with subsection (c) hereof. The Ciry shall give subcontractor reasonable advance notice of intended audits. �- (c) Contractor and subcontractor agree to photocopy such documents as may be requested by the City. The City agrees to reimburse contractor for the cost of the copies ' as follows: i,.. 1. 50 Copies and Under - 10 cents per page. r- 2. More than 50 copies - 85 cents for the first page plus fifteen cents for each page thereafter." (5/25/93) �. 20. SCHEDULE OF COSTS: Add the following to Section C8-8: C8=8.15 SCHEDULE OF COSTS: Following the completion of all work on the Project � and prior to submittal of a request for final payment, the Contractor shall provide a Schedule of Costs to City for approval which lists all equipment systems, structures, building electrical and HVAC systems, overhead and project related costs. The items will � be grouped into categories using the Owner's list of category codes which will be � provided by the Owner at the Preconstruction Conference. � �, r c.,. �. �, � ' i 1 � The Schedule of Costs will be used by the City as input to the Capital Assets System, and will not be considered in preparation of modifications to the Contract. Costs associated with the preparation and processing of this schedule of costs shall be subsidiary to the price bid. The Contractor will also provide a projected payment schedule tied to the project schedule and the schedule of values which projects the monthly payments through the end of the Project. The Payment schedule must be submitted along with the first request for payment. This information is necessary to arrange financing of the Project by the City. END OF SECTION 1333018 — South Holly WTP Section SC — Supplementary Conditions �' Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 7 , �. � L�� L �� IJ � !J I�J �� ■J � � � L� PART D SPECIAL CONDITIONS l�l u � L�J u � u u L�J � PART D SPECIAL CONDITIONS D-1 GENERAL: - Subject to modifications as herein contained, the Fort Worth Water DepartmenYs General Contract Documents and General Specifications. effective July 1, 1978, are made part of the Contract Documents for this Project. The Plans, Special conditions and Provisions Documents, and the rules, regulations, requirements, instructions, drawings and details referred to by manufacturer's name, number or identification included therein as specifying, referring or implying product control, performance, quality, or other shall be binding upon the Contractor. The Specifications and drawings shall be considered cooperative; therefore, work or material called for by one and not shown or mentioned in the other shall be accomplished or furnished in a faithful manner as though required by all. The order or precedence in case of conflicts or discrepancies betwe.en various parts of the Contract Documents subject to the ruling of the Engineer shall generally, but not necessarily, follow the guidelines listed below: 1. Plans 2. Special Contract Documents 3. General Contract Documents and General Specifications The following Special Conditions shall be applicable to this project and shall govern any conflicts with the General Contract documents under the provisions stated above. ` � D-2 PROJECT DESIGNATION: Construction under these Special Documents shall be performed under the Fort Worth Water Department Project Designations: L�J L� l�! L�J � l■1 I� �! Water Project Number PW 77-060770500090 D-3 PROJECT SIGNS: � Project Signs are required at all locations which will be under construction for more than thirty (30) calendar days as indicated in Part B Proposal. Project Signs shall be in accordance with Figure 30 (dated 8-28-89) of the General Contract Documents. The signs may be mounted on skids or on posts. The exact locations and methods of mounting shall be approved by the engineer. Any and all costs for the required materials, labor, and equipment necessary for the furnishing of Project Signs shall be considered as a subsidiary cost of the project and no additional compensation will be allowed. , D-4 CITY FURNISHED MATERIALS: For water projects, the City will furnish "pipe cleaning pigs," chlorine gas or chlorinated lime (HTH) and all water for initial cleaning and sterilization of water lines. All other materials for construction of the project, including water for compaction, shall be furnished by the Contractor. D-5 WAGE RATES: The labor classifications and minimum wage rates set forth herein have been predetermined by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth, Texas, in accordance with statutory requirements, as being the prevailing classifications and rates that shall govern on all work performed by the Contractor or any subcontractor on the site of the project covered by these Contract Documents. In no event shall less that the following rates be paid. (see attached wage rates) When two or 1333018 — South Holly WTP Section D— Special Conditions Cagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 1 more wage rate scales are shown and wage rates shown in specific classifications are in conflict, the higher wage will be used. D-6 DEWATERING: The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the method of dewatering operation for the water or sewage flows from the existing mains and ground water. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage of any nature resulting from the dewatering operations. The � DISCHARGE from any dewatering operation shall be conducted as approved by the Engineer. Ground water shall not be discharged into sanitary sewers. Dewatering shall be considered as incident�l to a construction and all costs incurred will be considered to be included in the linear foot bid price of the pipe. D-7 EXISTING UTILTIES: � The plans show the locations of all known surface and subsurface structures. However, the Owner assumes no responsibility for failure to show any or all of these structures on the Plans, or to show them in their exact location. It is mutually agreed that such failure shall not be considered sufficient basis for claims for additional compensation for extra work or for increasing the pay quantities in any manner whatsoever. The Contractor shall. be responsible' for verifying the locations of and protecting all existing utilities, service lines, or other properry crossed or exposed by his construction operations. Contractor shall make all necessary provisions for the support, protection, relocation, and or temporary relocation of all utility poles, gas lines, telephone cables, utiliry services, water mains, sanitary sewer lines, electrical cables, drainage pipes, and all other utilities and structures both above and below ground during construction. The Contractor is liable for all damages done to such existing facilities as a result of his operations and any and all cost incurred for the protection and or temporary relocation of such facilities shall be included in the cost bid per linear foot of pipe installed. NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION WILL BE ALLOWED. Where existing utilities or service lines are cut, broken or damaged, the Contractor shall replace or repair the utilities or service� lines with the same type of original material and construction, or better, unless otherwise shown or noted on the plans, at his own cost and expense. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner of the damaged utility or service iine. He shall cooperate with the owners of all utilities to locate existing underground facilities and notify the Engineer at once of any conflicts in grades and alignment. In case it is necessary to change or move the property of any owner of a public utility, such property shall not be moved or interfered with until ordered to do so by the Engineer. The right is reserved to the owner of public utilities to enter upon the limits of the project fo� the purpose of making such changes or repairs, of their properry that may be made necessary by performance of this contract. D-8 EXPLORATORY EXCAVATIONS: In addition to those areas as may be designated on the Drawings, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to excavate and locate existing utilities which may affect construction of the water and/or sewer facilities. All exploratory excavations shall occur far enough in advance to permit any necessary relocation to be made with minimum delay. All costs incurred by the Contractor in making exploratory excavations shall be considered to be included in the unit price bid for constructing of water/sewer line or the associated structures. � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Section D— Special Conditions Cagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 2 � l�l L■J I!1 l� u � � u � I�l I �l D-9 TEST HOLES: The matter of subsurface exploration to ascertain the nature of the soils, including the amount of rock, if any, through which this pipeline installation is to be made is the responsibility of any and all prospective bidders, and any bidder on this project shall submit his bid under the condition. Whether prospective bidders perform this subsurface exploration jointly or independently, and whether they make such determinations by the use of test holes or other means, shall be left to the discretion of such prospective bidders. The cost of the rock removal and other associated appurtenances, if required, shall be included in the linear foot bid price of the pipe. D-10 SUBSTITUTIONS: The specifications for materials set out the minimum standard of quality which the City believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. No substitutions will be permitted until the Contractor has received written permission of the Engineer to make a substitution for the material which has been specified. Where the term "or equal," or " or approved equal" is used, it is understood that if a material, product, or piece of equipment bearing the name so used is furnished it will be approvable, as the particular trade name was used for the purpose of establishing a standard of quality acceptable to the City. If a product of any other name is proposed for use, the Engineer's approval the'reof must be obtained before the proposed substitute is procured by the Contractor. Where the term "or equal," or "or approved equal" is not used in the specifications, this does not necessarily exclude alternative items or material or equipment which may accomplish the intended purpose. However, the Contractor shall have the full responsibility of proving that the proposed substitution is, in fact, equal, and the Engineer, as the representative of the City, shall be the sole judge of the acceptability of substitutions. The provisions of this sub-section as related to "Substitutions" shall be applicable to all sections of these specifications. D-11 TRENCH SAFETY: 1. GENERAL: This specification covers the trench safety requirements for all trench excavations in order to protect workers from cave-ins. The requirements of this item govern all trenches for mains, manholes, vaults, service lines, and all other appurtenances. 2. STANDARDS: The latest version of the U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety � and Health Administration Standards, 29 CFR Part 1926, Subpart P-Excavations, are hereby made a part of this specification and shall be the minimum governing requirements for trench safety. L�l 3. DEFINITIONS: A. TRENCHES: A trench is referred to as a narrow excavation made below the surface of � the ground in which the depth is greater than the width, where the width measured at the bottom is not greater than fifteen (15) feet. If forms or other structures are installed or constructed in an excavation so as to reduce the dimension measured from the forms or �structure to the side of the excavation to fifteen (15) feet or less at the bottom of the . excavation, the excavation is also considered to be a trench. L■J � B. BENCHING SYSTEM: Benching means excavating the sides of a trench to form one or a series of horizontal levels or steps, usually with vertical or near-vertical surfaces between levels. ' 1333018 — South Holly WTF� Section D— Special Conditions � Cagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 3 C. SLOPING SYSTEM: Sloping means excavating to form sides of a trench that are inclined away from the excavation. D. SHIELD SYSTEM: Shields used in trenches are generally referred to as "trench boxes" or "trench shields." Shield means a structure that is able to withstand the forces imposed on it by a cave-in and protect workers within the structure. Shields can be permanent structures or can be designed to be portable and move along as the work progresses. Shields can be either premanufactured or job-built in accordance with OSHA standards. � E. SHORING SYSTEM: Shoring means a structure such as a metal hydraulic, mechanical or timber system that supports the sides of a trench and which is designed to prevent cave-ins. Shoring systems are generally comprised of crossbraces, vertical rails (uprights), horizontal rails (wales) and/or sheeting. 4. MEASUREMENT: Trench depth is the vertical measurement from the top of the existing ground to the bottom of the pipe or structures. The quantity of trench safety systems shall be based on the linear foot amount of trench depth greater than five (5) feet. 5. PAYMENT: Separate payment will be made only when trench excavations exceed a depth of five (5) feet and shall be full compensation for safety system design, labor, tools, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary for the installation and removal of trench safety systems. D-12 VALVE BLOCKING: All valves shall have concrete blocking for support. Valves shall have polyethylene wrapping per Material Specification E1-13 and Construction Specification E2-13 installed prior to concrete blocking. No separate payment will be made for any of the work involved for this item and all costs incurred will be considered to be incfuded in the bid price of the valve. D-13 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND GRAY-IRON FITfINGS: Reference Part E2 Construction Specifications, Section E2-7 Installing Cast Iron Pipe, Fittings, and Specials, Sub Section E2-7.11 Cast Iron Fittings: the first Paragraph shall be revised to read as follows: "E2-7.11 DUCTILE-IRON AND GRAY-IRON FITTINGS: All ductile-iron and gray-iron fittings shall be furnished with cement mortar lining as stated in Section E1-7. The price bid per ton of fittings shall be payment in full for all fittings, joint accessories, polyethylene wrapping, horizontal concrete blocking, vertical tie-down concrete blocking, and concrete cradle necessary for construction as designed. All ductile-iron and gray-iron fittings, valves and specials shall be wrapped with polyethylene wrapping conforming to Material Specification E1-13 and Construction Specification E2-13. Wrapping shall precede horizontal concrete blocking, vertical tie-down concrete blocking, and concrete cradle. Payment for the polyethylene wrapping, horizontal concrete blocking, vertical tie-down concrete blocking, and concrete cradle shall be included in bid items for valves and fittings and no other payment will be allowed." D-14 DETECTABLE WARNING TAPES: 1333018 — South Holly WTP Section D— Special Conditions Cagulant Feed System Improvements PAG� 4 � � L�J l�l � � LiJ L�l L�J li' L1 L!J L�' � 'sJ � � � Detectable underground utility warning tapes which can be located from the surface by a pipe detector shall be installed directly above non-metallic water or sanitary sewer pipe. The detectable tape shall be "Detect Tape" manufactured by Allen Systems Inc. or approved equal, and shall consist of a minimum thickness 0.35 mils solid aluminum foil encased in a protective inert plastic jacket that is impervious to all known alkalis, acids, chemical reagents and solvents found in the soil. The minimum overall thickness of the tape shall be 5.5 mils. and the width shall not be less than 2" inches with a minimum unit weight of 2-1/2 pounds/1 "/1000'. The tape shall be color coded and imprinted with the message as follows: Tvpe of Utilitv Color Code Lepends Water Safety Blue Caution Buried Water Line Below Sewer Safety Green Caution Buried Sewer Line Below Installation of detectable tapes shall be per manufacturer's recommendations and shall be as close to the grade as is practical for optimum protection and detectability. Allow a minimum of 18" inches between the tape and the pipe. Payment for work such as backfill, bedding, blocking, detectable tapes and all other associated appurtenances' required shall be included in the subsidiary to the cost of pipe installation. D-15 CONNECTION OF EXISTING MAINS: . The Contractor shall determine the exact location, elevation, configuration and angulation of existing water or sanitary sewer lines prior to manufacturing of the connecting piece. Any differences in locations, elevation, configuration, and or angulation of existing lines between the contract drawings and what may be encountered in the said work shall be considered as incidental to construction. Where it is required to shut down existing mains in order to make proposed connections, such down time shall be coordinated with the Engineer, and all efforts shall be made to keep this down time to a minimum. In case of shutting down an existing main, the Contractor shall notify the Engineering Construction Services Manager or Superintendent, Phone 817-871-8306, at least 48-hours prior to the required shut down time. The Contractor's attention is directed to Paragraph C5-5.15 INTERRUPTION OF SERVICE, Page C5-5(5), PART C- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE WATER DEPARTMENT GENERAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS. The Contractor shall notify customer, both personally and in writing, as to the location, time, and schedule of the service interruption. The cost of removing any existing concrete blocking shall be included in the cost of connection. Unless bid separately all cost incurred shall be included in the linear foot price for the appropriate pipe size. D-16 CONNECTION TO EXISTING STRUCTURES: All connections between proposed and existing facilities, shall consist of a watertight seal. Concrete used in the connection shall be Class A(3000 psi) concrete and meet the requirements of Section E1-20 and E2-20 of the General Contract Documents. Prior to concrete placement, a gasket, RAM-Nek or approved equal, shall be ins�alled around penetrating pipe. Payment for such work as connecting to existing facilities including all labor, tools, equipment, and material necessary to complete the work shall be included in the linear price of the appropriate pipe size. D-17 TEMPORARY SOIL EROSION SEDIMENT AND WATER POLLUTION CONTROL:. 1333018 — South Holly WTP Section D— Special Conditions QCagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 5 � 1. DESCRIPTION: This item shall consist of temporary soil erosion sediment and water pollution control measures deemed necessary by the Engineer for the duration of the contract. These control measures shall at no time be used as a substitute for the permanent control measures unless otherwise directed by the Engineer and they shall not include measures taken by the CONTRACTOR to control conditions created by his construction operations. The temporary measures shall include dikes, dams, berms, sediment basins, fiber mats, jute netting, temporary seeding, straw rriulch, asphalt mulch, plastic liners, rubble liners, baled-hay retards, dikes, slope drains and other devices. 2. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS: The Engineer has the authority to define erodible earth and the authoriry to limit the surface area of erodible-earth material exposed by preparing right-of-way, clearing and grubbing, the surface area of erodible-earth material exposed by excavation, borrow and to direct the CONTRACTOR to provide temporary pollution-control measures to prevent contamination of adjacent streams, other water courses, lakes, ponds or other areas of water impoundment. Such work may involve the construction of temporary berms, dikes, dams, sediment basins, slope drains and use of temporary mulches, mats seeding or other control devices or methods directed by the Engineer as necessary to control soil erosion. Temporary pollution-control measures shall be used to prevent or correct erosion that may develop during construction prior to installation of permanent pollution-control features, but are not associated with permanent control features on the project. The Engineer will limit the area of preparing right of way, clearing and grubbing, excavation and borrow to be proportional to the CONTRACTOR'S capability and progress in keeping the finish grading, mulching, seeding, ,and other such permanent pollution-control measures current in accordance with the accepted schedule. Should seasonal conditions make such limitations unrealistic, temporary soil-erosion-control measures shall be performed as directed by the Engineer. The amount of surface area of erodible-earth material exposed at one time shall not exceed 750,000 square feet for each excavation operation, 750,000 square feet for each material source operation (other than from commercially operated sources), 750,000 square feet for each preparing of right-of-way operation or 750,000 square feet for each clearing and grubbing operation, unless otherwise shown on the plans or with prior approval by the Engineer in writing. , � The CONTRACTOR shall also conform to the following practices and controls. All labor, tools, equipment and incidentals to complete the work will not be paid for directly but shall be considered as subsidiary work to the various items included in the contract. (a). Waste or disposal areas and construction roads shall be located and constructed in a manner that will minimize the amount of sediment entering streams. (b). Frequent fording of live streams will not be permitted; therefore, temporary bridges or other structures shall be used wherever an appreciable number of stream crossings are necessary. Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer, mechanized equipment shall not be operated in live streams. (c). When work areas or material sources are located in or adjacent to live streams, such areas shall be separated from the stream by a dike or other barrier to keep sediment from entering a flowing stream. Care shall be taken during the construction and removal of such barriers to minimize the muddying of a stream. I�I l�'J � � � (� � � LJ � I� � L�J L�, � �I l� ��l 1333018 — South Holly WTP Section D— Special Conditions Cagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 6 � L' LJ !� L�J � � i I, � � � I_el (d). All waterways shall be cleared as soon as practicable of falsework, piling, debris or other obstructions placed during construction operations that are not a part of the finished work. (e). The CONTRACTOR shall take sufficient precautions to prevent pollution of streams, lakes and reservoirs with fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride or other harmful materials. He shall conduct and schedule his operations so as to avoid or minimize siltation of streams, lakes and reservoirs and to avoid interference with movement of migratory fish. 3. SUBMITTAL: Prior to the start of the applicable construction, the CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval his schedules for accomplishment of soil-erosion-control work and his plan to keep the area of erodible-earth material to a minimum. He shall also submit for acceptance his proposed method of soil-erosion control on construction and haul roads and material sources and his plan for disposal of waste materials. No work shall be started until the soil- erosion control schedules and methods of operations have been reviewed and approved by the Engineer. 4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT: All wark, materials and equipment necessary to provide temporary erosion control shall be considered subsidiary to the contract and no extra pay will be given for this work. D-18 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE: A. Contractor's Worker's Compensation Insurance. Contractor agrees to provide the Owner (City) a certificate showing that it has obtained a policy of worker's compensation insurance covering each of its employees employed on the project in compliance with state law. No Notice to Proceed will be issued until the Contractor has complied with this section. B. Subcontractor's Worker's Compensation Insurance. � Contractor agrees to require each and every subcontractor who will perform work on the project to provide to it a certificate from such subcontractor stating that the subcontractor has a policy of worker's compensation insurance covering each employee on the project. Contractor will not � permit any subcontractor to perform work on the.project until such certificate has been acquired. Contractor shall provide a copy of all such certificates to the Owner (City). � � � �� L�J I� C. Worker's Compensation Insurance Coverage. 1. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate"). A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory worker's compensation insurance coverage for person's or entity's employees providing senrices on a project, for the duration of the project. � Duration of the Project - includes the time from he beginning of the work on the project until the contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the City. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontracto�" in Texas Labor Code Section 406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaking to perform on tlie project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This included, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, 1333018 — South Holly WTP Section D— Special Conditions � Cagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 7 leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Senrices" include without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the City prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the Ciry showing the coverage has been extended. 5. The contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the City: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the Ciry will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage,ends during the duration of the project. 6. The contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The Contractor shall notify the City in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or shoutd have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The contractor shall post on each p�oject site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by Texas Worker's Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the projects that they are required to be covered and report lack of coverage. 9. The contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting on the classification codes and 1333018 — South Holly WTP Section D— Special Conditions Cagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 8 � � L�:J L�J payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the contractor. prior to that person beginning work on the project, a � certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; � (c) provide the contractor. prior to the end of the coverage period a new certificate of coverage showing the extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; � L�1 (d) obtain from each other person with it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the ('� end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current �� certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; L�l (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for duration of project and for one year thereafter. � (f) notify the City in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and L■J LJ l�' L�J� C' � {■I (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (a) -(g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providin� or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the contractor is representing to the City that all employees of the contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on the proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. providing false or misleading information may subject the contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the contractor which entitles the City to declare the contract void if the contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the City. D. Posting of Required Worker's Compensation Coverage. The contractor shall post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting 1333018 — South Holly WTP Section D— Special Conditions � Cagulant Feed System Improvements PAG� 9 requirements imposed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Act or other Texas Workers' Compensation Commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 10 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text, without additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee. "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 512-440-3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage. D-19TESTING: ' a. The Contractor shall furnish, at his own expense, certifications by a private laboratory for all materials proposed to be used on the project, including a mix design for any asphaltic and/or Portland cement concrete to be used, and gradation analysis for sand and crushed stone to be used along with the name of the pit from which the material was taken. The Contractor shall provide manufacturer's certifications for all manufactured items to be used in the project and will bear any expense related thereto. b. Tests of the design concrete mix shall be made by the Contractor's laboratory at least nine days prior to the placing of concrete using the same aggregate, �cement, and mortar which are to be used later in the concrete. The Contractor shall provide a certified copy of the test results to the City. c. Quality control testing of in-place material on this project will be performed by the City at its own expense. Any retesting required as a result of failure of the material to meet project specifications will be at the expense of the Contractor and will be billed at commercial rates as determined by the City. The failure of the City to make any tests of materials shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish materials and equipment conforming to the requirements of the contract. d. Not less than 24 hours notice shall be provided to the City by the Contractor for operations requiring testing. The Contractor shall provide access and trench safety system (if required) for the site to be tested, and any work effort involved is deemed to be included in the unit price for the item being tested. e. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the trip ticket for each load of fill material delivered to the job site. The ticket shall specify ,the name of the pit supplying the fill material. D-20 SUBSIDIARY WORK: Any and all work specifically governed by documentary requirements for the project, such as conditions imposed by Plans, the General Contract Documents or these Special Contract Documents, in which no specific item for bid has been provided for in the proposal, shall be considered as a subsidiary item of work, the cost of which shall be included in the price bid in 1333018 — South Holly WTP Section D— Special Conditions Cagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 10 L1 LJ fal � � � � � � �' � liJ the Proposal for each bid item. Surface restoration and cleanup are general items of work which fall in the category of subsidiary work. D-21 ADDENDA: Bidders wanting further information, interpretation or clarification of the contract documents must make their request in writing to the Fort Worth Water Department Engineering Services, at least 96 hours prior to bid opening: Answers to all such requests will be bound and made a part of the Contract Documents. No other explanation or interpretation will be considered official or binding. Should a bidder find discrepancies in, or omissions from, the Contract Documents, or should the bidder be in doubt as to their meaning, the bidder should at once notify the Fort Worth Water Department Engineering Services, in order that a written addendum may be sent to all bidders. Any addenda issued will be mailed or be clelivered to each prospective bidder. The bid proposal as submitted by the bidder must be so constructed as to include anyaddenda issued by the Fort Worth Water Department, prior to 24 hour� of the opening of bids with appropriate recognition of addenda so noted in the bid proposal. D-22 OSHA STANDARDS: All work performed under this contract shall meet the requirements of the Occupational Safety and� Health Administration (OSHA),It is the responsibiliry of the Contractor to become familiar with the provisions of the regulations pu�lished by the OSHA in the Federal Register and to perform all the responsibilities thereunder. It is the Contractor's responsibility to see that the project is constructed in accordance with OSHA regulations and to indemnify,and save harmless the City from any penalties resulting from the Contractor's failure to so perform. D-23 PROJECT SUPERINTENDENTS: The Contractor shall keep a competent resident superintendent at the project site at all times during the progress of the work. A resum�e listing the qualifications and experience record of the proposed resident superintendent, as well as references from similar projects shall be submitted to the Owner prior to award of contract. 1"his resident superintendent, if found to be acceptable, shall not be replaced without written ruotice to and consent from the Owner except under extraordinary circumstances, Qualifications of a proposed replacement shall be submitted when a request is made for replacement of th� superintendent and shall be approved by the Owner prior to withdrawing the superintendent. � During the construction of the project, the resident superintendent shall demonstrate an ability to properly execute the work outlined in the contract documents in a timely manner and shall consistently produce work of an accEptable quality and in accordance with the contract � documents. If the Owner shall have a r�;asonable objection to the performance of the resident superintendent, the Contractor shall re�lace the resident superintendent upon written notice � from the Owner. The resident superintendent is to be replaced with a superintendent acceptable � to the Owner. No extension of time will be allowed for delays caused by the replacement of a resident representative. L�� !1 � liJ D-24 RESIDENT ENGINEER: The General Conditions, Section C1-1.19 ENGINEER, defines various persons who may be designated as the Engineer. For the prosecution of this contract, the Term Engineer shall mean the Resident Engineer as designated by the Director of the Fort Worth Water Department together with members of the staff of the Engineer who are assigned to the Project. Any contacts the contractor may wish to make with any City personnel, including the Water Production Supervisor, members of the plant operating staff, members of �the City Administration, or Consulting Engineers, shall be arranged through the Engineer. The 1333018 — South Holly WTP Section D— Special Conditions Cagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 11 Contractor shall not act upon requests or instructions he may receive from any City personnel or Consulting Engineers nor shall he give instructions or directions to such persons without the approval or consent of the Engineer. � D-25 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS: The Contractor shall take photographs of the project site prior to construction, monthly during construction of the project and after completion �of the project. Photographs may be taken with a quality 35mm or better camera, equipped to photograph either interior or exterior exposures, with lenses ranging from wide angle to 135mm. Photographs shall be taken at locations as designated by the Engineer. Contractor shall video tape all roads and work areas to be affected prior to starting construction and furnish a copy of the video tape to the Engineer. Two glossy color 3" x 5" prints and the negative shall be provided for each photograph taken. Each print shall be marked on the reserve side to indicate project name, date and time, location, direction of exposure, and description of what is b�eing photographed. Prints shall be clear and sharp with proper exposure. If prints of adequate quality are not produced from exposures, additional photographs shall be taken. � D-26 TERMINATION: It is understood and agreed that this contract may be terminated by the City without obligation to the Contractor, in whole or from time to time in part, whenever such termination is determined by the City to be in the best interests of the City. Termination may be effected by delivering to the Contractor or his designated representative a notice of termination, specifying to what extent performance of the work under the contract is being terminated and the effective date of termination. After receipt of notice of termination Contractor shall: 1. Stop work specified in the notice on the date and to the extent specified in the notice of termination. 2. Place no further order or subcontract except•as necessary to complete work already underway. 3. Terminate all orders and contracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of the work terminated by the Notice of Termination. D-27. HAZARDOUS AND TOXIC MATERIALS: Insofar as permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor from and against any and all liabilities, losses, cost, damages and expenses, arising out of use of the materials at the Owners site which are not under the direct control of the Contractor, including, but not limited to, any and all liability resulting from personal �injury, including death, property liability, at any time, however caused, due to the presence or release of, or exposure, whether to the person of properry injured or otherwise, whether to the person of property injured or otherwise, to any hazardous or toxic substance, provided, however, that the City liability shall be limited to that established in Article 6252-19, Texas Revised Code and other applicable State statutes and Constitutional provisions. -� D-28. SPOIL AND FILL MATERIAL: Prior to disposing on any spoil/fill material, the contractor shall advise the Director of Transportation and Public Works, acting as the City of Fort Worth's Flood Plain Administrator 1333018 — South Holly WTP � Section D— Special Conditions Cagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 12 � � � L' �� ("Administrator"), of the location of all sites where the contractor intends to dispose of such material. Contractor shall not dispose of such material until the proposed sites have been determined by the Administrator to meet the requirements of the Flood Plain Ordinance of the City of Fort Worth (Ordinance No 10056). All disposal sites must be approved by the Administrator to ensure that filling is not occurring within a flood plain without a permit. A flood plain permit can be issued upon approval of necessary engineering studies. No fill permit is required if disposal sites are not in a flood plain. Approval of the contractor's disposal sites shall be evidenced by a letter signed by the Administrator stating the site is not in a known flood plain of by a Flood Plain Fill Permit authorizing fill within the flood plain. Any expenses associated with obtaining the fill permit, including any necessary engineering studies, shall be at the contractor's expense. In the event the contractor disposes of spoil/fill material at a site without a fill permit or a letter from the Administrator approving the disposal site, upon notification by the Director of Transportation and Public Works, the contractor shall remove the spoil/fill material at its expense and dispose of such materials in accordance with the Ordinances of the City and this section. � D-29 AGE: In accordance with the policy "(Policy") of the Executive Branch of the Federal Government, Contractor covenants that neither it nor any of its officers, members, agents, employees, Q program participants or subcontractors, while engaged in performing this contract, shall, in connection with the employment, advancement or discharge of employees or in connection with the terms, conditions or privileges of their employment, discriminate against persons because of Q their age except on the basis of a bona fide occupational qualification, retirement plan or statutory requirement. L!J L� Contractor further covenants that neither it nor its officers, members, agents, employees, subcontractors, program participants, or persons acting on their behalf, shall specify, in solicitations or advertisements for employees to work on this contract, a maximum age limit for such employment unless the specified maximum age limit is based upon a bona fide occupational qualification, retirement plan or statutory requirement. � Contractor warrants it will fully comply with the policy and will defend, indemnify and hold City � harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractor against City arising out of Contractor's and/or its subcontractors' alleged failure to comply with the above referenced Policy concerning age discrimination in the performance of this agreement. � �I � L�J D-30 DISABILITY: In accordance with the provisions of the Americans With Disabilities Act of 1990 ("ADA"), Contractor warrants that it any and all of its subcontractors will not unlawfully discriminate on the basis of disability in the provision of services to the general public, nor in the availability, terms and/or conditions of employment for applicants for employment with, or employees of Contractor or any of its subcontractors. Contractor warrants it will fully comply with ADA's provisions and any other applicable federal, state and local laws concerning disability and will defend, indemnify and hold City harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractors against City arising out of Contractor's and/or its subcontractor's alleged failure to comply with the above-referenced law concerning disability discrimination in the performance of this agreement. D-31 INDEMNIFICATION: 1333018 — South Holly WTF' Section D— Special Conditions � Cagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 13 � To clarify Section C6-6.12 of the General Conditions of the Contract, it is the intent of the Owner that the Contractor indemnify, hold harmless and defend the Owner, and the Owner's officers, agents, servants, and employees from and against any and all claims as listed herein, even though causes by the Owner's sole negligence. With respect to the last sentence of the first paragraph of Section C6-6.12, it is the Owner's intent that the language be site specific to the general area where the work to be performed under the Contract is being performed. It is not the Owner's intent that the Contractor be required to indemnify the Owner for damages to property other than that caused to property located in close proximiry to this project, unless such damage is caused wholly or in part by the Contractor's negligence. . D-32 CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATION A. CONTRACTOR MODIFICATION REQUEST(CMR)/PROPOSED CONTRACT MODIFICATION(PCNI): Any Change in the Contract Documents will be initiated either by the Contractor issuing a Contractor's Modification request (CMR) or by the Owner issuing a Proposed Contract Modification (PCM) on forms provided by the Owner. Proposals will be reviewed by the Owner and if found acceptable, will be incorporated in a Change Order or a Field Order in accordance with Section C4-4 of the Contract Documents. The Contractor's Modification request (CMR) shall fully identify and describe the deviations and associated costs, time factors and impacts, and state the reason the change is requested. Any savings in costs related to the substitution/replacement or change is to be stated in the request for consideration. Cost of the Engineer's evaluation of any substitution or deviation requested by the Contractor shall be charged to the� �ontractor by the Owner. B.PROJECT INFORMATION REQUEST When necessary, the Contractor shall request additional information, clarification or interpretation of the contract documents or when the Contractor believes there is a conflict between the contract drawings and specification, the Contractor shall identify the conflict and/or request clarification/additional information using the Project Information Request (PIR) form provided by the Owner. Sufficient information shall be attached to permit a written response without further information. The Owner will log each request and will review the request. If review of the Project information request (PIR) indicates that a change to the contract documents is required, the Owner will issue either a Field Order(FO) or Proposed Contract Modification (PCM). C. RECORD DRAWINGS � The Contractor shall keep on record at the site a copy of all Contract Specifications, Plans, Addenda, modifications, record and shop drawings and samples, in good condition and annotated in erasable red pencil to show all changes made during the construction process. These shall be delivered to the Engineer upon completion of the work and before final payment is made. The Contractor shall retain for record purposes only, all designs and plans prepared for construction which are prepared and sealed by a State of Texas Registered Professional L+'J � � �!' L"] � � L] � � � L�'] LJ ��i �' LJ 1333018 — South Holly WTP Section D— Special Conditions Cagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE.14 � 'J � � L� � L�i � � � L� LJ L!i � � L�J l�'J L!� � I � � Engineer. Said design and plans shall include, but not be limited to. paving, buildings, mechanical and electrical systems, foundation, etc. 1333018 — South Holly WTP Section D— Special Conditions � Cagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 15 L�J L*J � L�i � L�' L�' � � � � �`J �;J C' � L�J �•, �J 1999 BUILDING & CONSTRUCTION TRADE STANDARD WAGE RATE FOR TARRANT COUNTY CLASSIFICATION AIR CONDITIONING MECHANIC AIR CONDITIONING MECHANIC HELPER ACOUSTIC CEILING INSTALLER ACOUSTIC CEILING INSTALLER HELPER BRICKLAYER/STONE MASON BRICKLAYER/STONE MASON HELPER CARPENTER CARPENTER HELPER CONCRETE FINISHER CONCRETE FINISHER HELPER CONCRETE FORM BUILDER CONCRETE FORM BUILDER HELPER DRYWALL TAPER DRYWALL TAPER HELPER ELECTRICIAN JOURNEYMAN ELECTRICIAN HELPER ELECTROIVIC TECHNICIAN ELECTRONIC TECHNICIAN HELPER FLOOR LAYER (CARPET) FLOOR LAYER (RESILIENT) FLOOR LAYER HELPER GLAZIER GLAZIER HELPER INSULATOR INSULATOR HELPER LABORER-COMMON LABORER-SHILLED LATHER LATHER HELPER METAL BUILDING ASSEMBLER METAL BLDG ASSEMBLER HELPER PAINTER PAINTER HELPER PIPEFITTER PIPEFITTER HELPER PLASTERER PLASTERER HELPER PLUMBER PLUMBER HELPER REINFORCING STEEL SETTER REINFORCING STEEL SETTER HELPER HOURLY RATE $15.96 $8.81 $13.82 $9.79 $15.25 $9.86 $13.00 $9.34 $12.00 $9.44 $11.59 $8.87 $11.87 $8.25 $16.29 $10.20 $12.86 $12.67 $13.58 $14.48 $8.56 $13.66 $9.26 $15.89 $9.46 $7.82 $9.66 $15.80 $11..75 $1334 $7.85 $11.93 $8.30 $14.35 $10.93 $15.29 $8.63 $16.26 $9.59 $11.88 $9.18 CLASSIFICATION ROOFER ROOFER HELPER SHEET MET WORKER SHEET MET WORKER HELPER SHEETROCK HANGER SHEETROCK HANGER HELPER SPRINKLER SYSTEM INSTALLER SPRINKLER SYSTEM INSTALLER HELPER STEEL WORKER STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKER STRUCTURAL HELPER WELDER WELDER HELPER HEAVY EOUIPMENT OPERATORS EQUIPMENT OPERATORS CONCRETE PUMP OPERATORS CRANE, CLAMSHELL, BACKHOE, DERRICK, DRAGLINE, SHOVEL FORKLIFf OPERATOR FOUNDATION DRILL OPERATOR FRONT END LOADER OPERATOR TRUCK DRIVER HOURLY RATE $13.17 $7.82 $15.87 $929 $12.70 $9.71 $16.95 $7.81 $14.66 $7.91 $14.87 $9.67 $14.66 $15.50 $13.05 $10.54 $11.66 $11.60 $9.80 � L�' � L;] � L�' LJ � � L�J �: L�J L�J � � �' �J L�� PART E TECHNICAL SPFCIFICATIONS � � � PART 1 -- GENERAL � � � � � � � � � i � � � �- � � � SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The WORK to be performed under this Contract shall consist of furnishing plant, tools, equipment, materials, supplies, and manufactured articles, and furnishing all labor, transportation, and services, including fuel, power, water, and essential communications, and performing all work or other operations required for the fulfillment of the Contract in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. The WORK shall be complete, and all work, materials, and services not expressly indicated or called for in the Contract Documents which may be necessary for the complete and proper construction of the WORK in good faith shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR as though originally so indicated, at no increase in cost to the OWNER. 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The WORK of this contract comprises the construction of coagulant feed system improvements. The upgrade includes modification/additions to the lime, ferric and polymer feed systems. The WORK also includes modifications to a plan storage room. B. The WORK shall include the following major items: 1. Demolition of lime slakers, ferric sulfate feed system, polymer storage tanks, miscellaneous piping, valves, equipment pads, control panels, conduits and wires. Also, demolish ferric sulfate transfer pump building and containment area structure. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. New Precast Concrete Coagulant Building with exhaust ventilation fans, electric heaters, and other accessories. Hydrated Lime Feed System consisting of bin activators, volumetric feeders, slurry tanks and mixers. Ferric Sulfate Feed System consisting of two 35,000 gallon bulk storage tanks and three dual-head metering pumps. Relocate three existing polymer activation units. Also provide two new 3,000 gallon bulk storage tanks. Yard piping and site work including grading and paving. Electrical and Instrumentation. Pfan storage room modifications, including addition of storage shelves and lateral file cabinets. � C. The WORK is located at the OWNER's South Holley Water Treatment Plant, City of Fort Worth, Texas. 1.3 CONTRACT METHOD 092298 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements SUMMARY OF WORK PAGE 01010-1 � A. 1.4 The WORK hereunder will be constructed under a singie lump sum contract. � WORK BY OTHERS A. The CONTRACTOR's attention is directed to the fact that work may be conducted at the Site by other contractors during the performance of the WORK under this Contract. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct its operations so as to cause a minimum of interference with the work of such other contractors, and shall cooperate fully with such contractors to allow continued safe access to their respective portions of the Site, as required to perform work under their respective contracts. B. Interference With Work On Utilities: The CONTRACTOR shall cooperate fully with all utility forces of the OWNER or forces of other public or private agencies engaged in the relocation, altering, or otherwise rearranging of any facilities which interfere with the progress of the WORK, and shall schedule the WORK so as to minimize interference with said relocation, altering, or other rearranging of facilities. 1.5 WORK SEQUENCE A. The CONTRACTOR's attention is directed to the fact that during the period of May 15, 1999 through September 15, 1999, no interruption in the process can be accommodated, and the CONTRACTOR shall so schedule its construction operations that no interference with the operation of the plant will occur during this critical period. B. For electrical tie ins, existing systems can be shout down for a maximum period of four hours with prior OWNER'S approval. The CONTRACTOR shall give a minimum 24-hour notice to the OWNER for approval. � I� 1.7 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE The CONTRACTOR's use of the Site shall be limited to its construction operations, including on-Site storage of materials, on-Site fabrication facilities, and field offices. OWNER USE O� THE SITE A. The OWNER may utilize all of the existing facilities during the entire period of construction for the conduct of the OWNER's normal operations. The CONTRACTOR shall cooperate and coordinate with the OWNER to facilitate the OWNER's operations and to minimize interference with the CONTRACTOR's operations at the same time. In any event, the OWNER shall be allowed access to the Site during the period of construction. 1.8 PARTIAL UTILIZATION OF THE WORK BY OWNER � L�J � � l�J � � � L�� I� � A. The OWNER will take partial utilization of the WORK upon completion of the Chemical feed systems. Partial utilization will involve the placing into service the lime feed system, a ferric sulfate feed system, and polymer feed system as soon as they are operational. 1.9 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Preconstruction Conference: 1. Prior to the commencement of WORK at the Site, a preconstruction conference will 092298 SUMMARY OF WORK 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 01010-2 L�J L�J L+!I � � � � �! u � u L: �� be held at a mutually agreed time and piace. The conference shall be attended by the CONTRACTOR'S Project Manager, its superintendent, and its Subcontractors as .the CONTRACTOR deems appropriate. Other attendees will be: a. ENGINEER and the Resident Project Representative. b. Representatives of OWNER. c. Governmental representatives as appropriate. d. Others as requested by CONTRACTOR, OWNER, or ENGINEER. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall bring the preconstruction conference submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. � 3. The purpose of the conference is to designate responsible personnel and establish a working relationship. Matters requiring coordination will be discussed and procedures for handling such matters established. The complete agenda will be furnished to the CONTRACTOR prior to the meeting date. However, the CONTRACTOR should be prepared to discuss all of the items listed below. a. Status of CONTRACTOR's insurance and bonds. b. CONTRACTOR's tentative schedules. c. Transmittal, review, and distribution of CONTRACTOR's submittals. d. Processing applications for payment. e. Maintaining record documents. � f. Critical work sequencing. L!' � Li' l� C� L�sJ � � I�J g. Field decisions and Change Orders. h. Use of Site, office and storage areas, security, housekeeping, and OWNER's needs. i. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. j. CONTRACTOR's assignments for safety and first aid. k. Daily Report Form which the ENGINEER will furnish. I. Submittal Transmittal Form which the ENGIN�EER will furnish. 4. The ENGINEER will preside at the preconstruction conference and will arrange for keeping and distributing the minutes to all persons in attendance. 5. The CONTRACTOR and its Subcontractors should plan on the conference taking no less than a full working day. The day will cover the items listed in paragraphs 2 and 3, and the remainder will be spent on reviewing the Drawings and Specifications, in extensive detail, with the ENGINEER and the OWNER. 092298 � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements SUMMARY OF WORK PAG E 01010-3 B. Progress Meetings: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall schedule and hold regular on-Site progress meetings at least weekly and at other times as requested by ENGINEER or as required by progress of the WORK. The CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, and all Subcontractors active on the Site shall attend each meeting. CONTRACTOR may at its discretion request attendance by representatives of its Suppliers, manufacturers, and other Subcontractors. � 2. The ENGINEER will preside at the progress meetings and will arrange for keeping and distributing the minutes. The purpose of the meetings is to review the progress of the WORK, maintain coordination of efforts, discuss changes in scheduling, and resolve other problems which may develop. During each meeting, the CONTRACTOR shall present any issues which may impact its progress with a view to resolve these issues expeditiously. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -- EXECUTION (Not Used) m - END OF SECTION - F Y k • 092298 SUMMARY OF WORK 1333018 — South Holly WTP . Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 01010-4 LJ � lJ l�J la' � lJ � � SECTION 01014 - TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Fumish all labor and materials and perform operations to plan, design, construct, install, maintain, monitor, modify as necessary, and remove upon completion, a Trench Safety System as specified. B. The requirements of this Section apply to trenches that exceed five feet in depth, as measu�ed from the ground surface at the highest side of the trench to the trench bottom. C. Applicable and non-conflicting portions of Section 02200 - Earthwork apply as appropriate to provide a proper and complete system. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 02200: Earthwork B. Texas Statute: HB 1569, 715` Regular Leg.islative Session C. United States Government: CFR Part 1926, Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA), Subpart P— Excavations, Trenching and Shoring PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL � I A. Materials and products incorporated into the Trench Safety System shall be suitable for their . intended use, shall meet design criteria and parameters used by the Trench Safety System � designer in designing the system, and shall meet applicable requirements of OSHA regulatiQns. � � � l�J u �' i'�� I■�'' �� PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 PROCEDURES A. At least ten calendar days prior to execution of any excavation operations, and not more than 30 calendar days following the execution date of the construction Agreement, Contractor shall submit a site specific Trench Safety System Conformance Affidavit stating that operations will be conducted in full conformance with the OSHA Standards. 1. The Conformance Letter shall also describe the Trench Safety System techniques proposed to be used on the p�oject. 2. Specific references to the applicable OSHA Standards sections shall be included for . each technique to be used. i B. The Trench Safety System Plan shall be in writing, site specific and sufficiently detailed and clear to be understandable and us�ble by all personnel who will be executing, supervising and witnessing the trenching operations. A copy of the Trench Safety Plan shall be available at the MW -111198 ' . � 1333018 — South Holly WTP � TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM Coagulant Feed system Improvements PAGE 01014-1 site of trenching operations at all times. L'"J C. If borings and/or detailed geotechnical analyses are required to develop the Trench Safety � System Plan, they shall be executed by the contractor at his cost. D. For trenches having depths greater than the various limits given in the OSHA Standards (8, 12, or 20 feet, depending on the techniques used), a site specific protective system shall be designed by a Registered Professional Engineer, experienced in soil mechanics and structural design. The design shall be signed, sealed and dated by the Professional Engineer, and it shall identify those specific locations where the design is applicable. 3.2 A. METHODS Protective systems referenced in this Section shall be as defined and described in 29 CFR 1926.652, "Requirements for Protective Systems:' B. It is the sole duty, responsibility and prerogative of the Contractor to determine the specific applicability of a proposed Trench Safety System for each field condition encountered on the project. Contractor specifically holds the Owner, Engineer, and any of their designed representatives harmless in any actions resulting from the failure or inadequacy of the Trench Safety System used to complete the project. ' C. 3.3 Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, Sloping/Benching, Trench Shielding with trench boxes, and/or Sheeting/Shoring/Bracing protective systems may be used on this project. INSPECTION DUTIES OF CONTRACTOR A. Provide a competent person, as defined in the OSHA Standards, to make frequent inspections of the trenching operations and the Trench Safety System in full conformance with the OSHA Standards . B. If evidence of a possible cave-in or landslide is apparent, all work in the trench shall immediately cease and not be resumed until all necessary precautions have been taken to safeguard personnel entering the trench. C. In an emergency situation which may threaten or affect the safety or welfare of any persons or properties, the Contractor shall act at his discretion to prevent possible damage, injury or loss. Any additional compensation or time extension claimed for such actions shall be considered in view of the cause of the emergency and in accordance with the General. Conditions. 3.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT � A. Payment for the Trench Safety System shall be on a lump sum price basis, the lump sum price being as given in the Bid Proposal, without regard to whether specific trench safety precautions were required or used for the trench reach being measured. - END OF SECTION - � � � � L+�l � L�1 � � � � � � � � MW -111198 1333018 — South Hnlly WTP Coagulant Feed system Improvements � TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM PAGE 01014-2 a � � PART 1 — GENERAL L�J � �� 1.1 SCOPE � A. Payment for the various items of the Bid Schedule, as further specified herein, shall include all compensation to be received by the CONTRACTOR for furnishing all tools, equipment, supplies, and manufactured articles, and for all labor, operations, and incidentals appurtenant to the items of work being described, as necessary to complete the various items of the WORK all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including all appurtenances thereto, and including all costs of permits and cost of compliance with the regulations of public agencies having jurisdiction, including Safety and Health Requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration of the U.S. Department of Labor (OSHA). No separate payment will be made for any item that is not specifically set forth in the Bid Schedule, and all costs therefor shall be included in the prices named in the Bid Schedule for the various appurtenant items of work. � 1.2 BID PROPOSAL � � � A. Lump Sum Prices: Lump Sum Prices shall be provided in the Bid Documents Proposal by the CONTRACTOR for all WORK in the Contract. For Lump Sum items, only the total amount needs to be filled in. B. Retention: Payment for all bid items is subject to retention. 1.3 A. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION OF THE COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM (Item A) 1. Measurement payment for the construction and installation of the FEED system � shall be based upon completion of the entire work as a Lump Sum Bid Item complete, in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. � 2. Payment for said construction and installation of the FEED system shall be made at the Lump Sum Price named in the Bid Schedule under Base Bid and shall constitute full compensation for the construction and installation of the FEED system. L�l � �� I•J CI �� 3. Payment of the Lump Sum Price shall be made in accordance with the Cash Flow Schedule identi�ed in Section 01311 — Scheduling and Reporting. B. TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM (Item B) 1. Work under this item includes furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment and performing all operations to plan, design, construct, install, maintain, monitor, modify as necessary, and remove upon completion, a Trench Safety System for trenches more than five feet deep, as shown on the drawings and as specified. This item also includes the cost of obtaining soil borings and the associated geotechnical analyses and the preparation of a trench safety plan by a registered professional engineer. This item does not include the typical work ordinarily required for installing pipe without regard to the safety requirements contained in Section 01014—Trench Safety System (e.g. excavation, dewatering, pipe installation, embedment, backfill, etc.). 2. Measurement and Payment will be based upon the actual linear feet of Trench Safety System provided. 051093 � MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 01025-1 SECTION 01025 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT � C. FER�iIC SULFATE METERING PUMPS (ALLOWANCE ITEM C) � Work under this item shall include furnishing the ferric sulfate dual head metering pumps, grear box, motor, pulsation dampner, pressure switches, pressure gages and all associated equipment and incidentals, including but not limited to calibration columns, back pressure valves, pressure relief valves, as specified in Section 11259 - Metering Pumps. Also includes total of 3 days of inspection, start-up and training from manufacturer representative. All costs for installation of the ferric sulfate metering pumps and other work associated with the ferric sulfate metering pumps which is not specified to be the responsibiliry of the supplier shall be included in Bid Item A. Measurement and payment for the ferric sulfate metering pumps shall be based upon the allowance specified in the Bid Proposal. 1.4 PARTIAL PAYMENT A. Partial payments will be made for materials and equipment stored on Site but not installed, in accordance with Section C8-8 of the General Conditions. The amount paid for stored materials shall be for amount actually paid by Contractor and include any discounts received for early payment. In order to receive approval for partial payment of any materials and equipment stored on Site, the Contractor must submit copies of the original invoices with the Application for Payment for all materials and equipment, to be approved for payment. Payment for all stored on site items`shall be subject to the retainage described in Section C8-8 of the General Conditions. 1.5. A. EXTRA WORK Extra work, if any, will be performed in accordance with Section C4-4 of the General conditions and will be paid for in accordance with the provisions of that Section C8-8. PAR7 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - L�J L�! I L�J � � � � � � � L] � L�J L�I L!' �� U I�� 051093 � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PAGE 01025-2 '� � L�J SECTION 01070 - ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS PART 1 -- GENERAL � 1.1 GENERAL � A. Wherever in these Specifications references are made to the standards, specifications, or other published data of the various international, national, regional, or local organizations, such organizations may be referred to by their acronym or abbreviation only. As a guide � to the user of these Specifications, the following acronyms or abbreviations which may appear in these Specifications shall have the meanings indicated herein. � 1.2 � L�J � L�� L!� L�J � ' �J ��J L�J �I ABBREVIATIONS AA AAMA AAR AASHTO AATCC ACI AFBMA AGA AG MA AHA AHAM AI AIA AISC AISI AITC AMCA ANS ANSI APA API APWA ARI ASA ASAE ASCE ASHRAE ASLE ASME ASNT ASQC ASSE ASTM AWCI AWPA AWPI AWS Aluminum Association Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association Association of American Railroads American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials American Association of Textile Chemis�s and Colorists American Concrete Institute Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association, Inc. American Gas Association ' American Gear Manufacturers Association American Hardboard Association Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers The Asphalt Institute American Institute of Architects American Institute of Steel Construction American Iron and Steel Institute American Institute of Timber Construction Air MOving and Conditioning Association American Nuclear �ociety American National tandards Institute, Inc. American Plywood 14ssociation or American Parquet Association, Inc. American Petroleur� Institute American Public W rks Association Air-Conditioning an� Refrigeration Institute Acoustical Society bf America American Society c�f Agricultural Engineers American Society �f Civil Engineers American Society f Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers American Society f Lubricating Engineers American Society f Mechanical Engineers American Society �f Nondestructive Testing American Society Apr Quality Control American Society f Sanitary Engineers American Society �or Testing and Materials American Wire Clqth Institute American Wood Preservers Association, . American Wood P'reservers Institute American Welding Society 041398 j ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS 1333018 — South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements I � PAGE 01�070-1 AWWA BBC BHMA CBM CDA CEMA CGA CLPCA CLFMI CMA CRSI DCDMA DHI DIPRA EIA ETL EPA FCI FM FPL HI HPMA� IAPMO IC60 IEEE IES IME IP IPC IPCEA ISDSI ISA ISEA ISO ITE MBMA MIL MPTA MSS MTI NAAMM NACE NAGDM NB NBS NCCLS NEC NEMA NFPA NISO American Water Works Association Basic Building Code, Building Officials and Code Administrators International � Builders Hardware Manufacturer's Association Certified Ballast Manufacturers Copper Development Association Conveyors Equipment Manufacturer's Association Compressed Gas Association California Lathing and Plastering Contractors Association Chain Link Fence Manufacturer's Institute Concrete Masonry Association Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Diamond Core Drill Manufacturer's Association Door and Hardware Institute Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association Electronic Industries Association Electrical Test Laboratories Environmental Protecti�n Agency Fluid Controls Institute Factory Mutual System . Forest Products Laboratory Hydronics Institute Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials International Conference of Building Officials Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Illuminating Engineering Society Institute of Makers of Explosives Institute of Petroleum (London) Institute of Printed Circuits Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association Insulated Steel Door Systems Institute Instrument Society of America . � Industrial Safety Equipment Association International Organization for Standardization Institute of Traffic Engineers � Metal Building Manufacturer's Association Military Standards (DoD) Mechanical Power Transmission Association Manufacturers Standardization Society Marine Testing Institute � National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturer's National Association of Corrosion Engineers National Association of Garage Door Manufacturers National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (alternate NBBPVI) � National Bureau of Standards (Now NIS� National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards National Electrical Code National Electrical Manufacturer's Association � National Fire Protection Association or National Fluid Power Association or National Forest Products Association National Information Standards Organization 041398 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS PAG E 01070-2 i�� J ��J � � � � � � � �� [�! u � C�' CI� L�' L� � � t�� L�J �#J CaJ l�J L�J LJ � lJ � LiJ L!�J � L�' LJ � u NLGI NMA NSF � NWMA NWWDA OSHA PCA PPI RCRA RIS RMA RVIA RWMA SAE SAMA SDI � SMA SMACCNA SPI SPIB SPR SSA SSBC SSPC SSPWC TAPPI TFI TIA TNRCC UBC UL WCLIB WCRSI WEF WIC WRI 1NW PA National Lubricating Grease Institute National Microfilm Association . National Sanitation Foundation National Woodwork Manufacturers Association National Wood Window and Door Association Occupational Safety and Health Administration Portland Cement Association Plastics Pipe Institute Resource Conservation and Recovery Act Redwood Inspection Service Rubber Manufacturers Association Recreational Vehicle Industry Association Resistance Welder Manufacturer's Association Society of Automotive Engineers Scientific Apparatus Makers Association Steel Door Institute Screen Manufacturers Association Sheet Metal and Air Conditiuning Contractors National Association Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau Simplified Practice Recommendation Swedish Standards Association Southern Standard Building Code, Southern Building Code Congress Society for Protective Coating Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction ' Technical Association of the Pulp and Paper Industry The Fertilizer Institute Telecommunications Industries Association Texas Natural Resources Conservation Commission Uniform Building Code Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Water Environment Federation Woodwork Institute of California Wire Reinforcement Institute, Inc. Western Wood Products Association PART 2 -- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -- EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - 041398 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS PAG E 01070-3 L!] � PART 1 — GENERAL � 1.1 A. � L�.7 L�J L<J L�J � L�� l�1 � C+�J LJ � �� 'J C' C GENERAL SECTION 01090 - REFERENCE STANDARDS Titles of Sections and Paragraphs: Captions accompanying specification sections and paragraphs are for convenience of reference only, and do not form a part of the Specifications. B. Applicabie Publications: Whenever in these Specifications references are made to published specifications, codes, standards, or other requirements, it shall be understood that wherever no date is specified, only the latest specifications, standards, or requirements of the respective issuing agencies which have been published as of the date that the WORK is advertised for bids shall apply; except to the extent that said standards or requirements may be in conflict with applicable laws, ordinances, or goveming codes. No requirements set forth herein or shown on the Drawings shall be waived because of any provision of, or omission from, said standards or requirements. C. Specialists, Assignments: In certain instances, specification text requires (or implies) that specific work is to be assigned to specialists or expert entities, who must be engaged for the performance of that work. Such assignments shall be recognized as special requirements over which the CONTRACTOR has no choice or option. These requirements shall not be interpreted so as to conflict with the enforcement of building codes and simifar regulations goveming the WORK; also they are not intended to interfere with local union jurisdiction settlements and similar conventions. Such assignments are intended to establish which party or entity involved in a specific unit of work is recognized as "expert" for the indicated construction processes or operations. Nevertheless, the final responsibility for fulfillment of the entire set of contract requirements remains with the CONTRACTOR. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of the Specifications, all work specified herein shall conform to or exceed the requirements of applicable codes and the applicable requirements of the following documents. . B. References herein to "Building Code" or "Uniform Building Code" shall mean Uniform Building Code of the Intemational Conference of Building Officials (ICBO). Similarly, references to "Mechanical Code" or "Uniform Mechanical Code," "Plumbing Code" or "Uniform Plumbing Code," "Fire Code" or "Uniform Fire Code," shall mean Uniform Mechanical Code, Uniform Plumbing Code and Uniform Fire Code of the Intemational Conference of the Building Officials (ICBO). "Electric Code" or "National Electric Code (NEC)" shall mean the National Electric Code of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). The latest edition of the codes as approved by the�Municipat Code and used by the local agency as of the date that the WORK is advertised for bids, as adopted by the agency having jurisdiction, shall apply to the WORK herein, including all addenda, modifications, amendments, or other lawful changes thereto. C. In case of conflict between codes, reference standards, drawings, and the other Contract Documents, the most stringent requirements shall govern. All conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the ENGINEER for clarification and directions prior to ordering or providing any rimaterials or fumishing labor. The CONTRACTOR shall bid for the most stringent requirements. D. The CONTRACTOR shall construct the WORK specified herein in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and the referenced portions of those referenced 082196 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1333018 — South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 01090-1 i . codes, standards, anc� specifications listed herein. � E. References herein to �"OSHA Regulations for Construction" shall mean Title 29, Part 1926, Construction Safety and Health Regulations, Code of Federai Regulations (OSHA), including all changes and amendments thereto. F. References herein to "OSHA Standards" shall mean Title 29, Part 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Code of Federal Regulations (OSHA), including all changes and amendments thereto. 1.3 REGULATIONS RELATED TO HAZARDOUS MATERIALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible that all work included in the Contract Documents, regardless if shown or not, shall comply with all EPA, OSHA, RCRA, NFPA, and any other Federal, State, and Local Regulations goveming the storage and conveyance of hazardous materials, including petroleum products. B. Where no specific regulations exist, all chemical, hazardous, and petroleum product piping and storage in underground locations must be installed with double containment piping and tanks, or in separate concrete trenches and vaults, or with an approved lining which cannot be penetrated by the chemicals, unless waived in writing by the OWNER. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) 082196 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements - END OF SECTION - � 0 � REFERENCE STANDARDS PAGE 01090-2 LJ �L9 PART 1 — GENERAL � 1.1 A. U B. � p � GENERAL SECTION 01300 - CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS Wherever submittals are required hereunder, all such submittals by the CONTRACTOR shall be submitted to the ENGINEER. Within 7 days after the date of commencement as stated in the Notice to Proceed, the CONTRACTOR shall submit the following items to the ENGINEER for review: 1. A preliminary schedule of Shop Drawings, Samples, and proposed Substitutes ("Or- Equal") submittals listed in the Bid. 2. A list of all permits and licenses the CONTRACTOR shall obtain indicating the agency required to grant the permit and the expected date of submittal for the permit and required date for receipt of the permit. . � 1.2. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE SUBMITTALS � A. At the preconstruction conference referred to in Section 01010 - Summary of Work, the CONTRACTOR shall submit the following items to the ENGINEER for review: � 1. A preliminary schedule of Shop Drawings, Samples, and proposed Substitute ("Or- Equal") submittals listed in the Bid. � 2. A list of all permits and licenses the CONTRACTOR shall obtain indicating the agency required to grant the permit, the expected date of submittal for the permit, and required - date for receipt of the permit. ��,I � �� l�J �■� �, � � � 3. 4 5 A preliminary schedule of values in accordance with Section 01301 - Schedule of Values. A plan of operation in accordance with Section 01311 - Scheduling and Reporting. A project overview bar chart in accordance with Section 01311 — Scheduling and � Reporting. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Wherever called for in the Contract Documents, or where required by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall fumish to the ENGINEER for review, copies, plus one reproducible copy, of each shop drawing submittal. The term "Shop Drawings" as used herein shall be understood to incfude detail design calculations, shop-prepared drawings, fabrication, and installation drawings, erection drawings, list, graphs, catalog sheets, data sheets, and similar items. Whenever the CONTRACTOR is required to submit design calculations as part of a submittal, such calculations shall bear the signature and seal of an engineer registered in the . appropriate branch and in the state wherein the project is to be built, unless otherwise indicated. B. All Shop Drawing submittals shall be accompanied by the ENGINEER's standard submittal transmittal form. The form may be obtained in quantity from the ENGINEER at reproduction cost. Any submittal not accompanied by such a form, or where all applicable items on the forrn are not completed, with be retumed for resubmittal. 081798 • CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System fmprovements PAGE 01300-1 LrJ C. Normally, a separate transmittal form shall be used for each specific item or class of material or equipment for which a submittal is required. Transmittal of a submittal of various items using a single transmittal form will be permitted only when the items taken together constitute a manufacturet's "package" or are so functionally related that expediency indicates review of the group or package as a whole. A multiple-page submittal shall be collated into sets, and each set shall be stapled or bound, as appropriate, prior to transmittal to the ENGINEER. Pages shall be numbered and shall be in order. D. Except as may otherwise be indicated herein, the ENGINEER will retum prints of each submittal to the CONTRACTOR with its comments noted thereon, within 30 calendar days following receipt by the ENGINEER. It is considered reasonable that the CONTRACTOR shall make a complete and acceptable submittal to the ENGINEER by the second submission of a submittal item. The OWNER reserves the right to withhold monies due to the CONTRACTOR to cover additional costs of the ENGINEER's review beyond the second submittal. The ENGINEER'S maximum review period for each submittal, including all resubmittals, will be 30 days per submittal. Thus, for a submittal that requires two resubmittals before it is complete, the maximum review period for that submittal could be 90 days. E. F. If copies of a submittal are retumed to . the CONTRACTOR marked "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN," formal revision and resubmission of said submittal will not be required. If copies of a submittal are retumed to the CONTRACTOR marked "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED," formal revision and resubmission of said submittal will not be required. G. If a submittal is retumed to the CONTRACTOR marked "AMEND-RESUBMIT," the CONTRACTOR shall revise said submittal and shall resubmit the required number of copies of said revised submittal to the ENGINEER. H. If a submittal is retumed to the CONTRACTOR marked "REJECTED-RESUBMIT," the CONTRACTOR shall revise said submittal and shall resubmit the required number of copies of said revised submittal to the ENGINEER. Fabrication of an item shall be commenced only after the ENGINEER has reviewed the pertinent submittals and returned copies to the CONTRACTOR marked either "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED." Corrections indicated on submittals shall be considered as changes necessary to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents and shall not be taken as changes to the contract requirements. J. All submittals shall be carefully reviewed by an authorized representative of the CONTRACTOR, prior to submission to the ENGINEER. Each submittal shall be dated, signed, and certified by the CONTRACTOR, as being correct and in strict conformance with the Contract Documents. In the case of Shop Drawings, each sheet shall be so dated, signed, and certified. No consideration for review by the ENGtNEER of any submittals will be made for any items, which have not been so certified by the CONTRACTOR. All non-certified submittals will be retumed to the CONTRACTOR without action taken by the ENGINEER, and any delays caused thereby shall be the total responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. K. The ENGINEER's review'of submittals shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the entire responsibility for the correctness of details and dimensions. The CONTRACTOR shall assume all responsibility and risk for any misfits due to any errors in submittals. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the dimensions and the design of adequate connections and details. 1.4 CONTRACTOR'S SCHEDULE 081798 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS PAGE 01300-2 � � L�J � � � � � LfJ � � � � � L!.I � � L�l aA D 1.5 B. Samples, as required herein, shall be submitted for acceptance a minimum of 21 days prior to ordering such material for delivery to the Site, and shall be submitted in an orderly sequence so that dependent materials or equipment can be assembled and reviewed without causing delays in the WORK. � A. Whenever in the Specifications samples are required, the CONTRACTOR shall submit not less than 1 sample of each item or material to the ENGINEER for acceptance at no additional cost to the OWNER. . L�J l�J � L�J u � � � C. All samples shall be individually and indelibly labeled or tagged, indicating thereon all specified physical characteristics and Manufacturer's name for identification. Upon receiving acceptance of the ENGINEER, one set of the samples will be stamped and dated by the ENGINEER and retumed to the CONTRACTOR, and one set of samples will be retained by the ENGINEER, and [one] set of samples shall remain at the Site until completion of the WORK. . D. Unless indicated otherwise, all colors and textures of items presented in sample submittals shall be from the manufacturer's standard colors and standard materials, products, or equipment lines. If the samples represent non-standard colors, materials, products, or equipment lines and their selection will require an increase in Contract Times or Price, the CONTRACTOR will clearly indicate same on the transmittal page of the submittal. 1.6 OWNER'S MANUAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit technical operation and maintenance information for each item of inechanical, electrical and instrumentation equipment in an organized manner in the Owne�'s Manual. It shall be written so that it can be used and understood by the OWNER'S operation and maintenance staff. The CONTRACTOR's construction schedules and reports shall be prepared and submitted to the ENGINEER in accordance with of Section 01311 — Scheduling and Reporting. SAMPLES � B. The Owner's Manual shall be subdivided first by specification section number; second, by equipment item; and last, by "Part." "Parts" sliall conform to the following (as applicable): � � � J � u u 1. Part 1- Equipment Summary: a. Summary: A summary table shall indicate the equipment name, equipment number, and process ar�a in which the equipment is installed. b. Form: The ENGINEER will supply an Equipment Summary Form for each item of mechanical, electrical and instrumentation equipment in the WORK. The CONTRACTOR shall fill in the relevant information nn the form and include it in Part 1. 2. Part 2- Operational Procedures: a. Procedures: Manufacturer-recommended procedures on the following shall be included in Part 2: Installation Adjustment Startup 081798 � CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS 1333018 — South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 01300-3 Location of controls, special tools, equipment required, or related instrumentation needed for operation Operation procedures (including a description of how the equipment and system react to various extemal anomalies such as repetitive alarming, loss of communication links, frequent man/machine interface interaction, daylight savings/standard time/leap year changeover, change from year 1999 to year 2000, synchronization of time stamps, and loss and restoration of power.) Load changes Calibration Shutdown Troubleshooting Disassembly Reassemble Realignment Testing to determine performance efficiency Tabulation of proper settings for all pressure relief valves, low and high pressure switches, and other protection devices List of all electrical relay settings including alarm and contact settings 3. Part 3- Preventive Maintenance Procedures: a. Procedures: Preventive maintenance procedures shall include all manufacturer- recommended procedures to be performed on a periodic basis, both by removing . and replacing the equipment or component, and by leaving the equipment in place. b. Schedules: Recommended frequency of preventive maintenance procedures shall be included. Lubrication schedules, including lubricant SAE grade, type, and temperature ranges, shall be covered. 4. Part 4- Parts List: a. Parts List: A complete parts list shall be furnished, including a generic description and manufacture�'s identification number for each part. Addresses and telephone numbers of the nearest supplier and parts warehouse shall be included. i� l�'I � � � � � � L�J � � b. Drawings: Cross-sectional or exploded view drawings shall accompany the parts � list. 5. Part 5- Wiring Diagrams: � a. Diagrams: Part 5 shall include complete intemal and connection wiring diagrams , for electrical equipment items. j'� L,l 6. Part 6- Shop Drawings: a. Drawings: This part shall include approved shop or fabrication drawings, complete � with dimensions. 7: Part 7 - Safety: � a. Procedures: This part describes the safety precautions to be taken when operating a and maintaining the equipment or working near it. 8. Part 8 - Documentation: 081798 - 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS PAGE 01300-4 � CI I�I �■J u � 1�1 � � LiJ f�l � �. L�J � � � � � � �� a. All equipment warranties, affidavits, and certifications required by the Technical Specifications shall be placed in this part. C. The CONTRACTOR shall fumish to the ENGINEER 7 identical Owner's Manuals. • Each set shall consist of one or more volumes, each of which shall be bound in a standard size, 3-ring, loose-leaf, vinyl plastic hard cover binder suitable for bookshelf storage. Binder ring size shall not exceed 2.5 inches. A table of contents indicating all equipment in the manuals shall be prepared. D. Owner's Manuals shall be submitted in final form to the ENGINEER not later than the 75 percent of construction completion date. All discrepancies found by the ENGINEER shall be corrected within 30 days from the date of written notification by the ENGINEER. E. Incomplete or unacceptable Owne►'s Manuals at the 75 percent construction completion point shall constitute sufficient justification to retain the amount in paragraph "Owner's Manual Submittals" of Section 01700 - Project Closeout, from any monies due the CONTRACTOR. 1.7 SPARE PARTS LIST A. The CONTRACTOR shall fumish to the ENGINEER 5 identical sets of spare parts information for all mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation equipment. The spare parts list shall include the current list price of each spare part. The spare parts list shall include those spare parts �which each manufacturer recommends be maintained by the OWNER in inventory at the plant site. Each manufacturer or supplier shall indicate the name, address, and telephone number of its nearest outlet of spare parts to facilitate the OWNER in ordering. The CONTRACTOR shall cross-reference all spare parts lists to the equipment numbers desig�ated in the Contract Documents. The spare parts lists shall be bound in standard size, 3-ring, loose-leaf, vinyl plastic hard cover binders suitable for bookshelf storage. Binder ring size shall not exceed 2.5 inches. 1.8 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The CONTRACTOR shall keep and maintain, at the Site, one record set of Drawings. On these, it shall mark all project conditions, locations, configurations, and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the information represented on the original Contract Drawings, including buried or concealed construction and utility features which are revealed during the course of construction. Special attention shall be given to recording the horizontal and vertical � location of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated, or which were not indicated on the Contract Drawings. Said record drawings shall be supplemented by any detailed sketches as necessary or directed to indicate, fully, the WORK as actually constructed. These master record drawings of the Contractor's representation of as-built conditions, including all revisions made necessary by addenda and change orders shall be maintained up-to-date during the progress of the WORK. B. Copies of the record drawings shall be submitted on the 20th working day of every third month after the month in which the Notice to Proceed is given as well as on completion of WORK. Failure to submit complete record drawings on or before the 20th working day will enact the liquidated damages clause for interim record drawings submittals described in Article 3 of the Agreement. C. In the case of those drawings which depict the detail requirement for, equipment to be assembled and wired in the factory, such as motor control centers and the like, the record drawings shall be updated by indicating those portions which are superseded by change order drawings or final shop drawings, and by including appropriate reference information describing the change orders by number and the shop drawings by manufacturer, drawing, and revision 081798 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS PAGE 01300-5 numbers. D. Record drawings shall be accessible to the ENGINEER at all times during the construction period. E. Final payment will not be acted upon until the record drawings have been prepared and delivered to the ENGINEER. Said up-to-date record drawings shall be in the form of a set of prints with carefully plotted information overlaid in red. F. Upon Substantial Completion of the WORK and prior to final acceptance, the CONTRACTOR shall finalize and deliver a complete set of record drawings to the ENGINEER for transmittal to the OWNER, conforming to the construction records of the CONTRACTOR. This set of drawings shall consist of corrected drawings showing the reported location of the WORK. The information submitted by the CONTRACTOR and incorporated by the ENGINEER into the Record Drawings will be assumed to be correct, and the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the accuracy of such information, and for any errors or omissions which may appear on the record drawings as a result. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - � I,I � � � � � � � � ,� � ��' I� � � . � � � 081798 . CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 01300-6 � � � � . . . Request For Clarlficat�on � MONTGOMERY WATSON � I Log. No. � � I Owner I Contractor I � Project Project Job No. No. � � (For Contractor's Use) � . Date: � I Subject: Request for Clarification of I a Description: � � I . � I � Suggested Resolution: I . I � � . l. � Contractor's Authori2ed Signature: � I I � I I (For Enqineer's Use) I I � Date: � � f � I Subiect: Request for Clarification of I � k Description: � I � . I � , I � I � � Authorized Signature: � � � � I I I I Distribution: 1. Contractor Page of 2. Owner . 3. Project Manager �j 4. Resident Project Representative u5. Project Files � CM 302 (Revised 10/01/93) MONTGOMERY WATSON For all contractor submittals, including shop drawings, samples calculation, data, or other To: Montgomery Watson Attention: Project Name Owner Subject of Submittal � m I Date Contractor's Submittal Transmittal Form � Transmittal No. From: Attention: This is: Check one I � an original submittal � � a 2nd submittal I � a submittal Equipment Designation: Specification Section(s): Complete either (a) or (b), following: " � �(a) We have verified that the materials or equipment contained in this submittal meets all the requirements specified or shown (no exceptions) � �(b) We have verified that the material or equipment contained in this submittal meets all the requirements specified or shown, except for the following deviations (List Deviations): 0 Contractor's Authorized Representative CM 306 (Revised 10/01/93) D a � � � � � � � � � � � � � .� � � � MONTGOMERY WATSON Owner Contractor Project No. � Date Subject Sheet No. Original Contract Requirements: Reason for Deviation Request:• Proposed Deviation: Any change in contract time or cost? Proposed: Contractor's Si�nature CM 1106 (Revised 10/01/93) Deviation Request File No. � No. Project Specification Approved � Disapproved � MW Si�nature MONTGOMERY WATSON To: Substitution Request Form Project: Owner: Specified Item: Section Page Paragraph The undersigned requests consideration of the following: Proposed Substitution: Description Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request. Applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. The undersigned states that the following paragraphs, unless modified on attachments, are correct: 1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings and will not require a change in any of the Contract Documents. 2. The undersigned will pay for changes to the design, including engineering design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the request substitution which is estimated to be $ . 3. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other contractors, the construction schedule (specifically the date of substantial completion), or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution. 5. The incorporation or use of the substitute in connection with the work is not subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. The undersigned further states that the function, appearance, and quality of the Proposed Substitution are equivalent or superior to the Specified item. Submitted by Contractor: Reviewed by En�ineer: 8ignature Firm Date: Telephone: Attachments: CM 1110 (Revised 10/01/93) � Accepted � Not Accepted By T�tie: � Date: Remarks: � Accepted as Noted � Received too Late L�' u PART 1 -- GENERAL �] 1.1 GENERAL L1 SECTION 01301 - SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. This Section defines the process whereby the Schedule of Values (lump sum price (� breakdown) shall be developed. Monthly progress payment amounts shail be determined �J from the monthly progress updates of the Construction Schedule activities, and the Schedule of Values. � � � � � � � 1.2 The Schedule of Values shall be developed independent but simultaneous with the development of the Construction Schedule activities and logic. PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a preliminary Schedule of Values for the major components of the WORK at the Preconstruction Conference in accordance with Section 01010 - Summary of Work. The listing shall include, at a minimum, the proposed value for the following major WORK components. B. The CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall meet at the Preconstruction Conference and jointly review the preliminary Schedule of Values and make any adjustments in value allocations if, in fhe opinion of the ENGINEER, these are necessary to establish fair and reasonable allocation of values for the major WORK components. Front end loading will not be permitted. The ENGINEER may require reallocation of major WORK components from items in the above listing if in the opinion of the ENGINEER such reallocation is necessary. � 1.3 DETAILED SCHEDULE OF VALUES u � � l!J � L■�J � � -�, � A. The CONTRACTOR �shall prepare and submit a detailed Schedule of Values to the ENGINEER within 14� days after the Precons4ruction Conference. The detailed Schedule of Values shall be based on the Bid Items for major WORK components. Because the ultimate requirement is to develop a detailed Schedule of Values sufficient to determine appropriate monthly progress payment amounts, sufficient detailed breakdown shall be provided to meet this requirement. The ENGINEER shall be the sole judge of acceptable numbers, details and description of values established. If, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, a greater number of Schedule of Values items than proposed by the CONTRACTOR is necessary, the CONTRACTOR shall add the additional items so identified by the ENGINEER. B. The ENGINEER shall review the detailed Schedule of Values within 14 days from the date of receiving it. The value allocations and e�ctent of detail shall be reviewed to determine any necessary adjustments to the values and to determine if sufficient detail has been proposed to provide for Monthly Pay Estimates. Any adjustments deemed necessary �o the value allocation or level of detail shall be made by the CONTRACTOR and a revised detailed Schedule of Values shall be submitted within 7 days. 051093 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements SCHEDULE OF VALUES PAGE 01301-1 � 1.4 CROSS REFERENCE LISTING A. To assist in the correlation of the Schedule of Values and the Construction Schedule, the CONTRACTOR shall provide a Cross Reference Listing which shall be furnished in two parts. The first part shall list each Scheduled Activity with the breakdown of the respective valued items making up the total cost of the activity. The second part shall list the valued item with the respective Scheduled Activity or Activities that make up the total cost indicated. In the case where a number of schedule items make up the total cost for a valued item (shown in the Schedule of Values) the total cost for each scheduled item should be indicated. L1 'ul I� B. These listings shall be updated and submitted in conjunction with the CPM monthly � submittals as stated in Specification Section 01311 - Scheduling and Reporting. C. Approved change orders reflected in the Construction Schedule shall be incorporated into n the Schedule of Values as a single unit identified by the change order number. 1.5 CHANGES TO SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. In the event that the CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER agree to make adjustments to the original Schedule of Values because of inequities discovered in the original accepted detailed Schedule of Values, increases and equal decreases to values for activities may be made. 1.6 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A. The Schedule of Values information is an integral part of the scheduling and reporting under Section 01311 - Scheduling and Reporting and the progress payment information. As such, it is critical information to evaluating the project's progress and the proper planning of the OWNER'S and ENGINEER'S work effort as well as their financial obligations associated with this project. Accordingly, if any submittal required by this Section is found to be incomplete or is submitted later than required, the OWNER will suffer financial loss and, accordingly, liquidated damages will be assessed against the CONTRACTOR in accordance with Article 3 of the Agreement. PART 2 — PRODU�TS (Not Used) PART 3 -- EXECUTION (Not Used) - E�ID OF SECTION - 051093 . 1333018 — South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements I�I � � � i�I l�'J � L�'f � �" � SCHEDULE OF VALUES � PAGE 01301-2 � L�' liJ SECTION 01311 - SCHEDULING AND REPORTING PART 1 — GENERAL � 1.1 GENERAL � I!i lJ I!I � L; �� II A. The scheduling of the WORK under the Contract shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the requirements of this Section. The development of the schedule, monthly payment requisitions and project status reporting requirements of the Contract shall employ computerized scheduling. Where submittals are required hereunder, the CONTRACTOR shall submit four copies of each submittal item. B. Submission of the CONTRACTOR'S progress schedule� to the OWNER or ENGINEER shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of total responsibility for scheduling, sequencing, and pursuing the WORK to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including adverse effects such as delays resulting from ill-timed work or inclement weather. C. The acceptance of the CONTRACTOR'S schedule by the ENGINEER and OWNER will be based solely upon the schedule's compliance with the Contract requirements. By way of the CONTRACTOR assigning activity durations and proposing the sequence of the WORK, the CONTRACTOR agrees to utilize sufficient and necessary management and other resources to perform the work in accordance with the schedule. � D. Neither the submission nor the updating of the CONTRACTOR'S original schedule submittal nor the submission, updating, change or revision of any other report, curve, schedule or narrative submitted to the ENGINEER by the CONTRACTOR under this Contract, nor the ENGINEER'S review or acceptance of any such report, curve, schedule or narrative shall have the effect of amending or modifying, in any way, the Contract completion date or milestone dates or of modifying or limiting, in any way, the CONTRACTOR'S obligations under this Contract. Only a signed, fully executed change order can modify these contractual obligations. � 1.2 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a preliminary construction schedule at least 2 days rj qrior to the Preconstruction Conference which shall to identify the manner in which the L•� CONTRACTOR intends to complete all work within the Contract Time. �I I � � LsJ L�J ls! B. The preliminary construction schedule shall indicate the major components of the WORK and the sequence relations between major components and subdivisions of major components. The schedule shall indicate the relationships and time frames in � which the various components of the WORK will be made substantially complete and placed into service in order to meet the project milestones. Sufficient detail shall be included for the identification of subdivisions of major components into such activities as (1) mobilization activities, (2) shop drawing submittals, (3) submittal review by the ENGINEER, allowing durations described in Section 01300-Contractor Submittals, (4) material procurement, (5) construction activities, separated into the major components for each area of the work and taking into account the sequencing described in Section 0901�3 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements SCHEDULING AND REPORTING PAGE 01311-1 01010 - Summary of Work and elsewhere in the Contract Documents, (5) cleanup, punch-list, and demobilization activities. Planned durations and start dates shall be indicated for each work item subdivision. Each major component and subdivision component shall be accurately plotted on a time scale sheet not to exceed 36-inch by 60-inch in size. C. The ENGINEER and the CONTRACTOR shall meet to review the preliminary project schedule at the Preconstruction Conference. The ENGINEER'S review and comment on the schedules shall be limited to Contract conformance (with the sequencing and milestone requirements as stated in Section 01010 - Summary of Work). The CONTRACTOR shall make corrections to the schedules necessary to comply with the Contract requirements and shall adjust the schedules to incorporate any missing information requested by the ENGINEER. 1.3 BASELINE CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Within 14 days after the Preconstruction Conference, the CONTRACTOR shall have revised the preliminary schedule submittal to address all review comments from the preliminary schedule review meeting and resubmit the schedule for the ENGINEER'S review. The ENGINEER, within 7 days from the date that the CONTRACTOR submitted his revised schedule will either (1) accept the schedule activities as submitted, or (2) advise the CONTRACTOR in writing to review any part or parts of the schedule which either do not meet the Contract requirements or are unsatisfactory for the ENGINEER to monitor the project's progress and status or evaluate monthly payment requests by the CONTRACTOR. The ENGINEER may accept the schedule with conditions that the first monthly schedule update be revised to correct deficiencies identified. When the schedule is accepted, it shall be considered as the "Baseline Construction Schedule". 1.4 MONTHLY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE UPDATES A. Following the acceptance of the CONTRACTOR'S Baseline Construction Schedule, the CONTRACTOR shall monitor the progress of the WORK and adjust the schedule each month to reflect actual progress and any changes in planned future activities. Each schedule update submitted must be complete including all information requested in the original schedule submittal. Each update shall continue to show all work activities including those already completed. These completed activities shall accurately reflect . the "as built" information by indicating when the work was actually started and completed. ' B. The monthly schedule update submittal will be reviewed with the CON7RACTOR during a monthly construction progress meeting. The goal of these meetings is to enable the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER to initiate appropriate remedial action to minimize any known or foreseen delay in completion of the WORK and to determine the amount of WORK completed since the last month's schedule update. The status of the WORK will be determined by the percent complete of each activity. The ENGINEER will either accept or reject the monthly schedule update submittal at the monthly meeting. If accepted, the percent complete shown in the monthly update will be the basis for the . Application for Payment to be submitted by the CONTRACTOR. If rejected, the update shall be corrected and resubmitted by the CONTRACTOR before the Application for Payment for the update period can be processed. C. The CONTRACTOR shall highlight or otherwise identify all changes to the schedule logic or activity durations made from the previous schedule. The CONTRACTOR shall 090193 � SCHEDULING AND REPORTING 1333018 — South Holly WTP PAGE 01311-2 Coagulant Feed System Improvements L�J � D. !�l � l�J � �`a L+�J C1J L#i modify any portions of the schedule which become infeasible because of activities behind schedule or for any other valid reason. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare monthly written narrative reports of the status of the project for submission to the ENGINEER. Written status reports shall include: 1. The status of major projecf components (Percent Complete, amount of time ahead or behind schedule) and an explanation of how the project will be brought back on schedule if delays have occurred. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. The progress made on critical activities indicated on the schedule. Explanations for any lack of work on critical path activities planned to be performed during the last month. Explanations for any schedule changes, including changes to the logic or to activity durations. A list of the critical activities scheduled to be performed in the next month. The status of major material and equipment procurement. The value of materials and equipment properly stored at the site, but not yet incorporated into the work-in-place. Any delays encountered during the reporting period. M � 9. The CONTRACTOR may include any other information pertinent to the status of the project. The CONTRACTOR shall include additional status information requested by the ENGINEER. � � � � �� L�3 E. The OWNER reserves the right to require that the CONTRACTOR adjust, add to, or clarify any portion of the schedule which may later be discovered to be insufficient for the monitoring of the WORK or approval of partial payment requests. No additional compensation will be provided for such adjustments, additions or clarifications. � 1.5 CHANGE ORDERS A. Upon approval of a change order, or upon receipt by the CONTRACTOR of authorization to proceed with additional work, the change shall be reflected in the next submittal of the schedule by the CONTRACTOR. 1.6 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A. If any submittal required by this Section is determined by the ENGINEER to be incomplete or is submitted later than required, the OWNER will suffer financial loss and, accordingly, liquidated damages will be assessed against the CONTRACTOR in accordance with Article 3 of the Agreement. 090193 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements SCHEDULING AND REPORTING PAG E 01311-3 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -- EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - k � 090193 � SCHEDULING AND REPORTING 1333018 — South Holly WTP . PAGE 01311-4 Coagulant Feed System Improvements L�1 u PART 1 — GENERAL SECTlON 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL !..? 1.1 DEFINITION � � � i A. Specific quality control requirements for the WORK are indicated throughout the Contract Documents. The requirements of this Section are primarily related to performance of the WORK beyond furnishing of manufactured products. The term "Quality Control" includes inspection, sampling and testing, and associated requirements. 12 li1 � B. The presence of the ENGINEER at the place of manufacturer, however, shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for furnishing products, materials, and equipment which comply with all requirements of the Contract Documents. Compliance is a duty of the � CONTRACTOR, and said duty shall not be avoided by any act or omission on the part of the ENGINEER. � � � � I � � � � � � 1.3 SAMPLING AND TESTING A. Unless otherwise indicated, all sampling and testing shall be in accordance with the methods prescribed in the current standards of the ASTM, as applicable to the class and nature of the article or materials considered; however, the OWNER reserves the right to use any generally- accepted system of sampling and testing which, in the opinion of the ENGINEER will insure the OWNER that the quality of the workmanship is in full accord with the Contract Documents. B. Any waiver by the OWNER of any specific testing or other quality assurance measures, whether or not such waiver is accompanied by a guarantee of substantial performance as a relief from the specified testing or other quality assurance requirements as originally specified, and whether or not such guarantee is accompanied by a performance bond to assure execution of any necessary corrective or remedial WORK, shall not be construed as a waiver of any requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Notwithstanding the existence of such waiver, the ENGINEER reserves the right to make independent investigations and tests�, and failure of any portion of the WORK to meet any of the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall be reasonable cause for the ENGINEER to require the removal or correction and reconstruction of any such work in accordance with the General Conditions. 1.4 ►_� INSPECTION AT PLACE OF MANUFACTURE Unless otherwise indicated, all products, materials, and equipment shall be subject to inspection by the ENGINEER at the place of manufacture. INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICE Inspection and testing laboratory service shall comply with the following: OWNER will appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to perform inspection and testing or will perform inspection and testing itself. 2. The OWNER or independent firm will perform inspections, testings, and other services specified in individual specification sections and as required by the ENGINEER. 051093 QUALITY CONTROL 1333018 — South Holly UVTP � Coagulant'Feed System Improvements PAGE 01400-1 � 3. Reports will be submitted by the OWNER or independent firm to the ENGINEER in duplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non- � compliance with Contract Documents. 4. 5. The CONTRACTOR shall cooperate with the OWNER or independent firm and furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested. The CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER 24 hours prior to the expected time for operations requiring inspection and laboratory testing services. 6. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs from such retesting at no additional cost to the OWNER. 7. For samples and tests required for CONTRACTOR'S use, the CONTRACTOR shall make arrangements with an independent firm for payment and scheduling of testing. The cost of sampling and testing for the CONTRACTOR'S use shall be included in the Contract Price. . PART 2 -- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. � Inspection: The CONTRACTOR shall inspect materials or equipment upon the arrival on the job site and immediately prior to installation, and reject damaged and defective items. Measurements: The CONTRACTOR shall verify measurements and dimensions of the WORK, as an integral step of starting each installation. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Where installations include manufactured products, the CONTRACTOR shall comply with manufacturer's applicable instructions and recommendations for installation, to whatever extent these are more explicit or more stringent than applicable requirements indicated in Contract Documents. - END OF SECTION - 051093 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements � � �� _ � � � � � , � � � � QUALITY CONTROL � PAGE 01400-2 � � � PART 1 — GENERAL � 1.1 GENERAL SECTION 01505 - MOBILIZATION A. Mobilization shall include the obtaining of all permits; moving onto the site of all plant and � equipment; furnishing and erecting plants, temporary buildings, and other construction facilities; and implementing security requirements; all as required for the proper performance and completion of the WORK. Mobilization shall include the following principal items: L�! � liJ 1. 2. 3. 4. � 5. Providing field office trailers for the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER, complete with all specified furnishings and utility services including telephones, telephone appurtenances, and copying machine. � LJ l�i L�J � �' � L�i �� u L�J 6 7 8 9 Moving on to the site of all CONTRACTOR's plant and equipment required for first month operations. Installing temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities. Establishing fire protection system. Developing construction water supply. Providing all on-site communication facilities, including telephones, cordless phone antenna, and radio pagers. � Providing on-site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities. Arranging for and erection of CONTRACTOR's work and storage yard. Constructing and implementing security features and requirements complying with Section 01520- Security. 10. Obtaining all required permits. 11. Having all OSHA required notices and establishment of safety programs. 12 13. Having the CONTRACTOR's superintendent at the job site full time. Submitting initial submittals. 1.2 PAYMENT FOR MOBILIZATION A. The CONTRACTOR's attention is directed to the condition that 5 percent of the total Contract Price will be deducted from any money due the CONTRACTOR as progress payments until all mobilization items listed above have been completed as specified. The aforementioned � amount will be retained by the OWNER as the agreed, estimated value of completing all of the mobilization items listed. Any such retention of money for failure to complete all such mobilization items as a lump-sum item shall be in addition to the retention of any payments due to the CONTRACTOR. B. As soon as practicable after receipt of the Notice to Proceed, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a breakdown to the ENGINEER for approval, which shall show the estimated value of each 051093 � MOBILIZATION 1333018 — South Holly WTP . Coagulant Feed System Improvements � PAGE 01505-1 major component of mobilization. • When approved by the ENGINEER, the breakdown will be the basis for initial progress payments in which Mobilization is included. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - 0 e 051093 MOBILIZATION 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 01505-2 L�J � PART 1 — G�NERAL 1.1 � A. � � � 1.2 SECTION 01510 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Types: The types of utility services required for general temporary use at the project site may include the following: Water service (potable for certain uses) Storm sewer Sanitary sewer Electric power service Telephone service JOB CONDITIONS A. Scheduled Uses: The CONTRACTOR shall, in conjunction with establishment of job � progress schedule, establish a schedule for implementation and termination of service for each temporary utiliry or facility; at earliest feasible time, and when acceptable to OWNER change over from use of temporary utiliry service to permanent service. � PART 2 — PRODUCTS � u � �� '�J � 2.1 MATERIALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide either new or used materials and equipment, which are in substantially undamaged condition and without significant deterioration and which .are recognized in the construction industry, by compliance with appropriate standards, as being suitable for intended use in each case. Where a portion of temporary utility is provided for CONTRACTOR by utility company, the CONTRACTOR shall provide remainder with matching and compatible materials and equipment and comply with recommendations of utiliry company. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF TEMPORARY UTILITY SERVICES A. General: Wherever feasible, the CONTRACTOR shall engage the utility company to install temporary service to project, or as a minimum, to make connection to existing utility service; locate services where they will not interfere with total project construction WORK, including installation of permanent utiliry services; and maintain temporary services as installed for required period of use; and relocate, modify or extend as necessary from time to time during that period as required to accommodate total project construction WORK. B. Approval of Electrical Connections: All temporary connections for electricity shall be subject to approval of the ENGINEER and the power company representative, and shall be removed in like manner at the CONTRACTOR's expense prior to final acceptance of the WORK. � C. Separation of Clrcuits: Unless otherwise permitted by the ENGINEER, circuits separate from � lighting circuits shall be used for all power purposes. , � 051093 • TEMPORARY UTILITIES 1333018 - South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements , 01510-1 '� 3.2 Construction �Wiring: All wiring for temporary electric light and power shall be properly installed and maintained and shall be securely fastened in place. All electrical facilities shall conform to the requirements of Subpart K of the OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction. INSTALLATION OF POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM A. Power: The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary power required for its operations under the Contract, and shall provide and maintain all temporary power lines required to perform the WORK in a safe and satisfactory manner. B. Temporary Power Distribution: The CONTRACTOR shall provide a weatherproof, grounded, temporary power distribution system sufficient to accommodate performance of entire WORK of project, including, but not necessarily limited to, temporary electrical heating where indicated, operation of test equipment and test operation of building equipment and systems which cannot be delayed until permanent power connections are operable, temporary operation of other temporary facilities, including permanent equipment and systems which must be placed in operation prior to use of permanent power connections (pumps, HVAC equipment, elevators, and similar equipment), and power for temporary operation of existing facilities (if any) at the site during change-over to new permanent power system. Provide circuits of adequate size and proper power characteristics for each use; run circuit wiring generally overhead, and rise vertically in locations where it will be least exposed to possible damage from construction operations, and result in least interference with performance of the WORK; provide rigid steel conduit or equivalent raceways for wiring which must be exposed on grade, floors, decks, or other recognized exposures to damage or abuse. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING A. Construction Lighting: All WORK conducted at night or under conditions of deficient daylight shall be suitably lighted to insure proper WORK and to afford adequate facilities for inspection and safe working conditions. B. Temporary Lighting: The CONTRACTOR shall provide a general, weatherproof, grounded temporary lighting system in every area of construction work, as soon as overhead floor/roof deck structure has been installed; and provide sufficient illumination for safe work and traffic conditions; and run circuit wiring generally overhead, and rise vertically in locations where it will be least exposed to possible damage from construction operations on grade, floors, decks, or other recognized areas of possible damage or abuse. 3.4 WATER SUPPLY A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the Fort Worth Water Department for obtaining water service connection and shall allow a three month notice to the Fort Worth Water Department. The CONTRACTOR shall � provide all facilities necessary to convey the water from the source to the points of use in accordance vuith the requirements of the Contract Documents. The water capacity charge and the wet tap fees shall be paid by the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall pay the fee for water meter and all other charges for water use as specified in Section C6-C.16 of the General Conditions. 051093 � 1333018 - South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01510-2 L�J [il LiJ � tJ "�J � B. In addition to the requirements �or furnishing bottled, drinking water for the ENGINEER's field office- as specified in Section 01590 - Field Office, Equipment, and Services, the CONTRACTOR shall provide and operate all pumping facilities, pipelines, valves, hydrants, storage tanks, and all other equipment necessary for the adequate development and operation of the water supply system. Water used for domestic purposes shall be free of contamination and shall conform to the requirements of the State and local authorities for potable water. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the adequate functioning of its water supply system and shall be solely liable for any claims arising from the use of same, including discharge or waste of water therefrom. C. Water Connections: The CONTRACTOR shall not make connection to, or draw water from, any fire hydrant or pipeline without first obtaining permission of the authority having jurisdiction over the use of said fire hydrant or pipeline and from the agency owning the affected water system. For each such connection made, the CONTRACTOR shall first attach to the fire hydrant or pipeline a valve and a meter, if required by the said authority, of a size and type acceptable to said authority and agency. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all permit and water charges. ; 3.5 INSTALLATION OF SANITARY FACILITIES � A. Toilet Facilities: Fixed or portable chemical toilets shall be provided wherever needed for the use of CONTRACTOR's employees. Toilets at constr}�ction job sites shall conform to the requirements of Subpart D, Section 1926.51 of the OSH�I Standards for Construction. .Provide � separate field office facilities in conformance with Section, 01590 - Field Office, Equipment, and Services. Contractor employees shall not use plant facilities. � L�, B. Sanitary and Other Organic Wastes: The CONTRACTOR shall establish a regular daily collection of all sanitary and organic wastes. All wastes and refuse from sanitary facilities provided by the CONTRACTOR or organic material wastes from any other source related to the CONTRACTOR's operations shall be disposed of away from the site in a manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER and in accordance with all laws and regulations pertaining thereto. � (�j 3.6 INSTALLATION OF FIRE PROTECTION I.S � � � L;; � � L� A. Fire Protection: The construction plant and all other p�arts of the WORK shall be connected with the CONTRACTOR's water supply system and shall be adequately protected against damage by fire. Hose connections and hose, water casks, chemical equipment, or other sufficient means shall be provided for fighting fires irt the temporary structures and other portions of the WORK, and responsible persons shall be designated and instructed in the operation of such fire apparatus so as to prevent or minimize the hazard of fire. The CONTRACTOR's fire protection program shall conform to the requirements of Subpart F of the OSHA Standards for Construction. , 3.7 INSTALLATION OF COMMUNICATIONS � A. Telephone Services: The CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain at all times during the progress of the WORK not less than one telephone in good working order, at its own field construction office, at or near the site of the WORK�included in the Contract. Each such telephone shall be connected to an established exchange for tnll service and with all other telephones utilized by the CONTRACTOR. � � 051093 1333018 - South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01510-3 B. OWNER'S Telephone: The CONTRACTOR shall also furnish and install in each office provided for the use of the OWNER's or ENGINEER's employees if required under Section 01590-Field Office, Equipment, and services, a separate telephone for each desk and facsimile machine (separate trunk line) similarly connected to an established exchange. C. Telephone Use: The CONTR�ICTOR shall permit the ENGINEER, the OWNER, or their authorized representatives or employees free and unlimited use of said telephone facilities for all calls that do not involve published toll charges. Calls originated by the ENGINEER, the OWNER, their authorized representatives or employees which involve toll or message unit charges shall be billed to the OWNER by the CONTRACTOR at the rates charged by the telephone company. � 3.8 OPERATIONS AND TERMINATIONS A. Inspections: Prior to placing temporary utility services into use, the CONTRACTOR shall inspect and test each service and arrange for governing authorities' required inspection and tests, and obtain required certifications and permits for use thereof. B. Protection: The CONTRACTOR shall maintain distinct markers for underground lines, and . protect from damage during excavating operations. � C. Termination and Removal: When need for a temporary utility service or a substantial portion thereof has ended, or when its service has been replaced by use of permanent services, or not later than time of substantial completion, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove installation unless requested by ENGINEER to retain it for a longer period. The CONTRACTOR shall complete and restore WORK which may have been delayed or affected by installation and use of temporary utility, including repairs to construction and grades and restoration and cleaning of exposed surfaces. D. Removal of Water Connections: Before final acceptance of the WORK on the project, all temporary connections and piping installed by the CONTRACTOR shall be entirely removed, and all affected improvements shall be restored to their original condition, or better, to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER and to the agency owning the affected utility. - END OF SECTION - 051093 1333018 - South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01510-4 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � SECTION 01520 - SECURITY PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SECURITY PROGRAM . A. The CONTRACTOR shall: 1. Protect WORK existing premises and OWNER'S operations from theft, vandalism, and unauthorized entry. 2. Initiate program in coordination with OWNER'S existing security system at job mobilization. 3. Maintain program throughout construction period until OWNER'S occupancy. 1.2 ENTRY CONTROL A. The CONTRACTOR shall: 1. Restrict entry of persons and vehicles into Project site and existing facilities. 2. Allow entry only to authorized persons with proper identification. 3. Maintain log of workmen and visitors and make log available to OWNER on request. 4. Make arrangements with Owner to enter the site after normal working hours and on weekends/holidays. 5. Coordinate access of OWNER'S personnel to site in coordination with OWNER'S security forces. B. OWNER will control entrance of persons and vehicles related to OWNER'S operations. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) 051093 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements - END OF SECTION - SECURITY 01520-1 � L�1 SECTION 01530 - PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES PART 1 -- GENERAL Q1.1 GENERAL � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � A. The CONTRACTOR shall protect all existing utilities and improvements not designated for removal and shall restore damaged or temporarily relocated utilities and improvements to a condition equal to or better than they were prior to such damage or temporary relocation, all in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents. B. The CONTRACTOR shall verify the exact locations and depths of all utilities shown and the CONTRACTOR shall make exploratory excavations of all utilities that may interfere with the WORK. All such exploratory excavations shall be performed as soon as practicable after award of the contract and, in any event, a sufficient time in advance of construction to avoid possible delays to the CONTRACTOR's work. When such exploratory excavations show the utility location as shown to be in error, the CONTRACTOR shall so notify the ENGINEER. C. 1.2 The number of exploratory excavations required shall be that number which is sufficient to determine the alignment and grade of the utility. RIGHTS-OF-WAY A. The CONTRACTOR shall not do any work that would affect any oil, gas, sewer, or water pipeline; any telephone, telegraph, or electric transmission line; any fence; or any other structure, nor shall the CONTRACTOR enter upon the rights-of-way involved until notified by the ENGINEER that the OWNER has secured authority therefor f�om the proper party. After authority has been obtained, the CONTRACTOR shall give said parry due notice of its intention to begin work, if required by said party, and shall remove, shore, support or otherwise protect such pipeline, transmission line, ditch, fence, or structure or replace the same. When two or more contracts are being executed at one time on the same or adjacent land in such manner that work on one contract may interfere with that on another, the OWNER shall determine the sequence and order of th� WORK. When the territory of one contract is the necessary or convenient means of access for the execution of another contract, such privilege of access or any other reasonable privilege may be granted by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR so desiring, to the extent, amount, in the manner, and at the times perrnitted. . No such decision as to the method or time of conducting the WORK or the use of territory shall be made the basis of any claim for delay or damage, except as provided for temporary suspension of the WORK in Article 15 of the General Conditions of the Contract. 1.3 PROTECTION OF STREET OR ROADWAY MARKERS A. The CONTRACTOR shall not destroy, remove, or otherwise disturb any existing survey markers or other existing street or roadway markers . without proper authorization. No pavement breaking or excavation shall be started until all survey or other permanent marker points that will be disturbed by the construction operations have been properly referenced. All survey markers or points disturbed by the CONTRACTOR shall be accurately after all street or roadway resurfacing has been completed. 051093 . 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES PAGE 01530-1 1.4 RESTORATION OF PAVEMENT A. General: All paved areas including asphaltic concrete berms cut or damaged during construction shall be replaced with similar materials and of equal thickness to match the existing adjacent undisturbed areas, except where specific resurfacing requirements have been called for in the Contract Documents or in the requirements of the agency issuing the permit. All temporary and permanent pavement shall conform to the requirements of the affected pavement owner. All pavements which are subject to partial removal shall be neatly saw cut in straight lines. B. Temporary Resurfacing: Wherever required by the public authorities having jurisdiction, the CONTRACTOR shall place temporary surfacing promptly after backfilling and shall maintain such surfacing for the period of time fixed by said authorities before proceeding with the final restoration of improvements. � C. Permanent Resurfacing: In order to obtain a satisfactory junction with adjacent surfaces, the CONTRACTOR shall saw cut back and trim the edge so as to provide a clean, sound, vertical joint before permanent replacement of an excavated or damaged portion of pavement. Damaged edges of pavement along excavations and elsewhere shall be trimmed back by saw cutting in straight lines. All pavement restoration and other facilities restoration shall be constructed to finish grades compatible with adjacent undisturbed pavement. D. Restoration of Sidewalks or Private Driveways: Wherever sidewalks or private roads have been removed for purposes of construction, the CONTRACTOR shall place suitable temporary sidewalks or roadways promptly after backfilling and shall maintain them in satisfactory condition for the period of time fixed by the authorities having jurisdiction over the affected portions before proceeding with the final restoration or, if no such period of times is so fixed, the CONTRACTOR shall maintain said temporary sidewalks or roadways until the final restoration thereof has been made. 1.5 EXISTING UTILITIES AND IMPROVEMENTS A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall protect all Underground Utilities and other improvements which may be impaired during construction operations. It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to ascertain the actual location of all existing utilities and other improvements that will be encountered in its construction operations, and to see that such utilities or other improvements are adequately protected from damage due to such operations. The CONTRACTOR shall take all possible precautions for the protection of unforeseen utility lines to provide for uninterrupted service and to provide such special protection as may be necessary. B. Utilities to be Moved: In case it shall be necessary to move the property of any public utility or franchise holder, such utility company or franchise holder will, upon request of the CONTRACTOR, be notified by the OWNER to move such property within a specified reasonable time. When utility lines that are to be removed are encountered within the area of operations, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER a sufficient time in advance for the necessary measures to be taken to prevent interruption of service. C. Where the proper completion of the WORK requires the temporary or permanent removal and/or relocation of an existing utiliry or other improvement which is indicated, the CONTRACTOR shall remove and, without unnecessary delay, temporarily replace or relocate such utility or improvement in a manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER and the owner of the facility. In all cases of such temporary removal or relocation, restoration to former location shall be accomplished by the CONTRACTOR in a manner that will restore or replace the utility or improvement as nearly as possible to its former locations and to as good or better condition 051093 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES PAGE 01530-2 � � L;J `!J � [;� L� L�; � u l� � � C�J � than found prior to removal. . . , �, , D. OWNER's Right of Access: The right is reserved to the OWNER and to the owners of public utilities and franchises to enter at any time upon any public street, alley, right-of-way, or easement for the purpose of making changes in their property made necessary by the WORK of this Contract. E. Underground Utilities Indicated: Existing utility lines that are indicated or the locations of which are made known to the CONTRACTOR prior to excavation and that are to be retained, and all utility lines that are constructed during excavation operations shall be protected from damage during excavation and backfilling and, if damaged, shall be immediately repaired or replaced by the CONTRACTOR. F. Underground Utilities Not Indicated: Refer to Section C5-5.14 of General Conditions. G. All costs of locating, repairing damage not due to failure of the CONTRACTOR to exercise reasonable care, and removing or relocating such utility facilities not shown in the Contract Documents with reasonable accuracy, and for equipment on the project which was actually working on that portion of the work which was interrupted or idled by removal or relocation of such utility facilities, and which was necessarily idled during such work will be paid for as extra � wark in accordance with the provisions of Section C4-4.5 of General Conditions. H. Approval of Repairs: All repairs to a damaged utility or improvement are subject to inspection and approval by an authorized representative of the utility or improvement owner before being concealed by backfill or other work. Maintaining in Service: All oil and gasoline pipelines, power, and telephone or the communication cable ducts, gas and water mains, irrigation lines, sewer lines, storm drain lines, poles, and overhead power and communication wires and cables encountered along the line of the WORK shall remain continuously in service during all the operations under the Contract, unless other arrangements satisfactory to the ENGINEER are made with the owner of said pipelines, duct, main, irrigation line, sewer, storm drain, pole, or wire or cable. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for and shall repair all damage due to its operations, and the provisions of this Section shall not be abated even in_ the event such damage occurs after backfilling or is not discovered until after completion of the backfilling. 1.6 TREES WITHIN STREET RIGHTS-OF-WAY AND PROJECT LIMITS A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall exercise all necessary precautions so as not to damage or destroy any trees or shrubs, including those lying within street rights-of-way and project limits, and shall not trim or remove any trees unless such trees have been approved for trimming or removal by the jurisdictional agency or OWNER. All existing trees and shrubs which are damaged during construction shall be trimmed or replaced by the CONTRACTOR or a certified tree company under permit from the jurisdictional agency and/or the OWNER. Tree trimming and replacement shall be accomplished in accordance with the following paragraphs. B. Trimming: Symmetry of the tree shall be preserved; no stubs or splits or tom branches left; � clean cuts shall be made close to the trunk or large branch. Spikes shall not be used for climbing live trees. All cuts over 1-1/2 inches in diameter shall be coated with an asphaltic � emulsion material. � � �� C. Replacement: The CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify the jurisdictional agency and/or the OWNER if any tree is damaged by the CONTRACTOR's operations. If, in the opinion of said agency or the OWNER, the damage is such that replacement is necessary, the CONTRACTOR shall replace the tree at its own expense. The tree shall be of a like size and 051093 � PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 01530-3 variety as the tree damaged, or, if of a smaller size, the CONTRACTOR shall pay to the owner of said tree a compensatory payment acceptable to the tree owner, subject to the approval of the jurisdictional agency or OWNER. The size of the trees shall be not less than 1-inch diameter nor less than 6 feet in height. 1.7 NOTIFICATION BY THE CONTRACTOR A. Prior to any excavation in the vicinity of any existing underground facilities, including all water, sewer, storm drain, gas, petroleum products, or other pipelines; all buried electric power, communications, or television cables; all traffic signal and street lighting facilities; and all roadway and state highway rights-of-way the CONTRACTOR shall notify the respective authorities representing the owners or agencies responsible for such facilities not less than 3 days nor more than 7 days prior to excavation so that a representative of said owners or agencies can be present during such work if they so desire. The CONTRACTOR shall also notify the regional notification center at 1-800-422-4133 at least 2 days, but no more than 14 days, prior to such excavation. � PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - � 0 051093 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES PAG E 01530-4 � � � Iil LiJ � LiJ � � � � �' � � � liJ � L■J � SECTION 01550 - SITE ACCESS AND STORAGE PART 1 — GENERAI. 1.1 HIGHWAY LIMITATIONS A. The CONTRACTOR shall make its own investigation of the condition of available public and private roads and of clearances, restrictions, bridge load limits, and other limitations affecting transportation and ingress and egress to the site of the WORK. It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to construct and maintain any haul roads required for its construction operations. 1.2 TEMPORARY CROSSINGS A. General: Continuous, unobstructed, safe, and adequate pedestrian and vehicul�r access shall be provided to fire hydrants, commercial and industrial establishments, churches, schools, parking lots, service stations, motels, fire and police stations, and hospitals. Safe and adequate public transportation stops and pedestrian crossings at intervals not exceeding 300 feet shall be provided. The CONTRACTOR �shall cooperate with parties involved in the delivery of mail and removal of trash and garbage so as to maintain existing schedules for such services. Vehicular access to residential driveways shall be maintained to the property line except when necessary construction precludes such access for reasonable periods of time. B. Temporary Bridges: Wherever necessary, the CONTRACTOR shall provide suitable temporary bridges or steel plates over unfilled excavations, except in such cases as the CONTRACTOR shall secure the written consent of the individuals or authorities concerned to omit such temporary bridges or steel plates, which written consent shall be delivered to the ENGINEER prior to excavation. All such bridges or steel plates shall be maintained in service until access is provided across the backfilled excavation. Temporary bridges or steel plates for street and highway crossing shall conform to the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction in each case, and the CONTRACTOR shall adopt designs furnished by said authority for such bridges or steel plates, or shall submit designs to said authority for approval, as may be required. , C. Street Use: Nothing herein shall be construed to entitle the CONTRACTOR to the exclusive use of any p'ublic street, alleyway, or parking area during the performance of the WORK hereunder, and it shall so conduct its operations as not to interfere unnecessarily with the authorized work of utility companies or other agencies in such streets, alleyways, or parking areas. No street shall be closed to the public without first obtaining permission of the ENGINEER and proper governmental authority. Where excavation is being performed in primary streets or highways, one lane in each d'irection shall be kept open to traffic at all times unless otherwise indicated. Toe boards shall be provided to retairr excavated material if required by the ENGINEER or the agency having jurisdiction over the street or highway. Fire hydrants on or adjacent to the WORK shall be kept accessible to fire-fighting equipment at all times. Temporary provisions shall be made by the CONTRACTOR to assure the use of sidewalks and the proper functioning of all gutters, storm drain inlets, and other drainage facilities. D. Traffic Control: For the protection of traffic in public or private streets and ways, the CONTRACTOR shall provide, place, and maintain all necessary barricades, traffic cones, warning signs, lights, and other safety devices in accordance with the requirements of the "Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices, Part VI - Traffic Controls for Street and Fiighway 120893 SITE ACCESS AND STORAGE 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System improvements PAGE 01550-1 Construction and Maintenance Operations," published by U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration (ANSI D6.1). The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions for the protection of the WORK and the safety of the public. All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated at night, and all lights shall be kept burning from sunset until sunrise. The CONTRACTOR shall station such guards or flaggers and shall conform to sucFi special safety regulations relating to traffic control as may be required by the public authorities within their respective jurisdictions. All signs, signals, and barricades shall conform to the requirements of Subpart G, Part 1926, of the OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction. The CONTRAC70R shall submit 3 copies of a traffic control plan to the City Engineer for approval a minimum of 2 weeks prior to construction. The City Engineer reserves the right to observe these traffic control plans in use and to make any changes as field conditions warrant. �4ny changes shall supersede these plans and be done solely at the CONTRACTOR's expense. , , The CONTRACTOR shall remove traffic control devices when no longer needed, repair all damage caused by installation of the devices, and shall remove post settings and backfill the resulting holes to match grade. E. Temporary Street Closure: If closure of any street is required during construction, the CONTRACTOR shall apply in writing to the City Engineer and any other jurisdictional agency at least 30 days in advance of the required closure. A Detour and Traffic Control Plan shall accompany the application. F. Temporary Driveway Closure: The CONTRACTOR shall notify the owner or occupant (if not owner-occupied) of the closure of the driveways to be closed more than one eight-hour work day at least 3 working days prior to the closure. The CONTRACTOR shall minimize the inconvenience and minimize the time period that the driveways will be closed. The CONTRACTOR shall fully explain to the owner/occupant how long the work will take and when closure is to start. . 1.3 CONTRACTOR'S WORK AND STORAGE AREA A. The OWNER will designate and arrange for the CONTRACTOR's use, a portion of the property adjacent to the WORK for its exclusive use during the term of the Contract as a storage and shop area for its construction operations relative to this Contract. B. The CONTRACTOR shall�make its own arrangements for any necessary off-site storage or shop areas necessary for the proper execution of the WORK. C. Lands to be furnished by the OWNER for camp sites, construction operation, concrete aggregate pits, roads and other purposes are indicated. Should the CONTRACTOR find it necessary to use any additional land for its camp or for other purposes during the construction of the WORK, it shall provide for the use of such lands at its own expense. 1.4 PARKING A. The CONTRACTOR shall: Provide temporary parking are�s as follows: 2 spaces for the ENGINEER " 120893 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System improvements SITE ACCESS AND STORAGE PAGE 01550-2 � L�J ��` � � � � C�J L�J � � L�J � I� �� 1 � 1 space designated for the handicapped 2. The CONTRACTOR shall direct its employees to park in areas indicated 3. Traffic and parking areas shall be maintained in a sound condition, free of excavated material, construction equipment, mud, and construction materials. The CONTRACTOR shall repair breaks, potholes, low areas which collect standing water, and other deficiencies. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - 120893 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System improvements SITE ACCESS AND STORAGE PAGE 01550-3 � � � � � a � a � � � � � a � � � fl � SECTION 01580 - PROJECT S1GN PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide one project identification sign, complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The OWNER will obtain a sign permit, if one is required, at no cost to the CONTRACTOR. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 SIGN CONSTRUCTION A. The sign shall be constructed of 1/2-inch plywood with 4-inch by 4-inch supports and 2-inch by 4-inch cross bracing. B. The sign face shall be 4-feet vertical by 8-feet horizontal. 2.2 COLORS A. The face shall be white • B. Lettering shall be black, block letter style 2.3 SIGN CONTENT ' A. Sign content shall be as indicated on the drawing. The relationships of letter size and logo size shall also be as indicated. PART 3 — EXECUTION ' 3.1 SIGN LOCATION A. The project sign shall be located on the site as directed by the ENGINEER. B. The sign shall be set 4 feet above the ground, measured from grade to the lower edge of the � plywood sheet. 3.2 REMOVAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall remove , the project sign upon preparation of the Notice of Completion. - END OF SECTION - 051093 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PROJECT SIGN 01580-1 � . . . �'�� Y�� <�"� �,�'`�_ ` µ�" .��' . � �,�.. . . -.. � -i 5 -.�: 8 i� O s 5'-6" ,{—Logo Green i-White i� / � i, / � _ , � . , �O�V 1�. !�l �� N � +~ Il�r .A.C�i+�N � . -K . � . N �� . � a 0 � N . 13 7'-6" 4 � �, //�--Logo 8/ue � ,. , _. i�� / / � �--Logo Green , ( ; --8'x4'x 1�2" I ,Plywood ,� Fort Worth;. �,. � V�ater- ; �-L°9� Green i� / Department�% . � � � � � � 6" Radlus � �-Logo Green Wlth / Typlcal / Whlte Letters � ' / / ..,-__�__ . � F'ROJECT SIGN i• � � .. a b � N � M � R O - � V' �� a � '—.�,- GENERAL NOTES: Logo Blue - � Tnemec "FJord' (BA221 Or Equal_ Logo Green - �' � Tnemec "Agean Sea "' (A W221 ;_ Or "Emerald" tAV221 �r Equa! i- Letlering Slzed To FIr • - Sca/e 3/4"II7'-0" 8-28•89 • • �- .� !� _ 1 i _ T u ti.__.j � �.-� �..� t___� � �-..� � � �.�J � � '�{ L� u SECTION 01590 - FIE, D OFFICE, EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES . }" . ::� PART 1 -- GENERAL � 1.1 GENERAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide field offices, equipment, and services specified herein for � the ENGINEER at the project site during the entire time of construction beginning at the commencement date stated in the Notice to Proceed until the acceptance of the WORK by the OWNER. I a ,.2 � A. � � B. � � 1.3 � A. � � 1.4 A. D � l�J � I■I GENERAL FIELD OFFICE REQUIREMENTS � All required field offices, equipped as specified herein, sha�l be provided at the site(s) indicated, ready for use by the ENGINEER within 14 days after th commencement date.stated in the Notice to Proceed. The CONTRACTOR's attention is di ected to the condition that no initial payments for mobilization will be approved for payment for any such work done under the Contract until all field office facilities specified herein, hav been provided. The provisions for such payment are specified under Paragraph "Payment for Mobilization" of Section 01505- Mobilization. � Unless released earlier by the ENGINEER in writing, sai�i field office(s) shall be maintained in full operation at the site with all utilities connected and op� rable until the Notice of Completion has been executed or recorded. Upon execution or recor ation of the Notice of Completion, or upon early release of the field office(s) by the ENGINE R, the CONTRACTOR shall remove the field office(s) within 14 days from said date, and shall estore the site occupied by said field office(s) to the condition indicated. � FIELD TELEPHONE SERVICE j . Within 14 days after the commencement date stat�d in the Notice to Proceed, the CONTRACTOR shall provide in each of the field offices) provided as specified herein, for the use of the OWNER's or ENGINEER's employees in � onnection with performance of the WORK hereunder, one telephone, in good order, at eacf�desk required hereunder. Additional requirements pertaining to telephones are specified in Section 01510 — Temporary Utilities. OFFICE FACILITIES i � General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide all neces�ary electrical wiring, plumbing, toilet and lavatory fixtures, air conditioning and heating equiprr�ent, and shelving, and shall furnish all necessary light, heat, water, and daily janitorial servic�s in connection with all field offices specified herein, for the duration of the WORK; and sha I remove said offices and appurtenant facilities within 14 days after the execution or record tion of the Certificate of Substantial Completion or Notice of Completion. B. Field Office: The CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain for the exclusive use of the ENGINEER and the OWNER's representative and personnel, at a point convenient to the construction operations, one separate, well lighted, air conditioned, electrically heated field office with a toilet room, containing a water closet and lavatory partitioned off from the working area. The water closet may be of the chemical type; provided, that it is a flush rype with an approved holding tank. The toilet room door shall be provided with a latch set. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all furnishings, services, and equipment specified herein. The 051093 � � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements FIELD OFFICE, EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES PAGE 01590-1 office shall have an outside door lock. The area of said field office shall not be less than 1000 square feet, exclusive of toilet room area. The office shall be located close to the CONTRACTOR's field office. Said office shall be of the portable trailer type unless otherwise specifically authorized by the ENGINEER in writing and shall be a separate unit, not attached or connected to any other structures. The office will have as a minimum 2 private offices, one conference room and one common area that can accommodate at least 2 desks, 4 filing cabinets, 1 plan table and 2 bookcases. 1.5 FIELD OFFICE FURNISHINGS A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the following listed items in good condition for the primary field office: 1 each - Standard 30 x 60-inch desk(s) with not less than 3 drawers. 1 each - Standard 30 x 60-inch typing desk with either a typewriter well, a fold- away typewriter support, or a typewriter credenza. Desk shall have not less than 3 drawers. 1 each - Plan table 36 x 72-inch top; 36 inches high. 1 each - Plan rack (all metal plan-hold rype) capable of holding 6 sets of plans, complete with 6 standard all metal plan-hold clamps. 1 �� each - File cabinet, legal size, 4-5 drawer with lock and 3 keys, double suspension, complete with Pendaflex suspension racks for each drawer. each - Office chair(s), standard arm rest type, adjustable, swivel, tilt-back with casters. 1 each - Typist chair, standard adjustable height and back rest, swivel with casters. , 2 each - Office chair(s), stiff-leg type, no arm rest. � 1 each - Drafting stool. 2 each - Waste basket(s). 1 each - Tack board 36 x 42 inches. 20 lin ft - Bookshelves 1 each - Bottled water dispenser unit and bottled water service and continuous supply of paper cups. 1.6 FIELD OFFICE SERVICES A. Each field office required hereunder shall be provided with sufficient lighting to provide not less than 50 foot-candles at desk top Height at each desk location. Exterior lighting shall be provided over the entrance door. ' FIELD OFFICE, 051093 EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES 1333018 — South Holly WTP . Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 01590-2 � L�J B. A minimum of four 110-v ac dupiex electric convenience outlets shall be provided in each office and in the conference room and common area. At least one such outlet shall be located on each wall. The electric distribution panel shall service not less than 2 110-v, 50-HZ circuits. C. Where inside toilet facilities are not connected to outside plumbing, a flush-type chemical toilet � with a holding tank shall be provided. All such sanitary waste material shall be regularly pumped out and the chemicals recharged. A continuous supply of toilet paper and paper towels shall be furnished for each toilet facility. � � D. Regular daily janitorial services shall be furnished during working hours each day. Offices shall be swept, dusted, and waste receptacles emptied. Toilet facilities shall be sanitized and cleaned daily. 1.7 COPY MACHINE � A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide, for the` exclusive use of the ENGINEER, one office copy machine in each of the ENGINEER's field offices. The copy machine shall be a Xerox model 5018, or equal. � D � a � � � !.� � a � � D B. Said copy machine shall be a dry, electrostatic process, capable of reproducing original 8-1/2 x . 11, .8-1 /2 x 14, and 11 x 17 originals on either 8- 1/2 x 11 or 8-1 /2 x 14 plain bond paper. The copy machine shall be capable of both full-size and reduced size prints such that an 8-1/2 x 14 and 11 x 17 original can be copied on a sheet of 8-1/2 x 11 paper. The machine must have a stack-feed capability. , C. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for a service contract with a local representative of the copy machine vendor or manufacturer for daily, on-site availability of a service representative for on-site service and repair. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all necessary powders, chemicals, or other materials required for proper operation of the copy machine, exclusive of bond paper. The ENGINEER will supply all bond reproduction paper required. 1.8 A. L'-� MICRO COMPUTER AND PRINTER General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide, for the exclusive use of the ENGINEER, one lap top computer and printer in the ENGINEER's field office. Computer: Said micro computer shall be a shock-mounted unit with all component parts contained in a single, portable case. The computer shall meet the following requirements: 2. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 64 mega bytes of RAM. One 3-1/2-inch DS HD diskette drive. One 3.2 GB hard drive. 13.3" SVGA active matrix color display WINDOWS NT operating system Operate on 110/220 v ac, 50/60 Hz. One parallel communications port. Hayes-compatible, 56K LAN internal modem with communications software Lap top computer shall be Dell Latitude CPM233XT, or equal. C. Printer: The printer shall be a Laser Writer automatic feed type, compatible with the computer provided hereunder, and shall be complete with connecting cord to the computer. The printer shall operate off the parallel port. FIELD OFFICE, 051093 � EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 01590-3 D. Service Contract: The CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for a service contract with a local representative of the dealer or manufacturer for daily, on-site availability of a service engineer for on-site service and repair. Said service contract shall cover both the computer and the printer. r 1.9 FACSIMILE MACHINE A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide, for the exclusive use of the ENGINEER, one facsimile machine Xerox model 2012, or equal, with a service contract, in the ENGINEER'S field office. ' B. Facsimile Machine: The facsimile machine shall conform to CCITT Group 2 and Group 3 standard and shall be capable of receiving and sending documents to other machines compatible with the same standards. The facsimile machine shall be equipped with the following features: 1. Automatic document feeder 2. 16-digit dot matrix display 3. Automatic cutter mechanism 4. Alphabetical dialing � 5. Delayed transmission 6. Automatic radial C. Service Contract: The CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for a service contract with local representative of the dealer or manufacturer for daily, on-site availability ofa service engineer for on-site service and repair. , � PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - t FIELD OFFICE, 051093 EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 01590-4 I� LiJ SECTION 01600 - PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 — GENERAL � 1.1 DEFINITIONS � Q � � a � Q � A. The word "Products," as used herein, is defined to include purchased items for incorporation into the WORK, regardless of whether specifically purchased for the project or taken from CONTRACTOR's stock of previously purchased products. The word "Materials," is defined as products which must be substantially cut, shaped, worked, mixed, finished, refined, or otherwise fabricated, processed; installed, or applied to form units of work. The word "Equipment" is defined as products with operational parts, regardless of whether motorized or manually operated, and particularly including products with service connections (wiring, piping, and other like items). Definitions in this paragraph are not intended to negate the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents, including "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories," "furnishings," special construction," and similar terms, which are self- explanatory and have recognized meanings in the construction industry. � 12 Neither "Products" nor "Materials" nor "Equipment" includes machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the WORK. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: To the greatest extent possible for each unit of work, the CONTRACTOR shall provide products, materials, and equipment of a singular generic kind from a single source. B. Compatibility of Options: Where more than one choice is available as options for CONTRACTOR's selection of a product, material, or equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall select an option which is compatible with other products, materials, or equipment. Compatibility is a basic general requirement of product, material and equipment selections. � 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE � � � � � a a A. The CONTRACTOR shall deliver and store the WORK in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations and by methods and means which will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss including theft. Delivery schedules shatl be controlled to minimize long- term storage of products at site and overcrowding of construction spaces. In particular, the CONTRACTOR shall ensure coordination to ensure minimum holding or storage times for flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive materials to deterioration, theft, and other sources of loss. 1.4 A. '�.� TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING Products shall be transported by methods to avoid damage and shall be delivered in undamaged cc�ndition in manufacturer's unopened containers and packaging. The CONTRACTOR shall provide equipment and personnel to handle products, materials, and equipment including those provided by OWNER, by methods to prevent soiling and damage. C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide additional protection during handling to prevent marring and PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, E(�UIPMENT 020995 AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements 01600-PAGE 1 otherwise damaging products, packaging, and surrounding surfaces. 1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION � A. Products shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with seals and labels intact and legible. Sensitive products shall be stored in weather-tight climate controlled enclosures and temperature and humidity ranges shall be maintained within tolerances required by manufacturer's recommendations. B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, products shall be placed on sloped supports above ground. Products subject to deterioration shall be covered with impervious sheet covering and ventilation shall be provided to avoid condensation. C. Loose granular materials shall be stored on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area and shall be prevented from mixing with foreign matter. D. Storage shall be arranged to provide access for inspection. The CONTRACTOR shall periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under required conditions. E. 1.6 A. B. Storage shall be arranged in a manner to provide access for maintenance of stored items and for inspection. MAINTENANCE OF STORAGE Stored products shall be periodically inspected on a scheduled basis. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a log of inspections and shall make the log available on request. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with manufacturer's product storage requirements and recommendations. C.� The CONTRACTOR shall maintain manufacturer-required environmental conditions (� continually. � l� D. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that surfiaces of products exposed to the elements are not � adversely affected and that weathering of finishes does not occur. E. For mechanical and electrical equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall provide a copy of the manufacturer's service instructions with each item and the exterior of the package shall contain notice that instructions are included. " F. Products shall be serviced on a regularly scheduled basis, and a log of services shall be maintained and submitted as a record document prior to acceptance by the OWNER in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.7 PROPOSED SUBSTITUTIONS OR "OR-EQUAL" ITEM A. Whenever materials or equipment are indicated in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the naming of the item is intended to establish the 1ype, function, and quality required. If the name is followed by the words "or equal" indicating that a substitution is permitted, materials or equipment of other suppliers may be accepted if sufficient information is submitted by the CONTRACTOR to allow the ENGINEER to determine that the material or equipment proposed is equivalent or equal to that 020995 � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND SUBSTITUTIONS 01600-PAGE 2 I� �� L�'J L�J L�'I C�J � � L�J I�l `. � named, subject to the following requirements: 2. 3 4. 5. Acceptance by the ENGINEER of a substitution item proposed by the CONTRACTOR D shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents and for adequacy of the substitution. I�� L�J L�J L�J l�J � �' �' '�J L�J �� 6. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for resultant changes including design and construction changes resulting from the changes which the accepted substitution requires in the CONTRACTOR'S WORK, the WORK of its subcontractors and of other contractors. � B. The procedure for review by the ENGINEER will include the following: The burden of proof as to the type, function, and quality of any such substitution product, �material or equipment shall be upon the CONTRACTOR. The ENGINEER will be the sole judge as to the type, function, and qualiry of any such substitution and the ENGINEER's decision shall be final. The ENGINEER may require the CONTRACTOR to furnish additional data about the proposed substitution. The OWNER may require the CONTRACTOR to furnish a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitution. If the CONTRACTOR wishes to provide a substitution item, the CONTRACTOR shall make written application to the ENGINEER on the "Substitution Request Form." 2. Unless otherwise provided by law or authorized in writing by the ENGINEER, the "Substitution Request Form(s)" shall be submitted before the pre-construction conference. , � 3. Wherever a proposed substitution item has not been submitted before the pre- construction conference or W' herever the submission of a proposed substitution material or equipment has been Ijudged to be unacceptable by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall provi�ie the material or equipment indicated in the Contract Documents. ' 4. The CONTRACTOR shall c��rtify that the proposed substitution will perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, and be similar and of equal substance to that in�icated, and be suited to the same use as that specified. 5. The ENGINEER will evaluate each proposed substitution within a reasonable period of time. 6. As applicable, no shop drawing submittals shall be made for a substitution item nor shall any substitution item be ordered, installed, or utilized without the ENGINEER'S prior written acceptance of the CONTRACTOR'S "Substitution Request Form." 7. The ENGINEER will record the time required by the ENGINEER in evaluating substitutions proposed by the CONTRACTOR and in making changes by the CONTRACTOR in the Contract Documents occasioned thereby. PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT 020995 AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1333018 — South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements 01600-Pi4GE 3 C. The CONTRACTOR's application using the "Substitution Request Forms" shall contain the following statements and information which shall be considered by the ENGINEER in evaluating the proposed substitution: 1 2. 3. 4. The evaluation and acceptance of the proposed substitution will not prejudice the CONTRACTOR's achievement of substantial completion on time. Whether or not acceptance of the substitution for use in the WORK will require a change in any of the Contract Documents to adopt the design to the proposed substitution. Whether or not incorporation or use of the substitution in connection with the WORK is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. All variations of the proposed substitution from the items originally specified will be identified. 5. Available maintenance, repair, and replacement service will be indicated. The manufacturer shall have a local service agency (within 50 miles of the site) which maintains properly trained personnel and adequate spare parts and is able to respond and complete repairs within 24 hours. 6. Itemized estimate of all costs that will result directly or indirectly from acceptance of such substitution, including cost of redesign and claims of other contractors affected by the resufting change. . D. Without any increase in cost to the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for and pay all costs in connection with proposed substitutions and of inspections and testing of equipment or materials submitted for review prior to the CONTRACTOR's purchase thereof for incorporation in the WORK, whether or not the ENGINEER accepts the proposed substitution or proposed equipment or material. The CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER for the charges of the ENGINEER for evaluating each proposed substitution. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -- EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - 020995 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND SUBSTITUTIONS 01600-PAGE 4 � � � � � � � SECTION 01660 - TES7ING AND EQUIPMENT STARTUP PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Equipment testing and startup are prerequisites to satisfactory completion of the contract requirements and shall be completed within the Contract Times. B. The startup is a highly complex operation requiring the combined expertise of the CONTRACTOR, manufacturers' representatives, subcontractors, the ENGINEER, and the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating all parties for a successful startup: the ENGINEER and OWNER will be available for technical and operational advice prior to and during startup. C. Testing and startup activities shall be scheduled according to Section 01311 — Scheduling and Reporting. the 7-day test and the 8-day test shall start prior to midday on a Monday, Tuesday, or Wednesday. Testing periods shall not include holidays, based on the OWNER's calendar. � • a1.2 SUBMITTALS � L�J L�] C� A. Schedule: The schedule for testing and startup shall be submitted under Section 01311. B. Testing and Startup Plan: Not less than 60-days prior to startup, submit for review a detailed Testing and Startup Plan. The Plan shall include schedules for manufacturers' equipment certifications, schedules for submitting final Owner's Manuals, schedule for training the OWNER's personnel, list of OWNER and CONTRACTOR-furnished supplies, electrical testing, and detailed schedule of operations to achieve successful system testing, startup, and performance and acceptance testing. The plan shall include test checklists and data forms for each item of equipment and shall address coordination with the OWNER's staff. . The CONTRACTOR shall revise the Plan as necessary based on review comments. C. System Outage Requests: Request for shutdown of existing systems as necessary to � test or start up new facilities. D. Records and Documentation L�J ��, L!I u L�J u 1. Equipment Installation Certification: Where required by the specifications, submit documentation from manufacturer's representative that the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated, is in accurate alignment, is free from undue stresses from connecting piping and anchoring, and has operated satisfactorily under full load conditions. 2. Records of testing and startup as indicated below. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 — EXECUTION 082698 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements TESTING AND EQUIPMENT STARTUP 01660-PAGE 1 3.1 EXECUTION A. Prerequisites: The following shall be completed before testing and startup begins. 1. Furnish all Owner's Manual information required by the Contract Documents. 2. Provide all safety equipment, emergency shower and eyewash units, fire extinguishers, gas detectors, protective guards and shields, emergency repair kits, safety chains, handrails, gratings, safety signs, and valve and piping identification required by the Contract Documents. Devices and equipment shall be fully functional, adjusted, and tested. 3. Manufacturer's certifications of proper installation have been accepted. 4. Leakage tests, electrical tests, and adjustments have been completed. 5. The ENGINEER has approved the CONTRACTOR's Testing and Startup Plan. 6. Functional verification of the individual instrumentation loops (analog, status, alarm, and control). 7. Adjustment of the pressure switches, flow switches, timing relays, level switches, vibration switches, temperature switches, RTD monitors, pressure regufating valves, and all other control devices to the settings determined by the ENGINEER or the equipment manufacturer. 8. Functional verification of the individual interlocks between the field-mounted control devices and the- motor control circuits, control circuits of variable-speed controllers, and packaged system controls. B. Supplies � 1. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish: . a. Chemicals � b. Fuel � c. Oil and grease d. Other necessary materials not listed for the OWNER to furnish 2. The OWNER will furnish: a. Water b. Power C. Records of Testing and Startup: The CONTRACTOR shall maintain the following during testing and startup and submit originals to ENGINEER prior to acceptance: 082698 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements TESTING AND EQUIPMENT STARTUP • 01660-PAG E 2 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Lubrication and service records for each mechanical and electrical equipment item Hours of daily operation for each mechanical and electrical equipment item Equipment alignment and vibration measurement records Logs of electrical measurements and tests Instrumentation calibration and testing logs Testing and validation of SCADA inputs, outputs, logic functions, status indications, and alarms Factory and field equipment settings Log of problems encountered and adjustments made Other records, logs, and checklists as required by the Contract Documents 3.2 SYSTEM TESTING A. After individual equipment items have been tested and certified as required by� the Technical Specifications, tests of systems comprised of single or multiple equipment items with appurtenant equipment and instruments and controls shall be conducted. All items of equipment shall be tested as part of a system to the maximum extent possible. B. The CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate the manual and automatic modes of operation to verify proper control sequences, software interlocks, proper operation of software logic and controllers, etc. System testing shall include the use of water or other process media, as applicable, to simulate the actual conditions of operation. C. All systems testing activities shall follow the detailed test procedures and checklists in the Testing and Startup Plan. Completion, of Systems testing shall be documented by a report. L�7 E. � The CONTRACTOR shall system test the utility, chemical feed, safety equipment, and other support systems before testing the process system. Furnish the ENGINEER at least 10 days written notice confirming the start of system testing. The OWNER's staff will observe systems testing. The CONTRACTOR shall arrange for manufacturer's representative to revisit the Site as often as necessary to correct malfunctions to the ENGINEER's satisfaction. G. Each system shall be tested for a continuous, 7-day, 24-houdday period. If any system malfunctions during the test, the item or equipment shall be repaired and the test restarted at time zero with no credit given for the elapsed time before the malfunction. 082698 � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements TESTING AND EQUIPMENT STARTUP 01660-PAG E 3 3.3 STARTUP AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING A. The CONTRACTOR shall start up the equipment and operate it at rates directed by the ENGINEER without malfunction for a continuous 8-day, 24 hour/day acceptance test period. If any equipment item, sub system, or system malfunctions during the test period, the item shall be repaired and the test restarted at time zero with no credit given for the elapsed time before the malfunction. B. Defects in material or workmanship which appear shall be promptly corrected. Time lost for wiring corrections, control point settings, or other reasons which interrupt the test may, at the judgement of the ENGINEER, be cause for extending the test period an equal amount of time. C. Acceptance testing shall not begin until all leakage tests, instrumentation tests and adjustments, electrical tests and adjustments, equipment field tests, [disinfection,] and system tests have been completed to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. D. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the services of manufacturer's representatives, if necessary, to correct equipment malfunctions. E. During acceptance testing, the CONTRACTOR shall: 1. Lubricate and maintain all equipment in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. 2. Clean or replace strainers, screens, and filter elements. - END OF SECTION - m � 082698 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements TESTING AND EQUIPMENT STARTUP 01660-PAGE 4 � a � I�1 SECTION 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 FINAL CLEANUP A. The CONTRACTOR shall promptiy remove from the vicinity of the completed work, all rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms, construction equipment, and temporary structures and facilities used during construction. Final acceptance of the WORK by the OWNER will be withheld until the CONTRACTOR has satisfactorily complied with the foregoing requirements for final cleanup of the project site. � 12 CLOSEOUT TIMETABLE � � � � � � � � � � � � � � A. The CONTRACTOR shall establish dates for equipment testing, acceptance periods, and on- site instructional periods (as required under the Contract). Such dates shall be established not less than one week prior to beginning any of the foregoing items, to allow the OWNER, the ENGINEER, and their authorized representatives sufficient time to schedule attendance at such activities. 1.3 OWNER'S MANUAL SUBMITTAL A. The CONTRACTOR's attention is directed to the condition that one percent of the contract price will be deducted from any monies due the CONTRACTOR as progress payments, if at the 75 percent construction completion point, the approved OWNER'S MANUAL complying with Section 01300 has not been submitted. The aforementioned amount will be retained by the OWNER as the agreed, estimated value of the approved OWNER'S MANUALS. Any such retention of money for failure to submit the approved OWNER'S MANUALS on or before the 75 percent construction completion point shall be in addition to the retention of any payments due to the CONTRACTOR under Section C-8 of the General Conditions. 1.4 I� FINAL SUBMITTALS The CONTRACTOR, prior to requesting final payment, shall obtain and submit the following items to the ENGINEER for transmittal to the OWNER: 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Written guarantees, where required. Operating manuals and instructions. � New permanent cylinders and key blanks for all locks. Maintenance stock items; spare parts; special tools. Completed record drawings. Bonds for roofing, maintenance, etc., as required. Certificates of inspection and acceptance by local governing agencies having jurisdiction. 8. Releases from all parties who are entitled to claims against the subject project, property, or improvement pursuant to the provisions of law. 081193 � PROJECT CLOSEOUT 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements . 01700-1 1.5 MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE A. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with the maintenance and guarantee requirements contained in Section C8-8.10 of the General Conditions. B. Repfacement of earth fill or backfill, where it has settled below the required finish elevations, shall be considered as a part of such required repair work, and any repair or resurfacing constructed by the CONTRACTOR which becomes necessary by reason of such settlement shall likewise be considered as a part of such required repair work unless the CONTRACTOR shall have obtained a statement in writing from the affected private owner or public agency releasing the OWNER from further responsibility in connection with such repair or resurfacing. C. The CONTRACTOR shall make all repairs and replacements promptly upon receipt of written order from the OWNER. If the CONTRACTOR fails to make such repairs or replacements promptly, the OWNER reserves the right to do the WORK and the CONTRACTOR and his surety shall be liable to the OWNER for the cost thereof. 1.6 BOND A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a bond to guarantee performance of the provisions contained in Paragraph "Maintenance and Guarantee" above, and Section C3-3.7 of the General Conditions. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) II II � I I I I I I 081193 1333018 — South Holly WTP �� Coagulant Feed System ImprovementS � � - END OF SECTION - � PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700-2 � � � Q � a a � � � � � � a a a D a a SECTION 02050 - DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE PART — GENERAL 1.2 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all tools, equipment, materials, and supplies and shall perform all labor as required for the demolition work shown in the contract documents. B. The CONTRACTOR shall note that the Drawings used in this Contract to indicate demolition are based on record drawings of the existing facilities. The plans and sections have been reproduced to clarify the scope of work as much as possible. Prior to the submittal of bids, the CONTRACTOR shall conciuct a comprehensive survey of the facilities to verify the correctness of the record drawings, the scope of work, the extent of auxiliary utilities, and the physical and sequencing constraints, so that all costs associated with demolition are included in the bid. C. The WORK shall include, but not to be limited to, removal of existing piping, electrical (fixtures, conduits and wiring), mechanical (ducts and equipment), walls, ceilings, doors, windows, wood or metal framing, masonry, concrete walls, existing roofing membrane and insulation. Salvage all decorative stone work, clean and return to the owner. D. E. F. G. H. 1.2 A. Building utilities shall be disconnected, removed, capped and identified as necessary and as shown. � Building, structure, foundations, slabs, roof and supporting walls shall be demolished as shown, in an orderly and careful manner. Different buildings shall receive different levels of demolition as further described on the drawings. Buildings to be completely demolished are shown in the demolition drawings. Buildings which are to be partfy demolished prior to renovation have demolition details shown within the architectural drawings. REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS All codes, as referenced herein, are specified in Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. All work in connection with demolition and salvage shall be in accordance with applicable local, state, and federal regulations and safety orders, after obtaining required permits and filing required reports. 1.3 DEMOLITION COORDINATION A. The CONTRACTOR shall carefully coordinate the extent of demolition in areas where existing utilities shall be reconnected to new facilities and where existing facilities equipment shall remain operational. B. While work is being performed, the CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate access to all operating equipment and treatment processes for routine operation and maintenance. 090998 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE PAGE 02050-1 The CONTRACTOR shall erect and maintain fences, warning signs, barricades, and other devices as required for the protection of the CONTRACTOR's employees and the OWNER's personnel at the plant. The CONTRACTOR shall remove all such protection when the demolition operations are completed, or as work progresses, or when directed by the ENGINEER. 1.4 � CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Demolition and equipment removal procedures, including operational sequence, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval. The procedures shall provide for safe conduct of the WORK, careful removal and disposition of materials and equipment, protection of facilities property which are to remain undisturbed, coordination with existing facilities to remain in service, and timely disconnection of utility services. The procedures shall include a detailed description and time schedule of the methods and equipment to be used for each operation, and the sequence of operation. 1.5 REPAIR OF DAMAGE A. Damaged items shall be repaired or replaced with new materials as required to restore damaged items or surfaces to a condition equal to and matching that existing prior to damage or start of work of this Contract. B. In buildings with demolition work, the CONTRACTOR shall not use any OWNER equipment (i.e., bridge cranes and monorails) unless authorized in advance in writing by the ENGINEER. Such authorization shall be subject to documentation by the CONTRACTOR of the loading he proposes to place on the equipment, and subject to OWNER requirements for crane use for operating and maintenance needs. Any damage sustained in the use of a crane by the CONTRACTOR shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to the OWNER. The damaged unit shall be repaired or replaced as described above. 1.6 PROTECTION OF EXISTING WORK A. Before beginning any cutting, trenching or demolition work, the CONTRACTOR shall carefully survey the existing work and examine the Drawings and Specifications to determine the extent of the WORK. The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions to prevent damage to existing facilities which are to remain in place, and be responsible for any damages to existing facilities, which are caused by the operations. Damages to such work shall be repaired or replaced to its existing condition at no additional cost to the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall carefully coordinate the work of this Section with all other work and construct and shall provide shoring, bracing, and supports, as required. The CONTRACTOR shall insure that structural elements are not overloaded and shall be responsible for increasing structural supports or adding new supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, or demolition work performed under any part of this Contract. The CONTRACTOR shall remove all temporary protection when the work is complete or when so authorized by the ENGINEER. B. The CONTRACTOR shall carefully consider all bearing loads and capacities for placement of equipment and material on site. In the event of any questions as to 090998 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE � PAG E 02050-2 � � � whether an area to be loaded has adequate bearing capacity, the CONTRACTOR shall consult with the ENGINEER prior to the placement of such equipment or material. 1.7 BURNING � A. The use of burning at the project site for the disposal of refuse, debris, and waste materials resulting from demolition and site clearing operations will not be permitted. � 1.8 A � 1.9 � a � D D LJ � a � a � a BLASTING The use of explosives will not be permitted. ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION A. All electrical demolition work shall at all times be conducted by the CONTRACTOR in a safe and proper manner to avoid injury from electrical shock to the OWNER's and CONTRACTOR's personnel. Electrical equipment to be shut off for a period. of time shall be tagged, locked out, and sealed with a crimped wire and lead seal and made inoperable. At no time shall live electrical wiring or connections or those which can become energized be accessible to CONTRACTOR, OWNER, or other personnel without suitable protection or warning signs. 1.10 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS A. The OWNER has removed all materials known to contain asbestos on site. B. The OWNER has had all electrical transformers tested and they do not contain PCBS. C. No investigations of lead paint have been conducted. Any presence of lead paint which affects the performance of the work will be addressed according to the local, State and Federal laws and regulations. 1.11 JOB CONDITIONS A. The OWNER assumes no responsibility for actual condition of the facilities to be demolished. The CONTRACTOR shall visit the site, inspect all facilities, to get familiarized with all existing conditions and utilities. PART 2 -- NOT USED PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION FOR DEMOLITION The OWNER shall be responsible for operating all valves or other devices necessary to hydraulically isolate the facilities to be demolished from the treatment plant. I_1 The CONTRACTOR shall contact all utilities directly to arrange for shut-off of utility services. � Q 090998 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE PAG E 02050-3 � 3.2 DEMOLITION A. Disposal of ali materials shall be performed in compliance with applicable local, state, and federal codes and requirements. Structures and equipment to be demolished shall be cleaned prior to demolition. L� C. Demolition shall proceed in a systematic manner, from top of structure to ground. Concrete and masonry shall be demolished in small sections. Use bracing and shoring to prevent collapse. D. Demolition equipment shall be dispersed throughout structure and demolished materials removed to prevent excessive loads on supporting walls, floors or framing. E. The demolition drawings identify the major equipment and structures to be demolished. Auxiliary utilities such as water, •air, chemicals, drainage, lubrication oil, hydraulic power fluid, electrical wiring, controls; and instrumentation are not necessarily shown. In association with the major equipment demolition, the following work shall also be performed at no additional cost the OWNER: 1. � All equipment supports, including concrete pads, baseplates, mounting bolts, and support hangers, shall be removed. Any damage to the existing structure shall be repaired as specified. 2. All exposed piping (including vents and drains) and valves shall be removed. Where exposed piping penetrates existing floors and walls, the piping, including wall thimbles, shall be removed to a�minimum depth of 2 inches. Holes in the structure shall be repaired as specified where structures are to be renovated. 3. 4 All electrical control panels, junction boxes, motor control centers, and local switches and push buttons shall be removed, unless otherwise indicated. All exposed electrical conduits and cables shall be removed. All resulting holes in structures shall be repaired as specified, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Connections to buried electrical conduits shall be cut a minimum of 2 inches from the finished surface of the existing structure. All wiring shall be removed and the conduits shall be repaired as specified. 6. All associated instrumentation. devices shall be removed. 7. � All auxiliary utility support systems shall be removed. The area shall be thoroughly cleaned such that little or no evidence of the previous equipment installation will remain. F. Some of the operating systems or equipment that would be affected by specific � demolition work are shown. The CONTRACTOR shall note that this equipment is not all inclusive and is shown for information only. The CONTRACTOR shall verify the completeness of the equipment affected; coordinate its replacement, relocation, or shutdown, and submit an outage plan in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. . 090998 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements �� I�, li'� � �I �. L�'1 Ll � � � ��l L�J � LJ � I� DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE a PAG E 02050-4 � I� � L�J C C' C' u G. When existing pipe is removed, the CONTRACTOR shall plug all resulting abandoned connections whether or not shown. Where removed piping is exposed, the remaining piping shall be blind-flanged or fitted with a removable cap or plug. H. When existing piping is removed from existing structures, the CONTRACTOR shall fill all resulting holes in the structures and repair any damage such that the finished rehabilitated structure shall appear as a new homogeneous unit with little or no indication of where the new and old materials join. The holes in water-bearing structures shall be filled with non-shrink grout to be watertight and reinforced as required, or as shown. In all locations where the surface of the grout will be exposed to view, the non-shrink grout shall be recessed to approximately 1/2-inch back of the exposed surface and the recessed area filled with cement mortar grout. Where existing yard piping is to be abandoned, the CONTRACTOR shall cut back the abandoned pipe for a distance of 20 feet from any connecting structures. All holes at the existing structures shall be repaired. The abandoned pipe shall be capped at both ends prior to backfill. 3.3 STRUCTURE AND PIPING REHABILITATION � A. Certain areas of existing structures, piping, conduits, and the like will be affected by work necessary to complete modifications under this Contract. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to rehabilitate those areas affected by his construction activities. � � � L�J � � � i �I L■I� B. Where new rectangular openings are to be installed in concrete or concrete masonry walls or floors, the CONTRACTOR shall score the edges of each opening (both sides of wall or floor slab) by saw cutting clean straight lines to a minimum depth of 1 inch and then chipping out the concrete. Alternately, the sides of the opening (not the corners) can be formed by saw cutting completely through the slab or wall. Saw cuts deeper than 1 inch (or the depth of cover over existing reinforcing steel, whichever is less) shall not be allowed to extend beyond the limits of the opening. Corners shall be made square and true by a combination of core drilling and chipping or grinding. All necessary precautions shall be taken during removal of concrete to prevent debris from falling into or entering adjacent tanks in service or from damaging adjacent equipment or piping. Saw cuts allowed to extend beyond the opening shall be repaired by filling with non- shrink grout. The concrete'around any exposed reinforcement steel shall be chipped back and exposed reinforcement steel cut a minimum of 2 inches from the finished face of the new opening and painted with epoxy paint. The inside face of the new opening shall be grouted with an epoxy cement grout to fill any voids and cover the exposed aggregate and shall be trowel-finished to provide a plumb and square opening. C. When new piping is installed in existing structures, the CONTRACTOR shall accurately position core-drilled openings in the concrete as shown or otherwise required. Openings shall be of sufficient size to permit a final alignment of pipelines and fittings without deflection of any part and to allow adequate space for satisfactory packing where pipe passes through the wall to ensure water tightness around openings so formed. The boxes or cores shall be provided with continuous keyways to hold the filling material in place, and they shall have a slight flare to facilitate grouting and the escape of entrained air during grouting. Before placing the non-shrink grout, concrete surfaces shall be sandblasted; thoroughly cleaned of sand and any other foreign matter, and coated with epoxy bonding compound. Q 090998 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE PAG E 02050-5 � L�'J D. The pipes, castings, or conduits, as specified, shall be grouted in place by pouring in grout. under a head of at least 4 inches. The grout shall be poured or rammed or vibrated into place to fill completely the space between the pipes, castings, or conduits, and the sides of the openings so as to obtain the same watertightness as through the wall itself. The grouted casings shall then be water cured. E. In all locations where the surface of the grout will be exposed to view, the non-shrink grout shall be recessed to 1/2-inch back of the exposed surface and the recessed area filled with cement mortar grout. F. When new piping is to be connected to existing piping, the existing piping shall be cut square and ends properly prepared for the connection shown. Any damage to the lining and coating of the existing piping shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR. Dielectric insulating joints shall be installed at interconnections between new and existing piping. G. Where existing equipment, equipment pads and bases, piping, piping supports, electrical panels and devices, conduits, and associated appurtenances are removed, the CONTRACTOR shall rehabilitate the affected area such that little or no evidence of the previous installation remains. Openings in concrete floors, walls, and ceilings from piping, conduit, and fastener penetrations shall be filled with non-shrink grout and finished to match the adjacent area. Concrete pads and bases for equipment and supports shall be removed by chipping away concrete and cutting any exposed reinforced steel and anchor bolts a minimum of 2 inches b:elow finished grade and painted with epoxy paint. The area of concrete to be rehabilitated shall be scored by saw cutting clean, straight lines to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches, and all concrete within the scored lines removed'to a depth of 1-1/2 inches (or the depth of cover over reinforcing steel, whichever is less). The area�within the scored lines shall be patched with non-shrink grout to match the adjacent grade and finish. Abandoned connections to piping and conduits shall be terminated with blind flanges, caps, and plugs suited for the material, type, and service of the pipe or conduit. H. Existing reinforcement to remain in place shall be pro#ected, cleaned and extended into new concrete. Existing reinforcement not to be retained shall be cut-off as follows: 1. Where new concrete joins existing concrete at the removal line, reinforcement shall be cut•off flush with the concrete surface at the removal line. 2. Where the concrete� surface at the removal line is the finished surface, the reinforcement shall be cut back 2 inches below the finished concrete surface, the ends painted with epoxy paint and the remaining holes patched with a cement mortar grout. I. Where existing handrailing is removed, post embedments and anchors shall be removed and post holes shall be filled with non-shrink grout flush to the floor surface. At the point of continuation of existing handrailing, a new post with rail connections matching the existing handrailing system shall be installed. New posts in existing concrete ftoors shall be installed in core-drilled socket holes and the annular space between the post and hole filled with non-shrink grout. � �u ''J I�� u i] � I� � �� L�■I � N � IJ 090998 DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE � 1333018 — South Holly WTP PAGE 02050-6 Coagulant Feed System Improvements �� 3.4 BELOW-GRADE DEMOLITION � A. � B. � C. D. � ,� � L�I Footings, foundation walls, below grade construction and concrete slabs on grade shall be demolished and removed to a depth indicated on the drawings. Below-grade areas and voids resulting from demolition of structures shall be completely filled. All fill and compaction shall be in accordance with Section 02200 - Earthwork. After fill and compaction, surfaces shall be graded to meet adjacent contours and to provide flow to surface drainage structures, or as shown. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. All debris, rubble, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations shall be legally removed and disposed of at the CONTRACTOR's expense. Burning or burying of removed materials from demolished structures shall not be permitted on site. B. Demolition and removal of debris shall be conducted to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities which shall not be closed or obstructed without permission from the OWNER. Alternate routes shall be provided around closed or obstructed traffic ways. � 3.6 OCCUPANCY AND POLLUTION CONTROL A. Water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, chutes; and other suitable methods shall be � used to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in the area. Comply with government regulations pertaining to environmental protection. � B � � � Water shall not be used when it creates hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, or pollution. PROTECTION 3.7 A. Safe passage of persons around area of demolition shall be ensured. Operations shall be conducted to prevent damage to adjacent buildings, structures, or other facilities, and people. B. Interior and e�erior shoring, bracing, or supports shall be provided to prevent movement, settlement or collapse of structures to be demolished, and to adjacent facilities to remain. rj C. Existing landscaping materials, structures, and appurtenances, which are not to be �„� demolished shall be protected and maintained as necessary and in accordance with Section 01530 - Protection of Existing Facilities. � D. The CONTRACTOR shall protect and maintain conduits, drains, sewers, pipes and � wires that are to remain in service. �� 090998 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE PAG E 02050-7 � 3.8 CLEANING ' A. During and upon completion of work, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove unused tools and equipment, surplus materials, rubbish, debris, and dust and shall leave areas affected by work in a clean, approved condition. B. Adjacent structures shall b�. cleaned of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition, as directed by the ENGINEER or governing authorities, and adjacent areas returned to condition existing prior to start of work. C. The CONTRACTOR shall clean and sweep adjacent roads daily during demolition activities. � 3.9 SALVAGE • ` A. Prior to demoli.tion, the Contractor shall remove the following items and return them to the OWNER. Contractor shall place them in a location selected by the Owner. Contractor shall� provide the OWNER with 3 days notice of the availability of the salvaged items. 1. Ferric Sulfate Bulk Storage and Day Tanks. 2. Ferric Sulfate Transfer Pump Building. - END OF SECTION - 9 � 090998 � DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE 1333018 — South Holly WTP PAGE 02050-8 Coagulant Feed System Improvements ' i � � � � � � � � � ,� � � SECTION 02140 - DEWATERING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, ar�d equipment necessary to dewater trench and structure excavations, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shali secure all n�cessary permits to complete the requirements of this Section of the Specifications. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Prior to commencement of excavation, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a detailed plan and operation schedule for dewatering of excavations. The �:ONTRACTOR may be required to demonstrate the system proposed and to verify that aQequate equipment, personnel, and materials are provided to dewater the excavations �t all locations and times. The CONTRACTOR's dewatering plan is subject to review by fie ENGINEER. 1.3 I� � QUALITY CONTROL It shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to control the rate and effect of the dewatering in such a manner as to avoid all objectionable settlement and subsidence. All dewatering operations shall be adequate to assure th� integrity of the finished project and shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. � C. Where critical structures or facilities exist immediately adjacent to areas of proposed dewatering, reference points shall be established and ob5erved at frequent intervals to detect any settlement which may develop. the responsibiliry for conducting the dewatering operation in a manner which will protect adjacent structures �nd facilities .rests solely with the CONTRACTOR. The cost of repairing any damage to �.djacent structures and restoration of facilities shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT � A. Dewatering, where required, may include the use of viell points, sump pumps, temporary pipelines for water disposal, rock or gravel placement, �nd other means. Standby pumping equipment shall be maintained on the jobsite. � . �� a � � � PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide �II equipment neces ary for dewatering. It shall have on hand, at all times, sufficient pumpmg equipment and ma hinery in good working condition and shall have available, at all times, competent workme for the operation of the pumping equipment. Adequate standby equipment shall be kept vailable at all times to insure efficient 051093 I DEWATERING 1333018 — South Holly WTP { Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 02140-1 dewatering and maintenance of dewatering operation during power failure. B. Dewatering for structures and pipelines shall commence when groundwater is first encoiantered, and shall be continuous until such times as water can be allowed to rise in accordance with the provisions of this Section or other requirements. C. At all times, site grading shall promote drainage. Surface runoff shall be diverted from excavations. Water entering the excavation from surface runoff shall be collected in shallow ditches around the perimeter of the excavation, drained to sumps, and be pumped or drained by gravity from the excavation to maintain a bottom free from standing water. � L� 1 � (� D. Dewatering shall at all times be conducted in such a manner as to preserve the undisturbed bearing capacity of the subgrade soils at proposed bottom of excavation. � E. If foundation soils are disturbed or loosened by the upward seepage of water or an uncontrolled flow of water, the affected areas shall be excavated and replaced with drain rock � at no additional cost to the OWNER. F. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain the water level below the bottom of excavation in all work � areas where groundwater occurs during excavation construction, backfilling, and up to acceptance. G. Flotation shall be prevented by the CONTRACTOR by maintaining a positive and continuous removal of water. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible and liable for all damages which may result from failure to adequately keep excavations dewatered. H. If well points or wells are used, they shall be adequately spaced to provide the necessary dewatering and shall be sandpacked and/or other means used to prevent pumping of fine sands or silts from the subsurface. A continua! check by the CONTRACTOR shall be maintained to ensure that the subsurface soil is not being removed by the dewatering operation. The CONTRACTOR shall dispose of water from the WORK in a suitable manner without damage to adjacent� properry. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining any permits that may be necessary to dispose of water: No water shall be drained into work built or under construction without prior consent of the ENGINEER. Water shall be filtered using an approved method to remove sand and fine-sized soil particles before disposal into any drainage system. J. The release of groundwater to its static level shall be performed in such a manner as to maintain the undisturbed state of. the natural foundation soils, prevent disturbance of compacted backfill and prevent flotation or movement of structures, pipelines, and sewers. K. Dewatering of trenches and other excavations shall be considered as incidental to the � construction of the WORK and all costs thereof shall be included in the various contract prices in the Bid Forms, unless a separate bid item has been established for dewatering. 051093 . 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements - END OF SECTION - I�l � l� � I�I ,,�, � � �� . � DEWATERING � PAGE 02140-2 � � � L�J SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall perform all earthwork indicated and required for construction of the � WORK, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. PART 2 — PRODUCTS � 2.1 SUITABLE FILL AND BACKFILL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS � A. General: Fill, backfill, and embankment materials shall be suitable selected or processed clean, fine earth, rock, or sand, free from grass, roots, brush, or other vegetation. B. Fill and backfill materials to be placed within �i inches of any structure or pipe shall be free of � rocks or unbroken masses of earth materials having a maximum dimension larger than 3 inches. � C. Suitable Materials: Materials not defined as unsuitable below are defined as suitable materials and may be used in fills, backfilling, and embankment construction subject to the indicated limitations. In addition, when acceptable to the ENGINEER, some of the material � listed as unsuitable may be used when thoroughly mixed with suitable material to form a stable composite. u LI L�J � E�J � D. Suitable materials may be obtained from on-site excavations, may be processed on-site materials, or may be imported. If imported materials are required by this Section or to meet the quantity requirements of the project the CONTRACTOR shall provide the imported materials at no additional expense to the OWNER, unless a unit price item is included for imported materials in the bidding schedule. E. The following types of suitable materials are defined: Type A(three-quarters inch minus granular backfill): Crushed rock or gravel, and sand with the gradation requirements below. The material shall have a minimum sand equivalent value of 28 and a minimum R-value of 78. If the sand equivalent value exceeds 35 the R-value requirement is waived. Sieve Size 3/4-inch No. 4 No. 200 Percentage Passing 100 30 - 50 0-12 2. Type B(Class I crushed stone): Manufactured angular, crushed stone, crushed rock, or � crushed slag with the following gradation requirements. The material shall have a minimum sand equivalent value of 75. L�J L� IL�J 061698 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements EARTHWORK PAGE 02200-1 A Sieve Size Percentage Passing 3/4-inch 100 No. 4 30 - 50 No. 200 0 - 5 3. Type C(sand backfiil): Sand with 100 percent passing a� 3/8-inch sieve, at least 90 percent passing a Number 4 sieve, and a sand equivalent value not less than 30. 4. Type D: Not used 5. Type E(pea gravel backfill): ,Crushed rock or gravel with 100 percent passing a 1/2-inch sieve and not more than 10 percent passing a Number 4 sieve. 6. Type F(coarse drainrock): Crushed rock or gravel meeting the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percentage Passing 2-inch � � 100 1-1 /2-inch 90 -100 1-inch ' 20 - 55 3/4-inch , 0 - 15 , No. 200 0 - 3 7. Type G(aggregate base): Crushed rock aggregate base material of such nature that it can be compacted �readily by watering and rolling to form a firm, stable base for pavements. At the option of the CONTRACTOR, the grading for either the 1-1/2-inch maximum size or 3/4-inch maximum size gradation shall be used. The sand equivalent value shall be not less than 22, and the material shall meet the following gradation requirements: . Percentaqe Passinq � 1-1/2-inch Max. 3/4-inch Max. � Sieve Size Gradation Gradation 2-inch � 100 - 1-1 /2-inch 90 - 100 - 1-inch - 100 3/4-inch 50 - 85 90 - 100 No. 4 25 - 45 35 - 55 No. 30 10 - 25 . 10 - 30 No.200 2-9 2-9 8. Type H(graded drainrock): Drainrock shall be crushed rock or gravel, durable and free from slaking or decomposition under the action of alternate wetting or drying. The material shall be uniformly graded and shall meet the following gradation requirements: 061698 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements � � � � � EARTHWORK � PAGE 02200-2 Q Li; u [�1 � � � L�l � LJ L�J I■1 LJ L�l l� � � Sieve Size 1-inch 3/4-inch 3/8-inch No. 4 No. 8 No. 30 No. 50 No. 200 Percentage Passin� 100 90 - 100 40 - 100 25 - 40 18-33 5-15 0-7 0-3 The drainrock shall have a sand equivalent value not less than 75. The finish graded surface of the drainrock immediately beneath hydraulic structures shall be stabilized to provide a firm, smooth surface upon which to construct reinforced concrete floor slabs. The CONTRACTOR shall use, at its option, one of the asphalt types listed below: Tvqe 1 Designation Spray Temperature (°F) Coverage (gal/sq yd) SC-800 175-255 0.50 Tvqe 2 SC-250 165-200 0.50 Type 3 RS-1 70-120 0.50 If the surface remains tacky, sufficient sand shall be applied to absorb the excess asphalt. . 9. Type I: Any other suitable material as defined herein. �� 10. Type J(cement-treated backfill): Material which consists of Type H material, or any mixture of Types B, C, G, and H materials which has been cement-treated so that the cement content of the material is not less than 5 percent by weight when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2901 - Standard Test Method for Cement Content of Freshly Mixed Soil Cement. The ultimate compressive strength at 28 days shall be not less than 400 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1633 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Molded Soil - Cement Cylinders. 11. Type K(topsoil): Stockpiled topsoil material which has been obtained at the site by removing soil to a depth not exceeding 2 feet. Removal of the topsoil shall be done after the area has been stripped of vegetation and debris. 12. Type L(controlled low strength material): Not Used. 13. Type M(aggregate subbase): Crushed rock aggregate subbase material that can be compacted readily by watering and rolling to form a firm stable base. The sand equivalent value shall be not less than 18 and the material shall meet the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size 3-inch 2-1/2 inch No. 4 No. 200 Percenta�p Passin� 100 87 - 100 35-95 0-29 � 14. Type N(trench plug): Low permeable fill material, a non-dispersible clay material having 061698 • EARTHWORK a 1333018 — South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 02200-3 a minimum plasticity index of 10. 2.2 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL A. Unsuitable materials include the materials listed below. 1. Soils which, when classified under ASTM D 2487 - Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System), fall in the classifications of Pt, OH, CH, MH, or OL. 2. Soils which cannot be compacted sufficiently to achieve the density specified for the intended use. • 3. Materials that contain hazardous or designated waste materials including petroleum hydrocarbons, pesticides, heavy metals, and any material which may be classified as hazardous or toxic according to applicable regulations. 4. 5. 2.3. USE OF FILL, BACKFILL, AND EMBANKMENT MATERIAL TYPES A. The CONTRACTQR shall use the rypes of materials as designated herein for all required fill, � backfill, and embankment construction hereunder. B. Where these Specifications conflict with the requirements of any local agency having jurisdiction or with the requirements of a pipe material manufacturer, the ENGINEER shall be immediately notified. In case of conflict between types of pipe embedment backfills, the CONTRACTOR shall use the agency-specified backfill material if that material provides a greater degree of structural support to the pipe, as determined by the ENGINEER. In case of conflict between types of trench or final backfill types, the CONTRACTOR shall use the agency-specified backfill material if that material provides the greater in-place density after compaction. , Soils that contain greater concentrations of chloride or sulfate ions, or have a soil resistivity or pH less than the existing on-site soils. Topsoil, except as allowed below. L"J � IRJ L*J � [!' L�] � � L#J � C. Fill and backfill types shall be used in accordance with the following provisions: 1 2. Embankment fills shall be constructed of Type I material, as defined herein, or any mixture of Type I and Type A through Type H materials. Pipe zone backfill, as defined under "Pipe and Utility Trench Backfill" below, shall consist of the following materials for each pipe material listed below. a. Mortar coated pipe, concrete pipe, and un-coated ductile iron pipe shall be provided Type A or B pipe bedding and embedment backfill material. b. Coal tar enamel coated pipe, polyethylene encased pipe, tape wrapped pipe, and other non-mortar coated pipe shall be backfilled with Type C bedding and embedment zone backfill material. r-, L� c. Plastic pipe and vitrified clay pipe shall be backfilled with Type B bedding and embedment zone backfill material. Vitrified clay pipe shall be backfilled with Type B material to the top of the pipe zone. 061698 EARTHWORK 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 02200-4 � �� l�J l�l � � � � d. Where pipelines are instalied on grades exceeding 4 percent, and where backfill materials are graded such that there is less than 10 percent passing a Number 4 sieve, trench plugs of Type J, L, or N material shall be provided at maximum intervals of 200 feet unless indicated otherwise. L�J L�J [JJ �' L�, [�I l�' � � � u � l!! �� 2.4 l�l � 3. Trench zone backfill for pipelines as defined under "Pipe and Utility Trench Backfill" shall be Type I backfill material or any of Types A through H backfill materials or ar�y mixture thereof, except: a. Type K material may be used for trench zone backfill in agricultural areas unless otherwise shown or specified. 4. Final backfill material for pipelines under paved areas, as defined under "Pipe and Utility Trench Backfill" shall be Type G backfill material. Final backfill under areas not paved shall be the same material as that used for trench backfill, except that Type K material shall be used for final backfill in agricultural areas unless otherwise indicated. 5. Trench backfill and final backfill for pipelines under structures shall be the same material as used in the pipe zone, except where concrete encasement is required by the Contract Documents. � 7. Aggregate base materials under pavements shall be Type G material constructed to the thicknesses indicated. Aggregate subbase shall be Type M material. Backfill around structures shall be Type I material, or Types A through Type H materials, or any mixture thereof, except as shown. 8. Backfill materials beneath structures shall be as follows: a. Drainrock materials under hydraulic structures or other water retaining structures with underdrain systems shall be Type H material. b. Under concrete hydraulic structures or other water retaining structures without underdrain systems, Types G or H matErials shall be used. c. Under structures where groundwater must be removed to allow placement of concrete, Type F inaterial shall be used. Before the Type F inaterial is placed, filter fabric shall be placed over the exposed foundation. , d. Under all other structures, Type G or H material shall be used. 9. Backfill used to replace pipeline trench over-excavation shall be a layer of Type F " material with a 6-inch top filter layer of Type E material or filter fabric to prevent migration of fines for wet trench conditions or the same material as used for the pipe zone backfill if the trench conditions are not wet. 10. The top 6 inches of fill on reservoir roofs, embankment fills around hydraulic structures, and all other embankment fills shall consist of Type K material, topsoil. 11. Filter fabric shall be Mirafi 140 N, Mlrafi 700X, or equal. MATERIALS TESTING 061698 . 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements EARTHWORK PAGE 02200-5 A. All soils testing of samples submitted by the CONTRACTOR will be done by a testing laboratory of the OWNER'S choice and at the OWNER'S expense. At its discretion, the ENGINEER may request that the CONTRACTOR supply samples for testing of any material used in the work. B. C. Particle size analysis of soils and aggregates will be performed using ASTM D 422 - Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils. Determination of sand equivalent value will be performed using ASTM D 2419 - Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate. D. Unified Soil Classification System: References in this Section to soil classification types and standards shall have the meanings and definitions indicated in ASTM D 2487. The CONTRACTOR shall be bound by all applicable provisions of said ASTM D 2487 in the interpretation of soil classifications. E. The testing for chloride, sulfate, resistivity, and pH will be done in accordance with standard methods. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION - GENERAL A. General: Except when specifically provided to the contrary, excavation shall include the removal of all materials of whatever nature encountered, including all obstructions of any nature that would interfere with the proper execution and completion of th� WORK. The removal of said materials shall conform to the lines and grades indicated or ordered. Unless . otherwise indicated, the entire construction site shall be stripped of all vegetation and debris, and such material shall be removed from the site prior to performing any excavation or placing any fill. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, place, and maintain all supports and shoring that may be required for the sides of the excavations. Excavations shall be sloped or otherwise supported in a safe manner in accordance with applicable State safety requirements and the requirements of OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction (29CFR1926). B. Removal and Exclusion of Water: The CONTRACTOR shall remove and exclude water, including stormwater, groundwater, irrigation water, and wastewater, from all excavations. Dewatering wells, wellpoints, sump pumps, or other means shall be used to remove water and continuously maintain groundwater at a level at least two feet below the bottom of excavations before the excavation work begins at each location. Water shall be removed and excluded until backfilling is complete and all field soils testing has been completed. 3.2 STRUCTURE, ROADWAY, AND EMBANKMENT EXCAVATION A. Excavation Beneath Structures and Embankments: Except where otherwise indicated for a particular structure or ordered by the ENGINEER, excavation shall be carried to the grade of the bottom of the footing or slab. Where indicated or ordered, areas beneath structures or fills shall be over-excavated. The subgrade areas beneath embankments shall be excavated to remove not less than the top 6 inches of native material and where such subgrade is sloped, the native material shall be benched. When such over-excavation is indicated, both over- excavation and subsequent backfill to the required grade shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR. When such over-excavation is not indicated but is ordered by the ENGINEER, such over-excavation and any resulting backfill will be paid for under a separate 061698 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements EARTHWORK PAGE 02200-6 D � � � � � � � unit price bid item if such bid item has been established; otherwise payment will be made in accordance with a negotiated price. After the required excavation or over-excavation has been completed, the exposed surface shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches, brought to optimum moisture content, and rolled with heavy compaction equipment to obtain 95 percent of maximum density. B. Excavation Beneath Paved Areas: Excavation under areas to be paved shall extend to the bottom of the aggregate base or subbase, if such base is called for; otherwise it shall extend to the paving thickness. After the required excavation has been completed, the top 12 inches of exposed surface shall be scarified, brought to optimum moisture content, and rolled with heavy compaction equipment to obtain 95 percent of maximum density. The finished subgrade shall be even, self-draining, and in conformance with the slope of the finished pavement. Areas that could accumulate standing water shall be regraded to provide a self-draining subgrade. C. Notification of ENGINEER: The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER at least 3 days in advance of completion of any structure excavation and shall allow the ENGINEER a review perioc� of at least one day before the exposed foundation is scarified and compacted or is covered with backfill or with any construction materials. PIPELINE AND UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION 3.3 Exploratory Excavation A. 1. The CONTRACTOR shall excavate and expose buried points of' connection to existing � utilities where indicated on the Drawings. Excavation shall be performed prior to preparation of Shop Drawings for connections and before fabrication of pipe, and the data obtained shall be used in preparing Shop Drawings. �� l�!] � B 2. 3 Data, including dates, locations excavated, and sketches, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER within one week of excavation. Damage to utilities from excavation activities shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to the OWNER. General: Unless otherwise indicated or ordered, excavation for pipelines and utilities shall be open-cut trenches with widths as indicated. C. Trench Bottom: Except when pipe bedding is required, the bottom of the trench shall be �� excavated uniformly to the grade of the bottom of the pipe bedding. Excavations for pipe bells and welding shall be made as required. � LJ � � I� � D. Open Trench: The maximum amount of open trench permitted in any one location shall be 500 feet, or the length necessary to accommodate the amount of pipe installed in a single day, whichever is greater. All trenches shall be fully backfilled at the end of each day or, in lieu thereof, shall be covered by heavy steel plates adequately braced and capable of supporting vehicular traffic in those locations where it is impractical to backfill at the end of each day. The above requirements for backfilling or use of steel plate will be waived in cases where the trench is located further than 100 feet from any travelled roadway or occupied structure. In � such cases, however, barricades and warning lights meeting safety requirements shall be provided and maintained. E. Trench Over-Excavation: Where trenches are indicated to be over-excavated, excavation shall be to the depth indicated, and backfill shall be installed to the grade of the bottom of the pipe bedding. 061698 � EARTHWORK 1333018 — South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 02200-7 L�'J F. Over-Excavation: When ordered by the ENGINEER, whether indicated on the Drawings or not, tCenches shall be over-excavated beyond the depth and/or width shown. Such over- excavation shall be to the dimensions ordered. The trench shall then be backfilled to the grade of the bottom of the pipe bedding. Over-excavation less than 6 inches below the limits on the Drawings shall be done at no increase in cost to the OWNER. -When the over-excavation ordered by the ENGINEER is 6 inches or greater below the limits shown, or wider, additional payment will be made to the CONTRACTOR. Said additional payment will be made under separate unit price bid items for .over-excavation if such bid items have been established; otherwise payment will be made in accordance with a negotiated price. Ll � .� G. Where pipelines are to be installed in embankments, fills, or structure backfills, the fill shall be � constructed to a level at least one foot above the top of the pipe before the trench is excavated. H. If a moveable trench shield is used during excavation operations, the trench width shall be wider than the shield so that the shield is free to be lifted and then moved horizontally without binding against the trench sidewalls. If the trench walls cave in or slough, the trench shall be excavated as an .open excavation with sloped sidewalls or with trench shoring, as indicated and as required by the pipe structural design. 3.4 OVER-EXCAVATION NOT ORDERED OR INDICATED A. Any over-excavation carried below the grade ordered or indicated, shall be backfilled to the required grade with the indicated material and compaction. Such work shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to the OWNER. 3.5 EXCAVATION IN LAWN AREAS A. Where excavation occurs in lawn areas, the sod shall be carefully removed, dampened, and stockpiled to preserve it for replacement. Excavated material may be placed on the lawn; provided, that a drop cloth or other suitable method is employed to protect the lawn from damage. The lawn shall not remain covered for more than 72 hours. Immediately after completion of backfilling and testing of the pipeline, the sod shall be replaced and lightly rolled in a manner so as to restore the lawn as near as possible to its original condition. CONTRACTOR shall provide new sod if stockpiled sod has not been replaced within 72 hours. 3.6 EXCAVATION IN VICINITY OF TREES A. Except where trees are indicated to be removed, trees shall be protected from injury during construction operations. No tree roots over 2 inches in diameter shall be cut without express permission of the ENGINEER. Trees shall be supported during excavation by any means previously reviewed by the ENGINEER. 3.7 ROCK EXCAVATION A. Rock excavation shall include removal and disposal of the following: (1) all boulders measuring 1/3 of a cubic yard or more in volume; (2) all rock material in ledges, bedding deposits, and un- stratified masses which cannot be removed without systematic drilling and blasting; (3) � concrete or masonry structures which have been abandoned; and (4) conglomerate deposits which are so firmly cemented that they possess the characteristics of solid rock and which cannot be removed without systematic drilling and blasting. B. Rock excavation shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR; provided, that should the quantity of rock excavation be affected by any change in the scope of the work, an appropriate 061698 . EARTHWORK 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 02200-8 � � � � � � � L�1 � L*'J � � �� C � 3.8 � a � A. adjustment of the contract price will be made under a separate bid item if such bid item has been established; otherwise payment will be made in accordance with a negotiated price. Explosives and Blasting 1. Blasting will not be permitted. � DISPOSAL OF EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIAL The CONTRACTOR shall remove and dispose of all excess excavated material at a site selected by the CONTRACTOR and reviewed by the ENGINEER. B. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain all required permits, landowner, and agency approvals for disposal of excess excavated material and shall pay all costs associated with the removal and disposal. 3.9 BACKFILL - GENERAL � A. Backfill shall not be dropped directly upon any structure or pipe. Backfill shall not be placed around or upon any structure until the concrete has attained sufficient strength to withstand tne loads imposed. Backfill around water retaining structures shall not be placed until the � structures have been tested, and the structures shall be full of water while backfill is being placed. � B. Except for drainrock materials being placed in over-excavated areas or trenches, backfill shall be placed after all�water is removed from the excavation, and the trench sidewalls and bottom have been dried to a moisture content suitable for compaction. � C. If a moveable trench shield is used during excavation, pipe installation, and backfill operations, the shield shall be moved by lifting the shield free of the trench bottom or backfill and then moving the shield horizontally, The CONTRACTOR shall not drag trench shields along the � trench causing damage or displacement to the trench sidewalls, the pipe, or the bedding and backfill. �I �J � � L�J l�l � D. Immediately prior to placement of backfill materials, the bottoms and sidewalls of trenches and structure excavations shall have all loose sloughing, or caving soil and rock materials removed. � Trench sidewalls shall consist of excavated surfaces that are in a relatively undisturbed condition before placement of backfill materials. 3.10 PLACING AND SPREADING OF BACKFILL MATERIALS A. Backfill materials shall be placed and spread evenly in layers. When compaction is achieved using mechanical equipment, the layers shall be evenly spread so that when compacted each layer shall not exceed 6 inches in thickness. � B. When compaction is achieved using flooding and jetting methods, each layer shall not exceed 3 feet in thickness after compaction. C. During spreading, each layer shall be thoroughly mixed as neces�ary to promote uniformity of material in each layer. Pipe zone backfill materials shall be manually spread around the pipe so that when compacted the pipe zone backfill will provide uniform bearing and side support. D. Where the backfill material moisture content is below the optimum moisture conte.nt, water shall be added before or during spreading until the proper moisture content is achieved. 061698 EARTHWORK 1333018 — South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 02200-9 � E. Where the backfill material moisture content is too high to permit the specified degree of � compaction the material shall be dried until the moisture content is satisfactory. 3.11 COMPACTION OF FILL, BACKFILL, AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS A. Each layer of Types A, B, C, G, H, I, and K backfill materials as defined herein, where the material is graded such that at least 10 percent passes a No. 4 sieve, shall be mechanically compacted to the indicated percentage of density. Equipment that is consistently capable of achieving the required degree of compaction shall be used and each layer shall be compacted over its entire area while the material is at the required moisture content. B. Each layer of Type E, F, and J backfill materials shall be compacted by means of at least 2 passes from a flat plate vibratory� compactor. When such materials are used for pipe zone backfill, vibratory compaction shall be used at the top of the pipe zorie or at vertical intervals of 24 inches, whichever is the least distance from the subgrade. C. Fill on reservoir and structure roofs shall be deposited at least 30 days after the concrete roof slab has been placed. Equipment weighing more than 10,000 pounds when loaded shall not be used on a roof. A roller weighing not more than 8,000 pounds shall be used to compact fill on a roof. ' D. Flooding, ponding, or jetting shall not be used for fill on roofs, backfill around structures, backfill around reservoir walls, for final backfill materials, or aggregate base materials. E. Equipment weighing more than 10,000 pounds shall not be used closer to walls than a horizontal distance equal to the depth of the fill at that time. Hand operated power compaction equipment shall be used where use of heavier equipment is impractical or restricted due to weight limitations. • •F F. Backfill around and over pipelines that is mechanically compacted shall be compacted using light, hand operated, vibratory compactors and rollers. After completion of at least two feet of compacted backfill over the top of pipeline, compaction equipment weighing no more than 8,000 pounds may be used to complete the trench backfill. EG. Compaction Requirements: Tfie following compaction test requirements shall be in accordance with ASTM D 1557 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soils Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft- Ibf/ft3) (2,700 kN-m/m3) for Type A, B, C, G, H, I, K, M, and N materials and in accordance with ASTM D 4253 - Standard Test Method for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table, and D 4254 - Standard Test Method for Minimum Inde,x Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density, for Type B, E, F, and J materials.' Where agency or utility company requirements govern, the highest compaction standards shall apply. . Percentage of Location or Use of Fill Pipe embedment backfill for flexible pipe. Pipe bedding and over-excavated zones under bedding for flexible pipe, including trench plugs. Percentage of Maximum Density 95 95 061698 � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements EARTHWORK PAG E 02200-10 l■; l�J � �i: � � � � � � � � � 3.12 �� A. � � � � � Pipe embedment backfill for rigid pipe Pipe zone backfill portion above embedment for rigid pipe. Pipe bedding and over-excavated zones under bedding for rigid pipe. Final backfill, beneath paved areas or structures. Final backfill, not beneath paved areas or structures. Trench zone backfill, beneath paved areas and structures, including trenc�h plugs. Trench zone backfill, not beneath paved areas or structures, including trench plugs. � Embankments and fills. Embankments and fills beneath paved areas or structures. . Backfill beneath structures and hydraulic structures. Backfill and fill around structures on reservoir or structure roof. � Topsoil (Type K material) Aggregate base or subbase (Type G or M material) PIPE AND UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL Pipe Zone Backfill 90 90 90 95 90 90 90 90 95 95 90 80 95 1. The pipe zone is defined as that portion of the vertical trench cross-section lying between a plane below the bottom surface of the pipe and a plane at a point above the top surface of the pipe as indicated. The bedding is defined as that portion of pipe zone backfill material between the trench subgrade and the bottom of the pipe. The embedment is . defined as that portion of the pipe zone backfill material between the bedding and a level line as indicated. 2. After compacting the bedding the CONTRACTOR shall perform a final trim using a stringline for establishing grade, such that each pipe section when first laid will be continually in contact with the bedding along the extreme bottom of the pipe. Excavation for pipe bells and welding shall be made as required. 061698 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements EARTHWORK PAGE 02200-11 3. The pipe zone shall be backfilled with the indicated backfill material. The CONTRACTOR shall exercise care to prevent damage to the pipeline coating, cathodic bonds, and the pipe itself during the installation and backfill operations. 4. If a moveable trench shield is used during backfill operations the shield shall be lifted to a location above each layer of backfill material prior to compaction of the layer. The CONTRACTOR shall not displace the pipe or backfill while the shield is being moved. B. Trench Zone Backfill: After the pipe zone backfills have been placed, backfilling of the trench zone may proceed. The trench zone is defined as that portion of the vertical trench cross- section lying as indicated between a plane above the top surface of the pipe and a plane at a point 18 inches below the finished surface grade, or if the trench is under pavement, 18 inches below the roadway subgrade. C. Final Backfill: Final backfill is all backfill in the trench cross-sectional area within 18 inches of finished grade, or if the trench is under pavement, all backfill within 18 inches of the roadway subgrade. 3.13 FILL AND EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION A. The area where a fill or embankment is to be constructed shall be cleared of all vegetation, roots and foreign material. Following this, the surface shall be moistened, scarified to a depth of 6 inches, and rolled or otherwise mechanically compacted. Embankment and fill material shall be placed and spread evenly in approximately horizontal layers. Each layer shall be moistened or aerated, as necessary. Unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER, each layer shall not exceed 6 inches of compacted thickness. The embankment, fill, and the scarified layer of underlying ground shall be compacted to 95 percent of maximum density under structures and paved areas, and 90 percent of maximum density elsewhere. B. When an embankment or fill is to be made and compacted against hillsides or fill slopes steeper than 4:1, the slopes of hillsides or fills shall be horizontally benched to key the embankment or fill to the underlying ground. A minimum of 12 inches normal to the slope of the hillside or fill shall be removed and re-compacted as the embankment or fill is brought up in layers. Material thus cut shall be re-compacted along with the new material at no additional cost to the OWNER. Hillside or fill slopes 4:1 or flatter shall be prepared in accordance with Paragraph A, above. C. Where embankment or s�ructure fills are constructed over pipelines, the first 4 feet of fill over the pipe shall be constructed using light placement and compaction equipment that does not damage the pipe. Heavy construction equipment shall maintain a minimum distance from the edge of the trench equal to the depth of the trench until at least 4 feet of fill over the pipe has been completed. 3.14 FIELD TESTING A. General: All field soils testing will be done by a testing laboratory of the OWNER's choice at the OWNER's expense except as indicated below. B. Where soil material is required to be compacted to a percentage of maximum density, the maximum density at optimum moisture content will be determined in accordance with Method C of ASTM D 1557. Where cohesionless, free draining soil material is required to be compacted to a percentage of relative density, the calculation of relative density will be determined in accordance with ASTM D 4253 and D 4254. Field density in-place tests will 061698 � EARTHWORK 1333018 — South Holly WTP ' Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 02200-12 L; � !�l �� J [`, � � `�J [!4] � � LJ � � � � � � � be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method, ASTM D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place By Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth), or by such other means acceptable to the ENGINEER. C. In case the test of the fill or backfill show non-compliance with the required density, the CONTRACTOR shall accomplish such remedy as may be required to insure compliance. Subsequent testing to show compliance shall be by a testing laboratory selected by the OWNER and shall be at no additional cost to the OWNER. D. The CONTRACTOR shall provide test trenches and excavations including excavation, trench support, and groundwater removal for the OWNER'S field soils testing operations. The trenches and excavations shall be provided at the locations and to the depths required by the OWNER. All WORK for test trenches and excavations shall be provided at no additional cost to the OWNER. - END OF SECTION - 061698 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements � EARTHWORK PAGE 02200-13 � -_ 4�Ih � �4s7 � `TIl81.E t Soll Cl�adBestlon CttaR z Soi Cias�rk�aon � Gra�D ('fotQ PW�f� � $�e+od Co�rs�CYvnO SOiS CYavM� CYMn Gnvw Cu L l an0 1 s CG S 9• G1N WiqaO�Q qr�• Mor� lnan 50 � ratanw an N0. Mas twn 50 s d mua� lrsr tnrt 5 s IY+r° Cu < ��or 1> CC >�� GP 200 si�w traet�en nur»o an t�w. t Q0°�h �� `M Gn+�b � Flr+� Mart Fnaf d�stfy n Ml or MN GM Si�r Qp�1�'�► Cri+r+� for �q Grow Syn+oo�s �no Gra+p Nart+a u�+r+g LaDarstcrl' Tas'` FrwGnir�O Soi� 50 s a mas pa:sas ttr tb. Z00 �v� oiw+ 12; kw ° F�ny �+M � CL or CN' GC Gf�, Qi„r�.a,� Sanr� Cswn �rrn Qu z 6 ane 1 s Ce s �� 51N W�Iq�p Mro SO s or er�n d c�rs� l.�w ttin S s 1t+n ° CL </ w�ler 1> Ce > 3� S1� Pe�M ¢�i s�+a' haetsan passN No. � wr+ ' � f0� vMQ1 Fina! F3rf� �fy Y M!. Of �AII S�A $�lY ��y4�ru , AAos rr� 12 i h,r° Fir�s c� �a CL or CH SC 4p�, �pa+u � Stot an4 dap tcrpr�e R> 7 and vbn an ar �eo+� 'A' Mr� 0. l,r� e�'�-" V4�d Mt tess ttun SO , , ^ � � 5� ric C7aYs I.iq��d i�rt SO ar rt+on H'9NY ors�ar+c aa�a • Bas�a on o» mrcrw p�s�ng a+� 3i+. (75+mi1 sr�. • ff f1Md as+e+OM eantar+r! e�e�0la�s ar balara. ar OCC�. �00 �ntN �oOCrr or Oa�O�rs. ar b041' b ¢atD n�rt». ° Gn�.Y wiit+ S to 12 7t Iha1 nour� auol ��C � O1N�'iAA wM�grr�e Qavr1 v�iN Yt t31At-0C w�i'9rad�o �svd Mo+ ary (ir�1N poorry �ad�0 Qavr w� �ft t3PdiC p�Or�ry 4rsc�0 Qsvd we� pr�r �.�i�Ms w�tl1 S t0 12 S h+M t1lpt�n tlwl �� • SYVhSBA w�l�gsr�d san0 wR� alt S1N�,SC vwret'a01d ss�0 rnitl e�r SP.S�f p�oorf�r gaoro sar+0 wfC� �tt SP.SC paory ¢so�tl sand wnn tsay 60 H 50 - a X w c� ao - � r h- � ~� � J a 30 - 20 �� io�- 4 — 0' .. v < Or C1Dlt DMOMr A M� Ml . SR'�� ap�+e ts�aa Mt — ov� anid � O.7S �� l�o�a0lrtn — rot on�0 a' Q+o��e r�'�'�� l�p�tie M pioes tn a�oo» 'A' ins Q1 . f�t ewr'�++� ' R ploes Owow 'A• irn MN E3asilo �IN�-" � apr�c Uatd Mert — o� arba = 0.75 � �� U4a0 Unt — rot o1�0 �� o F+n� a9n� m�rsar. os�c n mor. ano aqr+e aoar PT P�et �_ '� M eo/ o0nors t �0 2 OW N0. 200. � a-�e%�� 0.� x D�o d�st*+rr'bY 9n"r. a00 'Qsv�Mr' 10 ¢ssp ea+». ' M wl a�rttaro t t S s sano. �aa 'rMo� u�Q' 10 ~� t 4�no Oba on a�aoN 'A' r». �� w, ° R< 4 or p1o1s bMorr 'A' ir�. ° K Arrs ciasalty as 0.�t1. u� aa! syn�cal GC� "P1 po�s m a �bor�'A' 1n�. � GM. Cr SCSAA. ° R pots bMow 'A' irw. " M wrr �s Crgm� a�00 1Ntl� tirprtie tr'w' ttl Qoup tirrr. ' M �ol eonrarr t 13 x Rtw, aaa 1wnt+ Q�w• 10 Qot� rs�w. ' If At4rt�rg irres Dlp! h h�tri10 Ir�a. �W Ls a CL� stq� cYK• •!f td mn�sls 15 t� 29x plu� fio. 200. �00 'vr10f smd' d 'wftt+l ¢anl,' wtYclr� • prs� dart+ir�rx. � M x�i mr�ns t 30 s p�s No. 200. fn� �n*�r�eM saro. aaa •ss,yr m prao nm. For ctassificotion of fine-qroined soils � �� ' and fine-groined froctionof coarse-gro�ned / so�1s. , � Equotion of �A -iine �j� HoriiontaJ ct PI-4 to LL�25.5, °, .•�;/ �� thea.PI�0.73 fLL-20) `'�/ Q� ••p�' Equotion of "U'-line � � • Verticat et LL =16 to PI=7 �� ,�� then PI = 0.9 ([.L-8� � . � , • �' . � i�� V �� o . . _ � �` MH �R OH i� G� i � , -- �- - - —��i,c.�� M ;/i/ ' M L �R 0 L � . I � I 10 16 20 30 4�0 50 60 70 80 Mw-051093 L tOUID L I M t T iLL� FlG. 3 Pt�atldtlr C�A � � � � � � � � � � 90 100 110 EART1}WORK � . PAGE 02200-1�-f- , � � � � SECTION 02460 - A.C. PAVEMENT AND BASE PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. 1.2 � A. ASTM C136 — Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. � B. ANSI/ASTM D698 — Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil- Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5 Ib Rammer and 12 inch Drop. � � � Q � C. ASTM D2922 — Test Method for Density of Soil Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). D. ASTM D4318 — Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. E. F G The CONTRACTOR shall provide A.C. pavement and base, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS TEXAS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS — Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges. Texas Department of Highways and Public Transportation, 1982 Standard Sections for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges (TSHDPT). MS-2-Mix Design Methods for Ashphalt Concrete and Other Hot Mix Types — The Asphalt Institute (AI). H. MS-3 — Asphalt Plant Manual — The Asphalt Institue (AI). �j I. MS-8 — Asphalt paving Manual — The Asphalt Institute (AI). (.� L�' �' � n �� C!J 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 'A. Paving: Designed for parking, heavy duty commercial vehicles, movement of HS20 Trucks. 1.4 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. Include materials testing reports, job-mix formulas, and other pertinent information satisfactory to the ENGINEER. � B. Suitability Tests of Proposed Materials: Tests for conformance with the Specifications shall be performed prior to start of the WORK. The samples shall be identified to show the name of the material, aggregate source, name of the supplier, contract number, and the segment of the WORK where the material represented by the sample is to be used. Results of all tests shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval. Materials to be tested shall include aggregate base, coarse and fine aggregate for paving mixtures, 092398 . 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements A.C. PAVEMENT AND BASE PAGE 02460-1 mineral filler, and asphalt cement. C. Trial Batch: Before placing any paving material, a testing laboratory acceptable to the ENGINEER shall prepare a trial batch of asphalt concrete for each job-mix formula to be used by the CONTRACTOR for the work. The trial batch shall be prepared using the aggregates and asphalt cement proposed by the CONTRACTOR, and approved by the ENGINEER. The compacted trial batch shall provide a basis for computing the voids ratio, provide an indication of the optimum asphalt content, and establish a basis for controlling compaction during construction. The cost of not more than two laboratory trial batch tests will be paid by the OWNER but the CONTRACTOR shall furnish the materials at no cost. Any additional trial batch testing shall be performed at no additional cost to the OWNER. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 AGGREGATE BASE A. Materials for aggregate base shall be Type G material in accordance with Section 02200 — Earthwork and shall also conform to Texas Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges, Item 248 Type B, Grade 2. .� B. Fine Aggregrate: Type C specified in Section 02200 - Earthwork. , . , 2.2 PRIME COAT A. The base course shall be primed with 0.30 gallons per sq. yd of cut back asphalt MC-30. 2.3 TACK COAT A. Apply 0.5 gallon per square yard of dilute emulsified asphalt SS-1. 2.4 ASPHALT CEMENT A. 2.5 Asphalt Cement shall be Grade AC-20. MINERAL AGGREGATE A. Mineral aggregate shall be crushed stone, crushed slag, crushed gravel, stone or slag screening, sand, mineral filler, or a combination of two or more of these materials. Coarse and fine aggregates shall comply with all the quality requirements, except soundness, of ASTM D 692 and D 1073, respectively. Coarse aggregate failing to comply with abrasion requirements may be used if experience has demonstrated it to be satisfactory. CQ C. Mineral filler shall comply with ASTM D 242. Combinations of aggregates having a history of polishing shall not be used in surface courses. " D. Aggregate for Wearing Course Mix: In accordance with TSHDPT Class A Hot-Mix Asphaltic Concrete pavement, Type "D" Fine Graded Surface Course. 092398 A.C. PAVEMENT AND BASE 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 0�460-2 � � � � � � � � � I Passinq �h inch sieve � Passing 3/8 inch sieve 1 Passing 3/8 inch sieve, retained on No. 4 sieve Passing No. 4 sieve, retained on No. 10 sieve � Total retained on No. 10 sieve � Passing No. 10 sieve, retained on No. 40 sieve � Passing No. 40 sieve, retained on No. 80 sieve � Passinq No. 80 sieve, retained on No. 200 sieve � Passing No. 200 sieve 2.6 ASPHALT-AGGREGATE MIXTURE 100% � 85 to 100% � 21 to 53% � 11 to 32% � 54 to 74% � 6 to 32% � 4 to 27°/a � 3 to 27% � 1 to 8% � A. Base Course Mixture: The CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval a job-mix formula for each mixture. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. The subgrade shall be prepared in accordance with Section 02200 - Earthwork as applicable to roadways and embankments. The surface of the subgrade after compaction shall be hard, uniform, smooth and true to grade and cross-section. Subgrade for pavement shall not vary more than 0.02-foot from the indicated grade and cross section. Subgrade for base material shall not vary more than 0.04-foot from the indicated grade and cross section. � 3.2 AGGREGATE BASE � � � a � � � � � A. Aggregate base shall be provided where indicated to the thickness indicated. Imported aggregate bases shall be delivered to the Site as uniform mixtures and each layer shall be spread in one operation. Segregation shall be avoided and the base shall be free of pockets of coarse or fine material. Where the required thickness is 6 inches or less, the base materials may be spread and compacted in one layer. Where the required thickness is more than 6 inches; the base material shall be spread and compacted in two or more layers of approximately equal thickness, and the maximum compacted thickness of any one layer shall not exceed 6 inches. The relative compaction of each layer of aggregate base shall be not less than 95 percent of maximum density when measured in accordance with ASTM D 1557. The compacted surface of the finished aggregate shall be hard, uniform, smooth and at any point shall not vary more than 0.02 foot from the indicated grade or cross-section. 3.3 PRIME COAT A. Prior to placing of pavement a prime coat of cutback asphalt shall be applied to the compacted base or subgrade at a rate between 0.10 and 0.25 gal/sq yd. 3.4 TACK COAT A. A tack coat shall be applied to existing paved surfaces where new asphalt concrete is to be placed on existing pavement. It shall also be applied to the contact surfaces of all cold pavement joints, curbs, gutters, manholes and the like immediately before' the 'adjoining 092398 � A.C. PAVEMENT AND BASE 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 02460-3 asphalt pavement is placed. Care shall be taken to prevent the application of tack coat material to surfaces that will not be in contact with the new asphalt concrete pavement. Diluted emulsified asphalt shall be applied at the rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal/sq yd. Undiluted emulsified asphalt shall be applied at the rate of 0.025 to 0.075 gal/sq yd. Paving asphalt shall be applied at the rate of approximately 0.05 gal/sq yd. 3.5 ASPHALT CONCRETE u L�J L�J A. At the time of delivery to the Site, the temperature of mixture shall not be lower than 260 � degrees F or higher than 320 degrees F, the lower limit to be approached in warm weather and the higher in cold weather. „ B. Asphalt concrete shall not be placed when the atmospheric temperature is below 40 � degrees F or during unsuitable weather. C. The asphalt concrete shall be evenly spread upon the subgrade or base to such a depth that, after rolling, it will be of the required cross section and grade of the course being constructed. D. The depositing, distributing, and spreading of the asphalt concrete shall be accomplished in a single, continuous operation by means of a self-propelled mechanical spreading and �finishing machine designed specially for that purpose. The machine shall be equipped with a screed or strike-off assembly capable of being accurately regulated and adjusted to distribute a layer of the material to a definite pre-determined thickness. When paving is of a size or in a location that use of a self-propelled machine is impractical, the ENGINEER may waive the self-propelled requirement. E. Spreading, once commenced, shall be continued without interruption. F. The mix shall be compacted immediately after placing. Initial rolling with a steel-wheeled tandem roller, steel three-wheeled roller, vibratory roller, or a pneumatic-tired roller shall follow the paver as closely as possible. If needed, intermediate rolling with a pneumatic- tired roller shall be done immediately behind the initial rolling. Final rolling shall eliminate marks from previous rolling. In areas too small for th'e roller, a vibrating plate compactor or a hand tamper shall be used to achieve thorough compaction. � G. Upon completion the pavement shall be true to grade and cross-section. When a 10-ft straightedge is laid on the finished surface parallel to the center of the roadway, the surface shall not vary from the edge of the straightedge more than 1/8-in except at intersections or changes of grade. In the transverse direction, the surface shall not vary from the edge of the straightedge more than 1/4-in. H. The relative density after compaction shall be 95 percent of the density obtained by using ASTM_ D 1188 or D 2726. A properly calibrated nuclear asphalt testing device shall be used for determining the field density of compacted asphalt concrete, or slabs or cores may be laboratory tested in accordance with ASTM D 1188. 3.6 PAVEMENT MARKING A. Pavement marking paint shall be applied where indicated only when the pavement surface is dry and clean, and when the air temperature is above 40 degrees F. All equipment used in the application of pavement marking shall produce stripes and markings of uniform 092398 A.C. PAVEMENT AND BASE 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 02460-4 L�� G�, � � � C�� u � � �1 � �� '� � uali with clean and well-defined ed es that conform to the details and dimensions q tY 9 indicated. Drips, overspray, improper markings, and paint material tracked by traffic shall � be immediately removed from the pavement surface by methods previously reviewed by the ENGINEER. � � L! � L�!] � � � � � � LiJ liJ � � � lJ - END OF SECTION - 092398 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements A.C. PAVEMENT AND BASE PAGE 02460-5 �' l�J L!�i ��1 l�' � � Ls] lJ � �� L�J � ls1 1*J SECTION 02597 - PVC PRESSURE PIPE, RUBBER JOINTS (AWWA C900, MODIFIED) PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install 4-inch to 12-inch polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure pipeline, complete in place, all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards: ANSI/A1NWA C104/A21.5 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water ANSI/AVW1/A C110/A21.10 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings 3-in Through 48-in for Water and Other Liquids ANSI/AVW1/A C111/A21.11 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings � ANSI/AWWA C600 Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Appurtenances ANSI/AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe 4-in Through 12-in for Water ASTM D2584 PPI Technical Report TR 3/4 AWWA Manual M23 Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins Policies and Procedures for Developing Recommended Hydrostatic Design Stresses for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials PVC Pipe - Design and Installation 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS � A. Shop Drawings: The CONTRACTOR shall submit shop drawings of pipe, fittings, and appurtenances in accordance with the requirements in Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Certifications: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a certified affidavit of compliance for all pipe and other products or materials furnished under this Section of the Specifications, as specified in the referenced standards and the following supplemental requirements: 1. Hydrostatic proof test reports. 2. Sustained pressure test reports. 3. Burst strength test reports. 051093 � 1333018 South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PVC PRESSURE PIPE, RUBBER JOINTS . PAGE 02597-1 C� 1.4 All expenses incurred in making samples for certification of tests shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inspection: All pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture in accordance with the provisions of the referenced standards as supplemented by the requirements herein. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER in writing of the manufacturing starting date not less than 14 calendar days prior to the start of any phase of the pipe manufacture. B. During the manufacture of the pipe, the ENGINEER shall be given access to all areas where manufacturing is in process and shall be permitted to make all inspections necessary to confirm compliance with the Specifications. C. Tests: Except as modified herein, all materials used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of this Section of the Specifications, as specified in the referenced standards, as applicable. - D. The CONTRACTOR shall perform said material tests in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The ENGINEER shall have the right to witness all testing conducted by •the CONTRACTOR; provided, that the CONTRACTOR'S schedule is not delayed for the convenience of the ENGINEER. E. In addition to those tests specifically required, the ENGINEER may request additional samples of any material for testing by the OWNER. � The additional samples shall be furnished at no additional cost to the OWNER. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A 2.2 PVC pressure pipe (4-inch through 12-inch) shall conform to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C900 and subject to additional requirements specified herein. PIPE DESIGN CRITERIA A. General: PVC pressure pipe shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of Appendix A of ANSI/AWWA C900, as applicable, and the supplemental requirements specified in this Section. . B. Pipe Wall Thickness for Internal Pressure: The pipe shall be designed with a minimum thickness (t) or dimension ratio (DR) in accordance with paragraph A.3 of the above referenced Appendix A. ' C. Determination of �xternal Loads: ' In lieu of the equations specified in paragraph A.4 of the above referenced Appendix A, the dead (earth) loads shall be computed using the following 2 � equations for trench or embankment conditions as applicable: 1. Trench Condition: Wd = l.rdWBd2 051093 1333018 South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PVC PRESSURE PIPE, RUBBER JOINTS PAGE 02597-2 � � � � � � L�j � ��l � Where: Wd = Earth load in pounds per linear foot Cd = Calculation coefficient Ku' _ [0.13] w = [120] Ib/ft3 Bd = Trench width at top of pipe, feet 2. Positive Projecting Embankment Condition: - W� = C�w6�2 Where: W� = Earth load in pounds per linear foot C� = Calculation coefficient (based on r�P of 0.75) Ku = [0.19] 3 w = [120] Ib/ft B� = Outside diameter of pipe, feet D. Similarly, in lieu of the method specified in paragraph A.4, the truck live loads shall be determined using the method recommended by AASHTO in "Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges." For depths of cover less than 10 feet HS-20 live loads shall be added to the earth loads to determine the total load. For depths of cover 3 feet or less, HS-20 live load plus impact shall be included. E. Deflection Control: With reference to paragraph A.S, the deflection of the pipe after installation shall not exceed 0.03 times the outside diameter. If the calculated deflection exceeds 0.03 times the outside diameter the pipe class shall be increased or the quality of the pipe zone backfill shall be improved to achieve a higher modulus of soil reaction, E'. For purposes of calculation, values of E' shall be 1100 psi at 90 percent Standard Proctor; 1500 psi at 95 percent Standard Proctor; and 2500 psi at 100 percent Standard Proctor. Similarly, the deflection lag factor shall be 1.5. � 2.3 PIPE l�J L�i � � L�J 1-� � [J A. The pipe shall be of the diameter and pressure class specified or shown, shall be furnished complete with rubber gaskets, and all specials and fittings shall be provided as required in the Contract Documents. The dimensions and pressure classes for Dimension Ratios for large PVC pressure pipe with Cast-Iron Pipe Equivalent O.D.'s shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C900. B. Additives and Fillers: Unfess otherwise provided in alternate qualification procedures of PPI- TR3, compounds which have a Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB) of 4000 psi at 73.4 degrees F for water shall not contain additives and fillers that exceed the recommended values in Table 1, Part Y of PPI-TR3 (e.g., allowable content range for calcium carbonate is 0.0-5.0 parts per hundred of resin). If requested by the ENGINEER, the additive and filler content shall be determined using the pyrolysis method as specified in ASTM D 2584. C. Joints: All joints for the buried PVC pipe shall be either an integral bell manufactured on the pipe or a separate coupling both employing a rubber ring joint. The bell and coupling shall be the same thickness as of the pipe barrel, or greater thickness. The sealing ring groove in the coupling shall be of the same design as the groove in cast iron fittings and valves available from �ocal water works supply distributors. Where shown, restrained joint pipe shall be ductile . iron pipe. No restrained joint PVC pipe will be allowed. D. Joint Deflection: Deflection at the joint shall not exceed 1.5 degrees or the maximum 051093 PVC PRESSURE PIPE, RUBBER JOINTS 1333018 South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 02597-3 deflection recommended by the manufacturer. No defiection of the joint shall be allowed for joints which are over-belled or not belled to the stop mark. 2.4 FITTINGS E F, G Fittings shall be ductile iron and shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C110, Class 250 PVC pipe fittings shall be mechanical joint. All fittings shall be lined and coated in accordance with the requirements of Section 09900 - Painting. Each fitting shall be clearly labeled to identify its size and pressure class. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All laying, jointing, testing for defects and for leakage shall be performed in the presence of the ENGINEER, and shall be subject to his approval� before acceptance. All material found during the'progress to have defects will be rejected and the CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove such defective materials from the site of the work. B. Installation shall conform to the requirements of A1NWA M23, instructions furnished by the pipe manufacturer, and to the supplementary requirements or modifications specified herein. Wherever the provisions of this Section and the aforementioned requirements are in conflict, the more stringent provision shall apply. 3.2 HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Handling: Pipe, fittings and accessories shall be carefully inspected before and after installation and those found defective shall be rejected. Pipe and fittings shall be free from fins and burrs. Before being placed in position, pipe, fittings, and accessories shall be cleaned, and shall be maintained in a clean condition. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Under no circurnstances shall pipe, fittings or any other material be dropped or dumped into trenches. B. Storage: Pipe should be stored, if possible, at the job site in unit packages provided by the manufacturer. Caution should be exercised to avoid compression damage or deformation to bell ends of the pipe. Pipe should be stored in such a way as to prevent sagging or bending and protected from exposure to direct sunlight by covering with an opaque material while permitting adequate air circulation above and around the pipe. Gaskets should be stored in a cool, dark place out of the direct rays of the run, preferably in original cartons. 3.3 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL l�J � �� I'� � � � � � � � � � � ►�JI A. Trench excavation and backfill shall conform to the requirements of Section 02200 - Earthwork, and as specified herein. � 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Bell-and-spigot pipe shall be laid with the bell end pointing in the direction of laying. Pipe shall be graded in straight lines, taking care to avoid the formation of any dips or low points. Pipe shall not be laid when the conditions of trench or weather are unsuitable. At the end of each 051093 PVC PRESSURE PIPE, RUBBER JOINTS 1333018 South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 02597-4 L�J � I� � � l�l �J �� days work, open ends of pipe shall be closed temporarily with wood blocks or bulkheads. B. Pipe shall be supported at its proper elevation and grade, care being taken to secure firm and uniform support. Wood support blocking will not be permitted. The full length of each section of pipe and fittings shall rest solidly on the pipe bed, with recessed excavation to accommodate bells, joints and couplings. Anchors and supports shall be provided where necessary and where indicated on the drawings for fastening work into place. Fittings shall be independently supported. C. Short lengths of pipe shall be used in and out of each rigid joint or rigid structure. Piping that does not allow sufficient space for proper installation of jointing material shall be replaced by one of proper dimensions. Blocking or wedging between bells and spigots will not be permitted. D. Joints shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommendations. Trenches shall be kept free of water until joints have been properly made. The maximum combined deflection at any coupling shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. (�j E. Pipe shall be cut by means of saws, power driven abrasive wheels or pipe cutters, which will +�.5 produce a square cut. No wedge-type roller cutters will be permitted. After cutting, the end of the pipe shall be beveled using a beveling tool, portable type sander or abrasive disc. � 3.5 INSTALLATION OF COPPER WIRE � L�J L!�; L�J � u � � � � � A. Polyvinyl chloride pipelines shall be provided with No. 10 A.W.G. bare copper wire laid along the top of the pipe and held in place with ties or hitches of the same kind of wire spaced not more than 13 feet apart, or metallic locating tape laid along the centerline of the pipe trench at a depth of 18 inches below finish grade. In such case, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish manufacturer's literature, in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals completely describing the tape proposed to be furnished. No tape shall be used prior to receipt of written approval of the ENGINEER. 3.6 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Service Connections: Direct tapping will not be permitted. Double strap bronze service clamps shall be used for all service connections. Service clamps shall have a bearing area of ' sufficient width along the axis of the pipe, so that the pipe will not be distorted when the saddle is made tight. An internal shell cutter shall be used to drill through the corporation stop to minimize PVC shavings,�retain the coupon, and reduce stress. Single fluted shell cutters or twist drills are not acceptable. Lubricate the cutting and tapping edges of the tool with cutting lubricant. Make the cuts slowly and use the follower very lightly - do not force cutter through pipe wall. Shell cutter shall have sufficient throat depth to handle the heavy wall PVC pipe. Maximum outlet size permitted with service clamps or saddle is 2 inches. B. Tapping sleeves and valves shall be used for all outlet sizes greater than 2 inches in diameter. Tapping sleeves shall be assembled and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.7 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING WATERLINES A. The CONTRACTOR shall locate all underground improvements and install the pipelines to the depths shown on the drawings. Where the new work is to be connected to existing pipelines, 051093 � PVC PRESSURE PIPE, RUBBER JOINTS 1333018 South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 02597=5 3.8 A the CONTRACTOR shall make its arrangements with the serving utility well in advance of the connections, to allow adequate time for dewatering of the existing line, if necessary, and shall expedite the work to minimize water outages to the users. Where sections of existing distribution mains are taken permanently out of service and abandoned in place, the cut ends shall be plugged solid with concrete to a depth of not less than one pipe diameter. FIELD TESTING AND DISINFECTION Field testing and disinfection and water mains shall conform to the requirements of Section 02643 - Water Pipeline Testing and Disinfection. - END OF SECTION - "F 051093 PVC PRESSURE PIPE, RUBBER JOINTS 1333018 South Holly WTP ' Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 02597-6 � L#� L�J L�J SECTION 02643— WATER PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shail perform flushing and testing of all pipelines and appurtenant piping and disinfection� of all pipelines and appurtenant piping for potable water, complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents. � 12 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards: � ANSI/AWWA 6300 Hypochlorites. ANSI/AWWA 6301 Liquid Chlorine. � ANSI/AWWA C651 Disinfecting Water Mains. � 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. A proposed plan and schedule for water conveyance, cleaning, pressure testing, disinfection, � and water disposal shall be submitted in writing for approval a minimum of [48 hours before testing is to start. The plan shall demonstrate that personnel are experienced and prepared to resolve problems which may arise. � LJ l!J PART 2 ---PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS A. All test equipment, chemicals for chlorination, temporary valves, bulkheads, or other water � control equipment and materials shall be selected and furnished by the CONTRACTOR subject to the ENGINEER's review. No materials shall be used which would be injurious to the construction or its future function. l�' � � � l�J l� B. Chlorine for disinfection may be in the form of liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution, or calcium hypochlorite granules or tablets. C. Liquid chlorine shall be in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWINA B301. Liquid chlorine shall be used only: 1. In combination with appropriate gas flow chlorinators and ejectors; 2. Under the direct supervision of an experienced technician; 3. When appropriate safety practices are observed. D. Sodium hypochlorite and calcium hypochlorite shall be in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA B300. 100898 1333018 South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvement WATER PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION PAGE 02643-1 PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Unless otherwise indicate�, water for testing and disinfecting water pipelines will be furnished by the OWNER; however, the CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary provisions for conveying the water from t�e OWNER-designated source to the points of use. B. All pressure pipelines shalll be tested. C. Disinfection shall be accorriplished by chlorination. All chlorinating and testing operations shall be performed in the preser�ce of the ENGINEER. I D. Disinfection operations shall be scheduled by the CONTRACTOR as late as possible during the contract time period so as to assure the maximum degree of sterility of the facilities at the time the WORK is accepte,d by the OWNER. Bacteriological testing shall be performed by a certified testing laboratory approved by the OWNER and at the expense of the CONTRACTOR. Results� of the bacteriological testing shall be satisfactory to the State Department of Health or ot er appropriate regulatory agency. 3.2 A. B. C, D. E. 3.3 A. PIGGING � The CONTRACTOR shall clean the system thoroughly by pigging to remove sand, grit, gravel, stones, fluids, construction� waste, and all material which would not be found in a properly cleaned pipeline. Pigging �hall obtain a smooth interior pipe surface free from any material or fluid not used in cleaning. Pigging shall be defined as passage of a sufficient number of pigs through the pipeline to achieve the clean condition� above. Flushing will not be acceptable as a substitute for pigging. Provision for pig access and egress points and disposal of water and materials shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibplity. � , . Pigs shall be individually malrked and their location shall be controlled and monitored so that no pigs remain in the system af�er cleaning. I Pigging may be done in co,njunction�with ititial filling for the hydrostatic test. HYDROSTATIC TESTING F PIPELINES Prior to hydrostatic testing,. pipelines shall be flushed or blown out as appropriate. The CONTRACTOR shall test all pipelines either in sections or as a unit. No section of the pipeline shall be tested until all field-p�aced concrete or mortar has attained an age of 14 days. The test shall be made by closing valves when available, or by placing temporary bulkheads in the pipe and filling the line slowly wit water. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for ascertaining that all test bulkheads are s�itably restrained to resist the thrust of the test pressure without damage to, or movement df, the adjacent pipe. Any unharnessed sleeve-type couplings, expansion joints, or other sli ing joints shall be restrained or suitably anchored prior to the test, to avoid movement and dam�ge to piping and equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall provide sufficient temporary air tappings in the pipelines to allow for evacuation of all entrapped air in 100898 ! WATER PIPELINE 1333018 South Holly WTP TESTING AND DISINFECTION Coagulant Feed System Improveme�t PAGE 02643-2 L�' � C� � u l�' lJ ��J L�! �� L�' � � ��, LJ LJ � L�J � I� each pipe segment to be tested. After completion of the tests, such taps shali be permanently plugged. Care shall be taken to see that �all air vents are open during filling. B. The pipeline shall be filled at a rate which will not cause any surges or exceed the rate at which the air can be released through the air valves at a reasonable velocity and all the air within the pipeline shall be properly purged. After the pipeline or section thereof has been�filled, it shall be allowed to stand under a slight pressure for at least 24 hours to allow the concrete or mortar lining, as applicable, to absorb what water it will and to allow the escape of air from any air pockets. During this period, bulkheads, valves, and connections shall be examined for leaks. If leaks are found, corrective measures satisfactory to the ENGINEER shall be taken. C. The hydrostatic test shall consist of holding the test pressure on the pipeline for a period of 4 hours. The test pressure for distribution and transmission pipelines shall be 125 percent of the pipe pressure class indicated, measured at the highest point of the pipeline section being tested. The test pressure for yard piping shall be as indicated on the Piping Schedule measured at the lowest point of the pip�line section being tested. No pressure test will be required for a reservoir overflow line. All visible leaks shall be repaired in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER. I D. The maximum allowable leakage for dist�ibution and transmission pipelines shall be according to the following formula: ' L=SxDxP"�/133,200 where: L= leakage (gallons per hour) I S= length (feet), the lessor of the actual ,�ength being tested or the maximum length for determining leakage. Maximum length f�r determining leakage is 2000 feet. D = pipe diameter (inches) P = test pressure (psi) E. The maximum leakage for yard piping s�hall be as shown on the Piping Schedule. Pipe with welded joints shall have no leakage. F. Pipelines that fail to pass the prescribed leakage test will be considered defective WORK, and the CONTRACTOR shall determine the cause of the leakage, shall take corrective measures necessary to repair the leaks, and shall �etest the pipelines. � 3.4 DISINFECTING PIPELINES A. General: All potable water pipelines except those appurtenant to hydraulic structures shall be disinfected in accordance with the reqUirements of ANSI/AWWA C651 using the Continuous- Feed Method as modified herein. � � B. Chlorination: A chlorine-water soluti'on shall be uniformly introduced into the pipeline by means of a solution-feed chlorinating device. The chlorine solution shall be introduced at one end of the pipeline through a tap in su�h a manner that as the pipeline is filled with water, the concentration in the water entering the� pipe is approximately 50 mgJl. Care shall be taken to prevent the strong chlorine solution in the pipeline being disinfected from flowing back into the line supplying the water. C. Retention Period: Chlorinated water �hall be retained in the i eline lon enou h to destroy , Pp 9 9 100898 1333018 South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvement WATER PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION PAGE 02643-3 all non-spore-forming baateria. This period �shall be at least 24 hours. After the chlorine- treated water has been re ained for the required time, the free chlorine residual at the pipeline extremities and at other re�resentative points shall be at least 25 mg/I. �❑ E. Chlorinating Valves: D�ring the process of chlorinating the pipelines, all valves and other appurtenances shall be operated while the pipeline is filled with the heavily-chlorinated water. Sampling Ports: The C�ONTRACTOR shall provide sampling ports along the pipeline as defined on AWWA C651. ;Taps may be made at manways and air valves to help facilitate the spacing requirement. � F. Final Flushing: After the applicable retention period, the heavily chlorinated water shall be flushed from the pipeline u�til chlorine measurements show that the concentration in the water leaving the pipeline is no h gher than that generally prevailing in the system or is acceptable for domestic use. If there is a y question that the chlorinated discharge will cause damage to the environment, a reducing �gent shall be applied to the water to neutralize thoroughly the chlorine residual remairnng an the water. G. Bacteriological Testing: After final flushing and before the pipeline is placed in service, a sample, or samples shall be collected from the end of the line, and shall be tested for bacteriological quality in accordance with the requirements of the State Department of Health or other appropriate regulatory agency. For this purpose the pipe shall be re-filled with fresh potable water and left for a period of 24 hours before any sample is collected. Should the initial disinfection treatment fail to produce satisfactory bacteriological test results, the disinfection procedure shall be repeated until acceptable results are obtained. 3.5 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEM A. Where connections are to be made to an existing potable water system, the interior surfaces of all pipe and fittings used in making the connections shall be swabbed or sprayed with a one percent hypochlorite solution before they are installed. Thorough flushing shall be started as soon as the connection is completed and shall be continued until .discolored water is eliminated. - END OF SECTION - � � � L�� L�`J � r , i�i �.� L.J � � I�� J [+�J � � � � .L#J 100898 WATER PIPELINE 1333018 South Holly WTP . , TESTING AND DISINFECTION Coagulant Feed System Improvement PAGE 02643-4 L�!J CI' L�1 � LiJ � L!J � � � � LsJ � LsJ � L�J � � � CI SECTION 02831 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install chain link fencing and gates as shown and specified and all appurtenant work, complete, all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings of gates and rypical fence and fence corner construction shall be submitted prior to fabrication and construction according to the provisions of Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Fencing shall be 6 feet high unless otherwise shown. All fencing materials shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Fencing shall be topped with 3 lines of barbed wire unless otherwise shown. All materials and components shall be new, first quality items specifically manufactured for the intended application. 22 MATERIAL A. Fence fabric shall be No. 9 gage galvanized steel wire, 2-inch mesh. The fabric shall have a knuckled finish on the top edge and a twisted and barbed finish on the bottom edge. B. Fabric ties shall be No. 9 galvanized steel wire, spaced 14 inches apart on posts and 24 inches apart on rails. Aluminum ties will not be permitted. A continuous No. 7 gage galvanized steel wire shall be interlaced with the fabric or attached to the fabric with clips along the extreme bottom of the fence. C. All posts shall be one-piece without circumferential welds, and shall be: 1. Line posts shall be 2-inch schedule 40 pipe, 3.65 Ib/ft. 2. End and corner posts shall be 2-1/2-inch schedule 40 pipe, 5.79 Ib/ft. 3. Gate posts shall be 3-1/2-inch schedule 40 pipe, 9.1 Ib/ft. D. Top rail and braces shall be 1-1/4-inch schedule 40 pipe, 2.27 Ib/ft. E. Barbed wire shall be 2-strand, No. 12-1/2 gage zinc-coated steel or iron wire with 4-point, 14- gage barbs spaced not more than 5 inches apart. F. Stretcher bars shall be 1/4-inch by 3/4-inch steel bars and steel bands for fastening stretcher bars to the posts shall be 1/8-inch by 3/4-inch. G. Nuts, bolts and screws shall be of steel, hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication, minimum size 3/8-inch diameter. 051093 � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PAG E 02831-1 I�II � H. Swing gate frames shall bE constructed of pipe at least as heavy as the top rails for the fence and shall be fabricated by �relding with all welds ground smooth prior to hot-dip galvanizing. Each gate leaf shall be pro � ided with at least one diagonal brace. Frames shall be galvanized after fabrication. Galvaniz d malleable iron fittings for latching the gate shall be provided. Swing gates shall be hung y at least 2 steel or malleable iron hinges not less than 3 inches in width. Fabric shall match fie fabric used in the fence. Each pair of gates shall be provided with a heavy drop rod latch �ssembly with a locking device for a padlock. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 2,000 psi at the age of 28 days. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION I� � '�J � A. All earth, brush, or other ob�tructions which interfere with the proper alignment of construction � of fences shall be removed �nd disposed of at the expense of the CONTRACTOR. B. Line posts shall be spaced a�t not more than 10-foot intervals, measured from center to center �] of the posts and generally p�rallel to the ground slope. Posts shall be set plumb and shall be �� centered in 12-inch diameter concrete encasement extencting 36 inches into the ground. C. � Gate post shall be provided with concrete foundation. The foundation shall be designed (for load supporting and resistinJ by an engineer. Soil properties shall be as shown in soils report. Changes in the fence lines, where the horizontal angle is 15 degrees or more, shall be considered as corners and c�rner posts shall be installed. E. Bracing shall be provided at all end, gate, and corner posts, the latter in both directions. Horizontal brace rails shall b set midway between top rail and ground running from the comer, end, or gate post to first lin post. Diagonal tension members shall connect tautly between posts below horizontal brace . • � F. Corner posts shall be installe in lieu of line posts at intervals not exceeding 500 feet and shall be braced horizontally in bot directions. G. The chain-link fabric shall be fastened on the side of the posts as shown or as designated by the ENGINEER. The fabric shall be stretched and securely fastened to the posts, and, between the posts, the top ar� d bottom edges of the fabric shall be fastened to the top rail and tension wire, respectively. T�e tension wires shall be stretched tight with turnbuckles at the end and corner posts. The b��ttom tension wire shall be installed on a straight grade between posts. H. The fabric shall be fastened tc the end, corner, and gate posts with stretcher bars and stretcher bar bands spaced at approxir�ately 14 inches on line posts and at approximately 18 inches on tension wires. Encasement concrete for footings shall be placed immediately after mixing in a manner such that there will be no concentration of the large aggregates. The concrete shall be consolidated by tamping or vibrating in an approved manner. Concrete for footings may be placed without forms, providing the ground is firm enough to permit excavation to neat line dimensions. Prior to placing the concrete, the earth around the hole shall be thoroughly moistened. The concrete shall completely fill the hole �nd top surfaces of the concrete encasement shall be sloped outward to shed water and sf �all have a neat appearance. Not less than 7 days shall elapse 051093 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvement� CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PAGE 02831-2 � I� � � �� u L�J � ��l L�J � � � � � � � � � � �. � � � r � � � � � after placing the concrete footings before the fence fabric or barbed wire is fastened to the posts. J. Any galvanized coating damaged during construction of the fencing shall be repaired by application of molten Galvo-Weld; Galvinox; or equal. - END OF SECTION - m 051093 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PAG E 02831-3 �'� � �f �� e� �� ..� � � �� Q � � � � 0 � L+�J � C� L�J � SECTION 02900 - SEED(NG AND FERTILIZING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. This specification Section covers all work required to seed and fertilize all areas designated on the Contract Drawings or as directed in the field by the ENGINEER. This shall include any area that has been disturbed by Project work. The CONTRACTOR shall supply all equipment, supplies and labor to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS � 2.1 SEED MIXTURE LsJ [�' L!' � A. All seed shall conform with applicable County, State of Texas, and Federal regulations. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the seed supplier's guaranteed germination of each variety listed in the seed mixture. Grass seed shall not be delivered to the site until samples have been approved by the ENGINEER. Approval of samples, however, shall not affect the right of the ENGINEER to reject seed upon or after delivery. Seed which has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged prior to use will not be accepted. B. Seed shall be delivered in strong, clearly marked bags not exceeding 40 pounds each. C. Grass seed shall be fresh, clean, and new-crop seed composed of the following � varieties mixed in the proportions by'weight as shown, and tested for the minimum percentage of purity and germination specified. All rates specified shall be pure live seed (PLS). L#J � 1■J L■J I�J L�J � D. The seed mixture shall not contain more than 5 percent weeds or other non-specified species. E. Any deviation of the specified seed mixture must be approved by the ENGINEER prior to delivery to the site. This seed mixture is composed of native grass and grass- like species. Some lead time may be necessary to locate a distributor and have the seed mixed as specified. • � 073198 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements SEEDING AND FERTILIZING PAGE 02900-1 SEED MIXTUFtE Scientific Name Elvmus trachvcaulus var "Prior" Pascopvrum smithii Elvmus lanceolatus Elvmus elvmoides Orvzoqsis hvmenoides Percent Mixture Common Name Pure Live Seed Slender Wheatgrass 40% Western Wheatgrass 20% i� Thickspike Wheatgrass 20% Bottlebrush Squirreltail Indian Ricegrass Total Pounds Seed Required I�er Acre 2.2 FERTILIZER 10% 10% 20 % Purity and Germination 90 90 90 90 90 A. Fertilizer shall be furnishecl in bags or other standard containers with name, weight, and guarantee analysis of �ontents clearly marked thereon. Fertilizer containers shall not exceed 50 pounds eac �. . B. Chemical fertilizers shall b►; mixed commercial slow-release fertilizer with percentages of nitrogen, phosphoric acid, and potash at 16-16-16. The combined N-P-K content shall be the following perentages of total weight: 16 percent nitrogen, 16 percent phosphoric acid and 16 p�rcent potash. Fertilizers shall be uniform in composition, dry, and free flowing. 2.3 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil shall be obtained furm naturally drained areas and shall be fertile, friable loam suitable for plant growth. Topsoi( shall be subject to inspection and approval at the source of supply and upon 9elivery. B. The topsoil shall be of unifcrm quality, free from subsoil, stiff or lumpy clay, hard clods, hardpan, rocks, disintegrat�+� debris, plants, roots, seeds, and any other materials that would be toxic or harmful t� plant growth. Topsoil shall contain no noxious weeds or noxious weed seeds. C. The topsoil shall contain a; least 6 percent organic matter as determined by loss of weight after ignition of moi�ture-free samples in accordance with current methods of the Association of Official A��ricultural Chemists. 073198 = SEEDING AND FERTILIZING 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improv�ments PAGE 02904-2 � L�J � �� LiJ � � LaJ L�J L�J � �� L�J L�l C' C�� D. The acidity of the topsoil shall result in soil pH befinreen 5.5 and 7.5. the salinity level shall be less than 3 millimhos/cm. E. E.Clay, as determined by the Bouyoucous hydrometer or by the decantation method, shall not exceed 60 percent of the topsoil material. F. Mechanical analysis shall be performed and shall conform to ASTM D 422. G. Soil mix for interior plants shall be sphagnum moss or a soil mix furnished in bags or other standard containers with name, weight, and guaranteed analysis of contents clearly marked thereon. The soil mix shall be a mix designed specifically for interior container or potted planting. 2.4 MULCH A. Mulching material shall be well-rotted sawdust minimum 2 years old, pine bark or tan bark, all free of sticks, stones, clay, or other foreign materials. Bark mulch shall be medium chunk size, fortified with 1 percent nitrogen. Mulch shall Consist of 1/3 cattle manure and 2/3 coarse granular sawdust. Mulch shall be composted at least 90 days with added nitrogen and shall be free of weed seed and roots, sticks, lumps, and other foreign matter. B. "Silva-fiber" mulch material shall be "Silva-fibe�" as manufactured by the Weyerhauser Company, Silva Products Department, Tacoma, Washington, or eq ual. , C. Wood chip mulch in planting beds shall be clean, inexpensive, pulverized shavings, 2- inch minimum to 4-inch maximum length as produced by shipping tree branches or similar means, placed to a depth of 4 inches. D. Straw mulch or native hay for a soil/seed stabilizer shall be clean hay or straw applied at a rate of 3 tons per acre. Mulch is to be crimped into soil with a mulch crimper. Spacing on the blades of the mulch crimper shall be 6 inches minimum and 9 inches maximum. Blades shall be sufficiently weighted to penetrate the ground 3 inches. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The seeding shall not be performed at any time when it may be subject to damage by climatic conditions. B. Delivery of seed and fertilizer may begin only after samples and tests have been approved by the ENGINEER. All seed and fertilizer furnished shall not be less than the approved sample. � 073198 SEEDING AND FERTILIZING 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements . PAGE 02900-3 3.2 SOIL PREPARATION A. The seeding shall not begin until the CONTRACTOR has repaired all areas of settlement, erosion, ru'�ing, etc. and the soils have been placed, compacted, and contoured to finish gr�de. The ENGINEER shall be notified of all areas which prevent the planting wo •k from being executed. B. After removal of waste materials in the planting areas such as weeds, rocks (4- inches and larger), ccnstruction materials, etc. the seeding subgrade shall be scarified and pulverizEd to a depth of not less that 6 inches and all surface irregularities removed. C. D. 3.3 A. Surface drainage shall �e provided by molding the surfaces to facilitate the natural run-off of water to reduca the potential for erosion. No seeding shall be do�e when wind velocity exceeds 4 mph, within 4 hours after rain, or if the surface ha: been compacted, without first loosening the ground. BROADCAST SEEDINC;� - GENERAL Broadcast seeding shall be provided where shown or indicated or as directed in the field by the ENGINEER. B. The soil shall be prepar�d per soil preparation instructions. The ENGINEER shall inspect and approve th�; soil preparation prior to commencing with seeding and fertilizing. The CONTFACTOR shall prepare only enough ground that can be planted within 24 hours tliereafter. C. Specified seed mixture :�hall be evenly applied to prepared ground at a rate of 20 pounds per acre. D. Specified fertilizer shall t�e evenly applied to the prepared ground at a rate of 350 pounds per acre. Fertilizing shall be completed prior to seeding. E. Critical areas within 12 f�et of streams or other water bodies shall be mechanicall Y or hand raked to cover se,�ed prior to mulching or installation of erosion control fabric. ENGINEER may designa:e in the field other areas that require raking. F. All flat, seeded areas sh�' II be evenly covered with a weed-free straw mulch at the rate of 2,000 pounds pe� acre. Areas with slopes steeper than 4 horizontal to 1 vertical shall be covered viith the specified erosion control matting. G. Broadcast seeding metho�� shall shall be utilized befinreen September 1 and October 30 or between May 1 and July 1. 073198 SEEDING AND FERTILIZING 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improv�ments PAGE 02900-4 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � i� �' i� � - END OF SECTION - 0 073198 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements SEEDING AND FERTILIZING PAG E 02900-5 C� Cr3 C� �3 �3 In C� C� � C=3 G� ��3 C� � � L� C� �1 S � L*J DPART 1 - GENERAL l�' � � '� � � l!J ��J � � � � � ��JI CI �!� � 1.1 A. 12 A. B. C. 1.3 A. SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and generai provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. Cast-in-place concrete includes the following: 1. Foundations and footings. 2. Slabs-ori-grade. 3. Containment walls. 4. Equipment pads and bases. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 13 Section "Pre-Engineered Concrete Building" for structural precast concrete. SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, and others if requested by Engineer. C. Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, and placing concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcing required for openings through concrete structures. , D. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test. E. Material certificates in lieu of material laboratory test reports when permitted by Engineer. Material certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PAGE 03300-1 LJ C 1, i4merican Concrete Institute (ACl) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings." � 2. ACI 318, "Building Co;ie Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 3. Concrete Reinforcing �3teel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice." Concrete Testing Service: Engage a testing agency acceptable to Engineer to perform material evaluation tests anc� to design concrete mixes. C. Materials and instailed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of Work. Tests, inciuding rete.�ting of rejected materials for installed Work, shall be done at Contractor's expense. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Exposed Finish Cancrete: Piywood, metal, metal-framed piywood faced, or other acceptable panel-type materials to pravide cantinuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest p�acticabl sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings. B. Form Release Agent: Providb commerciai formulation form release agent with a maximum of 350 giL volatile organic a�mpounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and vill notwimpair subsequent treatments of concrete surtaces. C. Form Ties: Factory-fabricat�d, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties designed to prevent form d�flection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal. Provide units that wiil leave iio metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to the plane of the exposed concrete surface. 2.2 1. Provide ties that, when removed, wili leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in the concrete surtace. REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 81 i, Grade 60, deformed. 6. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel. C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric. D. Deformed-Steef Welded Wire abric: ASTM A 497. E. Supports for Reinforcement: 8olsters, chaics, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinf rcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI :pecifications. � 1. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand piates or horizontal runners where base materiai will not support �;hair legs. 2. For exposed-to-view co ��crete surtaces where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs that are protected by plastic (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel (CRSI, Cl�ss 2). 101598 . CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 03300-2 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVE��ENTS lrJ � L+'J � � LJ [�J � � l*J l�J L.�J � � �� 2.3 D � � � a � D � D � � � � � � a � � CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. 1. For exposed exterior surtaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain substances that cause spalling. 2. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual service may be used when acceptable to Engineer. C. Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C 330. , D. Water: Potable. Admixtures, General: Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. � F 1. Available Products: Subject to compiiance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Air-Mix or Perma-Air, Euclid Chemical Co. b. Darex AEA or Daravair, W.R. Grace & Co. c. MB-VR or Micro-Air, Master Builde�s, Inc. d. Sealtight AEA, W.R. Meadows, Inc. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. , . 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: G a. Eucon WR-75, Euclid Chemical Co. b. WRDA, W.R. Grace & Co. c. Pouolith Normal or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Eucon 37, Euclid Chemical Co. b. WRDA 19 or Daracem, W.R. Grace & Co. c. Rheobuild or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc. . Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. �� 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PAGE 03300-3 1. Available Products: 5ubject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Wurk include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Accelguard 80, Euclid Chemical Co. b. Daraset, W.R. �race & Co. c. Pouutec 20, M�ster Builders, Inc. 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS A. Reglets: Where sheet flash g or bituminous membranes are terminated in reglets, provide reglets of not less than 0.0 17-inch-thick (26-gage) galvanized sheet steel. Fill reglet or cover face opening to preve t intrusion of concrete or debris. B. Waterstops: Provide flat, d mbbell-type or centerbulb-type waterstops at construction joints and other joints as indicated. Size to suit joints. C. Rubber Waterstops: Corps oi Engineers CRD-C 513. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to com�pliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that r�ay be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. The Burke Co. b. Progress Unlimit�d. � c. Williams Produc�, Inc. � Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstop� Corps of Engineers CRD-C 572. 1. Available Manufacture►s: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that rriay be incorporated in the Wor1c include, but are not limited to,. the following: . a. The Burke Co. ' b. Greenstreak Plas`.ic Products Co. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc. . . E. Waterstops: Pre-formed plastic adhesive waterstop conforming to Fed. Spec. SS-S-210. 1. Available Manufacture►:r� Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers � offering products that mi,�y be incorporated in the Wotic include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Synko-Flex, by Synko-Flex Products. F. Sand Cushion: Clean, manufa.tured or natural sand. , G. Nonslip Aggregate Finish: Pro �ide fused aluminum oxide granules or crushed emery as the abrasive aggregate for a nonslip finish, with emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and �ot less than 25 percent femc oxide. Use material that is factory-graded, packaged, rust roof, nonglazing, and unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials. � � l�J H. Absorptive Cover: Burlap ciotr made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per a sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEN ENTS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE � PAGE 03300-4 l�l I,j � � C� � � J. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene fiim. 3. Polyethylene-coated burlap. Liquid M�mbrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid-type membrane-forming curing compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. Moisture loss not more than 0.55 kg/sq. meter when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: � a. Spartan-Cote, The Burke Co. b. Sealco 309, Cormix Construction Chemicals. c. Day-Chem Cure and Seal, �ayton Superior Corp. � e. Eucocure, Euclid Chemical Co. f. L&M Cure R, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. . g. Masterkure, Master Builders, Inc. C� K. Water-Based Acrylic Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B. 1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 Q g/L. 2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: C� � � L�J L a. Safe Cure and Seal, Dayton Superior Corp. b. Aqua-Cure, Euclid Chemical Co. c. Dress & Seal WB, L8�M Construction Chemicals, Inc. d. Masterkure 100W, Master Builders, Inc. L. Bonding Agent: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Polyvinyl ACetate (Interior Only): 1) Superior Concrete Bonder, Dayton Superior Corp. 2) Euco Weld, Euclid Chemical Co. 3) Weld-Crete, Larsen Products Corp. b. Acrylic or Styrene Butadiene: � � �� u I■� 1) Acrylic Bondcrete, The Burke Co. 2) Day-Chem Ad Bond, Dayton Superior Corp. 3) SBR Latex, Euclid Chemical Co. 4) Daraweld C, W.R. Grace & Co. M. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component material suitable for use on dry or damp surtaces. Provide material type, grade, and class to suit Project requirements. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 101598 • CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 03300-5 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS �' �I 2.5 a. _Euco Epoxy Sy �tem #452 or #620, Euclid Chemicai Co. b. Concresive Sta�dard Liquid, Master Builders, Inc. c. Rezi-Weld 100�, W.R. Meadows, Inc. d. Sikadur 32 Hi- od, Sika Corp. PROPORTIONING AND DEbIGNING MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for eac,h type and strength of concrete by either laboratory triai batch or field experience methods a�� speci�ed in ACl 301. For the trial batch method, use an independent testing agency �cceptable to Engineer for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. 1. Do not use the same twting agency for field quality control testing. B � Submit written reports to En�neer of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of Worl� Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by Engireer. Design mixes to provide norrrial weight concrete with the following properties as indicated on drawings and schedules: 1. 4000-psi, 28-day comFressive strength; water-cement ratio, 0.44 maximum (non-air- entrained), 0.35 maxim �m (air-entrained). 2. 3500-psi, 28-day compressive strength; water-cement ratio, 0.51 maximum (non-air- entrained), 0.40 maxim m (air-entrained). 3. 3000-psi, 28-day comp essive strength; water-cement ratio, 0.58 maximum (non-air- entrained), 0.46 maxim m (air-entrained). 4. 2500-psi, 28-day compressive strength; water-cement ratio, 0.67 maximum (non-air- entrained), 0.54 maxim��m (air-entrained). Q Water-Cement Ratio: Provid� concrete for following conditions with maximum water-cement (W/C) ratios as follows: 1. Subjected to freezing ar d thawing: W!C 0.45. 2. Subjected to deicers/wa ertight: W/C 0.40. 3. Subjected to brackish w-�#er, salt spray, or deicers: W/C 0.40. E. Slump Limits: Proportion and �esign mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows: 1. 2. 3. r.� Ramps, siabs, and siopirig surfaCes: Not more'than 3 inches. Reinforced foundation s stems: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 3 inches. Conc�ete containing higt�-ra�ge water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Not mo�e than 8 inches after addin� admixture to site-verified 2-to-3-inch slump concrete. Other concrete: Kot mo� than 4 inches. G. Adjustment to Concrete Mixe� Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor • when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Engin�er. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength resuits must be submitted to anii accepted by Engineer before using in Work. 2.6 ADMIXTURES � 101598 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY W7P PAGE 03300-6 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEIVIENTS � �� l�J ,� I� �l � L�J I�I LJ u ,LJ � L* � i u � � f�l u � � � L� � i� u � 2.7 � L*J � A. - Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. B. Use high-range water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with water-cement ratios below 0.50. C. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having totat air content with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent within the following limits: 1. C. � Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing, deicer chemicals, or hydraulic pressure: a. 4.5 perceni (moderate exposure); 5.5 percent (severe exposure) for 1-1/2-inch maximum aggregate. b. 4.5 percent (maderate exposure); 6.0 percent (severe exposure) ior 1-inch maximum aggregate. � c. 5.0 percent (moderate exposure); 6.0 percent (severe exposure) for 3/4-inch maximum aggregate. d. 5.5 percent (moderate exposure); 7.0 percent (severe exposure) for 1/2-inch maximum aggregate. Other concrete not exposed to freezing, thawing, or hydraulic pressure, or to receive a surface hardener: 2 to 4 percent air. CONCRETE MIXING Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specifed. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F(30 deg C) and 90 deg F(32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F(32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTtON 3.1 GENERAL � � � L�J L!J L�! 3.2 A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor retarder/barrier, and other re{ated materials with placement oi forms and reinforcing steel. FORMS A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads that might be applied unti{ concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of coRect size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and surface irregularities complying with the following ACI 347 limits: 1. Provide Class A tolerances for concrete surtaces exposed to view. � 2. Provide Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces. 101598 CAST-{N-PLACE CONCRETE 981278 — SOUTH HOL�Y WTP PAGE 03300-7 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS I�I LJ 0 C. �❑ C F. G. Construct forms to sizes, :�hapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, levei, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in the Work. Use selected materi als to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide - backup at joints to prevent c ment paste from leai ing. Fabricate forms for easy re ovai without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrec ing plates where str pping may damage cast concrete surtaces. Provide top forms for incline surfaces where siop is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms oniy. Kert wood inser:s for forming keywa�rs, reglets, �ecesses, and the like for easy removal. � Provide temporary openings for clean-outs and in pections where interior area of formwork is inaccessible before and durin � concrete placeme �. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to iarms to prevent losing concrete mor�ar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. , Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indica ed, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to prvduce uniform smoo h lines and tight edge joints. i Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in' concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine si��e and location of odenings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accural�ly place and secure�y support items built into fonns. i Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debri just before placing concrete. Retighten forms and bracing before placpng concrete, as requ red, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. , 3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT , A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing St el Institute's recommended practice for "Pfacing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods'�of reinforcement placement and supports and as specified. I B. Clean reinforcement of loose rrst and mill scals, ea�th, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. D. �. 3.4 Accurately position, support, a�nd secure reinforce�nent against displacement. Locate and support reinforcing by metal ch;rairs, runners, bolste�s, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Engineer. � Place reinforcement to maintain minimum covera�es as indicated for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely '�tie bar"s and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement ope:ations. Set wire tie$ so ends, are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 'i • I Install welded wire fabric in lendhs as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. JOINTS 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP . ' COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEM NTS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PAGE 03300-8 �� L�1 � � LJ �I �, � L�J � � � � � � � �1 J � lil � ,� �,l, �� LJ L�J � '�J L�1 � (�� I � LI Li � � �� A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints so they do not impair strength or appearance of the structu�e, as acceptable to Engineer. B. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints in walls and siabs and between walls and footings. Bulkheads designed and accepted for this purpose may be used for slabs. C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints except as indicated othervvise. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements. D. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surtaces that will be joined with fresh concrete. E. Waterstops: Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated. Install waterstops to form continuous diaphragm in each joint. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of Work. Field-fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.5 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached. B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and contours in finished surtaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. 3.6 A. B 3.7 PREPARING FORM SURFACES General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, form- coating compound before placing reinforcement. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fre�h concrete will be placed. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions. 1. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust-preventative material. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptabte. CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect� and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete," and as specified. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location. 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY W7P COAGULAN7 FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PAGE 03300-9 D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to �void inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each I�er while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 1. Consolidate placed c�ncrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309. . 2. Do not use vibrators t� transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators verticaily at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do ryot insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate conc�ete and compleie embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate. E. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction jGnts, until completing placement of a panel or section. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly � • worked around reinfor ment, other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to orreet level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surf ce free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing perations. 3. Maintain reinforcing in �roper position on chairs during concrete placement. F. Cold-Weather Placement: �omply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temp�ratures. G. When air temperature has fal len to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F(4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates be `ore mixing to obtain a conc�ete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F(10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F(27 deg C) at point of placement. :� 1. Do not use frozen mate rials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or � subgrade containing frozen materials. 2. Do not use calcium ch oride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators �less otherwise accepted in mix designs. Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist ttiat would impair quality and strength of concrete, place coricrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to below 90 deg F(32 �eg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temper�ture, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. Fog spray forms, reinfo �cing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture unifo m without puddles or dry areas. Use water-reducing ret�=rding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adver-.s placing conditions, as acceptable to Engineer. 2. 3. 4. 3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVE�AENTS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE � PAGE 03300-10 I�J LJ � � L�J L+�J L� � � 3.9 I� �� l!J � � � LJ A. Rough-Formed Finish: Prnvide a rough-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finished Work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form-facing materiat used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: Provide a smooth-formed finish on formed concrete surtaces exposed to view or to be covered with a coating material appiied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or another similar system. This is an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form-facing materiai, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other projections completely removed and smoothed. C. � Related Unformed Surtaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surtaces adjacent to formed surtaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless othecwise indicated. MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic sfab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as specified; slab surtaces to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrauo; and where indicated. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surtace water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F� 18 (floor flatness) and F(L) 15 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Cut down high spots and filt low spots. Uniformly slope surtaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. B. Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surtaces exposed to view and slab surtaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system. . After floating, begin first trowel-finish operation using a power-driven trowet. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surtace. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and finish surtaces to tolerances of F(F) 20 (floor flatness) and F(L) 17 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Grind smooth any surtace defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system. C. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom �nish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surtace by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Engineer before appfication. D. Nonslip Aggregate Finish: Apply nonslip aggregate finish to interior floor slabs. 101598 CAST-IN-PIACE CONCRETE 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 03300-11 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS �] u 1. After completing float finishing and before starting trowel finish, uniformly spread 25 Ib of dampened nonslip aggregate per 100 sq. ft. of surface. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steef trowel, but do not force below surface. After broadcasting and tamping, apply trowel finishing as specified. 2. After curing, lightiy wc�k surface with a steel wire bn.ish or an abrasive stone, and water to expose nonslip agg regate. . 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCR TE ITEMS A. Filling in: Fill in holes and penings left in concrete structures for passage of work by othec trades, unless othenrvise sho n or directed, after work of othec trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure � concrete as sp cified to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete fillin, shown or required to complete Work. B. Curbs: P�ovide monolithic ��inish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surtaces to a hard, dense finish with comers, intersections, and terminations stightly rounded, � C. Equipment Bases and Founc;ations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on drawings. Set ��nchor boits for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with d agrams or templates of manufacturer fumishing machines and equipment. 3.11 CONCRETE CURING AND F ROTECTION A. General: Protect freshiy pla�:ed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing o��erations with an evaporation-control material. Appiy according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling. � C. � E. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surtace after placing and finishing. Weather permi rting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days. Curing Methods: Cure concr►�te by curing compound, by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing, or by combining these methods, as specified. Provide moisture curing by th.� following methods: 1. Keep concrete surFace �ontinuously wet by covering wiih water. 2. Use continuous•water-fc�g spray. 3. Cover concrete surtace with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly Saturate cover with water, and keep contirluously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with a 4-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 1. Cover concrete surtaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable widtt� with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhssive. Immediately repair any holes or.tears during curing period using cover mate rial and waterproof tape. Provide moisture-retaining co�er curing as follows: L�J � L�� LJ � l�1 � � f+'] t�J � 101598 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 03300-12 � COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEIAENTS � ri� li� I�� u � �� Final cure concrete surtaces to receive finish flooring with a moisture-retaining cover, unless othenrvise directed. 3.12 REMOVING FORMS F. � Apply curing compound on exposed interio� siabs and on exterior slabs, walks, and curbs as follows: 2. Apply curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray�or roller according to manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish materials applied directiy to concrete. G. Curing Formed Surtaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surtaces, by moist curing with forms in place for the full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. H. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces, by applying the appropriate curing method. � A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, m�y be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F(10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently � hard to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. L� � 3.13 � � � � I�] I�l i■1 B. Form-facing material may be removed 4 vertical supports have been arranged to loosening or disturbing shores and supports. REUSING FORMS days after placement only if shores and other permit removal of form-facing material without A. Clean and repair surtaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or othervvise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surtaces. Apply new form-coating compound as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surtaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surtaces except as acceptable to Engineer. . 3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removing forms, when acceptable to Engineer. Cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth less than 1 inch. 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS B. Mix dry-pack mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PAGE 03300-13 L_9 L�'] C. Repairing Formed Surtace:: Remove and replace concrete having defective surtaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Engineer. Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracka, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surtace, �nd stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cieaning. Ftush out form tie holes and fill with dry-pack mortar or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bondin�� agent. 1. Repair concealed fomed surfaces, where passible, containing defects that affect the concrete's durability. if defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete. 2. Make edges of cuts F�erpendicular to the concrete surtace. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brus�coat the area to be patched with bonding agent. Piace patching mortar before bondin agent has dried. For surtaces expose�i to view, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide test areas at inconspicuoes locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Comp�act mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surtace. � � � , � D. Repairing Unformed Surta�es: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surFa�;e tolerances specified for each surtace and finish. CoRect low and high areas as specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of s{ope and smoothness by using a t�mplate having the required slope. � 1. 2. 3. 4. E. F. 3.15 A. Repair finished unformed surtaces containing defects that affect the concrete's durability. Surface defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections �egardtess of width, spalling, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditiorts. Correct high areas in �informed surtaces. by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days. ' � Correct low areas in u formed surtaces during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by utting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blen into adjacent concrete. Proprietary undertayment compounds may be used when acc ,ptable to Engineer. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting o��t and replacing with fresh concrete. Remave defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen cor crete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix pa ching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as origin ! concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent �nished concrete. Cur in same manner as adjacent concrete. Perform structural repairs witli prior approval of Engineer for method and procedure, using specified epo�ry adhesive and mortar. Repair methods not specified �bove may be used, subject to acceptance of Engineer. QUALITY CONTROL 7ESTIN� DURING CONSTRUCTION General: The Owner will emp4�y a testing agency to pertorm tests and to submit test reports. B. Sampfing and testing for quali�r corrtrol during concrete placement may include the following, as directed by Engineer. 101598 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 981278 — SOUTH HOLI.Y WTP PAGE 03300-14 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVE�JIENTS `� � � I#1 � t�! lJ �' �� I� 'u � � I�i � lil 1�1 L�1 L�!' � La' 'il � � � � L�J � �� L�7 l� L�5 � 2. 3. 4. 5. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. a. b. c. d. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete; A5TM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; ane test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F(4 deg G) and below, when 80 deg F(27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required. e. Compressive-Strength 7ests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu. yd. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. more than the first 25 cu. yd. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days � and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yd., Engineer may waive strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory- cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. C. Test results will be reported in writing to Engineer, Structural Engineer, ready-mix producer, and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. D. Nondestructive 7esting: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. E. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additiona! tests of in-ptace concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Engineer. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. ENO OF SECTION 03300 101598 � CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 03300-15 COAGUI.ANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS L!�J li1 � u �il �� l�9 SECTION 03315 - GROUT PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide grout, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The following types of grout are covered in this Section: 1. Non-Shrink Grout: This type of grout is to be used wherever grout is indicated, unless another type is specifically referenced. 2. Cement Grout 3. Epoxy Grout 4. Topping Grout and Concrete Fill � - 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS I�i A. Specifications, codes, and standards shall be as listed in Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete, and as indicated herein. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS � A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals B. Shop Drawings: Include certified test results verifying compliance with the compressive � strength, shrinkage, and expansion requirements herein; and manufacturer's literature containing instructions and recommendations on the mixing, handling, placement, and appropriate uses for each type of non-shrink and epoxy grout proposed for the WORK. � 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE , � � � l� � � If1 � l�J A. Field Tests: 1. Compression test specimens will be taken during construction from the first placement of each type. of grout, and at intervals thereafter selected by the ENGINEER to insure continued compliance with these specifications. The specimens will be made by the ENGINEER or its representative. � 2. Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for cement grout and non-shrink grout will be performed in accordance with ASTM C 109 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in or 50-mm Cube Specimens) at intervals during construction selected by the ENGINEER. A set of three specimens will be made for testing at 7 days, 28 days, and each additional time period as appropriate. 3. Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for epoxy grout will be performed in accordance with ASTM C 579 - Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical- Resistant Mortars and Monolithic Surfacings, Method B, at intervals during construction 100898 1333018 South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements Grout PAGE 03315-1 selected by the ENGI NEER•. A set of three specimens will be made for testing at 7 days, and each earlier time period as appropriate. 4. All grout which fails t� meet requirements is subject to removal and replacement at no increased cost to the �WNER. 5. The cost of all labc�ratory tests on grout will be borne by the OWNER, but the CONTRACTOR shall assist the ENGINEER in obtaining specimens for testing. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the cost of testing and inspection of Defective Work which has been replaced. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all materials necessary for fabricating the test specimens. � � l'1 C+�J B. Construction Tolerances ; Construction tolerances shall be in accordance with Section � 03300 — Cast-in-Place Con�;rete, unless indicated otherwise. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 CEMENT GROUT A. Cement Grout: Cement g�out shall be composed of one part cement, three parts sand, and the minimum amount of wa�;er necessary to obtain the desired consistency. Where needed to match the color of adjacer�t concrete, white portland cement shall be blended with regular cement as needed. The mi��imum compressive strength at 28 days sha�l be 4000 psi. L�`J � � B. Cement grout materials sh�ll be as indicated in Section 03300, except that no cement from � kilns burning metal-rich hazardous waste fuel shall be used. � 2.2 PREPACKAGED GROUTS A. Non-Shrink Grout: 1. Non-shrink grout shall be a prepackaged, inorganic, non-gas-liberating, non-metallic, cement-based grout r�:quiring only the addition of water. Cement from kilns burning metal-rich hazardous �vaste fuel shall not be used. Manufacturer's instructions shall be printed on each bag or other container in which the materials are packaged. The specific formulation for each class of non-shrink grout herein shall be that recommended by the manufacturer for the p• rticular application. 2. Class A non-shrink gr uts shall have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 5000 psi; shall have no shri kage (0.0 percent) and a maximum 4.0 percent expansion in the pfastic state when te ted in accordance with ASTM C 827 - Test Method for Early Volume Change of Ce entitious Mixtures; and shall have no shrinkage (0.0 percent) and a maximum of 0.2 per�ent expansion in the hardened state when tested in accordance with CRD C 621 - Cor� of Engineers Specification for Non-shrink Grout. 3. 4. Class B non-shrink gr�Uts shall have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 5000 psi and shall meet the iequirements of CRD C 621. Application: a. Class A non-shrink grout shall be used for the repair of all holes and defects in concrete memb�rs which are water bearing or in contact with soil or. other fill 100898 � Grout 1333018 South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvemeiits . PAGE 03315-2 L.J �� L�■J ��J �� t*! '� � � � a a a � B. � � � � material, grouting under all equipment base plates, and at all locations where grout is required by the Contract Documents except where Class �B non-shrink grout and epoxy grout are specifically required. Class A non-shrink grout may be used in place of Class B non-shrink grout for all applications. b. Class B non-shrink grout shall be used for the repair of all holes and defects in concrete members which are not water-bearing and not in contact with soil or other fill material, grouting under all base plates for structural steel members, and grouting railing posts in place. Epoxy Grout: �� 3 Epoxy grout shall be a pourable, non-shrink, 100 percent solids system. The epoxy grout system shall have three components: resin, hardener, and specially blended aggregate, all premeasured and prepackaged. The resin component shall not contain any non- reactive diluents. Resins containing butyl glycidyl ether (BGE) or other highly volatile and hazardous reactive diluents are not acceptable. Variation of compone�t ratios is not permitted unless specifically recommended by the manufacturer. Manufacturer's instructions shall be printed on each container in which the materials are packaged. Epoxy grout shall be BurkEpoxy Anchoring Grout by The Burke Company. The chemical formulation of the epoxy grout shall be that recommended by the manufacturer for the particular application. The mixed epoxy grout system shall have a minimum working life of 45 minutes at 75 degrees F. 4. The epoxy grout shall develop a compressive strength of 5000 psi in 24 hours and � 10,000 psi in seven days when tested in accordance with ASTM C 579, Method B. There shall be no shrinkage (0.0 percent) and a maximum 4.0 percent expansion when tested in accordance with ASTM C 827. L�J �' �J � [� � � L' L�i 5. The epoxy grout shall exhibit a Ininimum effective bearing area of 95 percent. This shall be determined by a test consisting of filling a 2-inch diameter by 4-inch high metal cylinder mold covered with a glass plate coated with a release agent. A weight shall be placed on the glass plate. At 24 hours after casting, the weight and plate shall be removed and the area in plan of all voids measured. The surface of the grout shall be probed with a sharp instrument to locate all voids. , 6. The peak exotherm of a 2-inch diameter by 4-inch high cylinder shall not exceed 95 degrees F when tested with 75;degree F inaterial at laboratory temperature. The epoxy grout shall exhibit a maximum tj�ermal coefficient of 30 x 10� inches�nch/degree F when tested according to ASTM C 5�1 - Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical- Resistant Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings or ASTM D 696 - Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics. 7. Application: Epoxy grout shall be used to embed all anchor bolts and reinforcing steel required to be set in grout, and for other applications specifically required in the Contract Documents. 2.3 TOPPING GROUT AND CONCRETE FILL A. Grout for topping of slabs and concrete fill for built-up surfaces of tank, channel, and basin 100898 Grout 1333018 South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 03315-3 bottoms shall be compo- ed of cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water, and admixtures. All materials and procedures for concrete in Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete, shall apply exce� as noted otherwise herein. B. Topping grout and concretE fill shall contain a minimum of 564 pound of cement per cubic yard with a maximum water cer�ent ratio of 0.45. Where concrete fill is thicker than 3 inches - Cast-in-Place Concrete ma!i be used if accepted by the ENGINEER. C. Coarse aggregate shall be ��raded as follows: U.S. STANDARD SIEVE SIZE 1/2" 3/8" No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 30 PERCENT BY WEIGHT PASSING 100 90-100 20-55 5-30 0-10 0 � 17 � � �� M� � D. Final mix design shall be determined by trial mix design• under supervision of the approved testing laboratory. . � E. Strength: Minimum compressive strength of topping grout and concrete fill at the end of 28 days shall be 3000 psi. 2.4 CURING MATERIALS �� A. Curing materials shall be in accordance with Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete, for � cement grout and be as reccrrimentled by the manufacturer of prepackaged grouts. ��' 2.5 CONSISTENCY A. The consistency of grout shall be as necessary to completely fill the space to be grouted for the particular application. Dry p��ck consistency is such that the grout is plastic and moldable but will not flow. Where "dry pac=k" is required by the Contract Documents, it shall mean a grout of that consistency; the type o� grout to be used shall be as indicated herein for the particular application. B. The slump for topping gro�it and concrete fill shall be adjusted to match placement and finishing conditions but shall �ot exceed 4 inches. 2.6 MEASUREMENT OF INGRE;DIENTS A. Measurements for cement gr�ut shall be made accurately by volume using containers. Shovel measurement shall not be all wed. B. Prepackaged grouts shall ave ingredients measured by means recommended by the � manufacturer. PART 3 -- EXECUTION '100898 1333018 South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements Grout PAG E 03315-4 � � � � � 3.1 GENERAL A. All surface preparation, curing, and protection of cement grout shall be in accordance with Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. The finish of the grout surface shall match that of the adjacent concrete. The manufacturer of Class A non-shrink grout and epoxy grout shall provide on-Site technical assistance upon request. �� Base concrete or masonry must have attained its design strength before grout is placed, unless authorized by the ENGINEER. C. GROUTING PROCEDURES 32 � A. Prepackage Grouts: All mixing, surface preparation, handling, placing, consolidation, curing, and . other means of execution for prepackaged grouts shall be done according to the instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer. � B. � � - � � C. � � � � � U Base Plate Grouting: For base plates, the original concrete shall be blocked out or finished off a sufficient distance below the plate to provide for a one-inch thickness of grout or a thickness as indicated on the Drawings. 2. After the base plate has been set in position at the proper elevation,by steel wedges or double nuts on the anchor bolts, the space between the bottom of the plate and the original pour of concrete shall be filled with non-shrink-type grout. The mixture shall be of a trowelable consistency and be tamped or rodded solidty into the space between the plate and the base concrete. A backing board or stop shall be provided at the back side of the space to be filled with grout. Where this method of placement is not practical or where required by the ENGINEER, alternate grouting methods shall be submitted for acceptance. Topping Grout 1. All mechanical, electrical, and finish work shall be completed prior to placement of topping or concrete fill. The base slab shall be given a roughened textured surface by sandblasting or hydroblasting, exposing the aggregates to ensure bonding to the base slab. 2. The minimum thickness of grout topping and concrete fill shall be one inch. Where the finished surface of concrete fill is to form an intersecting angle of less than 45 degrees with the concrete surface it is to be placed against, a key shall be formed in the concrete surface at the intersection point. The key shall be a minimum of 3-1/2-inches wide by 1-1 /2-inches deep. 3. The base slab shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted prior to placing topping and fill. No topping concreCe shall be placed until the slab is completely free from standing pools or ponds of water. A thin coat of neat cement grout shall be broomed into the surface of the slab just before topping of fill placement. The topping and fill shall be compacted by rolling or tamping, brought to established grade, and floated. Grouted fill for tank and basin bottoms where scraping mechanisms are to be installed shall be screeded by blades attached to the revolving mechanism of the equipment in accordance with the � 100898 � 1333018 South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements Grout PAGE 03315-5 3.3 A procedures outlined by the equipment manufacturer after the grout is brought to the established grade. 4. Topping grout placed on sloping slabs shall proceed uniformly from the bottom of the siab to the top, for the full ��vidth of the placement. 5. The surface shall be !ested with a straight edge to detect high and low spots which shall be immediately elimin�ted. When the topping and fill has hardened sufficiently, it shall be steel troweled to a: mooth surface free from pinholes and other imperfections. An approved type of ine�anical trowel may be used as an assist in this operation, but the last pass over the surface shall be by hand-troweling. During finishing, no water, dry cement, or mixture of �iry cement and sand shall be applied to the surface. CONSOLIDATION Grout shall be placed in such a manner, for the consistency necessary for each application, so as to assure that the space �o be grouted is completely filled. ' - END OF SECTaON - � � 100898 1333018 South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements Grout PAGE 03315-6 � � � � � L�i � � � 1.3 I�J � � LiJ C� fJ !�' � � � l�; SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. K-series open-web steel joists. 2. Joist accessories. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 9 Section "Painting" for surtace preparation and prime painting. 7. Division 13 Section "Pre-Engineered Concrete Building" for installing anchors set in concrete. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Structural Pertormance: Engineer, fabricate, and erect joists and connections to withstand design loads within limits and under conditions required. 1. Design Loads: As indicated. 2. Design joists to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span. Engineering Responsibility: Engage'a joist manufacturer who utilizes a qualified professional engineer to prepare design calculations, shop drawings, and other structural data for steel joists. SUBMITTALS r_� B. 1.4 A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. � B. Product Data for each type of joist, accessory, and product specified. C. Shop Drawings showing layout, mark, number, type, location, and spacings of joists. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, accessories, splice and connection details, and attachments to other units of Work. 1. Indicate locations and details of anchorage devices and bearing plates to be embedded in other construction. . D. Material certificates signed by joist manufacturer certifying that joists comply with SJI's "Specifications." 101598 . 981278 — SOUTH HOI.LY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS STEEL JOISTS PAGE 05210-1 LJ E. Welder ce�tificates signed by Contractor certifying that wetders comply with requirements � specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article. F. Qualification data for firm: and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabiiities and experience. fnciude lists of compleied projects with project names and addresses, nam4s and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE � � A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing joists similar to � those indicated for this Proje �t and that have a record of successful in-service pertormance. 1. Manufacturer must be certified by SJI to manufacture joists conforming to SJI standard specifications and loac� tables. B. SJI Design Standard: Comply with recommendations of SJI's "Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables f r Steel Joists and Jaist Girders," applicable to types of joists indicated. t C. Welding Standards: Compl with appiicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel" and AWS D1.3'Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." D. Professional Engineer Quali cations: A professional engineer who is legally authorized to practice in Texas and who s experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering servic s are defined as those pertormed for installations of joists that are similar to those indicated or this Project in material, design, and extent. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications." B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handting. � PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel: Comply with requiremerits of SJI's "Specifications" for chord and web section material. B. Welding Electrodes: Comply wth AWS standards. 22 PRIMERS ' A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, 7ype I, red 'oxide; Federal Specification TT-P-636, red oxide; or manufacturer's standard shop primer meeting the performance requirements of eiiher of these red-oxide primets. 2.3 STEEL JOISTS 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGUTANT FEED SYSTEM fMPROVEMENTS I STEEL JOISTS PAGE 05210•2 � � � '� � L� !�I � � � � �� , M� � LiJ L�; � L�! l�] � L�J '�] A. B. C. 2.4 A. 2.5 Manufacture joists according to SJI's "Specifications," with steel angle top and bottom chord members, of joist types, end arrangements, and top �hord arrangements indicated. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. Camber K-series steel joists according to SJI's "Specifications." I JOiST ACCESSORIES � Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. � � SHOP PAINTING A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and oth�r foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories to be primed as follows: I � 1. Surface Preparation: Either hand tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, or power tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3. I B. Apply one shop coat of primer to joists and joist: accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, dry paint film thickness of not less than � mil (0.025 mm). PART 3 - EXECUTION a 3.1 EXAMINATION l�l L;f LiJ � � A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of joist5. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. I 32 INSTALLATION A. B. Do r►ot install joists until supporting construction is i� place and secured. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and �rue to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's recommendations, and the requirements of this Section. 1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. 2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in I cation before permanently fastening. 3. Install temporary bracing and bridging, conr�ections, and anchors to ensure joists are stabilized during construction. �C. Field weld joists to supporting steel framework and steel bearing plates. Coordinate welding �. sequence and procedure with placing of joists. 1. Comply with AWS requirements and proced�res for welding, appearance and quality of �' welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. , Li � 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS STEEL J01STS PAGE 05210-3 D. install and connect bridgin� concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are � applied. Anchor ends of bri�iging lines at top and bottom chords where terminating at walls or beams. 3.3 REPAIRS AND PROTECTIUN A. Touchup Painting: Cleani�g and touchup painting of field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of shop-p inted joists, accessories, bearing plates, and abutting structural steel are inctuded in Divisio�9 Section "Painting." B. Provide final protection and inaintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that joi'sts and accessories are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completi��n. END OF SECTION 05210 �e 101598 , 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP , COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEM�NTS STEEL JOISTS PAGE 05210-4 � L�J L�1 � � L;7 � � � LJ l+!�; � � L�J � � � � � SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 1.2 1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel roof deck. SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Articie according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of deck, accessory, and product specified. C. Shop drawings showing layout and types of deck paneis, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. D. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of steel deck certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed steel deck similar in material, design, and extent 2o that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service �performance. B. Welding Standards: Comply with appiicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "5tructural Welding Code--Steel" and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code—Sheet Steei." 1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Sfack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. PART2-pRODUCTS 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS STEEL DECK PAGE Q5310-1 � 2.1 A. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorp�rated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Epic Metals Corp. 2. Roof Deck, lnc. 3. United Steei Deck, In►. 4. Verco Manufacturing �o. � 5. Vulcraft Div. of Nucor Corp. 6. Wheeling Corrugating Co., Div ROOF DECK of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corp. A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels without top-flange stiffening grooves conforming to SDI Publication No. 28 "Specific ions and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck" and the following: 1. Galvanized-Steel Sh t: ASTM A 446, Grade A, G 60 (ASTM A 446M, Grade A, Z 180) zinc coated acc�rding to ASTM A 525 (ASTM A 525M). 2. Deck Profile: Type IR, intermediate rib. 3. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 in�;hes (38 mm). 4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0295 inch {0.75 mm). 5. Span Condition: Tripie span or more. 6. Side Joints: Overlapp�d. 2.3 A. � ACCESSORIES General: Provide accessory naterials for steel deck that comply with requirements indicated and recommendations of the �eef deck manufacturer. Mechanical Fasteners: Man�'�facturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, powder- actuated or pneumatically driwn carbon steel fasteners; or seif-driiling, self-threading screws. C. Side Lap Fasteners: Manufa urer's standard, corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon steel scre s, No. 10 (4.8,mm) minimum diameter. D. Miscellaneous Roof Deck Acc ssories: Steel sheet, 0.0359-inch- (0.91-mm-) thick minimum ridge and valley piates, finish s:rips, and reinforcing channels, of same material as roof deck. E. Weld Washers: Manufacturers standard uncoated-steel sheet weid washers, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0598 inch (1.5 mmj� thick with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) minimum diameter prepunched hole. . ' , PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. 3.2 A. EXAMINATION � Examine supporting framing and field co�ditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting pertormance of steel deck. PREPARATION Locate decking bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP � COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM 1MPROVEM NTS STEEL DECK PAGE 05310-2 � � f �; L�' [�"J � �' L�' � � l�l L�J f� � � Lr' �J � � � �� [�1 � L�J � L�J l�i � L�J r�� [�J � � u � 3.3 A. INSTALLATION, GENERAL Instail deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary of SDI Pubiication No. 28, manufacturer's recommendations, and requirements of this Section. B. Place deck panels on supporting framing and adjust to �nal position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting framing before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. C. D. E. F. G, 3.4 Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting framing without warp or deflection. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking. Provide additional reinforcernent and ciosure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of othe� wark. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manua) shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of weids, and methods used in correcting welding work. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanicaf fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's instructions. ROOF DECK INSTALLATION A. Fasten roof deck panels to steel supporting members by are spot (puddle) weids of the surtace diametec indicated or are seam welds with an equal perimeter, but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) long, and as follows: 1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (18 mm), nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space welds an average of 12 inches (305 mm) apart, with a minimum of two welds per unit at each support. 3. Weld Washers: lnstall weld washers at each weld location. B. Side Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding 36 inches (910 mm), using one of the following methods: 1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling No. 10- (4.8-mm-) diameter o� larger carbon steel screws. 2. Fasten with 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) long minimum welds. C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting framing with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), with end joints as fo{lows: 1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum. D. Miscellaneous Roof Deck Accessories: Instali ridge and valley piates, finish strips, cover plates, end closures, and reinforcing channefs according to deck manufacturer's " recommendations. Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS STEEL DECK PAGE 05310-3 I1 � Touchup Painting: Cleani �g and touchup painting of �eld welds, abraded areas, and rust spots, as required after er ction and before proceeding with field painting, are included in Division 9 Section "Paintin ." Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure steel decking is without damage or deterioration at time of Sub tantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05310 � � 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP C�AGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS' I STEEL DECK PAGE 05310-4 a � � � � � � � � � � � � a � � � � � SECTION 05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONI'RACTOR shall provide miscellaneous metalwork and appurtenances, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Federal Specifications MIL-G-18015 A (3) (Ships) Aluminum Planks. (6063-T6) MIL-A-907E , Antiseize Thread Compound, High Temperature B. Commercial Standards AA-M32C22A41 Aluminum Assn. AASHTO HS-20 Truck Loading AISC Manual of Steel Construction AISI Design of Light Gauge, Cold-Formed Steel Structural ASTM A 36 ASTM A 48 ASTM A 53 ASTM A 123 ASTM A 153 ASTM A 193 ASTM A 194 ASTM A 307 ASTM A 325 ASTM A 500 101598 1333018 South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements Members Carbon Structural Steel Gray Iron Castings Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature Service Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure and High Temperature Service Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes Miscellaneous Metalwork PAGE 05500-1 ANSI/AWS D1.1 � Structural Welding Code - Steel ANSUAWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code - Aluminum ANSI/AWS �C1 Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITT�LS � . A. Shop Drawings: Shop i�rawings of all miscellaneous metalwork shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Layout drawings for grating shall be submitted showing the direction of span, rype and depth of grating, size and shape of c�rating panels, seat angle details, and details of grating hold down fasteners. Load and deflection tables shall be submitted for each style and depth of grating used. � ., C. An ICBO report listing the uftimate load capacity in tension and shear for each size and type of concrete anchor shall b�� submitted. CONTRACTOR shall submit manufacturer's recommended installation irrstructions and proce�ures for adhesive anchors. Upon review, by ENGINEER, these instructions shall be followed specifically. D. No substitution for the indicated adhesive anchors will be considered unless accompanied with ICBO report verifying stren th and material equivalency, including temperature at which load capacity is reduced to 90 pe�cent of that determined at 75 degrees F. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. All weld procedures and wet�er qu�lifications shall be available in the CONTRACTOR's field office for review. � � B. All welding shall be inspectec' by a CONTRACTOR-furnished inspector qualified in accordance with AWS requirements and �pproved by the ENGINEER. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENT� A. Steel , 1. Shapes, Plates, Bars A�TM A 36 , . 2. Pipe, Pipe Columns, Bol lards ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B standard weight unless noted otherwise 3. Tubes ASTM A 500 Gracie B B. Corrosion Protection: Unle� otherwise indicated, fabricated steel metalwork which will be used in a corrosive environme�it and/or will be submerged in water/wastewater shall be coated in accordance with Section 0�00 - Painting and shall not be galvanized prior to coating. All other miscellaneous steel met� Iwork shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 101598 Miscellaneous Metalwork 1333018 South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvement§ PAGE 05500-2 I � � � � �i � � �' � � C. Stainless Steel: Unless otherwise indicated, stainless steel metalwork and bolts shall be of Type 316 stainless steel. D. Aluminum: Unless otherwise indicated, aluminum metalwork shall be of Alloy 6061-T6. Aluminum in contact with concrete, masonry, wood, porous materials, or dissimilar metals shall have contact surfaces coated in accordance with Section 09800 - Painting. C F-�% Cast Iron: Unless otherwise indicated, iron castings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 48, Class 50B or better. , � STEEL PIPE HANDRAILS A. Steel pipe handrails, including brackets and related hardware, which may be partially or wholly submerged, or which are located inside a hydraulic structure, shall be entirely of Type 316 stainless steel. All other steel pipe handrails shall be standard 1-1/2-inch black steel pipe made up by welding and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 2.3 METAL STAIRS A. Metal Stairs: Metal stairs shall be composed of steel or aluminum stringers and supports, be fabricated in accordance with standard practice of the National Association of Ornamental Metal Manufacturers, and be as indicated. Steel stair members shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. . 2.4 GRATING STAIR TREADS A. Grating stair treads shall be designed to support a live load of 100 psf or a concentrated load at mid-span of 1000 pounds, whichever creates the higher stress. The maximum deflection due to the uniform live load shall be as required for metal grating below. All grating stair treads shall have an integral non-slip nosing. � 2.5 SAFETY STAIR NOSINGS � � � � � � � � A. Safety stair nosing shall be provided on all concrete stairs and other locations as indicated. The nosing shall be 3-inch wide, extruded' aluminum with cast-in abrasive strips and integral extruded anchors. The color of the cast abrasive�shall be as selected by the ENGINEER from the manufacturer's standard colors. The nosing shall be American Abrasive Metals Company, Style "231-A"; American Mason Safety Tread Company, Figure "31A" or equal. , 2.6 A. LADDERS Ladders which may be partially or wholly submerged, or which are located inside a hydraulic structure, shall be entirely of fiberglass. All other ladders shall be as indicated on drawings. B. Every ladder that does not have an exterior handhold , shall be equipped with a pop-up extension. Pop-up extension device shall be manufactured of the same material and finish as the ladder with telescoping tubular section that locks automatically when fully extended. Upward and downward improvement shall be controlled by stainless steel spring balancing mechanisms. Units shall be completely assembled with fasteners for securing to the ladder rungs in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 101598 1333018 South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements Miscellaneous Metalwork PAG E 05500-3 2.7 GRATING A. General: Grating shall be of the design, sizes, and types indicated. Grating shall be completely banded at all ec�ges and cutouts using material and cross section equivalent to the bearing bars. Grating shal be supported on all sides of an opening by support members. Where grating is supported on concrete, embedded support angles matching grating material shall be used on all sides, unless indicated otherwise. Such angles shall be mitered and � welded at corners. 1. All pieces of grating sfiall be fastened in two locations to each support. 2. Where grating forms #ie landing at the top of a stairway, the edge of the grating, which forms the top riser, �all have an integral non-slip nosing, width equal to that of the stairway. � ' � , 3. Where grating depth i- not given, grating shall be provided which will be within allowable stress levels, and whi h shall not exceed a deflection of 1/4 inch or the span divided by 180, whichever is les . For standard duty plank, and safety grating, the loading to be used for determining stresses and deflections shall be the uniform live load of the adjacent floor or 100 ,sf, whichever is greater or a concentrated load of 1000 pounds. For heavy duty grating, the loading used for determining stresses and deflections shall be AASHTO HS-20. • B. Material 1. Except where indicate otherwise, bar grating shall be fabricated entirely of fiberglass. 2. Safety grating shall be abricated of fiberglass. � C. Standard-Duty Grating 1. No single piece of gratirig shall weigh more than 80 pounds, unless indicated otherwise Standard duty grating s�all be serrated bar grating. Cross bars shall be wel��ed or mechanically locked tightly into position so that there is no movement allowed bet�n�een bearing and cross bars. E 2.8 FALL PREVENTION SYSTEIJI A. The fall prevention system �hall be the Climb Rite RTC-2000, as manufactured by the Research and Trading Corporation; Saf-T-Climb, as manufactured by North Safety Products, Inc., Brea, CA or qual. All necessary components shall be provided, including 2 safety belts for each fall prev ntion installation to provide a complete and fully operational fall prevention system. A rail ext nsion shall be provided for each instatlation. The chain shall be long enough to allow a perso to connect the belt to the chain while standing on the landing adjacent to the ladder. The c ain and snap hook shall have a minimum allowable capacity of 500 pounds. Safety belts sh II fit a waist range from 23 inches to 54 inches. Safety rails and associated accessories sha� match the ladder material. Fiberglass ladders shall have stainless steel safery rails and accessories. 2.9 n BOLTS AND ANCHORS Standard Service (Non-Corr�sive Application): Unless otherwise indicated, bolts, anchor 101598 1333018 South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements Miscellaneous Metalwork PAGE 05500-4 � � � ■i! � B. � � � � � E_� bolts, washers, and nuts shali be steel as indicated herein. Threads on galvanized bolts and nuts shall be formed with suitable taps and dies such that they retain their normai clearance after hot-dip galvanizing. Except as otherwise indicated, steel for bolts, anchor bolts and cap screws shall be in accordance with the following: 3. Structural connections: ASTM A 307, Grade A or B, hot-dip galvanized. 4. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A or B, or ASTM A 36. 5. High strength bolts where indicated: ASTM A 325 6. Pipe and equipment flanges: ASTM A 193, Grade B-7 Corrosive Service: All bolts, nuts, and washers in the locations listed below shall be 316 stainless steel as indicated below. 1. All buried locations. 2. All submerged locations. � 3. • All locations subject to seasonal or occasional flooding. 4. Inside hydraulic structures below the top of the structure. 5. Inside buried vaults, manholes, and structures which do not drain through a gravity sewer or to a sump with a pump. 6. All chemical handling areas. 7. Inside trenches, containment walls, and curbed areas. 8. Locations indicated by the Contract Documents or designated by the ENGINEER to be provided with stainless steel bolts. � C. Unless otherwise indicated, stainless steel bolts, anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be Type 316 stainless steel, class 2, conforming to ASTM A 193 for bolts and to ASTM A 194 for nuts. �� All threads on stainless steel bolts shall be protected with an antiseize lubricant suitable for submerged stainless steel bolts, to meet government specification MIL-A-907E. Buried bolts in � poorly drained soil shall be coated the same as the buried pipe. 1. Antiseize lubricant shall be classified as acceptable for potable water use by the NSF. r{ 2. Antiseize lubricant shall be "PURE WHITE" by Anti-Seize Technology, Franklin Park, L� IL, 60131, AS-470 by Dixon Ticonderoga Company, Lakehurst, NJ, 08733, or equal. .� . � ��J � 101598 ' 1333018 South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements Miscellaneous Metalwork PAGE 05500-5 � E Bolt Requirements 1. The bolt and nut mate�ial shail be free-cutting steel. 2. The nuts shall be caP�able of developing the full strength of the bolts. Threads shall be Coarse Thread Serie�s, conforming to the requirements of the American Standard for Screw Threads. All b'olts and cap screws shall have hexagon heads and nuts shall be Heavy Hexagon Serie�. � 3. Bolts and nuts shall b'� installed with washers fabricated of material matching the base material of bolts, except that hardened washers for high strength bolts shall conform to the requirements of �he AISC Specification. Lock washers fabricated of material matching the bolts sha�l be installed with washers where indicated. 4. The length of each b¢It shall be such that after the joint is made up, the bolt extends through the entire nut, but in no case more than 1/2-inch beyond the nut. � Adhesive Anchors: Unles�otherwise indicated, all drilled, concrete or masonry anchors shall be adhesive anchors. No ubstitutions will be considered unless accompanied with ICBO report verifying strength and �imaterial equivalency. I � 1. Epoxy adhesive anchors are required for drilled anchors where exposed to weather, in submerged, wet, splasl�, overhead, and corrosive conditions, and for anchoring handrails, pumps, mechanical eqiaipment, and reinforcing bars. Epoxy anchor grout shall comply with Section 03315 - G�out. Threaded rod shall be stainless steel Type 316. I 2. Unless otherwise indi�ated, glass capsule, polyester resin adhesive anchors will be permitted in locations �hot included above and shall be Hilti HVA or Cobra Anchors. Threaded rod shall be �alvanized steel. F. Expanding-Type Anchors:'I Expanding-type anchors if indicated or permitted, shall be steel expansion type ITW RamsetlRedhead "Trubolt" anchors; McCullock Industries "Kwick- Bolt;" or equal. Lead caul{ding anchors will not be permitted. Size shall be as indicated. Expansion type anchors whi�h are to be embedded in grout may be steel. Non-embedded buried or submerged anchors� shall be stainless steel. � I 2_10 POWDER-DRIVEN PINS �I G. Materials: Powder-driven pi�s for installation in concrete or steel shall be heat-treated steel alloy. If the pins are not inh rently sufficiently corrosion-resistant for the conditions to which they are to be exposed, the shall. be protected in an acceptable manner. Pins shall have capped or threaded heads apable of transmitting the loads the shanks are required to support. Pins that are con�ected to steel shall have longitudinal serrations around the circumference of the shank. I ; 2.11 IMPACT ANCHOR A. 10159 Impact anchors shall be an ex�ansion type anchor in which a nail type pin is driven to produce the expansive force. The pih shall have a zinc sleeve with a mushroom style head and stainless steel nail pin. Anct�ors shall be Metal Hit Anchors, manufactured by Hilti, Inc., Rawl Zamac Nailin, manufacl ured by the Rawlplug Company; or equal. I I g 11 Miscellaneous Metalwork I I� �J L�J I� M� i� �� L� '�J � M�� V� � I� � � LJ � 1333018 South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvement$ PAGE 05500-6 a I � L�J � � � � PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Fabrication and Erection: Except as otherwise indicated, the fabrication and erection of structural steel shall conform to the requirements of the American Institute of Steel Construction "Manual of Steel Construction." B. Aluminum Railings: Aluminum railing fabrication and installation shall be performed by craftsmen experienced in the fabrication of architectural metalwork. Exposed surfaces shall be free from defects or other surface blemishes. Dimensions and conditions shall be verified in the field. All joints, junctions, miters and butting sections shall be precision fitted with no gaps occurring between sections, and with all surfaces flush and aligned. Electrolysis protection of materials shall be provided. � � C. Steel Railings: Field welding of steel pipe handrail joints will be permitted only if approved by the ENGINEER, and then only in accordance with'its instructions. � D. Powder-Driven Pins: Powder-driven pins shall be installed by a craftsperson certified by the manufacturer as being qualified to install the manufacturer's pins. Pins shall be driven in one initial movement by an instantaneous force that has been carefully selected to attain the � required penetration. Driven pins shall conform to the following requirements where "D" = pin's shank diameter: � � � L�J � L! L� � � lsJ Material Penetrated by Pin Concrete Steel 3.2 WELDING Material Minimum Thickness 16D 1 /4-inch Pin Shank Penetration in Supporting Material 6D minimum Steel thickness Minimum Space From Pin's CL to Edge of Pene- trated Material 14D i� Minimum Pin Spacing 20D 7D A. Method: Welding shall be by the metal-arc method or gas-shielded arc method as described in the American Welding Society's "Welding Handbook" as supplemented by other pertinent standards of the AWS. Qualification'of welders shall be in accordance with the AWS Standards governing same. B. Gluality: In assembly and during welding, the component parts shall� be adequately clamped, supported and restrained to minimize distortion and for control of dimensions. Weld reinforcement shall be as indicated by the AWS Code. Upon completion of welding, weld splatter, flux, slag, and burrs left by attachments shall be removed. Welds shall be repaired to produce a workmanlike appearance, with uniform weld contours and dimensions. All sharp corners of material which is to be painted or coated shall be ground to a minimum of 1/32-inch on the flat. 101598 1333018 South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements Miscellaneous Metalwork PAGE 05500-7 3.3 GALVANIZING I I A. Structural steel plates sha�es, bars, and fabricated assemblies required to be galvanized shall, after the steel has been th�roughly cleaned of rust and scale, be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of AST A 123. Any galvanized part that becomes warped during the galvanizing operation shal� be straightened. Bolts, anchor bolts, nuts and similar threaded fasteners, after being properly cleaned, shall be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A 153. Field repa�rs to galvanizing shall be made using "Gaivinox," "GalvaWeld," or equaL � � 3.4 DRILLED ANCHORS � A. 3.5 A. I Drilled anchors and reinforci'ing bars shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Holes shall b� roughened with a brush on a power drill, cleaned and dry. Drilled anchors shall not be install�d until the concrete has reached the required 28-day compressive strength. Adhesive anchor§ shall not be loaded until the adhesive has reached its indicated strength in accordance with �he manufacturer's instructions. FALL PREVENTION SYST�M � Fall prevention systems shall be provided on all ladders used to ascend heights exceeding 20 feet. � - END OF SECTION - I • 1� • � �I I I � ' I , I �I . I 101598 . I 1333018 South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvement� Miscellaneous Metalwork PAGE 05500-8 L■J � � PART 1 - GENERAL � � C�J � � � L�J � L*'J L*�] �� t� �� L�J � 'L� LJ 1.1 A. 1.2 A. 1.3 SECTION 05510 - METAL STAIRS RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Straight run, steel-framed stairs. 2. Steel pipe handrails and railing syst�ms attached to metal stairs. 3. Steel pipe handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Pertormance: Engineer, fabricate, and install steel stairs to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials involved, including anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each component of steel stairs. 1. Treads of Steel Stairs: Capable of withstanding a uniform load of 100 Ibf per sq. ft. (4.8 kN/sq. m) or a concentrated load of 300 Ibf (1.35 kN) on a area of 4 sq. inches (26 sq. cm) located in the center of the tread, whichever produces the greater stress. 2. • Platforms of Steel Stairs: Capable of withstanding a uniform load of 100 Ibf per sq. ft. (4.8 kN/sq. m). 3. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from loads specified above as well as stresses resulting from railing system loads. B. Structural Pertormance: Engineer, fabricate, and install handrails and railing systems to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials involved, including anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each of the respective components of each metal fabrication. 1. 2. Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated: a. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf (890 N) applied at any point and in any direction. b. Uniform load of 50 Ibf. per linear foot (730 N/m) applied horizontally and concurrently with uniform load of 100 Ibf per linear foot (1460 N/m) applied vertically downward. c. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently. Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated: a. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf (890 N) applied at any point and in any direction. b. Uniform load of 50 Ibf per linear foot (730 N/m) applied in any direction. c. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently. � 101598 ME7AL STAIRS 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP , PAGE 05510-1 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS � 1.4 'i � 3. Infill Area of Guardrail' Systems: Capabie of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of 200 Ibf (890 N)I applied to one sq. ft. (0.09 sq. m) at any point in the system including panels, inter�ediate rails, balusters, or other elements composing the infill area. �I . a. Above load neec�� not be assumed to act concurrently with loads on top �aiis of railing systems inl determining stress on guard. SUBMITTALS I I A. General: Submit each item i� this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sectio s. B. Product data for metal stairs i,cluding sealed calculations, extruded nosings, steei floor plate, paint products, and grout. I C. Shop drawings detailing fabric�ation and installation of steel stairs. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of steel tairs and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide tempiates for a�chors and boits specified for installation under other sections. D. Welder certificates signed by �Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality As$urance" Article. E. 1.5 A. B. C. D. G2ualification data for firms a d perso,ns specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities nd experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of ar,chitects and owners, and other information specified. I QUALITY ASSURANCE I Fabricator Qualifications: Fi experienced in producing steel stairs similar to those indicated for this Project wit�a record of successful in-service pertormance and with sufficient production capacity to�� produce required uf�its without delaying the Work. Installer Qualifications: Arrangl',e for 'steel stair installation specified in this Section by the same firm that fabricated them. I a r Engineer Qualifications: A prI fessional engineer legally authorized to practice in Texas experienced in providing engin ering services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the installation of inetal stairs (incl ding handrails and railing systems) similar to this Project in material, design, and extent and� that have a record of successful in-service performance. Welding Standards: Comply vVith applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel" and AWS D1.3 "St�uctural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 1. Certify that each welder tlas satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if� pertinent, has undergone recertification. I �I PART2-PRODUCTS I 2.1 FERROUS METALS A. Metal Surtaces, General: For �urtaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surtace blemishes. Do not use materials;with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade 101598 I 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEM�NTS I ME7AL STAIRS a PAGE 05510-2 L�'J � � � L�' L�J L�'' L`] [/J l�!' � [�� L�' L�'J L�J LI�� C' � � � B. C. D. E. F. G. H. J. 2.2 names, roughness, or, for steel sheet, variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by referenced standards for stretcher-leveled sheet. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and as follows: 1. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated, or another weight required by structural loads. Roiled Steel Fioor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M. Steel Bars fo� Gratings: ASTM A 569/A 569M or ASTM A 36/A 36M. Wire Rod for Grating Cross Bars: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M). Uncoated Structural Steel Sheet: Product type (manufacturing method), quality, and grade as follows: 1. Cold-Rolled Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 611, grade as follows: a. Grade A, unless otherwise indicated or required by design loading. 2. Hot-Rolled Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 570/A 570M, grade as follows: a. Grade 30, unless otherwise indicated or required by design loading. Uncoated Steel Sheet: Commercial quality, product type (method of manufacture) as follows: 1. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366/A 366M. 2. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 569/A 569M. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for the metal alloy to be welded. FASTENERS A. General: Provide plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating, for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required. B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A(ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6), with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M), and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Machine Screws: ANSI B18.6.3 (ANSI B18.6.7M). D. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ANSI 618.22.1 (ANSI B18.22M). E. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ANSI B 18.21.1. F. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assemblies of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS METAL STAIRS PAGE 05510-3 !'J 2. 2.3 PAINT . I ' Material: Carbon ste�l components zinc-plated to compiy with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. � Material: Group 1 allo I 304 or 316 stainless-steel bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M)'�and ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). � A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Me�al: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified- alkyd primer complying with �pertormance requirements of FS TT-P-664, selected for good resistance to normal atmospt�eric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a$ound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. , � 2.4 CAST ABRASIVE NOSINGS I A. Fabricate units of material, si�es, and configurations indicated. If not indicated, provide cast- iron units with integral abras�ve finish. Fumish in lengths required to accurately fit each opening or conditions. . � C�� E. 2.5 I 1. Cast units with an inte�ral abrasive grit consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination,of both. . I Available Manufacturers: Su�ject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorpor�ted in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. American Safety Tread �Co., Inc. 2. Amstep Products. 3. Armstrong Products, Ind. 4. Balco/Metalines, Inc. , 5. Safe-T-Metal Ca � ' 6. Wooster Products Inc. � Provide anchors for embeddi g units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard with the manufacture . � Drill for mechanical anchors wi h countersunk holes located not more than 4 inches (100 mm) from ends and not more than 2 inches (300 mm) o.c., evenly spaced between ends, unless otherwise indicated. Provide c oser spacing if recommended by the manufacturer. . EXTRUDED ABRASIVE NOSI 1�JGS � A. Fabricate units of material, siz�s, and configurations indicated. Provide extruded aluminum units with abrasive filler corisisting of aluminum oxide or silicon carbide grits, or a combination of both, in an epo�y-resin binder. Fumish in lengths as required to accurately fit each opening or conditions. I � I 1. Provide ribbed units, witti abrasive filler strips projecting 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) above the aluminum extrusion. � 2. Provide solid abrasive ty�e units without ribs. B. Available Manufacturers: Subj�ect to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporat��ed in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. American Safety Tread G�lo., Inc. 2. Amstep Products. 101598 I 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEAI�ENTS I, L!'J l!' � �J � � L�'J L� ��J � r, `�� l�.' L�J � Ltl METAL STAIRS � PAGE 05510-4 L�J �� LJ � u L!J L!J D. 2.6 A. B. 3. Armstrong Products, Inc. 4. Balco/Metalines, Inc. 5. Safe-T-Metal Co. 6. Wooster Products Inc. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard with the manufacturer. GROUT Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. P�ovide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grouts: a. Sure-grip High Performance Grout; Dayton Superior Corp. � ' b. Euco N-S Grout; Euclid Chemical Co. c. Mastertlow 928 and 713; Master Builders Technologies, Inc. d. Sealtight 588 Grout; W. R. Meadows; Inc. � � 2.7 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS � � � � � � LJ � � � L� A. General: Construct stairs to conform to sizes and arrangements indicated. Join pieces together by welding, unless otherwise indicated. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, columns, handrails, railing systems, newels, balusters, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates, or other components necessary for the support of stairs and platforms, and as required to anchor and contain the stairs on the supporting structure. 1. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM "Metal Stair Manual" for class of stair designated, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. a. Commercial class, unless othervvise indicated. 2. Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs to accommodate slopes to drain in finished traffic surtaces. B. Stair F�aming: Fabricate stringers of structural steel channels, plates, or .a combination thereof, as indicated. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers. Construct platforms of structural steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as indicated. Bolt or weld headers to stringers; and bolt or weld newels and framing members to stringers and headers. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finish surfaces. C E. Steel Floor Plate Treads and Platforms: Provide raised pattem steel floor plate in pattern indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard pattems. Floor Grating Treads and Platforms: Provide patterns, spacing, and bar sizes as required; fabricate to comply with ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531 "Metal Bar Grating Manual." 1. Fabricate treads from pressure-locked steel grating with 1-by- 3/16-inch (25-by-4.8- mm) bearing bars at 7/16 inch (11 mm) o.c. and cross bars at 4 inches (1.00 mm) o.c., NAAMM designation: P-7-4 (1 x 3/16) STEEL. 101598 ' METAL STAIRS 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 05510-5 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS � 2. Surface: Serrated. '� 3. Finish: Galvanized. � F. Fabricate grating treads with steel plate nosing and with steel angle or steel plate carrier at each end for stringer connections. Secure treads to stringers with bolts. G. 2.8 A. B. C. C E. Fabricate grating platforms �with nosing matching that on grating treads at all landings. Provide toe plates at open-sided edges of grating platform. Secure grating to platform frame with welds. �I ' STEEL PIPE HANDRAILS A�1D RAILING SYSTEMS I ' General: Fabricate pipe han�rails and railing systems to compiy with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of pipe, post spacings,.and anchorag�, but not less than that required to support structural loads. Interconnect railing and h�ndrail members by butt-welding or welding with intemal connectors, at fabricator's optilon, unless otherwise indicated. 1. At tee and cross inters�ctions, cope ends of intersecting members to fit contour of pipe to which end is joined, �nd weld all around. Form changes in direction of Fjandrails and rails as follows: I 1. By radius bends of radi�is indicated. 2. By flush radius bends. � 3. By bending. I 4. By any method indicate� above, applicable to change of direction involved. Form simple and compound ci�rves by bending pipe in jigs�to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration �equired; maintain cylindrical cross se�tion of pipe throughout entire bend without buckling, t�risting, cracking, or othenrvise deforming exposed surfaces of p�pe• � Provide wall returns at ends of �wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. F. Close exposed ends of pipe b�l welding 3/16-inch- (4.8-mm-) thick steel plate in place or with prefabricated fittings, except w�ere clearance of end of pipe and adjoining wall surface is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less. � a G. Fabricate newels of steel tubinc and provide newel caps of gray-iron castings. H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, a�d Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnections of pipe and attachment of handrails and railing systems to other work. Fumish inse�ts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railin� systems to concrete or masonry work. I 1. Connect railing posts to stair framing by direct welding, unless otherwise indicated. , J. Fillers: Provide steel sheet o; plate fillers of thickness and size indicated or required to support structural loads of handrails where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports.l Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses. Size fillers to produce adequate bearing to pr�vent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate. I 101598 �I 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP �, COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEM�NTS I � � L�J � �J � � � � � � �� C� L�J � METAL STAIRS PAGE 05510-6 a � � � 2.9 � LJ L!J � � � � � L�J K. For nongalvanized steel handrails and railing systems, provide nongalvanized fenous metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and concrete construction. FINISHES A. General: Finish metal stairs after assembly. 1. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations on application and designations of finishes. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surtaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surtace preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed units: 1. Exterio�s (SSPC Zone 1 B): SSPC SP 6"Commercial Blast Cleaning." C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surtaces, except those with galvanized finish or those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless othervvise indicated. . Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA 1"Paint Application Specification No. 1" for shop painting. ` 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 3.2 �' �I`] U ��' � PREPARATION A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installing anchorages, including concrete inserts, weld plates, and anchor bolts. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing steel stairs to in-place construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors as required. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Pertorm cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing steel stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. C. L� Install steel stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete, except where otherwise indicated. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. � E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size �• limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are intended for bolted field connections. , u laJ 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS METAL STAIRS PAGE 05510-7 `� F. Field Welding: Comply withl�the following requirements: � • 1. Use materials and Methods that minimize distortion and deveiop strength and corrosion resistance o� base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without ndercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux �mmediately. 4. � At exposed connectio�s, finish exposed welds and surtaces smooth and blended so that no roughness sl�ows after finishing and welded surtace matches contours of adjoining surtaces. � 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL STAIR� WITH GROUTED BASE PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonr�r bearing surtaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surtaces. Cjean bottom surtace of base plates. ' � � B. Set steel stair base plates on�wedges or other adjustable devices. After the stairs have been positioned and aligned, tight n the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with t e edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use nonmetallic, nons rink grout, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly betw�en bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.4 INSTALLING STEEL PIPE Rf�ILINGS AND HANDRAILS A. Adjust handrails and railing �ystems prior to anchoring to ensure matchirig alignment at abutting joints. Space posts �t spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loadings. Plumb posts in �ach direction. Secure posts and railing ends to building construction as follows: k I 1. Anchor posts to steel bY�� welding directly to steel supporting members. 2. Anchor handrail ends in�O concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored into Iwall construction with drilled-in expansion anchors. B. Secure handrails to wall with �vall brackets and end fittings. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside, face of handrail and finished wall surtace. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, �at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets and wall retum fitting� to building construction as follows: 1. Use type of bracket wit� flang� tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. , 2. For concrete and solid �asonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion anchor. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING I A. Touchu Paintin : Cleanin Ind touchu P 9 9� p painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on,steel stairs are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." I I EN� OF SECTION 05510 ��l J L�*J [�' � �� f� � �� L�J � � � � � � � u 101598 � � METAL STAIRS 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP �� PAGE 05510-8 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEM�NTS Q I L�J � L`� �� L! L*!' � �� l�' � L�J C � D _ � L�J SECTlON 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL REIATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood cabinets (casework). DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for instailing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction prior to woodwork instaliation. SUBMITTALS 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 A. B. C. E. F. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. - Product data for each type bf product and process specified and inco�porated into items of architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale detaiis, aitachment devices, and other components. 1. Show locations and sizes of funing, blocking, and hanging st�ips, including concealed blocking and reinforcing specified in other Sections. Samples for initial selection of the following in the form of manufacturers color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the fuii range of colors, textures, and pattems available for each type of material indicated. 1. Shop-applied opaque finashes. Sampies for verification of the following: 1. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque iinish, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) for panels and 50 sq, in. (300 sq. cm} for lumber, for each finish system and color, with one-half of exposed surface finished. 2. Comer pieces as follows: a. Cabinet front frame joints between stiles and rail, as well as exposed end pieces, 18 inches (450 mm) high by 18 inches (450 mm) wide by 6 inches (150 mm� deep. � b. Miter joints for standing trim. 3. Exposed cabinet hardware, one unit for each ty�e and finish. 101598 1NTERlOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 06402-1 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS G. Product certificates signed by woodwork fabricator certifying that products comply with specified requirements. , 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE '� . A. Single-Source Responsibilit�y for' Fabrication and Installation: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for fabricating, finishing, and instaliing woodwork specified in this S�ction. B. Quality Standard: Except as ptherwise indicated, comply with the following standard: 1. AWI Quality Standa�d: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwo;rk Institute for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, �nd other requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, ANDIHANDLING I A. Protect woodwork during tran5it, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration. � B. Do not deliver woodwork unt�l painting and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have be n completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation are s, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specifi�;d in "Pro ect Conditions." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIQNS A. Environmental Limitations: D� not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet- work is completed, and HVAC �System is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels d�uring the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: C�btain and comply with woodwork fabricator's and Installer's coordinated advice for optimur� temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its storage and installation. Do net install woodwork until these conditions have been attained and stabilized so that woodwor�C will be within plus or minus 1.0 percent of optimum moisture content from date of installatiorl through remainder of construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where vj�oodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other cor�struction by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show recorded measurem�nts on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to av�oid delaying the Work. 1.8 A. 1. Verify locations of con�ealed framing, blocking, reinforcements, and furring that support woodwork by a�curate field measurements before being enclosed. Record measurements on final sl�op drawings. I COORDINATION � Coordinate sizes and locations f framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other�Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indic�ted. I I PART2-PRODUCTS 101598 r INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP L� PAGE 06402-2 COAGUTANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS . I ' LJ l■J � � l�J � � � LJ � � L*J L�J l!J u �� I�J L�J 2.1 /1 2:2 A. B. C. D, E. 2.3 A. B. C. , MATERIALS , General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of interior woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards that apply to product characteristics indicated: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Softwood Piywood: PS 1. 3. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1. CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets. Cabinet Hardware Schedule: Refer to schedule at end of this Section for cabinet hardware required for architectural cabinets. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by reference to BHMA numbers or referenced to this standard. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA code number indicated. 1. Dark, Oxidized, Satin Bronze, Oil Rubbed, on Bronze Base: BHMA 613 and matching Architect's sample. 2. Bright Brass: BHMA 605. For concealed hardware provide manUfacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements of BHMA A156.9. INSTALLATION MATERIALS Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with ASME 618.6.1 for applicable requirements. 1. For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal-framing manufacturer. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N- 105 for applicable requirements. D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel. or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard and of the following grade: 101598 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK � 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 06402-3 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS I� J� Grade: Custom. B. Wood Moisture Content: C�mply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation �o relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. I C � L=� 2.5 Fabricate woodwork to dim$nsions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: . � � 1. Corners of cabinets an'd edges of solid-wood (lumber) members 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick or less: 1/16 inch (1.5 Irnm). • 2. Edges of rails and sir�ilar members more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick: 1/8 inch (3 mm). I I Complete fabrication, inclu�fing assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to Project site to �naximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and �nstallation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimmi�g, and fitting. Shop-cut openings, to maxim�um extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and �imilar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to prod ce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located i countertops and similar exposures, seal edges with a water- resistant coating. I .. INTERIOR STANDING AND F�UNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply wit �h AWI Section 300. I 1. Grade: Economy. I B. Backout or groove backs of fl�at trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends lexposed in finished work. C. Wood Species: Any closed-gr�in hardwood listed in referenced woodworking standard. 2.6 WOOD CABINETS (CASEWO�f� FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for wood cabinets. 1. Grade: Custom. � 'I B. , AWI Type of Cabinet Constructpon: As indicated. I C. Species for Exposed Lumber'ISurtaces: Any closed-grain hardwood listed in referenced woodworking standard. , • 2.7 SHOP FINISHING OF INTERIC�R ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK A. Quality Standard: Comply with �WI Section 1500, unless othervvise indicated. 1. Grade: Provide finishes �f same grades as items to be finished. � C. General: The entire finish. of �interior architectural woodwork is specified in this Section, regardless of whether shop appl ed or applied after installation. 101598 � INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP �� PAGE 06402-4 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEM�NTS., I � l�'J �� L. L�J �' '�--1 �� + � �� ! �� _ 1 ;� ,,�� I�� LJ � 1. Shop Finishing: The extent to which the final finish is applied to architectural � woodwork at the fabrication shop is the Contractor's option, except shop appiy at least the prime/base coat to the greatest extent possibie before delivery. tAJ � L� L*J �J � L�J � L�l � L!1 � � � � l�J D. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surtaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as appiicabie to each unit of work. Backpriming: Appiy one coat of sealer or primer compatibie with finish coats to concealed surfaces of woodwork, including backs of trim, cabinets, paneling, and omamental woric and the underside of countertops. Apply 2 coats to back of paneling. Concealed surfaces of plastic laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surtaced with plastic laminate or thermoset decorative overiay. E. Opaque Finish: Compiy with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, color, effect, and sheen, with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. 1. Grade: Custom. � 2. AWI Finish System OP-3: Water-reducible acrylic lacquer. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from fuil range of colors available in finish system specified. � 4. Sheen: Satin 30-50 gloss units. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. 3.2 A. PREPARATION Condition woodworic to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. INSTALLATION Quality Standard: Instail woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. B. instail woodwork plumb, levei, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm) for plumb and tevel (including tops). C. Scribe and cut woodworic to �t adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing,. countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches (900 mm) long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in 101598 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP ' PAGE 06402-5 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS � � F G. 3.3 A. B. C. 3.4 A. 3.5 A, adjacent and related memb rs. Fili gaps, if any, between top of base and wali with piastic wood filler, sand smooth, an� finisfl same as woad base, if finished. 1. Instail standing and running trim with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400- mm) variation from a$traight line. Cabinets: Instaii without c�istortion so that doors openings properiy and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the inst�allation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with n�more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a traight line. Complete the finishing work pecified in this Section to the extent not completed at shop or before instaliation of woodw�rk. Fili nail holes with matching fiiler where exposed. Apply specified finish coats, inciudi g stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where oniy seale'r/prime coats were appi�d in the shop. ADJUSTING AND CLEAN{N� � ( • Repair damaged and defecti�e woodwork where possible to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible, to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. I Clean, lubricate, ancl adjust h�rdware. Clean woodwork on exposed �nd semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled are�s. I PROTECTfON � Provide final protection and r�aintain conditions in a manner acceptable to fabricator and Installer that ensures that w�odwork is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. � CABWET�HARDWARE AND P�CCES$ORY SCHEDULE i BHMA numbers are used bel�w to designate hardware requirements, except as ,otherwise indicated. � � B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch (70-m�n), 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick metaf, and as follows: � ',� 1. Semiconcealed�Hinges fOr Overlay Doors: 601521. I C. Pulls: B02011. D. Catches: As follows: 1. Ball Friction Catches: 60��3013. �� I E. Shelf Rests: B04013. � ENQ OF SECTION 06402 I 101598 I� INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP ' PAGE 06402-6 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEM�NTS � l�!J [�J� � � L�'J l�] � L�'J � C � LJ L, � � �, � � L�J � � PART 1 - GENERAL Lsl � Lil L�J �,, l�' L�J L*�J LJ L�J � I'� �s� L!� I■I I■.I' 1.1 A. 1.2 SECTION 06610 — FIBERGLASS COMPOSITE STAIRS RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, inciuding General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Sectidn. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Straight run, fiberglass composite-framed stairs. 2. Fiberglass composite pipe handrails and railing systems attached to fiberglass composite stairs. 3. Fiberglass composite pipe handrails attached to walls adjacent to fiberglass composite stairs. � 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Pertormance: Engineer, fabricate, and install fiberglass composite stairs to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials involved, including anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each component of fiberglass composite stairs. 2. 3. Treads of Fiberglass composite Stairs: Capabte of withstanding a uniform load of 100 Ibf per sq. ft. (4.8 kN/sq. m) or a concentrated load of 300 Ibf (1.35 kN) on a area of 4 sq. inches (26 sq. cm) located in the center of the tread, whichever produces the greater stress. Platforms of Fiberglass composite Stairs: Capable of withstanding a uniform load of 100 Ibf per sq. ft. (4.8 kN/sq. m). Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from loads specified above as well as stresses resulting from railing system loads. B. Structural Pertormance: Engineer, fabricate, and install handrails and railing systems to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials involved, including anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each of the respective components of• each fiberglass composite fabrication. 1. Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated: a. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf (890 N) applied at any point and in any direction. b. Uniform load of 50 Ibf per linear foot (730 N/m) applied horizontally and concu�rently with uniform load of 100 Ibf per linear foot (1460 N/m) applied vertically downward. c. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently. 052299 . 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS FIBERGLASS COMPOSITE STAIRS PAGE 06610-1 � 2. Handrails Not Serving�, as Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following loads appiied as indicated. �I a. Concentrated loa'd of 200 Ibf (890 N) applied at any point and in any direction. b. Uniform load of �a0 Ibf per linear foot (730 N/m) applied in any direction. c. Concentrated a�d uniform loads above need not be assume.d to act concurrently. � L�I' 3. (nfill Area of Guardrait `Systems: Capabls of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of 200 Ibf (890 N) Iapplied to one sq. ft. (0.09 sq, m) at any point in the system including panels, interrriediate rails, balusters, or other elements composing the infili area. , a. Above load need ( not be assumed to act concurrently with loads on top rails of railing systems in �� etermining stress on guard. 1.4 SUBMITTALS I A. General: Submit each item ir� this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sectior�s. B. Product data for fiberglass co�nposite stairs, fiberglass composite gratings, and conne�tion systems. � • C. Shop drawings detailing fabric tion and installation of fiberglass composite stairs. Include p{ans, elevations, sections, an details of fiberglass composite stairs and their conneotions. Show anchorage and accesso items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other sections,. D. Qualification data for firms ay�d persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabitities a d experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of ar�hitects and owners, and other in%rmation specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE �� A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm � experienced in producing fiberglass composite stairs simifar to those indicated for this Proje�t with a record of successful in-service performance and with sufficient production capacity to �roduce required units without delaying the Work. B. Installer Qualifications: Arrang� for fiberglass composite stair installation specified in this Section by the same firm that fabricated them. C. Engineer Qualifications: A prdfessional engineer lega{ly authorized to practice in Texas experienced in providing engine�r�ng services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the instaltation of fiberglass compos'te stairs (including handrails and railing systems) similar to this Project in material, design, �and extent and that have a record of successful in-service performance. , I PARi' 2 - PRODUC7S 2.1 FIBERGLASS COMPOSITES I A. Fiberglass Composite Shapes, P�ates, and Tubes: Pultruded polyester resin base fiberglass. Class 1 flame spread rating, yello�v color. . � l� ��J � � � �' L�J � � I� L�J L� � � �I � � 052299 � FlBERGLASS COMPOSITE STAIRS 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP I PAGE 06610-2 � COAGULANT FEED SYS7EM IMPROVEMENTS � L�J � PART 1 - GENERAL SECTION 08110 - S7EEL DOORS AND FRAMES � 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS I■1 L� � �� f*I IL�J � (� I�I � C � � f� � A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes steel doors and frames. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware and weatherstripping. 2. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting primed doors and frames. 1.3 SUBMITTALS I� GQ General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product Data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Q 1.4 A. Door Schedule: Submit schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Contract Drawings. QUALITY ASSURANCE Provide doors and frames complying with ANSI/SDI 100 "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" and as specified. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per ASTM E 152, and are ' labeled and listed by UL, Wamock Hersey, or another testirtg and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames. B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. 101598 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 08110-1 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS c. i I . � Store doors and frames at b�ilding site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch- (100- mm-) high wood blocking. AYoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If dardboard wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. � PART2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ', A. Availabie Manufacturers: S�bject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorpor�ated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Doors and Frame�: a. Amweid Building�Products, Inc. b. Benchmark Com�nercial Doors. c. Ceco Door Prod�cts. d. Copco Door Co. I e. Curries Co. ` f. � Deansteel Manuf�cturing Co. g. Fenestra Corp. I h. Kewanee Corp. i. Mesker poor, Inc� j. Pioneer IndustrieS. k. Repubiic Buiider� Produ�ts. I. Steelcraft. I . 2.2 MATERIALS � � A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial-quality carbon steei, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569 ( STM A 569M); B. C. D. 2.3 A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: �arbon steel complying with ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M), commercial quality, or ASTM /� 620 (ASTM A 620M), drawing quality, special killed. Supports and Anchors: Fab Icated from not less than 0.0478-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick steel sheet; 0.0516-inch- (1.3-mm- thick galvanized steel where used with galvanized steel frames. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: anufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvaniz complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. DOORS . ; • � Steel Doors: Provide 1-3/4-inc�- (44-mm-) thick doors of materials and ANSI/SDI 100 grades and models specified below, or,as indicated on Drawings or schedules: 1. Interior poors: Grade II, (heavy-duty, Model 2, seamless design, minimum 0.0478-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick cold-roll�d steel sheet faces. 2. Exterior poors: Grade II, h'eavy-duty, Model 2, seamless design, minimum 0.0516- inch- (1.3-mm-) thick galyanized steel sheet faces. I 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP � � COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEIII�ENTS STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES � PAGE 08110-2 � I�1 I I �I I^I � � LiJ lil � lR' � Is'� � r� � L � � LJ � 1� 2.4 2.5 2.6 FRAMES A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, according to ANSI/SDI 100, and of types and styles as shown on Drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames of minimum 0.0478-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick cold-rolled steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners, continuously welded construction for � exterior applications and knocked down for field assembly at interior applications. B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers ori strike jambs of single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-door frames. FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI 100 requirements. 1. Internal Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials according to SDI standards: . a. Resin-impregnated paper honeycomb. b. Rigid polyurethane conforming to ASTM C 591. c. Rigid polystyrene conforming to ASTM C 578. ,� 2. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) between non-fire-rated pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) at bottom. � a. Fire Doors: Provide clearances according to NFPA 80. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufaeturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames." C. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. D. Exposed Fasteners: Unless othenruise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. ' E. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of SDI 107 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. J � Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surtace-applied hardware may be done at Project site. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to the Door and Ha�dware Institute's (DHI) "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." FINISHES, GENERAL 101598 � 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PAG� 08110-3 L�l � � A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metall Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. � B. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Pa�nt Application Specification No. 1," for steei sheet finishes. � C. Apply primers and organic fini�hes to doors and frames after fabrication. 2.7 STEEL SHEET FINISHES I A. Surface Preparation: Solvent�clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminan�s that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steei �to comply with SSPC-SP 5(White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 (Pickling). ; � I B. Pretreatment: Immediately a,'�er surtace preparation, apply a conversion coating of type suited to organic coating appli�d over it. , C. Factory Priming for Field-Pain�ed Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSI A224.1 acceptance criteria, is compat�ble with finish paint systems �indicated, and has capability to provide a sound foundation for�field-applied topcoats. Apply primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. � . I PART 3 - EXECUTION � 3.1 A. B. C. 3.2 I , , I , INSTALLATION I General: Install steel door�, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as sp�cified. i Placing Frames: Comply with �rovisions of SDI 105, unless othervvise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbe�, aligned, and braced securely until permanent ancho�s are set. After wall construction is �ompleted, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surtaces smooth and undamag$d. I • 1. Except for frames locate'�d in existing concrete, masonry, or gypsum board assembly construction, place frame� before constructing enclosing walls and ceilings. 2. At existing concrete or inasonry construction, install at least 3 completed opening anchors per jamb adjac�nt to hinge location on hinge jamb and at coITesponding heights on strike jamb. Set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry anchorage devi�es. 3. In metal-stud partitions, �nstall at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In steel-stud partiX�ions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws. 4. Install fire-rated frames a�cording to NFPA 80. Door Installation: Fit hollow-me�al doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI/SDI 100. � � 1. Fire-Rated Doors: tnstall �vith clearances specified in NFPA 80. I ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediat�ly after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup iof compatible air-drying primer. � ' ' 101598 I � STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP ' PAGE 08110-4 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEM�NTS � � � � � � � f� � �\ � � �al J '-�J � �� ' � L1 � L�J � LiJ I �l � � � L�J � � � LI' � � l� � Ifi B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. END OF SECTION 08110 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PAGE 08110-5 � � � PART 1 - GENERAL ,,�, L�1 � L�! � L�J � I�I � I!1 L�; � l�' � L.r � L� 1.1 A. 1.2 A. 1.3 A. SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Hinges. Exit devices. Push/pull units. Closers. Door trim units. Protection plates. Weatherstripping. Thresholds. SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification sections. B. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. C. Final hardware schedule coordinate� with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: a. c. d. e. f. 9• Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. Name and manufacturer of each item. Fastenings and other pertinent information. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. Mounting locations for hardware. Door and frame sizes and materials. 2. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule. . 101598 � 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS DOOR HARDWARE PAGE 08710-1 � 1.4 i � � . �� Templates for doors, fram�s, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware� Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for lo�ating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. � I QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. Singie Source Responsibilityk Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single m�nufacturer. I � B. Supplier Qualifications: A re�ognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the ProjecYs vicir�ity, that has a record of successful in-service pertormance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experien',ced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contr�ctor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation. � I C. Fire-Rated Openings: Provid$ door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirerhents of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed;and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or other testing and insp�cting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of) doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels. � 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING I A. Inventory door hardware join�ly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied t,'hat count is correct. B. Deliver individually packaged Idoor hardware items promptly to Project site). 1.6 MAINTENANCE I I place of installation (shop or � A. Maintenance Tools and Instr�ctions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as r�eeded for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of dc�or hardware. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 r_� i I . � MANUFACTURERS I Available Manufacturers: Sub�ect to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorpora ed in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Butts and Hinges: � . I a. Bommer Industrie �, Inc. b. Cal-Royal Product�, Inc. c. Hager Hinge Co. ! d. Lawrence Brothers Inc. e. McKinney Product Co. . f. H. Soss & Compan . 101598 'I 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP � COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEN�,ENTS I DOOR HARDWARE PAGE 08710-2 � � l�� L�J u �- �� L�J � LJ � � i�! � �� ! �J � � � �� 3. g. Stanley Hardware, Div. Staniey Works. Bolts: a. Builders Brass Works Corp. b. Glynn-Johnson Corp. c. Hager Hinge Co. d. H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company. e. Quality Hardware Mfg. Co., Inc.; Div. Newman Tonks, Inc. f. Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works. ExiUPanic Devices: a. c. d. f. 9• h. 1• Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. Arrow Lock Manufacturing Co. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp. Dor-O-Matic. Monarch Hardware & Mfg. Co., Div Newman Tonks, Inc. Precision Hardware, Inc. Reed Exit Hardware, Div. Yale Security Inc. Sargent Manufacturing Company. Von Duprin, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. Yale Security Inc. 4. Push/Pull Units: a. b. d. e. f. h. 4� Baldwin Hardware Corp. Brookline Industries, Div. Yale Security Inc. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp. Hager Hinge Co. Hiawatha, Inc. . H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco). Overhead Closers: a. b. d. e. f. 9• h. i. 1• � Arrow Lock Manufacturing Co. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp. Dorma Door Controls Intemational. Intemational Door Closers, Inc. LCN, Div. Ingersnll-Rand Door Hardware Group. Monarch Hardware & Mfg. Co., Div Newman Tonks, Inc. Norton Door Controls, Div. Yale Security Inc. Rixson-Firemark, Div. Yale Security Inc. Sargent Manufacturing Company. Yale Security Inc. Door Trim Units: a. Baldwin Hardware Corp. b. Brookline Industries, Div. Yale Security Inc. c. Builders Brass Works Corp. d. Hager Hinge Co. e. H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company. f. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco). 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS DOOR HARDWARE PAGE 08710-3 7. 2.2 /_� i . � Kick, Mop, and Armor plates: a. Baldwin Hardwar� Corp. b. Brookline Industr es, Div. Yale Security Inc. c. Corbin & Russwir� Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp. d. Hager Hinge Co. I e. Hiawatha, Inc. , , f. H. B. Ives, A Ha ow Company. g. Rockwood Manu�cturing Company h. Triangle Brass M nufacturing Company (Trimco). Door Stripping and Seal�: � a. Hager Hinge Co. ' b. National Guard P�oducts, Inc. c. Pemko Manufact ring Co., Inc. d. Reese Enterprise�, Inc. e. Sealeze Corp. f. Ultra Industries. � � g. Zero Intemational, Inc. Thresholds: � I a. Hager Hinge Co. ' � b. National Guard P�oducts, Inc. c. 'Pemko Manufact�ring Co., Inc. d. Reese Enterprise , Inc. e. Sealeze Corp. ' ' • � f. Zero Internationali Inc. ' SCHEDULED HARDWARE ' I Requi�ements for design, grad , function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are in icated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are identified by usin� hardware designation numbers of the fnllowing: � 1. Manufacturet's Product � Designations: The product designation and name of one manufacturer are listed fpr each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is sp�cified under the Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, the co parable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requireme ts. 2. ANSI/BHMA designation used elsewhere in this Section or in schedules to describe hardware items or to efine� quality or function are derived from the following standards. Provide pr�ducts� complying with these standards and requirements specified elsewhere in th,s Section. a. Butts and Hinges: �ANSI/BHMA A156.1. b. Exit Devices: AN$I/BHMA A156.3. c. Door Controls - ClQsers: ANSI/BHMA A156.4. d. Auxiliary Locks an Associated Products: ANSI/BHMA A156.5. e. Architectural Door�1'rim: ANSI/BHMA A156.6. f. Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI/BHMA A156.7. g. Auxiliary Hardwar : ANSI/BHMA A156.16. . h. Materials and Fini�hes: ANSI/BHMA A156.18. 101598 � 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP I COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS DOOR HARDWARE PAGE 08710-4 � � 2.3 � � �� f ��) � L!I �� L� 1�1 [�! � �� MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removabie nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as othervvise acceptabie to Architect. B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not fumish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as othenrvise specified. C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. D. Furnish screws for installation with each .hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surtaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish. E. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type speci�ed are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. 2.4 HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units. B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following requirements: 1. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots. . C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: 1. Out-Swing Exterior poors: Nonremovable pins. 2. Out-Swing Corridor poors with Locks: Nonremovable pins. 3. Interior poors: Nonrising pins. D. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 86 inches or less in height with same rule for additional hinges. 101598 ' 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS DOOR HARDWARE PAGE 08710-5 L�] 2.5 A. B ( LATCHES AND BOL7S ( Strikes: Provide manufacturier's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock boit, with curved lip extended to prot'�ect frame, finished to match hardware set, uniess otherwise indicated. ' I 1. Provide flat fip strikes �or focks with 3-piece, antifriction latchbolts as recommended by manufacturer. ' 2. Provide roller type strikes whgre recommended by manufacturer of the latch and lock units. � Fiush Boit Heads: Minimum �f 1/2-inch-diameter rods of brass, bronze, or stainless steel wiih minimum 12-inch-long rod fo doors up to 7'-0" in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 7'-0" in h�ight. 1� l�'J C. Exit Device Dogging: Exce t on ' fire-rated doors where closers are provided on doors equipped with exit devices, e uip the units with keyed dogging device to keep the latch bolt retracted, when engaged. , 2.6 A. 2.7 A. B. 2.8 A. B. PUSH/PULL UNITS Exposed Fasteners: Provide r�anufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for installation, thru- bolted for matched pairs but n�t for single units. �I CLOSERS AND DOOR CONT�OL D�VICES Size of Units: Except as oth�ervvise specificaliy indicated, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of � door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequ�ncy of use. 1. Where parallel arms are� indicated for closers, provide closer unit one size larger than recommended for use with standard arms. Provide grey resilient parts for �xposed bumpers. DOOR TRIM UNITS I Fastene�s: Provide manufactu�e�'s standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine screws or sel I-tapping screws. Fabricate edge trim of stainles�S stes{ �o fit door thickness in standard lengths or to match height of protection plates. ; C. Fabricate protection plates not rhore than 1-1/2 inches less than doorwidth on hinge side and not more ihan 1/2 inch less than', door width on pull side by height indicated. 1. Metal Plates: Stainless s�eel, 0.050 inch (U.S. 18 gage). 2.9 THRESHOLDS A. Generat: F�ccept as otherwise i�dicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size, and profile as shown or schedul�d. I � 101598 , ( DOOR HARDWARE 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP ' PAGE 08710-6 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEM�NTS � � �� L�J � �� J l+'J � � � l_�l � �,*' � � L � � f�l ��J �� , ��I � B. Exterior Hinged or Pivoted Doors: Provide units not less than 4 inches wide, formed to accommodate change in floor elevation where indicated, fabricated to accommodate door hardware and to fit door frames, and as follows: 2.10 A. B. C. E. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18, "Materials and Finishes," including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products. D. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze, and � aluminum, except as othervvise indicated. The suffix "-NL" is used with standard finish designations to indicate "no lacquer." l�' L� F. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the industry-recognized standard commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted. 1. For out-swinging doors provide units with interlocking lip and with hook on bottom edge of door to act as weather bar. HARDWARE FINISHES Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets (or push-pull units if no latch or lock sets). Provide finishes that match those established by BHMA or, if none established, match the Architect's sample. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. 1. Rust-Resistant Finish: For iron and steel base metal required for exterior work and in � areas shown as "High Humidity" areas (and also when designed with the suffix -RR), provide 0.2-mil-thick copper coating on base metal before applying brass, bronze, nickel, or chromium plated finishes. � PART 3 - EXECUTION � 3.1 L�1 � 1. "Recommended Locations for. Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute. � B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into .. surtaces that are later to be painted or �nished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the � Division 9 Sections. Do not install surtace-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved. � � 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights i�dicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with goveming regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect. DOOR HARDWARE PAGE 08710-7 C. D. E. F. 3.2 A. a C. 3.3 A. . i _ � � I i . I � . Set units level, plumb, and (true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for p�oper instaliation and operation. Driil and countersink units �'hat are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in acc�prdance with industry standards. Set thresholds for exterior d�ors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements ispecified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." Weatherstripping and Seals: �; Compiy with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requ�rements are not otherwase indicated. ADJUSTING, CLEANING, A(�D DEMONSTRATING I Adjust and check each opera ing item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. eplace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for thl application made. 1. Where door hardware� is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or � occupancy of a space� or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupan�Cy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. � Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware �nd doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating an ventilating equipment. I t Clean adjacent surfaces soilec� by hardware installation. Six-Month Adjustment: Apprd,ximately six months after the date of Substantial Completion, the Installer, accompanied by representatives of the manufacturers of latchsets and locksets and of door control devices, ar�d of other major hardware suppliers, shall return to the Project to pertorm the following work: 1. Examine and re-adjust �ach item of door hardware as necessary to restore function of doors and hardware to c�mply with specified requirements. 2. Consult with � and inst ct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures�, 3. Replace hardware items � hat have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of hardwar units. 4. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the pertormance of the h�rdware. � HARDWARE SCHEDULE �i ' General: Provide hardware f r each door to comply with requirements of Section "Door Hardware," hardware set numb�rs indicated in door schedule, and in the following schedule of hardware sets. i 1. Hardware sets indicate q antity, item, manufacturer and product designation, size, and finish or color, as applicat�le. � � � I � � �� I�'f t�'l � �� ! AJ �� i � i�� 101598 � �I DOOR HARDWARE 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP ' PAGE 08710-8 � COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEM�NTS C�� u Ll l�! � � � � � � � � !� L�J O 1=J !=J l�� B. Hardware Set No. 1: (Fo� each Door 101 and 102). 1-1/2 pair Butts FBB 179 4.5" x 4.5" 1 Rollerlatch 32 Roller Latch 1 Push Plate 70C 4" x 16" 1 Pull Plate 126 x 70C 4" x 16" 1 Closer 4020 1 Kickplate 10 x 34 x.050" 3 Silencers 608 1 Door Shoe 216A PK 1 Threshoid 151A 3" C. Hardware Set No. 2: (For poor 103). � All hardware by overhead door supplier D. Hardware Set No. 3: (For poor 104). 1-1/2 pair Butts FBB 179 4.5" x 4.5" 1 Rollerlatch 32 Roller Latch 1 Push Plate 70C 4" x 16" 1 Pull Plate 126 x 70C 4" x 16" 1 Closer 4020 1 Kickplate 10 x 34 x.050" 1 Weatherstrip 297AV 1 Door Shoe 216A PK 1 Threshold 151A 3" E. Hardware Set No. 4: (For poor 105). 1 Weatherstrip 297AV 1 Door Shoe 216A PK 1 Threshold 151A 3" F. Hardware Set No. 5: (For poor 106). 1-1/2 pair Butts FBB 179 4.5" x 4.5" 1 Rollerlatch 32 Roller Latch 1 Push Plate 70C 4° x 16" � 1 Pull Plate 126 x 70C 4" x 16" 1 Closer 4020 1 Kickplate 10 x 40 x.050" 3 Silencers 608 1 Door Shoe 216A PK 1 Threshold 151A 3" END OF SECTION 08710 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS US26D 652 US32D 630 US32D 630 US32D 630 AL 689 US32D 630 Grey AL 689 AL 689 US26D 652 US32D 630 US32D 630 US32D 630 AL 689 US32D 630 AL 689' AL 689 AL 689 AL 689 AL 689 AL 689 US26D 652 US32D 630 US32D 630 US32D 630 AL 689 US32D 630 Grey AL 689 AL 689 Stanley Glynn-Johnson Rockwood Rockwood LCN Rockwood Rockwood Pemko Pemko Stanley Glynn-Johnson Rockwood Rockwood LCN Rockwood Pemko Pemko Pemko Pemko Pemko Pemko Stanley Glynn-Johnson Rockwood Rockwood LCN Rockwood Rockwood Pemko Pemko DOOR HARDWARE PAGE 08710-9 LJ � � PART 1 - GENERAL [�I 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 n SECTION 09255 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES RELATED DOCUMENTS O L�J L�J l;J L*� �, � � u !J � l�J � � � Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Suppiementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, appiy to this Section. SUMMARY . A. This Section includes the following: � 1. Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel framing. DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � A. Fire Resistance: Provide gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings indicated. SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified. C. Shop Drawings showing locations, fabrication, and installation of control and expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and �attachments to other units of Work. 1.8 A. B. C. D. QUALITY ASSURANCE Single-Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies from a single manufacturer, unless othervvise indicated. Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer. Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-resistance-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, provide gypsum board assemblies that comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PAGE 09255-1 1.7 A. B. 1.8 A. B. C. � I �listing of another tes�ing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. � - 2. Gypsum board asse blies indicated are identical to assemblies tested for fire resistance according t ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authoriti s having jurisdiction. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND� HANDLING , Deliver materials in original�, packages, containers, or buf�dles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. Store materials inside under �over and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct suniight, su ace contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. PROJECT CONDITIONS � i Environmental Conditions, G nerai: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for appiying and finishing gypsu board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's recomm�endations, whichever are more stringent. � Room Temperatures: For nor�adhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F(4 deg C�. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F(10 deg C) for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed �5 deg F(35 deg C) when using temporary heat sources. Ventilation: Ventilate buildin�spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather I prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. PART2-PRODUCTS I 2.1 n B I MANUFACTURERS � � • Available Manufacturers: Su�ject td compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: I - Manufacturers: Subject to co�npliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: � 1. Steel Framing: � " I a. Clark Steei Framing, Inc. b. Consolidated Syst�ms, Inc. c. Dale Industries, In�. d. Dietrich Industries� inc. e. Marino/Ware (forrrherly Marino Industries Corp.}. f. National Gypsum �o.; Gold Bond Building Products Division. g. Unimast, inc. � � 2. Gypsum Board and Rela�ed Products: a. Domtar Gypsum. ; b. Georgia-Pacific C rp. c. National Gypsum �o.; Gold Bond Buiiding Products Division. 101598 � GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP I PAGE 09255-2 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS ` � � � [!'1 1�'l � � � � � ,� C�l � LJ '�! � � � � � l� � !�J � [_�! � �'�� l!1 L�J L�l lil L�� L�J � �� d. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 A. STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS General: Provide steei framing members complying with the following requirements: 1. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant coating. B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) wide minimum lip (retum), �and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth: 1. Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. C. Steel Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel, 0.0598-inch (1.5-mm) minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 7/16-inch- (11.1-mm-) wide flanges, 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) deep, 475 Ib/1000 feet (45 kg/100 m), unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows: 1. Type: Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies. 2. Edges: Tapered. 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) where indicated. 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below: D. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, � holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated. GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available that will minimize end-to-end butt joints in each area indicated to receive gypsum board application. 1. Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches (1219 mm). 1. Material: Formed metal or plastic, with metal complying with the following requirement: a. Steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process or rolled zinc. 2.5 r_� 2. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047: JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated. B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. 101598 . GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 09255-3 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS i . i C. Setting-Type Joint Compountls for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged, job-mixed, chemical- hardening powder products f� rmulated for uses indicated. 1. Where settin -t e'oiht com ounds are indicated as a ta i o g yp � p p ng c mpound only or for taping and fiiling only,�l use formulation that is compatible with other joint compounds applied over it. ` 2. For prefilling gypsum poard joints, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. � I ' D. Drying-Type Joint Compoun�s for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged vinyl-based products compl.ying with the following r�quirements for formulation and intended use. 1. Ready-Mixed Formulat%on: Factory-mixed product. a. Taping compouriId formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and faGe flanges of trim accessories. b. Topping compouhd formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats. c. All-purpose com�ound forrnulated for both taping and topping compounds. � 2. Job-Mixed Formulation:� Powder product for mixina with water at Proiect site. a. Taping compou d formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and fac flanges of trim accessories. b. Topping compourjd formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats. c. All-purpose comn��und formulated for both taping and topping coinpounds. F. 2.6 A. B. C. D. Joint Compound for Cementi�ious Backer Units: Material recommended by cementitious backer unit manufacturer. I - MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL�S I General: Provide auxili�ry aterials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced standards and reco mendations of gypsum board manufacturer. I Steel drill screws complying wi�h ASTM C 1002 for the following applications: 1. Fastening gypsum boarc� to steel members less than 0.033 inch (0.84 mm) thick. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 �0 2.84 mm) thick. Gypsum Board Nails: ASTM C� 514. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which g�ipsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal frames, cast-in-anchors, and s�ructural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation olerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this S ction. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. � 101598 i 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP � COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEM�IENTS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES � PAGE 09255-4 � � L�J �l Lr � � !�l � � 3.2 A. 3.3 A. INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL . Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS Instail runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board stud assemblies abut other construction. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips or foam gaskets between studs and wail. B. Installation Tolerances: Instaii each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surtaces do not vary more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1. For STC-rated and fire-resistance-rated partitions that extend to the underside of � floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid structural surtaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed, to support gypsum board closures needed to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. � I�J � 3.4 L■J C�J �� L�J L�J � � D. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated. E. A. B 1. Single-Layer Construction: Space studs 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each gypsum board panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. Install sound-attenuation blanliets, where indicated, prior to installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. E. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings where possible. 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PAGE 09255-5 � � G I:I 3.5 A. 3.6 A. B. c. 3.7 A. B. C. D. E. F. I Attach gypsum panels to ste i studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud anges first. Attach gypsum panels to frarrfing provided at openings and cutouts. I Cover both faces of steel st�ud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except �n chases that are braced intemally. I Space fasteners in gypsum aneis according to referenced gypsum finishing standard and manuf�cturer's �ecommendations. GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS Single-Layer Application: Inst�il gypsum wallboard panels as follows: f� I� � board application and � 1. On partitions/walls, a ply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated, an� provide panel lengths that will minimize end joints. INSTALLING TRIM ACCESS�RIES General: For trim accessorie$ with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to f��sten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for t}�pe, length, and spacing of fasteners. Install cornerbead at external �orners. Install edge trim where edge f gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange forr�ed to receive joint compound, except where other types are indicated. , � I FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD'ASSEMBLIES General: Treat gypsum board �oints, interior angles, flanges of comerbead, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surtace defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surtaces for dec�ration. Prefill open joints, rounded or� beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting-type joint compound. �I Apply joint tape over gyps m board joints and to flanges of trim accessories as recommended by trim accesso manufacturer. • Levels of Gypsum Board Finishl: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per GA- 214. � � 1. Leve14 for gypsum boar� surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Use one of the following joint'I compound combinations as applicable to the finish levels specified: I Use the following joint compound combination as applicable to the finish levels specified: I I •, 101598 �I GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP � PAGE 09255-6 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEM�NTS � L�J CrJ � � r�� L� LJ � l�'J � �� l � � a � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � G. 3.8 A. B. 1. Embedding and First Coat: Setting-type joint compound. Fill (Second) Coat: Setting- type joint compound. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, ail-purpose or topping compound. For Level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fiil (second), and �nish (third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surtace free of visual defects and ready for decoration. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surtaces. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Instailer, that ensure gypsum board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09255 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PAGE 09255-7 L�J L�l � PART 1 - GENERAL L+�J L'�' � LI I#1 l�J L:!J LJ � � � � � � � L�' 1.1 A. 1.2 A. 1.3 A. � B. SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes ceilings composed of acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems. SUBMITTALS General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product data for each type of product specified. C. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual acoustical panels or seetions of panels and sections of suspension system members showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each ceiling assembly indicated. D. Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size indicated below. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. 1.4 1. 6-inch- (150-mm-) square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color. 2. Set of 12-inch- (300-mm-) long samples of exposed suspension system members, including moldings, for each color and system type required. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed acoustical panel ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Single-Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. C. Single-Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surFace contamination, and other causes. 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PAGE 09511-1 L� C•�I 1.6 i 'i Before installing acoustical �anels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. � 1 � Handle acoustical panels car'efully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. I PROJECT CONDITIONS � � A. Space Enclosure and Enviro�mental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and we therproof, wet-work in spaces is completed and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and am�ient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained at the levels indicated for Prd�ect when occupied for its intended use. I 1.7 COORDINATION � I A. Coordinate layout and install�tion of acoustical panels and suspension system components with other construction that' penetrates ceilings o� is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, � fire-suppression system �components (if any), and partition assemblies (if any). � PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject t� com�liance with requirements, acoustical panels that may be incorporated in the Work inclu�e, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Non-Fire-Resistance-R�ted, Water-Felted, Mineral-Base Panels: I � a. Minaboard Corte a; Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Hytone Baroque; he Celotex Corporation. c. Auratone Omni F ssured; USG Interiors, Inc. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GEN�RAL I � A. Acoustical Panel Standard: ' Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with A�wTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light ref�ectances, unless otherwise indicated. B. Acoustical Panel Colors and P'�attems: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. � � 2.3 CEILINGS OF WATER-FELTEb, MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Panel Characteristics: Type II',I, Form 2 acoustical panels per ASTM E 1264, with painted finish, complying with pattem a�d other requirements indicated below: I 1. Pattern: Panels matchi�ig pattem indicated by reference to manufacture�'s standard product designations in "nllanufacturers" Article. a. Designation CD (p�rtorated with small holes and fissured). I 2. Color/Light Reflectance qoefficient: White/LR 0.80. 3. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.55. 4. Edge Detail: Square. I 101598 �I 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS I , ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PAGE 09511-2 � C�� LiJ � 2 .4 `� !� � � L�J L�1 LJ C. ►1 B. C. 5. Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm). 6. Size: 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1220 mm). � Suspension System Type: As described below and specified in Part 2"Non-Fire-Resistance- Rated, Direct-Hung Suspension Systems" Article: 1. Wide-face, capped, double-web, steel suspension system. METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless othervvise indicated. 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for appiication indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attachment of hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing agency. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zin�Coated Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641 M), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so that its stress at 3 times the hanger design load (AS7M C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than the yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire. E. Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated, or if not indicated, � manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. r� Lil u D 2.5 L�J � �J � 1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped-edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed .between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member. 2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. NON-FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED, DIRECT-HUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Wide-�ace, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from prepainted or electrolytic zinc-coated, cold-rolled steel sheet, with prefinished 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges; other characteristics as follows: 1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type, as standard with manufacturer. 3. Cap Material and Finish: Steel sheet painted white. 101598 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 09511-3 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS L� � Available Products: Subject�to compliance with requirements, suspension systems that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Wide-Face, Capped, C�ouble-Web, Steel Suspension Systems: a. Prelude 15/16" �xposed Tee System (w/7300 m.r.); Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 1 b. Prelude 15/16" ffacposed Tee System (w/7303 m.r.); Armstrong World Industries, Inc. I `�J PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION I I� � A. Examine substrates and stru�tural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for corr�pliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installatioh and anchorage. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have beeri corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION I A. Coordination: Fumish layout� for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified i,n other Sections. B. Measure each ceiling area an�l establish the layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of ea�ch ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and conform to the layout shov�n on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION � � A. General: Install acoustical pa�el ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per manufacturer's instructions and� CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook." � 1. Standard for Ceiling Sus�ension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636. 2. U.B.C. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems: U.B.C. Standard No. 47-18. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from �uilding's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb a�d free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are n�t part of the supporting structure or of the ceiling suspension system. ; 2. Splay hangers only whe�e required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counte�splaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of du�ts an�d other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that intertere w�th the location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension syst�m members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of tra ezes• or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to �upport ceiling loads within pertormance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 4. Secure wire hangers to eiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of 3 tight tums. Connect hangers either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devi�Ces that are secure, that are appropriate for substrate, and that will not deteriorate� or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. I I . 101598 '� ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP I • PAGE 09511-4 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMLNTS . I� L�J L'J � � t"] � � � � L�J � LJ � L�l LJ � 1�*'�J L+!] ��I L� ��I � �L+ � � C. install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.18 mm in 3.66 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide neat, precise fit. 1. Arrange directionally pattemed acoustical panels as follows: � a. In the manner indicated on reflected ceiling plans. 2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. . 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and _ � suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. L#J L�J u L�; I!1 �J L�J L�J � END OF SECTION 09511 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PAGE 09511-5 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � SECTION 09800 - SPECIAL COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 n SUMMARY This Section includes applying special coating systems to items and surtaces scheduled for the Coagulant Building, including surface preparation, prime coats, and topcoats. Types of special coating systems required for the Project include the following: 1. Special coatings for exterior use include �the following: a. Two-component, pigmented, aliphatic, polyurethane coating b. Two-component, amine cured epoxy. B. C. 1.3 2. Speciai coatings for interior use inciude the following: a. Two-component, carbon fiiled epoxy coating. - b. Pigmented, aliphatic, polyurethane coating. c. Two-component, amine cured epoxy. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Generai painting is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." 2. Elastomeric coatings are specified in Division 9 Section "Elastomeric Coatings." SUBMITTALS ' A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. � � B. Product data for each coating system specified, including block fillers and primers. 1. Provide the manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each material proposed for use. 2. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's �catalog number and general classification. , C. Samples for initial color sele�tion in the form of manufacturer's color charts. 1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surtaces to be coated. D. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied with texture to simulate actual conditions on representative samples of the actual substrate. 052299 SPECIAL COA7INGS 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 09800-1 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS '.�`J 1. Provide stepped s mples, defining each separate coat, inciuding primers. Use representative color� when preparing� samples ior review. Resubmit until the required sheen, color, and te�cture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of m terial and application for each coat of each sample. Labei each sample as to locatio and application. 3. Submit samples o the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only. , a. Concrete: Pr�vide two 4-inch-square samples for each color and finish. b Ferrous Metai: Provide two 4-inch-square samples of flat metal�and two 8-inch- long samples,of solid metal for each color and finish. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: �ngage an experienced applicator that has successfuliy completed coating system application� similar in materiai and extent to those indicated for the Project. � B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat material p�oduced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats for each type of coating. Use only thinners recommended by the manufacturer and only�within recommended limits. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, A�ID HANDLING � A. Deliver materials to fhe jo� site in the manufacturer's original, new, unopened packages, and containers bearing manuf�cturer's name and label, and the following info►mation: 1. Name or title of mat,erial. � 2. Product description �(generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's nam�e, stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume!, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. S. Thinning instruction . 6. Application instructi ns, 7. Color name and nu ber. . 8. Handling instruction and precautions. 8. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F(7 deg C). Maintain co�tainers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Keep storage area neat and orderiy. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take ' necessary measure to ensure that workers and woric areas are protected from fire and health hazards resu ting from handling, mixirtg, and applying the coatings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS I A. Apply coatings only whe the temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between�45 deg F(7 deg C) and 95 deg F(35 deg C). B. Do not apply coatings in snow, •rain, fog, or mist; when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures I ss than 5 deg F(3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. i 1. Aliow wet surface� to dry thoroughiy and attain the temperature and conditions specified before pro,ceeding with or continuing the coating operation. 2. Work may continue during inclement weather only if areas and surfaces to be coated are enclosed and �he temperature within the area can be maintained within limits specified by the mahufacturer during application and drying periods. 052299 . � SPECIAL COATINGS 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP I PAGE 09800-2 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPRQ�VEMENTS � L*'J L�!1 L�J � � � � � � �� L"J � � � � `�J u � L!�J C�J � PART2-PRODUCTS ry 2.1 u a. � � � � 2.2 � � � . � � a Q 2.3 � tJ � L�J MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Carboline Company (Carboln). 2. Devoe and Raynolds Company (Devoe). 3. The Giidden Company (Glidden}. 4. Benjamin Moore and Company (Moore). 5. Porter International (Porter). 6. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (PPG). 7. Rust-Oleum Corporation (R-O). 8. Sherwin-Wilfiams Company (S-VN). 9. Tnemec Company, Inc, (Tnemec). 10. Sauereisen SPECIAL COATING MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fitlers, primers, finish coat material, and• related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience. . B. Material Quality: Provide the highest grade of the various coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable coating manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a best-grade product wi!! not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivafent products of other manufacturers. Fumish the manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect from the manufacturer's full range of standard colors. D. Amine cured epoxy; High build, amine cured, epoxy resin with minimum solids content of 80% by volume, suitable for long-term immersion service in potable water and municipal wastewater. For potable water service, coating material must be listed by the NSF International as in compliance with NSF Standard 61 — Drinking Water System Components — Health Effects. JOINT FILLERS A. Joint Fillers: Provide the manufacture�'s recommended factory-formulated concrete masonry block fillers that are compatible with the finish materials indicated. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, block fillers that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to: 1. Joint Fi(lers under Carbon Fi((ed Epoxy Coating: 052299 SPECIAL COATINGS 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 09800-3 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS � l�'J 2.4 A. B. I , � �� a. Sauereisen� Filler Compound No. 209. 80ND COAT MATERIALS Bond Coat Materials: rovide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated bond coat materials that are c� mpatible with the finish materials indicated. Available Products: Su�ject to compliance with requirements, bond coat materials that may be incorporated in the W�rk inciude, but are not limited to: ( 1. Bond Coat under ITwo-Component, Potyamide-Epoxy, Coal Tar Coatings: Thinned, coal tar epoxy (SSpC-16). a. Carboln: � Carbomastic 14. b. Devoe: c. Gtidden: d. Porter: e. PPG: f. R-O: g. S-W: 2.8 A. B. 247-K-9903 Devtar 247 High Suifd Epoxy Mastic. 5270/5271 Glid-Guard Coal Tar Epoxy Finish. 7023 Tarset C-200a Polyamide Cured Coal Tar Epoxy 97-640/97-641 Coal Cat Coal Tar-Epoxy Coating. 9578 High Build Coal Tar Epoxy. Coal Tar Epoxy C-200 (B69B50i660V50). PRIMERS AND SEALER� • Primer/Sealers: Provide �he manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated primer/sealers that are compatible with tt�e substrate and finish materials indicated. Available Products: S�bj�eet to campliance with requirements, primer/sea{ers that may be incorporated in the Work i�tclude, ybut are not limited to: � a. Sauereisen: ' Conoweld No. 501. � 2. Pigmented Polyurethane Coating under Pigmented; Aliphatic, Polyurethane-Enamel Finish: , ` 1. Primers under Carb�n Filied Epoxy Coating: I a. Carboln: b. Devoe: c, Glidden: d. Porter: e. PPG: f. S-W: 2.6 A. B Sanitile P.C. Base. 12735 Tru-Glaze Epoxy Primer. 6151 Ctear Glid-Thane One Polyurethane Coating (Reduced 50 percent with Glidden #6121 solvent). 4351 M.C.R.-43 High Build Semi-Gloss Epoxy. 97-130 Series Aquapon High Build Semi-Gloss. Tile Ciad ii Enamei, B62 Series/660V70. g. Tnemec: � Series 69 Hi-Bui{d Epoxoli�e II. EXTERIOR FINISH-COAT MATERIALS Exterior Finish-Coat Materi�is: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated, exterior, finish-coat materiai�. Available Products: Subje I to compliance with requirements, exterior finish-coat materiais that may be incorporated in�he Work include, but are not limited to: I 1. Two-Component, Car�on Filled Epoxy Coating: a. Sauereisen: 052299 � 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP I COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROV�EMENTS Conogtaze MA 2283. C�j � tJ C�'J � L�J � �� L�i LRJ LJ �' � � � l�J SPECIAL COATINGS � PAGE 09800-4 L*J � � � � � � O � � � � Q � a � a� D � � 2. Moisture-Curing, Pigmented, Polyurethane Coatings: , a. Devoe: 369-K-XXXX Devthane 369 Aliphatic Urethane Gloss Enamel. b. Glidden: 6100 Glid-Thane One Aliphatic Polyurethane. c. Porter: 4610 Hythane Acrylic Aliphatic Polyurethane. d. PPG: 97-800 Series Pitthane Acrylio-Aliphatic Urethane. e. S-W: Hi-Build Aliphatic Polyurethane, 665 Series/B60V2. 3. Two-Component, Amine Cured Epoxy: a. Ameron: Ameron 395. b. Tnemec: Tnemec 139 2.7 INTERIOR FINISH-COAT MATERIALS A. Interior Finish-Coat Materials: Provide the manufacture�'s recommended factory-formulated, interior, finish-coat materials. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, interior finish coat materials that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to: 1. Two-Component, Carbon Filled Epoxy Coating: a. Sauereisen: Conoglaze MA 2283. � 2. Pigmented, Aliphatic, Polyester, Polyurethane Coating: a. Carboln: Sanitile 550 Finish Aliphatic Polyester Polyurethane. b. Devoe: 369-K-XXXX Devthane 269 Aliphatic Urethane Gloss Enamel. c. Glidden: 6151 Clear Glid-Thane One Polyurethane Coating (Reduced 10 percent with solvent recommended by the manufacturer). d. Porter: 4610 Hythane Acrylic Aliphatic Polyurethane. e. PPG: 97-800 Series Pitthane Acrylic-Aliphatic Urethane. f. S-W: Hi-Build Aliphatic Polyurethane, 665 Series/660V2. g. Tnemec: Series 70 & 71 Endura-Shield. 3. Two-Component, Amine Cured Epoxy: a. Ameron: Ameron 395. b. Tnemec: Tnemec 139 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION , A. Examine substrates and conaitions under which coatings will be applied for compliance with requirements on applying coatings. Surtaces to receive coatings must be thoroughly dry before coatings are applied. 1. Do not proceed with coating application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 052299 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS SPECIAL COATINGS PAGE 09800-5 � 2. Start of applicatio will be construed as the Applicato�'s acceptance of surtaces within that particular are . � '� . B. Coordinating Work: Feview sections in which other coatings are provided to ensure compatibility of the total'isystems for various substrates. On request, fumish information on the characteristics of sp�,cified finish materials to ensure compatible primers. 1. Notify the Archit ct of problems anticipated using the coatings specified over substrates primed by others. Y 3.2 PREPARATION I � � A. General: Remove hardv`rare and hardware accessories, plates, machined surtaces, lighting fixtures, and similar iterr�s already in place that are not to be coated, or provide surtace- applied protection prior � to surtace preparation and coating. Remove these items, if necessary, to completel coat the items and adjacent surtaces. Following the coating operations in each space�or area, have removed items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. i B. Cleaning: Before applyi�g coatings or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could im�air bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleamng and coating application so dust and other contaminates from the cleaning process will not f�ll on wet, newly coated surtaces. C. Surtace Preparation: �lean and prepare surtaces to be coated according to the manufacturer's instruction$ for each particular substrate condition and as specified. �I 1. Provide barrier coa�s over incompatible primers, or remove and reprime. Notify the Architect in writing� of problems anticipated when using the specified finish-coat material with substr�tes primed by others. 2. Cementitious Surta es: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and similar surfaces� to receive special coatings. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, a d release agents. Roughen, as required, to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealer� have been used to improve concrete curing, use mechanical methods to prepare Surtace. a a. Use abrasive ,blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the coating system manufacturer. I b. Determine all�alinity and moisture content of surfaces to be coated by pertorming ap�ropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish coats to lister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not apply coatings lover surfaces where the moisture content exceeds that permitted in the manufac�urer's printed directions. i 3. Ferrous Metal: Clea� ungalvanized ferrous metal surtaces that have not been shop- coated; remove oil, rease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanica cleaning methods that comply with the recommendations of the Steel Structures Paint ng Council. I a. Blast-clean ste 1 surtaces as recommended by the coating system manufacturer and according t� the requirements of SSPC Specification SSPC-SP 6. b. Touch-up shop=applied prime coats that have been damaged and bare areas. . Wire-brush, sol�ent clean, and touch-up with the same primer as the shop coat. 4. Nonferrous Metal Sur�aces: Clean nonferrous and galvanized surtaces according to the manufacturer's ins�ructions for the type of service, metal substrate, and application required. i I . 052299 �I SPECIAL COATINGS 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP � � PAGE 09800-6 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROV�MENTS � � � � L+�J L�'J L�J � � � � � � u L*J �� ,J I�� L�J � D. Material Preparation: Carefully mix � and prepare materials according to the coating manufacturer's directions. � � � � 3.3 � � � � � � � � D Q n l�J� � s r., 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of coatings according to the manufacturer's directions. , 2. Stir materials before applying to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surtace film into the material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain the coating material before usir�g. 3. Use only the type of thinners approved by the manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identifying each coat where multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. � APPLICATION A. General: Apply special coatings by brush, roller, spray, squeegee, or other applicators according to the manufacture�'s directions. Use brushes best suited for the material being applied. Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 1. Do not apply coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to forming a durable coating film. � Z. Coating colors, surtace treatments, and finishes are indicated in the Schedules. 3. Provide finish coats compatible with the primers used. 4. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Where sanding is required, according to the manufacturer's directions, sand between applications to produce a smooth, even surface. 5. When undercoats or other conditions show through the final coat, apply additional coats until the cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to edges, corners, crevices, welds, exposed fasteners, and similar surfaces to ensure that they rec�ive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surtaces. 6. The term "exposed surtaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. a. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment the same as similar exposed surtaces. b. Coat the back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surtaces. c. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch-up painted. 7. Where isolated nonferrous metal, plastic, or fiberglass parts are associated with equipment or piping, use the coating system for the adjacent connected surfaces. Do not coat handrails, gratings, frames, or hatches. B. Scheduling Coating: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for coating as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. OS2299 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP � COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS SPECIAL COATINGS PAGE 09800-7 r�I I C. �� 1. - Allow sufficient drXing time between successive coats. Do not recoat until the coating has dried so it fe�ls firm and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and wher�e appiying another coat does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. � � �I Application Procedures: �Apply coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to the manufacturer's direictions. I 1. Brushes: Use brus es best suited for the material applied. 2. Rollers: Use roller� of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: � Use spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for th� material and texture required. I Minimum Coating Thickr�ess: Apply each material no thinner than the manufacturer's recommended spreading � rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Block Fillers: Apply bloc�C fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. ; ' - I F. Prime Coats: Before appl �ying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to the material required to be coated or finished that has not been prime-coated by others. i . Recoat primed and I sealed substrates where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in tf�e first coat to ensure a finish coat with no bum-through or other defects caused by in�ufficient sealing. G. Brush Application: Brush-�ut and work brush coats into surfaces in an even film. Eliminate cloudiness, spotting, holid ys, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface impertections. Neatly draw�glass lines and color breaks. I 1. Apply primers and f�st coats by brush unless the manufacturer's instruotions permit using mechanical ap licators. H. Mechanical Applications: �se mechanical methods to apply coating when permitted by the manufacturer's recommend tions and governing regulations. ,I 1. Wherever using spray application, apply each coat to provide the equivalent hiding of brush-applied coats. Do not double-back with spray equipment building-up film thickness of two coats in one pass, unless recommended by the manufacturer. I. Completed Work: Match pproved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish, or recoat work not c mplying with specified requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLI A. The Owner reserves the righ� to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necess�ry during coating operations. 1. The Owner will engag� the services of an independent testing agency to sample the coating being used. �Samples� of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and �ertified in the presence of the Contractor. 2. The testing agency wi�l pertorm appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Owner: � 052299 ' 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP I COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROV�MENTS L�1 I�� L� � f] '� � '�l � � � ��J u �II� � L�I SPECIAL COATINGS � PAGE 09800-8 L�J � � � � � � � 3.5 � A. � Q 3.6 � � a. Quantitative materials analysis. b. Absorption. c. Accelerated weathering. d. Accelerated yellowness. e. Color retention. f. Alkali and mildew resistance. g. Abrasion resistance. h. A�pparent reflectivity. i. Washability. j. Dry Opacity. k. Recoating. I. Skinning. 3. If results show materials being used do not comply with requirements, the Contractor may be directed to stop work and remove noncompiying materials, pay for testing, recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials, or remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, upon recoa4ing with specified materials, the two coatings are not compatible. CLEANING Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from the site. 1. After completing work, clean glass and spattered surfaces. Remove sp�ttered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being coated or not, against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as acceptable to the Architect. Leave in an undamaged condition. �� 3.7 � A. B. 1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by othe�s to protect their work after completing coating operations. 2. At completion of other trades' construction activities, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surtaces. COATING SCHEDULE Provide the following coating systems for substrates indicated. Concrete: (Location noted on drawings) � 1. TwaComponent, Carbon Filled Epoxy Coating: Provide two coats over primer, with a total dry film thickness not less than 20 mils. � a. Primer Coat: Carbon Filled Epoxy Coating. 1) Sauereisen Conoweid No. 501. ��' � L�J b. First and Second Coats: Carbon Filled Epoxy Coating. 1) Sauereisen Conoglaze MA 2283, with non-skid finish on ali horizontal surtaces. 052299 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS SPECIAL COATINGS PAGE 09800-9 � I . C. Ferrous Metal: (All surta�es interior and exterior, exposed or covered unless noted otherwise) 1. Pigmented, Polyu ethane Coating: Provide one base coat and one finish coat of faetory-formulated pigmented, polyurethane coating. a. First Coat: f�olyurethane-enamel finish coat. 2j 3) 4) 5) 6) � Carbo n: Devo : Glidde�n: Porterk PPG: ( S-W: I Sanitile C.B. Base. 12735 Tru-Giaze Epoxy Primer. 5295/5299 Glidden Polyamide Epoxy. 4351 M.C.R-43 High Buiid Semi-Gloss Epoxy. 97-800 Series Pitthane Acrylic-Aliphatic Urethane. Hi-Build Aliphatic Polyurethane, 665 SeriesJB60V. 7) Tnem�c: , Series 69 Hi-Build Epoxo4ine II. b. Second Coat# Polyurethane-enamel finish coat. 1) Carbol�: Sanitile 550 Finish Aliphatic Polyester , , Polyurethane. 2) Devoe� 369-K-�CXX Devthane 269 Aliphatic Ucethane I Gloss Enamel. 3) Glidder�: 6200 Glid-Thane Two Acrylic Polyurethane. 4) Porter: � 4610 Hythane Acrylic Aliphatic Polyurethane. 5) PPG: ( 97-800 Series Pitthane Acrylic-Aliphatic ( Urethane. 6) S-W: Hi-Build Aliphatic Polyurethane, 665 � Series/660V2. 7) Tneme�: Series 74 8� 75 Endura-Shield. Ferrous Metal: (AI1 surface�a of equipment and ferrous surfaces of submerged or intermittently submerged in potable water, utility water, and wastewater including al4 surfaces lower than 2 feet above high water leve in hydraulic structures, and all surfaces inside enclosed hydraulic structures and vents, exc uding shop-coated valves, couplings, and pumps. All ferrous surtaces of sluice gates, fl p gates, and shear gates, including wall thimbles. Buried surfaces that are not indicated to be�oated elsewhere.) I 1. Two-Component, Arrline Cured Epoxy: Provide three coats with total dry film thickness not less than 16 mils:) a. Prime Coat, Fi�st, Second and Third Coats: 1) Ameron:� Ameron 395. 2) Tnemec� Tnemec 139 C. Other Ferrous Metals, No -Ferrous Metal, Plastic, and Fiberglass: (All exposed surfaces interior and exterior, unless�oted otherwise) 1. Pigmented, Polyurettiane Coating: Provide one base coat and one finish coat of factory-fo�mulated, pi�mented, polyurethane coating. a. First Coat: Pol�urethane-enamel finish coat. 1) Carboln: � Sanitile C.B. Base. � 2) Devoe: i 12735 Tru-Glaze Epoxy Primer. 052299 SPECIAL COATINGS 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY Wf'P I ` PAGE 09800-10 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROV�MENTS � � L�J � �� lJ �' l�' L�J u � � L�"J i�� LJ � � �•J � � � �� '�� LiJ � L�J � � L�J '� �� J � B. . Fiberglass Stair Treads: 1-1/2 inch thick pultruded polyester resin base grating treads with integral non-slip nosings. • ' C. Fiberglass Gratings: Pultruded polyester resin base FRP grating with minimum glass content of 70% by volume, and assembled with mechanically interlocked cross bars and bearing bars, maintaining full structural integrity of the bearing bars. Cross bars shall be flush with top surtace of grating and have a non-skid coating. 2.2 FASTENERS i4. B Solid Molded fiberglass-composite connectors Stainless steel fasteners. C. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assemblies of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.3 1. Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs to accommodate slopes to drain in finished traffic surfaces. � B. Stair Framing: Fabricate stringers of structural fiberglass composite channels, plates, or a combination thereof. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers. Construct platforms of structural fiberglass composite section headers and miscellaneous framing members. Bolt headers to stringers; and bolt newels and framing members �o stringers and headers D, E. F. 2.4 Fiberglass composite Floor Plate Treads and Platforms: Provide raised pattern fiberglass composite floor plate in pattem indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard patterns. � Floor Grating Treads and Platforms: Provide pattems, spacing, and bar sizes as required. Fabricate grating platforms with nosing matching that on grating treads at all landings. Provide toe plates at open-sided edges of grating platform. FIBERGLASS COMPOSITE PIPE HANDRAILS AND RAILING SYSTEMS A. General: Fabricate pipe handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of pipe, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Provide wall retums at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. C. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnections of pipe and attachment of handrails 052299 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS FIBERGLASS COMPOSITE-FRAMED STAIRS A. General: Construct stairs to conform to sizes and arrangements indicated Provide complete stair assemblies, including fiberglass composite framing, hangers, columns, handrails, railing systems, newels, balusters, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates, or other components necessary for the support of stairs and platforms, and as required to anchor and contain the stairs on the supporting structure. .. FIBERGLASS COMPOSITE STAIRS PAGE 06610-3 � ( ' ( and railing systems to oth�r work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handraiis and raili�g systems to concrete or masonry work. � PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION ( ' I A. Coordinate and furnish anch rages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for iristalling ancho ages, including concrete inserts, weld plates, and anchor bolts. Coordinate delivery of such it ms to Project site. 3.2 INSTALLATfON, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Cons�ruction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing fibergl ss composite stairs to in-place construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete and ma'Sonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors as required. � � B, Cutting, Fitting, and Ptaceme�t: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing fiberglass composite stairs. �et units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surtaces level, plunib, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. i C. Fit exposed connections accur�tely together to form hairline joints. 3.3 INSTALLING FIBERGLASS COMPOSITE PIPE RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS A. Adjust handrails and railing s stems prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts a spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loadings. Plumb posts in each �li�ection. B. Secure handrails to wall with v�all brackets and end fittings. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside ace of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, t spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets and wall retum fittings o building construction as follows: � II ENI� OF SECTION 06610 �I ' �� . �� I '1� I � � L�J j�� t � � � C�'!l � l�J � L�J LJ � � L"' L�!J 052299 . ( FIBERGLASS COMPOSITE STAIRS 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 06610-4 a COAGUTANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEM�NTS I � �wJ L�J � L�J L�J � � � �' L�' L'�J L�' L! L�J L' I�j SECTION 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 n B. 1.3 A. B. 1.4 SUMMARY This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surtaces and nontraffic horizontal surtaces as indicated below: a. Joints between precast concrete units. b. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. c. Other joints as required. 2. Interior joints in vertical surtaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior wails. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances. d. Other joints as required. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 13 Section "Pre-Engineered Concrete Building" for sealing joints in exterior walis. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Drywall" for sealing concealed perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission. 3. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Panels" for sealing edge moldings at perimeter of ' acoustical ceilings. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no staining or deterioration of joint substrates. SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 � Specification Sections. B. Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required. l�J l�J 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS JOINT SEALANTS PAGE 07901-1 L-�.J C. D. E. F. 1.5 A. B. 1.6 A. B. C. - II 1. Certification by joint Sealant manufacturer that sealants plus the primers and cleaners required for sealant i�stallation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds. � Samples for initial selectio',n purposes in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of strips of actua, products showing fuli range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. � Samples for verification pur oses of each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealant sampies in 1/2-inc�wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material matching the appearance oflexposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. • I Certificates from manufactyrers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply with specification requirements a�hd are suitable for the use indicated. Compatibility and adhesion t� st reports from elastomeric sealant manufacturer indicating that materials forming joint su�strates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion ith joint sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to �Sealant pertormance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needec�� to obtain adhesion. DELIVERY, STORAGE, ANO� HANDLING I Deliver materials to Project� site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, pro�u�t name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing iristructions for multicomponent materials. Store and handle materials i� compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage� due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. II PROJECT CONDITIONS I � Environmental Conditions: following conditions: � � ��I LJ �� *J � L�J I,� � L�`J I ' I�o not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the � 1. When ambient and sub$trate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealant manufactu��er. 2. When ambient and su trate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealant manufactur r or below 40 deg F(4.4 deg C). 3. When joint substrates ar�e wet. Joint Width Conditions: Do n�t proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than allowed by joint s�alant manufacturer fqr application indicated. I Joint Substrate Conditions: � Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of intert�ring with their adhesion are removed frnm joint substrates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL 101598 �I 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMIENTS � � � �� i �J � JOINT SEALANTS � PAGE 07901-2 D L�J O L�J � � l� L�J L#J � � L■J L*J L�J � � LJ A. � Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatibie with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. 2.2 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing elastomeric sealants that comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated on each Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet at end of this Section, including those requirements . referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses. SOLVENT-RELEASE-CURING JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Sealant: Manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing acrylic terpolymer sealant complying with AAMA 808.3 or FS TT-S-00230 or both, with capability when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the following percentage change in joint width existing at time nf application and remain adhered to joint substrates indicated for Project without failing cohesively: 1. 12-1/2 percent movement in both extension and compression,for a total of 25 percent. B C. Butyl Sealant: Manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant complying with ASTM C 1085 and formulated with minimum of 75 percent solids to be nonstaining, paintable, and have a tack-free time of 24 hours or less. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, solvent-release-curing joint sealants that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acrylic Sealant: a. "60+Unicrylic," Pecora Corp. b. "PTI 738," Protective Treatments, Inc. c. "PTI 767," Protective Treatments, Inc. d. "Mono," Tremco, Inc. 2.4 2. Butyl Sealant: a. "BC-158," Pecora Corp. b. "PTI 757," Protective Treatments, Inc. c. "Sonnebom Multi-Purpose Sealant," ChemRex, Inc. d. "Tremco Butyl Sealant," Tremco, Inc. LATEX JOINT SEALANTS Sonneborn Building Products Div., � A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable latex sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation without failing either adhesively or cohesively. �� l�J'' 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS JOINT SEALANTS PAGE 07901-3 J � B. Acrylio-Emulsion Sealant: f�rovide product complying with ASTM C 834 that accommodates joint movement of not mor� than 5 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 10 percent. I � C. Silicone Emulsion Sealant: ' Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 and, except for weight loss measured pe� ASTM C 792, with ASTM C 920 that accommodates joint movement of not more than� 25 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 50 percent. � I D. Available Products: Subjec� to compliance with requirements, latex joint sealants that may be incorporated in the Work,nclude, but are not limited to, the following: Acrylic-Emulsion Seal�nt: I a. "AC-20," Pecoral Corp. b. "Sonolac," Sonn'eborn Buiiding Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. c. "Tremco Acrylic�Latex 834," Tremco, Inc. 2.5 r_� B C. 2.6 2. Silicone-Emulsion Sea4ant: a. "Trade Mate Pai�table Glazing Sealant," Dow Corning Corp. I ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALA TS Acoustical Sealant: Manufa turer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 �nd the following requirements: 1. Product is effective in I',reducing airbome sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM � 90. Acoustical Sealant for Conce�led Joints: Manufaeturers standard, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to red�ce transmission of airbome sound. I ' Available Products: Subject �o compliance with requirements, acoustical joint sealants that may be incorporated in the W�rk inciude, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant: �� a. "SHEETROCK A�oustical Sealant," United States Gypsum Co. b. "AC-20 FTR Aco�stical and Insulation Sealant," Pecora Corp. I 2. Acoustical Sealant for Cpncealed Joints: . I a. "BA-98," Pecora �orp. b. "Tremco Acoustic�l Sealant," Tremco, Inc. I TAPE SEALANTS ' I A. Tape Sealant: Manufacturer's �standard, solvent-free, butyl-based tape sealant with a solids content of 100 percent formulated to be nonstaining, paintable, and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surtaces with o� without reinforcement thread to prevent stretch and packaged o� rolis with a release paper on �one side. 101598 � 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP f COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEIV�ENTS I � IJ L�J �� II� �� L�J � �� L�I L�J � JOINT SEALANTS � PAGE 07901-4 � L�J ��l � u � 2.7 � � l�J L�J u D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surtaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer. Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant- substrate tests and field tests. C. Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with � ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to -26 deg F(-32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and othervvise contribute to optimum sealant pertormance. L�J � �l � L•] �I L�� B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, tape sealants that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. "Extru-Seal Tape," Pecora Corp. 2. "Shim-Seal 7ape," Pecora Corp. 3. "PTI 606," Protective Treatments, Inc. 4. "Tremco 440 Tape," Tremco, Inc. 5. "MBT-35," Tremco, Inc. JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint filiers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth and othen+vise contribute to producing optimum sealant pertormance: 1. Open-cell polyurethane foam. 2. Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, nonoutgassing in unruptured state. 3. Proprietary, reticulated, closed-cell polymeric foam, nonoutgassing, with a density of 2.5 pcf and tensile strength of 35 psi per ASTM D 1623, and with water absorption less than 0.02 gms/cc per ASTM C 1083. 4. Any material indicated above. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surtaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming in any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surtaces, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surtaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 101598 - JOINT SEALANTS � 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP , PAGE 07901-5 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS L�J 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surtace Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the foliowing requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surtace dirt, and frost. 2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous joint substrate surtaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. � 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surtaces of ceramic tile, and other nonporous surtaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of intertering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surtaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. � 3.3 A. B. INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: 101598 JOINT SEALANTS 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 07901-6 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS - � � � � � � � L� L�J � � l�� L!� �� C� �� l�■I � � l+�l � � � � � � l�1 � L�J � � � 1. Install joint fille�s of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectionai shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that aliow optimum sealant movement capability. a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint filiers. � b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. c. Remove absorbent joint fiilers that have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry materiai. 2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used between sealants and joint fillers or back of joints. E. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning . or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surtaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surtaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 2. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. Provide flush joint configuration, per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193, where indicated. a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints. Provide recessed joint configuration, per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193, of recess depth and at locations indicated. G. Installation of Preforrned Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, and to comply with sealant manufacturer's directions for installation methods, materials, and tools that produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in conformance with sealant manufacturer's recommendations. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. �3.5 PROTECTION u � L�J L� � A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from constnaction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such . protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that and installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS JOINT SEALANTS PAGE 07901-7 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT DATA SHEET 1. Elastomeric Joint Sealant Designation: ES1 A. Base Polymer: Polysulfide , B. Type: S (single component). C. Grade: NS (nonsag). D. Class: 12-1/2. � E. Use[s] Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). F. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates � indicated. 2. Elastomeric Joint Sealant Designation: ES2 A. Base Polymer: Urethane. B. Type: S (single component). � C. Grade: NS (nonsag). '' D. Class: 12-1/2. E. Use[s] Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). F. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated. 3. Elastomeric Joint Sealant Designation: ES3 A. Base Polymer: Neutral-curing silicone. � B. Type: S (single comPonent). C. Grade: NS (nonsag). D. Class: 25. �6 E. Use[s] Related to Exposure: T(traffic). F. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A,. END OF SECTION 07901 101598 JOINT SEALANTS 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 07901-8 a COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS � �,I� L�J � CI �] � l� �' L� LJ l�l I�I �!1 L!� �� I� � � � 3) Glidden: 5295/5299 Glidden Polyamide Epoxy. 4) Porter: 4351 M.C.R-43 High Build Semi-Gloss Epoxy. 5) PPG: 97-800 Series Pitthane Acrylic-Aliphatic Urethane. 6) S-W: Hi-8uild Aliphatic Polyurethane, 665 Series/B60V. 7) Tnemec: Series 69 Hi-Buiid Epoxoline II. b. Second Coat: Polyurethane-enamel finish coat. 1) Carboln: Sanitile 550 Finish Aliphatic Polyester Polyurethane. 2) Devoe: � 369-K-�CXX Devthane 269 Aliphatic Urethane Gloss Enamel. 3) Giidden: 6200 Glid-Thane Two Acrylic Polyurethane. 4) Porter: 4610 Hythane Acrylic Aliphatic Polyurethane. 5) PPG: 97-800 Series Pitthane Acrylic-Aliphatic Urethane. 6) S-W: Hi-Build Aliphatic Polyurethane, 665 Series/660V2. 7) Tnemec: Series 74 & 75 Endura-Shield. D. Aluminum Surfaces: use aluminum metal isolation. E. Polyvinyl chloride plastic piping, interior and exterior, or in structures, not submerged: Use acrylic latex as specified under Division 9 Section "Painting." END OF SECTION 09800 052299 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM lMPROVEMENTS SPECIAL COATINGS PAG� 08800-11 L�J � � ' PART 1 - GENERAL t�l u � � � L� Ll � LJ � C LiJ � I ■J 1.1 1.2 SECTION 09900 - PAINTING RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Suppiementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. �7 C. This Section includes surtace preparation and field painting of the following items in the Chemical Building: 1. Expased exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Surtace preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surtaces, finished metal surtaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. 2. K� 4. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Architectural woodwork and casework. b. Light fixtures. c. Distribution cabinets. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Furred areas. b. Ceiling plenums. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Copper. • e. Bronze and brass. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. � 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PAINTING PAGE 09900-1 � I�' 5. � Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. � D. Related Sections include the following: 1.3 1. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation for gypsum board. 3. Division 9 Section "Special Coatings" for industrial paints and maintenance and special coatings. 4. Divisions 15 and 16: Painting of inechanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions 15 and 16, respe�tively. DEFINITIONS R. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1.4 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 3. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 4. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen iinish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 5. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers. � C. 1. 2. 3. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coaiing, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufa�turer's catalog �umber and general classification. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. � Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations conlrofling use of vofatile organic compounds (VOCs). L'7 � � � �� L�J l�d LJ � I� l�l `� Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacture�'s color charts showing the full range of colors n available for each type of finish-coat material indicated. v 1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, cofor, and t�xture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materiats and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each sample for location and application. 101598 t PAIN7ING 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 09900-2 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS u L'�l �, � � � I�1 I#1 � � � � � ��I � � LJ � Submit Sampfes on the foffowing substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only: a. Concrete: Provide two 4-inch- (100-mm-) square samples for each color and finish. b. Concrete Masonry: Provide two 4-by-8-inch (100-by-200-mm) sampies of masonry, with mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color. c. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4-inch- (100-mm-) square samples of flat metal and two 8-inch- (200-mm-) long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabiiities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.5 A. B. 1.6 A. B QUALITY ASSURANCE Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service pertormance. , Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following informatin: 1.30-UProduct name or titte of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. • 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F(7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materiats and residue. � 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are � protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. � 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS LiJ !t! � L�J A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F(10 and 32 deg C). B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surtaces to be painted and surcounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F(7.2 and 35 deg C). 101598 PAINTING 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 09900-3 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS L�l C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F(3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surtaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in the paint schedules. ' � I�I � � f�l [+'I B. Manufacturers Names: The foltowing manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by � use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses: , 1. Devoe & Raynolds Co. (Devoe). 2. Fuller-O'Srien Paints (Fuller). 3. Glidden Co. (The) (Glidden). 4. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore). 5. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG). 6. Pratt & Lambert, Inc. (P & L). 7. Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-V1l). 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturers best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint-materia{ containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivaient products of other manufacturers. Fumish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: Match colors indicated by reference to manufacturer's color designations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be pertormed for campliance with paint application requirements. 101598 PAINTING 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 09900-4 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS � � � �� l�] � � l�"J � i� E�7 � � � 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and a surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. i�l � {� 3.2 E.,� 1�� B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. � PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessoriss, piates, machined surtaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surtace preparation and painting. • B. Cleaning: Before appiying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of � substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cieaning. [�J � ,L�1 � � � u 1 ef � � Schedute cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surtaces. C� 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstail items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surtaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement �anel surtaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methads of surtace preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surtaces by pertorming appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and bum, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cteaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. a. Touch up bare areas and shop-appli�d prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufaaturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. . 101598 PAINTING 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 09900-5 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS LJ l�l D. Materials Preparation: , Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's wririen instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign matesials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir �surtace film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer,and only within recommended limits. 3.3 A. L= C� APPLICATION General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint cotors, surtace treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surtaces" includes areas visibie when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. M 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and fumiture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removabls or hinged covers to match exposed surtaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or othenaise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. 1f sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not �ecoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not defo►m or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufactu�er's written instructions. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surtace or item being painted. LJ �� L�� L�J � � � � � � � � � � 101598 PAINTING � 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 09900-6 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTs O C 1 u � � �� ,� L�J � l�1 L�J l�J � � 1�7 �� 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray EquipmenX: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as �recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Biock Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. � F. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to mate�ial that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surtaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. G. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Compietely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, o}�aque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surtace imperfections will not be acceptable. H. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface impertections. 3.4 A. 3.5 A. B. 3.6 A. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. CLEANING Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surtaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. PROTECT{ON Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to prote�t their wo�k after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. EXTERIOR PA{NT SCHEDULE Concrete: Provide the following finish systems over exterior concrete: 1. Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PAINTING PAGE 09900-7 r i� � a Q � Primer: Alkali-resistant, exterior, acrylic-latex primer appiied at spreading rate � recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 1) Devoe: 2) Fuller: 3) Gfidden: 4) Moore: 5) PPG: 6) P & L: � 1502 Wonder-Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex House Paint Primer. 220-17 Pigmented Concrete and Masonry Primer Sealer. 6700 Series Spred Ultra Exterior Satin Latex House and Trim Paint thinned with one-half pint (0.237 L) of water per 1 gal. (3.785 L). Moore's Latex Exterior Primer #102. 6-603 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Alkali Resistant Primer. Z/F 1001 Suprime "1" Multi-Purpose 100 Percent Acrylic Primer. �,� � � � First and Second Coats: Low-luster (eggshell or satin), exterior, acrylic-latex paint applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a � total dry film thickness of not less than 2.3 mils (0.058 mm). � 1) , Devoe: 16XX Wonder-Shietd Exterior Acrylic Latex Satin House and Trim Paint. 2) Fuller: 261-XX Eggshell Sheen Latex House and Trim Paint. 3) Glidden: 6700 Series Spred Ultra Exterior Satin Latex House and Trim Paint. 4) Moore: MoarGard Latex House Paint #1 �3. 5) PPG: . 76 Line Sun-Proof Exterior House & Trim Acrylic Satin Latex. 6) P& L: Z/F 1800 Series Aqua-Shell Exterior Latex Eggshell Paint. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop-primed items. 1. Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 1) Devoe: 2) Fuller: 3) Glidden: 4) Moore: 5) PPG: 6) P & L: � � L�J � �J � , 13101 Mirrolac Rust Penetrating Metal Primer. 621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer. � 5205 Glid-Guard Tank 8� Str.uctural Primer, Red. IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163. 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer, Red. � SID 1009 Suprime "9" Interior/Exterior Alkyd Metal Primer. b. First and Second Coat: Low-sheen (eggshell or satin), e�erior, acrylic-latex paint applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry �Im thickness of not less than 2.8 mils (0.071 mm). � r� i 101598 PAINTING �{ 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WT'P PAGE 09900-8 t.� COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS � � � � � �� t�J � � � L1 LI l!�J � � � 1;' �� 1) Devoe: 2) Fuller: 3) Glidden: 4) Moore: 5) PPG: 6) P & L: � 16XX Wonder-Shield Exterior Latex Satin House and Trim Paint. 261-XX Eggshell Sheen Latex House and Trim Paint. 6,700 Series Spred Ultra Exterior Satin Latex House and Trim Paint. MoorGard Latex House Paint #103. 76 Line Sun-Proof Exterior House & Trim Acrylic Satin Latex. ZJF 4200 Series Accolade Exterior Eggsheil. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 miis (0.033 mm). 1) 3) 4) 5) 6) Devoe: 13101 Mirrolac Rust Penetrating Metai Primer. Fuller: 621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer. Glidden: 5205 Glid-Guard Tank & Structural Primer, Red. Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163. PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust lnhibitive Steel Primer. P& L: S/D 1009 Suprime "9" InteriorlExterior Alkyd Metal Primer. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.068 mm). Devoe: Fuller: Glidden: Moore: PPG: P&L: 17XX Wonder-Shield Semi-Gloss Exterior Acrylic Latex House and Trim Paint. 664-XX Weather King II Semi-Gloss House & Trim Paint. 6600 Series Spred Ultra Exterior Gloss Latex House & Trim Paint. MnorGlo Latex House & Trim Paint #096. 78 Line Sun-Proof Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex House and.Trim Paint. ZJF 3100 Seriss Aqua Royal Latex House & Trim Finish. 1) 2) 3) 5) 6) 3. Full-Gloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry frlm thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 1) Devoe: 13101 Mirrolac Rust Penetrating Metal Primer. 2) Fuller: 621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer. 3) G{idden: 5205 Glid-Guard Tank & Structural Primer, Red. 4) Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163. 5) PPG: 8-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer. 6) P 8� L: S 4551 Tech-Gard High Pe►formance Rust- lnhibitor Primer. 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PAINTING PAGE 09900-9 �� 7) S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2JB50W1. b. First and Second Goats: Full-gloss, exterior, alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate recommended�by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). . 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd-Urethane Gloss Enamel. 312-XX Heavy-Duty Industrial Maintenance Enamel. ` 4500 Series Glid-Guard Aikyd Industriai Enamei. Impervo Enamel #133. 6-282 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Gloss-Oil Enamel. S 4500 Series Tech-Gard Maintenance Gioss Enamel. Industrial Enamel B-54 Series. 1) Devoe: 2) Fuller: 3) Glidden: 4) Moore: 5) PPG: 6) P & L: 7) S-W: C� Deep-Color, Fufl-Gloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 1) Devoe: 2) Fuller: 3) Glidden: 4) Moore: 5) PPG: 6) P & L: 7) S-W: � 41820 Bar-Ox Alkyd Shop/Field Primer. � 621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer. � 5205 Giid-Guard Tank & Structural Primer, Red. IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163. 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust lnhibitive Primer, Red. � S 4551 Tech-Gard High Pertormance Rust Inhibitive Primer. Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1. b. First and Second Coats: Deep-color, full-gloss, exterio�, alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 3.7 mils (0.094 mm). 1) Devoe: 155 All-Weather Exterior Afkyd Gloss House and Trim Paint, Ultra Deep Base. 2) Fuller: �� 660-XX Weather King Alkyd House & Trim Paint. 3) Glidden: 1901 Series Spred House Dura-Gloss Oil House ` & Trim Paint. 4) Moore: Moore's House Paint #110. 5) PPG: 1 Line Sun-Proof Exterior Gloss Oil House & Trim Paints, Deeptone or Rustic Tinting Base. 6) P& L: S/D 1100 Series Effecto Enamel. 7) S-W: SWP Exterior Gloss Paint A-2 Series. C. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated (galvanized) metal surfaces: 1. Full-Gloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. 101598 PAINTING 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 09900-10 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS � .l�'1 Lri [�; � � L�' L�l I�f LJ � 1�'1 L�J � !�'J � � �� 1 0 � [�l �i l� L:'J � � L�� L�� 3.8 I�l l� � � , �J fi' rL�.l l�l A. a. Q Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacture� to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 1) Devoe: 8502/8�20 Mirrolac-WB Interior/Exterior Waterborne Fiat DTM Primer and Finish. 2) Fuller: 621-05 Blox-Rust Latex Metal Primer. 3) Giidden: 5205 Glid-Guard Tank � Structural Primer, Red. 4) Moore: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer #155. 5) PPG: 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel. 6) P& L: 7JF 1003 Suprime "3" Interior/Exterior Latex Metal Primer. 7) S-W: Gaivite Paint B50W3. First and Second Coats: Full-gloss, exterior, alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not {ess than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm). 1) Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd-Urethane Gloss Enamel. 2) Fuller: 312-XX EPA Compliant Heavy-Duty Enamel. 3) Glidden: 4500 Series Giid-Guard Alkyd lndustrial Enamel. • 4) Moore: Impervo Enamel #133. 5) PPG: 6-282 Speedhide InterioNExterior Gloss-Oil Enamel. 6) P 8� L: S 4500 Series Tech-Gard Maintenance Gloss Ename{. 7) S-W: lndustrial Enamel B-54 Series. INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE Concrete and Masonry (Other than Concrete Masonry Units): Provide the foilowing paint systems over interior concrete and brick masonry surfaces: 1. Semigloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Alkali-resistant, alkyd- or latex-based, interior primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, appfied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). 1) Devoe: 51701 Wonder-Prime Interior All-Purpose Latex Primer Sealer & Vapor Bamer. 2) Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 3) Glidden: 5111 Spred Ultra Latex Primer-Sealer. 4) Moore: � Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer & Underbody #216. 5) PPG: 6-603 Speedhide InterioNExterior Acrylic Latex ' Alkali Resistant Primer. 6) P 8� L: Z/F 1001 Suprime "1" 100 Percent Acrylic Multi- Purpose Primer. 7) S-W: ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200. 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANi FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PAINTING PAGE 09900-11 � b. First and Second Coats: Odorless, semigloss, alkyd, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry fiim thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm}. 1) Devoe: . 2) Fuller: 3) Giidden: 4) Moore: 5) PPG: " 6) P & L: 7) S-W: 26XX Velour Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel. 206-XX Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel. UH 8400 Ultra Traditional Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel. Moore's Alkyd Dulamel #207. 27 Line Wallhide Low Odor Interior Enamel Wall and Trim Semi-Gloss Oil. S/D 5700 Cellu-Tone Aikyd Satin Enamel. Classic 99 interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel A- 40 Series. B. Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete masonry block units: � � 1. Semigloss, Aikyd-Enamel Finish: 2 fin'ish coats over an undercoat and a fiiled surface. a. Block Filler: High-pertormance, latex-based, block filler appiied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 5.0 mils (0.13 mm). 1) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) Devoe: Fuller: Glidden: Moore: PPG; P&L: S-W: 52902 Bloxfil 200 InteriodExterior Latex Block Filler. 280-00 Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler. 5317 Ultra-Hide Block Filler, Latex Interior- Exterior. Moorcraft tnterior & Exterior Block Filler #173. 6-7 Speedhide lnterior/Exterior Masonry Latex Block Filler. Z 98 Pro-Hide Plus Latex Block Filler. Heavy-Duty Block �iller 642W46. LJ �� I � � � L*'J � � � � a b. Undercoat: Interior, alkyd- or latex based, enamel undercoater, as recommended by the manufa�turer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate � recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 1) Devoe: 2) Fuller: 3) Glidden: 4) Moore: 5) PPG: 6) P&L: 7) S-W: � 26XX Velour Inlerior Alkyd Semi-Gfoss Enamel. 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. � UH 400 Ultra-Hide Alkyd Interior Enamel Undercoater. � Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 6-855 Speedhide lnterior Latex Enamel Undercoater. S/D 1012 Sup�me "12" Interior Alkyd Wall Primer. Classic 99 Interior/Exterior Semi-Gloss Alkyd Enamel A-40 Series. c. Finish Coat: Odorless, semigloss, alkyd, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacture� to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 101598 PAINTING 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP � PAGE 09900-12 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMEN7S � � � � � � `i � � L�J L�7 L�] L�' � � L' � L�J l*9 l� � ��J C� l� L!� � 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) � Devoe: 26XX Velour Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamef. Fuller. 206-XX Interior Alkyd Semi-Gioss Enamel. Glidden: UH 8400 Ultra Traditional Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel. Moore: Satin lmpervo #235. PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Low Odor Interior Enamel Wall and Trim Semi-Gloss Oii. P& L: S!D 5700 Series Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. S-W: Classic 99 Interior/Exterior Semi-Gloss Alkyd Enamel A-40 Series. C. Gypsum Board; Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Semigloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer. Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achisve a totaf dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). � 1) Devoe: 50801 Wonder-Tones Interior Vinyl Latex . Primer-Sealer. 2) Futier. 220-20 Pro-Tech interior Latex Wail Primer and Sealer. 3) Glidden: 5111 Spred Ultra Latex PMmer-Sealer. 4) Moore: Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer & Underbody #216. 5) PPG: 17-10 Quick-Dry Interior Latex Primer-Sealer. 6) P& L: Z/F 1001 Suprime "1" 100 Percent Acrylic Multi- , Purpose Primer. 7) S-W: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Wali Primer B28W200. b. First and Second Coats: Odorless, semigioss, alkyd, interior enamel appfied at spreading rate recammended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm). 1) Devoe: 26XX Velour InteriorAlkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel. 2) Fuller: 206-XX Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel. 3) Glidden: UH 8400 Uftra Traditional Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel. 4) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Dulamei #207. 5) PPG: 27 Line Wailhide Low Odor Interior Enamel Wall and Trim Semi-Gioss Oil. 6) P 8� L: SiD 5700 Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. 7) S-W: Classic 99 interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Ename{ A- 40 Series. D. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Semigioss, Aikyd-Enamei Finish: One finish coat over an enamei undercoater and a - primer. a. Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibitive, alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate 101598 . 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM 1MPROVEMENTS PAINTING PAGE 09900-13 � f� recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 1) Devoe: 2) Fuller: � 3) Glidden: 4) Moore: 5) PPG: 6) P & L: 7) S-W: 0 13101 Mirrolac Rust Penetrating Metal Primer. 621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer. 5207 Glid-Guard Tank & Structural Primer, White. IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163. 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer. S 4551 Tech-Gard High Pertormance Rust Inhibitor Primer. Kem Kromik Metai primer 650N2/650W1. � ,� �',#� � b. Undercoat: Alkyd, interior enamel undercoat or semigloss, interior, alkyd- enamel finish coat, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, � applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 1) Devoe: 2) Fuiler: 3) Glidden: 4) Moore: 5) PPG: 8) P & L: 7) S-W: 26XX Velour interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel. 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. UH 8400 Ultra Traditional Alkyd Semi-Oloss Enamel. Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 6-6 Speedhide Interior Quick-Drying Enamel Undercoater. S/D 1011 Suprime "11" Interior Alkyd Wood Primer. ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel 634W200. c. Finish Coat: Odorless, semigloss, alkyd, interior enamei applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.4�mils (0.036 mm). 1) Devoe: ' 2) Fuiler. i 3) Glidden: � 2. 4) Moore: � 5) PPG: ' i i 6) P 8� L: 7) S-W: I �' Full-Gloss, Alkyd-Enam�i Finish: primer. , 26XX Velour Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel. 110-XX Fullerglo Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel. UH 8400 Ultra Traditional Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel. Satin Impervo #235. 27 Line Wallhide Low Odor Interior Enamel Wall and Trim Semi-Gloss Oil. S/D 5700 Celiu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamei. Classic 99 Interior/Exterior Semi-Gloss Alkyd Enamel A-40 Series. 2 finish coats over an enamel undercoater and a a. Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibitive, alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, appiied at spreading rate recommended by he manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (�0.038 mm). 1) Devoe: I i 13101 Mirrolac Rust Penetrating Metai Primer. 101598 j 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PAINTING � PAGE 09900-14 � � li] � � � �RJ [�/� � � � l!�1 �� ] c. 4) Moore: 5) PPG: 6) P & L: � S-W: 2) Fuller: 621-04 Biox-Rust Alkyd & Structural Metal Primer. 3) Glidden: 5207 Glid-Guard Tank � Structural Primer, White. 4) Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163. 5) PPG: 6-208 Speedhide InterioNExterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer. 6) P 8� L: S 4551 Tech-Gard High Pertormance Rust Inhibitor Primer. � S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer 650N2/B50W1. Undercoat: Alkyd, interior enamel undercoat or full-gloss, interior, alkyd-enamel �nish coat, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 miis (0.031 mm). 1) Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd-Urethane Gloss Enamel. 2) Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 3) Glidden: 4500 � Series Glid-Guard Alkyd Industrial Enamel. 4) Moore: Moore's Aikyd Enamel Underbody #217. 5) PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Interior Quick-Drying Enamel Undercoater. � 6) P& L: S/D 1001 Suprime "11" Interior Alkyd Wood Primer. 7) S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series. Finish Coat: Full-gloss, alkyd, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 1) Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd-Urethane Gloss Enamel. 2) Fuller: 312-XX EPA Compliant Heavy-Duty Enamel. 3) Glidden: 4500 Series Glid-Guard Alkyd Industrial Enamel. Impervo Enamel #133. 54 Line Pittsburgh Paints Gloss-Oil InteriodExterior Enamels. S/D 1100 Series Effecto Enamel. Industrial Enamel B-54 Series. END OF SECTION 09900 l�l � l�l !J �� 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PAINTING PAGE 09900-15 [� �� Ls' , � l�l � ��J � l�l !�' L�l [f' SECTION 10520 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide fire protection equipment and appurtenant WORK, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. All fire protection equipment shall be products of a single manufacturer. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Codes 1. National Fire Protection Association publications (NFPA), as referenced herein. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Literature: Manufacturer's literature, installation instructions, and details shall be submitted. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL , A. All fire prevention equipment and installation shall comply with the Code, NFPA Pamphlet No 10, and the Manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications. 22 MATERIALS . A. Flre Extinguisher Designated FE-2: Two (2) FE-2 fire extinguishers shall� be 20-pound minimum capacity, A.B.C. dry-chemical type with minimum UL rating of 20A:1206C. B. Fire Extinguisher Designated FE•3: Two (2) FE-3 fire extinguishers shall be 10-pound minimum capacity, Carbon Dioxide type with minimum UL rating of 10B:C. C. Bracket: Mounting brackets shall be specially designed for extinguisher. D. Other Materials: All other materials, not specifically described, but required for. a complete and proper installation of fire fighting devices shall be as selected by the CONTRACTOR, subject to the review of the ENGINEER. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire protection items shall be from the following manufacturers, or equal: 1. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. � MW-112795 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 10520-1 I 2. Potter-Roemer 3. General �Fire Extin�uisher Co. I PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 A. � 3.2 A. � C. I PRODUCT DELIVERY, �TORAGE, AND HANDLING Delivery of Materials: I Manufactured materiats shall be delivered in original unbroken packages, or containers, bearing the manufacturer's label with manufacturer's name, product description, and rating. � Storage: All materials sh�ll be carefully stored in an area which is protected from deleterious elements as recommende,d by the material manufacturer. Storage shall be in a manner that will prevent damage to the material and its finish. I LOCATIONS AND INSTAI�LATION Locations: Fire preventi�n equipment locations and mounting heights shall be verified with the Fire Marshall before installation and shall be installed where directed. If locations are not directed by the Fire Marsh�ll, the ENGINEER will direct locations. Installation: Installation sfiall be per NFPA Pamphlet No. 10 unless directed otherwise by the local Fire Marshall. , i Brackets: All fire extingui�shers shall be provided with and installed on brackets or brackets within cabinets. The CONTRACTOR shall block and reinforce walls to support the fire extinguishers. ` - END OF SECTION - � MVV-112795 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 10520-2 Q � � � � � � � � � � Q � � � � � � SECTION 11000 - EGIUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all equipment and appurtenant work, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all equipment except where otherwise indicated. 12 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. All equipment shall be in accordance with the following standards, as applicable and as indicated in each Section of these specifications: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. American Public Health Association (APHA). ' 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). � 5. American Water Works Association (AWWA). 6. American Sociery of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 7. American Welding Society (AWS). 8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 9. Federal Specifications (FS). 10. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 11. Manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications. 12. General Industry Safety Orders (OSHA). B. The following standards are referenced in this Section: ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250, and 800 ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Steel, Nickel Alloy, and Other Special Alloys ANSI B46.1 � Surface Texture ANSI S12.6 Method for the Measurement of the Real-Ear Attenuation of Hearing Protectors � 070198 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 1333018 — South Holly WTP D Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 11000-1 ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 ANSIIASME B31.1 ANSI/AWWA D100 AWWA C206 . ASTM A 48 ASTM A 108 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS General Purpose Pipe Threads (Inch) Power Piping Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe Gray Iron Castings Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Qualiry � l*`J L�J � � A. Shop Drawings: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish complete Shop Drawings for all � equipment, piping, valves, and controls in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Tools: The CONTRACTOR shall supply one complete set of special wrenches and other special tools necessary for the assembly, adjustment, and dismantling of the equipment. All , tools shall be of best quality hardened steel forgings with bright, finish wrench heads shall have work faces dressed to fit nuts. All tools shall be suitable for professional work and manufactured by a recognized supplier of professional tools such as Snap On, Crescent, Stanley, or equal. The set of tools shall be neatly mounted in a labeled tool box of suitable design provided with a hinged cover. C. Spare Parts: The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from the manufacturer and submit a list of suggested spare parts for each piece of equipment. After approval, CONTRACTOR shall furnish such spare parts suitably packaged, identified with the equipment number, and labeled. CONTRACTOR shall also furnish the name, address, and telephone number of the nearest distributor for each piece of equipment. All spare parts are intended for use by the OWNER, only, after expiration of the guaranty period. D. Torsional Analysis 1. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER a torsional and lateral vibration analysis of the following equipment, in accordance with Section 01300. The analysis shall be performed by a specialist experienced in this type of work and approved by the ENGINEER. a. Q � All engine drives. All blowers and compressors with drives of 100 horsepower and over. All vertical pumps with universal joints and extended shafts. All other equipment where indicated. 2. The torsional natural frequency of the drive train must be avoided by + 25 percent by any exciting frequency of the equipment, throughout the entire operating range. E. Vibration Analysis: In its Bid, the CONTRACTOR shall include at least finro Site visits of the above mentioned specialist during construction and testing of the equipment, to analyze and measure the amount of equipment vibration and make a written recommendation for keeping 070198 � EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 11000-2 �� '� �� L�J � � the vibration at a safe limit. � 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. tnspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: The CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate that all � , equipment meets the performance requirements. CONTRACTOR shall furnish the services of an experienced, competent, and authorized service representative of the manufacturer of each item of major equipment who shall visit the Site to perform the following tasks: l#J L�7 'r� � � 4. B. Costs: The costs of all inspection, startup, testing, adjustment, and instruction work performed by said facto .ry-trained representatives shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR at no increased cost to the OWNER. The OWNER will pay for costs of power and water. When available, the OWNER'S operating personnel will provide assistance in the field testing. � � 5. To instruct the OWNER's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment. Instruction shall include step-by-step trouble shooting procedures with all necessary test equipment. [�J � � � L+�J � l*! LJ � � � C. Public Inspection: It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to inform the local authorities, such as building and plumbing inspectors, fire marshall, OSHA inspectors, and others, to witness all required tests for piping, plumbing, fire protection systems, pressure vessels, safety systems, etc., to obtain all required permits and certificates, and pay all fees. D. Tolerances: Tolerances and clearances shall be as shown on the Shop Drawings and shall be closely adhered to. Machine work shall in all cases be of high-grade workmanship and finish, with due consideration to the special nature or function of the parts. Members without milled ends and which are to be framed to other steel parts of the structure may have a variation in the detailed length of not greater than 1/16-inch for members 30 feet or less in length, and not greater than 1/8-inch for members over 30 feet in length. E. Machine Finish: The type of finish shall be the most suitable for the application and shall be shown in micro-inches in accordance with ANSI B46.1. The following finishes shall be used: 1. 2. 3. Assist the CONTRACTOR in the installation of the equipment. To inspect, check, adjust if nec�ssary and approve the equipment installation. To start-up and field-test the equipment for proper operation, efficiency, and capaciry. To perform necessary field adjustments during the test period until the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory to the ENGINEER. Surface roughness not greater than 63 micro-inches shall be required for all surfaces in sliding contact. Surface roughness not greater than 250 micro-inches shall be required for� surfaces in contact where a tight joint is not required. Rough finish not greater than 500 micro-inches shall be required for other machined surfaces. 4. Contact surfaces of shafts and stems which pass through stuffing boxes and contact surfaces of bearings shall be finished to not greater than 32 micro-inches. 070198 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 11000-3 l�i F. Manufacturer's Experience: Equipment shall have a record of at least 5 years of successful, troublefree operation in similar applications, from the same manufacturer. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. High Noise Level Location: The CONTRACTOR shall provide one personal hearing protection station, as indicated herein, at each high noise level location. Locations are defined as follows: Outdoor Location: Any single equipment item or any group of equipment items that produce noise exceeding OSHA noise level requirements for a 2-hour exposure. Where such equipment is separated by a distance of more than 20 feet, measured between edges of footings, each group of equipment shall be provided with a separate hearing protection station. 2. Indoor Location: a. Any single equipment item, or any' group of equipment items, located within a single room not normally occupied, that produces noise exceeding OSHA noise level requirements for a 2-hour exposure. b. Any single equipment item, or any group of equipment items, located within a single�room normally occupied by workers, that produces noise exceeding OSHA noise level requirements for an 8-hour exposure. B. Personal Hearing Protection: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish three pairs of high attenuation hearing protectors in the original unopened packaging. The ear protectors shall be capable of ineeting the requirements of ANSI S12.6 and shall produce a noise level reduction of 25 dBA at a frequency of 500 Hz. The hearing protectors shall have fluid filled ear cushions and an adjustable, padded headband. The protectors shall be stored in a weatherproof, labeled, steel cabinet, furnished by the CONTRACTOR and mounted in an approved location near the noise producing equipment. C. Service Factors: Service factors shall be applied in the selection or design of inechanical power transmission components. Unless otherwise indicated, the following load classifications shall apply in determining service factors: � " Tvpe of Equipment Blower: Centrifugal or vane Lobe Load Classification Uniform Nloderate Shock Reciprocating Air Compressor: • Multi-Cylinder Single-Cylinder � Pump: Centrifugal or Rotary Reciprocating 070198 ' 1333018 — South Holly WTP • Coagulant Feed System Improvements Moderate Shock Heavy Shock Uniform Moderate Shock EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS PAGE 11000-4 � L�'J � �� L� L�] � L�] C�� L�'J L�J � � �� u � � � a � � � � D. LJ E. � Mixer: Constant Density Variable Density Flocculator or Clarifier Sludge Thickener Grit Handling Equipment Trash Rack Rake Crane or Hoist Uniform Moderate Shock Uniform Moderate Shock Moderate Shock Moderate Shock Moderate Shock For service factors of electric motors, see Division 16. Where Ioad classifications are not indicated, best modern practice shall be used. Welding: Unless otherwise indicated, all welding shall conform to the following: 1. Latest revision of ANSI/AWWA D100. 2. Latest revision of AVWVA C206. � 3. All composite fabricated steel assemblies which are to be erected or installed inside a � hydraulic structure, including any fixed or movable structural components of inechanical equipment, shall have continuous seal welds to prevent entrance of air or moisture. � � � L�J � I�� L�1 I�� 4. All welding shall be by the metal-arc method or gas-shielded arc method as described in the American Welding Society's "Welding Handbook" as supplemented by other pertinent standards of the AWS. Qualification of welders shall be in accordance with the AWS Standards governing same. 5. In assembly and during welding, the component parts shall be adequately clamped, supported, and restrained to minimi�e distortion and for control of dimensions. Weld reinforcement shall be as specified by the AWS code. Upon completion of welding, all weld splatter, flux, slag, and burrs left by attachments shall be removed. Welds shall be repaired to produce a workmanlike appearance, with uniform weld contours and dimensions. All sharp corners of material which � is to be painted or coated shall be ground to a minimum of 1/32-inch on the flat. F. Protective Coating: All equipment shall be painted or coated in accordance with Section 09800 - Protective Coating, unless otherwse indicated. Non-ferrous metal and corrosion- resisting steel surfaces shall be coated with grease or lubricating oil. Coated surfaces shall be protected from abrasion or other damage during handling, testing, storing, assembly, and shipping. G. Protection of Equipment: All equipment shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise protected from damage and moisture during shipment, handling, and storage. All equipment shall be protected from exposure to corrosive fumes and shall be kept thoroughly dry at all times. Pumps, motors, drives, electrical equipment, and other equipment having anti-friction or sleeve bearings shall be stored in weathertight storage facilities prior to installation. For extended storage periods, plastic equipment wrappers should be avoided, to prevent accumulation of condensate in gears and bearings. ' � 070198 � � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS PAGE 11000-5 H. � 2.2 Identification of Equipment Items: Each item of equipment shipped shall have a legible identifying mark corresponding to the equipment number for the particular item. Vibration Level: All equipment subject to vibration shall be provided with restrained spring- type vibration isolators or pads per manufacturer's written recommendations. Shop Fabrication: Shop fabrication shall be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the ENGINEER-approved shop drawings. Controls: All equipment and system controls shall be in accordance with Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND FOUNDATIONS A. Equipment Supports: All equipment supports, anchors, and restrainers shall be adequately designed for static, dynamic, wind, and seismic loads. The design horizontal seismic force shall be the greater of: that noted in the general structural notes or as required by the governing building code, or 10 percent of gravity. Submitted design calculations for equipment supports must bear the signature and seal of an engineer registered in the State wherein the project is to be built, unless otherwise indicated. B. Equipment Foundations: Equipment foundations shall be as per manufacturer's written recommendations. All mechanical equipment, tanks, control cabinets, etc., shall be mounted on minimum 3.5-inch high concrete bases, as shown on standard structural details, unless otherwise indicated. { C. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall be submitted for review in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. Shop Drawings will be considered incomplete unless clear, concise calculations are presented showing equipment anchorage forces and the capacities of the anchorage elements proposed by the CONTRACTOR. 2.3 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND GUIDES A. All pipe connections to equipment shall be supported, anchored, and guided to avoid stresses and loads on equipment flanges and equipment. Supports and hangers shall be in accordance � with Section 15006 - Pipe Supports. 2.4 FLANGES AND PIPE THREADS � A. All flanges on equipment and appurtenances provided under this Section shall conform to ANSI B16.1, Class 125; or B16.5, Class 150, unless otherwise indicated. All pipe threads shall � be in accordance with ANSI/ASME 61.20.1, and with Section 15000 - Piping, General. 2.5 COUPLINGS A. Flexible couplings shall be provided between the driver and the driven equipment to accommodate slight angular misalignment, parallel misalignment, end float, and to cushion shock loads. Where required for vertical shafts, 3-piece spacer couplings or universal type couplings for extended shafts shall be installed. `� � B. The CONTRACTOR shall have the equipment manufacturer select or recommend the size and � type of coupling required to suit each specific application. C. Taper-lock bushings may be used to provide for easy installatiori and removal on shafts of 070198 � EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 11000-6 � � � � D � � a � � � � � � � a a � various diameters. Universal type couplings shall be of the needle bearing type construction, equipped with commercial type grease fittings. SHAFTING A. General: All shafting shall be continuous between bearings and shall be sized to transmit the power required. Keyways shall be accurately cut in line. Shafting shall not be turned down at the ends to accommodate bearings or sprockets whose bore is less than the diameter of the shaft. All shafts shall rotate in the end bearings and shall be turned and polished, straight, and true. B. Materials: Shafting materials shall be appropriate for the type of service and torque transmitted. Environmental elements such as corrosive gases, moisture, and fluids shall be taken into consideration. Materials shall be as indicated unless furnished as part of an equipment assembly. 1. Low carbon cold-rolled steel shafting shall conform to ASTM A 108, Grade 1018. 2. 3. Medium carbon cold-rolled shafting shall conform to ASTM A 108, Grade 1045. Corrosion-resistant shafting shall be stainless steel or Monel, whichever is most suitable for the intended service. C. Differential Settlement: Where differential settlement befinreen the driver and the driven equipment may be expected, a shaft of sufficient length with 2 sets of universal type couplings shall be provided. 2.7 BEARINGS A. B. C. D. General: Bearings shall conform to the standards of the Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (AFBMA). To assure satisfactory bearing application, fitting practice, mounting, lubrication, sealing, static rating, housing strength, and other important factors shall be considered in bearing selection. All re-lubricatable type bearings shall be equipped with a hydraulic grease fitting in an accessible location and shall have sufficient grease capacity in the bearing chamber. All lubricated-for-life bearings shall be factory-lubricated with the manufacturer's recommended grease to insure maximum bearing life and best performance. E. Bearing Life: Except where otherwise indicated, all bearings shall have a minimum L-10 life � expectancy of 5 years or 20,000 hours, whichever occurs first. Where so specified, bearings shall have a minimum rated L-10 life expectancy corresponding to the type of, service, as follows: � � . Li� L�J 070198 � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS PAGE 11000-7 Tvpe of Service 1. 8-hour shift 2. 16-hour shift 3. Continuous Desian Life (vearsl y 10 10 10 L_10 Design Life (hours) (whichever comes first) 20,000 40,000 60,000 F. Bearing housings shall be of cast iron or steel and bearing mounting arrangement shall be as indicated or as recommended in the published standards of the manufacturer. Split-type housings may be used to facilitate installation, inspection, and disassembly. G 2.8 Sleeve-type bearings shall have a Babbitt or bronze liner. GEARS AND GEAR DRIVES A. Unless otherwise indicated, gears shall be of the helical or spiral-bevel type, designed and manufactured in accordance with AGMA Standards, with a minimum service factor of 1.7, a minimum L-10 bearing life of 60,000 hours, and a minimum efficiency of 94 percent. Worm gears shall not be used, unless specifically approved by the ENGINEER. B. All gear speed reducers or increasers shall be of the enclosed rype, 'oil- or grease-lubricated and fully sealed, with a breather to allow air to escape but keep dust and dirt out. The casing shall be of cast iron or heavy duty steel construction with lifting lugs and arr�inspection cover for each gear train. An oil level sight glass and an oil flow indicator shall be provided, arranged for easy reading. C. Gears and gear drives as part of an equipment assembly shall be shipped fully assembled for field installation. D. Material selections shall be left to the discretion of the manufacturer, provided the above AGMA values are met. Input and output shafts shall be adequately designed for the service and load requirements. Gears shall be computer-matched for minimum tolerance variation. The output shaft shall have 2 positive seals to prevent oil leakage. E. Oil level and drain location relative to the mounting arrangement shall be easily accessible. Oil coolers or heat exchangers with all required appurtenances shall be furnished when necessary. F. Where gear drive input or output shafts have to connect to couplings or sprockets supplied by others, the CONTRACTOR shall have the gear drive manufacturer supply matching key taped to the shaft for shipment. � 2.9 A. B. C. DRIVE CHAINS Power drive chains shall be commercial type roller chains and meet ANSI Standards. A chain take-up or tightener shall be provided in every chain drive arrangement to provide easy adjustment. A minimum of one connecting or coupler link shall be provided with each length of roller chain. D. Chain and attachments shall be of the manufacturer's best standard material and suitable for 070198 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 11000-8 � the process fluid. � L!J L7 � � l�l � � � [J � 2.10 SPROCKETS A. General: Sprockets shall be used in conjunction with all chain drives and chain-type material handling equipment. B. Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, materials shall be as follows: 1. Sprockets with 25 teeth or less, normally used as a driver, shall be made of inedium carbon steel in the 0.40 to 0.45 percent carbon range. 2. Type A and B sprockets with 26 teeth or more, normally used as driven sprockets, shall be made of minimum 0.20 percent carbon steel. 3. Large diameter sprockets with Type C hub shall be made of cast iron conforming to ASTM A 48, Class 30. C. All sprockets shall be accurately machined to ANSI Standards. Sprockets shall have deep hardness penetration in tooth sections. ' D. Finish bored sprockets shall be furnished complete with keyseat and set screws. E. To facilitate installation and disassembly, sprockets shall be of the split type or shall be furnished with taper-lock bushings as required. F. Idler sprockets shall be furnished with brass or Babbitt bushings, complete with oil hole and axial or circumferential grooving. Steel collars with set screws may be provided in both sides of the hub. 2.11 V-BELT DRIVES A. V-belts and sheaves shall be of the best commercial grade and shall conform to ANSI, MPTA, and RMA Standards. B. Unless otherwise indicated, sheaves shall be machined from the finest quality gray cast iron. � C. All sheaves shall be statically balanced. In some applications where vibration is a problem, sheaves shall be dynamically balanced. Sheaves operating at belt speeds exceeding 6,500 fpm may be required to be of special materials and construction. !�J LJ L�J l�� lsJ L�J D. To facilitate installation and disassembly, sheaves shall be furnished complete with taper-lock or QD bushings as required. E. Finish bored sheaves shall be furnished complete with keyseat and set screws. F. Sliding motor bases shall be provided to adjust the tension of V-belts. 2.12 DRIVE GUARDS A. All power transmission, prime movers, machines, shaft extensions, and moving machine parts shall be guarded to conform with the OSHA Safety and Health Standards (29CFR1910). The guards shall be constructed of minimum 10 gage expanded, flattened steel with smooth edges 070198 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 11000-9 L^.J and corners, galvanized after fabrication and securely fastened. Where required for lubrication or maintenance, guards shall have hinged and latched access doors. 2.13 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. General: Flexible connectors shall be installed in all piping connections to engines, blowers, compressors, and other vibrating equipment and in piping systems in accordance with the requirements of the Section 15000- Piping General. 2.14 INSULATING CONNECTIONS I� u u A. Generaf: Insulating bushings, unions, couplings, or flanges, as appropriate, shall be used in � accordance with the requirements of the Section 15000 — Piping, General. 2.15 GASKETS AND PACKINGS A. Gaskets shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 15000 — Piping, General. B. Packing around valve stems and reciprocating shafts shall be of compressible material, compatible with the fluid being used. Chevron-type "V" packing shall be Garlock No. 432, John Crane "Everseal," or equal. C. Packing around rotating shafts (other than valve stems) shall be "O"-rings, stuffing boxes, or mechanical seals, as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the ENGINEER, in accordance with Section 11100 - Pumps, General. 2.16 NAMEPLATES A. Equipment nameplates of stainless steel shall be engraved or stamped and fastened to the equipment in an accessible location with No. 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins. Nameplates shall contain the manufacturer's name, model, serial number, size, characteristics, and appropriate data describing the machine performance ratings. 2.17 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Where work areas are located within a flammable or toxic gas environment, suitable gas detection, ventilating, and oxygen deficiency equipment shall be provided. Workers shall be equipped with OSHA approved breathing apparatus. 2.18 OVERLOAD PROTECTION [�'J �� I� � L�J I� l�'J � A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, equipment drives incorporating overload protection shall o be provided with an overload protection device. B. Mechanical System: The overload protection shall be a mechanical device to provide for reliable protection in the event of excessive overload. It shall be a ball detent type designed for long term repeatability and life. It shall be infinitely adjustable by a single adjusting nut. Once set it shall be tamperproof and shall incorporate a torque monitoring and control system. It shall activate an alarm set for 85 percent and a motor cutout switch set for 100 percent of maximum continuous running torque. A visual torque indication shall be provided and oriented so that it may be read from the walkway. The dial shall be calibrated from 0 to 100 percent of maximum continuous running torque. The design of the torque limiter should initiate the mechanical disengagement of the �irive upon overload. Each unit shall be suitable for outdoor/corrosive environments with a protective finish, corrosion inhibiting lubricants, and a 070198 � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS PAGE 11000-10 �l � �� r� L�1 � � C. � � � � � � D. � � C�J stainless steel cover. Electronic System 1. As an alternative to the mechanical system, the overload protection may be an Electronic Torque Monitoring Control System capable of displaying torque, rpm's, one level of overfoad, and two levels of overload of the drive system. it shall incorporate a time-delay for start-up and a voltage monitoring and compensation circuit for up to +15 percent variation. 2. The overload device shall have an enclosure suitable for outdoor installation at temperatures of 0-70 degrees C, and relative humidity up to 95 percent. The overload device shall be housed in an enclosure with NEMA rating in accordance with the area designations of Section 16050 - Electrical Work, General. A visual torque dial shall be oriented so that it can be easily read from the walkway. 3. The torque monitoring system shall be calibrated to: alarm and shut down the system in the event the torque drops to 50 percent of normal running; alarm at 85 percent of maximum continuous running torque; and shut down the motor at maximum continuous running torque of the equipment. The system shall be calibrated at the factory of the equipment manufacturer, and it shall be capable of monitoring twice the maximum continuous running torque of the equipment. Manufacturers, or Equal: 1. 2. American Autogard Corporation; Ferguson Machine Company. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 COUPLINGS � A. The CONTRACTOR shall have the equipment manufacturer select or recommend the size and type of coupling required to suit each specific applic�tion; installation shall be per equipment manufacturer's printed recommendations. � 32 � A. � 3.3 A. � 3.4 INSULATING CONNECTIONS All insulating connections shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND GUIDES Hangers, supports, and guides shall be spaced in accordance with ANSI/ASME 6.31.1 standard, and with tables in Section 15006 — Pipe Supports. PACKAGED EQUIPMENT � A. When any system is furnished as pre-packaged equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate all necessary space and structural requirements, clearances, utility connections, signals, and outputs with subcontractors to avoid later change orders. � a 070198 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 11000-11 B. If the packaged system has any additional features (as safety interlocks, etc.), other than required by the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate such features with the ENGINEER and furnish all material and 'labor necessary for a complete installation as required by the manufacturer, at no additional cost to the OWNER. - END OF SECTION - � m 070198 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coaaulant Feed Svstem Imarovements EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS PAGE 11000-12 � Q � � � � � � � Q D � a � D � � � � SECTION 11149 - SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide submersible sump pump and appurtenant work, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 11000 - Equipment General Provisions apply to the WORK of this Section. ` C. The Supplier shall examine the Site conditions, intended application, and operation of the pump system and recommend the pump which will satisfy the indicated requirements. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 SUMP PUMP A. Identification: 1. Equipment Number - P-1 2. Quantity - 1 � 3. Location - Ferric Containment Area - B. Operating Conditions: The WORK of this Section shall be suitable for long term operation under the following conditions: 1. Duty - Intermittent 2. Drive - - Constant speed 3. Ambient environment - Indoors and Outdoors 4. Ambient temperature, - -10 to 110 (degrees F) 5. Ambient relative - 40 to 100 humidity (percent) 6. Fluid service - Floor Washing, Rain Water 7. Fluid temperature, - Ambient • (degrees F) 8. Fluid pH range - 5 to 9 . 9. Fluid specific gravity - 1.0 10. Fluid viscosity - NA (absolute) (centipoises at 60 deg. F) 071398 � SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 11149-1 L ❑� 11. Project site elevation 12. Maximum size of spheres to pass (in. dia) Performance Requirements: 1. Maximum shutoff head (ft) 2. Design flow capacity (gpm) 3. Design flow pump head (TDH ft) 4. Design flow minimum pump efficiency (percent) 5. Maximum motor speed (rpm) 6. Maximum motor size (hp) Pump Dimensions: 1. Sump dimensions (in) 2. Sump depth (in) ' 3. Sump top 4. Pump discharge size (inches) 5. Discharge flange rating (psi) - 540 + - �/2,� - 40 - 20 - 23 - 45 - 1,800 - 1 /2 - See Drawings - See Drawings - Fiberglass grating with frame - 2 - 150 2.2 PUMP REQUIREMENTS '' . A. Construction: Construction of submersible sump pump shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Pump casing ' - Cast iron 2. Impeller - Semi-open, non-clog cast.iron 3. Bearings - Permanently lubricated ball and sleeve type 4. Shaft - Stainless steel, series 400 5. Seal - Mechanical seal 6. Mounting Method - Stainless steel chain and hook 7. Pump Connection ,- Union with neoprene pressure hose 071398 � SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP 1333018 — South Holly WTP • Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 11149-2 � a � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � B. Drive: Enclosed, submerged, electric 1,800 rpm motor, suitable for 120 volt, 1- phase, 60-Hz ac power supply, with armored cable, in accordance with Section 16010 — Basic Electrical Requirements. C. Control: Pump shall be manually controlled with on/off control station. The pump shall be shut down by a cut-off float. 2.3 PROTECTIVE COATING A. Pumps shall be coated in accordance with Section 09800 — Special Coatings. 2.4 MANUFACTURERS OR EQUAL A. ABS Pumps, Inc. B. Hydromatic Pumps C. Goulds Pumps Inc. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Pumping equipment shall be installed in accordance with approved procedures submitted with the Shop Drawings and as indicated. ; - END OF SECTION - I i 071398 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP PAGE 11149-3 � � � � � � � � SECTION 11258 - CHEMICAL FEEDING EQUIPMENT, GENERAL PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 A. THE REQUIREMENT The CONTRACTOR shall provide chemical feeding equipment, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. All equipment and items shall be from manufacturers with several years of experience in the manufacture and assembly of similar products, with a record of successful installations. Such manufacturers shall maintain a well established, authorized, local service agency with sufficient spare parts and personnel to respond within 48 hours to any service calls. C. �Q 1.2 The requirements of Section 11000 - Equipment General Provisions apply to the WORK of this Section. . Unless indicated otherwise, the requirements of this Section apply to all chemical feeding equipment in the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Complete fabrication, assembly, foundation, and installation drawings, together with detailed specifications and data covering materials used, power drive � assemblies, parts, devices, pumps, tanks, mixers, supports, panels, and other accessories forming a part of the equipment furnished as'well as schematics, diagrams, and panel layouts, shall be submitted for review in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. R� LiJ L�� (� � �� L I� L�J � �� B. Certification: The CONTRACTOR shall obtain written certification from the manufacturer, addressed to the OWNER, stating that the equipment will efficiently and thoroughly perform the required functions in accordance with these Specifications and as indicated on the Drawings, that all the materials are best suited for the chemicals handled, and that the manufacturer accepts joint responsibility with the CONTRACTOR for coordination of all equipment, including motors, variable speed drives, controls, and services required for proper installation and operation of the completely assembled and installed unit. The CONTRACTOR shall submit all such certificates to the ENGINEER. C. O& M Manuals: Prior to start-up the CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the OWNER complete operations and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01300 — Contractor Submittals. D. Tools: Special tools necessary for maintenance and repair of the equipment and one pressure grease gun for each type of grease required for the equipment shall be furnished as a part of the WORK; such tools shall be suitably stored in metal tool boxes, and identified with the equipment number by means of stainless steel or solid plastic name tags att�ched to the box. E. Spare Parts: The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from the manufacturer a list of suggested spare parts of all items of each piece of equipment subject to wear, such as seals, packing, gaskets, nuts, bolts, washers, wear rings, etc., as well as a set of spare bearings. He shall furnish all these parts suitably packaged and labelled in a box as described above for tools. F. Maintenance: Printed instructions relating to proper maintenance, including lubrication, and 072698 CH�MICAL FEEDING EQUIPMENT, GENERAL 1333018 — South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 11258-1 _ parts lists indicating the various parts by name, number, and diagram where necessary, shall be furnished in duplicate with each unit or set of identical units. A recommended spare parts list shall be included. ' � ,-, �,-, �j G. Field Procedures: Instructions for field procedures for erection, adjustments, inspection, and testing shall be furnished prior to installation of the equipment. � {�j r.� H. Calibratlon Graphs: The manufacturer's representative shall prepare a calibration graph from field tests for each chemical feed unit which does not have a rate set device. Graphs shall read in gallons per hour. The grapfi shall show the rate setter graduation conversion to gallons per hour throughout the range of the feed unit. Each graph shall be furnished on hard paper and sealed in clear plastic. 1.3 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE A. Erection and Startup Assistance: Service and instruction assistance by the manufacturer's engineering representative for each equipment unit shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR during the following period: 1. 2�. One day during erection, unless indicated otherwise in the feed equipment section. One day during startup, unless indicated otherwise in the feed equipment section. � � � �� B. Instruction of OWNER's Personnel: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the services of a factory service representative to instruct the OWNER's personnel in the operation and � maintenance of the equipment. This service shall consist of a minimum one day's visit to the plant for each type of similar equipment. 1.4 GUARANTEES, WARRANTIES A. After completion, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the OWNER the manufacturer's written guarantees that the equipment will operate with the pubtished efficiencies, heads, criteria, and flow ranges and meet these specifications. The CONTRACTOR shall also furnish the manufacturer's warranties as published in its literature. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Wherever it is required that a single manufacturer shall be responsible for the compatible and successful operation of the various components of any equipment unit, it shall be understood to mean that the CONTRACTOR shall provide only such equipment as the designated manufacturer will certify is suitable for use with its equipment and with the further understanding that this in no way constitutes a waiver of any indicated requirements. B. All manufactured items provided under this Section shall be new, of current manufacture, and shall be the products of reputable manufacturers specializing in the manufacture of such products. C. Where 2 or more units of the same type or size of equipment are required, such units shall be produced by the same manufacturer. 072698 CHEMICAL FEEDING EQUIPMENT, GENERAL 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 11258-2 � u C�� LJ C�J L�J L*�J u � L�l � 2.2 MATERIALS � � � � ��] � � L•J � `�J � �_l � ��--� �� L�J � A. General: Materials employed in the equipment shall be suitable for the intended application; materials not specifically called for shall be high-grade, standard commercial quality, free from all defects and imperfections that might affect the serviceability of the product for the purpose for which it is intended. � B. Corrosion Resistance: All materials used in the construction of chemical feeding equipment, shall be resistant to corrosive attacks from the chemicals. The following table lists the most commonly used chemicals for water and wastewater treatment and some of the suitable materials for the construction of chemical feeding equipment. Unless the manufacturer proposes more suitable materials, the following table shall be adhered to: Alum: (AI2 (SO,)3.XH2O) solution Hastelloy C Type 316 stainless steel Carpenter 20 (stainless steel) Lead Titanium FRP PVC,CPVC Teflon EPDM Buna N Neoprene Viton Saran Hypalon Tyril Rubber Calcium Hydroxide: (Ca(OH)Z) (slaked lime) Calcium Oxide: (Ca0) (Quicklime) I ron Steel Type 316 stainless steel PVC Hypalon Rubber Iron Steel PVC Hypalon Rubber Polyethylene LJ u �L�J I�� Ferric Sulfate: (FeZ(SO,)3.3H2O) 072698 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements Type 316 stainless steel Carpenter 20 (stainless steel) Titanium PVC FRP CHEMICAL FEEDING EQUIPMENT, GENERAL PAG E 11258-3 Hypalon Saran Teflon Vinyl Polyethylene Rubber Tyril Glass Ceramic Ferrous Sulfate: (FeS0,.7HZ0) Polymers: (lonic) (Cationic ) (Nonionic ) 2.3 APPURTENANCES Carpenter 20 (stainless steel) PVC FRP (suitable grade) Hypalon Teflon Vinyl Rubber Tyril Ceramic Type 316 stainless steel PVC FRP (suitable grade) Teflon Polypropylene A. Nameplate: Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a stainless steel nameplate, indicating equipment characteristics, capacity, motor horsepower, speed, electrical characteristics, manufacturer, model number, and serial number. B. Solenoid Valves: The equipment manufacturer shall provide solenoid valves which are part of the chemical feeding unit. The solenoid valve electrical rating shall be compatible with the equipment voltage and valves shall be complete with the necessary conduit and wiring from the control panel to the solenoids. The valve material shall be suitable for the intended service in accordance with the Section 15230 -Miscellaneous Valves. C. Pressure Gauges: Where shown, all chemical transfer and metering pumps and other equipment shall be equipped with pressure gauges with diaphragm seals in accordance with Section 15183 — Pressure Gauges and Switches, except that the size of gauges on small metering pumps may be smaller than indicated in that above section. D. Equipment Supports: Chemical feeding equipment and piping shall be firmly supported on concrete equipment pads and anchored down. Fabricated metal supports exposed to chemical spills shall be of type 316 stainless steel or enameled steel. All anchor bolts, nuts, and washers of such supports shall be of Type 316 stainless steel, with an antiseize compound on the threads. E. Variable Speed Drives: Variable speed drives, drive motors, speed control equipment, and accessories shall be furnished in accordance with Section 16482 — DC-SCR-Drives. 072698 - CHEMICAL FEEDING EQUIPMENT, GENERAL 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 11258-4 LJ L�J � �� :!�] � ��J � �� L! 1 � � � � u � � l�� LsJ LiJ � LiJ � L*�J LsJ L�J u '� � C � � � � F. Controls: Controls shall be housed in enclosures with NEMA ratings which comply with the area designations of Section 16050 — Basic Materials and Methods (Electrical). G. Safety Equipment: Where required by Code, chemical unloading, storage, and feeding equipment shall be provided with the necessary safety devices and warning signs, clearly visible. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Chemical feeding equipment shall be installed in accordance with governing safety standards and procedures submitted with the Shop Drawings and as indicated. B. Alignment: Equipment shall be field tested to verify proper alignment, operation as specified, and freedom from binding, scraping, vibration, shait runout, or�other defects. Drive shafts shall be measured just prior to assembly to ensure correct alignment without forcing. Equipment shall be secure in position and neat in appearance. C. Lubricants: The WORK shall include furnishing the necessary oil and grease for initial lubrication and testing of all equipment. 072698 � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements - END OF SECTION- CHEMICAL FEEDING EQUIPMENT, GENERAL PAGE 11258-5 � � PART 1 — GENERAL � L�� 1.1 A. B. � PART 2 — PRODUCTS � � l�J � �� I�l � � � 2.1 GENERAL A. Th� pumps shall' be of corrosion-resistant construction and diaphragm and seals shall be a suitable material for the chemicals indicated at maximum temperature of 125 degrees F. Each pump shall be complete with pump base, drive, diaphragm, back-pressure valve, intemal and external relief valves, pulsation dampeners, coupling guard and electric motor. A complete set of extra diaphragms and seals shall be fumished with each pump. Size and characteristics of the pumps shall be as indicated. 2.2 HYDRAULIC DIAPHRAGM METERING PUMPS AND APPURTENANCES A. Type and Range: The pumps shall be of hydraulically actuated diaphragm type, suitable for metering service, with an adjustable stroke (dosage) control range of 10:1 with accuracy of 1.0 percent of the full-scale range. Mechanically actuated devices are unacceptable. Pumps requiring variable speed drives shall have a set speed range of 10:1 which, in conjunction with the stroke control, shall provide a total feeding range of 100:1, minimum. Pumps shall be designed to convey ferric sulfate at 50% concentration and atum at 48.3% concentration. B. Materials: Wetted parts of all metering pumps shall be selected by the manufacturer to ensure optimum, corrosion-free, and erosion-free operation for the chemicals involved. The process diaphragm shall posses an integral o-ring seal and be capable of sealings under full head bolt torque limits without stressing the diaphragm. � 0 E. THE REQUIREMENT SECTION 11259 - METERING PUMPS The CONTRACTOR shall provide chemical metering pumps and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. The requirements of Section 11000 - Equipment General Provisions and Section 11258 — Chemical Feeding Equipment General apply to the WORK of this Section. Three duplex pumps shall be provided. Each pump head shall have a rated capacity (at maximum speed and maximum stroke) of not less than 123.8 gph. Maximum stroking speed shall not exceed 140 strokes per minute. Duplex pumps shall have two drive mechanisms connected to a single motor. Arrangements using finro pump heads connected to a single drive mechanism will not be accepted. F. Manual micrometer type adjustment mechanism shall be provided on each drive to permit 0 to 100 percent capacity control while in motion. The stroke length indicator shall have at least 100 increments of adjustment. "Lost motion type capacity adjustment mechanisms will not be accept�d." G. Pump motors shall be variable speed direct current, driving through enclosed gear reduction units. Constant speed metering pumps shall not be used. Motors shall not overheat excessively when operated over a long period of time at 10 percent speed and constant torque 072698 METERING PUMPS 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 11259-1 � load. Gear reduction shall be oil immersed helical type running on anti-friction bearings. A high Vvinding temperature switch shall be furnished in each drive motor and wired to alarm on high winding temperature. A seal leak detector switch shall also be provided. H. Pumps shall have a repetitive accuracy of ± 1 percent of inean delivered flow at stroke length settings between 10 and 100% of full stroke and at speed settings between 10 and 100% of full speed. I. Pumps shall be gravity seating ball valves. Valves shall be senriceable without removing Piping• J. Bladder type pulsation dampeners shall have an air charging connection, a pressure gage for the air padding, and an isolation valve. Pulsation dampeners shall be sized to ensure that the pressure in the pipe remains within the range of five percent above or below the mean operating pressure. Pulsation dampeners shall be as manufactured by Pulsafeeder, Balcoh, or equal. They shall be provided with suitable brackets to support the dampener assembly without stressing the piping. K. Adjustable pressure switches with isolating diaphragm and isolation valve shall be provided in the discharge piping of inetering pumps. Pressure switches on the discharge line shall be used to shutdown the pump in the event of excessive discharge pressure due to an incorrect valve closure or other fault. L. Each pump shall have an intemal pressure relief valve. In addition, each pump shall be equipped with an external pressure relief valve. The external pressure relief valve shall be set at a pressure less than the intemal relief valve, and the pressure switch shall be set at a pressure lower than both valves. . M. Pump supplier shall be responsible for the initial setting of the pressure relief valves, backpressure valves, and pulsation dampeners. N. Pump control panels for the metering pumps will be supplied under Division 17. 2.3 CONTROL A. The dosage of each metering pump shall be set at each metering pump control station. The drive speed of each metering pump shall vary automatically in response to a 4-20 mA flow signal input from the plant's influent flow meter and stroke length shall be adjusted manually in order to maintain pre-set dosage. , 072698 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coaaulant Feed Svstem ImnrovemPnts METERING PUMPS Par F � 1 ��4_� �� MJ � � i .� � �� 1 ��i ' �J � � � � � �. � L�J � LJ L■J � � � L•1 �� L�J � �'% ,. ��1' F � �. � Ir�� J l '� I� � ;I �J 2.4 SCHEDULE OF METERING PUMPS I.D. Feed Range No. Chemical (gph) FSMP-1 50% Ferric 1-123.8 Sulfate Solution FSMP-2 50% Ferric 1-123.8 Sulfate Solution FSMP-3 50% Ferric 1-123.8 Sulfate Solution 2.5 PUMP ACCESSORIES Min Head (ps�) 150 150 150 Min Motor (hp) 3/4 3/4 3/4 Type of Drive DGSCR DGSCR DC-SCR A. Mounting and Connections: Uniess otherwise indicated, all metering pumps shall be mounted on concrete pedestals of approximately 2 feet in height and they shall be provided with corrosion-resistant pulsation dampeners, pressure gages with diaphragm seals, relief valves, graduated calibration tanks in pump suction, and flush connections. Dilution lines shall be connected by means of PVC injectors. All pipe connections to feeders must be firmly supported from a floor-mounted, galvanized, structural steel frame, to avoid any stress on the feeder or on the piping system. � B. Flow Monitoring: All metering pumps for coagulant control systems in water treatment plants (alum, etc.,) shall be provided with appropriately sized magnetic flow meters in the discharge line, to monitor the flow and safeguard against the pump running dry (in case of empty tanks, closed valves, or ruptured pipes). All materials employed in the construction of the meters shall be compatible with the chemicals they convey. The flow signals from the meters shall be transmitted to the control panel, with a low flow waming light and alarm, as indicated. The flow meters shall be supplied under Division 1% 2.6 SPARE PARTS A. All chemical feeders shall be fumished with a complete set of one year's manufacturer suggested spare parts, such as seals, packing, gaskets, belts, and any other parts subject to wear. Where applicable, one set of spare bearings shall be furnished with each piece of equipment. 2.7 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer's Experience: The chemical feeding equipment shall be the product of a manufacturer who has designed and manufactured similar equipment and has a record of at least 5 years of successful operation of this type of process. The CONTRACTOR may be required to submit evidence to this effect together with a representative list of installations. The pump manufacturer shall maintain a permanent, local se►vice department and a spare parts department. � 072698 . 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements METERING PUMPS PAGE 11259-3 B. Manufacturers, (No Substitution Allowed) 1. Pulsafeeder � C. Unit Responsibility: The CONTRACTOR shall assign to a single manufacturer full responsibility for the fumishing and functional operation of the chemical feeder system along with all pumps, piping, and valves. The designated single manufacturer, however, need not manufacture more than one part of the system but shall coordinate the design, assembly, testing, and erection of the system as indicated. PART 3 — EXECUTION � 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Pumping equipment shall be installed in accordance with approved procedures submitted with the Shop Drawings and as indicated. - END OF SECTION - m 072698 METERING PUMPS 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 11259-4 L#J � PART 1 — GENERAL � 1.1 A. a � � a � a � � THE REQUIREMENT SECTION 11267 - LIME FEED SYSTEM The CONTRACTOR shall provide a complete lime feed system, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. All lime equipment shall be provided by a single supplier to ensure coordination and compatibility of parts. The major items to be provided include two of each: dust collector, level indicator, bin activator, knife gate, volumetric screw feeder, and lime slurry tank with mixer. Also, a local control panel, all necessary piping, stainless steel troughs, and appurtenances with storage hopper. Also, provide a transition hopper with 13'x13' square flange to mate existing flange on each lime silo and an 8' diameter round flange to match the bin activator. C. Each equipment item, shall be delivered to the site as an assembled unit, ready for operation, after connection of piping, wiring, and utilities. Compliance with the above requirements may necessitate modifications to the manufacturer's standard equipment. � � 1.2 1.3 The requirements of Section 11000 - Equipment General Provisions apply to the WORK of this Section. Sequence: The contractor shall complete the lime feed system for North Lime Silo installation and place it in operation before starting demolition, work on South Lime Silo and modification. REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS ASTM A 36 Structural Steel CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: The CONTRACTOR shall submit complete Shop Drawings in accordance D with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. In addition, the CONTRACTOR shall conform with the following conditions: � � l�� !J � � � 1. 2. 3. 4. The entire Shop Drawing package for this section shall be submitted at the same time. The Shop Drawings shall indicate the operating weight for all major components. The submittal shall indicate and guarantee all electrical loads for equipment in this Section including all NEMA motor starter ratings. The Shop Drawings shall identify all electrical and instrumentation terminal points for the equipment furnished. � . 5. Structural calculations if appropriate shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings. B. Spare Parts: The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from the single supplier a list of one year's recommended spare parts subject to wear and frequent replacement, and shall furnish all these parts carefully wrapped and identified in suitable boxes. The spare parts shall include the following items: 080498 � LIME FEED SYSTEM 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 11267-1 1. Seals, washers, gaskets, O-rings, belts, and bearings. ' a � One set of wearplates for elbows, bends, and other impingement areas. 3. Two sets of filter cartridges for dust collector. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 0 A. Acceptance Criteria: Although the system is furnished by a single supplier, the CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for a complete facility in accordance with the Contract Documents, including performance requirements, exact limits of work between CONTRACTOR and supplier, all necessary utilities and floor drains to avoid wet floors, and coordination with all trades to obtain a complete and operable system. � � I� � B. The equipment manufacturer and supplier shall have a minimum of 5 years of experience in providing lime feed Systems. � 1.5 SUPPLIER'S SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the services of a qualified factory service representative of the single supplier to provide assistance for the assembly, installation, preliminary equipment testing, and final equipment testing. In addition, startup and operator training services for the � OWNER'S personnel shall be provided, as well as trouble shooting assistance, as requested, until a complete and functional installation has been obtained. The factory representative shall include the following Site visits, complete with travel expenses and subsistence: 1. 1-working day at the Site plus travel time for 1 trip, for assembly, installation, and preliminary equipment testing. . 2. 3. 4. 1- working day at the Site plus travel time for one trip, for final testing. Any additional time and trips to correct equipment deficiencies. One final trip for field assistance, instruction, and training of the OWNER's operating personnel. 1.6 CLEANUP A. After completion of installation and testing, the CONTRACTOR shall remove all spilt chemicals, debris, tools, and left over material from the Site, clean all his work and the work area, to hand over an operable and clean system. 1.7 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES � � � � � D � � � A. Upon completion and testing of the entire system, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the � OWNER all equipment guarantees and warranties. , 080498 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements . 4J a LIME FEED SYSTEM a PAG E 11267-2 � L�J � � LiJ � '� �� I ,j�l C PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 EXISTING LIME STORAGE SILOS A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide a 13'x13' square to 8-ft round transition cone section to be mounted where indicated on each of the existing 20-ft-diameter silos. The transition piece shall have a 60-degree cone bottom, terminating in a 8-ft diameter discharge flange. The flange shall be suitable to mount the bin activator supplied on this contract. B. Materials of Construction: The silo extension shall be constructed of the following materials: Minimum 1/4-inch thick ASTM A-36 steel plate. All welds shall be full penetration and done by AWS certified welders. 2. Interior and exterior surfaces shall be shop prime coated to provide weather resistance The exterior shall be finish coated in the field. The interior shall not be finish coated. All coating shall be done in accordance with Section 09900 - Painting. 3. The transistion cone section shall be supplied in two pieces and welded on site due to limited access inside the Chemical Building. � C. Silo Level Indicator: Each silo shall be provided with an ultrasonic level transmitter as specified in Division 17. The level transmitter. shall activate an alarm light in the lime silo loading local control panel. In addition, the high level alarm shall also activate an audible alarm at the bottom of the fill pipe. The low level alarm shall be activated to indicate 400 cubic feet of material remaining in the bin. E. Silo Discharge Gate: A knife Gate rype isolating Gate shall be provided after the bin activator. Gate shall be manually operated and provide a tight, dust-proof seal between the silo and feeders. Gate operator shall be readily accessible by a chain. 2.2 BIN ACTIVATORS (2) � A. General: Each lime storage silo shall be provided with a bin activator, for installation on the 8-ft diameter silo discharge flange, suitable for handling hydrated lime. The activator shall prevent bridging, jamming, segregation, and "ratholing" and shall assure positive, continuous flow of D hydrated lime from the silo. The activator shall have an 12-inch (min) discharge opening and bin discharge gate with flexible sleeve. � � � B. Activator Construction: The bin activator shall be a vibrating-type bin discharger with bolted adapter ring assemb,ly with gasket. The vibrating bottom shell shall be hung from the bin with rubber bushed steel hangers and connected to the bin with reinforced butyl sleeves so that no vibrations shall be transmitted to the hopper or silo. Vibration shall be generated by an electric motor exciter. The motor shall be rated for 3 hp, 480 v, 3-0, and shall not operate at a speed greater than 1800 rpm. The bin activator discharge shall be furnished with a knife gate that shall provide a tight dust-proof seal and a flexible connection suitable for connection to the hopper. Bin activator operation shall be controlled by a timer at the Lime Addition Local Control Panel (LALCP). a2.4 VOLUMETRIC FEEDERS AND STORAGE HOPPERS A. General: Each silo shall be provided with a volumetric feeder with 6 cu. ft. hopper located as � shown on the drawings. The feeder shall be capable of accurately feeding 75 cu.ft./hr. of 080498 LIME FEED SYSTEM a 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 11267-3 hydrated lime with an accuracy of 2 percent of the set rate. The feed rate shall be adjustable from 5 percent to 100 percent of maximum by remote adjustment. The feed screw shall be a helicoidal, pigtail-type feeder with a maximum rotation speed of 50 rpm, operated by a 1-hp dc- SCR controlled, 115-230/1/60, TEFC motor. Feed screw motors shall comply with the requirements of Section 16010 — Basic Electrical Requirement. DC-SCR drives shall comply with the requirements of Specification Section 16482 — DC-SCR Drives. B. Feeder Construction: The feeder body shall be steel with sealed, permanently lubricated bearings outside the hopper with dust-tight shaft seals. The feeder shall be mounted on a steel frame base capable of supporting the feeder and accessories as shown. A flexible transition coupling shall be provided between the bin activator discharge gate and the feeder inlet. The connection between feeder and conveyor shall provide dust-free operation. The feeder shall be designed to provide easy cleaning without the need for removing the feeder or disassembling the flexible connectors or hopper. Augers and seal housing shall be Type 304 stainless steel, and seals shall be teflon. The feeder shall be provided with a motor overload detection device for alarming overtorque failure. There shall be a provision for two (2) minute lime sample collection without disassembly at the feeder discharge into the lime slurry tank. 2.5 DUST COLLECTORS A. General: A dust collector shall be mounted on top of each existing storage silo. The filter shall retain lime dust during truck unloading, allowing dust-free air to escape, and discharge all retained dust directly to the storage silo. The filter shall have a minimum capacity of 904 sq ft of inedia. Operation of the filter shall be such that there will be no escape of dust during truck unloading. B. Construction: The filter unit shall be weather-proof and drip-proof, with self-contained cartridges and fan assemblies. The weather- and drip-proof gasketed door to the filter compartment shall be at least 30 inches square and mounted with adjustable "T" bolt hinges. All filter cartridges shall be readily removable for inspection or replacement without tools. The filter manifold shall be constructed to prevent filter cartridges from falling into the storage silo. All parts of the unit subject to service or maintenance shall be not more than 5 feet above the silo roof and shall be accessible by a person standing on the silo roof without use of ladders or platforms. � ° C. Filter Cleaning: Each dust collector shall have a factory assembled pulse jet cleaning system. Cartridges shall be automatically cleaned by pulses of plant compressed air which is controlled by a solid state timer. The cartridges shall be accessible from the clean air side. All the miscellaneous valve and piping necessary for operation of the filter system shall be included. D. Exhaust Fan: The exhaust fan shall be mounted on the dust filter. It shall be of the squirrel- cage type, with a capacity of minimum 1200 cfm, at a pressure of 7 inches of water column, while operating at a maximum speed of 3500 rpm. The fan shall be operated by a maximum 3 hp, TEFC, 3-phase, 60-Hz, heavy duty motor complying with the requirements of Section 16010 — Basic Electrical Requirements. The exhaust section of the fan shall have a removable bird and insect screen. E. Compressor: The compressor shall supply 10 SCFM of 90 to 100 PSIG, clean dry, compressed air on 10 second pulse interval to each dust collector. 080498 1333018 — South Holly WTP C;naniilant Faarl Svctam ImnrnvPmanic LIME FEED SYSTEM PAG E 11267-4 � F � 2.6 I� A. LJ I�J � Manufactures: The dust collector shall be Torit Bin Vent Filter by Donaldson Company or equal. EXISTING SILO FILL SYSTEM General: The lime addition system is equipped with a silo fill system to unload hydrated lime to each silo from a truck. The system includes a fill pipe and truck connection. B. Fill Pipe: The system is provided with a 4-inch diameter fill pipe to each silo. All pipe elbows shall be replaced with long radius elbows and shall be furnished with steel reinforced wear back plates. Each fill pipe shall be equipped with a limit switch for automatic activation of associated dust collector. C. Control Panel: The silo fill local control panel (SFLCP) shall be mounted near the truck connection. The panel shall contain indicating lights and alarm horn for high and low silo levels; dust collector hand/off/automatic selector; horn acknowledgement button; alarm test button; reset button; and any other controls deemed necessary to operate the silo fill system. Q2.7 MIXING TANKS AND MIXERS (2) L�J � � �� I u C� l� I�I � LJ i �' � A. One mixing tank shall be provided for each feeder package constructed of 304 S.S. steel. The volumetric capacity of each tank shall be not less than 150 gallons. The dissolver shall have inlet water, inlet water for dust arrestor assembly, 2 overflow, and drain connections. It shall be provided with a cover and inspection plate. Mixing in the tank shall be accomplished by a mechanical mixer having a Type 316 stainless steel shaft and impeller, and driven by a 3/4-hp, 460-volt, 60-Hz, 3-phase, TEFC., severe duty electric motor in accordance with Section 16010 — Basic Electrical Requirements. The mixing tank shall have a mist type dust arrestor assembly. Lime Slurry shall flow by gravity to the feed trough as shown in the Contract Drawings. The CONTRACTOR and the Supplier shall coordinate connection to the feed trough and to assure gravity flow through the trough to the point of delivery. The mixing tank shall include a low-level alarm switch and a high-level indicator for an overflow alarm switch as spcified in Division 17. ' 2.8 ROTAMETERS A. General: The rotameters shall be suitable for water service. The rotameters shall have vertical bottom inlets and top outlets, screwed ends and shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of 150 psi. The rotameters shall be calibrated in gallons per minute, shall have 10- inch long scales, and shall have a range of 10:1 with an accurancy of + 2 percent. B. Materials: The rotameters shall have TYPE 316 stainless steel bodies and ends with BUNA-N O-rings. The glass tubes shall be borosillicate and internal parts shall be Type 316 stainless steel. C. Schedule of Rotameters: The following rotameters shall be supplied for service in each lime system: 080498 - 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements Service Water Pipe Size 2„ Line Pressure 100 psi Flow Range 0 — 25 gpm LIME FEED SYSTEM PAGE 11267-5 I� 2.9 SYSTEM OPERATION B. General: The operation of the lime addition system shall be controlled from the LALCP and the silo fill local control panel (SFLCP). The operational sequence and requirements are described below. C. Silo Loading: The truck unloading' from the hydrated lime bulk delivery trucks to the storage silo shall be manually controlled from the silo fill local control panel. The silo dust collector shall be provided with a hand/off/auto switch at the SFLCP. An adjustable timer and photohelic gauge shall be ,provided to control the length of dust collector operation after the truck hose is connected. The activation of the storage silo high level switch shall initiate a visual and audible alarm at the SFLCP. D. Lime Handling: The bin activator shall be provided with an automatic/off switch and cycle timer at the lime addition local control panel. The cycle timer shall provide an adjustable intermittent operation of the bin activator in the automatic mode to prevent packing of the hydrated lime. The volumetric feeder shall be provided with an HOA switch. In the "Hand" position, the volumetric feeder shall run continuously. In the "Off" position, the feeder shall not run. In the "Automatic" position, the bin activator and volumetric feeder in lead status shall operate as part of the transfer sequence described below. E. Lime Feeding Controls: The lime feeding start sequence shall automatically occur when a remote "start" signal is received at the lime addition local control panel system and�all lime addition equipment is in the auto mode. The hydrated lime addition start sequence shall consist of the following sequence of events: 1. Open solenoid valve, utility water flow and slurry mixer starts. The mixer shall have an ON/OFF selection interlocked such that the mixer must be running before water, lime feed, or bin activator start. 2. Volumetric feeders starts. The feed rate shall be controlled by a 4-20 mA signal from the DCS in auto mode. I � hand mode, the feed rate shall be manually adjustable using a potentiometer dial. , � 3. Bin activator starts an� turns in accordance with its timer at the LALCP. F. System Shut-Down: Tha feeding stop sequence shall automatically occur if any of the following conditions ai�e present: A remote stop signal is received at the LALCP. 2. Mixer failure. � 4. Any item in the feedin� cycle is placed out of the auto position at the LALCP. If the flow switch in th� utility water is activated indicating loss of water flow. G. The lime feeding stop sequ�nce shall consist of the following sequence of events: 1. Bin activator stops. 2. Volumetric feeder stops (after adjustable time delay of 0-60 seconds). I 080498 I LIME FEED SYSTEM 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvem�nts PAGE 11267-6 � � L*�J � �'.# I � I'I� LJ I� LJ �II� �I � � � � ■I � � �� L�1 � � !�I L�J � t■I � � 3. Dilution water and mixer stops. 2.10 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS A. General: A lime addition local control panel and lime silo fill local control panel shall be provided as indicated in this Section and shall meet the requirements specified in Section 17100 — Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. Each panel shall be wired to provide the sequence of operation indicated. Identified terminal strips shall be provided for the interconnection of external conductors. All control devices on individual equipment items shall be interconnected to an equipment base-mounted junction terminal box. All equipment shall be ready for service after connection of conductors to equipment, controls, and local control panel. B. Silo Fill Local Control Panel (SFLCP): � 1. The silo fill local controls shall be housed in a wall-mounted outdoor enclosure and shall be provided with the following devices: a. Silo dust collector hand/off/auto switch. b. Silo dust collector running status indicating light. c. Level indication of lime silo. d. High and low level alarm lights for the silo. e. An audible alarm for high and low level at the silo. f. Alarm silence and reset pushbutton switches. g. All necessary circuit breakers, starters, relays and timers. 2. Dry contacts shall be provided in the silo loading control panel for relaying the silo dust collector start signal and a stop signal. Terminals shall be provided to receive the silo dust collector running status signal and retransmit to a remote indication. Lime Addition Local Control Panel (LALCP): The panel shall be provided with the following panel-mounted devices: . 1. HOA selector switch, running status indicating lights, and elapsed time meter for C. �� 1�1 lJ � 1�I � L 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. volumetric feeder. A lime feeding system "On/Off" switch. When the switch is in the "On" position, all the equipment in "AUTO" position will come on. HOA selector switch, and running status indicating light for the silo bin activator. HOA selector switch and individual running light for the mixer. Potentiometers for adjustment of each volumetric feeder output. Speed indicators for volumetric feeders. 080498 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements LIME FEED SYSTEM PAGE 11267-7 ►l Individuai alarm lights for mixer motor overload shutdown, low silo level and volumetric O feeder failure �vith a manual reset. 8. Timer for bin a�tivator control (2 minutes on/30 minutes offl. 9. All necessary rircuit breakers and starters. 10. Variable SCR/UC drive for each feeder. 11. Dry contacts shall be provided in the lime addition local control panel for relaying the following contrd signals: i a. Individual equipment start signals for the silo bin activator and volumetric feeder. 0 c. � Lime addition stop signal. � A common lime addition system failure signal from individual alarms listed above wired. in p�.rallel. Low silo le ✓el. e. Mixer, feecer and bin activator overload. 12. Terminals shall b; ; provided with the local control panel to receive the following control signals: a. Low silo lewl signal. � b. Individual r nning status signals for the silo bin activator and volumetric feeder. 2.3 SYSTEM SUPPLIER, R EQUAL: A. Acrison, Inc. I B. Vibrascrew, Inc. C. Chemco, Inc. PART 3 -- EXECUTION � 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • A. Installation: The lime storage and feed system shall be installed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the single supplier's instructions as submitted with the Shop Drawings. The installation shall include all necessary lubricants for testing and initial operation. B. Utility Connections: The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all required utility connections before the equipment foundations are being poured, and for all equipment pads, trenches, floor drains, and supports. No drainage or seepage shall be allowed to discharge onto the floor. , 080498 ' 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements LIME FEED SYSTEM PAGE 11267-8 �' � � Isl u u L�f � � '� �( I l�J � � � �-� � � � lil 3.2 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain the services of a qualified factor� service representative, to assist, inspect, and test the entire installation as specified. All equipment shall be clean, lubricated, and checked for alignment and smooth, trouble-free operation. All operating parts, valves, controls, switches, and warning lights shall be clearly identified with plast�c or stainless steel signs, permanently attached to the equipment. B. After completion of the WORK, the factory service representative shall be available to instruct the OWNER's operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of the entire system. - END OF SECTION - 0 080498 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements LIME FEED SYSTEM PAGE 11267-9 L7 l�] f�l L!�J LiJ C�J IRl L�J � � I■I I�i !�f � �� i� �� C� u RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, inciuding General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes a single-story, single-span, pre-engineered concrete building of the nominal length, width, eave height, and roof pitch indicated. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. B. 1.3 1. Exterior walls are concrete designed to support all dead, live, and wind loads. The concrete panels may be either precast or job cast. 2. Roof System consists of 4-ply built-up roofing on insulation. 3. Manufacturer's standard building components and accessories may be used, provided components, accessories, and complete structure conform to design indicated and specified requirements. 4. Furnish and install reinforced steel, steel anchor plates, weld plates, anchors, reglets and lifting devices cast into concrete panels and/or building. � Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. SECTION 13122 — PRE-ENGINEERED CONCRETE BUILDING Concrete mix design requirements are specifi�ed in Division 3 Section "Concrete Work." Roof joists are specified in Division 5 Section "Steel Joists." Roof deck is specified in Division 5 Section "Steel Deck." Sealants and caulking are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." Steel doors are specified in Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames." Door hardware are specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." Painting requirements are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Engineer, design, fabricate and erect the pre-engineered metal building system to withstand loads from winds, gravity, structural movement including movement thermally induced, and to resist in-service use conditions that the building will experience, including exposure to the weather, without failure. 1. Design each member to withstand stresses resulting from combinations of loads that produce the maximum allowable stresses in that member as prescribed in the "1994 Uniform Building Code." B. Design Loads: Basic design loads, as well as auxifiary and collateral loads, are as follows: 1. Basic design loads include live load, wind load, and seismic load, in addition to the dead load a. Roof live Load — 20 PSF. b. Wind Load — Load due to 70 mph wind, Exposure C, with an Importance Factor of 1.15. c. Dead Load — Actual calculated load. 101598 PRE-ENGINEERED CONCRETE BUILDING 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 13122-1 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS LJ 1.4 A. CQ 2. Collaterai loads include additional dead loads over and above the weight of the metai building system such as sprinkler systems and roof-mounted mechanical systems. a. Collaterai Roof Load — 5 psf 3. Maximum deflection shall be U180 for dead load + live load. 4. Roof Panels shall comply with U.L.I-90 or FM Class 90 uplift requirements. SUBMITTAI.S � General: Submit the foilowing in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product data consisting of inetal building system manufacturer's product information for buiiding components and accessories. C. Shop d�awings for� building structural framing system, roofing, and other building system components and accessories that are not fully detailed or dimensioned in manufacturer's product data. � 1. Structural Framing: Furnish complete erection drawings prepared by or under the supenrision of a professional engineer legally authorized to practice in Texas. lnclude details showing fabrication and assembly of the building system. St�ow anchor settings and roof framing. Include transverse cross-sections. 2. Wall Panels: Provide layouts of wall panels, details of edge conditions, joints, corners, custom profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details. Show panel dimensions, reinforcement placement, and location of anchor plates and details of fabricatio� a. Each precast concrete unit shall be identified by a unique mark that identifies the unit and its location within the structure. 7his mark shall be the same one used for record drawings. l�"J [�i '� �� u � �� 3. Building Accessory Components: Provide details of •metal building accessory � components to clearly indicate methods of installation inciuding the following: a. � c. Personnel doors: Provide elevations and details of each type of door and frame, including anchors and reinforcement; show location and installation requirements for finish harciware. Provide schedule of dooss and frames using the same �eference numbers foe details and openings as those indicated on the drawings; include complete hardware schedule. Overhead Coiling Service Doors: Provide fully dimensioned details of construction, including 1/4-inch scale elevations of door units and not less than 3/4-inch scate detaiis showing door curtain, guides, counterbalance, and method of operation. Sheet Metal Accessories: Provide layouts at 1/4-inch scale. Provide detaiis of ventilators, louvers, gutters, downspouts, and other sheet metal accessories at not less than 1-1/2-inch scale showing profiles, methods of joining, and anchorages. ' � D. Submit concrete mix designs as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete.° E. Samples for verification of wall panels, one sample of each specified finish. A sample shall consist of a set of two 12" x 12" x 1" thick panels showing proposed panel finish. Approval of 101598 PRE-ENGINEERED CONCRETE BUILDING 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 13122-2 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS � � � � l�i 0 � u �" � � this sample shall be obtained before proceeding with the work. The approved sample will be used as standard for work. 1. Upon approval, one (1) approved sample will be returned to the manufacturer. One (1) will be retained by the Engineer for comparison with units delivered to the site. � F. Professionai engineer's certificate prepared and signed by a Professional Engineer, legally authorized to practice in Texas, verifying that the structural framing and wali panels meet indicated loading requirements and codes of authorities having jurisdiction. Q1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE � LiJ �) f� � L � � �J � � � A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Manufacture shail demonstrate ability to pertorm the work specified in this section. Provide the Engineer proof of experience in training in the design and fabrication of precast concrete units of the types proposed for this project along with � financial statement, reference, description of plant facilities, storage yard and casting yard, and such other information as necessary to determine manufacturer's qualifications. B. Experience Requirements: The pre-engineered concrete building manufacturer shall have at least five (5) years of successful experience in the design, manufacture, and erection of buildings of the type and size specified. C. Certification: The manufacturer shall have a registered engineer as part of his staff or shall retain one for this project. The manufacturer's engineer shall design all concrete panels. The manufacturer will provide such reinforcing necessary for lifting stresses plus normal design loads for panels installed in wall and roof system. The engineer shall apply his seal to all record drawings and certify all structural designs. D. Manufacturer's Representative: Provide the services of a manufacturer's representative during the erection of the panels/building. E. Contractor Testing: An independent testing laboratory, retained by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, shall determine the materials and proportions for trial concrete mixes. Make 7-day and 28-day compressive tests for three (3) samples made from the trial and data before the 7-day strength tests are made. The manufacturer shall retain an independent testing laboratory subject to the Engineer's approval, to make tests of concrete placed at the manufacturing site. The manufacturer shall make one (1) test cylinder for every 10 yards of concrete placed per day. These cylinders shall be tested at 28 days and test reports shall be sent to the Contractor and Engineer. In addition, the manufacturer may make other tests as he feels necessary for determining lifting strength. F. Owner's Testing: Owner shall have the option of retaining an independent test laboratory to make concrete test cylinders during the concrete placement. The testing laboratory shall make a minimum of one (1) set of cylinders for every 25 yards of concrete used for panels, two (2) sets of cylinders for every day concrete is poured; whichever is greater. These cylinders shall be from different batches and will be broken at 28 days only. Owner will pay for these tests. G. Inspection: Concrete work shall be subject to Engineer's inspection. The contractoNmanufacturer shall provide a work schedule showing dates the panels will be in the various stages of fabrication. The contractor/manufacturer shall notify the Engineer 24 hours in advance of each concrete placement. H. Manufacturing Tolerances �i� I�I 101598 PRE-ENGINEERED CONCRETE BUILDING 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 13122-3 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS . � � 1 1.6 A. B. Deliver prefabricated components, panels, and ather manufactured items so they will not be damaged or deformed. Package wail panels for protection against transportation damage. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting wall and roof covering panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surFace damage. C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpautins or other suitable weathertight ventilated covering. Store metal wall and roof panels so that water accumulations will drain freely. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting or other surface damage. PART 2 - PRODUCI'S 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Availab{e Manufa�turers: Subject to compiiance with requirements, manufacturers offering metal building systems that may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the foliowing: 1. Speed Fab-Crete 2. Concrete Systems, Inc. 3. Component Construction 2.2 CONCRETE WALL PANELS A. Exterior wall panels supporting roof structure shall be a minimum six (6) inch thick reinforced concrete either site cast and tilted into place or plant manufactured and shipped to the jobsite B. Concrete is specified under Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" with the foliowing exceptions: � 101598 PRE-ENGINEERED CONCRETE BUILDING 981278 — SOUTH HOLIY WTP PAGE 13122-4 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS ' Position of cast-in-place items: a) Inserts, bolts, pipe sleeves 3/8 inch b) Flashing reglets 1/4 inch c) Glazing regiets 1/8 inch d) Electrical outlets, pipe sleeves 3/4 inch 2. Reinforcement placement 1/2 inch 3. Casting tolerance: a) Overall height orwidth 1/8 inch b) Angular deviation of piane of side mold c) Thickness 1/18inch to 1/4 inch d� Openings 1/4 inch e) Squareness (difference of 2 diagonal dimensions inch total 1116 inch per 6 inch depth 1/8 inch per 6 feet, or 1/4 4. Finished Produot: a) Bowing orwarping (no intermediate support) 1/240 panel dimension b) Bowing or warping (intermediate s�pport� 1/360 panel dimension c) Suareness 1/8 inch per 6 feet out of square DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING � � �� IL�J � � � L�J L� [!'J � I� � � � � � I�) L� I� L�] `�) Q�I �� L�J � LJ � �,�� u '�J � � � � � � 1. Coarse Aggregate: Crushed stone or gravel conforming to ASTM C33, gradation size number 57, with maximum 3/4 inch size. 2. Integral Concrete Color: Colored admixtures conforming to Uniform Building Code Standards for use in structural concrete; complying with ASTM C494 and AASHTO M194. a. L.M. Scofield Company "Chromix". b. Davis "Davis Colors". 3. Concrete shali have a minimum strength at 28 days of 4,000 psi using a minimum of five (5) 94-pound bags of cement per each cubic yard of concrete. Maximum slump shall be 4-inches. Concrete shall have an air entrainment of 2% to 5%. 4. The average of three consecutive cylinder strength tests shall equal or exceed the compressive specified strength at 28 days. 5. Use same sand, cement and aggreg�te proportions and brand of materials for all colored concrete. Concrete shall be product of a single concrete batch plant and shall be carefully controlled. Color shail be added to batch by weight, and mixing time shall be controlled. All mixing and batching shail be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Maximum color dose shall not exceed 10% of cement weight C. Each panel shall have both structural and temperature reinforcing conforming with the provisions of ACI Code, designed to resist wind loads as indicated. Panels must be reinforced with deformed steei reinforcing bars, or a combination of reinforcing bars and welding wire mesh. Steel fabric alone shali not be acceptable as the primary reinforcement D. Panel Accessories: Provide as required for a complete building system. 1. Reinforcing chairs: Plastic or galvanized steel with plastic tips. 2. Fabricated inserts: Stainless steel or steel galvanized after fabrication manufactured for use in precast panels shall be used as anchor and lifting devices. Items must be complete with washers, bolts, nuts, spacers, straps, and accessories compatible with the insert type. 3. Reglets: Fasten securely to forms and place concrete carefully to prevent displacement and to assure proper embedment. Inspect panels after casting and ensure that reglets are straight and true and will align across panel joints. E. Forms: Forms shall be true to pattem and free of warps or other defects affecting the finished wall panel. Details shall be sharp and crisp. Curved surfaces shall be true radius curves blending into flat planes without breaks in the surtace. Forms shall be impervious, waterproof, completely rigid, properly sealed to withstand high hydraulic pressures resulting from high frequency vibration without movement or leakage. 1. Steel forms shall be fabricated of 3/16" thick minimum material with braces spaced at not over 12" center. Forms shall have minimum weld and camber deflection. Joints shall be welded contir�uous and ground smooth. 2. Fiberglass forms shall be fabricated of Thixotropic isophthalic resin containing not less than 25% fiberglass. Faces shall be covered with alkali resistant gelcoat approved for use with concrete. � 3. Inspect and repair forms if used more than once. Do not reuse forms that have damage affecting the strength, integrity, or finish of the precast units. Chamfer strips, comer strips and rustication insert may be polyvinyl chloride, fiberglass, or steel; compatible with form type. ' 4. Form release agent: Chemical type non-staining releasing agent which does not affect the bonding of plants, paint, water proofing or other matherials to concrete. a. NON-Crete Co. "Nox-Crete" FoRn Coating. b. Symone Mfg. Co. °Magic Kote". 101598 . PRE-ENGINEERED CONCRETE BUILDING 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP . PAGE 13122-5 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS � c. Industria( Synthetics Corp. "Synthex°. F. Embedded Anchors: All embedded components such as anchor plates, lifting devices, brackets, or connectors shall be non-ferrous, or shall be galvanized after fabrication. G. Curing Agent: Liquid having color when applied, but becomes colorless and uniiormly transparent after curing applied in quantity and method as recommended by the Manufacturer. This material shall not be used where further concrete, paint or mortar is to be bonded to the cured surtace of the concrete. 1. Guardian "Clear Bond.° 2. Lambert "Clear Seal." 3. Meadows "Cure Bond." 2.3 A. 2.4 A. 2.5 A. B. STRUCTURAL FRAMING Design and furnish steel joists, steel roof deck, and miscellaneous structural stee{ angfes as required for roof structural system. ROOFING Provide a four-pfy buift-up roof over 1-112 inch rigid (tapered) insulation; surface mounted reglet (similar to Fry "SM"). OVERHEAD COILING DOORS General: Provide complete overhead coiling door assemblies including door curtain, guides, counterbalance, hardware, operators, and installation accessories. Pertormance Requirements: Provide doors certified to withstand a 20-psf wind load pressure with maximum deflection of 1/120 of the opening width. [+'J L� L#J � � ,,�, leJ � � LfJ C. Door Curtain: Interlocking steel slat door curtain with one-piece siats for the full length of door width. Form from 20-gage (0.0359-inch), Grade A, structural quality, zinc-coated steel � sheets. Phosphate treat before fabrication. D. Endlocks: Provide endiocks fabricated from malleabie iron castings, galvanized after fabrication, secured to curtain siats with galvanized rivets. E. Bottom Bar. Provide bottom bar on door cu�tain consisting of two 1/8-inch-thick•angies of the same metal as the door curtain slats. Provide flexible rubber, vinyl, or neoprene weather seal and cushion bumper on the bottom bar'. F. Curtain Jamb Guides: Provide curtain jamb guides, buiit up using steei angfes, channels and flat bars comp{ying.with ASTM A 36. Galvanize after fabrication. G. Weather Seals: 1/8-inch-thick continuous rubbe� or neoprene sheet weather seals on metal pressure bars secured to inside of curtain coil hood. At door jambs, use 1/8-inch-thick continuous strip secured to exterior side of jamb guide. H. Counterbalance: Adjustable steel hetical torsion spring counterbalance, mounted around a steel shaft in a spring barrel and connected to door curtain with barrei rings. Use grease- sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS � � � � u - NGINEERED CONCRETE BUILDING � PRE E PAGE 13122-6 � ��1 LJ I. � Brackets: Cast-iron or cold-rolled steel plate mounting brackets with bell-mouth guide groove for curtain. � J. Hood: Form to enclose the coiled curtain and operating mechanism entirely at the opening head and to act as a weather seal. Contour to suit end brackets to which attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surtace-mounted � hoods, and any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets to prevent sag. �� l!4i � � � � L�J L#7 �7 � Fabricate hoods for steel doors of 24-gage (0.0239-inch), zinc-coated steel sheet. Phosphate treat before fabrication. K. Shop Finish: Except for tightly joined and lubricated surtaces, shop-ciean and prime ferrous and galvanized metal surtaces, both exposed and concealed, with the manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer. , L. Manual Door Operators: Provide manual indicated, provide chain hoist o�erator unit. door operators. When type of operation is not Chain Hoist Operation: Provide operator consisting of an endless cadmium-plated alloy steel hand chain, ahain pocket wheel and guard, and geared reduction unit with maximum 35-Ib. pull for door operation. Design chain hoist with self-locking mechanism allowing curtain to be stopped at any point in its travel and to remain in that position until movement is reactivated. Fumish chain with chain holder secured to operator guide. , 2.6 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for application, and a 30-minute working time. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Design prefabricated components and necessary field connections required for erection to permit easy assembly and disassembly. 1. Fabricate components in such a manner that once assembled, they may disassembled, repackaged, and reassembled with a minimum amount of labor. 2. Clearly and legibly mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond previously prepared erection drawings, diagrams, and instru�tion manuals. be with B. Structural Framing: Shop-fabricate framing components to indicated size and section with base plates, bearing plates, and other plates required for erection, welded in place. Provide holes for anchoring or connections shop-drilled or punched to template dimensions. PART 3 - EXECUTION � � 3.1 !;J �� PANEL CASTING A. Place concrete in forms in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Cast concrete panels with integrally colored concrete, buff tone similar to brick masonry on adjacent buildings. 101598 . PRE-ENGINEERED CONCRETE BUILDING 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 13122-7 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS • B. Protect panels from injurious actions by the sun, snow, rain and mechanical injury. Do not allow units to dry out from the time the concrete is placed until the expiration of curing time. Keep the surtaces continuously damp or prev�nt the evaporation of the mixing water with waterproof coverings, or steam applied to the surtace as soon as possibie after removal of fonns or after free water has disappeared from the surtace. Curing period shall be continued for not less than (5) days after the units have been removed from the forms. Units cannot be shipped to the job site until they have been allowed to dry at least five (5) days subsequent to curing operations. C. Panel finishes shall conform to the following: 3.2 1. Inside panel face, exposed� Steel trowel. 2. Exterior panel face, exposed: Light to Medium sand finish. ERECTION A. After paneis have reached a minimum of 3000 psi and/or after (7) days have elapsed after placement, lift, tilt, or otherwise position the panels into place and adequately brace. Temporarily brace wail panels to "dead-man" anchors, left in place until roof structure is complete. B. Lift each panel into place and adjust to proper alignment and spacing. Panels shall be level and plumb, true to alignment and shimmed as necessary. Secure all anchors and weld ail connections and anchor piates so that the entire work is rigidly in place forming a complete integrated structure. Panels shall be in accordance with record drawings under the direct supervision of Precast concrete manufacturer's field representative. C. 3.3 A. 3.4 Framing: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Fasten roof deck to steel framing. _ ROOFING Install roofing in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. DOORS � A. Doors and Frames: Install doors and frames straight, plumb, and level. Securely anchor frames to building structure. Set units with 1/8-inch maximum clearance between door and frame at jambs and head and 3/4-inch maximum between door and floor. Adjust hardware for proper operation. B. Overhead Coiling Doors: Set doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold stops, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Adjust moving hardware for proper operation. 3.5 _ A. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Panels shall be erect to the following tolerances: (plus or mirius) 1. Panel to joint, 10' panels 3/16 inch. 2. Panel to joint, 10'to 20' panels 3/16 inch to 1/4 inch. 3. Joint taper 1/40 foot per foot. 4. Panel alignment of edge 1/4 inch. 101598 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PRE-ENGINEERED CONCRETE BUILDING � PAGE 13122-8 Q � � �� 3.6 L�l � l� B. � Damaged or stained panels must be approved by Enginee� prior to erection. Panels having structural cracks shali not be erected, but shall be replaced with new panels at the Contractor's expense. Panels having non-structural damage may be erected provided damage can be repaired to the Enginee�'s satisfaction. Repairs to exposed surtaces must be repaired in a manner to be undetectable from the ground level. Prepare a sample of patching showing techniques to be used and result to be expected. CLEAN AND ADJUST A. Repair spalls, holes, honeycombs, and other defects in aii exposed surtaces. Chip away ioose material and cfean areas ta be patched. Repair using structural repair material per the manufacturer's recommendations. B. C. � Remove braces and fill in all holes left by temporary fastening devices with non-shrink grout. Clean panels after erection. Remove concrete spiashes, fins, projections, or other defects. Wash with clean water and stiff fiber brushes. Rinse with c{ear water. Provide sand� blasting or other means where required to ciean stained panels or to make panels equal in appearance. � E. Cleaning and Touch-Up: Clean component surfaces of matter that could preclude paint bond. Touch up abrasions, marks, skips, or other defects to shop-primed surfaces with same type material as shop primer. L!] , � � � � � � ��J L�J � l�] END OF SECTION 13122 101598 PRE-ENGINEERED CONCRETE BUILDING 981278 — SOUTH HOLLY WTP PAGE 13122-9 COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS l�l � � L�J l�7 N!'J l� �� [J � � [�! � � � l�!J L�] 1J SECTION 13653 - WELDED STAINLESS STEEL TANKS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide welded 316 stainless steei tanks, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. The stainless steel tanks shall be suitable to store 50% ferric sulfate solution with a specific gravity of 1.45 and at an ambient temperature of 110°F. 12 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards: API 650, Appendix "S" Recommended Rules for Design and Construction of Large, Welded, Stainless Steel Storage Tanks. API 650, Section 7 Welding Procedures. , 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: The CONTRACTOR shall fumish shop drawings of each tank and all items and accessories in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. 1.4 EXPERIENCE QUALIFICATIONS A. The tank manufacturer shall have a record of at least ten installations during the previous 5 years for the tank sizes indicated. The manufacturer must be capable of fumishing names and telephone numbers of locations which can be visibly inspected. 1.5 SPECIAL WARRANTY A. The tank shall be warranted for 5 years to be free of defects in material and workmanship. Warranty shall be prorated over the last 3 years. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Materials: Materials shall be SA 240-T 316 stainless steel. The tanks shall meet requirements of API 650, Appendix "S". B. Nameplates and Code Stamps: Each tank shall bear a stainless steel nameplate which contains the design and fabrication information required by the reference standard. Each nameplate shall bear the applicable code symbol. C. Fabricators: Tanks shall be fabricated by fabricators authorized to apply the applicable code symbols. D. In assembly and during welding the component parts shall be adequately clamped, supported 120696 WELDED STAINLESS STEEL TANKS 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements ' PAGE 13653-1 and restrained to minimize distortion and for control of dimensions. Weld reinforcement shall be as specified by the reference standards, and excessive reinforcement shall be ground down to within the requirements, and as required to install the lining systems. Upon completion of welding all weld splatter, flux, slag, and burrs left by attachments shall be removed. Welds shall be repaired to produce a workmanlike appearance, with uniform contours and dimensions. All external corners and edges shall be ground to a 1/16-inch radius. All internal corners and edges shall be ground to a 1/8-inch radius, or a greater radius if required by the lining system. E. F. G. Flat bottom tanks shall have butt-welded bottoms, with a steel-thickness of at least 1/4-inch. All openings 4 inches and greater in nominal diameter shall be reinforced. Tank shell joints shall have complete joint penetration and fusion, and shall be welded from both sides. Before the second side is welded the joint shall be arc-gouged to sound metal. H. For flat bottom tanks, the comer joint shall be tested after the inside fillet weld is complete by applying a weld-compatible penetrating oil to the outside of the joint and observing the inside fillet weld for indications of oil penetration. After fabrication each tank shall be tested in accordance with the reference standards. Unless otherwise specified, the minimum thickness for steel plates used for walls, roofs, or heads shall be 1/4-inch. Submit hoop stress and pressure rating calculations. K. Tank details shall be designed to eliminate unwelded joints that will promote corrosion, pockets that will accumulate rainwater or chemicals, and attachments to the shell which result in excessive localized stresses due to welding supports or imposed loads. L. Access openings shall be flanged, and, unless otherwise specified, have a nominal diameter of at least 30 inches. The cover plate and flange shall each have a net thickness, after machining, of at least 1/2-inch. . M. Fittings: All fittings shall be flanged. Flanges shall meet the requirements of ANSI SA-182 and pipe per ANSI SA-312. See drawings to provide all the fittings required. N. All tanks shall be designed to resist a horizontal force equal to at least 50 percent of the total weight of the tank plus contents and a vertical force equal to at least 25 percent of the total weight of tank plus contents. O. Anchor bolts shall have a nominal diameter of at least one inch, unless otherwise shown, and shall be anchored into concrete foundations using methods designed to transfer the full ultimate strength of the anchor bolt to the concrete foundation. Anchor bolts shall be attached to the tank by use of anchor bolt chairs or rings, as required, and such chairs or rings shall be designed to transfer the full ultimate strength of the bolt, or 150 percent of the calculated load, whichever is less, to the tank shell. P. Platform and Ladders: Provide OSHA approved ladders to access top of the tank. Also, provide platform and railing on top of one quadrant of each tank for accessing level indicator and inspection hole. Q. Pressure Rating: The tank is vented to atmosphere. 120696 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements WELDED STAINLESS STEEL TANKS PAGE 13653-2 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �' � R. Weld Stainless Steel Tank Schedule: The items specified under this Section shall be fumished by manufacturers having experience in the manufacture of similar products and having a record of successful installations. The following welded stainless steel tanks are inclucied in this Section: I.D. No Location Service Size (ft.) Dia. X Height 16X24 16X24 Capacity (gal) TK-02 TK-03 FERRIC CONTAINMENT AREA FERRIC CONTAINMENT AREA 50% FERRIC SULFATE STORAGE 50% FERRIC SULFATE STORAGE 35,000 35,000 S. Manufacturers: All tanks shall be fabricated by reputable manufacturers, experienced in the design and fabrication of the specific tanks, �nd familiar with all applicable local regulations, �codes, fire and safety orders. �, i PART 3 — EXECUTION �� 3.1 GENERAL i i' A. Installation: The CONTRACTOR shall install welded steel tanks and appurtenances in accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer, approved shop drawings, applicable codes, and the Contract Documents. - END OF SECTION - 120696 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements WELDED STAINLESS STEEL TANKS PAGE 13653-3 0 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � l!' SECTION 13675 - POLYETHYLENE TANKS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 WORK OF THIS SECTION A. The WORK of this Section includes providing cross-linked, high density polyethylene tanks with anchoring systems, piping connections, and accessories for chemical storage. B. The WORK also 'requires that one manufacturer accept responsibility for furnishing the WORK as indicated but without altering or modifying the CONTRACTOR'S responsibilities under the Contract Documents. C. The WORK additionally requires that the one manufacturer who accepts the indicated responsibilities shall manufacture the tank. 1.2 CODES A. The WORK of this Section shall comply with the current editions of the following codes: 1. Uniform Building Code 1.3 SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS A. Except as otherwise indicated, the current editions of the following apply to the WORK of this Section: 1. ASTM C177 Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements 2. ASTM C273 3. ASTM D638 4. ASTM D746 5. ASTM D790 6. ASTM D1505 7. ASTM D1525 8. ASTM D1998 9. ASTM D1621 051093 . 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus Method for Shear Test in Flatwise Plane of Flat Sandwich Constructions or Sandwich Cores Test �fethod for Tensile Properties of Plastics Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials Test Methods for Density of Plastics by the Density- Gradient Technique Test Method for Vicat Softening Temperature Plastics ; Standard Specification for Polyethylene Upright Storage Tanks Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics POLYETHYLENE TANKS Page 13675-1 10. ASTM D 1622 11. �ASTM D1623 Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellutar Plastics Test Method for Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics] 12. ASTM D1693 � Test Method for Environmental Stress-Cracking of Ethylene� Plastics 13. ASTM D2126 Test Method for Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid Aging 14. ASTM D2842 Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics 15. ASTM D2856 Test Method for Open Cell Content of Rigid Cellular Plastics by the Air Pycnometer 16. ASTM E84 Test Method for Surface Buming Characteristics of Building Materials 17. NEMA ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES A. The following shall be submitted in compliance with Section 01300-Contractor Submittals: 1. Tank manufacturer's data and dimensions showing locations of all openings, locations of level indicators, seismic support structure and anchoring system details, and location of tank accessories. 2. Details on inlet and outlet fittings, manways, flexible connections, vents and level indicators. 3. List of installations in compliance with manufacturer's experience requirements per paragraph 1.8. 4. Statement by the manufacturer indicating compliance with the materials requirements. 5. Tank pad requirements such as pads and blockouts. 1.5 OWNER'S MANUAL A. The following shall be included in the OWNER'S MANUAL in compliance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's recommendations for installation. 2. Fitting installation and adjustment procedures. 3. Repair procedures for typical situations including small holes, pinholes, and minor cracks in the tank. 4. Certification signed by the manufacturer that the tanks have been factory tested and 051093 POLYETHYLENE TANKS 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements Page 13675-2 � � ��L� � meets the requirements indicated. 5. Calculations used to determine wall thickness. Hoop stress shall be indicated. �Calculations shall be signed by a Registered Structurai Engineer. 1.6 SERVICES OF THE MANUFACTURER A. A representative of the manufacturer shall certify in writing that the tank has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Certification shall be submitted. 1.7 FACTORY TESTING � A. Material Testing: Material taken from each tank shall be tested for the following: � � � Li' .. � � Parameter Impact Gel, minimum percent � Test Standard ASTM D1998 ASTM D1998, Value 120 ft-Ib, min 1/32-inch of innerwall: 65 outer wall: 90 total wall: 70 B. Following fabrication, the tanks, including factory applied inlet and outlet fittings, shall be hydraulically tested with water. The factory test shall compensate for the difference in specific gravity between the test water and chemical stored to simulate actual maximum operating pressures. Test methods may include filling the tank to the normal maximum tank level. The test duration shall be 24 hours. Following successful testing, the tank shall be emptied and dried prior to shipment. C. An affidavit signed by the tank manufacturer shall be furnished indicating that the factory tests have been performed and the indicated conditions have been met. 1.8 EXPERIENCE QUALIFICATIONS � A. The tank manufacturer shall have a record of at least ten installations during the previous 5 years for the tank sizes indicated. The manufacturer must be capable of fumishing names and telephone numbers of locations which can be visibly inspected. �. 1.9 SPECIAL WARRANTY A. The tank shall be warranted for 5 years to be free of defects in material and workmanship. � Warranty shall be prorated over the last 3 years. L*J � � �� L�J PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL .A. Tanks shall be circular in cross-section, vertical, complete with piping inlets and outlets, drains, overflows, and anchoring system. Covered tanks shall be vented, and where indicated, tanks shall be provided with entrance manways, level indicators. Tanks shall be marked to identify the manufacturer, date of manufacture, serial number, and capacity. Tanks shall meet the requirements of ASTM D1998 unless otherwise indicated. 051093 . ' POLYETHYLENE TANKS 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements . Page 13675-3 2.2 TANKS A. Materials: Polyethylene shall be the cross-linked, high density type meeting or exceeding the following nominal values: . ASTM Parameter Test Method Value Density, gm/cc D1505 0.937 to 0.945 Tensile strength at yield, psi minimum D638 2,600 , Elongation at break, min percent D638 400 Stress-crack resistance, min hours for Fso D1693 1,000 Vicat softening temperature, deg. F D1525 230 Brittleness temperature, deg. F, maximum D746 -180 Flexural modulus, psi D790 100,000 Resin used in the tank shall be equal to Phillips Chemical Marlex CL-200 or CL-250, PAXON grade 7004 or 7204, or equal, and shall contain a minimum of 0.25 percent ultraviolet stabilizer as recommended by the manufacturer. � B. Operating Conditions: 1. Chemical storage tanks provided under this section shall be suitable for the following operating conditions: Equipment number - T-7, T-8 Chemical stored � - Polymer Concentration, percent . - 30% Active Unit weight, Ib/gal - 9 Design specific gravity - 1.3 Solution pH - 5-7 Solution viscosity, centipoise - 300-1000 at 70 deg. F Maximum fluid temperature, deg. F - 100 Minimum fluid temperature, deg. F - 40 Minimum ambient air temperature, deg. F � - 40 051093 POLYETHYLENE TANKS 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements • Page 13675-4 � � � � � a .� � � a � � � a � � � � � C. Construction: Tanks shall be constructed using a rotationally molded fabrication process. Wall thickness of the tank shall be designed by the manufacturer with a hoop stress no greater than 600 psi using 1.5 times the specific gravity indicated. Stress shall be calculated using the Barlow formula. Tanks shall have the following characteristics: 1. Equipment No. - T-7, T-8 2. Type (Note 1) - CD 3. Nominal diameter, ft - 7'-1" 4. Nominal height, ft - 10'-T' (Note 2) 5. Nominal capacity, gallons - 3,000 (Note 2) 6. Liquid deptF�, maximum, ft - 11'-8" 7. Manway (Note 3) � Mounting - TM Diameter, irlches - 24 8. Exposure - No sunlight 9. Color - Owner selected Note 1: CD = closed, domed top; CF = closed, flat top; OIF = open, intemal flange; OEF = open, extemal flange; FLR = flat fid removable; FLH = flat lid hinged. Note 2: Nominal height of domed top tanks is the dimension measured along the straight cylindrical portion of the tank and does not include the rounded end. Note 3: TM = top mount; TSM = top and side mount � Unless otherwise indicated, manways shall be integrally molded with the tank. 2.3 TANK FITTINGS A. Tank fittings shall be according to the Ifitting schedule below. Gasket material shall be closed cell, crosslinked polyethylene materi�al equal to the tank material indicated or Viton. Any screwed fittings shall use American Standard Pipe Threads. No metals shall be exposed to tank contents. Fittings shall be bolted flange type and made with Type 1 Grade I PVC and shall be attached to the tank using threaded bolts with polyethylene heads. Bulk head fittings are not acceptable. 051093 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements POLYETHYLENE TANKS Page 13675-5 Item _ Fittina Tvpe (Note 4) 1. Equipment No. - T-7, T-8 2. Fill - FS-UD 3. Overflow - BF-SS 4. Tank drain - BF-SS 5. U-vent - PVC (Minimum 4") 6. Outlet to pump - IMFO 7. Level indication - BF-SS Note 4: Refer to drawings for fitting size and location. Abbreviations for fittings are: BF-H: Bolted flanged fitting with Hastelloy-C studs and polyethylene encapsulated heads. BF-SS: Bolted flanged fitting with 316 SS studs and polyethylene encapsulated heads. IMFO: Integrally molded flanged outlet. FS-UD: Flange style universal dome fitting. DB-SD: Double bolt with siphon drain, 316 SS studs, and polyethylene encapsulated heads PVC: Double-nut PVC fitting. 2.4 SIGHT GAGE A. Level indication shall be provided where indicated. Graduations shall be provided at every 100 gallon interval with 1,000 gallon intervals clearly labeled for bulk storage tanks. Unless otherwise indicated, graduations shall be marked on a gage board attached to the sight gage. The level indicator shall be completely assembled to the sight tube, with necessary pipe supports. The sight gage shall be made of material suitable for cationic polymer application. 2.5 SAFETY SIGNS A. Each tank inlet and tank outlet shall be clearly marked with hazardous material waming signs, 10 inches by 14 inches in size. Each sign shall have the word "DANGER" and the name of the chemical stored, printed in large block letters and mounted directly adjacent to the tank outlet and tank inlet. Each entry manway shall be provided with a sign ("DANGER--CONFINED SPACE--HAZARDOUS ATMOSPHERE"). 2.6 MANUFACTURERS A. Products shall be manufactured by one of the following (or.equal): 1. Poly Cal Plastics 2. Poly Processing Inc. 051093 . 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements POLYETHYLENE TANKS Page 13675-6 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 32 FIELD TESTING A. After installation of tank and all fittings, the tank shall be water tested by filling the entire tank with water and monitoring the tank as well as all fitting connections for at least 24 hours. Any leaks shall be corrected prior to acceptance. Following successful field tank testing, the tank shall be completely emptied and dried. - END OF SECTION - 051093 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements POLYETHYLENE TANKS Page 13675-7 � � PART 1 - GENERAL � 1.1 A. � B. �� THE REQUIREMENT SECTION 15000 - PIPING, GENERAL The CONTRACTOR shall provide all piping systems indicated, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all piping sections in Divisions 2 and 15. C. The mechanical drawings define the general layout, configuration, routing, method of support, pipe size, and pipe type. The mechanical drawings are not pipe construction or fabrication drawings. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to develop the details necessary to construct all mechanical piping systems, to accommodate the specific equipment provided, and to provide and install all spools, spacers, adapters, and connectors for a complete and functional system.. CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS 1.2 General: Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. � Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall contain the following information: �� 1. Drawings: Layout drawings including all necessary dimensions, details, pipe joints, fittings, specials, valves, appurtenances, anchors, guides, and material lists. Fabrication drawings shall indicate all spool pieces, spacers, adapters, connectors, fittings, and supports to accommodate the equipment and valves in a complete and functional system. Samples: All expenses incurred in making samples for certification of tests shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR at no increase in cost to the OWNER. t � D. Certifications '�J 1. All necessary certificates, test reports, and affidavits of compliance shall be obtained by the CONTRACTOR. 2. Fabricator Statement: A statement from the pipe fabricator certifying that all pipes will be � fabricated subject to a recognized Quality Control Program. An outline of the program shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review prior to the fabrication of any pipe. � PART 2 - PRODUCTS � 2.1 � A. �� liJ GENERAL Extent of Work: All pipes, fittings, and appurtenances shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of the applicable Sections of Divisions 2 and 15 and as indicated. B. Pipe Supports: All pipes shall be adequately supported, restrained, and anchored in accordance with the requirements of Section 15006 - Pipe Supports, and as indicated. 092895 PIPING, GENERAL 1333018 - South Holly UVTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 15000-1 � C. Lining: Application, thickness, and curing of pipe lining shall be in accordance with the requirements of the applicable Sections of Division 2, unless otherwise indicated. (� E,.� D. Coating: Application, thickness, and curing of pipe coating shall be in accordance with the requirements of the applicable Sections of Division 2, unless otherwise indicated.' Pipes above ground or in structures shall be field-coated in accordance with Section 09900 - Protective Coating. E. Pressure Rating: All piping systems shall be designed for the maximum expected pressure as defined in Section 02643 - Water Pipeline Testing and Disinfection, or as indicated on the Piping Schedule. F. Inspection: All pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture. During the manufacture of the pipe, the ENGINEER shall be given access to all areas where manufacturing is in progress and shall be permitted to make all inspections necessary to confirm compliance with requirements. . G. Tests: Except where otherwise indicated, all materials used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be tested in accordance with the applicable specifications and standards. Welds shall be tested as indicated. The CONTRACTOR shall perform all tests at no additional cost to the OWNER. H. Welding Requirements: All welding procedures used to fabricate pipe shall be prequalified under the provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. Welding procedures shall be required for longitudinal and girth or spiral welds for pipe cylinders, spigot and bell ring attachments, reinforcing plates and ring flange welds, and plates for lug connections. Welder Qualifications: All welding shall be done by skilled welders, welding operators, and tackers who have had adequate experience in the methods and materials to be used. Welders shall be qualified under the provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1 by an independent local, approved testing agency not more than 6 months prior to commencing work on the pipeline. Machines and electrodes similar to those used in the WORK shall be used in qualification tests. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all material and bear the expense of qualifying welders at no increased cost to the OWNER. 2.2 PIPE FLANGES A. Flanges: Where the design pressure is 150 psi or less, flanges shall conform to either . ANSI/AVWVA C207 - Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service--Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In., Class D, or ANSI/ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, 150-Ib class. Where the design pressure is greater than 150 psi up to a maximum of 275 psi, flanges shall conform to either ANSI/AWWA C207 Class E or Class F, or ANSI/ASME B16.5 150-Ib class. However, AWWA flanges shall not be exposed to test pressures greater than 125 percent of rated capacity. For higher test pressures, the next higher rated AWWA flange or an ANSI-rated flange shall be selected. Where the design pressure is greater than 275 psi up to a maximum of 700 psi, flanges shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.5, 300-Ib class. Flanges shall have flat faces and shall be attached with bolt holes straddling the vertical axis of the pipe unless otherwise indicated. Attachment of the flanges to the pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AW1NA C207. Flanges for miscellaneous small pipes shall be in accordance with the standards indicated for these pipes. B. Blind Flanges: Blind flanges shall be in accordance with ANSI/A1NWA C207, or as indicated for miscellaneous small pipes. All blind flanges for pipe sizes 12 inches and over shall be 092895 PIPING, GENERAL 1333018 - South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 15000-2 L*� � L.�' � '�J L�J I�� L�7 � L� � �� u L!1 � � C. Flange Coating: All machined faces of inetal blind flanges and pipe flanges shall be coated with a temporary rust-inhibitive coating to protect the metal until the installation is completed. �� u �� Ci� provided with lifting eyes in form of welded or screwed eye bolts. D. Flange Bolts: All bolts and nuts shall conform to Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metalwork. Studs and bolts shall extend through the nuts a minimum of 1/4-inch. All-thread studs shall be used on all valve flange connections, where space restrictions preclude the use of regular bolts. E. Insulating Flanges: Insulated flanges shall have bolt holes 1/4-inch diameter greater than the bolt diameter. 6 F. Insulating Flange Sets: Insulating flange sets shall be provided where indicated. Each insulating flange set shall consist of an insulating gasket, insulating sleeves and washers and a steel washer. Insulating sleeves and washers shall be one piece when flange bolt diameter is 1-1/2-inch or smaller and shall be made of acetal resin. For bolt diameters larger than 1-1/2- inch, insulating sleeves and washers shall be 2-piece and shall be made of polyethylene or phenolic. Steel washe�s shall be in accordance with ASTM A 325 - Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. Insulating gaskets shall be full-face. � G. Insulating Flange Manufacturers, or equal � 1. � JM Red Devil, Type E; I� u L�J Maloney Pipeline Products Co., Houston; 3. PSI Products, Inc., (Frost Engineering Service Co., Costa Mesa, California.). H. Flange Gaskets: Gaskets for flanged joints shall be full-faced, 1/16-inch thick compressed sheets of aramid fiber base, with nitrile binder and non-stick coating, suitable for temperatures to 700 degrees F, a pH of one to eleven, and pressures to 1000 psig. Blind flanges shall have gaskets covering the entire inside face of the blind flange and shall be cemented to the blind flange. Ring gaskets shall not be permitted, unless otherwise indicated. Flange Gasket Manufacturers, or equal ! �J L�J 1. John Crane, Style 2160; 2. Garlock, Style 3000. 2.3 THREADED INSULATING CONNECTIONS � A. General: Threaded insulating bushings, unions, or couplings, as appropriate, shall be used for joining threaded pipes of dissimilar metals and for piping s.ystems where corrosion control and cathodic protection are involved. L�J l� u �� B. Materials: Threaded insulating connections shall be of nylon, Teflon, polycarbonate, polyethylene, or other non-conductive materials, and shall have ratings and properties to suit the service and loading conditions. 092895 � PIPING, GENERAL 1333018 - South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 15000-3 2.4 MECHANICAL-TYPE COUPLINGS (GROOVED OR BANDED PIPE) A. General: Cast mechanical-type couplings shall be provided where indicated. The couplings shall conform to the requirements of ANSUAWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints. Bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metalwork. All gaskets for mechanical-type couplings shall be compatible with the piping service and fluid utilized, in accordance with the coupling Manufacturer's recommendations. The wall thickness of all grooved piping shall conform with the coupling manufacturer's recommendations to suit the highest expected pressure. To avoid stress on equipment, all equipment connections with mechanical-type couplings shall have rigid-grooved couplings, or harness sets in sizes where rigid couplings are not available, unless thrust restraint is provided by other means. All mechanical-type couplings on buried piping shall be bonded. The CONTRACTOR shall have the coupling Manufacturer's service representative verify the correct choice and application of all couplings and gaskets, and the workmanship, to assure a correct installation. To assure uniform and compatible piping components, all grooved fittings, couplings, and valves shall be from the same manufacturer. � B. Manufacturers of Couplings for Steel Pipe, or equal 1. 2. 3. 4. ,B 2. Victaufic Style 31 (flexible or rigid grooving). 4 C. Manufacturers of Ductile Iron Pipe Couplings, or equal Gustin-Bacon, (Aeroquip Corp.); �� J 2.5 Note: Ductile iron pipe couplings shall be furnished with flush seal gaskets. Manufacturers of Couplings for PVC Pipe, or equal Gustin-Bacon (Aeroquip Corp.) (banded or grooved); Victaulic Style 41 or 44 (banded, flexible); Victaulic Style 77 (grooved, flexible); Victaulic Style 07 or HP-70 (grooved, rigid). Gustin-Bacon, (Aeroquip Corp); 2. Victaulic Style 775. Note:Couplings for PVC pipe shall be furnished with radius cut or standard roll grooved pipe ends. SLEEVE-TYPE COUPLINGS A. Construction: Sleeve-type couplings shall be provided where indicated, in accordance with ANSI/AVW11A C219 - Standard for Bolted Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End Pipe, and shall be of steel with steel bolts, without pipe stop, and be of sizes to fit the pipe and fittings indicated. The middle ring shall be not less than 1/4-inch in thickness and shall be either 5 or 7 inches long for sizes up to and including 30 inches and 10 inches long for sizes greater than 30 inches, for standard steel couplings, and 16 inches long for long-sleeve couplings. The 092895 1333018 - South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PIPING, GENERAL PAGE 15000-4 L�J L;J u � L�, followers shall be single-piece contoured mill sections welded and cold-expanded as required for the middle rings, and of sufficient strength to accommodate the number of bolts necessary to obtain adequate gasket pressures without excessive rolling. The shape of the follower shall be of such design as to provide positive confinement of the gasket. Bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metalwork. Buried sleeve-type couplings shall be epoxy-coated at the factory as indicated. B. Pipe Preparation: The ends of the pipe where indicated, shall be prepared for flexible steel couplings. Plain ends for use with couplings shall be smooth and round for a distance of 12 inches from the ends of the pipe, with outside diameter not more than 1/64-inch smaller than the nominal outside diameter of the pipe. The middle ring shall be tested by cold-expanding a minimum of one percent beyond the yield point, to proof-test the weld to the strength of the parent metal. The weld of the middle ring shall be subjected to air test for porosity. C. Gaskets: Gaskets for sleeve-type couplings shall be rubber-compound material that will not � deteriorate from age or exposure to air under normal storage or use conditions. Gaskets for wastewater and sewerage applications shall be Buna "N," Grade 60, or equivalent suitable elastomer. The rubber in the gasket shall meet the following specifications: � '� L+�J LJ � L#J Color - Jet Black 2. Surface - Non-blooming 3. Durometer Hardness - 74 ± 5 4. Tensile Strength - 1000 psi Minimum 5. Elongation -175 percent Minimum The gaskets shall be immune to attack by impurities normally found in water or wastewater. All gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 2000 - Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications, AA709Z, meeting Suffix B13 Grade 3, except as noted above. All gaskets shall be compatible with the piping service and fluid utilized. D. Insulating Couplings: Where insulating couplings are required, both ends of the coupling shall have a wedge-shaped gasket which assembles over a rubber sleeve of an insulating compound in order to obtain insulation of all coupling metal parts from the pipe. � E. Restrained Joints: All sleeve-type couplings on pressure lines shall be harnessed unless thrust restraint is provided by other means. Harnesses shall be in accordance with the appropriate reference standard, or as indicated. LiJ L�J� F. Manufacturers, or equal 1. Dresser, Style 38; 2. Ford Meter Box Co., Inc., Style FC1 or FC3; � 3. Smith-Blair, Style 411. � 2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS � � � A. Flexible connectors shall be installed in all piping connections to engines, blowers, compressors, and other vibrating equipment, and where indicated. Flexible connectors for service temperatures up to 180 degrees F shall be flanged, reinforced Neoprene or Butyl 092895 � PIPING, GENERAL 1333018 - South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements . PAGE 15000-5 spools, rated for a working pressure of 40 to 150 psi, or reinforced, flanged duck and rubber, as best suited for the application. Flexible connectors for service temperatures above 180 degrees F shall be flanged, braided stainless steel spools with inner, annular, corrugated stainless steel hose, rated for minimum 150 psi working pressure, unless otherwise indicated. The connectors shall be a minimum of 9 inches long, face-to-face flanges, unless otherwise indicated. The final material selection shall be approved by the Manufacturer. The CONTRACTOR shall submit manufacturer's shop drawings and calculations. 2.7 EXPANSION JOINTS A. All piping subject to expansion and contraction shall be provided with sufficient means to compensate for such movement without exertion of undue forces to equipment or structures. This may be accomplished with expansion loops, bellow-type expansion joints, or sliding-type expansion joints. Expansion joints shall be of stainless steel, monel, rubber, or other materials, best suited for each individual service. The CONTRACTOR shall submit detailed calculations and manufacturer's shop drawings of all proposed expansion joints, piping layouts, and anchors and guid�s, including information on materials, temperature and pressure ratings. � 2.8 n 2.9 PIPE THREADS All pipe threads shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B120.1 - Pipe Tfireads, General Purpose (inch), made up with Teflon tape, unless otherwise indicated. PIPE INSULATION A. Hot and cold liquid piping, flues, and engine exhaust piping shall be insulated as indicated, in accordance with the requirements of Section 15145 - Pipe and Equipment Insulation. No unprotected hot piping shalf be within reach of operating personnel or other persons. 2.10 HEAT TRACING A. All pipes subject to freezing shall be protected by heat tracing in accordance with Section � 16850 - Electric Heat Tracing. 2.11 AIR AND GAS TRAPS A. Air and gas pipes shall be sloping to low points, provided with drip legs, shut-off valves, strainers and traps. The traps shall be piped to the nearest drain. Air and gas traps shall be not less than 150-Ib iron body float type with copper or stainless steel float. Bracket, lever, and pins shall be of stainless steel. Drain traps shall have threaded connections. B. Manufacturers, or equal 1 � Armstrong International, lnc.; Spirax Sarco, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MATERIAL DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. All piping materials, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be delivered in a clean and undamaged condition and stored off the ground for protection against oxidation caused by 092895 PIPING, GENERAL 1333018 - South Holly WTP . Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 15000-6 � L�J � C�J LiJ [iJ L�l ground contact. All defective or damaged materials shall be replaced with new materials. 3.2 GENERAL A. All pipes, fittings, and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the applicable Sections of Divisions 2 and 15. � B. Lined Piping Systems: The lining manufacturer shall take full responsibility for the complete, final product and its application. All pipe ends and joints of lined pipes at screwed flanges shall be epoxy-coated to assure continuous protection. C. Core Drilling: Where core drilling is required for pipes passing through existing concrete, core drilling locations shall be determined by radiograph of concrete construction to avoid damage to embedded raceways and rebars. D. Cleanup: After completion of the work, all remaining pipe cuttings, joining and wrapping materials, and other scattered debris, shall be removed from the site. The entire piping system shall be handed over in a clean and functional condition. - END OF SECTION - L�� L#J 1'�J � �I'' I�J � 0 092895 1333018 - South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PIPING, GENERAL PAGE 15000-7 L-1 � PART 1 — GENERAL � � � � � � � � � SECTION 15005 - PIPING IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, mark, and install identification devices for all exposed piping and valves using color bands, lettering, flow direction arrows, and related permanent identification devices, and all appurtenant works, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards: ANSI A13.1 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS � B C. Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems The CONTRACTOR shall submit samples of all types of identification devices to be used in the work. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER, for approval, a list of suggested wording for all valve tags prior to fabrication. All submittals shall be in strict accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING A. Identification of all exposed pipe shall be accomplished by color-coding with bands and by � lettering as specified in Part 3, herein, and in Section 09900 - Painting. Color bands shall either be painted directly upon the pipe or shall be pressure-sensitive adhesive-backed vinyl cloth or plastic tape. � a a � U � � B. Each pipe identification shall consist of 2 color-coded bands, a printed label identifying the name of the pipe, and a flow arrow to indicate direction of flow in the pipe. All labels shall be preprinted on pressure-sensitive adhesive-backed vinyl cloth or plastic tape. Arrows shall be die-cut of the same type of material as the labels. C. L] Letter sizes and colors for lettering, arrows, and background shall conform to ANSI A13.1. Preprinted identification devices shall be as manufactured by W.H. Brady Co.; Seton Nameplate Corp.; or equal. 2.2 EXISTING IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS A. In installations where existing piping identification systems have been established, the CONTRACTOR shall continue to use the existing system. Where existing identification systems are incomplete, utilize the existing system as far as practical and supplement with the specified system. The objective is to fully identify all new piping, valves, and appurtenances to 051093 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PIPING IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS PAGE 15005-1 the level specified herein. . 2.3 IDENTIFICATION OF VALVES AND SHORT PIPE LENGTHS A. Identifying devices for valves and the sections of pipe that are too short to be identified with color bands, lettered labels, and arrows shall be identified with metal or plastic tags as specified herein. B. Metal tags shall be of stainless steel with embossed lettering. Plastic tags shall be of solid black plastic laminate with white embossed letters. All tags shall be designed to be firmly attached to the valves or short pipes or to the structure immediately adjacent to such valves or short pipes. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All labels and identification tags shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, and shall be neat and uniform in appearance. All such tags or labels shall be readily visible from all normal working locations. 3.2 VALVE TAGS ' A. Valve tags shall be permanently attached to the valve or structure by means of 2 stainless steel bolts or screws. B. The wo�ding on the valve tags shall describe the exact function of each valve, e.g., "HWR- BALANCING," "CLS THROTTLING", "RAS-PUMP SHUT-OFF," etc. 3.3 PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Each pipe shall be identified at intervals of 20 feet, and at least one time in each room. Piping shall also be identified at a point approximately within 2 feet of all turns, ells, valves, and on the upstream side of all distribution fittings or branches. Sections of pipe that are too short to be identified with color bands, lettered labels, and directional arrows shall be tagged and identified similar to valves. B. Pipe identification shall consist of 4 elements, i.e., 2 color bands, a lettered label, and a directional label. The bands shall be arranged so that the lettered label and the directional arrow is placed between the 2 bands. � 3.4 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE , A. Application of identifying devices shall conform to the following color codes. Fluid Abbreviation BD CD CLS Function and Identification Identification Color Bottom drain Chemical drain and verit Chlorine solution 051093 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements blue orange orange PIPING IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS PAGE 15005-2 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � DCS FSP HR HS HWR HWS IA LF LS OF PA PEC PW RWL SA SC SDR SPD SS UW V VWV Defoaming chemical solution Fire protection sprinkler system Heating water return Heating water suppiy Domestic hot water return Domestic hot water supply Instrument air Liquid Ferric Lime slurry Overflow Plant air Polymer-cationic Potable water Rain water leader Sample lines Spare chemical Storm drain Sump pump discharge Sanitary sewer Utility water (non-potable water) Vacuum Filter waste washwater - END OF SECTION - 051093 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements orange red green green green green aluminum orange orange blue aluminum orange green blue blue orange blue blue blue blue aluminum blue � PIPING IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS PAGE 15005-3 L�J L+�J PART 1 — GENERAL SECTION 15006 - PIPE SUPPORTS � 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT IJ [#� � �� -, N�� M�� I�� L�] � � l!J � C� I! � A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide pipe supports, hangers, guides, and anchors, complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents. A. General: Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall `include the following information: 1. �� Drawings of pipe supports, hangers, anchors, and guides Calculations for special supports and anchors. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Code Compliance: All piping systems and pipe connections to equipment shall be properly anchored and supported to prevent undue deflection, vibration, dislocation due to seismic events and line pressures, and stresses on piping, equipment, and structures. All supports and parts thereof shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/ASME B31.1 - Power Piping, except as supplemented or modified below. Supports for plumbing piping shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the applicable plumbing code or local administration requirements. B. Structural Members: Wherever possible, ,pipes shall be supported from structural members. Where it is necessary to frame structural members between existing members, such supplementary members shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to the OWNER. All supplementary members shall be in accordance with the requirements of the building code and the American Institute of Steel Construction and shall be acceptable to the ENGINEER. C. Pipe Hangers: Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting the pipe in all conditions of operation, allowing free expansion and contraction of the piping, and preventing excessive ' stress on equipment. All hangers shall have a means of vertical adjustment after erection. Hangers shall be designed to prevent becoming disengaged by any movement of the supported pipe. Hangers subject to shock, seismic disturbances, or thrust imposed by the actuation of safety valves, shall include hydraulic shock suppressors. All hanger rods shall be subject to tensile loading only. D. Hangers Subject to Horizontal Movements: At hanger locations where lateral or axial movement is anticipated, suitable linkage shall be provided to permit such movement. Where horizontal pipe movement is greater tlian 1/2-inch, or where the hanger rod deflection from the vertical is greater than 4 degrees from the cold to the hot position of the pipe, the hanger rod and structural attachment shall be offset in such a manner that the rod is vertical in the hot position. 092894 � � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PIPE SUPPORTS PAGE 15006-1 L!`J E. Spring-Type Hangers: Spring-type pipe hangers shall be provided for piping subject to vibration or vertical expansion and contraction, such as engine exhausts and similar piping. All spring-type hangers shall be sized to the manufacturer's printed recommendations and the loading conditions encountered. Variable spring supports shall be provided with means to limit misalignment, buckling, eccentric loading, or to prevent overstressing of the spring, and with means to indicate at all times the compression of the spring. Supports shall be capable of accommodating at least 4 times the maximum travel due to thermal expansion. F. Thermal Expansion: Wherever expansion and contraction of piping is expected, a sufficient number of expansion loops or joints shall be provided, together with the necessary rolling or sliding supports, anchors, guides, pivots, and restraints permitting the piping to expand and contract freely in directions away from the anchored points. All components shall be structurally suitable to withstand all loads imposed. G. Heat Transmission: Supports, hangers, anchors, and guides shall be so designed and insulated, that excessive heat will not be transmitted to the structure or to other equipment. H. Riser Supports: Where practical, risers shall be supported on each floor with riser clamps and lugs, independent of the connected horizontal piping. I. Freestanding Piping: Free-standing pipe connections to equipment such as chemical feeders and pumps shall be firmly attached to steel frames fabricated from angles, channels, or I-beams anchored to the structure. Exterior, free-standing overhead piping shall be supported on fabricated pipe stands consisting of pipe columns anchored to concrete footings, with horizontal, welded steel angles and U-bolts or clamps securing the pipes. Materials of Construction: General: All pipe support assemblies, including framing, hardware, and anchors, shall be steel construction, galvanized after fabrication, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Submerged Supports: AI► submerged piping, as well as piping, conduits, and equipment in hydraulic structures within 24 inches of the water level, shall be supported with support, assemblies, including framing, hardware, and anchors, constructed of Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Corrosive: All piping in chemical and corrosive areas shall be supported with support assemblies, including framing, hardware, and anchors, constructed of Type 316 stainfess steel or FRP, unless otherwise indicated. K. Polnt Loads: Any meters, valves, heavy equipment, and other point loads on PVC, FRP, and other plastic pipes, shall be supported on both sides, according to manufacturer's recommendations to avoid undue pipe stresses and failures. To avoid point loads, all supports on PVC, FRP, and other plastic piping shall be equipped with extra wide pipe saddles or galvanized steel shields. L. Noise Reduction: To reduce transmission of noise in piping systems, all copper tubes in buildings and structures shall be wrapped with a 2-inch wide strip of rubber fabric or similar, suitable material at each pipe support, bracket, clip, or hanger. 22 SUPPORT SPACING A. Supports for piping with the longitudinal axis in approximately a horizontal position shall be spaced to prevent excessive sag, bending, and shear stresses in the piping, with special 092894 PIPE SUPPORTS 1333018 — South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 1�006-2 � � � � L�J �� L�� L�� L'J `�� J i� u � � � CI � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �a �� consideration given where components such as flanges and valves impose concentrated loads. Pipe support spacing shall not exceed the maximum spans in the tables below. For temperatures other than ambient temperatures, or those listed, and for other piping materials or wall thicknesses, the pipe support spacings shall be modified in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Vertical supports shall be provided to prevent the pipe from being overstressed from the combination of all loading effects. 1. Support Spacing for Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 Steel Pipe: Nominal Pipe Diameter Maximum Span (inches) (feet) 1/2 6 3/4 and 1 8 1-1 /4 to 2 10 3 12 4 14 6 17 8 and 10 19 12 and 14 23 16 and 18 • 25 20 and Greater 30 2. Support Spacing for Ductile-Iron Pipe: Nominal Pipe Diameter (inches) All Diameters 3. Support Spacing for Schedule 80 PVC Pipe: Nominal Pipe Diameter (inches) 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 3 4 6 8 10 12 092894 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements Maximum Span (feet) Two supports per pipe length or 10 feet (one of the 2 supports located at joint) Maximum Span (at 100 degrees F) (feet) 4 4.5 5 5.5 5.75 625 7.5 8.25 10 11 12.25 13.25 PIPE SUPPORTS PAGE 15006-3 r 4. Support Spacing for Schedule 80 Polypropylene Pipe: Nominal Pipe Diameter (inches) 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 3 4 6� 8 10 12 0 Maximum Span (at 100 degrees F) (feet) 3 3.5 3.75 4 4.25 4.5 5.5 6 7.25 8 8.75 9.5 2.3 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTS A. Stock Parts: Where not specifically indicated, designs which are generally accepted as exemplifying good engineering practice and use stock or production parts, shall be utilized wherever possible. Such parts shall be locally available, new, of best°•�commercial quality, designed and rated for the intended purpose. B. Manufacturers, or Equal: , 1. Basic Engineers Inc., Pittsburgh, PA; 2. Bergen-Paterson Pipesupport Corp., Woburn, MA; 3. Grinnell Corp. (Supply Sales Company), Cranston, RI; 4. NPS Products, Inc., Westborough, MA; 5. Power Piping Company, Pittsburgh, PA. 2.4 COATING � A. Galvanizing: Unless otherwise indicated, all fabricated pipe supports other than stainless steel or non-ferrous supports shall be blast-cleaned after fabrication and hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123 - Specifications for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. B. Other Coatings: Other than stainless steel or non-ferrous supports, all supports shall receive protective coatings in accordance with the requirements of Section 09800 — Special Coatings. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 092894 , PIPE SUPPORTS 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 15006-4 LJ l�l � A. General: All pipe supports, hangers, brackets, anchors, guides, and inserts shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and ANSI/ASME 631.1 - Power Piping. All concrete inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be coordinated with the formwork. The pipe supports generally shown on the drawings are for concrete ceiling, the CONTRACTOR shall modify and provide appropriate hardware for metal roof deck. � B. Appearance: Pipe supports and hangers shall be positioned to produce an orderly, neat piping � system. All hanger rods shall be vertical, without offsets. Hangers shall be adjusted to line up groups of pipes at the proper grade for drainage and venting, as close to ceilings or roofs as possible, without interference with other work. � 3.2 FABRICATION A. Quality Control: Pipe hangers an� supports shall be fabricated and installed by experienced � welders and fitters, using the best welding procedures available. Fabricated supports shall be neat in appearance without sharp corners, burrs, and edges. L*J � �� .. � ��i � L�, C�J 0 [� 0 ,� �� L! 092894 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements - END OF SECl'ION - PIPE SUPPORTS PAGE 15006-5 i � � � � � � � �. SECTION 15046 - CORROSION RESISTANT CAST IRON SOIL PIPE (ASTM A 861, MODIFIED) PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 A. � THE REQUIREMENT The CONTRACTOR shall provide corrosion res'istant cast iron soil pipe, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents The requirements of Section 15000 - Piping, General apply to the WORK of this Section. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE MATERIAL A. Unless otherwise indicated, cast iron chemical waste and vent piping shall be service weight corrosion resistant cast iron soil pipe with hub and spigot ends or hubless pipe in accordance with ASTM A 518 - Corrosion-Resistant High-Silicon Iron Castings and ASTM A 861 - High- Silicon Iron Pipe and Fittings. B. Cast iron drains and vents indicated for non-chemical service shall be in accordance with Section 15045 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe. � 22 PIPE JOINTS A. Hub and spigot pipe shall have joints caulked with acid-proof rope packing and lead per Cast � Iron Soil Pipe Institute standards. B. Hubless pipe shall have joints made up with Teflon and Neoprene sleeves and Type 304 or � 316 stainless steel clamps with stainless steel bolts per Standard 301 - Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary System of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. 2.3 FITTINGS � � � i�� L�J A. Corrosion-resistant cast iron soil pipe shall have service weight, drainage pattern, hub and spigot, or hub and hub fittings per ASTM A 861, or hubless fittings per Standard 301 of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute, respectively. All fittings shall be made of corrosion resistant cast iron per ASTM A 518. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: All corrosion resistant cast iron soil pipe shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, in accordance with the prevailing plumbing and building codes. All pipes shall have the required grades for proper drainage. Pipes inside buildings shall be coordinated with the work from all other trades to avoid interferences and to provide sufficient headroom. All installations shall be acceptable to the ENGINEER and to the local plumbing inspector. B. Supports: All pipes shall be firmly supported with fabricated or commercial hangers and supports in accordance with Section 15006 - Pipe Supports. Horizontal runs shall have at 110195 � CORROSION RESISTANT CAST IRON SOIL PIPE 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 15046-1 least one support for each length of pipe. . 3.2 COATING � A. All exposed pipes shall be coated in accordance with Section 09900 - Painting. 3.3 INSPECTION AND FIELD TESTING A. Inspection: All finished installations shall be carefully inspected for proper joints and supports, interferences, and damage to pipe, fittings, and coating. All temporary plugs and covers shall be removed from openings and floor drains. Damage shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER and the plumbing inspector. B. Field Testing: Prior to enclosure or burying, all drains and vents shall be tested in the presence of the local plumbing inspector and the ENGINEER as required in the Piping Schedule, for a period of not less than one hour, or as requested by the plumbing inspector. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all test equipment, labor, material, and devices at no extra cost to the OWNER. Leaks shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER and the plumbing inspector, and the system shall be re-tested until no leaks are found. - END OF SECTION - '. �� , m 110195 CORROSION RESISTANT CAST IRON SOIL PIPE 1333018 — South Holly WTP • Coagulant Feed System Improvements w PAGE 15046-2 a a � � � a D SECTION 15060 - PVC PRESSURE PIPE, SOLVENT-WELDED (ASTM D 1785, MODIFIED) PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. CQ C The CONTRACTOR shall provide Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pressure pipe, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. The requirements of Section 15000 - Piping, General, apply to the WORK of this Section. This Section specifies PVC pressure pipe with solvent-welded, flanged, or screwed joints. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE MATERIAL A. PVC pipe shall be made from all new rigid unplasticized polyvinyl chloride and shall be normal a impact class 12454-B, Schedule 80, unless otherwise indicated, in accordance with ASTM D 1785 Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120, as called out in the Piping Schedule. D2.2 PIPE JOINTS L+�J J � �i . �� f� A. Pipe joints shall be solvent-welded with solvent cement in accordance with ASTM D 2564 - Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems, and with primer in accordance with ASTM F 656 - Specification for Primers for use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. Screwed joints that are necessary to match up to threaded valves or fittings shall be made up with Teflon tape only. Flanged joints shall be made with solvent-welded PVC flanges, drilled to ANSI/ASME B 16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 150, unless otherwise indicated. Gaskets shall be ANSI 150 Ib. full face, 1/8-inch thick Neoprene. 2.3 FITi'INGS A. Solvent Welded Fittings: Solvent-welded fittings shall be Schedule 80 PVC fittings in accordance with ASTM D 2467 - Specification for Socket-Type Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 6. Threaded Fittings: Threaded fittings shall be Schedule 80 PVC fittings in accordance with ASTM D 2464 - Specification for Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. C. Flanged Fittings: Flanged fittings shall be Schedule 80 fabricated PVC fittings with 150 Ib. � flanges to ANSI/ASME B 16.5. � � I■_l PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 110195 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PVC PRESSURE PIPE, SOLVENT-WELDED PAGE 15060-1 A. General: All PVC pipes shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, properly aligned, and cut from measurements taken at the site to avoid interferences with structurai members, architectural features, openings, and equipment. Exposed pipes shall afford maximum headroom and access to equipment, and where necessary all piping shall be installed with sufficient slopes for venting or drainage of liquids and condensate to low points. All installations shall be acceptable to the ENGINEER. It is recommended that the CONTRACTOR obtain the assistance of the pipe manufacturer's field representative to instruct the pipe fitters in the correct installation and support of all PVC piping. B. Supports and Anchors: All piping shall be firmly supported with fabricated or commercial hangers or supports in accordance with Section 15006 - Pipe Supports. Where necessary to avoid stress on equipment or structural members, the pipes shall be anchored or harnessed. Expansion joints and guides shall compensate for pipe expansion due to temperature differences. C. Valves and Unions: Unless otherwise indicated, all connections to fixtures, groups of fixtures, and equipment shall be provided with a shutoff valve and union, unless the valve has flanged ends. Unions shall be provided at threaded valves, equipment, and other devices requiring occasional removal or disconnection. 3.2 PIPE PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, each pipe length shall be carefully inspected, flushed clean of any debris or dust, and be straightened, if not true. Ends of threaded pipes shall be reamed and filed smooth. All pipe fittings shall be equally cleaned before assembly. 3.3 PIPE JOINTS A. Threaded Joints: Pipe threads shall conform to ANSI/ASME B 1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (inch), and shall be full and cleanly cut with sharp dies. Not more than three threads shall remain exposed after`installation. All joints shall be made with Teflon tape. B. Solvent-Welded Joints: Solvent-welded joints shall be made with fresh primer and solvent cement on clean, dry pipe ends. The primer and cement cans shall be kept closed at all times and the joints shall be made up at the recommended ambient temperatures, to the pipe Manufacturer's written recommendations. AII pipe ends shall be inserted to the full depth of the socket. C. 3.4 Flange Joints: Flanged joints shall be made with gaskets and Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts. Care shall be taken not to over-torque the bolts. INSPECTION AND FIELD TESTING A. Inspection: All finished installations shall be carefully inspected for proper joints and sufficient supports, anchoring, interferences, and damage to pipe, fittings, and coating. Damage shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. • B. Field Testing: Prior to enclosure or burying, all piping systems shall be pressure tested as required in the Piping Schedule, for a period of not less than one hour, without exceeding the tolerances listed in the Piping Schedule. Where no pressures are indicated, the pipes shall be subject to 1-1/2 times the maximum working pressure. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all test equipment, labor, materials, and devices at no extra cost to the OWNER. 1. Leakage may be determined by loss of pressure, soap solution, chemical indicator, or 110195 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PVC PRESSURE PIPE, SOLVENT-WELDED PAGE 15060-2 � � � I�I � L■J � L� I �'� � �I C� � � � �� Ll � 2. other positive and accurate method. All fixtures, devices, or other accessories which are to be connected to the lines and which would be damaged if subjected to the test {�ressure shall be disconnected and ends of the branch lines be plugged or capped as required during the testing procedures. Leaks shall be repaired to the satisfaction.of the ENGINEER, and the system shall be re- tested until no leaks are found. 110195 � � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements - END OF SECTION - PVC PRESSURE PIPE, SOLVENT-WELDED PAGE 15060-3 � � � � � � � � SECTION 15065 - CPVC PRESSURE PIPE, SOLVENT-WELDED (ASTM F 441, MODIFIED) PART 1 — GENERAl. 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT � � The CONTRACTOR shall provide chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) pressure pipe, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. The requirements of Section 15000 - Piping, General, apply to the WORK of this Section. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE MATERIAL A. CPVC pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM F 441 - Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) � (CPVC), Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, and 80, from all new compounds, meeting the requirements of Class 23447 per ASTM D 1784 - Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds. All CPVC pipes shall be Schedule 80 pipe, unless otherwise indicated. � 2.2 PIPE JOINTS L� �.I I�I I�l A. Pipe joints shall be solvent-welded with solvent cement in accordance with ASTM F 493 - Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings, and with primer in accordance with ASTM F 656 - Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. Screwed joints which are necessary to match up to threaded valves or fittings shall be made up with Teflon tape. Flanged joints shall be made with solvent-welded CPVC flanges, drilled to ANSI/ASME B 16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 150, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 FITTINGS A. Solvent-Welded Fittings: Solvent-wefded fittings shall be Schedule 80 CPVC fittings in D� accordance with ASTM F 439 - Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. C � u LI � � B. Threaded Fittings: Threaded fittings shall be Schedule 80 CPVC fittings in accordance with ASTM F 437 - Threaded Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. C. Flanged Fittings: Flanged fittings shall be fabricated Schedule 80 CPVC fittings with 150 Ib. flanges to ANSI/ASME B 16.5. Gaskets shall be ANSI 150 Ib. full face, 1/8-thick Neoprene. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: All CPVC pipes shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, properly 110395 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvemdents CPVC PRESSIJRE PIPE, SOLVENT-WELDED PAGE 15065-1 aligned, and cut from measurements taken at the site to avoid interferences with structural members, architectural features, openings, and equipment. Exposed pipes shall afford maximum headroom and access to equipment, and where necessary all piping shall be installed with sufficient slopes for venting or drainage of liquids and condensate to low points. All installations shall be acceptable to the ENGINEER. It is recommended that the CONTRACTOR obtain the assistance of the pipe manufacturer's field representative to instruct the pipe fitters in the correct installation and support of all CPVC piping. B. Supports and Anchors: All piping shall be firmly supported with fabricated or commercial hangers or supports in accordance with Section 15006 - Pipe Supports. Where necessary to avoid stress on equipment or structural members, the pipes shall be anchored or harnessed. Expansion joints and guides shall compensate for pipe expansion due to temperature differences. C. Valves and Unions: Unless otherwise indicated, all connections to fixtures, groups of fixtures, and equipment shall be provided with a shutoff valve and union, unless the valve has flanged ends. Unions shall be provided at threaded valves, equipment, and other devices requiring occasional removal or disconnection. 3.2 PIPE PREPARATION � � � �� ' u A. .Prior to installation, each pipe length shall be carefully inspected, flushed clean of any debris or � dust, and straightened, if not true. Ends of threaded pipes shall be reamed and filed smooth. All pipe fittings shall be equally cleaned before assembly. 3.3 PIPE JOINTS " A. Threaded Joints: Pipe threads,shall conform to ANSI/ASME B 1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (inch), and shall be full and cleanly cut with sharp dies. Not more than three threads shall remain exposed after installation. • + B. Solvent-Welded Joints: Solvent-welded joints shall be made with fresh primer and solvent cement on clean, dry pipe ends. The primer and cement cans shall be kept closed at all times and the joints shall be made up at the recommended ambient temperatures, to the pipe Manufacturer's written recommendations. All pipe ends shall be inserted to the full depth of the socket. C. 3.4 Flanged Fittings: Flanged joints shall be made with gaskets and Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts. Care shall be taken not to over-torque the bolts. , INSPECTION AND FIELD TESTING A. Inspection: All finished installations shall be carefully inspected for proper joints and sufficient supports, anchoring, interferences, and damage to pipe, fittings, and coating. Any damage shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. B. Field Testing: Prior to enclnsure or burying, all piping systems shall be pressure tested as required in the Piping Schedule for PVC pipe, for a period of not less than one hour, without exceeding the tolerances listed in the Piping Schedule. Where no pressures are indicated, the pipes shall be subject to 1-1/2 times the maximum working pressure. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all test equipment, labor, materials, and devices at no extra cost to the OWNER. 1. Leakage may be determined by loss of pressure, soap solution, chemical indicator, or other positive and accurate method. All fixtures, devices, or other accessories which are 110395 , CPVC PRESSURE PIPE, SOLVENT-WELDED 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvemdents . PAGE 15065-2 � � � � � � L"9 � � � '� � � � -�. � � � � � � � � � � 1� � � � � to be connected to the lines and which would be damaged if subjected to the test pressure shall be disconnected and ends of the branch lines plugged or capped as required during the testing procedures. 2. Leaks shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER and the system shall be re- tested until no leaks are found. - END OF SECTION - n 110395 CPVC PRESSURE PIPE, SOLVENT-WELDED 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvemdents PAGE 15065-3 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � ��'� l�l l� SECTION 15084 - ROTAMETERS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install ali rotameters and appurtenant work, complete and operable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The meters shall be suitable for the service and � chemicals they convey, at process temperatures. C C. Basic Design: Unless otherwise shown, all rotameters in chemical solution lines and where shown shall have vertical bottom inlets and top outlets with ANSI 150-Ib flanged ends, for vertical mounting. Meters in gas, air, and pump seal flushing lines shall be of the modified rotameter design with screwed ends, spring-loaded pistons, and union bodies for mounting in any position. All meters shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of 150 psi. Schedule of Rotameters: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install the following rotameters: I.D. No. RM3to6 RM7to12 Service 50% Ferric Sulfate Solution Polymer Solution 2.2 BASIC MATERIALS Pipe Size inches �� 1 I/2" 1 I/2" Flow Range gpm or cfm 0-10 0-10 Line Pressure psi 100 100 A. Flanged Meters for Chemical Solutions: All flanged rotameters for chemical solutions and other service, where shown, shall be calibrated in gallons per mir�ute, pounds per 24 hours (for chlorine gas), or cubic feet per minute for other gases and air. The meters shall have Hastelloy C floats, 10-inch long scales, and a range of 10:1 with an accuracy of ±2 percent. The scales shall be suitable for the capacity ranges shown in the schedule above. The following body materials shall be used for the rotameters: L� 1. Other chemicals - Type 316 stainless steel ends with heavy borosilicate glass tubes and packing glands, or other best suitable material. Screwed Meters for Water, Air�, and Fuel Gas: All rotameters with NPT screwed ends for water, air, and fuel gas service shall be calibrated in gallons per minute or cubic feet per minute. The bodies shall have union ends for ease of maintenance, polysulphone 051093 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements ROTAMETERS PAGE 15084-1 tubes, aluminum or brass end fittin s, T e 316 stainless steel internal arts and scales � 9 YP P suitable for the capacity range shown in the schedule above. The meters shall have an . accuracy of not less than t5 percent over the capacity range shown. }� i.� C. Manufacturers, or Equal: Monitors, Inc. "INSITE" meters. � PART 3 — EXECUTION � � 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Rotameters shall be installed in chemical solution lines, in dilution water lines, in pump seal � lushing lines, in gas and air lines, and where shown. B. Rotameters shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed � instructions. - END OF SECTION - � . � . � . � � . � . � � � . � � 051093 � ROTAMETERS � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements ' PAGE 15084-2 � L�J .-, ��1 �� SECTION 15145 - PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT � A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all pipe and equipment insulation, complete and operable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. In addition to the insulation shown and specified, the CONTRACTOR shall insulate any cold or hot piping and � exhausts that could be hazardous to plant personnel upon contact. 12 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS � A. Codes: All cod,es, as referenced herein, are specified in Section 01090 - Reference Standards. � B. Federal Specifications: HH-1-558B Insulation Blocks, Boards, Blankets, Felts, Sleeving (Pipe � . and Tube Covering), and Pipe Fitting Covering, Thermal (Mineral Fiber, Industrial Type) lsl C. Commercial Standards: ASTM C 547 ASTM E 84 Specification for Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 1� � l� � �� 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit complete shop drawings of all thermal insulation, with manufacturer's data on materials, covering, jackets, and finish, in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. 1.4 CLEANUP A. After completion of all insulation the CONTRACTOR shall remove all debris from the site, clean all parts of the work to hand over the system in perfect condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL . A. All components of the insulation, including covering, mastics and adhesives shall have a � flame-spread rating of not over 25, and a smoke development rating of not over 50. Ratings shall be as established by tests in accordance with ASTM E 84 and Federal Specification � standards. The integrated insulation assemblies shall also conform to the above � specifications. Insulation shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. � 051093 � 1333018 - South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System improvements PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION PAGE 15145-1 2.2 BASIC MATERIALS A. Standard Insulatlon: This type of insulation shall be employed for process, coid-and hot water, steam, and condensate piping and equipment with surface temperatures up to 850 degrees F. Pipe insulation and jacketing shall be applied to piping where shown, and shall include fittings, flanges and valves. Pipe insulation shall be molded-type pipe covering, made of fibrous glass with a minimum k-factor of 0.23 at 75 degrees F mean temperature. Unless otherwise specified the insulation thickness shall be as follows: Minimum Thickness of Insulation � (inchesl 1. Pipe Insulation: Hot and cold water (domestic) - 6 inches and smaller Hot and chilled water process - 6 inches and smaller 8 inches and large � Low pressure steam (50 psi and less) - 8 inches and less Condensate, boiler blowdown, and boiler feed - 8 inches and less - Heated sludge and process piping - 6 inches and smaller ' 8 inches and larger Heat traced piping - 3 inches and smaller 4 inches and larger 2. Equipment and Tanks: Boilers, heaters and manufactured equipment - Heat exchangers, tanks, and vessels - 1-1/2 2 2 1-1/2 1 1-1/2 1 1-1/2 as recommended by manufacturer 3 B. The insulation shall be oversized for installation over electric heating cable. Insulation shall have a factory-applied white fire-retardant vapor-barrier jacket of kraft paper and aluminum foil laminated together and reinforced with fiber glass yam. Fittings and valves shall be covered with the same material as the pipe, cut in segments to fit snugly without open spaces, held in place with copper wire or cement, and then covered with the same jacketing material as the pipe. Insulated fittings adjacent to vapor-barrier insulation shall be sealed with an acceptable vapor-barrier cement before installation of the finish jacket. Pipe insulation and vapor-barrier shall be continuous through hangers and supports. Insulation shall be coordinated with the pipe hangers and supports and where insulation protection shields are provided the top half section of pipe insulation at support locations shall be of the same specified density, and the bottom half insulation segments provided between the pipe� and the insulation protection 051093 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System improvements PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION PAGE 15145-2 l'!1 lJ �� l�J �' I shields shall have a density of not less than 6 Ib/cu ft. All insulation shall be covered with smooth aluminum weatherproof inetal or plastic preformed jacketing with a factory-attached moisture barrier. The jacket for the fittings shall consist of precision-formed smooth-sided sections and shall be sized to cover and protect the insulated fitting. Each section shall be manufactured from aluminum or PVC, and all joints shall be sealed with silicon mastic or solvent welding, to provide a continuous, air and weathertight joint. �trapping shall be 1/2-inch wide, Type 3003 aluminum or stainless steel. 'C. High Temperature Insulation: This type of insulation shall be employed for engine exhaust pipes, flues, and similar pipes and equipment with surface temperatures up to 1200 degrees F. The high temperature insulation shall consist of 4-inch thick calcium silicate or similar pre- molded blocks, in two layers of 2-inch thickness, each, with staggered joints, all applied over a 3/4-inch high metal rib lath. The inner layer shall be suitable for 1200 degrees F, and the second layer for 1000 degrees F. All bends, voids, joints, fittings and other parts of the piping system shall be filled with insulating cement. Aluminum lagging with preformed aluminum fittings shall be banded to the insulation in a similar fashion as specified for standard insulation. Allowance shall be made for thermal expansion. � D. Manufacturers, or Equal: Ls1 L� � Armstrong Contracting and Supply Corp.; 2. Certain-Teed Corporation; 3. Manville; 4. Owens-Corning �iber Glass Corp.; 5. P.P.G. Industries, Inc. PART 3 — EXECUTION � 3.1 INSTALLATION �`j' A. All insulation shall be installed by a qualified insulation contractor in strict accordance with the L� manufacture�'s recommendations. L! !�I � f�� LI � 051093 � � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System improvements - END OF SECTION - PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION PAGE 15145-3 � liJ SECTION 15183 — PRESSURE GAUGES AND SWITCHES PART 1 — GENERAL Q1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install pressure and vacuum gages as specified, � complete, including all fittings, snubbers, connections, gaskets, supports, and accessories in the locations shown or specified, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. � i� � � O � l� I�l LR� � � �� PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 PRESSURE AND VACUUM GAGES A. General: Pressure gages shall be provided on suction and discharge connections to pumps, as specified under pumps; on discharge connections from blowers and compressors; each side of pressure reducing valves; and where shown. Vacuum gages shall be provided for � vacuum pumps and where shown. In all locations (such as certain pump suction connections) where pressures may vary from below to above atmospheric head, compound gages shall be installed. � B. Gage Construction: Gages shall be industrial quality type� with Type 316 stainless steel movement and stainless steel or alloy case. Unless otherwise shown or specified, gages shall have a 3-1/2-inch dial, 1/4-inch threaded connection, a Type 316 stainless steal snubber- adapter, and a shut-off valve. Gages shall be calibrated to read in applicable units, with an accuracy of ± 1 percent, to 150 percent of the working pressure or vacuum of the pipe or vessel to which they are connected. All gages shall be vibration and shock resistant. C. Diaphragm Seal: Gages attached to systems involving chemical solutions, corrosive fluids, sludge, sewage, or other liquids containing solids, shall be equipped with diaphragm seals, or equal protective pressure or vacuum sensing devices, as follows: � D L�, � 1. For: chemical solutions, sewage, sludge, etc., where breakage does not create a major shutdown Marsh Instrument Company; Gage Manufacturers, or Equal: 051093 � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements Seals with PVC body for removable mounting rated at 200 psi, with Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts, 1/2-inch inlet, 1/4-inch outlet, liquid-filted with Teflon diaphragm for pressure, and suitable elastomer diaphragm for vacuum service. Manufacturer, or Equal: Plast-O-Matic Valves, Inc.; Harrington Ind. Plastics, Inc.; Utilities Supply. PRESSURE GAUGES AND SWITCHES PAGE 15183-1 2. Ashcroft Industrial instruments (Dresser); 3. Foxboro/Jordan, Inc.; 4. Marshalltown Instruments, Inc.; 5. U.S. Gauge Div. of Ametek. , E. Snubber Manufacturers, or Equal: 1. Cajon Company; � 2. Weksler Instruments, Corp. 2.2 SLEEVE PRESSURE GAGES A. General: Sleeved pressure gages shall be provided where shown. B. Construction: Pressure shall be sensed by a flexible sleeve contained in a flanged cast iron or steel spool or wafer body, and transmitted to the gage through a captive fiuid. The sleeve shall be of Buna N and fabricated.so as to isolate the body from the process liquid. Gages shall be calibrated to read in applicable units, with an accuracy of t 1 percent, to 150 percent of the working pressure of the system to which they are connected. C. Manufacturers, or Equal: � i 1. Red Valve Company, Inc.; . 2. Ronningen-Petter. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All gages shall be installed with the face in the vertical position, at the locations shown in the Contract Documents, and in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Care shall be taken to minimize the effect of water hammer or vibrations on the gages. In extreme cases, the gages may have to be mounted independently, with flexible connectors. - END OF SECTION - m 051093� PRESSURE GAUGES AND SWITCHES 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements � PAGE 15183-2 � � � � SECTION 15200 - VALVES,�GENERAL PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 � � B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all valves and valve actuators except where otherwise indicated. Valves and actuators in particular locations may require a combination of units, sensors, limit switches, and controls indicated in other Sections of the Specifications. � � � � � � � � C. Unit Responsibility: A single manufacturer shall be made responsible for coordination of design, assembly, testing, and furnishing of each valve; however, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to the OWNER for compliance with the requirements of each valve section. Unless indicated otherwise, the responsible manufacturer shall be the Manufacturer of the valve. � D. Single Manufacturer: Where two or more valves of the same type or size are required, the valves shall be furnished by the same Manufacturer. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. B. THE REQUIREMENT The CONTRACTOR shall provide all valves, actuators, and appurtenances, complete and operabie, in accordance with the Contract Documents. General: Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall contain the following information: 1 E Valve name, size, Cv factor, pressure rating, identification number (if any), and specification section number. Complete information on valve actuato�, including size, Manufacturer, model number, limit switches, and mounting. 3. Cavitation limits for all control valves. 4. Assembly drawings showing part nomenclature, materials, dimensions, weights, and � relationships of valve handles,� handwheels, position indicators, limit switches, integral control systems, needle valves, and control systems. � � � � ��J � C� Complete wiring diagrams and control system schematics. Valve Labeling: A schedule of valves to be labeled, indicating in each case the valve location and the proposed wording for the label. C. Owner's Manual: The Owner's Manual shall contain the required information for each valve. D. Spare Parts List: A Spare Parts List shall contain the required information for each valve assembly, where indicated. 021097 VALVES, GENERAL 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 15200-1 E. Factory Test Data: Where indicated, signed, dated, and certified factory test data for each valve requiring certification shali be submitted before shipment of the valve. The data shall also include certification of quality and test results for factory-applied coatings. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. General: All valves and gates shall be new and of current manufacture. All shut-off valves 6- inches and larger shall have actuators with position indicators. Buried valves shall be provided with valve boxes and covers containing position indicators and valve extensions. Manual shut- off valves mounted higher than 7-feet above working level shall be provided with chain actuators. . B. Valve Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, valve actuators shall be in accordance with Section 15201 - Valve and Gate Actuators. C. Protective Coating: The exterior surfaces of all valves and the wet interior surfaces of all � ferrous valves of sizes 4 inches and larger shall be coated in accordance with Section 09900 - Painting. The valve Manufacturer shall certify in writing that the required coating has been applied and tested in the manufacturing plant prior to shipment, in accordance with these Specifications. Flange faces of valves shall not be epoxy coated. D. Valve Labeling: Except when such requirement is waived by the ENGINEER in writing, a label shall be provided on all shut-off va�ves and control valves except for hose bibbs and chlorine cylinder valves. The label shall be of 1/16-inch plastic or stainless steel, minimum 2 inches by 4 inches in size, as indicated in Section 15005 - Piping Identification Systems, and shall by permanently attached to the valve or on the wall adjacent to the valve as directed by the ENGINEER. E. Valve Testing: As a minimum, unless otherwise indicated, each valve body 4 inches and larger shall be tested hydrostatically to 1.5 times its rated 100 degrees F design water-working pressure, for a period of 5 minutes, without showing any leaks or loss of pressure. In addition, each valve 4 inches and larger shall undergo a functional test to demonstrate satisfactory operation throughout its operating cycle, and a closure test at rated 100 degrees F water- working pressure for a period of 5 minutes to demonstrate tight shut-off. Stem seal leakage shall not be a cause for rejection. All valves 3 inches and smaller shall undergo the Manufacturer's standard test. . F. Certification: Prior to shipment, the CONTRACTOR shall submit for all valves over 12 inches in size, certified, notarized copies of the hydrostatic factory tests, showing compliance with the applicable standards of A1NWA, ANSI, and ASTM. G. Valve Marking: All valve bodies shall be permanently marked in accordance with MSS SP25 - Standard Marking Systems for Valves, Fittings, Flanges, and Unions. 021097 � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements VALVES, GENERAL PAGE 15200-2 L�J L�J [aJ 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: All materials shall be suitable for the intended application. Materials not specified shall be high-grade standard commercial qualiry, free from all defects and imperfections that might affect the serviceability of the product for the purpose for which it is intended. Unless otherwise specified, valve and actuator bodies shall conform to the following requirements: � 1. Cast Iron: Close-grained gray cast iron, conforming to ASTM A 48 - Specification for Gray Iron Castings, Class 30, or to ASTM A 126 - Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. � �� LiJ 2: Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536 - Specification for Ductile Iron Castings, or to ASTM A 395 - Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures. 3. Steel: ASTM A 216 - Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon Suitable for Fusion Welding for High-Temperature Senrice, or to ASTM A 515 - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service. 4. Bronze: ASTM B 62 - Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings, � and valve stems not subject to dezincification shall conform to ASTM B 584 - Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. � 5. Stainless Steel: Stainless steel valve and operator bodies and trim shall conform to ASTM A 351 - Specification for Steel Castings, Austenitic, for High-Temperature Service, Grade CF8M, or shall be Type 316 stainless steel. � 2.3 VALVE CONSTRUCTION � � A. Bodies: Valve bodies shall be cast, forged, or welded of the materials indicated, with smooth interior passages. Wall thicknesses shall be uniform in agreement with the applicable standards for each type of valve, without casting defects, pinholes, or other defects that could weaken the body. All welds on welded bodies shall be done by certified welders and shall be ground smooth. Valve ends shall be as indicated, and be rated for the maximum temperature and pressure to which the valve will be subjected. � B. Bonnets: Valve bonnets shall be clamped, screwed, or flanged to the body and shall be of the same material, temperature, and pressure rating as the body. The bonnets shall have provision for the stem seal with the necessary glands, packing nuts, or yokes. �� F� u �' C. Stems: Valve stems shall be of the materials indicated, or, if not indicated, of the best commercial material for the specific service, with adjustable stem packing, O-rings, Chevron V- type packing, or other suitable seal. Where subject to dezincification, bronze valve stems shall conform to ASTM B 62, containing not more than 5 percent of zinc or more than 2 percent of aluminum, with a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi, a minimum yield strength of 40,000 psi, and an elongation of at least 10 percent in 2 inches. Where dezincification is not a problem, bronze conforming to ASTM B 584 may be used. D. Internal Parts: Internal parts and valve trim shall be as indicated for each individual valve. Where not indicated, valve trim shall be of Type 316 stainless steel or other best suited material. 021097 VALVES, GENERAL 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 15200-3 E. Nuts and Bolts: All nuts and bolts on valve flanges and supports shall be in accordance with Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metalwork. 2.4 VALVE ACCESSORIES A. All valves shall be furnished complete with the accessories required to provide a functional system. � 2.5 SPARE PARTS A. Where indicated, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish the required spare parts suitably packaged and labeled with the valve name, location, and identification number. The CONTRACTOR shall also fumish the name, address, and telephone number of the nearest distributor for the spare parts of each valve. All spare parts are intended for use by the OWNER, only, after expiration of the guarantee period. 2.6 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: All valve manufacturers shall have a successful record of not less than 5 years in the manufacture of the valves indicated. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION , A. General: All valves, actuating units, stem extensions, valve boxes, and accessories shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated. All gates �� shall be adequately braced to prevent warpage and bending under the intended use. Valves shall be firmly supported to avoid undue stresses on the pipe. L� '� Access: All valves shall be installed with easy access for actuation, removal, and maintenance and to avoid interference between valve actuators and structural members, handrails, or other equipment. Valve Accessories: Where combinations of valves, sensors, switches, and controls are indicated, the CONTRACTOR shall properly assemble and install such items so that all systems are compatible and operating properly. The relationship between interrelated items shall be clearly noted on shop drawing submittals. - END OF SECTION - � 021097 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements VALVES, GENERAL PAGE 15200-4 � � PART 1 — G�NERAL � 1.1 A. � B. � � � � � � SECTION 15201 - VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS THE REQUIREMENT The CONTRACTOR shall provide all valve and gate actuators and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all valves and gates, except where othenivise indicated in the Contract Documents. C. Unit Responsibility: A single manufacturer shall be made responsible for furnishing the WORK and for coordination of design, assembly, testing, and installation of the WORK of each type of valve and gate; however, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to the OWNER for compliance with ttie requirements of each valve and gate section. Unless otherwise indicated, the single manufacturer shall be the Manufacturer of the valve or gate. Single Manufacturer: Where two or more valve or gate actuators of the same type or size are required, the actuators shall all be produced by the same Manufacturer. CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS General: Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals and Section 15200 - Valves, General. 4 Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings of all actuators shall be submitted together with the valve and gate submittals as a complete package. D. 1.2 A. B. PART 2 — PRODUCTS � 2.1 GENERAL � � �� l�J A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, all shut-off and throttling valves, and externally-actuated valves and gates, shall be provided with manual or power actuators. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all actuators complete and operable with mounting hardware, motors, gears, controls, wiring, solenoids, handwheels, levers, chains, and extensions, as applicable. All actuators shall be capable of holding the valve in any intermediate position between fully-open and fully-closed without creeping or fluttering. All wires of motor-driven actuators shall be identified by unique numbers. . B. Manufacturers: Where indicated, certain valves and gates may be provided with actuators manufactured by the valve or gate Manufacturer. Where actuators are furnished by different manufacturers, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate selection to have the fewest number of manufacturers possible. � � C. Materials: All actuators shall be current models of the best commercial quality materials and liberally-sized for the maximum expected torque. All materials shall be suitable for the � environment in which the valve or gate is to be installed. �J � l�l D. Mounting: All actuators shall be securely mounted by means of brackets or hardware specially designed and sized for this purpose and of ample strength. The word "open" shall be cast on each valve or actuator with an arrow indicating the direction to open in the counter- 0728g8 VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed Sysem Improvements PAGE 15201-1 � clockwise direction. All gear and power actuators shall be equipped with position indicators. ' Where possible, manual actuators shall be located between 48 and 60 inches above the floor or the permanent working platform. E. Standard: Unless otherwise indicated and where applicable, all actuators. shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 540 - AWWA Standard for Power-Actuating Devices for Valves and Sluice Gates. F. Functionality: Electric, pneumatic, and hydraulic actuators shall be coordinated with the power requirements of Division 16 and instrumentation equipment indicated in Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. 2.2 MANUAL ACTUATORS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, all valves and gates shall be furnished with manual actuators. Valves in sizes up to and including 4 inches shall have direct acting lever or handwheel actuators of the Manufacturer's best standard design. Larger valves and gates shall have gear-assisted manual actuators, with an operating pull of maximum 60 pounds on the rim of the handwheel. All buried and submerged gear-assisted valves, all gates, all gear- assisted valves for pressures higher than 250 psi, all valves 30 inches in diameter and larger, and where so indicated, shall have worm-gear actuators, hermetically-sealed and grease- packed, where buried or submerged. All other valves 6 inches to 24 inches in diameter may have traveling-nut actuators, worm-gear actuators, spur- or bevel-gear actuators, as appropriate for each valve. � B. Buried Valves: Unless otherwise indicated, all buried valves shall have extension stems to grade, with square nuts or floor stands, position indicators, and cast-iron or steel pipe extensions with valve boxes, covers, and operating keys. Where so indicated, buried valves shall be in cast-iron, concrete, or similar valve boxes with covers of ample size to allow operation of the valve actuators. Covers of valve boxes shall be permanently labeled as requested by the local Utility Company or the ENGINEER. Wrench-nuts shall comply with AWWA C 500 -Metal - Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service, and a minimum of 2 operating keys, or one key per 10 va�ves, whichever is greater, shall be furnished. C. Chain Actuator: Manually-activated valves with the stem located more than 7 feet above the floor or operating level shall be furnished with chain drives consisting of sprocket-rim chain wheels, chain guides, and operating chains, and be provided by the valve Manufacturer. The wheel and guide shall be of ductile-iron, cast-iron, or steel, and the chain shall be hot-dip galvanized steel or stainless steel, extending to 5 feet 6 inches above the operating floor level. The valve stem of chain-actuated valves shall be extra strong to allow for the extra weight and chain pull. Hooks shall be provided'for chain storage where chains interfere with pedestrian traffic. . D. Floor Boxes: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron or steel floor boxes and� covers to fit the slab thickness shall be provided for all operating nuts in or below concrete slabs. For operating nuts in the concrete slab, the cover shall be bronze-bushed. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER A. Field Adjustments � L�; L+'J � L�J � L�'; [+�J � LfJ L'J L#� � � '� � Field representatives of manufacturers of valves or gates with pneumatic, hydraulic, or � 072898 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed Sysem Improvements VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS PAG E 15201=2 � � � � � � � [.3 � � � � � � � � � � � a electric actuators shall adjust actuator controls and limit-switches in the field for the required function. 32 INSTALLATION . A. All valve and gate actuators and accessories shall be installed in accordance with Section 15200 - Valves, General. Actuators shall be located to be readily accessible for operation and maintenance, without obstructing walkways. Actuators shall not be mounted where shock or vibrations will impair their operation, nor shall the support systems be attached to handrails, process piping, or mechanical equipment. - END OF SECTION - 072898 � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed Sysem Improvements VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS PAGE 15201-3 � � PART 1 — GENERAL i � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � 1.1 A. B. 1.2 SECTION 15203 - CHECK VALVES THE REQUIREMENT The CONTRACTOR shall provide check valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. ' The requirements of Section 15200 - Valves, General apply to this Section. CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish submittals in a�cordance with Section 15200 - Valves, General. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 � B. C. D. E. F. SWING CHECK VALVES (3-INCH AND LARGER) General: Swing check valves for water, sewage, sludge, and general service shall be of the outside lever and spring or weight type, in accordance with ANSI/AW1NA C 508 - Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 in. through 24 in. NPS, unless otherwise indicated, with full- opening passages, designed for a water-working pressure of 150 psi. They shall have a flanged cover piece to provide access to the disc. Body: The valve body and cover shall be of cast iron conforming to ASTM A 126 - Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, with flanged ends conforming to ANSI/ASME B 16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800, or mechanical joint ends, as indicated. Disc: The valve disc shall be of cast iron, ductile iron, or bronze conforming to ASTM B 62 - Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. Seat and Rings: The valve seat and rings shall be of bronze to conforming ASTM B 62 or B 148 - Specification for Aluminum-Bronze Castings, or of Buna-N. Hinge Pin: The hinge pin shall be of bronze or stainless steel. Manufacturers, or Equal: � ' 1. American Flow Control (Darling) 2. APCO (Valve and Primer Corp.) 3. Kennedy Valve 4. . Mueller Company (Grinnell Corporation 102094 � , 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements CHECK VALVES RAGE 15203-1 5. Stockham Valves and Fittings' 2.2 SWING CHECK VALVES (2-1/2-INCH AND SMALLER) A. General: Swing check valves for steam, water, oil, or gas in sizes 2-1/2-inch and smaller shall be suitable for a steam pressure of 150 psi and a cold water pressure of 300 psi. They shall have screwed ends, unless othenivise indicated, and screwed caps. B. Body: The valve body and cap shall be of bronze conforming to ASTM B 61 - Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings, or ASTM B 62 - Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings, and with threaded ends conforming to ANSI/ASME 61.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (inch). � C. Disc: Valves for steam service shall have bronze or brass discs conforming to ASTM B 16 - Specification for Free-Cutting Brass Rod, Bar, and Shapes for Use in Screw Machines, and for cold water, oil, an� gas service replaceable composition discs. D. Hinge Pin: The hinge pins shall be of bronze or stainless steel. E. Manufacturers, or Equal: 1. Crane Company 2. Milwaukee Valve Company 3. Stockham Valves and Fittings 4. Wm. Powell Company 2.3 PLASTIC BALL CHECK VALVES A. General: Plastic ball check valves for corrosive fluids, in sizes up to 4-inch, shall be used for vertical up-flow conditions only, unless the valves are provided with spring actions. B. Construction: The valve bodies and balls shall be of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC), polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), ar polypropylene (PP) construction, as best suited for each individual service condition. They shall have unions with socket connections, or flanged ends conforming to ANSI/ASME 616.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, class 150. All seals shall have Viton O-rings and valve design shall minimize possibiliry of the balls sticking or chattering. The valves shall be suitable for a maximum working non-shock pressure of 150 psi at 73 degrees F. C. Manufacturers, or Equal: 1. ASAHI-AMERICA; 2. George Fischer, Inc.; 3. NIBCO Inc. (Chemtrol Division); 102094 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements CHECK VALVES PAGE 15203-2 � � � � � l� C � � � � lJ lR' C� � !�J ��J � 2.4 PLASTIC SWING OR Y-CHECK VALVES A. General: Plastic swing or Y-check valves for corrosive fiuids, in sizes up to 8 inches or as available, may be used for horizontal or vertical up-flow conditions. B. Construction: The valve bodies and discs or piston shall be of PVC, PP, or PVDF construction, as best suited for each individual service condition. They shall have flanged ends conforming to ANSI/ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, class 150, and flanged top access covers, and they shall shut positively at no-flow conditions. The seats and seals shall be of EPDM, Teflon, or Viton. The PVC valves shall be rated for a maximum non-shock working pressure of 150 psi at 73 degrees F for sizes 3-inch and smaller. For larger sizes and other materials and temperatures the pressure rating will be lower. C. Manufacturers, or Equal: 1. ASAHI-AMERICA; 2. George Fischer, Inc. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All valves shall be installed in accordance with provisions of Section 15200 - Valves, General. - END OF SECTION - � 102094 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements CHECK VALVES PAGE 15203-3 � SECTION 15204 - BALL VALVES � PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT � A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide ball valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. � B. D c. D. � 1.2 �"j A. �! � � ��1 L' l�' � lal �� J ��I � The requirements of Section 15200 - Valves, General apply to this Section. The requirements of Section 15201 - Valve and Gate Actuators apply to this Section. The requirements of Section 11258 - Chemical Feeding Equipment, General apply to this Section. CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS The CONTRACTOR shall furnish submittals in accordance with Section 15200 - Valves, General. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC BAL� VALVES A. General: Plastic ball valves for corrosive fluids shall be made of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC), or polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), as recommended by the Manufacturer for the specific application. All valves shall have manual actuators in - accordance with Section 15201 - Valve and Gate Actuators, unless otherwise indicated. B. Construction: All plastic ball valves shall have union ends or flanged ends to mate with ANSI B 16.5, class 150, for easy removal. The balls shall have full size ports and Teflon seats. All body seals, union O-ring seals, and stem seals shall be in accordance with the corrosion resistance requirements of Section 11258 — Chemical Feeding Equipment, General. The valves shall be suitable for a maximum working non-shock pressure of 150 psi at 73 degrees F for PVC, with decreasing ratings for higher temperatures and other plastics. C. Manufacturers, or Equal: 1. ASAHI-America � 2. George Fischer, Inc. 3. NIBCO Inc., (Chemtrol) ' 4. Watts Regulator PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL � A. All valves shall be installed in accordance with provisions of Section 15200 - Valves, .General. Care shall be taken that all valves in plastic lines are well supported at each end of the valve. 061897 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements BALL VALVES PAGE 15204-1 - END OF SECTION - 0 � • 061897 BALL VALVES 1333018 — South Holly WTP , Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 15204-2 � � � � � � � � SECTION 15205 — DIAPHRAGM VALVES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. B. C. 1.2 A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide diaphragm valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. The requirements of Section 15200 - Valves, General apply to this Section. ' The requirements of Section 15201 - Valve Actuators apply to this Section. CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS The CONTRACTQR shall furnish submittals in accurdance with Section 15200 - Valves, General. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Construction: Diaphragm valves shall be of the weir type, unless otherwise indicated, and be � of the material combination best-suited for each individual application. They shall be suited for bi-directional throttling service and installation in any position, with bu6ble-tight shut-off. Valves on outlets and drain nozzles of storage tanks shall have lined metal bodies. L!J l�] B. Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, all diaphragm valves shall have manual hand-wheel actuators with position indicators and transparent plastic stem covers of clear acrylic, polycarbonate, or similar material. Vafve actuators shall be in,accordance with Section 15201 - Valve Actuators. The handwheels shall be of cast-iron, aluminum, or polypropylene. � 22 PLASTIC BODY DIAPHRAGM VALVES L�' � C�J � � � A. Construction: Unless otherwise indicated, valve bodies shall be of PVC, CPVC, PP, or PVDF construction, as best-suited for each individual service, with union ends, screwed ends, socket- welded ends, or flanged ends to ANSI/ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, drilled to 150 Ib. dimensions, as indicated. The valve bonnets shall be flanged and of PVC, PP, or PVDF construction. The valve stem shall be of carbon steel or stainless steel with brass, bronze, or cast-iron sleeve and a compressor of aluminum, brass, bronze, or cast-iron. The bolts, nuts, and washers shall be of stainless steel and the stem and bonnet seals of Viton or Buna-N O-rings. Valves in sizes 1/2-inch through 4-inch shall have a pressure rating of 150 psi at 104 degrees F, diminishing to not less than 50 psi for larger sizes. B. Diaphragm: The diaphragms of all valves shall be of the best-suitable material for any given service. Unless otherwise recommended by the Manufacturer, the diaphragm material shall be chlorosulfonated polyethylene such as Hypalon or equal, except that the diaphragms for valves in chlorine solution and chlorine gas lines shall be Teflon. All diaphragms shall be of rugged, reinforced construction, be oil resistant, and be designed for long life. C. Manufacturers, or Equal: 112095 � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements DIAPHRAGM VALVES PAGE 15205-1 1. ASAHVAmerica; 2. George Fischer, Inc. (+GF+) 3. IlT Dia-Flo (Grinnell) , 4. Mc Canna, Inc. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL , - � A. All valves shall be installed in accordance with provisions of Section 15200 - Valves, General. Care shall be taken that all valves in plastic lines are well-supported at each end of the valve. ;. - END OF SECTION - 112095 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements DIAPHRAGM VALVES PAG E 15205-2 ' �J (+j PART 1 — GENERAL r..� 1.1 � A. � B. � C, 1.2 � A. 2.1 GENERAL � PART 2 — PRODUCTS � LJ � � � L�� l�J A. All buried valves shall be of the inside screw, non-rising stem type. The valve actuators shall be as indicated, with counter-clockwise opening stems, in accordance with Section 15201 - Valve and Gate Actuators. 2.2 METAL-SEATED GATE VALVES (3-INCH AND LARGER) A. Construction: Metal-seated gate valves for water and sewage service shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C 500 - Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. The valve bodies shall be of cast iron conforming to ASTM A 126 - Specifications for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, or ductile iron conforming either to ASTM A 395 - Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures, or to ASTM A 536 - Specification for Ductile Iron Castings, with flanged, bell and spigot, or mechanical joint-ends as indicated. Body and bonnett wall thickness shall be equal to or greater than the minimum wall thickness as listed in Table 2 of ANSI/AWWA C500. The design working water pressure shall be 200 psig for valves 12 inches and smaller and 150 psig for larger valves. The valves may be of the double-disc type for tighter shut-off, or of the solid-wedge type, with rising or non-rising stem. For sewage or fluids containing solids, an outside thread shall be used. Valves.l4-inch and larger installed in vertical pipes shall be fitted with bronze slides, tracks, rollers, and scrapers to assist the travel of the gate assembly. Gate valves 14-inch and larger shall be furnished with bypass assemblies. ('j B. Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, all gate valves shall have manual actuators in �,) accordance with Section 15201 - Valve and Gate Actuators. � �� L�J C� C. Manufacturers, or Equat THE REQUIREMENT SECTION 15206 - GATE VALVES The CONTRACTOR shall provide gate valves and appurtenances, cor�plete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. The requirements of Section 15200 - Valves, General apply to this Section. The requirements of Section 15201 - Valve and Gate Actuators apply to this Section. CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS The CONTRACTOR shall furnish submittals in acc�rdance with Section 15200 - Valves, General. � 1. American Flow Control 2. Clow Valve Co. 3. Crane Valves 4. Kennedy Valve 5. M& H Valve Company 070194 . 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements GATE VALVES PAGE 15206-1 6. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. 7. Mueller Company (Grinnell Corp.) 8. Stockham Valves and Fittings 2.3 KNIFE-GATE VALVES (2- to 96-inch) A. Construction: Knife-gate valves shall be of the flanged or wafer design, with raised face and resilient seats for positive seating. Wetted parts shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel and the gates shall be finish-ground on both sides to prevent packing or seat damage. Valves 2- to 12-inch in size shall be furnished with cast stainless steel bodies; valves 14-inch and larger shall have semi-steel bodies with stainless steel linings. The valve stem shall be of stainless steel with a long life packing. The valves shall be rated for tight shut-off at the following pressures: Valve sizes 4- to 12-inch Valve sizes larger than 12-inch 150 psi (bi-directional) 50 psi � C�!J � � LJ ►J B. Actuators: Knife-gates shall have outside-screw and yoke-rising stems with manual handwheel actuators, unless otherwise indicated, in accordance with Section 15201 - Valve � and Gate Actuators. C. Manufacturers, or Equal 2.4 /� � C. 1. DeZurik Corporation 2. Fabri-Valves 3. Rovang, Inc. RESILIENT-SEATED GATE VALVES (3- to 16-inch) General: Resilient-seated gate valves may be provided in lieu of inetal-seated double-disc or solid-disc gate valves, at the discretion of the ENGINEER. Construction: Resilient-seated gate valves shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C 509 - Resilient- Seated Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems. The valves shall be suitable for a design working water pressure of 200 psig, with flanged, bell and spigot, or mechanical joint ends. The valve body, bonnet, and disc shall be of cast iron or ductile iron and the disc or body shall be rubber-coated. Body and bonnet wall thickness shall be equal to or greater than the minimum wall thickness s listed in Table 2 of ANSI/AWWA C509. The stem, stem nuts, glands, and bushings shall b of bronze, with the stem seal per ANSI/AWWA C 509. Actuators: Unless othe ise indicated, resilient-seated gate valves shall have manual actuators in accordance with �Sectiorr 15201 '- Valve and Gate Actuators. I D. Manufacturers, or Equaf I � 1. American Flow ContrQl 2. Clow Valve Co. 3. Kennedy Valve 4. M& H Valve Company " 5. Mueller Company (Gri�nell Corp.) 6. Stockham Valves and �ittings 070194 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements L�J I� � �� t#J L�J � � � GATE VALVES D PAGE 15206-2 a LJ Lil � � � 2.5 GATE VALVES (SMALLER THAN 3-INCH) A. Construction: Gate valves, smaller than 3-inch, for general purpose use, shall be non-rising stem, heavy-duty type for industrial service, with screwed or soldered ends to match the piping. The bodies shall have union bonnets of bronze conforming to ASTM B 62 - Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. The stems shall be of bronze conforming to ASTM B 62, or ASTM B 371 - Specification for Copper-Zinc-Silicon Alloy Rod. The solid wedges shall be of bronze conforming to ASTM B 62. The valves shall have malleable iron handwheels, unless otherwise indicated, and stem seals shall be of Teflon-impregnated or other acceptable non-asbestos packing. All valves shall have a pressure rating of minimum 125 psi steam, and 200 psi coldwater, unless otherwise indicated. B. Manufacturers, or Equal � 1. Crane Company 2. Milwaukee Valve Company 3. Wm. Powell Company � 4. Stockham Valves and Fittings 5. Walworth Company � 2.6 HIGH-PRESSURE GATE VALVES (2- TO 12-INCH) C;J L�] A. Construction: High-pressure gate valves, except for buried valves, shall have cast iron bodies and flanged bonnets with outside screw & yoke rising stems conforming to ASTM A 126 - Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, with 250 psi flanged ends. The valves shall be rated for 250 psig steam and 500 psig cold water working pressure. The solid wedges shall be of bronze or cast iron, bronze-fitted and the stem shall be of bronze with non-asbestos fiber packing. � B. Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, high-pressure gate valves shall have cast iron or Q ductile iron handwheels with 2-inch square operating nuts, in accordance with Section 15201 - Valve and Gate Actuators. � � I�J� C. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Crane Company 2. Milwaukee Valve Company 3. Wm. Powell Company 4. Stockham Valves and Fittings 5. Walworth Company 2.7 PLASTIC GATE VALVES (1-1/2- TO 14-INCH) � A. Construction: Plastic gate valves shall have PVC bodies with ANSI 150 Ib. flanged ends, and polypropylene or CPVC-SBR-lined plugs for tight shut-off. The non-rising stem shall be of PVC or Type 304 stainless steel construction, with O-ring seal. The valves shall have a ["� coldwater pressure rating of 150 psig for sizes 1-1/2- through 8-inch, 110 psig for size 10-inch, �,j and 70 psig for sizes 12- and 14-inch. B. Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, PVC gate valves shall have manual handwheel �• actuators with position indicators, in accordance with Section 15201 - Valve and Gate Actuators. � � 070194 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements GATE VALVES PAGE 15206-3 C. Manufacturers, or Equal � 1. ASAHUAmerica PART 3 — EXECUTION I 3.1 GENERAL , , , A. All gate valves shall be installed in accordance with the provisions of Section 15200 - Valves, General. Care shall be tal�en that all valves in plastic lines are well supported at each end of the valve. I - END OF SECTION - I i' I� 1 �� 070194 I 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvemer�4s GATE VALVES PAGE 15206-4 L�� LJ � PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 � A. � B. � 12 A. � � � � � � � � � � 1',I SECTION 15215 - PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES THE REQUIREMENT The CONTRACTOR shall provide pressure reducing valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. The requirements of Section 15200 - Valves, General, apply to this Section. CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS The CONTRACTOR shall furnish submittals in accordance with Section 15200 - Valves, General, including a cavitation study from the valve manufacturer. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Function: Pressure reducing valves shall reduce a higher upstream pressure to a pre-set, lower, constant pr�ssure, regardless of fluctuations in the upstream pressure. B. Operation: The valves shall be hydraulically operated, with diaphragm or piston direct action, pilot-controlled, per paragraph 22, and shall be of the globe or angle pattern as indicated. All necessary repairs shall be possible without removing the valves from the pipeline. The smaller direct-acting valves with threaded ends per paragraph 2.3, shall be suitable for water or air service and shall be of the globe patterns. 2.2 FLANGED VALVES, SIZES 1 1/2 INCHES THROUGH 42 INCHES A. Valve Body: The valve body shall be of cast iron to ASTM A 48 - Gray Iron Castings, or ASTM A 126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, with 125 Ib flanged ends to ANSI/ASME B 16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800, or the body shall be of ductile iron to ASTM A 536 - Ductile Iron Castings, with 150 Ib � flanged ends to ANSI/ASME B 16.42 - Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. The valve cover shall be flanged and be the same material as the body. B. Valve Trim: The valve stems with position indication, springs, body seat rings, and all bolts, nuts, and washers shall be of Type 302, 303, or 316 stainless steel. The valve stems shall have top and bottom guides. All rubber parts shall be of Buna-N. The diaphragms shall be of Nylon-reinforced Buna-N, supported firmly between body and valve cover. The valve pistons and piston liners shall be bronze to ASTM B 62 - Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. C. Valve Controls: The valve shall be provided with a complete, externally mounted control system, including speed control needle valves, strainers, check valve, isolation valves, and all necessary copper or stainless steel connecting tubing and fittings. The controls shall be capable of achieving all the flow and speed adjustment indicated. D. Factory Tests and Warranty: All valves shall be factory tested with a hydrostatic test and a � 122095 ' PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES Q 1333018 - South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 15215-1 i I functional test and a test ertificate shall be submitted to the ENGINEER prior to delivery of the valve. The vaive shall b warranted for a period of 3 years from the date of shipment to be free of defects in materials an workmanship E. Operating Conditions:l The valve shall be designed to operate under the following conditions: I 1. Maximum inlet pres ure (psi) - 150 2. Minimum inlet press re (psi) - 40 3. Minimum outlet pres5ure (psi) - 50 4. Maximum�flow (gpm� - 500 5. Minimum flow (gpm) i � - 100 6. Valve size (inches) I - 6 7. Size of pipeline (inch�s diameter) - 6 F. Spare Parts: The followin spare parts shall be furnished in accordance with Section 15200 - Valves, General:: � 1. One set of,all resilien� seals and discs ' 2. One diaphragm (for djaphragm valves, only) � G. Manufacturers, or equal I 1. Cla-Val Company 2. Golden-Anderson I � , 3. OCV Control Valves �� 4. Ross Valve Mfg. Co.,llnc. 5. Singer Valve, Inc. � 6. Watts, ACV � � PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALlATION ' � ' A. All valves shall be installed iri accordance with provisions of Section 15200 - Valves, General. - END OF SECTION - 122095 � I PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES 1333018 - South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements I PAGE 15215•2 L#J � L+�J � L�' L�; LJ � � � LJ � � � IwJ lJ L�J � l�J SECTION 15230 - MISCELLANEOUS VALVES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all miscellaneous valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 15200 - Valves, General, apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish submittals in accordance with Section 15200 — Valves, General. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 CORPORATION STOPS A. Unless otherwise indicated, corporation stops shall be made of solid brass for key operation, with screwed ends with corporation thread or ironpipe thread, as required. B. Manufacturer, or Equal: 1. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. 2. James Jones Company (Watts, AC� 3. Mueller Company (Grinnell Corporation) 22 SOLENOID VALVES A. Solenoid valves shall be of the size, type, and class indicated and shall be designed for not less than 150 psi water-working pressure. Valves for water, air, or gas service shall have brass or bronze body with screwed ends, stainless steel trim and spring, Teflon or other resilient seals with material best suited for the temperature and fluid handled. Solenoid valves in corrosive environment shall have stainless steel bodies. For chemicals and all corrosive fluids, solenoid valves with Teflon bodies and springs or other suitable materials shall be used. Enclosures shall be NEMA rated in accordance with the area designations of Section 16050 — Basic Materials and Methods (Electr.ical). All coil ratings shall be for continuous duty. For electrical characteristics see electrical drawings or specifications. B. Manufacturers, or Equal: 1. For general duty: a. Automatic Switch Co. (ASCO), Model "RED HAT" b. c. � Skinner Valve-Honeywell, Inc. Magnatrol Valve Corporation J. D. Gould Co. 121995 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements MISCELLANEOUS VALVES PAGE 15230-1 2. For corrosive fluids: a. Valcor Enginee�ing Corporation b. +GF+ Plastic Systems, Inc. PART 3 — EXECUTION � 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Backflow preventers shall �e installed in potable water lines where required by appiicable codes or regulations, and w erever there is any danger of contamination, and where indicated. B. All valves shall be installed �in accordance with the Manufacturer's printed recommendations, and with provisions of Section 15200 — Valves, General. C. All backflow preventers, as urell as air and vacuum release valves, shall have piped outlets to the nearest acceptable drain, firmly supported, and installed in such a way as to avoid splashing and wetting of floo��s and obstruction of traffia � - END OF SECTION - i' 121995 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements MISCELLANEOUS VALVES PAGE 15230-2 � � � � � � SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 � 1.2 THE REQUIREMENT The CONTRACTOR shall provide plumbing and specialties, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS A. All work shall in strict accordance with the Uniform State Plumbing Code, and codes of the State of Texas, City of Fort Worth, and any other authorities having jurisdiction. The CONTRACTOR shall have required certifications and be`thoroughly familiar with the local codes. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all necessary permits. B. Care shall be taken at all times to protect floors, stairways, and walls during the make-up, � erection of piping, and placing of equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall remove all stains and repair all damage before final acceptance of the work. � � � � � �� C. If, during the construction of this project, the ENGINEER finds materials that have identifying marks removed or lack such marks completely, he may reject such items until the CONTRACTOR has furnished proof that said items conform to the Specifications. Adequacy and extent of such proof shall be determined by the ENGINEER. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. CQ 2.2 Plumbing piping, fixtures, specialties, and equipment shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the intended usage. Floor drains or floor sinks shall be provided for all equipment drains. No equipment drains shall discharge to floor slabs. � � PIPING AND FITTINGS A. All cast iron sanitary, storm, and vent pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in j� accordance with and shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and �� Fittings. Dimensions of cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be as given in Table 2 of ASTM A 74. L�.I � � B. Hub-Less cast iron soil pipe and fittings with Clamp-All Type pipe couplings, or equal, shall be used for above ground sanitary, storm, and vent piping where approved for use by local authorities. Hub-Less cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall meet CISPI Standard 301. Pipe couplings shall have Hi-Torque capacity and meet FM standard 1680. C. All copper pipe and fittings for potable and service water 3 inches and smaller shall be Type L medium wall hard temper copper pipe with soldered fittings. a D. Vent piping passing through the roof shall be flashed. Flashing shall extend a minimum 12 inches from the outer surface of the pipe in all directions. Flashing shall be fabricated from 090798 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES a 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 15430-1 4-pound lead sheet. 2.3 A. L=� C. 2.4 I_1 � INSULATION All hot and cold water pi ing, valves, fittings, and exposed horizontal sanitary, storm, and vent piping shall be proYided with one-inch thick insulation in accordance with Section 15145 - Pipe and Equipmient Insulation. Cover all valves, flanges� fittings and ends of insulation with a pre-molded high and low temperature PVC fitting �over or end cap, or similar preformed units. The pre-molded cover shall be sized to receive the same thickness of insulation as used in the adjacent piping and shall be in acc�rdance with Section 15145 - Pipe and Equipment Insulation. Exposed supply and drai piping for lavatories shall be insulated under the wash basins to prevent burns and abrasi ns to handicapped persons. Removable insulated covers shall be Plumberex Specialty roducts Handy-Shield type, or equal. HANGERS, SUPPORTS, ND MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORK � General: The CONTRA TOR shall provide all necessary hangers and supports. No perforated strap hangers �nd no wire supports will be permitted. Pipe supports shall be as indicated in Section 15006' - Pipe Supports. � Hangers supporting insul�ted piping shall be sized to fit the pipe plus the insulation. Insulation at support points shall be provided with metal shields to prevent damage to the insulation. � spacin for steel and cast iron pipe is given in Section 15006 - Pipe C. Spacing D. E. F. G. PP • 2. Co er i e su ort � acin shall be not more than 6 feet between su orts. PP P P PP P 9 PP 1. Pipe support Su orts Rod sizes for pipe hangers�shall be as recommended by the hanger manufacturer. Pipe hangers used to supp rt uninsulated copper piping shall be copper or copper plated. All vertical piping shall be supported at the base with fittings made for this purpose or supported from the nearest horizontal member or floor with a riser extension pipe clamp. Anchors that are installed into existing concrete shall be Grinnel Figure 117, Modern Figure 740, or equal expansion case inserts. Drill clean holes for insertion of case and patch concrete around holelas required. H. Continuous slotted concret inserts, if used, shall be Crawford Figure 148, Fee & Mason Figure 9000, or equal. he CONTRACTOR shall provide secondary angle supports between main inserts to f�andle the loads which can be properly supported by such arrangement. I I. Concrete inserts shall be a: indicated in Section 15006 - Pipe Supports. All inserts shall be galvanized. , 090798 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 15430-2 � I�J � � � L�J �� L�'J � h� �� '� LJ � � � C�' � 2.5 � A. � ��i � PIPE SLEEVES Where pipes pass through floors, sleeves shall extend 3 inches above the finished floor. Where pipes pass through walls, sleeves shall be flush with the wall surface. B. All sleeves shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, one size larger than the pipe passing through, or where pipe is insulated, one size larger than the pipe plus insulation. C. At exposed wall or ceiling surfaces, the CONTRACTOR shall install a suitable chromium plated brass wall plate approved by the ENGINEER. � 2.6 VALVES A. General: All water shut off valves shall be the gate type, except on fixture supply piping ('� where globe valves shall be used. (r.i B. All interior hose valves shall be provided as indicated. The globe valve shown shall be as � given herein before for valves. The hose nipple shown on the detail shall be a female iron pipe thread inlet with hose thread outlet. All hose bibbs shall be 3/4-inch one-inch in size. � C. Gate,- globe, check, plug, and angle valves shall be in accordance with the following: 1. Section 15206 - Gate Valves � L�J 2. Section 15203 - Check Valves D. The CONTRACTOR shall provide shutoff valves on cold water piping at entrances to pipe chases and other inaccessible areas and wherever indicated or required to obtain the maximum efficiency for shut-off control on the water system. Shut off valves shall be placed on all hot and cold water connections to equipment and fixtures. Lavatory and sink stops with wheel handle shall be brass with chrome plating. Extra long barrel stops shall be used where supply piping is concealed behind partitions. � E. All valves shall open by turning counterclockwise and shall have suitable handwheels or nuts as required. � F. Provide a temperature and pressure relief valve for each water heater. Provide pressure relief valves at other locations where indicated. Relief valves shall be equipped with manual test levers. The CONTRACTOR shall provide piping to convey relief valve � discharge to the nearest floor drain, the building exterior, or as approved by the ENGINEER. �"'j 2.7 ACCESS DOORS AND COVERS U � I�J A. Access doors, where required in ceilings for access to valves, controls, and other equipment, shall be Karp Assoc., Maspeth, N.Y., Style DSC-210, Inryco-Milcor, Milwaukee, Wisconsin, Style AT, or equal. Doors shall be of sufficient size to allow access but shall be not less than 12 inches by 12 inches. Ceilings with lay-in acoustical tile will not require access panels. Valves and equipment located above ceiling tile shall have a 3/4-inch diameter blue plastic button with a letter "V" set in tile. � B. Floor access covers in unfinished concrete floors not exposed to chemicals shall be galvanized cast iron with a clear opening of not less than 8 inches by 8 inches, and shall 090798 � PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES a 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 15430-3 be as manufactured by A�hambra Foundry Company, Model A-2015; Neenah Foundry Co., No.R-6687, or eq�ial. In traffic or chemical areas, access covers shall be as manufactured by Alhamt�ra Foundry Company, Model A-1240; Neenah Foundry Co., Model R-1977, or equal, yvith clear opening of not less than 10 inches in diameter. I 2.8 ROOF DRAINS I � A. Roof drains shall have �alvanized cast iron drain bodies, threaded outlet, removable locking, mushroom alumin m or brass stone stainers, clamping collars with integral gravel guards, receiver, deck clajnp and extension sleeves where required. � B. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Josam Mf . Co. Se�ies 21500 9 � 2.9 A. B. 2. Jay R. Smith Mfg. C., Fig.1010 P 3. Zurn Industries, Inc , Series Z-100 FLOOR DRAINS IN CON RETE FLOORS General: Floor drains in oncrete floors shall be of cast iron, in the sizes indicated, with sediment buckets. Each fl or drain located on an upper floor shall have a clamping collar, with 4-Ib sheet lead flashin , 12 inches minimum all around. �� l�'J h�� L�J � 0 l+�J � Manufacturers, or Equal 1. 2. 3. Josam Mfg. Co., Series 31120 Jay R. Smith Mfg. Cc�., Fig. 2350 Zurn Industries, Inc., Series Z-520-Y � � � 2.10 FLOOR SINKS A. General: Floor sinks sh II be 12-inch by 12-inch by 8-inch, of acid-resistant white enameled cast iron, with e oxy-coated, interior aluminum dome strainer, nickel-bronze or acid-resistant full-size, hal , or quarter grating as required by the number of indirect wastes, and have a flashin clamp for upper floor locations, only. B. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. 2. Josam Mfg. Co., Seri�s 49040 Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co , 3150 Series 3. Zurn Industries, Inc., S�ries ZN-1806 2.11 TRAP SEALS AND PRIMEF��S A. Where required by code, flo r drains and floor sinks connected to the sanitary sewer shall be protected by trap prim�rs connected to the water supply to the nearest plumbing fixture. One half-inch coppe r tubes shall run from the primers to the traps. Trap primers 090798 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES L�'J f� � � L�J � L�J L�J 1333018 — South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improveme�lnts • PAGE 15430-4 M� � � � � � � Mi M� LJ ��, � � shall be mounted in accessible locations. Trap primers shali be Josam Mfg. Co., Model 88250; Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., Model 2699; Zurn Industries, inc., Model Z-1022, or equal. 2.12 CLEANOUTS A. General: All cleanouts shall be heavy plugs with tapered shoulders against caulked lead or heavy brass plugs. Where underground or concealed, cleanouts shall be brought to floor level and to�accessible Iocations with access covers and frames. B. Manufacturers, or Equal: The following cleanouts, or equal, shall be provided: Josam Series J.R. Smith No. Zurn No. Exposed Locations 58500-20 Underground (finished floors) � 56010/30 Walls, Concealed 58790-20 Traffic Areas 56070 C. All'clean outs shall have a minimum diameter of 3 inches. 4405 Z-1440-A 4143 ZN-1400-2 4535 ZN-1445-1-A 4240 Z-142C-27 D. Stack cleanouts shall be installed at the base of each stack. Cleanouts shall be galvanized cast iron with ABS plastic cleanout plugs. � 2.13 HOSE BIBBS AND HYDRANTS A. General: All hose bibbs and hydrants in exposed locations subject to freezing shall be the non-freeze type. Hose bibbs connected to a non-potable water supply shall be provided with plastic or stainless-steel warning signs "DO NOT DRINK," in clearly legible letters, and permanently attached at the hose bibb. Where indicated, hose bibbs shall be provided with vacuum breakers as furnished by Crane Co., American Standard, or equal. }� B. Manufacturers, or Equal: 4� L!J L�J � L�J L�J � L�' Dwg. � Callout Fixture Tvqe HB-1 fCT:� Description Non-freeze Post-type Exposed bronze hydrant, post-type, depth of bury to suit local conditions; minimum 4 feet. 1.lowa Woodward, Model Y1 Non-freeze wall-type Heavy duty bronze hydrant with nickel-bronze face, hinged cover, recessed box, and key. Length to suit wall. 1.Josam Mfg. Co., Series 71000' 2.Jay 5. Smith Mfg. Co., Fig. 5510/5511 3.Zurn Industries, Inc., Fig. Z-1300. HB-3 Hose valves 090798 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements Heavy duty bronze hydrant, with composition disc, handwheel, cap and chain. Size 1-inch, without cap and chain: 1.Apollo (Conbraco Industries, lnc.), Model � PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES PAGE 15430-5 � 70-805 - 2.Fire-End and Croker Corp, Model 180] Size 3/4-inch, without cap and chain: 1.Apollo (Conbraco Industries, Inc.) Model • 70-804, or 78-104 � 2.Chicago Faucet No.7T 3.Ford Meter Box Co., Model B8H-233HB2 f 4.Woodford Manufacturing Co., Model Y24 or 24P HB-4 Wall box type Recessed, with nickel-bronze box, hinged cover, and key. 1.Josam Mfg. Co., Series 71020 � 2.Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., Series 5710 � 3.Zurn Industries, Inc., Fig. Z-1345 , 2.14 SHOCK ABSORBERS A. All cold and hot water �ping in buildings connecting to self-closing faucets, quick-action valves, water closets, ernergency showers, washers, and dishwashers shall be protected �by shock absorbers loca�:ed at each fixture or battery of fixtures. Shock absorbers shall be corrosion-resistant, permanently sealed, and shall be sized and installed to the manufacturer's printed rFcommendations. B. Manufacturers, or Equ��l 2. 1. Josam "SHOKTRal.S" Jay R. Smith "HYDROTROL" Zurn, Model Z-102a 3. 2.15 WALL-MOUNTED HOSE RACKS A. The CONTRACTOR shal provide wall-mounted hose racks at locations indicated. Racks shall be all welded steel onstruction, of minimum 8-gage sheet steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and shal have a capacity to hold 100 feet of 3/4-inch or 1-1/2-inch hose. Where racks are located i the open, they shall be supported from two 2- by 2- by 1/4-inch galvanized steel angle po:�s set in a concrete base or as indicated. 2.16 HOSES AND NOZZLES r�� .� The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the following lengths of hose: 4- 75 ft lengths of 3/4 and one-inch hose Each length of hose shal be provided with male and female connectors and nozzle. Hoses shall be seamles extruded rubber with dacron cotton exterior designed for a working pressure of at lea t 200 psi. Nozzles shall be capable of complete shut-off and shall produce a solid straight stream and up to a 90-degree conical fog. Nozzle material shall be polished brass. Nozzles shall 090798 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improverrients PAGE 15430-6 0 I � have rubber bumpers. � D. Noule Manufacturers, or Equal � [�J � l�: �� 1. W.D. Allen Mfg. Co., Illinois 2. �ire-End and Crocker Corp., New York 3. Halprin Supply Co., Iliinois 4. Western Fire Equipment Co., California 2.17 BACKFLOW PREVENTER A. Provide reduced pressure backflow prevention unit� where indicated. The units shall be bronze body construction, with celcon check seats and stainless steel relief valve seats, shafts, and bolts. The units shall have tight seating check valve and relief assemblies, and bronze body with non rising stem ball valve test cocks. The units shall be No. 909 series as manufactured by Watts Regulator Co.; Febco; or equal. Installation shall meet all local code requirements. � ' 2.19 PAINTING � � � A. All ferrous metal, except finished, galvanized and machine surfaces, shall have surfaces prepared and primed in the shop in accordance with the requirements of Section 09800 — Special Coatings. Prime colors shall be compatible with finish coats to be applied in the field. B. Self contained units such as wall-mounted hose racks shall be supplied with factory applied finish coats of baked enamel. C. All field painting shall comply with Section 09800 — Special Coatings. � , PART 3 -- EXECUTION � 3.1 PREPARATION � A. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate roughing-in with provisions for wall-and floor sleeves, pipe inserts, cutting of roof and floor penetrations �so that drain lines will have the required invert elevations and slopes. . I� � � � 32 OPENINGS A. New Construction: The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary openings in walls, floors, and roofs for the passage of piping and plumbing equipment within and into the buildings. All openings shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings or as required to provide passage for the plumbing work. B. Existing Construction 1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all opening required in the existing construction 090798 - PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 1333018 — South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAG E 15430-7 walls, floors, and ro�fs for the passage of piping and plumbing equipment. All openings shall be as ►ndicated or required for passage. 2. All openings shall be cut in a neat and orderly manner, minimizing damage to existing structures. P�tching of openings shall match existing construction. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for hangers and supporting members installed in existing m�sonry or structural steel as required for the proper completion of the WORK. 3.3 INSTALLATION AND APPI.ICATION A. The CONTRACTOR sh II provide all plumbing specialties in accordance with manufacturer's printed instr�uctions. B. All pipe shall be arranged iri a neat and orderly manner to occupy the minimum amount of space and so that the pi�e will not obstruct passageways and movement of building occupants or interfere with ormal operation and maintenance of any equipment. C. All pipe shall be carefully placed � and properly sloped and shall be neatly and firmly supported by hangers or supports. D. All piping in buildings shall t�e as close to the ceilings or walls as possible unless indicated otherwise. E. Screwed joints shall be macie with joint compound and be tight and leakproof. A sufficient number of brass to ferrous metal.seat unions shall be placed in lines so that any pipe, valve or piece of equipm�nt may be easily disconnected. F: All drainage and sanitary lii�es shall be properly run, trapped, and be vented to conform with Code requirements. �CII changes in direction shall be made with "Y" branch fittings and shall be of the same ;�ize as� the pipe. Changes in pipe size shall be made with reducing fittings. Minimum .�epth of cover shall be 3 feet. � , _, H. 3.4 Horizontal soil, drain and w�ste pipes shall be given a slope of at least 1/4-inch per foot unless indicated otherwise. Floor drains and cleanouts shall be installed so the tops of the drains are flush with the finished floor. EQUIPMENT - DAMAGE A�ID REMOVAL A. The CONTRACTOR'S ope �ations shall be carriect out in such a manner as to guard against damage to those pc�rtions of.the structure and equipment which are to remain in the finished work. Any danage caused by the CONTRACTOR or SUBCONTRACTOR through their operations, sh� II be repaired by the CONTRACTOR to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER and at no additi�nal cost to the OWNER. 3.5 TESTING A. CONTRACTOR shall make such tests as are required by the local ordinances and codes in the presence of a local gcverning authority inspector to show that all piping is tight, leak free and satisfactory, and sY�all also perform such tests as the ENGINEER may direct to 090798 . PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES l� � i'� f� � � � � � � � L�J � � �i ��J � LJ 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improveme�nts PAGE 15430-8 � I � � �J � [iJ LR' insure that all fixtures and equipment operate pro�erly. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs in making such tests and the costs of making all changes or repairs until the WORK is acceptable to the governing authorities. 3.6 DISINFECTION A. After potable water supply lines are tested, they shall be disinfected by introducing into the line HTH solution, liquid chlorine, or chlorine solution of sufficient strength. Then the line shall be filled with water and maintained under not less than 10 pounds per square inch pressure, for not less than 48 hours, during which period all valves on the lines shall be opened and closed several times, after which it shall be flushed clean, and then tested by the OWNER. This procedure shall be repeated as often as necessary until the line is pronounced safe for use, by the OWNER. No cross connection between the water mains and any pipe not yet disinfected will be permitted. - END OF SECTION - I� �-�; L �� , � 0 C� 0 0 � �� I� ■� 090798 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PL,UMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES PAG E 15430-9 L�J u � SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide plumbing fixtures, complete and operable, in accordance awith the Contract Documents. PART 2 — PRODUCTS O2.1 GENERAL � l�, `�� ' � � � L■J A. All plumbing piping, fixtures, specialties, and equipment shall be of the latest design, new, first- qualiry products, manufactured for the intended usage. Materials, capacities, features, finishes, and manufacturers shall be as indicated and shall pe compatible with elements of related or connected WORK. � B. All plumbing fixtures shall be without flaws and with white finish unless otherwise indicated. All exposed brass, faucets, valves, wastes, traps, piping, and escutcheons shall be chrome- plated. Each fixture shall be provided with individual stops and shall be anchored firmly to the building wall or floor. Softeners, water heaters, and lab equipment shall have drains and isolating valves on each side. C. Water closets, valves, fixtures, and hardware shall be approved by local governing authorities as low flow items. D. Floor mounted and tank type water closets indicated (by HC) to be for handicapped persons or located within a toilet stall indicated to be for handicapped persons shall conform to ADA requirements. E. Insulation at lavatories requiring handicapped persons protection shall conform to the wheelchair accessibility requirements of ADA and other governing authorities. The insulation shall be easily removable, bacteria resistant, molded to piping and fixture configurations, closed cell vinyl assembles. Fasteners shall be corrosion � resistive and reusable. Handicapped persons protection shall be Lav Guard as manufactured by Truebro, Inc., Pro-Warp as manufactured by McGuire, lnc., or equal. Drawinq EW-1 � � Call Out Eye-Wash Fountain Fixture Type Stainless steel bowl, pipe- mounted; with push-type ball valve, chrome-plated twin heads and flow control. HAWS Model 7461; Western Drinking Fountains, Inc. Model 761; or equal. EW-2 Eye-Wash Fountain (non-freeze type) Stainless steel bowl, pipe- D mounted; with foot-operated, non-freeze valve, HAWS Model 7430-FP; Western Drinking � Fountains, inc. Model 462; or 120396 PLUMBING FIXTURES � 1333018 — South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 15440-1 A equal. 22 MANUFACTURERS UR EQUAL , A. Unless indicated other�vise, fixtures shall be by the following: 1. Crane Co. 2. Kohler 3. American Stand��rd PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Each fixture shall be i�istalled with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning, and vented in accordance w'th the applicable plumbing code. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide chrome-plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with angle stops, reducers, and,ssc:utcheons. , C. All components shall be installed level and plumb. Supplies and wastes shall be centered on or between the wall tiles. D. All fixtures shall be installed and secured in place with wall supports, wall carriers, floor carriers and bolts. E. Fixtures shall be sealed t� wall and floor surfaces with sealant. Color shall match fixture. F. All fixtures shall be moun �ed to the following heights above finished floor: Emergency Eye And Face Wash: Standard 38 in. • (965 mm) to receptor rim Handicapped 34 in. (max) (864 mm) to receptor rim Handicapped 27 in. (686 mm) to spray head Emergency Shower: Standard 84 in. (2130 mm) to� bottom of head Handicapped 48 in. (max) (1220 mm) to pull handle 32 ADJUSTING AND CLEA� ING . A. Stops or valves shall be �djusted for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. , B. At completion, the CONTRACTOR shall clean all plumbing fixtures and equipment. C. Water closets shall be solicily attached to floor or wall carrier with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended to hold fixture in place. - END OF SECTION - 120396 PLUMBING FIXTURES 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvem�ants PAGE 15440-2 � � u � � SECTION 15450 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS (HVAC) PART1-GENERAL 1.1 CODES AND STANDARDS: A. Workmanship, material and equipment shall be in accordance with Specifications and Drawings and in some instances the requirements exceed those required by codes and standards. Where not exceeded, the codes and standards shall be considered as absolute minimum requirements. 1.2 REFERENCE ABBREVIATIONS: � A. References are made in the various mechanical sections to technical societies, codes, specifications, trade•organizations, and regulatory authorities in accordance with the following abbreviations: � � �, � � � r � � � � � �i AABC - AFI - AGA- AMCA- ANSI - ARI - ASHRAE- ASME - ASTM - AWSC - AW1NA - CISPI - CTI - FM - FS - IRI - ISO - NAFM - NCPWB (MCAA} - NFC - NFPA - PDI - SBI - SMACNA- UL- Associated Air Balance Council. Air Filter Institute. American Gas Association. Air Moving and Conditioning Association. American National Standards Institute. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute. Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers. American Society of Mechanical Engineers. American Society for Testing and Materials. �" American Welding Society Code. American Water Works Association. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. Cooling Tower Institute. Factory Mutuat. Federal Specification. Industrial Risk Insurers. Insurance Services Organization. National Association of Fan Manufacturers. National Certified Pipe Welders Bureau (Mechanical Contractors Association of America). National Fire Codes. National Fire Protection Association. Plumbing and Drainage Institute. Steel Boiler Institute Sheet Metal and /1ir Conditioning Contractors National Association. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS AND DATA TO BE SUBMITTED: A. Reference catalog cuts and brochures of products to proper Paragraph in Specifications. Furnish numerical index by Specifications Paragraph number listing product name, catalog number and reference to page number of submittal brochure. ' �� C Cross reference individual catalog numbers of substitute products to numbers of specified materials. � Bind submittal in booklet form. 052899 � 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PAGE 15450-1 � D. Requests for permission t use substitute or alternate products shall be accompanied with evidence to prove that the product- 1. Conforms with the st ndard of performance and quality specified. 2. Will physically fit in th-: space allocated, with sufficient access and maintenance space. 3. Will not entail changss in details and construction of related work whether mechanical, electrical, or general i� nature. 4. Involves no additional costs to the Owner or extended construction time. E. Provide with requests br permission to use substitute or alternate products, drawings, specifications, samples, p�rformance data and other information as may be required to assist in determination of acceptabiliry of the product. The burden of proof is the Contractor's responsibility. No substitution shall be m��de without written acceptance. F. Equipment Items- 3. 1. Submit manufacturer's certified data relative to equipment required for the installation of the HVAC, plumbing, and fire protection systems. 2. Submit adequate engir�eering data on each piece of equipment to allow a careful check of compliance with the tefhnical requirements of the Contract Documents. Clearly indicate on submitted data the munufacturer's name, piece number, equipment capacity, and other applicable technical da�. Data for Mechanical Sy,�tems- Ventilation and Ai � Conditioning Equipment, Specialties and their Control Systems. Fans, Fan Charac�teristic Curves, Fan 7ests. Control Dampers, Fire Dampers, Smoke Dampers, Louvers, Control Panelboards, Motor Starters and Controls for Electrically Operated Equipment Furnished by Mechanical Trades. Special Products Furnished by Mechanical Trades. Openings, Special Framing and Access Doors. 4. Isolation Mounting I Data for Testing an Balancing of the Heating, Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. Installation Instruct4ons - Submit Manufacturer's Printed Installation Instructions. � Shop Drawings: Submit /4-inch minimum scale coordinated Shop Drawings relating to the piping or duct systems, quipment, and foundations, and dimensioned locations of each, including electrical coord�ination, accessories, and showing clearances for operating and seroicing. , Grille and Outlet Bo�ces. I 052899 I 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS u � �J L�"J ��I � � ,� � L�J � � L' i �I I■I I �J � BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PAGE 15450-2 � � � L� � � � � Q � � fl � � � Q � � � � Electrical Interlock Wiring Diagrams. - Temperature Controls, Equipment and Diagrams. 1.4 INSTRUCTIONS: A. B. 1.5 When specified in other Sections, the Contractor shall furnish the services of competent instructors who will give full instruction to designated personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, (includingpertinentsafetyrequirements)oftheequipmentorsystemspecified. Eachinstructorshall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work. Instruction shall be given during the first regularwork week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Owner for regular operation. The number of man-days of instruction to be furnished shall be as specified in the various Sections of the Specifications. � OPERA7ING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: A. Bind in looseleaf binders with the words, "Operating and Maintenance Manual" and the Project identification imprinted on the cover. Prepare three complete sets of records for the Owner, with table of contents, index, and tabbed Section dividers. ' I B. During the construction period, accumulate the following for inclusion in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals- � 1. Copies of warranties and guarantees. 2. Fixture brochures. 3. Wiring and Control Diagrams. 4. Approved Shop Drawings. 5. Operating instructions for- ' HVAC Systems 6. Recommended maintenance procedures. 7. Lists of major items of equipment�with name, address, and telephone number of each local representative. C. Submit the manuals for approval at approximately 75 percent job completion. D. Each manual shall consist of- 1. Complete description of each item of equipment and apparatus furnished and installed - including ratings, capacities, and characteristics. 2. Fully detailed parts list, including all numbered parts of each item of equipment and apparatus furnished and installed. 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP � BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PAGE 15450-3 � 3. Manufacturer's printed instructions describing operation, servicing, maintenance and repair of each item of equipment and apparatus. 4. Typewritten record of all Itests made of materials, equipment, and systems. All such records shall state the date tests ere conducted, the names of all persons making and witnessing the tests, and citing any unu�ual conditions relevant to the tests. 1.6 RECORD DRAWINGS: . A. Accumulate Record Drawing� during the construction of the Project. Keep one set of blueline Contract Drawings at the job �ite at all times, and mark changes, rerouting or modifications which occur, clearly on the Drawingls with dimensions. B. At completion of the job, obt�in and pay for a set of reproducibles of the Contract Drawings and transfer the notations indicati�ig changes to them. Reproducibles shall be submitted for approval prior to final payment. Reproducibles shall be on mylar material, and shall be completely legible. 1.7 A. 1.8 A. WELDER'S QUALIFICATIO i S: , All welding of piping and rela ed systems shall be performed by welders meetmg the qualification standards of NCPWB (MC �. � OWNER FURNISHED, CONtRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT (OFCI): . Install and make all necessary piping connections to Owner furnished equipment designated. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer's names and catalog numbers are scheduled or specified for the purpose of establishing standard of design, quality, appearance, performance and serviceability, and not to limit competition. Scheduled products (as may be modified by detailed specifications) are those selected as the basis for system desi n with respect to physical size and space arrangements, required capacity and performance ch racteristics, and the product quality intended. � B. The Drawings indicate speci �ied products physically arranged in the spaces, as cataloged by specific manufacturers, gene.rally as listed in the Equipment Schedules. C. Listed "Acceptable Manufacturers" are those considered capable of manufacturing products conforming to detailed Specifications, and as such, are invited to compete on an equal basis provided the offering is compa�able in every respect to scheduled or specified products and actually � conforms to the detailed Spec fications„and Schedule requirements. Listing herein as "acceptable manufacturers" does not im�ly "accepted", "approved", "prior approval", or any other such connotation. All product offeri�gs must be submitted for approval after Contract award. D. Vendors are invited to submit material or equipment bids to bidding Contractors on any comparable equivalent product, whether or not the manufacturer of such product is listed herein as an "acceptable manufacturer". Such product bids should clearly indicate offerings that are not listed as "acceptable manufacturers'�. In the event a bidding Contractor, after satisfying himself that such unlisted product is in fact "�qual" to the specified product with respect to design, quality, perFormance and arrangemer�t (space requirements), and the Contractor desires to furnish that � i 052899 " 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS - PAGE 15450-4 f�1 � � I±�1 l�J L.; � L�'J � � � � � i'"J I�1 � �1 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � product on the Project, he may request the name of the manufacturer be added to the list of acceptable manufacturers by addendum prior to bid time. ' E. At a bidder's request, an unnamed manufacturer's equipment will be considered to determine additional "acceptable manufacturers" if a request is made in writing no later than six days prior to the bid opening. If such requests are found acceptable, an addendum will be written listing additional acceptable manufacturers. Consideration will be given only to requests of bona fide bidders (Contractors), not to those received from vendors. F 2.2 Manufacturers of materials and equipment shall be as specified, scheduled, or as listed in each respective product Specification Article. FLAME SPREAD AND SMOKE DEVELOPED PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS: A. Materials and adhesives used throughout the mechanical systems for insulation, acoustical lining, . filters, ducts, flexible connections, and jackets or coverings regardless of kind, or for piping or conduit system components, shall have a flame spread �ating not over 25 without evidence of continued combustion and with a smoke developed rating not higher than 50. If such materials are to be applied with adhesives, they shall be tested as applied with such adhesives, or the adhesives used shall have a flame spread rating;not over 25 and a smoke developed rating not higher than 50. (Note: materials need not meet these requirements where they are entirely located outside of a building and do not penetrate a wall or roof, and do not create an exposure hazard or where specifically exempted in the body of these Specifications.) B. "Flame Spread Rating" and "Smoke Developed Rating" shall be as determined by the "Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials, NFPA No. 255, ASTM E84, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Sta�ndard". Such materials are listed in the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. "Building Materials List" under the heading "Hazard Classification (Fire)". 2.3 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT: A. Identify mechanical equipment with nameplate bearing equipment name and number, using bevel edges, 1/16-inch thick, 1'/-inch white laminated bakelite with engraved black letters, %z-inch (single line) or 7/8-inch (double line) high, permanently mounted on the equipment in a conspicuous place with screws. 2.4 BEARINGS: A. All bearings supplied to the Project, regardless of supply responsibility or applications as integral parts of machinery, shall be standard catalog items and interchangeable with those of manufacturers current�y represented in the local trade area with� replacements stocked locally. Ball bearings shall be radial or thrust design, sealed and enclosed in a dust and moistureproof housing, and selected in accordance with AFBM Rating B-10 for at least 200,000 hour operating life as applied. Grease lubricated bearings shall be arranged for regreasing thru alemite fittings located outside machinery enclosures in a convenient location, with grease relief fittings in the bearing housing to prevent overgreasing or seal rupture. B 2.5 Acceptable Manufacturers-Andrews, Dodge, Fafnir, Hyatt, Link-Belt, MRC, McGill, New Departure, Sealmaster, SKF, Shafer, Rollway, Thompson, Timken, Torrington. ELECTRIC MOTORS: A. Shall conform to the requirements of IEEE, NEMA, and shall have voltage, phase, frequency and service as scheduled. " 052899 . 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PAGE 15450-5 �� B C Q Each item of motor driven eqtaipment shall be furnished complete with the motors, drives and control equipment, including remote pilot devices as required to perform the specific function for which it is intended. Motors shall be sleeve or b�ll bearing type selected for quiet operation, shall be manufactured for general purpose duty, with each bearing accessible for lubrication, and designed for the load imposed by the drive. Motors'/z horsepower and I�rger shall have bearings with pressure grease lubrication. E. Motors connected to drive equipment by belt shall be furnished with adjustable slide rail bases except for fractional horsepower motors which shall have slotted bases. Motor leads shall be permanently identified and supplied with connectors. F. Provide open dripproof enc�osures for motors located indoors in dry tocations, and splashproof enclosures in wet locations. Motors to be installed outdoors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled. G. Unless otherwise scheduled, motors smallerthan 3%4 horsepowershall be brushless, capacitor start or split phase, type designed,for 120.volt, single phase, 60 Hz alternating current. H. � Motors 3/4 horsepower and arger shall be squirrel cage induction type, for scheduled voltage, 3 phase, 60 Hz alternating cur ent. I. Each motor shall be free from magnetic hum, designed for quiet operation. J. Each motor shall be suitable or the brake horsepower of the driven unit, rated with 1.15 minimum service factor, with the temp rature rise not to exceed NEMA standards and shall be capable of withstanding momentary overloads of 25 percent without injurious overheating. K. Electrical Specifications - Ccpper windings, winding insulation system NEMA Class B or better, wound for standard voltages. Exceptwhere premium motors are specifically required in the detailed Equipment Specifications, mr�tors shall conform to NEMA Desig� B as a minimum. L� M 2.6 A. B. C. Mechanical Specifications - Frame dimensions conform to NEMA standards for "T-Frame" motors. Frame construction of motor,s larger than NEMA frame 145T of cast-iron or extruded aluminum construction and those of NEMA frame size 145T and smaller may be of fabricated steel type. Nameplates shall be stainless steel. Grease lubricated ball or roller bearings shall be supplied unless otherwise specified. O�n NEMA frame sizes 182T and larger make provisions for regreasing by use of removable grease �lugs. Acceptable Manufacturers - A`lis Chalmers, Baldor, Century, General Electric, Ideal, Lincoln, Louis Allis, Marathon, Reliance, U. ., Wagner, Westinghouse. � � MOTOR S7ART-ERS: � i Except where otherwise speci fied or scheduled, each starter shall be furnished by the supplier who furnishes the equipment it cor�trols. i � Provide a manual or magnetic starter for each motor. Where such devices are included in an "Equipment Control Schedule", they shall be as scheduled. Otherwise, they shall be as recommended by the equipm�nt manufacturer. Magnetic starters shall include overload protection for each phase wired with normally closed contacts in series control circuit ahead of any other control contacts on the control side of the 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP ; COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS L�! � !�I � � � u I�i � r-L�I !*1 `�I u � J !�_I � BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PAGE 15450-6 � � l� L� � L; solenoid coil, and no contacts befinreen the other side of the solenoid coil and the control power source. Motor starters shall conform to NEMA Standards for Industrial Control for 3 phase motors, No. IC-1, with 120 volt (maximum� control circuit and control power transformer. � , D. Where individual starters and disconnect switches (or circuit breakers) are indicated to be in the same location, furnish combination devices in a common housing. Fused disconnects shall have rejection type fuse clips and Class RK-1 fuses. E. In every instance where magnetic starters are not required, furnish manual starters for fractional horsepower single phase motors -"ON-OFF", snap switch type with soldered ratchet overload protection. F. When interlocking or automatic control of single phase motors is indicated or required, the motors � shall be furnished with magnetic across-the-line starters. � I�1 � � � � l�1 � � G. When interlocking or automatic control of electric heaters is indicated or required, the heaters shall be furnished with contactors. Provide control power transformers as required to maintain control circuit voltages not exceeding 120 volts. . H. Provide with each magnetic starter a reset button, pilot light, and HAND-OFF-AUTO switch, heavy duty type, mounted in starter cover. Provide field reversible (normally open or normally closed) auxiliary contacts required for interlocking but in no case less than finro per starter. Acceptable Manufacturers - Allen Bradley, Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, I-T-E, Square D, Siemeus. 2.7 SLEEVES, INSERTS, ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS: A. Provide in concrete, carpentry or masonry construction, hangers, sleeves, expansion bolts, inserts, supporting steel, or other fixtures necessary for the support of pipe, equipment and devices furnished under each Section of the Specifications. B. Provide each pipe, conduit, or duct passing through fire, smoke or sound control walls, floors, ceilings or partitions with sleeves having internal dimension approximately 1-inch larger than the outside dimension (including insulation) of pipes, conduits or ducts. C. Sleeves (when required) through interior partitions and floors shall be no less than 22 gage galvanized steel, set flush with the finished surtaces. � D. Sleeves through precast or posttensioned structures shall be no less than Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe and shall be subject to the �acceptance of the designer of the structure. Submit size, location, and sleeve material for approval. E. Sleeves through grade slabs, basement or exterior wall shall be steel or cast iron pipe with water stop flange, set flush with finished surfaces, and with the space befinreen the pipe and the sleeves packed with oakum orjute twine and calked watertight. F. Sleeves in wet or potentially wet floors or spaces such as mechanical equipment rooms or �sprinklered areas shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with water stop flange and with the . top of the sleeve projecting 2-inches above the finished floor, with annular space packed with oakum or jute twine and calked watertight. � �� C�I L� G. Option - Provide link-seal neoprene closure fittings in lieu of packing. 052899 - 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY V1RP _ BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PAGE 15450-7 � H. Pipes running through core drilled openings in existing concrete construction will not require sleeves. Where packing is required provide link-seal neoprene closure fittings. I. Attachments to structure �hall be by means of beam clamps wherever practicable. Unavoidable attachments to concrete s ructure shall be by means of preset concrete inserts whenever the need for such attachment can �e reasonably foreseen and the locations and sizes of inserts is known prior to pouring of concretg' . In instances where it is necessary to make attachments to concrete and proper inserts have ndt been preset, the attachment shall be made by means of drilled holes, and expansion anchors of ither the bolt stud or flush va�iety. Design working stress of attachments shall be limited to 25 perc�nt of the average maximum (ultimate) stress values pubtished by the manufacturer. � J. Inserts shall be cast iron o� galvanized steel individual type, with accommodations for removable nuts and threaded rods up to 3/4-inch diameter, and permi#ting lateral adjustment. K. Fasteners in concrete beartls shall be su�ciently above the bottom ofthe beam to clear reinforcing. L. Expansion anchors shall b� zinc and chromate plated for corrosion protection and conform to the dimensional requirements of Federal Specification FF-S-325. Expansion anchors shall be selected and installed in accordance with the recommendations of Expansion Anchor Manufacturer's Institute (EAMI) and the manufactur�r's instructions. ' f►ri 2.8 A. B. 2.9 Acceptable Manufacturers � Grinnell, Hilti, Phillips, or Thunderline. FIRE STOPPING: I Seal annular spaces betwe n sleeves and penetrating materials in fire rated floors, ceilings, and walls with fireproof and wate�proofsilicone elastomerapplied in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Mul 'ple penetrations shall be sealed with silicone calking. Seal material shall be UL classified for�use in fire rated penetration seals, and shall be applied in the manufacturer's recommended thickness forthe fire rating ofthe penetrated structure in accordance with ASTM E-814 requireme�ts. Acceptable Manufacturers - bow Corning, General Electric. WATERPROOFING: �� L�"J � � � � � L'J l�"J � !"J A. Seal penetrations of exterior�valls in below grade areas and in floors with membrane waterproofing with link seal Century Line �odel CS-100 sleeves and interlocking rubber links, bolts, nuts and � metal pressure plates as ma ufactured by Thunderline Corp. B 2.10 Acceptable Manufacturers - �alpico, Thunderline Corp. AUXILIARY STRUCTURAL �UPPORTS: A. Provide auxiliary structural su�ports as necessary to support mechanical systems from the building structure. Coordinate with str ctural drawings. Supporting members shall be metal strut framing or standard structural shapes,�designed to support imposed loads with a working stress no greater than 25 percent of ultimate str ss values of the members, and articulation with the building structure without exceeding structural lir�itations at the point of attachment to the building structure. Prepare calculations and Shop Drawinqs of each such support and submit for acceptance to the Structural Engineer. Begin no work until, receipt of acceptance from the structural engineer. 2.11 ESCUTCHEONS: 052899 ' 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP � COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPRO EMENTS I u I� � L�"' BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS � PAGE 15450-8 � � � � � � � a � � � � � � A. Provide escutcheons or 22 gage minimum painted galvanized sheet metal wall flanges (in event standard manufactured product does not exist) for mechanical or electrical penetrations of floors, ceilings, walls or partitions. Escutcheons shall be sized to enclose the outside of the penetration sleeve and fit snugly to the pipe (or over outside of insulation) of insulated lines. Both exposed surtaces of such penetrated elements shall be fitted with escutcheons which shall both afford a finished appearance and prevent passage of vermin. B C. � Except where otherwise specified, escutcheons shall be one-piece (where practicable) or split, hinged, stamped brass type designed to fit the pipe, and to cover the terminating pipe sleeve, in chrome plated finish, with securing device to hold the escutcheon tight to the pipe. Use deep escutcheon on each sleeve set in a waterproof concrete floor. Acceptable Manufacturers - Beaton and Corbin, Grinnell, Sweet and Donaldson. 2.12 ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS: A. Provide insulated, leakproof equipment supports approved by the National Roofing Contractor's Association for roof mounted equipment, pipe, or conduits. Supports shall be prefabricated of continuous welded 18 gage minimum galvanized steel, 12-inch minimum height, mitered corner seams, integral cant and base plate, 2 x 4 fire resistant treated wood nailer, and 18 gage counterflashing. Provide integral internal reinforcing necessary to support imposed load, but no less than 600 pounds per linear foot of perimeter. . � L C Provide raised cant, thickness to match thickness of roof insulation. Top surface shall be level. Provide pitched base where installed on pitched roof. Acceptable Manufacturers - Pate, Roof Products Systems, Stiles, Thycurb. 2.13 FLASHINGS: A. Provide flashing where drains are installed in nonprecast floors above grade, consisting of a sheet of 4# lead at least 12-inches in diameter greater than outside diameter of drain collar, and flash waterproofing membrane into flashing clamp devices provided with drains. B. Provide flashing at each roof drain location, consisting of a sheet of 4# lead at least 12-inches in diameter greater than outside diameter of drain collar, flashed into flashing clamp device provided with roof drain. Note that thickness of roof deck may vary. C. Furnish weatherproof flashings for mechanical system related openings through the roof for � installation under roofing specification. D. Furnish roofflashing forround and rectangularopenings, pipes, vents, machinery, devices, or ducts. � The flashings shall be constructed to terminate not less tharr 12-inches above the roof. Provide suitable countertlashing constructed from the same material as the flashing. �I �I � � E. Furnish flashings for mechanical curbs, and furnish and install countertlashing at each. F. Construct roof flashings for plumbing vent pipes from a 4# lead, with a base extending not less than 10-inches beyond the exterior surface of the pipe, and turned down into the cavity of the pipe opening. 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PAGE 15450-9 � G. Construct other roof flashings from 10 ounce copper sheets, with a base extending not less than 10-inches beyond the ext�rior surtace of the opening to be flashed. 2.14 SPECIAL TOOLS: ( r A. Furnish a set of special todls and devices required for the proper maintenance of the major pieces of equipment and install on adequate tool board. This shall include only tools which cannot normally be purchased "over-the-co�unter" at hardware stores. F�iF� A. EQUIPMENT GUARDS: � Provide equipment with eXposed moving parts with belt guards, coupling guards, fan guards or other enclosures as necessary for personnel safety. PART 3 - EXECUTION I � 3.1 ELECTRIC WIRING OF MbTORS AND EQUIPMENT: A. Q C. Power wiring and disconne�t switches for the proper isolation of each piece of equipment shall be provided under the electrica section of the specifications, as necessary for operation in the "HAND" position of the HAND-OFF-�1UT0 control switch. The electrical design is b�sed on the equipment listed in the schedules. Parties furnishing equipment requiring changes in the electrical design shall pay costs involved in modifying the electrical design to.accommbdate the equipment involved. I Control and interlock wiring for the mechanical systems shall be provided under the electrical sections of the specificati ns, as necessary for operation in the "AUTO" position of the HAND-OFF-AUTO control s�witch. Wiring shall be in strict accordance with wiring diagrams, previously submitted and reviewed "acceptable". Systems include: 1. Heating, Ventilating, Co Iling. 2. Temperature Controls. � D. Furnish complete integrated�, systems wiring diagrams showing the detailed power wiring, the interlock wiring, and the con' ols wiring, each relating to the exact equipment purchased for the installation. Include diagra� wiring for smoke (or products of combustion) and heat detection devices and equipment furnis ed in connection with air distribution systems and as well as diagram wiring as required to cause f ns to stop if vibration switches are activated by excessive vibration. E. Wring diagrams shall be submitted within not more than thirty-five (35) days after equipment selections have been accepted. The diagrams shall be complete integrated wiring diagrams, not manufacturer's equipment dr�wings. F. At the completion of the prbject, and before final inspection, those parties having detailed responsibility for (1) temperat�e control and interlock wiring diagrams; (2) equipment controlled by the temperature control syste ; and (3) installation of the temperature control and interlock wiring shall meet at the job site and j�intly checkout, test and inspect each control circuit, each interlock and each power circuit to each piece of equipment, and shall advise in writing that each piece of equipment meets their joint �pproval insofar as performance, operation and interconnect are concerned. This document shall be jointly signed by each responsible individual and included in record documents. I 052899 � 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP j COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS � LJ I+�l L�J u �� ,� � � �� , �J �� BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PAGE 15450-10 � f.■J � 3.2 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT: � A. Protect equipment fram physical damage and deterioration after it is delivered to the Project, and during the installation period prior to Owner acceptance. B. � � C. 3.3 � A. � 3.4 A. U 3.5 � A. B. � 3.6 � � l�!1 l�� LJ L*�! � � The equipment shall be kept clean. Motors and electrical devices shall be covered with suitable materials to prevent dirt or dust accumulation within equipment. Machinery and devices shall be properly oiled and maintained to prevent rusting and deterioration. Repair scratches, mars, or paint deterioration. EQUIPMENT SPACE: The Drawings indicate specified products physically arranged in the spaces, as cataloged by specific manufacturers, generally as listed in the Equipment Schedules. INTERFERENCE$: Relocate or reroute existing pipe, wiring, or ducts as required to facilitate construction of finished work as planned. Restore surfaces, insulation, and finish to match condition of adjacent work. CUTTING AND PATCHING: Assume costs and responsibiliry for cutting and patching required to complete the installation. Surfaces shall be patched to the condition of the adjacent surtaces. PAINTING AND FINISHING AND CLEANING: A. Finish painting (other than factory applied) of inechanical equipment, and its associated ductwork, is scheduled under other Sections. Provide touchup painting of prefinished mechanical products. B. SurFaces shall be left clean, debris shall be removed, and equipment shall be furnished in prime coat finish ready for finish coats. 1. Ducfinrork and equipment - Clean exterior of ductwork and equipment, removing rust, plaster and dirt by wire brushing. Remove grease, oil, and similar materials by wiping with clean rags and suitable solvents. 2. Motors, pumps and other items with factory finish - Remove grease and oil and leave surfaces clean and polished. C. Cleaning operations are supplemented by detailed instructions for specific systems. END OF SECTION - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PAGE 15450-11 �I I � � � PART1-GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: SECTION 15600 - HEATING EQUIPMENT A. This Section includes equipment used for heating throughout the Project. � PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 � A. � � B. � � C. � UNIT HEATERS (ELECTRICAL): Shall consist of electric heater coils constructed from 80 percent nickel, 20 percent chromium, tubular elements supported in steel frame, dielectrically tested at 2,000 volts and UL listed. Furnish the scheduled 3-phase heaters with balanced 3-phase steps. Heater casings shall be steel construction, designed for mounting in open air from adequate supports from the building construction, shall be complete with horizontal adjustable discharge louvers, painted steel casing, terminal box and control, constant speed motor directly connected to propeller fan, and isolated from the casing to prevent vibration and noise. Each heater shall be provided with thermal overload protection for the motor, and a separate thermal overload protection for the heater element. Heating shall be "ON/OFF" type operation from suitable contactor cycling element and fan. Pilot control room thermostat shall be furnished with heater. Acceptable Manufacturers- Chromalox, Electromode, F.P.E., Markel, Trane, Ilg, Wesix. PAR7 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS: Q A. Install equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of other sections of the Specifications. C � � � � � END OF SECTION - HEATING EQUIPMENT 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP � COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS HEATING EQUIPMENT PAGE 15600-1 � r-. L�!l [■J � L�J SECTION 15800 - HVAC EQUIPMENT - AIR SIDE PART1-GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Furnish and install air-side heating, ventilating and air handling equipment of all types employed in the Project. PART2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 WINDOW AIR CONDITIONING UNIT: � � Li' '!J � L�� I L*' � IJ �I � A. Window unit to be super quiet type with cooling/heating, outside air control, exhaust air control, rotary compressor, 3-speed cooling, 2-speed heating, energy saver switch, concealed control panel, airflow directional control, slide out chassis, corrosion resistant cabinet and accessory window mounting kit. B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Carrier, Trane, York. 2.2 PACKAGED WALL FAN: A. Provide factory assembled unit including fan, motor, housing, intake grille, discharge damper of capacities as scheduled. B. Fan wheel shall be of the centrifugal type directly connected to a radio shielded self-protected motor controlled from a single wall switch. C. The fan and motor shall be enclosed in a baked enamel steel housing for horizontal mounting. D. The intake opening shall be a satin finish, non-tarnish surface, shall be removable for cleaning. E. Acceptable Manufacturers - Acme, Cook, Loren Cook, Penn. 2.3 ROOFTOP EXHAUST FANS: A. Exhaust fans shall be centrifugal wheel roof ventilators, capacities, sizes, types, arrangements and accessories as scheduled. B. Each fan shall be selected to operate quietly and efficiently on its volume-pressure curve, free from objectionable vibration, and shall carry the certified rating seal authorized by AMCA at the scheduled ratings. C. Square curb base and throat section shall be constructed in one piece, of not less than 12 gage aluminum, with the throat section spun to provide streamlined entrance to the fan wheel. Fan wheel shall be centrifugal, backwardly inclined, non-overloading type, constructed of not less than 12 gage aluminum for blades and bottom inlet of wheel and U8-inch aluminum for the top plate. D. Motor and drive compartment shall be separated from the air stream by a horizontal plate constructed of not less than I/8-inch aluminum and supported by columns of aluminum round stock or cast 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS HVAC EQUIPMENT - AIR SIDE PAGE 15800-1 �l brackets. ' � E. Outer baffle and motor comp�rtment hood shall be spun aluminum of not less than 12 gage, designed ' for sub-assembly and arrangi d for access to motor-drive compartment and wheel assembly without dismantling unit. F. Drives for fan wheels shall b� direct or V-belt as scheduled. G. Supporting members of drive assembly shall be constructed of not less than 1/8-inch aluminum, isolated with multi-directional�vibration mountings. H. Where required, bearings sh�ll be flanged type, mounted in rubber, sealed and prelubricated. K. L. M N �a V-belt drives shall be furnish�d with variable sheave on the motor. , Motor base shall be adjustab��e. Motors shall be NEMA stand rd, resilient mounted, ball bearing, open type with horsepower, speed and current characteristics a scheduled. Furnish with each motor, a factory mounted disconnect switch with motor overload pr, tection suitable for the motor scheduled and factory isolated conduit from the motor compartment �o inside the curb cap. Each unit shall be furnished w�th an easily removable galvanized or polyvinyl coated steel hardware cloth birdscreen and a gravity �backdraft damper. Damper shall be constructed of not less than .020 aluminum formed for rigidity and pivoted to an extruded aluminum or heavy rustproofed steel frame with nylon or brass bearings. ;elades shall be connected together with pivoted aluminum tie rods. I Fans scheduled for exhaust of �itchen equipment hoods and high temperature exhaust systems shall also include an upblast arrang ment on the discharge with complete grease drainage and insulated heat shield to protect motor and drive, all designed for high temperature service with galvanized construction acceptable. Omi� backdraft dampers from kitchen hood exhaust fans. Provide fan manufacturer's �prefabricated minimum 12-inch high insulated metal roof curbs constructed of heavy galvanized steel or welded aluminum to match fan construction, full 2-inch thick heavy density internal insulation, rubber curb cap for fan base mounting, factory clips or attachment devices to secure fan tight to curb, countertlashing, wide roof flange, backdraft damper frame, and cant strip. Furnish complete and as recommended by the manufacturer. Acceptable Manufacturers - A�me, Aladdin, Ammerman, Breidert, Carnes, Exit-Aire, Greenheck, Jenn-Air, Loren Cook, Penn, P i werline, Trane. 2.4 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS: A. Provide heavy-duty shutter typ I dampers, with galvanized 16 gage or extruded aluminum frame and wind stops, minimum 28 gage g�lvanized steel or26 gage aluminum blades, 3/16-inch steel shaftwith "Oilite" bronze bearings, roll formed blade edged with felt sealer, blades linked with tie bar and adjustable counter weight, to all w full blade position parallel to air flow under full air flow, with gravity closing of dampers on reverse t�ow. B. Provide frames for required mou,nting and access doors required for complete adjustment of balance weight. I � 052899 , 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP � COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS HVAC EQUIPMENT - AIR SIDE PAGE 15800-2 � � l�J LiJ O [�' [i' � L!1 � C. The foregoing Specifications shall not apply to relief dampers which are to be provided in conjunction with outside and return air dampers in air handling units. D. Fan manufacturePs backdraft dampers are acceptable where furnished and installed in conjunction with exhaust fan installations scheduled, and similar to above. E. Acceptable Manufacturers - Air Balance, Air Conditioning Products, American Foundry & Furnace, American Warming & Ventilating, Dowco, Ellison, Krueger, Louvers & Dampers, Ruskin. 2.5 LOUVERS: A. Shall be 6063-T5 aluminum extrusions with stainless steel screws, fabricated into a stormproof assembly with air pressure drop no greater than 0.105-inches WC at 1000 feet per minute velocity through free area. Blades shall be at least 0.081-inches t��ick, spaced 2-inches on center with 0.625-inch flanges and "S" design, set at 20 degrees pitch, 4-inch total louver depth. Frames material shall be at least 0.081-inches thick and frame shall be flanged face. Provide PVC coated 0.5-inch square mesh galvanized steel bird screen on inside face of louver. Provide accessory sub-frame, the same depth as the wall, for installation in the wall and into which the louver is mounted. Sub-frame shall be constructed of at least 16 gage galvanized steel. B. Louver finish shall be lacquered natural mill finished aluminum. C. Louvers shall be fabricated with 20 gage steel blades and 16 gage galvanized steel frames. Louvers � shall be equal to American Warming and Ventilating Model LW P-3131-FS formed stationary weather louvers, with a pressure drop not exceeding 0.15-inches WC, derived from test in accordance with AMCA Standard 500. Louvers shall be complete with galvanized steel birdscreens. f� �' l�J � � � �*, � � D. Acceptable Manufacturers - Air Balance, Airolite, American Warming & Ventilating, Carnes, Dowco, (shop fabricated, subject to acceptable shop drawings). 2.6 ROOF CURBS: A. Provide leakproof roof curbs approved by the National Roofing Contractors Association for ducts penetrating roof. Where prefabricated curbs are not furnished with fans, roof caps or packaged equipment, provide weatherproof roof curbs, prefabricated of continuous welded 18 gage minimum galvanized steel 12-inch minimum height, with I%z-inch 3 pound density fiberglass thermal and acoustical insulation on deck plate and around entire perimeter, with built-in cant strip and flashing, duct mounting flanges top and bottom, and designed to support a minimum of 50 pounds per linear foot of perimeter. Provide internal reinforcing necessary to support imposed load. B. Provide raised cant, thickness to match thickness of roof insulation. C. Provide sheet metal surFace on inside of curbs for supply ducts. D. Top surface of curbs shall be level. Provide pitched curb where installed on pitched roof. E. Provide fire resistant treated wood nailer strips around top perimeter. F. Acceptable Manufacturers - Pate, Roof Products Systems, Stiles. 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS HVAC EQUIPMENT - AIR SIDE PAGE 15800-3 ��I PART 3 - EXECUTION = � 3.1 MANUFACTURER'S DIREdTIONS: A. Install equipment in strict ac�ordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of other sections. ° END OFISECTION - HVAC EQUIPMENT - AIR SIDE I . I I � � I I , , I I I ' i , 052899 � 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS I HVAC EQUIPMENT-AIR SIDE PAGE 15800-4 LJ LJ l�' � �� SECTION 15850 - DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES PART1-GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Provide all necessary labor, equipment, and materials for a complete duct system, including all hardware and accessory devices. B. Install instrumentation devices in the duct system, furnished under the "Controls" Section. C. Provide for venting of combustion products from equipment specified in other Sections. 1.2 STANDARDS: A. Ductwork shall be fabricated, erected and installed and fitted out with accessories in accordance with the following- . 1. Governing Building Codes. 2. NFPA 90A, 1985. 3. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, First Edition, 1985. 1.3 DEFINITIONS: A. Pressure - Velocity Classification - Classifications of duct construction as defined in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, First Edition, 1985 (Table 1-1). B. Lined Ductwork - Ducts or plenums internally lined with fiberglass sheet. C. Insulated Ductwork - Externally insulated as specified in the "Insulation" Section. D. Preinsulated Ducfinrork - Ductwork constructed of insulating materials or incorporating insulating material during fabrication. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Submit coordinated Shop Drawings, drawn to scale no less than 0.25-inch per foot, on the following fabricated items- 1. Entire duct system. 2. Duct joints and support details. 3. Duct connected equipment mountings and flexible connections. 4. Louvers. 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES PAGE 15850-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. 2.2 A. B. 2.3 MATERIALS: � � ' Galvanized steel sheets, �ock-forming quality, ASTM A-525 with galvanized coating, 1-1/4 oz, per sq. ft for both sides of the�sheet. VOLUME DAMPERS: � Provide manual balancing dampers with position locking mechanism as required to balance the airflow to each outlet or frqm each inlet. I Construction in accordanc� with SMACNA manuals. FABRICATION: I A. Ductwork - 1. Fabricate in accordan�e with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 1985. 2. Each duct system sha�l be constructed for the specific duct pressure classifications indicated on the Drawings,,or, w�here not indicated, the I-inch WG pressure class is the basis of compliance regardless of velocity except when the duct is variable volume. All variable volume duct upstream�of VAV boxes has a 2-inch WG pressure class unless indicated otherwise on Drawings�. � 3. Pressure-Velocity Clas�ification of duct systems shall be in accordance with SMACNA Table 1-1. l � 4. Seal in accordance witf� SMACNA Table 1-2 for required static pressure construction class. B. Rectangular duct fittings- � 4 � } 1. Elbows, tees and splits �hall be constructed with square turns or radius turns which shall have a centerline radius� 1-1/2 times the width of the duct as an absolute minimum. 2. If square turns are used; fabricate and install hollow formed turning vanes in each turn for elbows having equal inle�t and outlet dimensions. 3. Where elbows have une�ual inlet and outlet dimensions, turning vanes shall have leading and trailing edges parall I with the air flow and shall be high efficiency profile type similar to those manufactured by tfie Aerodyne Company. Vane assemblies shall be made with Aerodyne side rails, and anes shatl be installed on design centers as for the vanes across the full diagonal dimensi�n of the elbow. Cut center section of each rail as recommended by manufacturer so that the �required position adjustment may be made. I I PART 3 - EXECUTION I ' 3.1 MA7ERIAL APPLICATION: � A. Galvanized steel sheets - use fpr fabrication of the following- 1. Supply, return, exhaust ducts. - � 052899 � 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP � � DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PAGE 15850-2 I � � 2. Intake and exhaust louvers. a3.2 TESTING: A. See Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Section. � � 3.3 COMPLETION: � A. Complete each entire duct system, perform system pressure testing and cleaning operations, and leave each system in a condition with the coils cleaned, the filters clean, and debris and foreign mate�ial removed from the duct system. � B. Install a suitable air diffuser, grille, or similar device to cover each duct outlet. C. Paint bare metal interior surfaces of ducts which can be seen through air inlets or outlets with a � flat black paint. � D. Operate systems and prove them to be free from excessive noise, free from perceptible air leaks, free from vibration, and capable of delivering the air quantities scheduled. � END OF SECTION - DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES � � � � � � � � � � � 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS � DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES PAGE 15850-3 � � � � � � SECTION 15900 - iEMPERATURE CONTROLS (DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: � B. C. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of complete temperature control systems for the building as described herein and indicated on the Drawings. 7he term "temperature controls" shall be construed to include controls for humidity, velocity, pressure, and temperature, etc., where required, as well as indicating equipment. Provide a complete system. 1.2 SERVICE AND GUARANTEE: � A. The control system shall be free from defects in workmanship and material and shall be guaranteed to perform in accordance with the intent of the Plans and Specifications. � � � L!� B. During the minimum one year guarantee period after completion of the original test of the installation and acceptance, provide service incidental to the proper performance, balancing, adjusting, and control of the system, at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.3 SUBMITTAL DATA: A. Electric or Electronic Systems- Submit schematic diagrams showing relays, control valves, control dampers, malfunction alarm, switches and wiring plus other items not specified herein nor indicated on Drawings necessary to perform the functions. 1.4 PACKAGED EQUIPMENT: � A. Incorporate control elements furnished with packaged equipment into the overall system control. Such equipment includes, but may not be limited�to- � � � � u � [�I 1. Unit heaters. 2. Exhaust fans. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMOSTATS (ELECTRIC�: A. Line voltage on/off thermostats shall be the bimetal actuated, open contact, or bellows actuated enclosed snap-switch type. They shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., listed at an electrical rating appropriate to the application. Bimetal thermostats shall employ heat anticipation. B. Combination thermostat and fan switch shall comply with the requirements listed above for line voltage thermostats. In addition, it shall include as an integral part of the thermostat, a pushbutton or lever operated manual switch for control of the fan in the fan unit. The thermostat shall be designed for mounting on a standard two-gang switch box or "mud ring" and shall be a complete factory fabricated unit and a standard cataloged product of the manufacturer. 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP � TEMPERATURE CONTROLS (DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS) COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PAGE 15900-1 L�-`J C. Low voltage on/off thermostats shall be of the bimetal operated mercury switch type and shall have � either adjustable or fixed uriiversal anticipation heater. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ELECTRIC WIRING: A. B. C. 3.3 Electric wiring and devices hecessary for equipment operation in "HAND" position of motor starter selector switches (with temporary jumper between "HAND" terminal and source of control voltage) is included in the Electrical 6ection. Motor starters shall be arranged with overload contacts and safety cutout contacts wire� in the switch leg of the control circuit between the switch side of the control voltage source and the "HAND" terminal of the starter (no contacts in the circuit between the constant terminal of the solenoid and the constant terminal of the control voltage source). Provide electric wiring in co�nection with the instrumentation system, installed by qualified control electricians, utitizing basic Imaterials and methods specified in the Electrical Sections of the Specifications. 1. Normal sequence inte�locks and contacts, including start-stop pushbuttons, shall be wired in � a series, parallel, or series-parallel circuit as required to achieve the specified control sequence from the "HAND" term�nal to the "AUTO" terminal of the cover mounted HAND-OFF-AUTO confrol switch furnishe� with the starter. 2. Normally closed safety devices related to motor driven equipment, specified for equipment protection shall be wire�d in series between the control circuit voltage source and the "HAND" terminal of the cover rt�ounted HAND-OFF-AUTO control switch furnished with the starter, in such a manner that a tripped safety device will absolutely disable operation of the related motor. Remove tempd{ary jumpers installed under Electrical Section. Coordinate with electrical sys�em supplier for any required electric circuits. Pay for any circuits not specifically specified to be pr�vided. � FIELD MOUNTED INSTRUMENTS: A. Field mounted instruments sh�ll be securely mounted on piping, ducts, casings, walls, or pipe stands. Instruments shall be located so as to avoid interFerence with access to other equipment. B. Field mounted instruments shlall have laminated plastic name tags with tag numbers and service engraved on the tag. Tags sh�all be securely fastened to the instrument. Tags shall be black with white lettering. I 3.4 "FAIL-SAFE" OPERATION: A. Control operators shall be sele�ted, applied, and installed in such a manner that upon power failure, for any reason, the "normal" pqsition of each operator shall be such that no physical damage will be caused to any equipment, pipirig, or duct system, to the building, or to its contents, as a result of the failure. 3.5 A. 3.6 1 CLEANING AND ADJUSTME�ITS: � Adjust and place entire system i operation results during the guarantee p�riod. DEMONS7RATION: � Provide readjustment necessary to accomplish specified 052899 I 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP � TEMPERATURE CONTROLS (DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS) COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PAGE 15900-2 � � � � � � � ■::i � � � � � �i� l�' � ``J � � A. Demonstrate that the instrumentation system and associated equipment is installed, calibrated, adjusted, and operating as specified. B. Pertorm the demonstration in company with the Owner's operating personnel. Coordinate timing of the demonstration with interested parties. C. Report operating conditions of the instrument air supply system after total system is complete and in normal operation. Ec�i �:7_Vil[:L� A. Provide a minimum of 40 hours of hands-on training to familiarize the operating engineers with the completed system. B. Provide a minimum of 40 hours of training in the software and programming methods of the direct digital control system to two people designated by the Owner.. C. Provide 16 hours of refresher training at the end of 6 months and again at the end of one year of operation. 3.8 CALIBRATION TOOLS: A. Provide one set of any special tools req�ired for maintenance and calibration of the system at acceptance of the system. I END OF SECTION -1'EMPERATURE CONTROLS I 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP TEMPERATURE'CONTROLS (DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS) COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PAGE 15900-3 � � � � �#J �� l*'J � � � � l_�J � L■:1 u � l�!' L*� lsJ SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (HVAC) PART1-GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. This Section applies to the testing, adjusting, and balancing of all HVAC air and water systems in Division 15 of the Specifications. 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS: A. Testing, adjusting and balancing (T-A-B) of systems shall be performed by competent and experienced personnel, having done similar work in the paat, and whose qualifications shall be subject to approval. B. Qualifications for HVAC Work- 1. Membership in the Associated Air Balance Council, National Environmental Balancing Bureau. C. In lieu of inembership stated above, the qualifications of other applicants will be considered for approval, provided documentation is submitted to show that the minimum published qualification standards for general membership in the listed organizations are met. D. Submit names and qualifications of all persons proposed for testing, adjusting and balancing of mechanical systems and equipment. 1.3 REPORTS: A. Provide reports and certificates required in each category of testing, adjusting and balancing, signed by both the technician pertorming the work and the Contractor as representing accurate, factual data, based on readings in the field. B. Reports shall be in triplicate on 8 1/2 x 11-inch white bond paper. Submit format for recording data for approval prior to use. • PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS: A. Provide all meters, instruments, equipment and materials necessary for perFormance of tests. B. Testing apparatus, not part of the permanent installation, shall remain the property of the Contractor. C. Provide gaskets, lubricants and other expendable materials required to be replaced during the prosecution of the work. I 1. Fixed pitched pulleys required for fan adjustments shall be provided on an exchange basis by the party responsible for the fan installation. D. Provide fuel, if any, as required for tests. 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (HVAC) COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PAGE 15990-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HEATING, VENTILATINGIAND AIR CONDITIONING: A. Air Balancing: I 1. Balance the supply an�return air systems in accordance with SMACNA and AABC standards, by the use of a direct re ding instrument such as "Anemotherm" or "Velometer' which has been properly calibrated. I � 2. The quantity of air disct�arged by each outlet shall be within 10 percent of the design cfm shown on the Drawings. 3. Furnish Typewritten Data Tabulating- a. Quantity of air in c�m at each air exhaust fan. 4. Adjust belts, sheaves ar�d the alignment of air handling equipment. � 5. Where various combina�ons of sheaves must be installed on fan systems to achieve the correct air delivery, change th sheaves and continue to take successive readings until the correct combinations are install�d. 6. Oil or grease bearings ir� accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 7. Furnish typewritten data ;aken at each air handling unit, for both clean and dirty filter conditions, tabulating- a. Total quantity of ex'riaust or relief air in cfm. b. Rpm of each fan or 5lower. c. Rpm of each motor. d. Voltage and amperN input of each motor (one reading for each phase leg on 3 phase motors). e. Pressure in inches water gage at inlet and discharge of each fan or blower. f. Furnish manufacturer's fan curve with calculated operating condition shown thereon. B. HVAC Electric Heating Coils- 1. Furnish Typewritten Data 'fabulating- Voltage and ampere input �f each phase leg at full load and each incremental stage. Quantity of air flow in cfm. Entering and leaving air ternperatures. Capacity of coil in Btuh. END OF SECTIO�V - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING � 052899 I 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP � � • TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (HVAC) COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPRO EMENTS PAGE 15990-2 � � � � � Q � � � � � � � a � SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 CODES AND STANDARDS: A. Workmanship, material and equipment shall be in accordance with Specifications and Drawings and in some instances the requirerrients exceed those required by codes and standards. Where not exceeded, the codes and standards shal{ be considered as absolute minimum requirements. B C All materials, appliances, equipment and devices provided under this contract must meet the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standards. Refer to NEC, for definitions of terms used in the Drawings, Specifications, etc. These definitions, in conjunction with local authorities interpretation, convention and common usage, will apply. 1.2 REFERENCE ABBREVIATIONS: A. References are made in the various Electrical Sections to technical societies, codes, specifications, trade organizations, and regulatory authorities in accordance with the following abbreviations: ADA- FM - FS - IEEE - ICEA - IRI - ISO - NEC - NEMA- NETA - NFC - NFPA - TAS- UL- Americans with Disabilities Act (1992). Factory Mutual Federat Specification. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. Insulated Cable Engineers Association. Industrial Risk Insurors. Insurance Services Organization. National Electrical Code (NFPA Pamphlet No. 70). National Electrical Manufacturer's Association. International Electrical Testing Association, Inc. National Fire Codes. National Fire Protection Association. Texas Accessibility Standards (1994). Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS AND DATA TO BE SUBMITTED: A. Reference catalog cuts and brochures of products to proper paragraph in Specifications. Furnish numerical index by Specifications paragraph number listing product name, catalog number and reference to page number of submittal brochure. B. Cross reference individual catalog numbers of substitute products to numbers of specified materials. C. Bind submittal in bookfet form. D. Requests for permission to use substitute or alternate products shall be accompanied with evidence � to prove that the product- 1. Conforms with the standard of performance and quality specified. L;J 2. Will physically fit in the space allocated, with sufficient access and maintenance space. � 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-1 L�J r I� 3. WII not entail changes �n details and construction of related work whether mechanical, electrical, or general in nature. � 4. Involves no additional ¢osts to the Owner or extended construction time. � E. Requests for permission to �use substitute or alternate products shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. In th� event that the use of these products may be determined to result in a material or labor savings to �he Contractor, then the amount of these savings as a credit to the Owner will be required to assist In determination of acceptability of the product. Provide drawings, specifications, samples, pejformance data and other information as may be required to assist in determination of acceptabili�y of the product. F. Equipment Items- I 1. Submit manufacturer's �;ertified data relative to equipment required for the installation of the electrical systems. 2. Submit adequate engin rering data on each piece of equipment to allow a careful check of compliance with the tec�nical requirements of the Contract Documents. Clearly indicate on 'submitted data the manufacturer's name, piece number, equipment capacity, and other applicable technical dat� . 3. Data for Electrical Syste�ns: Transformers. Panelboards. Lightning Protection. ,Lighting Fixtures. Disconnect Safety S�ritches. I Raceways and Fitting�ls. Vibration Isolation. Motors and Motor Sta ters. Switches. I Underground Conduit. Wires and Cables. 1.4 A. 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPRO'JEMENTS I Wiring Devices and W II Plates. INSTRUCTIONS: When specified in other Sectiohs, furnish the services of competent instructors who will give full instruction to designated person el in the adjustment operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements of the equipment or system specified. Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the inst�llation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical � L'�J L�J � LJ � � '�J ` ��1 �� LrJ � � � � � � BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-2 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � U operation and maintenance work. Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Owner for regular operation. B. The number of man-days of instruction to be furnished shall be as specified in the various Sections of the Specifications. 1.5 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: A. Bind in looseleaf binders with the words, "Operating an�J Maintenance Manual" and the Project identification imprinted on the cover. Prepare three complete sets of records for the Owner, with table of contents, index, and tabbed section dividers. B. During the construction period, accumulate the following for inclusion in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals- 1. Copies of warranties and guarantees on each piece of equipment installed. 2. Fixture brochures. 3. Wiring and control diagrams. 4. Approved Shop Drawings. 5. Operating instructions for- Electrical Systems 6. Recommended maintenance procedures. � 7. Lists of major items of equipment with name, address, and telephone number of each local representative. C. Submit the manuals for approval at approximately 75 percent job completion. D. Each manual shall consist of- 1. Complete description of each item of equipment and apparatus furnished and installed - including ratings, capacities, and characteristics. 2. Fully detailed parts list, including all numbered parts of each item of equipment and apparatus furnished and installed. , 3. Manufacturer's printed instructions describing operation, servicing, maintenance and repair of each item of equipment and apparatus. 4. Typewritten record of all tests made of materials, equipment, and systems. All such records shall state the date tests were conducted, the names of all persons making and witnessing the tests, and citing any unusual conditions relevant to the tests. 1.6 RECORD DRAWINGS: A. Accumulate Record Drawings during the construction of the project. Keep one (1) set of blueline Contract Drawings at the job site at all times, and mark changes, rerouting or modifications which occur, clearly on the Drawings with dimensions. . 052898 ' 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS 16010-3 � B. At conipletion of the jo , obtain ,and pay for a set of reproducibles of the Contract Drawings and transfer the notations in icating changes to them. Reproducibles shall be submitted for review prior to final payment. Repro ucibles shal� be on vellum material, and shall be completely �legible. 1.7 A. OWNER-FURNISHED, Install and make all ne� equipment. See plans a PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANU 'ALLED EQUIPMENT (OFCI): sary electrical connections to scheduled/designated Owner-furnished schedules. RS: A. Manufacturer's names nd catalog numbers are scheduled or specified for the purpose of establishing standard of d sign, quality, appearance, performance and serviceability, and not to limit competition. Scheduled p oducts (as may be modified by detailed specifications) are those selected as the basis for system c�esign with respect to physical size and space arrangements, required capacity and performancelcharacteristics, and the product quality intended. C�'J L�] u C�J L�"J L�J B. The Drawings indicate sch�uled products physically arranged in the spaces, based on catalog data � of specific manufacturers. C. � 2.2 /� Listed "Acceptabl� Manu Facturers" are those considered capable of manufacturing products conforming to detailed spec'fications, and as such, are invited to compete on an equal basis provided the offering is comparable i� every respect to scheduled or specified products and actually conforms to the detailed specificat ons and schedule requirements. Listing herein as "acceptable manufacturers" does not �mply "accepted", "approved", "prior approval", or any other such connotation. All product off rings must be submitted for approval after Contract award. Manufacturers of materials �nd equipment shall be as specified, scheduled, or as listed in each respective product Specification Article. FLAME SPREAD AND SM KE DEVELOPED PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS: Materials and adhesives use� throughout the electrical systems shall have a flame spread rating not over 25 without evidence of ontinued combustion and with a smoke developed rating not higher than 50. If such materials are o be applied with adhesives, they shall be tested as applie� with such adhesives, or the adhesives used shall have a flame spread rating not over 25 and a smoke developed rating not higher th n 50. (Note - materials need not meet these requirements where they are entirely located outside o a building and do not penetrate a wall or roof, and do not create an exposure hazard or where sp cifically exempted in the body of these Specifications.) B. "Flame Spread Rating" and " moke Devetoped Rating" shall be as determined by the "Method of Test of Surtace Burning Ch racteristics of Building Materials, NFPA No. 255, ASTM E84, Underwriters Laboratories, I�c., Standard". Such materials are listed in the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. "Building Ma'terials List" under the heading "Hazard Classification (Fire)". 2.3 IDENTIFICATfON OF CONDU'IT AND EQUIPMENT: I�� I� �� A. Identify electrical equipment wjth nameplate bearing equipment name and number, using bevel � edges, 1/16-inch thick, 1-1/2-inch white laminated bakelite with engraved black letters, I/2-inch 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROvEMENTS 16010-4 � � .'+�J � LJ (double line) or 7/8-inch (single line) high, permanently mounted on the equipment in a conspicuous place with screws. Cardholders with card identification will not be accepted. QB. Underground Warning Tapes For Buried Lines- � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �J 1. Provide 3-inch wide metallic core brightly colored polyethylene detection tape, shallow buried in the trench above non-metallic conduits, serving the dual purpose of line location and identification. The tape shall be easily detected by any commonly used metal detector and shall bear a printed message (continuous along entire len�th) describing the contents of the line beneath. 2. Provide 6-inch wide brightly colored polyethylene tape, shallow buried in the trench above metallic conduits, to identify the contents of the line beneath. The tape shall bear a printed message (continuous along entire length) describing the type of the buried line and its contents. C. Panelboards - Provide nameplates to identify each section as specified for electrical equipment. Type identification cardslpanel directory for insertion in card holder pockets in each lighting and appliance panelboard. Photo-reduce as necessary to fit card holders. D. Provide nameplates to identify motor starters, disconnect switches, time clocks, transformers, and miscellaneous electrical equipment as to systems or mechanical equipment served, or specific function as appropriate. E. F. G. Nameplates and tags shall correspond to the Record Drawings. Submit complete details of identification legends, color fields, and sizes, coordinated befinreen trades. Acceptable Manufacturers - Seton Nameplate Corporation, W.H. Brady, Westline. 2.4 BEARINGS: A. All bearings supplied to the project, regardless of supply responsibility or applications as integral parts of machinery, shall be standard catalog items and interchangeable with those of manufacturers currently represented in the local trade area with replacements stocked locally. Ball bearings shall be radial or thrust design, sealed with enclosed in a dust and moisture-proof housing, and selected in accordance with AFBM Rating B-10 for at least 200,000 hour operating life as applied. Grease lubricated bearings shall be arranged for regreasing thru alemite fittings located outside machinery enclosures in a convenient location, with grease relief fittings in the baring housing to prevent over- greasing or seal rupture. 2.5 ELECTRIC MOTORS A.. Shall conform to the requirements of IEEE, NEMA, and shall have voltage, phase frequency and service as scheduled. B. Each item of motor driven equipment shall be furnished complete with the motors, drives and control equipment, including remote pilot devices as required to perform the specific function for which it is intended. C. Motors shall be sleeve or ball bearing rype selected for quiet ope�ation, shall be manufactured for general purpose duty, with_each bearing accessible for �ubrication, and designed for the load imposed by the drivel D. Motors'/Z horsepower and larger shall have bearings with pressure grease lubrication. 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP � BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS ' 16010-5 E. F G. I I �I I ' Motors connected t� drive equipment shall be furnished with adjustable slide rail bases except for fractional horse ower motors which shall have slotted bases. Motor leads shall be permanently identifi�d and supplied with connectors. Provide open drippr�of enclosures for motors located indoors in dry locations, and splashproof enclosures in wet loc tions. Motors to be installed outdoors shall be totally enclosed fan-cooled. Unless otherwise in icated, motors smaller than 3/4 horsepower shall be brushless, capacitor start or split phase ty�e designed for 120 volt, single phase, 60 Hz alternating current. H. Motors 3/4 horsepow��r and larger shall be squirrel cage induction type, 460 volts, 3 phase , 60 Hz alternating currenl, unless'otherwise noted. Each motor shall be f�ee from magnetic hum, designed for quiet operation. J. Each motor shall be suitable for the brake horsepower of the driven unit, rated with 1.15 minimum service factc�r, with the temperature rise not to exceed NEMA standards and shall be capable or withstandir g momentary overloads of 25 percent without injurious overheating. K. Electrical Specifications - Copperwindings, winding insulation system NEMA Class B or better, wound for standard vdltages. � Except where premium motors are specifically required in the detailed equipment sp��ifications, motors shall conform to NEMA Design B as a minimum. L. Mechanical Specificati�ms - Frame dimensions conform to NEMA standards for "T-Frame" moto�s. Frame constr� ction of motors larger than NEMA frame 145 T of cast-iron or extruded aluminum construction nd those of NEMA frame size 145T and smaller may be of fabricated steel type. Nameplate shall be stainless steel. Grease lubricated ball or roller bearings shall be supplied unless othe ise specified. On NEMA frame sizes 182T and larger make provisions for regreasing by use o�, removable plugs. M. Acceptable Manufact Louis Allis, Marathon, 2.6 MOTOR STARTERS: �� C�J L*1 � L�J l�'J L�J L�J LrJ � - Allis Chalmers, Baldor, Century, General Electric, Ideal, Lincoln, � nce, U.S., Wagner, Westinghouse. A. Except where otherwise spe�fied or scheduled, each starter shall be furnished by the supplier who furnishes the equipment it co itrols. B. A manual or magnetic starter shall be provided for each motor. Where such devices are included in an "Equipment Control Schedule", they shall be as scheduled. Otherwise, they shall be as recommended by the equipm�nt manufacturer. C. Magnetic starters shall inclu e overload protection for each phase wired with normally closed contacts in series control cir uit ahead of any other control contacts on the control side of the solenoid coil, and no contact between the other side of the solenoid coil and the control power source. Motor starters shall c nform to NEMA Standards for Industrial Control for 3 phase moto�s, No. IC-1, with 120 volt (maxim m) control circuit and control power transformer. D. Where individual starters and isconnect switches (or circuit breakers) are indicated to be in the same location, furnish combin tion devices in a common housing. Fused disconnects shall have rejection type fuse clips and CI_ ss RK-1 fuses. 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPRO�/EMENTS 16010-6 I � L�J � �� I'� LJ �� '� L�J � � L�' I�; l� E. In every instance where magnetic starters are not required, furnish manual starters for fractional horsepower single phase motors -"On-OfP', snap-switch type with soldered ratchet overload protection. F. When interlocking or automatic control of single phase motors is indicated or required, the motors shall be furnished with magnetic across-the-line starters. G. When interlocking or automatic control of electric heaters is indicated or required, the heaters shall be furnished with contactors. Provide control power transformers as required to maintain control circuit voltages not exceeding 120 volts. H. Provide with each magnetic starter a reset button, pilot light, and HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC switch, heavy-duty type, mounted in starter cover. Provide field reversible (normally open or normally closed) auxiliary contacts required for interlocking but in no case less than two (2) per starter. Acceptable Manufacturers - General Electric, Square D, Siemens. � 2.7 SLEEVES, INSERTS, ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS: � � A. Provide in concrete, carpentry or masonry construction, hangers, sleeves, expansion bolts, inserts, supporting steel, or other fixtures necessary for the suppo�t of equipment and devices furnished under each Section of the Specifications. B. Except as otherwise indicated or specified, each conduit, passing through walls, floors, ceilings or partitions shall be provided with sleeves having internal diameters approximately 1-inch larger than the outside diameter of conduit. {� C. Sleeves through interior partitions and floors shall be no less than 22 gage galvanized steel, set flush �,,,j with the finished surfaces. � �� IL■J ';!1 � D. Sleeves through precast or post-tensioned structures shall be no less than Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe and shall be subject to the acceptance of the designer of the structure. Submit size, location, and sleeve material for Structural Engineer review and acceptance. E. Sleeves through grade slabs, basement or exterior wall shall be steel or cast iron conduit with water stop flange, set flush with finished surfaces, and with the space between the pipe and the sleeves packed with oakum or jute finrine and caulked watertight. F. Sleeves in wet or potentially wet floors or spaces such as equipment rooms or sprinklered areas shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with water stop flange and with the top of the sleeve projecting 2-inches above the finished floor, with annular space packed with oakum or jute twine and caulked watertight. G. Option - Provide link-seal neoprene closure fittings in lieu of packing. H. Attachments to structure shall be by means of beam clamps wherever practicable. Unavoidable attachments to concrete structure shall be by means of pre-set concrete inserts whenever the need for such attachment can be reasonably foreseen and the locations and sizes of inserts is known prior to pouring of concrete. In instances where it is necessary to make attachments to concrete and � proper inserts have not been pre-set, the attachmerit shall be made by means of drilled holes and expansion anchors of either the bolt stud or flush variety. Design working stress of attachments shall be limited to 25 percent of the average maximum (ultimate) stress values published by the manufacturer. 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP � BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS 16010-7 ��l � Inserts shall be cast iron or �alvanized steel individual type, with accommodations for removable nuts and threaded rods up to 3.�-inch diameter, and permitting lateral adjustment. 0 J. Fasteners in concrete beans shall be sufficiently above the bottom of the beam to clear reinforcing. � K. Expansion anchors shall b�� zinc and chromate plated for corrosion protection and conform to the dimensional requirements af Federal Specification FF-S-325. Expansion anchors shall be selected � and installed in accordance with the recommendations of Expansion Anchor Manufacturer's Institute (EAMI) and the manufactun�r's instructions. L. Acceptable Manufacturers •� Grinnell, Hilti, Phillips, or Thunderline. 2.8 FIRE-STOPPING: A. Seal� annular spaces betw�n sleeves and penetrating materials in fire-rated floors, ceilings, and walls with fireproof and wate rproof silicone elastomer applied in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Mult� ple penetrations shall be sealed with silicone foam; single penetrations may be sealed with silicon � calking. Seal material shall be UL classified for use in fire-rated penetration seals, and shall be applied in the manufacturer's recommended thickness for the fire rating of the penetrated stru�;ture in accordance with ASTM-E-814 requirements. B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Dow Corning, General Electric. 2.9 WATERPROOFING: A. Seal penetrations of wet or ��otentially wet structures, floors, exterior walls, etc., other than those requiring fire-stopping, with s �alant to prevent moisture leakage. Apply sealing material (calking) in accordance with manufactur�r's published instructions. � B. Product Research and Cherr�cal Co. "Poly-Sulphide SealanY' PRC-5000. 2.10 AUXILIARY STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS: A. 2.11 A. � Provide auxiliary structural s pports as necessary to support electrical systems from the building structure indicated on the str�ctural drawings. Supporting members shall be metal strut framing or standard structural shapes, d signed to support imposed loads with a working stress no greater than 25 percent of ultimate stress values of the members, and articulation with the building structure without exceeding structural li itations at the point of attachment to the building structure. Prepare calculations and Shop Drawin s of each such support and submit for approval. ESCUTCHEONS: Provide escutcheons or 22 g�ge minimum painted galvanized sheet metal wall flanges (in event standard manufactured produ�t does not exist) for electrical penetrations of floors, ceilings, walls or partitions. Escutcheons shall �e sized to enclose the outside of the penetration sleeve and fit snugly to the pipe (or over outside pf insulation) of insulated lines. Both exposed surFaces of such penetrated elements shall be fitted with escutcheons which shall both afford a finished appearance and prevent passage of vermir�. � ' Except where otherwise spec fied, escutcheons shall be one-piece (where practicable) or split, hinged, stamped brass type d signed to fit the pipe, and to cover the terminating pipe sleeve, in chrome plated finish, with secu;-ing device to hold the escutcheon tight to the pipe. C. Use deep escutcheon on each'sleeve set in a waterproof concrete floor. 052899 ' 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPRO�VEMENTS 16010-8 � � �� L�"J L�J LJ L�J � 1� �� L'�J C�J �I lsJ � D. Acceptable Manufacturers - Beaton and Corbin, Grinnell, Sweet and Donaldson. �1 L� �� I� � f� � L!'J 'J PART 3 - EXECUTION . 3.1 ELECTRIC WIRING OF MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT: A. Power wiring and disconnect switches for the proper isolation of each piece of equipment shall be provided under the electrical sections of the specifications, as necessary for operation in the "HAND" position of the HAND-OFF-AUTO control switch. B. The electrical design is based on the equipment listed in the schedules. Parties furnishing equipment requiring changes in the electrical design shall pay costs involved in modifying the electrical design to accommodate the equipment involved. . C. Control and interlock wiring for the heating and ventilating systems shall be provided under the electrical sections of the specifications, as necessary for operation in the "AUTO" position of the HAND-OFF-AUTO control switch. B. "Hazardous Locations" shall be as defined in the National Electrical Code. 3.2 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT: A. Protect equipment from physical damage and deterioration after it is delivered to the Project, and during the installation period prior to Owner acceptance. B. The equipment shall be kept clean. Motors and electrical devices shall be covered with suitable materials to prevent dirt or dust accumulation within equipment. Machinery and devices shatl be properly oiled and maintained to prevent rusting and deterioration. C. Repair scratches, mars, or paint deterioration. � 3.3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL: � � � � � � � � A. Pertorm excavation and backfill required for the installation of underground conduit. B. Cut trenches true and straight and grade bottom to afford uniform bearing of barrel on firm soil. Stack the excavation material in a suitable location. Shore trenches and excavated areas as required for safety, and for security of adjacent earth and structures. C. � C Cut through walks, roads, and other structures as necessary for the installation. Install underground electrical conduits with a minimum cover of 24-inches from finished grade. Do not place backfill until the work has been inspected, tested and accepte�. F. Backfill material shall be free of cinder or rocks, and free of clods or lumps larger than I-inch, up to 12-inches above top of pipe, and 2-inches in remainder. If the excavated material is not suitable, provide adequate material from other locations. G. Backfill by installing clean earth in accordance with the above Specifications in layers no more than 6-inches thick, tamping (and wetting down, if necessary). Hand place and tamp each layer of initial backfill in 4-inch layers up to pipe centerline, and in 6-inch layers up to 12-inches above the top of pipe. Complete backfill to grade and create a substantial, well-compacted trench to 95 percent compaction by the standard Proctor test. 052899 � 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP � BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS 16010-9 � I • H. Remove surplus earth or r'naterials remaining after backfilling from the site. I I. Repair utilities, lines, wa(:cs, and roads, and other surfaces and structures damaged by these operations to match condi ions existing prior to excavation. 3.4 EQUIPMENT SPACE: A. B. 3.5 A. B. C. D. E. � The Drawings indicate sch�duled products physically arranged in the spaces, based on catalog data of specific manufacturers. � Prepare Shop Drawings i dicating the exact physical space requirements for equipment and servicing of equipment a ually purchased for each item of equipment involved, and electrical connections, and be fully r sponsible for costs or modifications required for the installation. EQUIPMENT FOUNDATI NS: Floor mounted electrical e uipment shall be mounted on concrete housekeeping pads at least 4-inches high, poured integ al with the floor slab wherever practicable. Pads shall extend a minimu of 15-inches in frontofequipmentwhere necessary to afford operating surface no more than 78-in�hes beneath the center of the highest operating handle in its position. Coordinafe pad sizes and lo ations: Furnish templates for bolt in tallation, along with the anchor bolts. Provide isolation materialsl and inertia blocks, see Vibration Isolation Section for specific requirements. F. Provide necessary supportin a steel required for the electrical systems. G. Set equipment, and grout th equipment to the base, and fill void spaces with nonshrinking grout. Dowel direct driven equipm nt and driving motors to their common mounting frame after final alignment and run-in. ` , 3.6 IN7ERFERENCES: A. Relocate or reroute existing w ring, as fequired to facilitate construction of finished work as planned. Restore surfaces, insulation, -��d finish to match condition of adjacent work. 3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING: A. Assume costs and responsibil'ty for cutting and patching required to complete the installation. B. Patch surtaces to the conditior�i of the adjacent surfaces. 3.8 PAINTING AND FINISHING ND CLEANING: A. Finish painting (other than fact ry applied) and electrical equipment, and its associated conduit and devices is specified elsewher in the Specifications. Provide touch-up painting of pre-finished electrical products. B. Leave surfaces clean and rem ve debris. 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP � I BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPRONEMENTS 16010-10 I � � � liJ � � � � � C�J L� � L�J I� � � � L�J L�J � � L�1 � L�J � � � � � L�J � L�1 I#J �' LI' lJ � 3.9 OPTION TO RELOCATE OUTLETS AND RELATED DEVICES: � A. Lighting fixtures, convenience outiets, floor outlets, telephone outlets may, at the Owner's option, be relocated to a point within 10 feet of the location indicated on the Drawings, at no additional cost to the Owner, provided the Contractor is advised of this relocation before Shop Drawing preparation or roughing-in begins. B. Only work which must be re-performed in this connection will be considered extra. END OF SECTION - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS ' 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS 16010-11 � O L�� SECTION 16050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (ELECTRICAL) PART1-GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: � A. This Section applies to the furnishing and installing of electrical materials as specified here and in all other Division 16 Sections. � �� L�J [� PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT WITHSTAND RATINGS: A. Electrical equipment, circuit protective devices, bussing, and switches shall be rated to interrupt or withstand short circuit faults greater than the available fault current. B. Refer to Section 16400 Power Distribution. 2.2 WIRE AND CABLE: A. General- � 1. Wre and cable for feeder and branch circuits shall conform to the requirements of the current edition of the National Electrical Code, and shall meet applicable A5TM specifications. Conductors shall be soft drawn, annealed, 98 percent conductivity copper. Wre and cable shall � be new, shall have size, type of insulation, voltage rating and manufacturer's name permanently marked on the outer covering at regular intervals. Conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller shall be color" coded. Colors for each phase and neutral shall be consistent throughout the system. � B. � L�J � � � � l+!J L■J 600 volt insulation - Provide conductors with insulation rated for 600 volts unless specified or indicated otherwise. System design is based on the following U.S. products: 1. NEC Type XHHW, THHN/THWN solid or stranded for Number 10 AWG or smaller. 2. NEC Type XHHW, THHN/THWN stranded for Number 8 and larger. 3. NEC Type MC - Factory assembled armored cable consisting of one or more insulated conductors, and bare ground wire, with suitable filler and a binder applied over the twisted conductors consisting of a compound filled fabric tape, enclosed with a covering of interlocking metal tape, or an impervious close fitting corrugated tube. a. Conductors shall be copper, NEC Type XHHW with 90 C. 600 volt rated crosslinked polyethylene insulation. 2.3 CABLE ACCESSORIES, SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS: � A. General- 1. All low voltage cable accessories shall be of the cold shrinkable type. They shall be of one manufacture to assure consistency in application, installation procedures and training of installers. They shall be of Raychem manufacture or approved equal by 3M and shall be acceptable to the cable manufacturer. _ 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (ELECTRICAL) COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS 16050-1 M� B. 600V Motor Connection„ L�J C. Q E. F 1. Low voltage motor onnections shall be insulated and sealed with cold shrinkable kits, factory engineered for the a�plication. Motor connection kits shall contain fla�ne-retarded, heavy wall, cold shrinkable insu ation components, barrier strip to exclude sealant material from the bolt area, and cold activated sealant material to prevent the ingress of moisture and contamination. Kits shall meet the r quirements of ANSI-C119.1-1986. Lighting Tap Insulation- I 1. Lighting taps located �elow grade shall be insulated and sealed with a cold shrinkable kit, factory engineered for the a plication. Cable tape encapsulation kits shall not require current of the main conductor, and s all consist of a wraparound cold shrinkable sleeve factory precoated with a cold activated self er�capsulating adhesive, a stainless steel closure channel, connector barrier tapes and cable posi�ionmg ties. Encapsutation kits shall meet or exceed the sealing and electrical requirement, of ANSI C119.1-1986. 600V Inline Splices- 1. Low voltage cable splices shall be insulated and sealed with cold shrinkable flame-retarded heavy wall polyolefin :�;leeves. Splicing sleeves shall be designed to provide an insulation thickness, over the con ector, to meet or exceed the National Electrical Code requirements for the wire size and ty e being spliced. Splicing sleeves shall also meet the applicable requirements of UL486 -1984 and ANSI-C119.1-1986. Cable Outer Jacket (Sheatt�) Repair- 1. Cold shrinkable wrapar und sleeves with a precoated adhesive sealant engineered for making permanent repairs shall e used for damaged outerjackets on low voltage cables. The adhesive sealant shall provide a c mplete seal against moisture and corrosive elements. The adhesive sealant shall adhere to a ariety of insulations and other jacket (sheath) materials including PVC, Hypalon, Neoprene, XL E and EPR, as well as metals including lead, aluminum, copper and steel. The sleeve shall eet the applicable performance requirements of ANSI C119.1-1986. End Sealing Caps- 1. During construction, cabl� ends shall be sealed with cold shrinkable caps which are precoated with a thermoplastic adhe,sive that provides a complete environmental seal. The caps shall be constructed of a high den�ity polyolefin for abrasion resistance plus a heavy wall for mechanical toughness. G. Wire Markers- Markers shall be cold shri kable, radiation crosslinked, modified polyolefin sleeves with a 3:1 shrink ratio. They shall b smear resistant prior to shrinking and achieve mark permanency when shrunk, without the eed for permatizing equipment. The markers shall be flattened and mounted on a carrier suita le for use with commerciafly available printing equipment. Markers shall be printable on both sides, resistant to common industrial fluids, including freon TF, isopropyl alcohol and ethyl ne glycol. Markers shall be white, 2-inches long, available scored or unscored and UL recogr�ized to Standard 224. 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP ' BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (ELECTRICAL) COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPRO�'EMENTS 16050-2 �LJ L�J `�� `� L� � L�`1 � f� L�'J � �� L"�J L�J �I� LC1 II��J � � 2.4 RACEWAYS: � A. Metallic conduit and ANSI C80.4 fittings shall be incorporated into the Electrical Work in accordance with the applicable articles of the National Electrical Code. � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � a B. GRC - Galvanized rigid conduit, threaded and coupled steel, ANSI C80.1, UL-6, protected by an overall zinc coating to the inside and outside surfaces of the metal. Coating may be applied by the hot-dip metalizing or sherardizing process. C. EMT- Electrical metallic tubing, "thin wall" zinc coated steel, enameled interior, ANSI C80.3, UL-797, assembled using concrete tight and rain tight gland-ring compression threaded type fittings except where alternate type fittings are specifically allowable. D. Flex - Flexible steel, UL-1, conduit shall be constructed from interlocking single strip flexible steel tubing, galvanized or sherardized. Connectors shall be galvanized, malleable iron squeeze type, or Tomic twist-in type. E. F. G. Liquid-tightflexible metallic raceway shall be similarto standard flexible steel conduit except encased in liquid tight neoprene outer jacket. PVC - Polyvinyl chloride Schedule 40, NEMA TC2, UL 651, with solvent welded joints. Application- 1 2 3 Provide electrical metallic tubing (EMT) within structure, except as specified otherwise. EMT connectors - Provide gland ring compression threaded fittings, except- a. Concrete tight double set screw type connectors are acceptable in 2'/Z-inch and larger sizes in dry locations only. Rigid steel conduit (GRC) shall be used in the following locations- a. At or below grade. , b. In locations where electrical metallic tubing is not permitted and other raceway is not required. c. In or beneath slabs on grade. e. Where exposed to physical damage, excessive moisture, rain, etc. f. At drop connections to motors. 4. PVC coated GRC shall be used at or below grade and in corrosive locations. 5. Provide flexible conduit for transformer connections, and at equipment requiring adjustments or removal for service, not subject to moisture. 6. Provide liquid-tight flexible conduit for each motor and rotating device for power and control, computer room and for other equipment requiring adjustments or removal for service in mechanical rooms or where subject to corrosion moisture or weather. 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP � BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (ELECTRICAL) COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS � 16050-3 i � � 7. Metal-clad armored c ble (MC) may be applied, at Contractor's option, in dry locations where approved by code aut ority. � 8. Non-metallic conduit ( nd grounding conductor) with rigid PVC coated steel elbows may be used for underground cond� it run.. K. L. M. N. O. 9. Conduit and fittings sh�ll be UL listed for the application and location of their intended uses. Acceptable Manufacturers - for GRC and EMT - Allied, Century, Triangle, Western, Wheatland. Acceptable Manufacturers or GRC and EMT Fittings - Adalet, Appleton, Bridgeport, Electroline, Midwest, Neer, O.Z. Gedn y, Raco, Steel City. Acceptable Manufacturers f r flex and liquid-tight flex - American Flex, Alflex, Anamet, Anaconda, Coleman, Electri-Flex, Inter ational. Acceptable Manufacturers f r flex and liquid-tight flex fittings - Adalet, Appleton, Bridgeport, Berger, Efcor, Electroline, Midwest, !Veer, O.Z. Gedney, Raco, Steel City. Acceptable Manufacturers fc r PVC and PVC fittings - Cantex, Carlon Certainteed, National, Sedco, M idwest. 2.5 CABLE FIRESTOPS: A. Seal cable penetrations of fir -rated floors, ceilings, and walls with a fire-rated closure in compliance with NEC 300-21 and UL 14�9. Closures shall be rated as per ASTM-E-119 three-hour fire rating and hose test and shall con ist of grouted-in metal frame sized for applicable fill per NEC, and sealing block assemblies of lastomeric material sized to fit the cables or conduits entering the fire barrier. The elastomeric ma erial shall expand during fire to seal any voids left by burning cable insulation. B. Install closures in accordanc�` with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Acceptable Manufacturers-Ci�ouse-Hinds, Nelson, 3 M, DowCorning, General Electric, International Protective Coatings. 2.6 FLASHINGS: A. Provide weatherproof flashing:� for openings through the roof related to electrical systems. B. Flashings for conduits shall be constructed from 20 gage galvanized steel sheets, with a base extending 10-inches in each di ection beyond the exterior surtace of the opening to be flashed. C. Flashings shall be constructe to terminate not less than 12-inches above the roof with suitable counterflashing constructed fr m the same material as the flashing. D. Furnish flashings for curbs relaFed to electrical system. Furnish and install counterFlashing at each curb. 2.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. Refer to Vibration Isolation Sec�on for specific instruction on spring loaded hangers and isolation in connection with resiliently moun ed equipment, which shall be followed in detail as far as method and types of isolation are concerne�. . I 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (ELECTRICAL) COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPRO EMENTS 16050-4 ; �� I� I� ,I� ��i u G� J � �, �� I� �� r-, �� 'J � � L�J � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �' B. Conduits - Support securely from the structure with rigid steel supports. Provide necessary channels, hanger rods, bolts, nuts, locknuts, accessories and devices to provide a complete structural system. The system shall allow free expansion and contraction. C. Panelboards, Disconnects, Starters, Cabinets, Pull and Junction Boxes, etc. Provide channel supports and miscellaneous steel angles to rigidly support equipment from the structure where required by special conditions and where vertical and/or horizontal support is required other than that provided in the structure. D. Structural support systems shall be specifically designated as suitable for electrical installations. Bases, dimensions and sizes are to be as required for application, job conditions, loads imposed and manufacturer's recommendations. E. F. G, H. Channels - Provide continuous slotted channel, #12 gage steel (minimum). Fasten conduits to channels with pipe channel straps. Hanger Rods - Provide steel rods with continuous, free running th'reads. Straps, Pipe and Conduit Hangers, Inserts, Clamps, Accessories and Devices Provide malleable iron or fo�med steel, as applicable. Flexible cable, strap or wire hangers and fasteners will not be accepted. Steel and malleable iron shall be zinc chromate electrogalvanized. Attachments to Structure - Fastenings to wood shall be by wood screws or screw type nails. Fastenings to hollow masonry units shall be by toggle bolts. Fastenings to concrete or brick shall be by preset inserts or expansion bolts. Fastenings to steel shall be by machine screws, bolts (with flat washers and lockwashers), welded threaded studs or beam clamps designed for the application. Wood plugs and gun fired power driven fasteners will not be accepted. K. Fasten single runs of conduit directly to the structure or hang on rod hangers with one or two hole pipe straps, "U" bolts, lay-in pipe hangers, conduit and pipe hangers, beam clamps and angle clamps as appropriate. L. Fasten multiple runs of conduit directly to the structure using continuous channel inserts or continuous surtace channels. Trapeze hangers utilizing channels and rod hangers may also be used. � M. Conduit shall be securely fastened within three feet of each outlet or junction box, fitting, cabinet or panelboard. Conduit shall be fastened �at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. N. Provide riser clamps at floor lines for vertical runs of conduit. O. Conduits and Raceways with Expansion Joints - Install supports to allow equally distributed expansion and contraction. Use guides, saddles, "U" bolts and/or anchors designated for this application. P. Cables and Wires in Manholes, Cable Chambers, Cable Chases and Other Locations - Provide � hangers, racks, cable cleats and supports designated for the application to insure a neat and secure installation. Q. Structural support systems, channels, hanger rods, bolts, nuts and accessory items shall be as manufactured by B-Line or approved equal. 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (ELECTRICAL) COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS 16050-5 R. 2.8 A. B. � � All supports shall be di�ctly connected to basic structural elements of the building or sitework. Electrical support syste s shall be independent of other systems (HVAC, plumbing, suspended ceilings, raised floors, et�.). Support systems may be shared with similar wireway and conduit systems (fire alarm, secu�ity, MATV, etc.). IDENTIFICATION: � Bundle all associated con uctors and/or cables exiting from conduit or cable with ties, similar to the T& B Ty-Wrap, at the begr ining and end of the bundled group. Provide identification by �using ties similar to the T& B Ty-Wr�p identification tie. Identify individual conduct.rs at their termination by wrap-around type of identification similar to T & B conductor markers. C. Identify all terminal blocks and terminals in the switchgear and control cabinets similar to the canductor groups mention�d above. D. The identification of conducl ors, cables and conduit shall conform to that set forth in their respective schedules. 2.9 GROUND EQUIPMENT: A. Rods - 10 feet long, 3/4-incY diameter copper weld rods. B. Conductor - Sized no smaller than the following- 1. The size noted on the dr'�wings or otherwise scheduled. 2. The size of the phase co�ductors in the feeder or branch circuit. ' 3. The sizes required by A icle 250 of the National Electrical Code. C. Exothermic Grounding Conn ctors - Provide Cadweld exothermic welding system as manufactured ERICO Products Inc. Only C weld Exolon low smoke, low emission welding system shall be used in enclosed areas of the build ng. D. Compression Grounding Conr�ectors - Provide Hyground compression system as manufactured by Burndy. Each connector shal! have the die index number embossed on application. E. Grounding connectors shall m�et the test requirements of IEEE Standard 837-1984. F. Provide precast handholes wit� concrete or cast iron covers as scheduled, to allow inspection of all connections below grade. I G. All ground conductors shall be �opper, and unless specifically noted otherwise, shall be provided with Type THHNlTHWN insulation. H. Ground busses required for the interconnection of grounding conductors shall be solid copper bars, rigidly suppo�ted by metal fram�work and insulated from the building structure. Conductors shall be supported independently and ri�idly attached to the building structure. Attach conductors to the buss with compression type lugs. 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP S BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (ELECTRICAL) COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS 16050-6 � � � � � lJ � � L�J � � � l�J � � � L�'J C� � i ^� f � 1 � �� .� � i � � 1 � � � � 1 � � 2.10 EXPANSlON JOINTS: A. Provide slip type galvanized steel conduit expansion joints wherever structural expansion joints are crossed by conduits embedded in slabs. Install with end barrels flush with concrete on both sides. 2.11 WIREWAYS, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES: A. Provide wireways, junction and pull boxes indicated and at locations required by the National Electrical Code, and at those locations required to facilitate the pulling of wire, fabricated in accordance with NEMA and National Electrical Code requirements with respect to material, gages, dimensions and methods of fastening. Wreways, junction and pull boxes shall bearthe UL label and shall be listed for the application and location of their intended use. Units shall be finished in standard gray enamel, sides and backs spot welded in position, and removable screw cover. B. Construct wireway and accessories in accordance with UL 870, with hinged, removable, sealable covers, arranged for lay-in conductor installation. Connectors shall be slip-in arrangemertt with captive mounting screws. Arrange hangers in a"J" configuration to allow conductor lay-in from one side. C. Interior boxes shall be stamped or fabricated galvanized steel. D. Exterior boxes not totally protected from exposure to driving rain or from excessive moisture shall be hot-dip galvanized cast iron, complete with threaded hubs, bolted weatherproof covers, and rubber or neoprene gaskets. E. Grade level exterior boxes shall be cast iron with solid covers secured with rubber gaskets and bronze cap screws. Conduit connections shall be drilled and tapped for threaded connections. 1. Neenah Series R7519. F. Construct exterior concrete boxes as detailed with solid cast iron covers secured with rubber gaskets and bronze cap screws. 1. Neenah Series R6665. G. Conduits entering boxes shall be thru tight-fitting bored or punched holes, or threaded hubs, and shall be secured firmly. � �� K. Covers in finished areas shall have prime coat. The volume of the boxes shall be in accordance with the NEC requirements, but shall be no smaller than 4-inches square in any case. Boxes shall be accessible at job completion. Boxes with covers in finished areas shall be in those physical locations approved by the Architect. Acceptable Manufacturers - Unity, Universal, Circle AW, Hoffman, Neenah. 2.12 OUTLET BOXES: A. Interior boxes - Standard, single or multiple gang stamped galvanized steel boxes, of the proper size to accommodate the device and function for which intended, complete with extension or plaster rings where required. Boxes for mounting of surFace lighting fixtures shall be 4-inch octagon boxes, with 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (ELECTRICAL) COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS 16050-7 3/8-ir�ch no-bolt fix�ure studs used to securely support fixture. Provide•proper covers or device plates. � B. Exterior boxes - Hot�dip galyanized cast iron, complete with threaded hubs, bolted weatherproof covers, and rubber o� neoprene gaskets. 1 � � r �+ � ��, C. Concrete boxes - Ou tet boxes in concrete slabs shall be two-piece concrete boxes not less than Q 4-inch nominal size w th a minimum depth of 2'/z-inches. If used for lighting fixtures, outlet boxes shall be equipped with fixture stud. D. F. 2.13 A. 2.14 Waterproof boxe� - De gasket covers shall be Acceptable Manufactu Red Dot, Steel City. FD or FS conduit boxes of cast or metal threaded hub type with suitable i where waterproof boxes are required. - Appleton, Adalet, Bowers, Crouse Hinds, Killark, O.A. Gedney, Raco, TERMINAL CABINETS:' Cabinet bodies shall be cons, tructed in accordance with the NEMA PB1 specification for panetboard cabinets. Provide steel dodrs with key locks and keys as specified for panelboards. BACKBOARDS: I A. Construct backboards from exterior grade Douglas fir plywood 3/4-inch thick, and mount on walls or in cabinets with the bottom of 1he board 6-inches above the finished floor minimum. Secure to walls with inserts embedded in the � all, and not less than 1/4-inch -20 brass machine bolt, with nut and washers. For telephone back oards, furnish a No. 6 AWG grounding conductor with terminal lug attached to the lower right-han bolt of the board. 2.15 WIRING DEVICES: A. Install on each and every outlet kox, a wiring device and coverplate, as indicated by symbol on the Drawings. Manufacturer's mode�numbers ar,e not intended to indicate color of devices. Color of devices is designated under "Dev�ce Plates". B. Toggle switches shall be quiet, ac �pe, specification grade, listed by Undenwriters Laboratories, Inc., and meeting the requirements of MA Standard WD-1-1971. Back or side screw terminal shall accommodate up to 10 AWG solid r stranded conductors. Contacts shall be rated at 20 amperes, 120/277 volts ac only, single pole, 3 way, 4-way, or key-operated as indicated. 1. Hubbell1221. C. Each pilot light shall be installed as a combined with another device. Lan having red jewel. 1. P& S 437 with tumbler switch � L*J LEJ � C�J � L�1 L�J L�"J � rate device, using a multi-gang box and switch plate when Iders shall be of the strap type, with flush neon pilot light Q D. General purpose single and duplex recebtacles - Shall be specification grade rated 125 volts, two- pole, three-wire, grounding type with pd arized parallel slots, Style S Series, in accordance with Federal Specification W-C-596, and liste by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., in accordance with NEMA Standard Publication WD-1, par graph 3.02. Bodies shall be of phenolic compound supported by mounting strap having plast r ears. Contact arrangement shall be such that contact 052899 • 98101-99 SOUT�hd HOLLY WTP � BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (ELECTRICAL) COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS . � �• �16050-8 � ��I l� �� LJ L�J LJ � L�J L�J is made on two sides of an inserted blade. Receptacle shall be side-or-back wired with finro screws per terminal. The third grounding pole shall be connected to the metal mounting yoke. 1. 20 ampere, NEMA 5-20R, Duplex-Hubbell 5362 Series. 2. 15 ampere, NEMA 5-15R, Duplex-Hubbell 5262 Series. 3. 20 ampere, NEMA 5-20R, Simplex-Hubbell 5361 Series. E. Special-purpose or heavy-duty receptacles - Shall be of the type and of ratings and number of poles indicated or'required for the anticipated purpose. Provide an appropriate plug for each special purpose receptacle. G. Device Plates- ' 1. Provide one-piece coverplates with rounded edges for outlets and fittings to suit the devices � installed. Screws shall have countersunk heads, provided in a color to match the finish of the plate. Plates shall be installed with all four edges in continuous contact with finished wall surtaces without the use of mats or similar devices, plaster fillings will not be permitted. Plates � shall be installed with an alignment (plumb) tolerance of 1/16-inch. The use of sectional-type device plates will not be permitted. Plates installed in wet and /or corrosive locations shall be gasketed. � � 2. Provide smooth satin finish stainless steel plates in wet and corrosive locations. H. Acceptabl� Manufacturers- General Electric, Hubbell, Leviton, Pass & Seymour, Raceway Products, Inc., Russell & Stoll. 2.17 CONTACTORS AND RELAYS: � A. Contactors and relays shall be UL listed under UL 508, fully rated and marked for use with tungsten lamp and ballast (fluorescent) lamp loads with electrical characteristics as required. Contactors shall be of the single coil, electrically operated, electrically held type, in NE MA 1 enclosu�es, or cabinets, � or pull boxes with hinged covers, or integrally mounted in panelboards, or as otherwise scheduled. Control voltage shall be 120 volt, and where line voltage to unit is greater than 120 volts, phase to neutral shall contain a control power transformer with fused primary. II � � � � � � B. Group mounted contactors or relays shall be numbered with laminated engraved plastic plates. Mount a directory, indicating equipment controlled, on the enclosure cover, as specified for lighting panelboards. C. Provide pilot relays where coil in-rush current is greater than the rated capacity of the remote control devices. Pilot relay contacts shall be compatible with contactor coil characteristics. � E. Units not integrally moun,ted in panelboards shall contain, in the enclosure, a UL listed copper ground terminal. Acceptable Manufacturers - General Electric, Square D, Siemens, Cutler Hammer. 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP BASIC MATERIALS AND METFiODS (ELECTRICAL) COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS � 16050-9 � 2.18 TIME CLOCKS: A. � Digital- 1. Time clocks shall be digital, electronic microprocessors. The program shall be retained during ower failure without battery back-up. The correct time shall be maintained during a powerfailure by battery back-up. 2. Units shall be surtace or flush mounted or mounted within the panel as indicated. 3. Where time clocks are used in conjunction with contactors, they shall be properly coordinated and furnished with necessary miscellaneous appurtenances as required for proper operation. 4. Time clocks shall be furnished with manual override. Acceptable Manufacturers - General Electric, Intermatic, Paragon, Sangamo, Tork. F�i�s;l:C��%]�X��:�L��Ii�T3�I� A. Photosensitive lighting controls shall have weatherproof enclosure, shall energize artificial lighting when natural lighting level falls to a preset adjustable value, and de-energize when natural lighting level rises above a preset adjustable value. The operation shall be fail-safe in that in the event of failure of any components of the control, the artificial lighting shall be continuously energized. B. Include time delay device to prevent switching of artificial lighting due to transient lighting changes. Provide precise method field adjustment of both on and off lighting levels. Controls shall be temperature compensated, suitable for operation from minus 20 to 120 F., completely unaffected by humidity. Switch mechanisms shall be snap acting, of sufficient capacities to adequately handle loads encountered. C. Unit shall be solid state pre-aged, stabilized, and hermetically sealed, enclosed in metal or plastic housing to screen out ultraviolet rays, provide maximum equipment light, and be capable of being faced in the desired direction for proper operation. Power consumption shall not exceed 3 watts per unit at any time. Unit, factory tested�and guaranteed, shall be furnished complete with proper mounting base for installation encountered, with all miscellaneous required appurtenances for proper operation in the system. D. Unit shall be circuited with manual override located in accessible location. E. Acceptable Manufacturers - General Electric, Photo Switch, Precision, Revere, Westinghouse. 2.20 SMOKE DETECTOR: A. Photoelectric smoke detector UL Listed to Standard 217, ceiling mount, 120VAC operation, integral audible notification appliance, LED indicator for power-on-alarm, tandem capability, 3- position test switch, quick disconnect wiring. , B. Complete with normally open alarm contact and one form C auxiliary relay contact. C. Simplex Cat. No. 2098-9694 or approved equal. 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (ELECTRICAL) COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS 16050-10 � I� �I � � L�J L�1 � � � ��J � � �I � L�J L�1 � � � � � 1 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: A. Provide wiring for the connection of motors and control equipment and control wiring as indicated on the Electrical Drawings. 1. Equipment installed under other sections of the Specifications - wiring shall be extended to the equipment, and proper connections made thereto. 2. Flexible connections of short lengths - Shall be provided for equipment subject to vibration or movement and for motors. Liquid-tight conduit shall be used in wet locations. A separate ground conductor shall be provided across flexible connections. a. Length of flexible connections for motors shall be at least 11-inches plus 114-inch per horsepower up to 100 hp, and need not be longer than 36-inches unless otherwise indicated. b. Length of flexible connections for transformers shall be at least 11-inches plus 1/4-inch per kva up to 100 kva, and need not be longer than 36-inches unless otherwise indicated. 3. 'Power connections to any vibration isolated equipment shall be made with a length of flexible conduit having a 90 degree bend in it between the junction box on the equipment and any nonflexible conduit. 4. Owner furnished equipment- Wiring shall be extended to the equipment, and proper connections made thereto. 3.2 OUTLET BOXES: A. Wall switches shall he mounted on the strike side of the doors, as finally hung, whether so shown on the Drawings or not. � C. More than one conduit connection to outlet or junction boxes smaller than 4 x 4 x 1'/-inches is prohibited. � , Mounting heights shall comply with latest TAS/ADA requirements. D. Conduit bodies, junction, pull and outlet boxes shall be so installed that the wiring contained in there can be rendered accessible without removing any fixed part of the building. 3.3 CONDUIT INSTALLATION: A. Coordinate installation of raceways with building structure and other mechanical trades, complete with bends, fittings, junction and pull boxes to meet codes and make complete operating systems. Raceways 1-inch and larger shall not be run in concrete slabs without approval of structural engineer. B. Complete continuous raceway shall be provided for pulling and installation of wires. All wiring shall be run in raceways unless otherwise specified. C. In general, conduits shall be concealed in finished areas, and may be exposed in unfinished areas, run square to the building construction, and continuous from outlet to outlet, connected mechanically and electrically to assure grounding. Conduits shall be cut square, reamed to full size, shouldered without butting into couplings or fittings. The threads shall be of standard length and diameter required for the size of the conduit used, and graphite bearing thread lubricant shall be used in 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (ELECTRICAL) COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS 16050-11 � ,� E. F G making up the threads. Running threads will not be acceptable. Conduits shall have a smooth interior surface free ofobstructions, shall be capped with conduit seals during the construction period, shall be uniformly sloped to eliminate trapped condensation, shall be thoroughly cleaned and dry before pulling any wire. Conduit installation shall clear hot pipes not less than 6-inches. Rigid conduit or electrical metallic tubing shall not be rigidly connected to vibrating equipment. Use flexible conduit or Sealtite. ' Conduit installation above accessible ceilings shall be such that there will be no interterence with the installation of lighting fixtures, air outlets or other devices. Conduit installed underground, in concrete or masonry- 1. Joints shall be made liquid-tight and shall engage not �ess than five threads. 2. Conduit in concrete shall be placed so that no portion of the conduit or couplings are exposed, and at a sufficient depth to prevent cracking or spalling. Conduit 1-inch or larger shall not be placed in walls or slabs except as specifically indicated. 3. Provide red colored concrete encasementfor scheduled conduit systems installed underground. �I I�I � L'J � 4. Steel conduit underground which is not concrete encased shall be PVC coated. 5. Structural expansion joints shall not be crossed by conduits embedded,.in slabs except as specifically indicated or written approval is obtained. Provide conduit expansion joints in the event such crossings are permitted. 6. Place all conduit concealed in poured-in-place structure behind reinforcement bars. Exposed conduit shall be parallel with or at right angles to, building lines, beams or ceilings with symmetrical ends or metal boxes placed at changes in direction or at taps. H. Connections to wiring enclosures - Secure conduits to outlet boxes or wiring enclosures with double lock nuts. Where conduit boxes with threaded hubs are used, conduits shall engage at least five threads in the hubs. Provide plastic insulating bushings for rigid conduits (similar to OZ. Type A). Provide connectors with plastic insulated throats for electrical metallic tubing termination. Provide 3/4-inch minimum size conduit except for switch legs which may be 1/2-inch. I• I�I L l�■I ��'. � �I'� 3.4 FASTENINGS: A. Fastenings for raceways and boxes shall be made by means of toggle or expansion bolts sized for the loads imposed based on manufacturer's recommendations. � B. Fastenings to masonry or concrete shall be made by means of machine screws sized for the loads imposed based on manufacturer's recommendations. C. Outlet box supported fixtures - Lighting outlets rigidly supported independently by means of expandable bar hangers or metal strut framing system affording a safe and substantial support for the equipment, and utilizing manufacturer's recommendations for the loads and conditions imposed. Fixtures will not be supported solely from the box cover bolts. D. Outlet, pull, orjunction boxes shall be supported from joists or other structural framing (not finish wall or ceiling panels) by expandable bar hangers or metal strut framing system. � 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (ELECTRICAL) COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS 16050-12 � � � �� L�I �J � � I�I �l E. Panels may be attached directly only to permanent structural walls. Support panels located on nonpermanent partition walls independent of the wall with metal strut framing system attached to permanent structure (slab or framing members). � 3.5 EMPTY RACEWAY SYSTEMS: A. Provide grounded empty raceway systems with conduit, cabinets, outlet boxes, junction boxes, backboards, and miscellaneous appurtenances required for complete system. Leave empty raceway systems complete with acceptable nylon pull cord or 12 gac��; �alvanized steel pull wire, minimum 2 feet extra length at each end, properly tagged to indicate terminal points and length of runs (at junction boxes as well as terminations). B. Systems shall meet requirements of, be accepted by, and bg approved by the code authority, utility, � equipment supplier, Owner, Contractor or subcontractor furr�ishing system equipment and wiring for the system involved. 1 I � C. Provide minimum 3/4-inch size empty conduit unless otherv�ise indicated. � � � � � � � � �� L■J � � E. Furnish and install empty conduit, cabinets, outlet boxes junction boxes, backboards and other miscellaneous appurtenances required for the systems specified. Conduit shall be as specified, and empty systems left complete, with 14 gage steel pull wire in each unit, ends properly tagged. Backboards shall be as specified, and cabinets shall be complete with doors and snap latches as specified for "distribution panelboards". . � F. Underground empty conduit intended for future use shall' be identified by permanent concrete markers indicating location and intended use. Locate at eaGh end and at each change of direction as a minimum. I 3.6 CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION: A. Wire and cable No. 10 and smaller shall be factory color coded. Provide factory color coding for No. 8 and No. 6 wire and cable or mark conductors on each end and in all junction or pull boxes with three-inch band of colored pressure sensitive plastic tape or by the use of brilliant waterproof lacquer properly applied. Colors for each phase and the neutral shall be consistent throughout the system. B. Color coding shall be- . I 277/480 Volt 120/208 Volt Use Brown Black Phase 1 Orange Red Phase 2 Yellow Blue Phase 3 Gray White Neutral Green Green Ground C. Minimum wire size for branch circuits shall be No. 12, except that home runs longer than 100 feet on 120/208 volt system, and 200 feet on 277/480 volt systemS in actual wire length from panel to the electrical load center of the circuit, shall be no smaller thanl No. 10 AWG. I D. Cable terminals, taps and splices No. 6 and larger shall b� made secure with UL listed solderless indenter compression barrel type connectors wherever practicable. UL listed set screw lugs may be used on circuit breakers, motor starters, and switches not available with indenter connections. Joints in conductors No. 8 and smaller shall be made by applying a UL listed insulated, cadmium plated, live steel spring type connector in sizes up to the catalog capacity of the connector. � 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (ELECTRICAL) COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS � 16050-13 E. Do not install wires in conduit until entire system of conduit and outlet boxes is permanently in place. Conductors shall be pulled using a UL listed wire lubricant. F. Conductors in conduits shall be continuous and without splices except in junction boxes. Indenter compression barrel type lugs shall be used for stranded conductor terminations except UL listed bolted compression rype connectors or lugs, factory furnished on such devices as circuit breakers, switch units and motor starters, may be utilized. Indenter compression type connections shall be used to make splices, taps and motor connections. G. Insulate splices, taps, and connections such that the insulation of the joint is no less than the insulation of the wire. Insulate with manufactured lock-on splice caps or build up with rubber tape applied directly to the joint, and then cover with thermoplastic electrical tape. H. Exercise care when installing wire in conduit so as to prevent injury to the conductor insulation. Mechanical means of pulling shall not be used unless approved. Conductors shall be pulled using UL listed lubricant. I. Whenever wiring leaves the conduit and terminates at a terminal board, the wiring shall be formed and laced with waxed twine, or plastic wire ties. J. In the event circuits feed through outlet boxes, provide splice and pigtail for device connection, with sufficient slack to pull splice out of box at least 6-inches (for inspection). K. Switched duplex receptacles - The ungrounded pole of each receptacle shall be provided with a separate terminal. Top receptacle shall be switched when installed. 3.7 GROUNDING INSTALLATION: A. The grounding electrode shall be provided in strict accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code. Resistance to ground shall be 25 ohms or less. B. The following items or sub-systems are to be interconnected to the single grounding electrode- 1. Secondary electric service neutral condu�tors. 2. Neutral conductors of separately derived systems including transformers. 3. Metallic water piping systems. 4. Building concrete encased foundation electrode. 5. Lightning protection system. • 6. Building structural steel (where available). 7. Electrical equipment enclosures and raceway systems. 8. Equipment grounding conductors. 9. Surge arrestor discharge connections. 3.8 METAL-CLAD CABLE INSTALLAT`ION: 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP ' � BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (ELECTRICAL) COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS 16050-14 � � A. Wring shall be continuous befinreen outlets, devices, etc., and except as permitted for auxiliary gutters or wireways shall be without splice or taps within the raceway itself. � B. Metal-clad enclosures shall be metallically connected to boxes, fixtures, fittings and cabinets to provide effective electrical continuity and shall be mechanically secured. � C. Metal-clad cable may be used in dry locations, for under plaster extensions, embedded in plaster finish on brick or other masonry except in damp or wet locations. Cable assembly shall not be installed in concrete or direct burial in the earth. � END OF SECTION - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (ELECTRICAL) 1�1 lJ !�'J � � l� l�J LI, l� � � l�l IJ 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS (ELECTRICAL) QCOAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS 16050-15 I�l l� � l�1 � � � SECTION 16400 - POWER DISTRIBUTION PART1-GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. This Section of the Specifications includes the furnishing and installing ofthe electrical service to the building and the power distribution system. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CIRCUIT SWITCHING AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES: A. Shali be complete from incoming line terminals to outgoing load terminals, number of poles and rated for current characteristics indicated, with interrupting ratings at least equal to the available short circuit current available at the line terminals. B. Molded case circuit breaker- � � � � � � 2.2 � A. Shall conform to NEMA Standard AB-1, UL 489, and FS-W C-375B. 2. Shall have an integral rugged housing of molded polyester glass insulating compound, with silver alloy contacts, arc quenchers and phase barriers for each pole, and stored energy operating mechanism. Shall be electrically and mechanically trip free, with a trip element for each pole, and a common trip bar connected to a single handle of insulating material (handle ties are unacceptable), indicating "on", "tripped", and "ofP' positions. Provide inverse time element thermal trip for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous trip for short circuit protection unless otherwise indicated. 3. Standard conventional breakers (breaker drawing symbol without modification) shalt be quick- make, quick-break, wiping contact, thermal magnetic, common trip, trip indicating, ambient compensated, with arc chutes, single trip free handle mechanisms and thermal long time trip and magnetic instantaneous trip. � 4. Provide interchangeable thermal trips and adjustable magnetic trips on 225 ampere frame size and larger circuit breakers with trip units sealed to prevent tampering. TRANSFORMERS, DRY TYPE: Two-winding of the size and electrical characteristics as scheduled. In conformance with ANSI C89.2 and NEMA ST20 standards and Underwriters Laboratories listing UL 506. B. Transformers shall be rated at full load in a 40 C. ambient with 30 C. ultimate ho� spot temperature rise � allowance, with Class F insulation having a UL 185 C. rating limiting system temperature to 115 C. on 25 kva and smaller units and Class H insulation having UL 220 C. rating limiting system temperature to 150 C. on 30 kva and larger units. � C. The maximum temperature rise of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 35 C. rise over a 40 C. ambient. � D. Transformers 30 kva and above shall have core and coil assembly completely isolated from enclosure with neoprene rubber pads, and six primary voltage taps rated (4) 2-1/2 percent below normal and (2) � li� 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS POWER DISTRIBUTION PAGE 16400-1 � 2-1/2 percent taps above normal. Transformers 25 kva and under shall have four primary voltage taps above normal. Taps shall be accessible from the front. E. Make necessary tap adjustments on transformers to insure that the secondary voltages at the transformer terminals will be as close as possible to 120 volts phase-to-neutral, and 208 volts phase- to-phase, when the building is in normal operation. F. Guaranteed sound ratings shall not exceed ANSI standard decibel levels as follows: KVA 0-9 10-50 51-150 151-300 301-500 G � i f:+ L. 2.3 Sound levels in decibels per ANSI C89 Average 40 45 50 55 60 Transformers shall have heat barriered termination compartment arranged for feeder terminations for side or bottom entrance of flexible metallic raceways. Transformers shall have a bonding jumper installed between the secondary neutral terminal and the metal case and shall include a ground terminal of proper size to receive ground conductor. Transformer windings shall be manufacturer's standard design, copper conductor. Bussing shall be copper. � Provide floor mounted transformers with housekeeping pads and neoprene noise/vibration isolation pads. Where scheduled, provide neutral conductor having finrice the current carrying capacity of the phase conductors to allow for the additive harmonics of nonlinear loads. Acceptable Manufacturers - G.E., Square D, Siemens, Cutler-Hammer. PANELBOARDS (GENERAL): � A. Panelboards shall be listed by Undennrriters Laboratories, Inc., and shall be so labeled, rated for intended voltage and current characteristics as scheduled. Cabinets for panelboards shall be by NEC gage sheet steel having steel doors and trim �o conform to the cabinet mounting, �installed with tops approximately 6'-6" above the floor. The trim on cabinets shall be made adjustable with the door hung thereon with heavy concealed hinges. Cabinets shall have wiring space top, bottom and both sides in accordance with the National Electrical Code, but no less than 4-inches wide, with standard knockouts. Provide a clear plastic covered typed directory card and card holder on the inside of each door. Key locks alike and provide Ownerwith not less than 5 keys. Finish shall be gray enamel over a rust inhibitor, except cans may be galvanized or galvanized steel. . B. Interiors shall be completely factory assembled, consisting of rigid frame supporting the rectangular bus, mains, neutral and ground bars. Bussing shall be sized in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standards, braced throughout to conform with industry standards governing short circuit stresses in panelboards, and arranged for sequence phasing throughout. Phase bussing shall be full height without reduction, full size neutral, unless otherwise scheduled, with suitable lug for each outgoing circuit requiring a neutral connection. Terminals for feeder conductors, branch circuit devices and neutrals shall be UL listed as suitable for type of conductors specified. Provide indenter compression barrel type terminals for panel supply feeders. Interiors shall be designed such that circuit protective devices may be changed, replaced, or additional circuits added without disturbing 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP POWER DISTRIBUTION COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS . PAGE 16400-2 � �� u � � �� l�l .�1 l�'1 � � �� 1� � [�i L�J adjacent units and without machining, drilling or tapping. In no case shall the width of panelboard enclosure be less than 20-inches. , � C. Bussing shall be silver plated copper. 2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS: � A. Lighting and Appliance Panelboard- I� r Lighting and appliance panelboards shall have a comrribn main or split bus with facilities included to contain mechanically held contactors where scheduled. 2. Individual circuit protection shall be molded case circuit breakers, bolt-on type, with number � of poles and trip setting as scheduled. Interrupting rating shall be in excess of the available fault current at the panel in accordance with UL listings for sizes involved, but no less than 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes in any case. ` � 2.5 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER: � A. Classification and rating: NEMA Class 1, Type B wiring, in a NEMA 1 enclosure. The design shall be in accordance with the latest applicable NEMA standards for control centers and industrial control. � B. Structure: � � L�] � l; � � LJ �'' � l� The enclosure structure shall consist of NEMA standard modular cubicles bolted and bussed together to form a rigid, freestanding structure having the following features: a. Each section shall be approximately 90-inches high, excluding lifting angles and base channels, and shall be 20-inches deep for front-f-board unit mounting. b. End sections shall have end closing plates which can be removed for the addition of future sections. the top plate � shall be of removable one-piece construction for added convenience in cutting conduit holes. Removable blank plates shall be flanged on four sides, have captive screws and shall cover unused unit spaces. c. Main lug compartments - A front accessible main lug compartment shall be provided complete with suitable indenter compression barrel type main lugs to accommodate incoming feeder as indicated. The compartment shall have convenient access. d. Horizontal wireways - Adequate conduit entrance space and wire entry room shall be provided at both the top and bottomof each section and shall exth and depth ofthe control center section withons. Covers over these wireways shall be equipped with captive type screws to prevent loss of hardware during installation. These wireways shall be isolated from the bus bars. e. A vertical wire trough shall be provided in each standard section. Extending from the top horizontal wire trough to the bottom horizontal wire trough for the purpose of routing user's motor and control wires to the control units. This wire trough shall be isolated from the bus bars to guard against accidental contact. A separately hinged door having captive type screws shall cover the vertical wire trough for safe and easy access to wiring without disturbing controls units. 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP � COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS POWER,DISTRIBUTION PAGE 16400-3 � Control center shall have the capability of addition of future cubicles by simply bolting on a new cubicle and making the addition of simple splice plates to the main bus. Cf L-'�J g. Doors shall be formed up on periphery and shall be equipped with captive screw fasteners � and concealed hinges. Bussing: Bus bars shall be uniformly arranged to provide A-B-C sequence, left to right, front rear or top to bottom from�front of board. Provide ground lugs and a full length ground bus bolted to each vertical section. Hardware used on bussing shall be zinc or cadmium plated. Each bolt shall have a Belleville washer to maintain clamping force under thermal cycling. � E. 2. Horizontal bus shall be braced the withstand maximum available short circuit stresses, but not less than 22,000 amperes rms symmetrical. Vertical buses shalt be rated no less than 300 amperes. 3. Bus shall be sized to limit the temperature rise at rated current to that prescribed by NEMA standards. 4. Tin plated, 98 percent conductivity copper with provisions for coordination with incoming feeder. Bus barriers: Provide insulated horizontal and vertical bus barriers. Vertical bus barriers shall have interlocking front and back pieces to give added protection on sides and shall segregate� the phases from each other. Small, separate openings in the vertical bus barriers shall permit unit plug-in contacts. Bottom bus covers shall be provided below the vertical bus. Unit construction: Unit heights shall be of modular dimensions to allow for unit layout, regardless of combination, without structural interference. 2. Control units shall have the operator handle interlocked with the unit door prevent opening when protective device is in "on" position. with provision to avoid cover interlock to allow . authorized inspection. Unit plug-in- for convenient unit connection to energized bus bars, unit plug-in contacts shall be provided on the following units: a. For circuit breakertype units - full voltage starters size 5 and smaller, autotransformer starters size 3 and smaller, part winding reduced voltage starters size 4PW and smaller, branch circuit breaker units 225 ampere frame and smaller. b. The plug-in connection shall be a high quality, two point connection for each phase design to tighten during heavy current surge. For a trouble-free connection, the plug- in fingers shall be sitver plated to yield a low resistance connection, and shall be backed by spring steel clips to provide; high pressure connection points. Contact fingers shall be mounted in their support so that these fingers become floating and self-aligning to allow solid seating onto the vertical bus bars. 4. Each unit controlling a motor shall consist of a magnetic contractor, with overcurrent protection in each of the three phases wired with normally closed contacts in se[ies contro{ 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP POWER DISTRIBUTION COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PAGE 16400-4 l�l l�`J � � � !�I � � � � � � #,� I�� l�J L�J � � ,'�J �Ei �I 2.6 INDIVIDUALLY MOUNTED SAFETY SWITCHES: � F. Acceptable Manufactures - G.E., Square D, Siemens, only. � � � A. Safety switches shall be heavy-duty, UL listed, horsepower rated, manual disconnect switches in conformance with NEMA specifications KS1-1975. Unit shall be fused with fuse clips having rejection feature, or unfused as indicated, with ampere ratings as required. Enclosures shall be . NEMA 1 unless otherwise noted. Each switch shall have insulated neutral and ground terminal of proper size where required for grounded conductors. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper cables. B. Provide ground lug and service entrance certification label for service disconnects. C. Motors'/ horsepower and less, toggle type, quick-make, quick-break,'/Z horsepower rated, with the number of poles required, with flush mounting wall plate or surface mounted NEMA enclosure, as indicated. circuit ahead of any other control contacts on the control side of the solenoid coil and the control power source. Each starter shall be equipped with a pilot light and be operated through interlock with heavy-duty maintained contact HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC switch, or with momentary contact start/stop push button station mounted in the cover in a suitable manner as scheduled, and shall be provided with integral 120 volt control transformer sized as required to achieve indicated control function. Provide the number of field reversible (normally open or normally closed) auxiliary contacts required , but in no case shall less than one (1) normally open and one (1) normally close spare auxiliary contacts be provided per starter. 5. Circuit breakers - Provide motor circuit protector molded case circuit breakers, capacity as indicated, having an interrupting rating at lease equal to the available short circuit current at the line terminals of the breakers. Current limiters (if used) shall have built-in trip indicators and shall open all 3 phases if acutated to preclude single phase operation. Breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break adjustable magnetic only, common trip type, ambient compensated, with trip-free handle mechanism. Q D. D. E. � � LI � � l�l Motors 3/4 horsepower and larger, type HD, fused or unfused, 3-pole, 480 volt ac in NEMA general purpose or weatherproof enclosu�e. Safety switches shall be of same manufacturer as switchboard and panels. 2.7 FUSES: A. Furnish time-current characteristic and coordination curves for each fuse on service entrance equipment and coordinate with utility to assure service entrance fuse opening prior to actuation of the utility circuit protective devices in the event of a fault. Fuses shall be so selected as to provide a fully selective system. B. Equipment shall not be shipped and/or delivered to the job with the fuses installed in place. �C. Furnish to the Owner a set of spare fuses as required for replacement of each fuse type and rating used on the project. The set shall consist of ten percent of each type and rating (minimum of three per rating), in standard unbroken packaging. 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS POWER DISTRIBUTION PAGE 16400-5 D. Provide spare fuse cabinet(s) with capacity sufficient to store the spare fuses (Bussman No. SFC or equal). E. Provide fuses in each device requiring same. 2.8 FUSES (600 VOLTS AND LESS): A. Fuses 600 amperes and less shall be in accordance with UL Standard 198.2, Class J, current limiting, time delay, with 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes interrupting capacity, Bussman LPJ, or equal. � B. Acceptable Manufacturers�- Bussmann, Shawmut, Littlefuse. 2.9 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Acceptable manufacturers for circuit breakers, enclosures, switchboards, switchgear, panelboards, motor control centers, safety switches - 1. General Electric. 2. Square D. , 3. Siemens. 4. Cutler-Hammer. "� B. Acceptable manufacturers for transformers- 1. General Electric. 2. Square D. 3. Siemens. 4. Cutler-Hammer. � PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS: A. Install equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of other Sections. B. Where alternate designs and/or products are allowed at the request of the manufacturer and/or contractor, it shall be their sole responsibility to verify and document, that adequate withstand ratings are maintained and that the system will be selectively coordinated. END OF SECTION - POWER DISTRIBUTION 052899 � 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP POWER DISTRIBUTION COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PAGE 16400-6 � l�l LiJ SECTION 16482- DC-SCR DRIVES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT 0 A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all DC motors, electronic drive equipment � complete with drive motor, speed control unit, accessories, connections, supports, drive housing, and appurtenances as shown and specified herein to provide a complete and workable installation, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. � 12 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Standards: � � 1.3 � A. � . B. � C, � 1.4 ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electric Code UL Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. QUALITY ASSURANCE The drive system shall be manufactured by firms that are regularly engaged in the production � of electronic variabte speed SCR DC drive systems for at least 10 years. Operation of the drive system shall be demonstrated to the ENGINEER to prove that, under normal conditions, variable speed drive will perform flawlessly throughout the speed range specified. , Variable speed drive equipment shall be UL listed. CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and submit shop drawings, equipment, tools, and spare � parts as referenced above, according to the requirements of Section 01300, "Contractor Submittals." ' � B. � 1.5 u � Shop Drawings shall show physical appearance and dimensions, schematic diagrams, pertinent data such as horsepower, voltage, efficiencies, types of enclosures, signal interfacing devices, wire numbers, etc. MAINTENANCE AND WARFiANTY A. The system warranty shall be no less than one year after initial startup and shall include all costs for repair, parts, travel and living expenses, and labor. B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit operation and maintenance procedures for the ENGINEER to review. The data sheets shall be supplemented by written text and shall include the following: � 1. Operating procedures. 2. Maintenance procedures. � l�J 051093 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements DC-SCR DRIVES PAGE 16482-1 3. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams. C. The CONTRACTOR shall respond to trouble calls with a competent repair person at the project site within 24 hours; CONTRACTOR shall maintain a full inventory of replacement parts so that all routine repairs can be completed within 24 hours. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL ,� � L!�J D A. Equipment Compatibility: Each variable speed drive shall be compatible with the equipment it serves and the supplier of the driven equipment shall have unit responsibility for the entire � package. . 2.2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION A. Drives: The variable speed standard DC drives shall be SCR drives which utilizes silicon controlled rectifiers a-c to d-c power conversion. Controlled d-c power shal� be supplied to a d-c drive motor which shall provide a 20 to 1 regulated speed range. The drive speed shall be adjusted over the speed range by control of armature voltage and motor field current. Armature voltage shall be controlled from zero to maximum providing smooth starting from zero speed. The drive unit shall be designed for continuous, full-torque operation at slow speed. The unit shall receive remote speed control signal (4-20 mA) for speed control and shall have 4-20 mA speed signal output for remote indication. The drives shall be coated in accordance with Section 09800 - Protective Coating. � l�'J I� L�J B. The control system shall be arranged and wired in accordance with the diagrams shown on the .-� Contract Documents. Equipment components in the control units shall be as follows: Variable speed drive panel shall be complete with speed-adjusting potentiometer, speed indicator, and on-off switch. The variable speed drive panel and accessories shall be DCI V-S drive; MINPAK Plus by Reliance Electric Co.; STATOTROL II by General Electric; or equal. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Manual selector switch, finro-position rated 120-volt and suitable for switching control for the variable speed drive panel from local to remote location. Indicating lights, oil tight, heavy-duty type. Main Circuit beaker, and other •circuit breakers, molded case type, single pole, 120-volt, or 2-pole, 240-volt or 3-pole 480volt rated 600-volt as required. Relays, rated 300-volt, 10 amperes, with field convertible contacts, Allen Bradley Type N; Square D Type M; or equal. Dry type shielded transformer shall be 120-vo1U120-volt sized for the chemical feed equipment with grounded secondary. 7. All equipment shall be housed in a stainless steel NEMA-4X panel. The DC drives shall be mounted in a separate NEMA-4X panel or inside the non-ventilated main panel. 9. Some additional features required include: 051093 � DC-SCR DRIVES 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 16482-2 � � LJ O � L� � l!'J '�J a � � � Q � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � a. 4-20ma control signal and speed feedback signal, and provisions for remote run control and speed controls. b. Tachometer feedback kit for accuracy of speed regulation to 0.5 percent with 95 percent load change. . c. Instrument interface/preset speed kit. d. Auxiliary dry contacts for run, fail, ready status, and timers, relays, lights and switches as shown on the schematic diagrams. e. Overtemp switch in the DC motor. f. Separate operator control stations for remote operation of the drive. C. Motor: Electric motors for chemical feed equipment shall be as specified herein and shall meet the performance criteria specified above. Direct current motors shall comply with the requirements of NEMA Standard MGI-12 and shall be rated for ambient temperature of 40 degrees C, and minimum service factor of 1.0. Direct current motors shall be provided with Class F insulation, bearings rated for minimum AFBMA L-10 life of 20,000 hours, TEFC enclosures, and gasketed conduit boxes. PART 3 — EXECUTION • 3.1 INSTALLATION A. DC-SCR drives shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. - END OF SECTION - 051093 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements , DC-SCR DRIVES PAGE 16482-3 � � � I� L�! � L�J SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Furnish and instaii lighting fixtures and accessories as shown, specified and/or scheduled for use throughout the Project. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES: A. Furnish, install and wire lighting fixtures scheduled or indicated by type designation on the Drawings. If type designation is omitted, fixtures shall be of the same type as shown for rooms of similar usage. Verify before purchase and installation. � B. Locations of fixtures on Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic. Verify location and spacing with architectural reflected ceiling plans and other reference data before installation. Coordinate space conditions, including head room clearances, and interterences with ceiling components, such as ducts, openings, beams and piping, prior to installation. L�! L� �� C. Check the architectural finishes, and regardless of the catalog prefixes and suffxes shown, furnish fixtures with the proper trim, frames, supports, hangers and other miscellaneous appurtenances to properly coordinate with said finishes. Where required, furnish reinforcing for ceiling construction to support weight of fixtures. • ' D. Fixtures shall be free of light leaks and designed to provide sufficient ventilation of lamps and ballasts, including vent holes where required. Outdoor fixtures with vent holes shall have wire mesh screens in the vent holes. � E. Wiring channels and socket mountings shall be rigid and accurately made. Sockets shall hold lamps securely against normal vibration and maintenance handling. Provide silver plated contacts in sockets for mogul base incandescent, metallic vapor and mercury vapor lamps, in all outdoor fixtures, and tungsten halogen lamps. L�' � l�J � � � � F. Housing shall be National Electrical Code gage, bonderized steel or equal rust protection, rigid construction, baked-on enamel finish, color as selected by Engineer. Fluorescent housings shall be suitable for continuous row mounting where indicated. Incandescent housings shall have matte black finish on concealed surfaces, and all fixtures shall be prewired. G. Fluorescent troffers shall conform to NEMA Standards Publication LEI, latest edition, including references to fixture dimensions and temperature ratings. H. Reflectors shall have no less than 85 percent reflectance. Light shields and lens shall be as specified under individual fixture types but lens thickness shall be no less than 0.125-inches, shall weigh not less than eight ounces per square foot, manufactured from 100% virgin acrylic. Fixtures scheduled by manufacturer's names and catalog numbers are fixtures which will be acceptable. Fixtures of other manufacture, if similar and equal (with respect to quality of 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS LIGHTING 16500-1 ►J materials, components, construction, light distribution characteristics and physical size, shape and appearance) to those scheduled, will be considered as substitutions for the scheduled fixtures, subiect to apqroval of submittal data (and samnle, if requested). � K. Submit Shop Drawings or catalog cuts for each type of fixture specified or noted. Drawings shall indicate fixture type, complete details of fixtures, including manufacturer's catalog numbers for sockets, ballasts, light shields, metal gages, type of wiring, color and texture of finish. Submit samples of finish and ETL curves (photometric data) when required. 5ubmit fixture samples as specified. . 2.2 LAMPS: A. Provide lamps for all fixtures. Lamps on the project shall be new, delivered to the job site in original packing cases and sleeves, and shall be of the same manufacture. Incandescent lamps not scheduled otherwise shall be inside frosted, high duty service, 130 volt. Fluorescent lamps not scheduled otherwise shall be rapid start, standard type and cool white color. High intensity discharge (H.I.D.) lamps shall be of the type and color scheduled. 2.3 BALLASTS: A. Electronic ballasts for fluorescent lamps shall be premium energy savings "high efficiency", high power factor Class'P' one, two three or four lamps as scheduled, sound level Class A, UL listed. Constant light output shall be maintained over operating ranges of 110V to 125V for 120V ballasts and 254V to 289V for 277V ballasts. Total harmonic distortion shall not exceed 10%. The ballast shall withstand line transients as defined in IEEE Publication 587, Category: Nonconsumer. Wth regard to radiated and generated noise, the ballast shall meet FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 18. Operating frequency shall exceed 25 KHZ with no noticeable flicker. Maximum tamp current crest factor shall be 1.7 per ANSI Standards. The ballast shall contain no PCB's. Input wattage (ANSI) shall not exceed 75 for two (2) F40/40W lamps. B. Where scheduled, high intensity discharge ballasts shall be encased and potted, constant wattage auto transformer (CWA), have built-in thermal cutout with automatic reset, high power factor and shall be separately fused with built-in or inline replaceable fuse rated to the manufacturer's recommendations. The ballast capacitor shall contain no PCB's. Sound rating shall be Class B. � 2.4 ADJUSTMENT DEVICES: � L] � � � � L] L�'J � L�"J l�1 A. In fixtures using lamps with asymmetrical beams, lamp adjustment devices shall be set to insure � permanent orientation of light beam, and shall not be affected by relamping. 2.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS FOR FIXTURES: A. Any listed manufacturer conforming to Specifications. 2.6 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS FOR LAMPS: A. General Electric, North American Phillips, Osram/Sylvania, Venture. 2.7 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS FOR BALLASTS: A. Advance, EBT, Jefferson, Lightolier, Lutron, Magnetek, Motorola, Panasonic, Prescolite Controls, Robertson, Valmont. 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP LIGHTING COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS 16500-2 � � �i � � � � L#J �� PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 OUTSIDE BUILDING LIGHTING: A. Exact aiming of floodlighting and accent lighting is not shown, but shall be determined at the job site. Arrange for trial aiming at night as directed by the Architect. Fixtures shall be powered prior to trial aiming, complete approval of aiming procedure obtained in writing after trial but prior to final aiming, and fixtures finally aimed in accordance with approved procedure. 3.2 LIGHTING FIXTURE LAMPS: A. Install lamps in fixtures prior to energizing and replace burned out lamps up to the day building is accepted for beneficial occupancy. � 3.3 LIGHTING FIXTURE INSTALLATION: � � � � � � � � � � � � � A. Align, mount and level fixtures uniformly. B. Avoid interferences with and provide clearance for other elements. Where locations indicated for fixtures conflict with the locations of other elements, relocate fixtures the minimum distance necessary to avoid conflict as directed by the Architect. C. Provide fixture supports for each complete fixture. Supports may be anchored to channels of ceiling construction, to the structural slab, or to structural members within a partition or above a suspended ceiling, and shall maintain fixture position after cleaning and relamping without causing ceilings or partitions to deflect. D. Suspended grid ceilings with the ceiling grid structurally supported - Provide hardware devices for recessed troffers and fixtures to safely lock the fixture into the ceiling at no less than four points without spreading the support members. E. Suspended grid ceilings not structurally supported - Provide hardware devices for recessed troffers to independently support the fixture from the building structure at 4 points. Fixtures shall not be dependent on ceiling grid for support. G � J. Reflector cones, baffles, plate and decorative elements of fixtures shall not be installed until completion of plastering, ceiling tile work, hanging and general cleanup in the area. Replace blemished, damaged, or unsatisfactbry fixtures at no additional cost to the Owner, and in a manner satisfactory to Architect. Provide labor and materials for final targeting of adjustable fixtures. Targeting shall take place immediately before building is turned over to Owner, and after regular working hours where required. Remove dirt, grease and foreign materials from fixtures. Remove finger prints, smudges and dirt from fixture lenses, reflectors and lamps. 3.04 EXI7 SIGNS: A. Provide and install exit signs as scheduled and as required by the authority having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION - LIGHTING 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP LIGHTING COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS 16500-3 l�; � SECTION 16670 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS L�J l�J PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The work covered by this section of the specifications consis#s of furnishing all labor, materials, and � items of service required for the completion of a functional and unobtrusive lightning protection system as approved by the engineer, and in strict accordance with this section of the specifications and the applicable contract drawings. � � �I � � I�) B. If any departure from the contract drawings or submittal drawings covered below are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and reasons therefore, shall be submitted as soon as practical to the architect, engineer for approval. 1.02 STANDARDS: A. The following specifications and standards of the latest issue form a part of this specification- 1. Lightning Protection Institute Installation Standard, LPI 175. 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Installation Requirements, UL96A. 3. National Electrical Code (NEC). 4. National Fire Protection Association Lightning Protection Code, NFPA 78. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: {� A. The lightning protection system shall conform to the requirements and standards for lightning t.1 protection systems of the LPI, UL, NFPA, and NEC. Upon completion, application shall be made to the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for inspection and certification. In addition, the Lightning � Protection Institute certified system certificate shall be delivered to the owner ensuring that the concealed components have also been monitored during job progress. � 1!1 � ��i� � [� i {� B. The system to be furnished under this specification shall be the standard product of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection equipment and shall be the manufacturer's latest approved design. The equipment shall be UL listed and properly UL labeled. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data - Submit manufacturer's data on lightning protection systems and components. B. Shop Drawings - Submit dimensioned layout drawings of lightning protection system equipment and components, including conductor routing and connections. C. UL Certificate - Provide Ownerwith U L Master Label for overall system which is suitable for fastening to building for display. Comply with UL 96A, "Master Labeled Lightning Protection Systems". 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS LIGHTING PROTECTION SYSTEMS 16670-1 ��1 � PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide lightning protection components of one of the following (for each type of component)- Advanced Lightning Technology East Coast Lightning Equipment � Harger Lightning Protection � Robbins Lightning Protection Co. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. 2.02 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS: A. Standard - All equipment used in this installation shall be UL listed and properly labeled. All equipment shall be new, and of a design and construction to suit the application where it is used in accordance with accepted industry standards and LPI, UL, NFPA, and NEC code requirements. B. Lightning Protection Equipment - All materials shall be copper and bronze and of the size, weight, and construction to suit the application and used in accordance with LPI, UL, and NFPA code requirements. Class 1 sized components may be utilized on roof levels 75 feet and below in height. Class II size components are required for roof levels over 75 feet in height. Bolt type connectors and splicers shall be utilized on Class I and Class II structures. Pressure squeeze clamps are not acceptable. All mounting hardware shall be stainless steel to prevent corrosion. C. Aluminum Components - Aluminum materials may not be used except on roofs that utilize aluminum roofing components. On aluminum metal roofs orwhere aluminum parapetcaps exist, the entire roof lightning protection equipment shall utilize aluminum components to insure compatibility. However, the downleads and grounding are to utilize copper with the bimetal transition occurring at the through roof assembly with an approved bimetal through roof assembly. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. The installation shall be accomplished by an experienced installation company that is UL listed, a member of the Lightning Protection Institute, United Lightning Protection Association qualified, and an employer of Certified Master Installers of lightning protection systems. A Certified Master Installer shall directly supervise the work. B. All equipment shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner. The system shall consist of a completeconductornetworkattheroofand includeairterminals, connectors, splicers, bonds, copper downleads, and proper ground terminals. C. Copper downlead cables shall be utilized even when aluminum is required on the roof. Downlead cables in conduit shall not be brought directly through the roof. Thru roof assemblies with solid brass or stainless steel rods shall be utilized for this purpose. Structural steel may be utilized in the installation as outlined by UL, NFPA, and LPI. 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP' COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS .i� l�� Ll � u l�J I� ,, L'�J � ��1 � � L*' L�1 L*-! � �� LIGHTING PROTECTION SYSTEMS 16670-2 � � L�"J L!J L�; ��I � l�l ��1 � L�!' f�' � � �� 1�� L J +� �� 3.02 COORDINATION: � A. The lightning protection installer will work with other trades to insure a correct, neat, and unobtrusive installation. B. It shall be the responsibility of the lightning protection installer to assure a sound bond to the main water service and to assure interconnection with other ground systems. 3.03 COMPLETION: A. Upon completion of the installation, the lightning protection installer shall secure and deliver to the Owner the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Master Label certification and the Lightning Protection Institute Certified System certification. The system will not be accepted without the UL Master Label plate and the LPI certificate. _ 3.04 PERSONNEL TRAINING: A. Building Maintenance Personnel Training - Train Owner's building maintenance personnel in procedures for testing and determining resistance-to-ground values of lightning protection system. Also instruct maintenance personnel in preparation and application of chemical solution for earth surrounding grounding rods for reducing ohmic resistance to required levels. END OF SECTION - LIGHTNING PRn7ECTION SYSTEMS n 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS LIGHTING PROTECTION SYSTEMS 16670-3 L*J SECTION 16850 - ELECTRIC HEAT TRACING � PART 1 — GENERAL � 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide electric heat tracing systems for pipes, valves, fittings, and � appurtenances subject to freezing, as shown and required for trouble-free operation, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. � l*'J � C�� 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDANDS A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of these Specifications, all work specified herein shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements of the referenced documents to the extent that the requirements therein are not in conflict with the provisions of this Section; provided, that for Building Codes, the latest edition of the codes, as adopted as of the date of award by the agency having jurisdiction, shall apply to the WORK. � Commercial Standards ISA-S 5.1 Instrumentation Symbols and Identification. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS � A. Shop Drawings: The CONTRACTOR shall submit complete shop drawings of all heat tracing systems, showing the location of thermostats and interphasing with electric power supply, in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. � 6. Manufacturer's Data: With the shop drawings, the CONTRACTOR shall also furnish complete manufacturer's data of the electric heating cables and the thermostats. � PART 2 — PRODUCTS � 2.1 GENERAL � � � �� L�J A. All pipes, valves, equipment and appurtenances shall be provided with heat tracing where shown; or, where not shown, heat tracing shall be provided in all cases where such items could be endangered by freezing. Such heat tracing shall consist of spiral wrapping with electrical heating cables as recommended by� manufacturer and subsequent insulation with fiber glass sections, sealed and weatherproofed as specified in Section 15145 - Pipe and Equipment Insulation. The heating cables shall be controlled from thermostats installed in representative locations and accessible for adjustment. The heat tracing systems shall be installed complete, including heating elements, power connections, end seals, and controlling thermostats in accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 2.2 BASIC MATERIALS A. Heating Cable: The electrical heat tracing system shall consist of a flat, flexible, low heat density, electrical heating strip of parallel construction, consisting of a continuous inner core of conductive material between two parallel copper bus strips. The electrical insulation of the heater strip shall be polyester and rated for 140 degrees F temperature, and its width.shall be a minimum of 1/2-inch. It shall be suitable for operation on 120 volts. 110298 1333018 — South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements ELECTRIC HEAT TRACING PAGE 16850-1 B. Thermostats: A thermostat with a range of 40 degrees to 120 degrees F shall be provided for each.heated pipe. It shall be double-pole, single-throw and mounted in a weatherproof NEMA Type 4 enclosure. The capillary bulb shall be mounted on the pipe under the insulation. Heating strips for pipes over 2 inches in size shall be rated at 8 watts per foot; for pipes 2 inches and smaller they shall be rated at 4 watts per foot. C. Manufacturers: Electric heat tracing systems and components shall be� as manufactured by the following, or equal: � 1. Briscoe Manufacturing Co., 2. Chromalox (Emerson Electric Co.), 3. Nelson Electric (A Unit of General Signal), 4. Raychem Corporation, 5. Thermon Manufacturing Company, 6. � For thermostats: Honeywell, Chromalox. � PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. �� 3.2 General: The CONTRACTOR shall assemble and install equipment in strict accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions, under the supervision of the manufacturer's representative, under the general review of the ENGINEER. All installations shall be accomplished by competent craftsmen in a workmanlike manner. All heating strips shall be cut in the field and wrapped on the pipelines as required. Contractor Coordination: The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the installation with the electrical work, to ascertain the correct location of all electrical outlets. TESTING ' A. After completion of its work, the CONTRACTOR shall prepare the equipment for operational use in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Each system shall be tested for proper operation and the thermostats shall be set. 3.3 ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER ' A. Final acceptance of the equipment is contingent on satisfactory appearance and operation after installation. - END OF SECTION - 0 110298 133301 S— South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements � ELECTRIC HEAT TRACING PAG E 16850-2 L�J LJ � L!'J '� SECTION 16950 - ELECTRICAL TESTING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. This Section applies to the testing of systems in Division 16 of the Specifications. 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS: A. Testing of systems shall be performed by competent and experienced personnel, having done similar � work in the past, and whose qualifications shall be subject to approval. B. Submit names and qualifications of all persons proposed for testing of electrical systems and equipment. � � 1.3 REPORTS: I�I � � L�J L�J A. Provide reports and certificates required in each category of testing, adjusting and balancing, signed by both the technician performing the work and the Contractor as representing accurate, factual data, based on readings in the field. B. Reports shall be in triplicate on 8-1/2 x 11-inch white bond paper. Submit format for recording data for approval prior to use. PARi 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS: A. Provide all meters, instruments, equipment and materials necessary for performance of tests. B. Testing apparatus, not part of the permanent installation, shall remain the property of the Contractor. � C. Provide gaskets, lubricants and other expendable materials required to be replaced during the prosecution of the work. � D. Provide fuel, if any, as required for tests. PART 3 - EXECUTION L� 3.1 ELECTRICAL: LJ � L�J l�' l� A. Equipment- Shall be tested and adjusted to insure correctfunctional performance. Inspect, lubricate, test and adjust equipment and correct defects o� damages before connecting the equipment to the �system. B. Wiring- 1. Test power, lighting and control wiring for continuity, short circuits and improper grounding. � 2. Test each grounding circuit separately for continuity. 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS ELECTRICAL TESTING PAGE 16950-1 i�� 3. Values of insulation resistance shall meet the standards established by the National Electrical Code. � � 4. If faults are detected, the point or points of such fault shall be located and the defective wiring replaced at the Contractor's expense. C. Acceptance Tests - Leave the entire electrical system installed under this Contract in proper working order. Upon completion of the installation, an acceptance test shall be run to ascertain that starters, circuit breakers, motors, relays, indicating lights, pushbuttons, alarm devices and other electrical equipment and controls are operating correctly as required for the overall operation of the facility. D. Submit certified reports indicating full compliance with test requirements. E. Make replacements or repairs to tested products which are damaged as result of tests. F. Schedule tests at a time convenient to required witnesses or persons affected by the tests. G. Give written notification for test procedures, prior to the test. H. Upon completion of the work, recheck electrical connections, cable to bus, cable to panels, bus to bus, throughout the job for tightness. � I. Check motors for correct rotation. J. Test electrical systems grounding prioP to completion of the work. Note ground resistance together with method of testing. For ground rods, note the soil condition at the time measurements were made. Ground resistance shall not exceed specified or code requirements, whichever is the lower resistance. K. Test feeder and power circuits No. 8 AWG or larger with a"Megger" from each conductor to ground and between conductors. Record each reading. At the completion of work deliver a copy of"Megger" readings. L. After the electrical equipment and the wiring is installed, and prior to energizing for the first time any section of the electrical system, test phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation on feeders and sub-feeders switchboards, dry-type transformers, motors, and other pieces of electrical equipment to assure that they have the proper insulation and are free of grounds. Systems rated above 208 volts shall be tested with a 1000 volt Megger. Circuits rated at or below 208 volts shall be tested with a 500 volt Megger. • M. Energize each receptacle outlet and test each outlet with a plug-in receptacle circuit tester with indication for "correct wiring", "open ground", "hot ground", "reversed polarity", "open neutral", "hot unwired", "hot and ground reversed", "GFCI trip", and "GFCI tesY'. Correct any deficiencies discovered during testing. N. Light and test each lamp. Prove and test energy available at the load side of disconnect switches, breakers and the final point of connection to driven equipment. Make such reasonable tests required to assure a complete electrical installation in first class condition and ready for operation. O. Branch circuits served from lighting panelboards vary in loading. When entire load is turned on and system is operating at 100 percent demand, the initial unbalance should not exceed 10 percent. In the event greater unbalance exists, report the measured individual branch circuit loads and panel feeder loads and request instructions. Balance the panelboard loads as directed within 10 percent tolerance. ' � 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS � � [�'] � � I� ['�J � � L�� L'�] � '� l�'J � l*J � ELECTRICAL TESTING PAGE 16950-2 • � � l� � � � l�J E� L+�' [� L�J L�J [�: Li' ��' � � l�J � ��J P. Furnish at the completion of the Project a final inspection certificate from the local inspecting authority. Q. Submit a written report in triplicate with the following test results- 1. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground resistance- At the supply line terminals of each item of electrical distribution system equipment. At supply side of each feeder and sub-feeder. At high voltage and at low terminals of each transformer. At line terminals of each motor. At any other point required by the Architect. 2. Ground resistance at each panel neutral bus. 3. Voltage to ground on each secondary leg of each transformer at no load and full load. 4. Service voltage at switchboard at full load between phases and to ground. 5. Line current in each line of each power transformer and at switchboard at full load, taken at completion of project. R. Failures or improper operations shall be corrected. Furnish necessary test equipment and pay cost of testing, replacing and repairing. I' END OF SECTION - ELECTRICAL TESTING � 052899 98101-99 SOUTH HOLLY WTP � COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS ELECTRICAL TESTING PAGE 16950-3 � � � � � � � �i SECTION 17100 - PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 A. THE REQUIREMENT The CONTRACTOR shall provide all Process Control and Instrumentation Systems (PCIS) complete and operabie, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Year 2000 Compliance: All information technology components, including, but not limited to hardware, software, accessories and peripherals, tools and utilities (collectively, "components") shall be Year 2000 Compliant. Year 2000 complianY' means that such components will accurately process date/time data (including, but not limited to, calculating, comparing, and sequencing) from, into, and between the twentieth and twenty-first centuries, and the years 1999 and 2000, and leap year calculations. Furthermore, Year 2000 compliant components, when used in combination with other components, shall accurately process date/time data if the other components properly exchange date/time data with it. Successful operation and calculation shall be demonstrated during factory testing and facility startup and testing. Any system or � component failing such testing will be considered defective and shall be upgraded, re- programmed, or replaced until it passes the test, at no increased cost to the OWNER. C. The requirements of this Section apply to all components of the PCIS unless indicated � otherwise. . � L'�! C+�J � � � LJ L�J � �� D. The Work is located at the Forth Worth Water Department, South Holly Water Treatment Plant. The Work is located at an existing site, which has a water treatment facility in operation. Several tie-in locations will be required for coordination with existing facilities process controls and instrumentation, which could impact their operations. As a result, close coordination will be required between the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER, and the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall carefully schedule its Work to minimize disruption of the existing facilities. The existing facility is controlled locally at the device and/or MCC's and by the HSQ SCADA System. The existing chemical systems shall remain operational until the new system is operational. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for verifying all existing control and monitoring loops (voltage levels, current levels, etc.) prior to transferring. The CONTRACTOR shall supply and install interposing relays on all existing digital input/output loops and install current to current (I/I) isolators on all existing analog loops to protect the integrity and impedance of the loop and the DCS. E. Experience Requirement: The Instrumentation CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate experience at providing similar sized controls systems for Municipal Water Treatment Plants. The Instrumentation CONTRACTOR shall make this information available to the 092298 , . 1333018-South Holly WTP PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17100-1 � General CONTRACTOR before the bid. It shall be the responsibility of the General CONTRACTOR to review this information. This experience shall include the following: � 1. Experience in furnishing and implementing Distributed Control Systems (DCS)s based on one of the approved Programmable Logical Controllers (PLC). � 2. A permanently employed in-house staff dedicated to the design, engineering, project management, training, programming, and configuration of PLCs. � CONTRACTOR shall have the staff size and experience to provide all required services in a timely and expert manner. 3. 4. CONTRACTOR shall have completed at least (3) three projects within the last (4) four years of similar size and type. CONTRAGTOR shall employ programmers who have (5) years experience at programming the approved (PLC)s. F. Responsibilities 1. The CONTRACTOR, through the use of a qualified Instrumentation Contractor and qualified electrical and mechanical installers, shall be responsible to the OWNER for the implementation of the PCIS and the integration of the PCIS, and all the appurtenant Work, being provided under this Section of these Specifications and the integration of the Control and Instrumentation System �nd control devices provided under this project all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. In addition,'the Instrumentation CONTRACTOR shall install and place into service the PLC based Distributed Control System (DCS) furnished under Section 17510. � 2. Due to the complexities associated with the interfacing of numerous control system devices, it is the intent of these specifications that the Instrumentation CONTRACTOR be responsible to the CONTRACTOR for the integration of the PCIS with existing devices and devices provided under other sections with the objective of providing a completely integrated control system free of signal incompatibilities. 3. As a minimum, the Instrumentation CONTRACTOR shall perform the following � work: . a. Implementation of the PCIS (1) prepare analog hardware submittals (2) design, develop, and electronically draft loop drawings and control panel designs ' (3) prepare the test plan, the training plan, and the spare parts submittals (4) procure hardware 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17100-2 � � � � � � � '� � � �� I� L�J � (5) fabricate panels (6) perform factory tests on panels (7} perform bench calibration and verify calibration after installation (8) oversee and certify installation (9) oversee, document, and certify loop testing (10) oversee, document, and certify system commissioning (11) conduct the performance test (12) prepare Owner's Manuals (13) conduct training classes (14) prepare record drawings (15) Configure and program the PLC(s) Integration of the PCIS with instrumentation and control devices being provided under other sections; (1) Develop all requisite loop drawings and record loop drawings � associated with equipment provided under other Divisions of these Specifications and Owner furnished and existing equipment. L;� (2) Resolve signal, power, or functional incompatibilities between the PCIS and interfacing devices. �`j 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS , �� A. General: Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor � Submittals and the following: � L�' �� I fJ C�J � 1. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the instrumentation work so that the complete instrumentation and controt system will be provided and will be supported by accurate shop drawings and record drawings. 2. Exchange of Technical Information: During the period of preparation of these submittals, the CONTRACTOFt shall authorize a direct, informal liaison with the ENGINEER for exchange of technical inforrriation. As a result of this liaison, certain minor refinements and revisions in the systems as indicated may be authorized informally by the ENGINEER, but will not alter the scope of work or cause increase or decrease in the Contract Price. During this informal exchange, no oral statement by the ENGINEER shall be construed to give approval of any component or method, nor shall any statement be construed to grant exception to or variation from these Contract Documents. 092298 ' 1333018-South Holly WTP PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17100-3 ' �'J 3. Symbology and Nomenclature: In these Contract Documents, all systems, all meters, all instruments, and all other elements are represented schematically, and are designated by symbology as derived from instrument Society of America Standard ANSI/ISA S5.1 - Instrumentation Symbols and Identification. The nomenclature and numbers designated herein and on the Drawings. shall be employed exclusively throughout shop drawings, and similar materials. No other symbols, designations, or nomenclature unique to the manufacturer's standard methods shall replace those prescribed above, used herein, or on the Drawings. B. Shop Drawings 1. General: L�J LJ �� a. Preparation of shop drawings shall not commence until two weeks after � Notice to Proceed. b. All shop drawings shall include the letter head or title block of the Instrumentation Supplier. The title block shall include, as a minimum, the Instrumentation Supplier's registered business name and address, project name, drawing name, revision level, and personnel responsible for the content of the drawing. The quantity of submittal sets shall be as indicated in Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. c. Organization of the shop drawing submittals shall be compatible with eventual submittals for later inclusion in the Owner's Manual. Submittals not so organized and incomplete submittals for a given loop will not be accepted. d. Shop drawing information shall be bound in standard size, 3 ring, loose-leaf, vinyl plastic, hard cover binders suitable for bookshelf storage. Binder ring size shall not exceed 3 inches. e. Interfaces and terminal numbers between instruments, motor starters, control valves, variable speed drives, flow meters, chemical feeders and other equipment related to the PCIS shall be included in the shop drawing submittal. � 2. Analog Hardware Submittal: The CONTRACTOR shall submit an analog hardware submittal as a complete bound package at one time within 60 calendar days after the commencement date stated in the Notice to Proceed, including: a. A complete index which lists each device by tag number, type, and Manufacturer. A separate technical brochure or bulletin shall be included with each instrument data sheet. The data sheets shall be indexed in the submittal by systems or loops, as a separ�te group for each system or loop. If, within a single system or loop, a single instrument is employed more than once, one data sheet with one brochure or bulletin may cover all identical uses of that instrument in that system. Each brochure or bulletin shall include a list of tag numbers for which it applies. System groups shall be separated by labeled tags. 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP ' PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17100-4 �� L!'J L�J � � � � � � � L�J L`J ,� � � � LJ �� l!�J L#J � � � L��' � � L�J � L�J b. Fully executed data sheets according to ISA-S20 - Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves, for each component, together with a technical product brochure or bulletin. The technical product brochures shall be complete enough to verify conformance to all Cpntract Document requirements. The data sheets, as a minimum, shall show: i1) i2) (3) (4) (5) Component functional description used in the Contract Documents Manufacturer's model number or oth:�-r product designation Project tag number used in the Contract Documents Project system or loop of which the component is a part Project location or assembly at which the component is to be installed (6) , Input and output characteristics i�) �8) �9) (10) Scale, range, units, and multiplier (if any) Requirements for electric supply (if any) Requirements for air supply (if any) Materials of component parts to be in contact with or otherwise exposed to process media and corrosive ambient air (11) Special requirements or features� c. Priced list of all spare parts for all devices d. Instrument installation, mounting, and anchoring details shall be submitted in a hard copy format. Each instrument shall have a dedicated 8 1/2" X 11" . detail, which only pertains to the specific instrument by tag number. Each detail shall be certified by the instrument manufacturer that the proposed installation is in accordance with � the instrument manufacturer's recommendations and is fully warrantable. These certifications shall be embedded in the CAD files and also appear as a stamp on the hard copies. As a minimum, each detail shall have the following contents; (1) show all necessary sections and elevation views required to define instrument location by referencing tank, building or equipment names and numbers, and geographical qualities such as north, south, east, west, basement, first floor. (2) ambient temperature and humidity of the environment that the instrument is to be installed in. 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17100-5 � (3) (4) (5) (6) ��) (8) �9) (10) corrosive qualities of the environment that the instrument is to be installed in. �� hazardous rating of the environment that the instrument is to be installed in. process line pipe or tank size, service and material. process tap elevation and location upstrearrr and downstream straight pipe lengths between instrument installation and pipe fittings and valves. routing of tubing and identification of supports. � mounting brackets, stands, and anchoring devices. conduit entry size, number, location, and delineation between power and signal. . (11) NEMA ratings of enclosures and all components. (12) clearances required for instrument servicing. (13) list itemizing all manufacturer makes, model numbers, quantities, lengths required, and materials of each item required to support the implementation of the detail. 3. Project-Wide Loop Drawing Submittal: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a Project- wide Loop Drawing Submittal (PLDS) which completely defines and documents the contents of each monitoring, alarming, interlock, and control loop associated with equipment provided under Division 17 sections, equipment provided under sections in other Divisions, existing, and OWNER furnished equipment which is to be incorporated into the PCIS. The PLDS shall be a singutar complete bound package electronically drafted in INTERGRAPH, submitted within 120 days after contract award, and shall include the following: a. A complete index in the front of each bound volume. The loop drawings shall be indexed by systems or process areas. All loops shall be tagged in a manner consistent�with the Contract Documents. Loop drawings shall be submitted for every analog and discrete monitoring and control loop. b. Drawings showing definitive diagrams for every instrumentation loop system. These diagrams shall show and identify each component of each loop or system using legend and symbols from ANSI/ISA S5.4 - Instrument Loop Drawings, extending the format as shown on Drawing GI-1 and as defined by the most recent revision in ISA. Each system or loop diagram shall be drawn on a separate drawing sheet. Loop drawings shall be developed for loops in equipment vendor supplied packages, equipment provided under Division 17, and OWNER furnished equipment. The loop 092298 . 1333018-South Holly WTP PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17100-6 � L+'J � I� C�'] (� C�J �� Li � L'�J L�J � � ��I ��1 � L�l � drawings shall also show all software modules and linkages. In addition to �"j the expanded ISA S5.4 requirements the loop diagrams shall also show the (� following details: � L■� [:� (3) MCC panel, circuit, and breaker n�.�mbers for all power feeds to the � loops and instrumentation. Terminal numbers in MCCs, LCPs and other equipment. � (4) Designation, and if appropriate, terminal assignments associated with . every manhole, pullbox, junction box, conduit, and panel through which the loop circuits pass. u C#J L!�.' LJ V�I � L: 4. Test Procedure Submittals a. (1) Functional name of each loop (2) Reference name, drawing, and loop diagram numbers for any signal continuing off the loop diagram sheet. " (5) Vendor panel, instrument panel, conduit, junction boxes, equipment and DCS terminations, termination identification wire numbers and colors, power circuits, and ground identifications. The CONTRACTOR shall submit the proposed procedures to be followed during tests of the PCIS and its components. Preliminary Submittal: Outlines of the specific proposed tests and examples of proposed forms and checklists. c. Detailed Submittal: After approval of the Preliminary Submittal, the CONTRACTOR shall submit the proposed detailed test procedures, forms, and checklists. This submittal shall include a statement of test objectives with the test procedures. . 5. Training Submittals: Subsequent to the receipt of the OWNER's and ENGINEER's � inputs made at the Presubmittal Conference, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a training plan, which includes: � f ■J I�l � l'I �� a. A resubmittal of the training plan overview from the Presubmittal Conference with incorporation of all modifications agreed upon at that meeting. C. Owner's Manuat: 1 � General: Information in the Owner's Manual shall be based upon the approved shop drawing submittals as modified for conditions encountered in the field during the work. The Owner's Manual shall have the following organization for each process: 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17100-7 ��i � 3. a. Section A- Process and Instrumentation Diagrams b. Section 6- Loop Descriptions c. Section C- Loop D'rawings d. Section D- Instrument Data Sheets L"J � L�J � C�� L+, G� 1.3 n i� e. Section E- Instrument Installation Details f. Section F- Test Results Signed results from Loop Testing, Precommissioning, and Performance Testing shall be included in Section F. 4. Initially, 2 sets of draft Owner's Manuals sha�l be submitted for review after return of favorably reviewed shop drawings and data required herein. Following the ENGINEER's review, one set will be returned to the CONTRACTOR with comments. The Manuals shall be revised and amended as required and the final Manuals shall be submitted 15 days prior to start-up of systems. Record Drawings 1. The CONTRACTOR shall keep current a set of complete loop and schematic diagrams which shall include all field and panel wiring, piping and tubing runs, routing, mounting details, point-to-point diagrams with cable, wire, tube and termination numbers. These drawings shall include all instruments and instrument elements. All such drawings shall be submitted for review prior to acceptance of the completed work by the OWNER. EXTENDED PERIOD FOR CORRECTION OF DEFECTS The CONTRACTOR shall correct all defects in the PCIS upon notification from the OWNER within one year from the date of Substantial Completion. The GONTRACTOR shall pay all air freight costs and other costs necessary to expedite the correction of the problem. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Code and Regulatory Compliance: All PCIS WORK shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements of the National Electrical , Code. Conflicts between the requirements of the Contract Documents and any codes or referenced standards or specifications shall be resolved according to Section 01090 - Reference Standards. 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17100-8 �!'MJ (�� J I� �� B. Current Technology: Aii meters, instruments, and other components shall be the most � recent field-proven models marketed by their manufacturers at the time of submittal of the shop drawings unless otherwise required to match existing equipment. L�J � L�J � � � L�!1 � L�J � � � � C. Hardware Commonality: All instruments which utilize a common measurement principle (for example, d/p cells, pressure transmitters, level transmitters which monitor hydrostatic head) shall be furnished by a single Manufacturer. All panel-mounted instruments shall have matching style and general appearance. Instruments performing similar functions shall be of the same type, model, or class, and shall be from a single Manufacturer. D. Loop Accuracy: The accuracy of each instrumentation system or loop shall be determined as a probable maximum error; this shall be the square-root of the sum of the squares of certified "accuracies" of the designated components in each system, expressed as a percentage of the actual span or value of the measured variable. Each individual instrument shall have � minimum accuracy of plus and minus 0.5 percent of full scale and a minimum repeatability of plus and minus 0.25 percent of full scale unless otherwise indicated. Instruments, which do not conform to or improve upon these criteria are not acceptable. E. Instrument and Loop Power: Power requirements and input/output connections for all components shall be verified. Power for transmitted signals shall, in general, originate in and be supplied by the control panel devices. The use of "2-wire" transmitters is preferred, and use of "4-wire" transmitters shall be minimized. Individual loop or redundant power supplies shall be provided as required by the Manufacturer's instrument load characteristics to ensure sufficient power to each loop component. All power supplies shall be mounted within control panels or in the field at the point of application. F. Loop Isolators and Convertors: Signal isolators shall be provided as required to ensure adjacent component impedance match where feedback paths may be generated, or to maintain loop integrity during the removal of a loop component. Dropping precision wirewound resistors shall be installed at all field side terminations in the control panels to ensure loop integrity. Signal conditioners and converters shall be provided where required to resolve any signal level incompatibilities or provide required functions. G. Environmental Suitability: All indoor and outdoor control panels and instrument enclosures shall be suitable for operation in the ambient conditions associated with the locations designated in the Contract Documents.. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all power wiring for these devices. Enclosures suitable for the environment shall be furnished. All instrumentation in hazardous areas shall be suitable for use in the particular hazardous or classified location in which it is, to be installed. � H. Signal Levels: Analog measurements and control signals shall be as indicated herein, and unless otherwise indicated, shall vary in direct linear proportion to the measured � variable. Electrical signals outside control panels shall be 4 to 20 milliamperes dc except � as indicated. Signals within enclosures may be 1-5 volts dc. All electric signals shall be electrically or optically isolated from other signals. �� I 092298 . 1333018-South Holly WTP PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17100-9 � Control Panel Power Supplies: All control panels shall be provided with power supplies which are configured in a fault-tolerant manner to prevent interruption of servi'ce upon failure and interruption of service necessitated by the replacement of a power supply. All power supplies shall have an excess rated capacity of 40 percent. The failure of a power supply shall be annunciated at the control panel and repeated to the main control room DCS. J. Alternative Equipment and Methods: Equipment or methods requiring redesign of any project details are not acceptable without prior written approval of the ENGINEER through the "or equal" process of Section 01600 - Products, Materials, Equipment, and Substitutions. Any proposal for approval of alternative equipment or methods shall include evidence of improved performance, operational advantage and maintenance enhancement over the equipment or method indicated, or shall include evidence that an indicated component is not available. K. 2.2 /� Lightning and Surge Arrestors 1. A lightning and surge arrestor (LSA) shall be provided to protect the electronic instrumentation system from induced surges propagating along the analog and discrete signal and power supply lines. The protection systems shall be such that the protective level shall not interfere with normal operation, but shall be lower than the instrument surge withstand level, and be maintenance-free and self- restoring. The LSA shall be housed in a suitable metallic case, properly grounded. Ground wires for all surge protectors shall be connected to a good earth ground and where practical, each, ground wire run individually and insulated from each other. 2. Protection of field analog, discrete, digital and telemetered signal lines shall be provided as required. LSA. devices shall be installed as close to the instrument being protected as possible. The units shall be manufactured by EDCO Incorporated of Florida, Ocala, Florida; or equal. All analog loops extending outside buildings shall have LSA devices installed on both ends of the loop. Anywhere signal lines that leave control rooms, buildings, etc., shall have the protection devices. Protection shall be with the combined use of gas tube surge arrester and Zener diode protectors, MOV's and capacitors. The LSA shall be modular and plug-in type with an indictor to show LSA status. The LSA shall be compatible with the terminal blocks. The terminal block shall be manufactured by WAGO Corporation, or equal. OPERATING CONDITIONS The PCIS shall be designed and constructed for satisfactory operation and long, low maintenance service under the following conditions: 2. 3. 4. Environment - water treatment facility Temperature Range - 0 through 104 degrees F Thermal Shock " - 1 degree F per minute, max Relative Humidity - 20 through 90 percent, non-condensing 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Coagulant Feed System Improvements , PAGE 17100-10 �� L�J � � � � � f� � L'J �� I� � i� L�J � � u � � 2.3 A. � B. � � � � � C. � 2.4 � � L�J l�' l�J L�J C� � LiJ l■J SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS The CONTRACTOR shall furnish special tools required to calibrate and maintain all of the instrumentation provided under the Contract Documents. In addition to the CONTRACTOR proposed special tools, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish the following: 1. One spare for each type of PLC module shall b� ;��ipplied. 2. Two pressure switches for each range of pressure switch shall be provided. Spare pressure switches shall be supplied by the most common range of switch provided for the second unit within that range and the next most common range for the successive units. 3. 4. Five (5) surge arrestors of each type. Hart protocol instrument calibrator. All special tools and spare parts shall be submitted before startup commences, suitably wrapped and identified. CONTROL PANELS A. General: The term "control panel" as used herein shall refer to a complete instrumentation panel assembly including enclosures, consoles, instruments, components, controls, enclosure climate control systems, power supplies and internal wiring which are assembled, furnished, and tested by the Instrumentation Supplier. Control panels shall contain the instrumentation equipment specified by these contract documents. The contract drawings show the minimum acceptable enclosure size. All enclosures shall be sized by the Instrumentation Supplier to contain the equipment required to make the control panel functionally complete and maintainable. B. Construction Requirements: Control panels shall be all steel enclosures, except where specified otherwise, and as a minimum, conform to the width and height dimensions shown in the contract documents. All control panels installed in protected indoor locations, i.e., control rooms, MCC rooms, shall conform to NEMA 12 requirements. All control panels shall be provided in the sections and of the heights as shown in the Contract Documents. Panel sections shall be drilled on the sides, top and bottom and the sections bolted together to form a rigid assembly. All control panels shall conform to the following construction requirements: 1. 2. � Freestanding LCP enclosures shall be fabricated from 10-gage stainless steel. Wall mounted LCPs shall have a minimum thickness of 12 gage stainless steel. Control panel doors shall be flush fitting, gasketed, hinged lift-off type, three-point latch, and lockable door handles. Structural shapes and strap steel conform to ASTM A-283. 092298 . 1333018-South Holly WTP PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17100-11 � 4. Bolting mechanisms shall consist of 1/2-inch (minimum size) commercial quality hex-head carbon steel machine bolts, nuts, and washers. Carriage bolts shall be used to attach end plates. All nuts shall be hot-pressed hex American standard heavy. Standard wrought washers shall be used for foundation bolts and attachments to building structures. All other bolted joints shall have S.A.E. standard lock washers. All NEMA 4X enclosures shall utilize 316SS bolting mechanism and hardware. 5. The rear of each panel/panel section shall have a steel framework dedicated to the support of conduit, tubing, wireways, switches, air piping and all instrument accessory items such as relay enclosures, terminal enclosures, transducers, valves, and air relays. The main frame shall be constructed of standard structural shapes. Special shapes such as "UNISTRUT" may be used for secondary supports. �The framework shall not interfere with instrument connections or maintenance access. [� 7. E E Stiffeners shall be welded to each control panel/control panel section as required to prevent panel deformation resulting from the weight of mounted instruments. Removable lifting lugs shall be provided as shown. Filler plugs shall be provided to fill the void when the lifting lugs are removed. The edges of all panels shall be straight and smooth. Corners shall be welded and ground smooth. The face of the panel shall be true and level after flanging. All panel cutouts and holes shall be formed by any standard method that will not cause deformation. All burrs shall be ground smooth. 10. The top of each control panel/control panel section shall be provided with removable access panel dedicated to conduit penetrations. The bottom of each floor standing control panel shall have a knockout area for conduit penetration. _ 11. Print pockets fabricated from sheet steel shall be provided to be a repository for panel "as-built" drawings. Each print pocket shall have a variable height adjustment and attach to the vertical door frame rails. Print jackets shall be provided with polystyrene print pockets, which have self-adhesive fixing strips. The quantity of print jackets shall be sufficient to cover and preserve all documentation associated with the panel. 12. Writing boards, which attach to the vertical doorframe rails shall fold down when in use and return to a vertical position when not in service. 13. Sub-panels shall be provided at ends of all sections of freestanding panels for the OWNER's future use. The sub-panels will be sized to provide maximum mounting area without creating any interference problems. All sub-panels shall be mounted on stand-offs and designed for removal. C. Electrical Requirements for Panels: The Instrumentation Supplier shall furnish all necessary conduits, wireways, switches, indicators, controllers, electrical fittings, and 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Coagulant Feed System Improvements - PAGE 17100-12 � � � � L�J � L�J L■J � L�`' �� f� � �� wire for all circuits to � complete and functional electrical requirements: � l�J � LJ � � � � � � instruments and other panel electrical devices to assure a installation. All control panels shall conform to the following Unless otherwise specified in the technical specifications for instrurrrentation, all instruments, alarm systems, and motor controls shall operate at 115 vac or 24 vdc. Terminal box connections shall be located at an accessible location proximal to the top or bottom of the panel. 3. Power supply switches for alarm units shall be 3-pole type, arranged to open both the power and alarm circuits. A separate switch shall be dedicated to each annunciator. An auxiliary isolated dry contact shall be used to monitor the off position remotely. . 4. Instruments located on the same panel section and serving the same process unit may be connected to a common branch circuit from the power supply. A 15 amp 2- pole circuit breaker shall be provided in each branch circuit. Circuit load shall not exceed 10 amps. Different panel sections or different process unit shall not use common branch circuits. 5. Each instrument loop shall be individually fused to protect against fault currents. Fuses shall be mounted at a centralized highly accessible area within the enclosure, Each fuse shall be mounted in a fuse holder with each fuse being identified by a service tag name and number. The fuse shall be a 1/32 amp rated fuse with a vertical plug-in socket mounted on the instrument and terminal cabinet (ITC) terminal strip. 6. A 15 amp, 120 volt, ground fault interrupted (GFI) service outlet shall be provided for each 6 feet of panel length or fraction thereof. 7. Signal and low voltage wiring shall be run separately from power and 120 volt � control wiring. All wiring and terminations shall be in accordance with NEC requirements. All class 1 wiring shall be physically separated from any class 2 and class 8 wiring. . [�' � � U' �I C!� � L■� 8. All wire except for 1) field wire, 2) wire between mating blocks in adjacent sections, 3) wire from components on swing-out panels/subpanels to components attached to the fixed structures, and 4) wire run to other control panel components, shall be run in wireways. 9. Wire runs from components on swing-out panels/subpanels to other components attached to the fixed structure shall be made up in tied bundles with nylon wire ties and secured to panels at both ends of the "hinged loops" so that the conductors are not strained at the terminals. 10. Wire runs to control devices on the front of control panels shall be tied with nylon ties at one-foot intervals and secured to the inside face of the control panel with adhesive mounts. 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17100-13 � 11. Wire runs to rear termina1s of control panel mounted instruments shall be run in plastic wireways secured to horizontal brackets run a maximum of 6-inches above � or below the instruments. 12. Conductors shall be flexible stranded copper machine tool wire, UL listed type MTW and shall be rated at 600 volts. Wires for bi-state instrument signal circuits and alarm circuits shall be 16 AWG. All shielded cables shall be 16 AWG. 13. Conductors supplying 120 volts ac power on the line side of a disconnecting switch shall be black insulation for the ungrounded conductor. Grounded (neutral) circuit conductors shall have white insulation. The ground wire shall have green insulation. 14. Conductors for ungrounded 120-volt ac control circuits shall have red insulation. All conductors energized by an AC voltage source external to the control panels shall have yellow insulation. All conductors conveying DC voltage shall have blue insulation. ° 15. Terminals shall be installed in each control panel to land all field wires including spares being pulled under this project. All spare wire shall be terminated and identified. In addition to the terminal blocks being sized to accommodate all field wires plus 20 percent wired spares, the terminals shall include an additional spare capacity of 20 percent. Terminal blocks shall be molded plastic with barriers and box lug terminals, and shall be rated 15 amperes at 600-volts. White marking strips, fastened securely to the molded sections, shall be provided and wire numbers or circuit identifications shall be marked thereon with permanent marking fluid. Circuit breaker, fuses, relay sockets and lightning and surge arresters shall be mounted integrally to the terminal blocks. Terminal blocks shall be WAGO or equal. 16. Each signal, control, alarm, and indicating circuit conductor shall be identified by a single unique number. The number shall follow the following convention of designating the ISA tag number of the signal's source, enumerating the routing of the signal to/from the panel, i.e., manholes, junction boxes, and the designation of the signal's destination ISA tag number. Wire numbers shall be marked on all conductors at each terminal using white numbered wire markers which are plastic- coated (heat-shrink) cloth (Brady B-500, Thomas & Betts "E-Z Code" or equal). L�'J � L�� E� �� L�, � �� 17. Power circuits shall be identified with the associated panel and circuit numbers. � 18. Freestanding panels shall be provided with incandescent back-of-panel lights to facilitate maintenance tasks. One 40-watt light shall be provided for every four feet of panel width with a minimum wattage of 25 watts being provided for 24-inch wide panels. Each light shall be activated by a door switch, which automatically activates and deactivates the panel light when the door is opened and closed. A spare bulb shall be provided and retained in each panel on a one-to-one basis by an integral bulb holder which also protects the bulb from damage during routine maintenance activities. 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17100-14 � �J I� i�J L�J L+�J � 19 Circuit Breakers: Circuit breakers shall be single pole, 120-volt, 15 ampere rating or as required to protect wires and equipment and mounted inside the panels. 20 � ��J All control panel wiring and construction shall conform to U.L. requirements. D. Instrument Mounting Requirements: The Instrumentation Supplier shall provide all cutouts and shall mount all instrument items in conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. All control panels shall conform to the following instrument mounting: � 1. Rear-of-panel mounted instruments and equipment shall be installed with adequate access and ingress to easily permit cover removal, service, and adjustment. � � L+!J � 2. Spare space shall be kept clear of wiring, etc., to maximize space for future additions. 3. Clustered bulkhead tube unions for all field connections to instrument piping and tubing shall be provided in the panel. Threaded couplings shall be provided for pipe. 4. The rating of all front panel mounted instruments shall be compatible with the rating of the panel enclosure. Instruments which are not rated NEMA 4X and which are to be installed in a NEMA 4X enclosure shall be covered with a window kiUwindowed door to preserve an overall NEMA 4X enclosure rating. � E. Control Panel Surface Preparation and Finish Requirements: The Instrumentation Supplier shall perform surface preparation and finishing in conformance with the following requirements: . L�J [�� l�� L�J I�j �' L�J 1. All panel steel surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and sandblasted per Steel Structures Painting Council Specification SSPC-SP-6 (Commercial Blast). 2. , All high spots, burrs, and rough spots shall be ground smooth. 3. All traces of oil shall be removed with a solvent. F. Control Panel Environmental Conditioning Requirements: All control panels situated in indoor and outdoor environments shall be environmentally conditioned with heating, cooling, dehumidifying, anti-corrosive agents, lightning arrestors, electrical and R.F. noise inhibitors to promote reliability and longevity of all components associated with the control panel. All control panels shall conform to the following environmental conditioning requirements: � 1. Each control panel, operating under ambient conditions, shall maintain all components a minimum of 20 percent below their rated temperature, humidity, and corrosive limits. 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17100-15 LJ 2. The Instrumentation Supplier shall provide, install, and place into service all required heaters, sun-shields, air conditioners, thermostats, lightning arrestors, � RFI/EM shields, and corrosion protection devices. . 3. Control panel heaters and thermostats shall be provided to minimize the incidence of condensation and resultant corrosion. Heaters shall be installed internal to the panel and be provided with an integral thermostat. 4. Control panel fans shall be provided to minimize heat excursions in panels rated NEMA 12 or 3R. Sub-rack fans shall be installed to provide internal air circulation. Filter fans with protective grills and synthetic fiber filters shall be provided to ensure a temperature balance between the inside and outside of the cabinet. All fans shall be thermostatically controlled and not exceed a cumulative noise value of 55 db measured 3-feet away from any side of the panel. 5. Control panel fans shall be provided to minimize heat excursions in panels rated NEMA 4X. Thermostatically controlled sub-racked fans shall be installed to. provide internal air circulation. All fans shall not exceed a cumulative noise value of 55-db measure 3-feet away from any side of the panel. 6. In those instances where panel integrity must be preserved or when sub-fans are unable to provide adequate cooling, air conditioners shall be provided to minimize heat excursions in panels rated NEMA 4X or purged enclosures. Panels located outside shall have sun shields on all exposed surfaces. 7. All LCP's which are nitrogen or air purged shall be provided with all required taps, pressure regulators, flow regulators, bypass valves, tubing and piping as manufactured by BEBECO Industries Inc., or equal. 2.5 FACTORY TESTING A. The CONTRACTOR shall arrange for the Manufacturers of the equipment and fabricators of panels and cabinets supplied under this Section to allow the ENGINEER and OWNER to inspect and witness the testing of the equipment and PLC logic at the site of fabrication. Equipment shall include the cabinets, special control systems, flow measuring devices, and other pertinent systems and devices. A minimum of ten working days riotification shall be provided to the ENGINEER prior to testing. No shipments shall be made without the ENGINEER'S approval. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Shipping Precautions: After completion of shop assembly, factory test, and approval, all equipment, cabinets, panels, and consoles shall be packed in protective crates and enclosed in heavy duty polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection from damage, dust, and moisture. Dehumidifiers shall be placed inside the polyethylene coverings. The equipment shall then be skid-mounted for final transport. Lifting rings shall be provided for moving without removing protective covering. Boxed 092298 , 1333018-South Holly WTP PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17100-16 � � � � � L*'1 � L�] � � l�J l#1 L�J � L�''J L�J ��J � L�� D. Storage: Equipment shall not be stored outdoors. Equipment shall be stored in dry air- conditioned storage, including in-line equipment, and shall be adequately protected against mechanical injury. If any apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired by the 'CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to the OWNER. If any electronic equipment has been subject to possible injury by water, it shall be replaced as directed by the ENGINEER. B. Special Instructions: Speciat instructions for proper field handling, storage, and D installation required by the Manufacturer shall be securely attached to each � piece of equipment prior to packaging and shipment. . � C. Tagging: Each component shall be tagged to identify its location, instrument tag number, and function in the system. A permanent stainless steel or other non-corrosive material tag firmly attached and permanently and indelibly marked with the instrument � tag number, as given in the tabulation, shall be provided on each piece of equipment in the PCIS. Identification shall be prominently displayed on the outside of the package. liJ � � L � L■J � l!' 3.2 �INSTALLATION A. General: weight shall be sho.wn on shipping tags' together with instructions for unloading, transporting, storing, and handling at the job site. 1. All instrumentation, including instrumentation furnished under other Divisions, shall be installed under Division 17 and the manufacturers' instructions. 2. Equipment Locations: The monitoring and control system configurations indicated are diagrammatic. The locations of equipment are approximate. The exact locations and routing of wiring and cables shall be governed by structural conditions and physical interferences and by the location of electrical terminations on equipment. All equipment shall be located and installed so that it will be readily accessible for operation and maintenance. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in approximated locations and arrangements, or when the OWNER exercises the right to require changes in location of equipment which do not impact material quantities or cause material rework, the CONTRACTOR shall make such changes without additional cost to the OWNER. � B. C' C � L�J � Conduit, Cables, and Field Wiring All conduit shall be provided under Division 16 without delay to the WORK of Division 17. 2. All 4-20 mA signal circuits, process equipment control wiring, signal wiring to field instruments, DCS input and output wiring and other field wiring and cables shall be provided under Division 16. 3. All DCS equipment cables, fiber optic cables, network cables, data highway communication networks shall be provided under Division 17. 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17100-17 C� �-� All terminations and wire identification at PCIS equipment furnished under this or any other Division shall be provided under Division 17. All wires from field instruments, and power supplies shall be under Division 16. All other terminations shall be under Division 17. � C. Instrumentation Tie-Downs: All instruments, control panels, and equipment shall be anchored by methods, which comply with high wind requirements, which apply to the site. D. Existing Instrumentation: Each existing instrument to be removed and reinstalled shall be cleaned, reconditioned and recalibrated by an authorized service facility of the instrument Manufacturer. The CONTRACTOR shall provide certification of this work prior to reinstallation of each instrument. E. Ancillary Devices: The Contract Documents show all necessary conduit and instruments required to make a complete instrumentation system. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing any additional or different type connections as ' required by the instruments and specific installation requirements at no additional cost to the OWNER. All such additions and all such changes, including the proposed method of installation, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval prior to commencing the work. Such changes shall not be a basis of claims for extra work or delay. F. Installation Criteria and Validation: All field-mounted components and assemblies j� shall be installed and connected according to the requirements below: !r� 1. 2. 3. Installation personnel have been instructed on installation requirements of the Contract Documents. Technical assistance is available to installation personnel at least by telephone. Installation personnel have at least one copy of the approved shop drawings and data. 4. Instrument process sensing lines shall be installed similar to conduit specified � ' under Section 16050 - Electrical General Provisions. Individual tubes shall run parallel and near the surfaces from which they are supported. Supports shall be used at intervals of not more than 3 feet of rigid tubing. 5. Bends shall be formed to uniform radii with the proper tool without deforming or thinning the walls of the tubing. Plastic clips shall be used to hold individual plastic tubes parallel. Ends of tubing shall be square-cut and cleaned before being inserted in the fittings. Bulkhead fittings shall be provided at all panels requiring pipe or tubing entries. C� 7. � All differential pressure elements shall have three valve manifolds. All flexible cables and capillary tubing shall be installed in flexible conduits. The lengths shall be sufficient to withdraw the element for periodic maintenance. All power and signal wires shall be terminated with crimped type lugs. 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17100-18 � a � 9. All connectors shall be, as a minimum, watertight. 10. All wires shall be mounted clearly with an identification tag that is of a permanent and reusable nature. 11. All wire and cable shall be arranged in a neat manner and securely supported in � cable groups and connected from terminal to terminal without splices unless specifically approved by the ENGINEER. All wiring shall be protected from sharp edges and corners. � � � l�J L�J l!J � 12. All mounting stands and bracket materials and workmanship shall comply with requirements of the Contract Documents. 13. Verify the correctness of each installation, including polarity of electric power and signal connections, and making sure all process connections are free of leaks. The CONTRACTOR shall certify in writing that for each loop or system checked out, all discrepancies have been corrected. ' 14. The OWNER will not be responsible for any additional cost of rework attributable to actions of the CONTRACTOR or the Instrumentation Supplier. 3.3 CALIBRATION A. General: All devices provided under Division 17 shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer's recommended procedures to verify operational readiness and ability to meet the indicated functional and tolerance requirements. B. Calibration Points: Each instrument shall be calibrated at 20,40,60, 80 and 100% of span using test instruments to simulate inputs. The test instruments shall have accuracies traceable to National Institute of Testing Standards. C. Bench Calibration: Instruments, which,have been bench-calibrated, shall be examined � in the field to determine whether any of the calibrations are in need of adjustment. Such adjustments, if required, shall be made only after consultation with the ENGINEER. � D. Field Calibration: Instruments which were not bench-calibrated shall be calibrated in the field to insure proper operation in accordance with the instrument loop diagrams or specification data sheets. L�J � I�. E. Analyzer Calibration: Each analyzer system shall be calibrated and tested as a workable system after installation. Testing procedures shall be directed by the manufacturers' technical representatives. All samples and sample gases shall be furnished by the manufacturers. F. Calibration Sheets: Each instrument calibration sheet shall provide the following information and a space for sign-off on individual items and on the completed unit: 1. Project name C � � 2. Loop number 092298 . 1333018-South Holly WTP PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17100-19 � 3. Tag number 4. Manufacturer 5. Model number u � 6. Serial number 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Calibration range I�1 Calibration data: Input, output, and error at 10 percent, 50 percent and 90 percent of span , Switch setting, contact action, and deadband for discrete elements Space for comments Space for sign-off by Instrumentation Supplier and date Test equipment used and associated serial numbers G. Calibration Tags: A calibration and testing tag shall be attached to each piece of equipment or system at a location determined by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall have the Instrumentation Supplier sign the tag when calibration is complete. The ENGINEER will sign the tag when the calibration and testing has been accepted. 3.4 LOOP TESTING A. General: Individual instrument loop diagrams per ISA Standard S5.4 - Instrument Loop Diagrams, expanded format, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review prior to the loop tests. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER of scheduled tests a minimum of 30 days prior to the estimated completion date of installation and wiring of the PCIS. After the ENGINEER'S review of the submitted loop diagrams for correctness and compliance with the specifications, loop testing shall proceed. The loop check shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER. B. Control Valve Tests: All control valves, cylinders, drives and connecting linkages shall be stroked from the operator interface units as well as local control devices and adjusted to verify proper control action, hand switch action, limit switch settings, torque settings, remote control actions, and remote feedback of valve status and position. Control valve actions and positioner settings shall be checked with the valves in place to insure that no changes have occurred since the bench calibration. C. Interlocks: All hardware and software interlocks between the instrumentation and the motor control circuits, control circuits of variable-speed controllers and packaged equipment controls shall be checked to the maximum extent possible. D. Instrument and Instrument Component Validation: Each instrument shall be field tested, inspected, and adjusted to its indicated performance requirement in accordance its Manufacturer's specifications and instructions. Any instrument which fails to meet any Contract requirement, or, in the absence of a Contract requirement, any published 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17100-20 LJ � � LwJ � � C ��,I � J Ll l�l � �� L� 1 �Ji C� LJ � I■� I!I f�l u � � � � � CI �' � I11 � manufacturer performance specification for functional and operational parameters, shatl be repaired or replaced, at the discretion of the ENGINEER at no additional cost to the OWIVER. E. l.00p Validation: Controllers and electronic function modules shall be field tested and exercised to demonstrate correct operation. All control loops shall be checked under simulated operating conditions by impressing input signals at the primary control elements and observing appropriate responses of the respective control and monitoring elements, final control elements, and the graphic displays associated with the DCS. Actual signals shall be used wherever available. Following any necessary corrections, the loops shall be retested. Specified accuracy tolerances for each analog network are defined as the root-mean-square-summation of individual component accuracy requirements. Individual component accuracy requirements shall be as indicated by Contract requirements or by published manufacturer accuracy specifications, whenever Contract accuracy requirements are not indicated. Each analog network shall be tested by applying simulated analog or discrete inputs to the first element of an analog network. For networks which incorporate analog elements, � simulated sensor inputs corresponding to 20, 40, 60, 80 and 100% of span shall be applied, and the resulting element outputs monitored to verify compliance to calculated root-mean-square- summation accuracy tolerance requirements. Continuously variable analog inputs shall be applied to verify the proper operation and setting of discrete devices. Provisional settings shall be made on controllers and alarms during analog loop tests. All analog loop test data shall be recorded on test forms attached at the end of this section which include calculated root-mean-square-summation system accuracy tolerance requirements for each output. F. Loop Validation Sheets: The CONTRACTOR shall prepare loop confirmation sheets for each loop covering each active instrumentation and control device except simple hand switches and lights. Loop confirmation sheets shall form the basis for operational tests and documentation. Each loop confirmation sheet shall cite the following information and shall provide spaces for sign-off on individual items and on the complete loop by the Instrumentation Supplier: 1. Project name 2. Loop number 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Tag number, description, manufacturer and model number for each element Installation bulletin number Specification sheet number Loop description number � Adjustment check Space for comments Space for loop sign-off by Instrumentation Supplier and date Space for ENGINEER witness signature and date 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP P.ROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17100-21 f�'"I G. Loop Certifications: When installation tests have been successfully completed for all individual instruments and all separate analog control networks, a certified copy of all test forms signed by the ENGINEER or the ENGINEER's representative as a witness, with test data entered, shall be submitted to•the ENGINEER together with a clear and unequivocal statement that all instrumentation has been successfully calibrated, inspected, and tested. 3.5 ON-SITE SUPERVISION A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the services of an on-site resident engineer to supervise and coordinate installation, adjustment, testing, and start-up of the PCIS. The resident engineer shall be present during the total period required to effect a complete operating system. A team of engineering personnel shall be on site to check all equipment, perform the tests indicated in this Section, and furnish startup services. 3.6 A. B. C. PERFORMANCE TEST The entire PCIS shall operate for 7 days without failure that requires a system reboot of the PLCs or halts operation of the plant. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all necessary support staff as required to operate the system and to satisfy the repair or replacement requirements. If ar�y component fails during the performance test, it shall be repaired or replaced and. the PCIS shall be restarted on another 7-day period. 3.7 TRAINING G� -L'.' General: The CONTRACTOR shall train the OWNER'S personnel on the maintenance, calibration and repair of all instruments provided under this Contract. Instructions: The training shall be performed by qualified representatives of the equipment manufacturers and shall be specific to each piece of equipment. 3.8 ACCEPTANCE � � � � ��l �� "I !J �� ,� �� L'J A. For the purpose of this Section, the following conditions shall be fulfilled before the WORK is considered substantially complete: Q 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. All submittals have been completed and approved. The PCIS has been calibrated, loop tested and precommissioned. The OWNER training has been performed. All required spare parts and expendable supplies and test equipment have been delivered to the ENGINEER., The performance test has been successfully completed. 092298 . 1333018-South Holly WTP PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17100-22 L�J � .L�J � � � LJ � I#I �J �'� 'il l� � U � L�1 � � u I�; u lJ � 6. 7. 8. 9. All punch-list items have been corrected. All record drawings in both hard copy and electronic format have been submitted. Annotated copy of ladder logic. Revisions to the OWNER'S Manuals that may have resulted from the field tests have been made and reviewed. 10. All debris associated with installation of instrumentation has been removed. 11. All probes, elements, sample lines, transmitters, tubing, and enclosures have been cleaned and are in like-new condition. 3.2 WARRANTY CLAUSE A. CONTRACTOR shall obtain from each Supplier a Year 2000 warranty stating that all information technology components including, but not limited to hardware, software, accessories and peripherals, tools and utilities (collectively, "components") furnished to the CONTRACTOR or installed in the WORK are Year 2000 compliant. "Year 2000 complianY' means that such components will accurately process date/time data (including, but not limited to, calculating, comparing, and sequencing) from, irrto, and between the twentieth and twenty-first centuries, and the years 1999 and 2000, and leap year calculations. Furthermore, Year 2000 compliant components, when used in combination with other components, shall accurately process date/time data if the other components properly exchange date/time data with it. This warranty shall survive for the full term of the applicable statute of limitations. - END OF SECTION - 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17100-23 a QPART 1 — GENERAL SECTION 17120 - FIELD INSTRUMENTATION � 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. This section •sets forth the general specifications and requirements for the field � instrumentation being supplied under this contract. All items furnished under provisions of this specification section shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. � 1.2 � A. � 1.3 A. � 1.4 � A. � 1.5 A. � 1.6 � A. � REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS Field instrumentation reference specifications, codes, and standards shall be provided in accordance with Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Field instrumentation shop drawing submittals shall be provided in accordance with Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS Field instrumentation spare parts and special tools shall be provided'in accordance with Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. MANUFACTURE'S REPRESENTATIVE SERVICES Field instrumentation manufacturer representative services shall be provided in accordance with Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. EXTENDED PERIOD FOR CORRECTION OF DEFECTS Field instrumentation extended period for correction of defects shall be provided in accordance with Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. PART 2 — PRODUCTS � 2.1 GENERAL l�i f �J i•l u A. Hardware Commonatity: All instruments which utilize a common measurement principle (for example, d/p cells, pressure transmitters, level transmitters which monitor hydrostatic head) shall be furnished by a single manufacturer. All panel mounted instruments shall have matching style and general appearance. Instruments performing similar functions shall be of the same type, model, or stainless steel, and shall be from a. single manufacturer. 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements FIELD INSTRUMENTATION PAGE 17120-1 B. Loop Accuracy: The accuracy of each instrumentation system or loop shall be determined as a probable maximum error; this shall be the square-root of the sum of the squares of certified "accuracies" of the designated components in each system, expressed as a percentage of the actual span or value of the measured variable. Each individual instrument shall have a minimum accuracy of plus and minus 0.5 percent of full scale and a minimum repeatability of plus and minus 0.25 percent of full Scale unless otherwise indicated. C. Instrument and Loop Power: Power requirements and input/output connections for all components shall be verified. Power for transmitted signals shall, in general, originate in and be supplied by the control panel devices. The use of "2-wire" transmitters is preferred, and in use of "4-wire" transmitters shall be minimized. Individual loop or redundant power supplies shall be provided as required by the manufacturer's instrument load characteristics to ensure sufficient power to each loop component. All power supplies shall be mounted within control panels or in the field at the point of application. � 2.2 A. FLOW INSTRUMENTATION Magnetic Flowmeter Systems: Magnetic flowmeter systems shall be of the low frequency electromagnetic induction type and produce a DC pulsed signal directly proportional to and linear with the liquid flow rate. Complete zero stability shall be an inherent characteristic of the flowmeter system. Each magnetic flow metering system shall include a metering tube, signal cable, and transmitter. The 1/2" and smaller metering tubing. shall be cast ceramic construction with (2) platinum electrodes. The 1" and larger metering tube shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel with flanged connections, have at least 2 diametrically opposed electrodes, a liner material recommended by the manufacturer for the meters intended service as described in these documents, a meter housing rated for NEMA 6 submergence conditions, and a meter coating consisting of epoxy painted finish. Meters shall have remote communications capability with Hart Protocol. 2. The signal converter/transmitter shall use a 7 hz frequency to drive flux-producing coils and convert the pulse signal from the tube to a 4-20 mA signal. The signal converter/transmitter shall have a 6 digit back lit indicator, be housed in a remotely mounted NEMA 4X enclosure, have integral zero return to provide a constant zero output signal in response to an external dry contact closure, an integral calibration self-test feature to verify proper operation of the electronics, high-and low alarms and an automatic zero adjustment. The meter shall have a two (2) second damping factor. . 3. Each flow metering system shall be hydraulically calibrated at a facility which is traceable to the National Bureau of Standards. The calibration procedure shall conform to the requirements of MIL-STD-45662A. A real-time computer generated printout of the actual calibration data indicating apparent and actual flows at 20, and 100 percent of the calibrated range shall be submitted to the ENGINEER at least 30 days prior to shipment of the meters to the project site. 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP FIELD INSTRUMENTATIOM Coagulant Feed System Improvements ' PAGE 17120-2 � L�J � ��' � � � � � � � L�J f �J L'� �l � � L�l �� 1 � � � Q � � � � � � B. The flow metering system shall conform to the following technical specifications: Output: 4-20 mA into 600 ohms minimum; � Time Constant = 0.5 to 100 ' seconds; galvanic or optic isolation Grounding Rings for Kynar with platinum probe. Grounding rings for all others 316 stainless steel. C�: Scaled pulsed output for totalization Accuracy: Repeatability: Environmental Limits: Power Consumption: Power Requirements: Manufacturer: 0.5% of flow rate from 10 to 100% full scale for velocities over 1 FPS 0.25% Full Scale � T= 250 TO + 1600 F 30 watts or less 110 VAC, +/- 10% Fischer & Porter ABB. Endress & Hauser. Tas Size Ranpe FIT-224A 3/8" with �/z reducers 0-2 gpm FIT-224B 3/8" with �/2 reducers 0-2 gpm FIT-228A 3/8" with �/2 reducers 0-2 gpm FIT-228B 3/8" with �h reducers 0-2 gpm Rotor Meter Systems: . ' , 1. Rotor meter flow switch shall use a float in cylindrical control tube with calibrated marks and a 30 VA reed switch. Housing shall be aluminum with glass tube and stainless steel tube. Seals shall be viton. Flow switch shall be Kobold SV-6, or equal. Tag Size Ranae FSL-108 1" 0-20 gpm FSL-158 1" 0-20 gpm 2.3 LEVEL INSTRUMENTATION � A. Ultrasonic Level Transmitter: Sonic level measuring systems shall consist of an electronic controller-transmitter, a non-contact sonic transducer, and interconnecting cables. The controller-transmitter shall generate the sonic signal to drive the transducer, detect the return echo and convert the elapsed time to a level signal. The controller- 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP . Coagulant Feed System Improvements FIELD INSTRUMENTATIOM PAG E 17120-3 transmitter shall have the� following features; solid state design, NEMA 4 enclosure, integral level indicator, integral non-resettable totalizer, isolated 4-20 mA output signal linearly proportional to level, and transducer temperature compensation. Input power shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz. The sonic transducer shall be watertight and constructed of corrosion resistant materials suitable for its intended service. The transducer design and frequency used shall be determined by the manufacturer. Installation shall be per manufacturer's recommendation. � Ranqe LIT-126 0-- 32 feet Echomax LR LIT-176 0-- 32 feet Echomax LR LIT-200 0— 24 feet Echomax ST-H LIT-204 � 0— 24 feet Echomax ST-H LIT-302 0— 11 feet Echomax ST-H LIT-304 0— 11 feet Echomax ST-H Tag Ranae 2.4 PRESSURE INSTRUMENTATION A. Pressure Switches: The pressure switches shall be single-pole, double-throw with adjustable differential range. Minimum differential shall be less than 10 percent of range. Allowable surge pressure shall be 1.5 times range or better. Each pressure switch shall have visible scale and visible contact operation. Pressure switches shall have a contact rating of 10 amperes at 125 volts ac. Pressure switches shall be snap-action type switches and shall be in the NEMA enclosures suitable to the area classification shown on the Drawings. Diaphragm seals shall be provided and included with the pressure switches at the locations shown on the Drawings. Pressure switches shall be Mercoid, or approved equal. Tag Ranqe LSH-106 0 — 36 inches LSL-106 0 — 36 inches LSH-134 • 0 — 36 inches LSL-134 0 -- 36 inches PSH-212A � 0 — 150 Ibs PSH-212B 0 -- 150 Ibs PSH-216A 0 — 150 Ibs PSH-216B 0 -- 150 Ibs PSH-220A 0 -- 150 Ibs PSH-220B 0 — 150 Ibs B. Diaphragm Seals: Pressure switches shall be provided with diaphragm seals where shown. Pressure switches and diaphragm seals shall be assembled and oil fi�led at the factory prior to shipment. Pressure switches attached to systems involving chemical solutions, corrosive fluids, or other liquids containing one percent or less of solids, shall be equipped with diaphragm seals, or approved equal protective pressure sensing devices, as follows: 092298 �} 1333018-South Holly WTP FIELD INSTRUMENTATIOM Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17120-4 � � � � � � C. � � � � � � E.1 � � LJ' � � � � 2.5 Seals of all Type 316 stainless steel diaphragm for pressure over 15 psi, and elastomer diaphragm for pressures of 15 psi and below. Type 316 stainless steel nuts and bolts, fill connection and valved flush port size of 1/4-inch NPT, capable of disassembly without loss of filler fluid. Diaphragm seals shall be Ashcroft Model 101, or approved equal. 2. Seals with PVC body for removable mounting rated at 200 psi, with Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts, 1/2-inch inlet, 1/4-inch outlet, liquid-filled with Teflon diaphragm for pressure, and suitable elastomer diaphragm for vacuum service. Diaphragm seals shall be Plast-O-Matic Valves, Incorporated, or approved equal. Gage, Differential Pressure and Vacuum: General. Pressure gages shall be provided where shown. In all locations where pressure may vary from below to above atmospheric head, compound gages shall be installed. 2. Gage Construction. Gages shall be industrial quality type with Type 316 stainless steel movement and stainless steel or alloy case. Unless otherwise shown or specified, gages shall have a 4-1/2-inch dial, 1/4-inch threaded connection, a Type ' 316 stainless steel snubber adapter, and a shut-off valve. Differential pressure gages shall have 5-valve manifolds. Gages shall be calibrated to read in applicable engineering units, with an accuracy of t 0.5 percent, to 150 percent of the workin g pressure or vacuum of the pipe or vessel to which they are connected. All gages shall be vibration and shock resistant. Pressure gages shall be Ashcroft Duragage, Model 1279, or approved equal. Snubbers shall be Ashcroft, or approved equal. � PI — 212A PI — 212B PI — 216A PI — 216B PI — 220A PI — 220B Ranae 0— 0 -- 0 -- 0 -- 0— 0 -- FLOAT TYPE LIQUID LEVEL SWITCHES 150 Ibs 150 Ibs 150 Ibs 150 Ibs 150 Ibs 150 Ibs A. Liquid level switches shall be the side mounted float actuated type. Level switches shall be SPDT and shall consist of a fixed sealed reed switch actuated by a floating magnet. Level switches shall be flange or plug mounted to suit field requirements. Process wetted materials shall be Teflon or Polyethylene. Liquid level switches shall be Kobold, NSP-5101, or equal. � LSH-202 LSH-300 LSL LSLL Medium Ferric Sulfate Polymer Water Water 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements Description Ferric Sulfate Containment Basin Polymer Containment Basin Sump Pump Sump Pump FIELD INSTRUMENTATIOM PAG E 17120-5 PART 3 — EXECUTION � 3.1 CALIBRATION . A. Field instrumentation calibration shall be provided in accordance with Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. 3.2 INSTALLATION � A. Field instrumentation installation shall be provided in accordance with Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. 3.3 LOOP TESTING A. Field instrumentation loop testing shall be provided in accordance with Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. 3.4 ON-SITE SUPERVISION A. ��Field instrumentation on-site supervision shall be provided in accordance with Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. 3.5 30 DAY PERFORMANCE TEST �� A. Field instrumentation 30 day performance testing shall be provided in accordance with Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. 3.6 RECORD DRAWINGS � A. Field instrumentation record drawings shall be provided in accordance with Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. 3.7 TRAINING ' A. Field instrumentation training shall be provided in accordance with Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. 3.8 ACCEPTANCE A. Field instrumentation acceptance shall be provided in accordance with Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. . - END OF SECTION - 092298 • 1333018-South Holly WTP � FIELD INSTRUMENTATIOM Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17120-6 � QPART 1 — GENERAL � � � � SECTION 17300 - CONTROL STRATEGIES 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide and integrate the programmable logic controllers (PLC) into the existing system in accordance with the contract documents. The PLCs will be programmed by the CONTRACTOR and the PC operator interface software will be configured by the OWNER. i3 C. D. The expansion to the existing distributed control system (DCS) will monitor and control D the operation of the new chemical feed systems. The DCS will provide the operator interface with treatment processes, annunciate alarms and archive project operational and status data. L�J � l�l PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 THE CONTROL SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE A. The existing DCS is a HSQ system comprise of operator workstation and remote units.. The project database will reside on the workstations and will interface to the process system through this database. The operator workstations also serve as the engineer workstation. The new PLCs shall be connected the existing network. � B. General DCS Functions: �� 1. The following terms will be used in the control strategies of the DCS functions: a. Operator Entered Setpoints: Values that are entered by the operator at the operator interface station. These values shall be adjustable by the operator. b. Tunable Setpoints: Values that are entered at the engineer level displays, or PLC Programmer without requiring software reconfiguration. These values shall not be adjustable from operator displays. Example of tunable setpoints are PID parameters, time settings, alarm setpoints as defined in the control strategy. . The requirements of Section 17100 - Plant Instrumentation apply to this section. The South Holly Project consists of new lime feed system, polymer feed system and ferric feed system. 2. The following general DCS functions shall be provided: a. All analog and discrete inputs to the PLC shall be displayed at the DCS. ,� E� f�l l�' All analog inputs shall be scaled into engineering units at the PLC. c. All flow inputs shall be totalized �at the PLC and displayed at the DCS. 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP CONTROL STRATEGIES Coagulant Feed System Improvements � PAGE 17300- 1 d. Ali equipment run status inputs shall be used to establish RUN time meters at the PLC and displayed at the DCS. e. All proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID) control functions shall be performed at the �PLC with controller face plate displays at the DCS. All standard PID control operator interface shall be provided at the DCS such as: AUTO/MANUAL mode selection. In AUTO, the controller output shall be based on the PID control function at the PLC. In MANUAL, the output of the controller will be based on an operator set value. Transfer between MANUAL and AUTO shall be bumpless. LOCAUREMOTE set point selection. In LOCAL, the setpoint shall be an operator entered value. In REMOTE, the set point shall be from a remote set point input, via the PLC. f. Provide fail to run and fail to stop alarms for equipment with run status and remote run control. 2.2 SIGNAL LEVELS A. Analog inputs: conventional two wire and intelligent transmitters. 1. Signal level to the PLC shall be an isolated 4-20mA dc. 2. All instrument shields will be terminated at the PLC control panels. 3. For instruments wired directly to the PLC, the 24-vdc-loop power shall be from the PLC control panel. 4. Analog Inputs - Four Wire Transmitters a. Signal level to the PLC will be an isolated 4-20 mA dc. b. Signal power supply will be from the transmitter. 5. Analog Outputs a. Signal from the PLC sha�l be isolated 4-20 mA dc at 24 Volts. b. Signal power supply shall be from the PLC. � 6. Discrete Inputs a. Signal level to the PLC will 24 VDC. � b. Signal power will be from the PLC control panel. c. Field contacts will be an isolated dry contact input to the PLC. 492298 � 1333018-South Holly WTP � CONTROL STRATEGIES Coagulant Feed System Impr�vements PAGE 17300- 2 � i�1 L� 7. Discrete Outputs � Signal from the PLC will be a dry contact. Interposing relays, when required will be rated at 10 amps 120 VAC. � 2.3 LEVEL OF AUTOMATION � A. Manual. In the Manual mode of control, control will be either at the device or at the device's local control panel. The LOCAVREMOTE selector switch has to be in LOCAL position, or the HAND/OFF/AUTO selector switch has to �ae in the HAND position for the � Manual mode to be functional. Control of a device in the Manual mode is strictly by the operator. � � � � � � � � B. Automatic: In the Automatic mode of control, control will be by the PLC. The LOCAIJREMOTE selector switch has to be in the REMOTE position, or the HAND/OFF/AUTO has to be in the �AUTO position for the Automatic mode to be functional. 2.4 CONTROL STRATEGIES A. DCS Control Functions 1. � � � 2. a. Manual Control: Areas and equipment that will be controlled manually' by the operator from the DCS Operator Station. Automatic Control: Areas and equipment that will be controlled by PLC software logic. Manual Control: Description of manual control that bypassed the DCS and PLC based control system. Hardwire Interlocks: Description of hardwired interlocks that are active in both: manual and automatic modes of control. Control Strategy Intercommunication: List of other strategies from which this strategy will receive information. � � PART 3 — EXECUTION � �7 � � � 3.1 Lime Feed System A. Overview Lime Feed System: The new hydrated lime feed system will consist of two volumetric screw feeders, two lime slurry tanks with one mixer in each, and local control � panel. The pneumatic� system in the bulk lime truck is used to fill the silo through a 4- inch pipe. A bin activator will ensure a free flow of material to the volumetric screw feeders. The volumetric screw feeders will supply the lime to two slurry tanks. B. DCS Manual Control: Each volumetric screw feeder may be manually operated from a control station in the DCS. The volumetric screw feeder station shall provide for Hand- 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP CONTROL STRATEGIES Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17300- 3 Off-Automatic operation, display the feeder's speed, the actual pH at the rapid mix chambers, and the pH setpoint. Changing between Manual and Automatic control shall be a. bumpless transition. The DCS shall monitor the operation of the volumetric screw feeders and set a feeder failure alarm if the feeder fails to respond within an operator adjustable time. C. DCS Automatic Control: In Automatic mode the DCS shall control the feeder's speed to maintain a constant average pH in the (2) rapid mix chambers. The DCS shall increase the feeder speed if the pH is too low, and decrease the feeder speed if the pH is too high. The pH set point shall be determined at the DCS feeder control station. The loop shall be integral mode control. The DCS shall combine the pH control signal with a ratio control signal based to the raw water flow. The raw water ratio signal shall be equal to raw flow signal multiplied by an operator set gain from 0 to 100%. The PLC shall multiply the flow signal by the pH control signal to get the final lime feed control signal. The pH multiplier shall be 1 when the pH matches the setpoint, shall increase over time to a maximum of 3 when the pH is below setpoint and decrease to 0.33 over time when the pH is above setpoint. The utility water supply valves to the lime slurry tanks shall be opened when the feeder is in operation and shall be closed when the feeder is off. The operator workstation shall provide a means to set the ratio signal, the pH setpoint, and . turn off the pH control in case of a pH probe failure or a basin is out of service and or work off flow control mode only. The operator shall be able to enter the pH setpoint, and gain from the Operator Interface Panel. ` D. Local Manual Control: The volumetric screw feeders may be operated manually from the Local Control Panel. In the LOCAL mode the feeder's speed is controlled by a manual speed controller at the LCP. The speed of each feeder is controlled by a potentiometer or keypad. E. Interlocks: When first starting the lime feed system the DCS shall open the fill water valve and wait (10) minutes (adjustable) for the tank to fill, start the mixer and start the lime feed. If the tank overflows on a high level, or under flows on a low level alarm, or the mixer fails to run, or the water supply fails on low flow, the DCS shall close the fill valve, set an alarm, and stop the lime feed system, and stop the mixer. The low flow, mixer fail, and level alarms shall not be set if the lime system is off. The mixer and water supply valve shall continue to run for 10 minutes after a mixer has stopped to flush the lime slurry out of the mixing tank. The ON-OFF interval of the bin feeder is controlled by a timer in the lime system control panel. 3.2 Liquid Ferric Feed System: A. Overview of Ferric Feed System: Dual Head metering pumps: FSMP-1, FSMP-2, and FSMP-3 feed ferric to the two raw water trains, one pump per train. One pump FSMP-3 is a standby pump to the other two units. B. DCS manual controls for feed pumps: Each feed pump may be operated manually and the speed set manually from a feed pump control station in the DCS. The feed pump � control station shall provide for HAND-AUTOMATIC operation, display the feed pump's speed, display the control signal, the injection point flows, and ratio of Ferric Sulfate to water in ppm, and water flow. Changing between Manual and Automatic control shall be a bumpless transition. ' 092298 • `�' 1333018-South Holly WTP CONTROL STRATEGIES Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17300- 4 � lJ LsJ � C. DCS automatic feed pump control pump speed to maintain a const� water ratio signal shall be equal t from� 0 to 100%. A field selector standby pump. The operator shall Panel. �: In the automatic mode, the DCS shall control the nt ratio of Ferric Sulfate to water in ppm. The raw � raw flow signal multiplied by an operator set gain switch shall set which flow signal is routed to the be able to set the gain from the Operator Interface D. Local Manual controls: Each of the metering pumps may be operated manually at the � LCP. The pump shall run in the HAND mode. Each feed pump's speed may be controlled when the H-O-A switch is in HAND, by a potentiometer or keypad. � E. Interlocks: The DCS shall monitor the Ferric flow rate, if a pump is operating and set an alarm when the ferric to water ratio falls below 10ppm. The DCS shall stop the pumps and sound the horn on the LCP and set an alarm, if the selected tank level is low-low. a3.3 Polymer Feed S,ystem: � A. Overview of Polymer Feed System: Polymer metering pumps: Polymer feed units PAU- 1, PAU-2, and PAU-3 feed polymer to the two raw water trains, one pump per train. Polymer feed unit PAU-3 is a standby pump to the other finro units. L;i u B. �DCS manual controls: Each feed pump may be operated manually and the speed set manually from a feed pump control station in the DCS. The feed pump control station shall provide for HAND-AUTOMATIC operation, display the feed pump's speed, and display the control signal. Ghanging between Manual and Automatic control shall be a bumpless transition. � C. DCS automatic controls: In the automatic mode, the DCS shall control the pump speed to maintain a constant ratio of polymer to water. The raw water ratio signal shall be equal to raw flow signal multiplied by an operator set gain from 0 to 100%. A field � selector switch shall set which flow signal is routed to the standby pump. The operator shall be able to set the gain from the Operator Interface Panel. � D. Local Manual controls: Each of the metering pumps may be operated manually at the LCP. The pump shall run in the HAND mode. Each feed pump's speed may be controlled when the H-O-A switch is in HAND, by a potentiometer or keypad. � E. � 3.4 I� � 1�1 I� IfJ Interlocks: The DCS shall stop the pumps and sound the horn on the LCP and set an alarm, if the selected tank level is low-low. Chemical Storage Tanks: A. The DCS shall sound the alarm horn at the chemical fill station on a high level alarm to signal the tank is full. The DCS shall silence the alarm when the SILENCE button is pressed and clear the alarm with the RESET button is pressed. If the tank level rises to the overflow level the DCS shall sound the alarm until the tank level falls below the overflow level. The DCS shall flag a low tank level and stop the chemical feed pumps if the tank is selected as the feed tank and the level falls to with in 3 inches of the suction pipe invert. The DCS shall record the date and time of the overflow. 092298 . 1333018-South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements CONTROL STRATEGIES PAGE 17300- 5 3.5 Alarm Horn: ' A. The PLC shall sound the alarm horn at the PCM cabinet on very low Ferric feed ratio, a high level alarm in the lime mixing tank, a high high level in a ferric tank or polymer tank, or an eye wash flow switch is activated. . — END OF SECTION — 0 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements 0 CONTROL STRATEGIES PAGE 17300- 6 � �� L■] � � SECTION 17510 - PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR, through the use of a instrumentation CONTRACTOR and qualified electrical installers, shall furnish, supervise installation, assemble, configure, program, and place into service the PLC-based Distributed Control System (DCS), hereafter called the DCS specified under this Section, all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall a!:�� reference the I/O lists in this section. B. Instrumentation Supplier: The Instrumentation CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for selecting, configuring, and verifying correct operation of compatible hardware and software to provide a functional DCS SYSTEM. The DCS shall consist of the fotlowing: D 1. A DCS located at the South Holly WTP that utilizes a programmable logic controller (PLC), to perform operator interfacing process control, historical functions, and interface with existing HSQ SCADA System. Refer to the DCS � C � � l�J L■J u !�J � �i f�l L� � Block diagram on drawing GI-4. The DCS shall be in conformance with the following key system criteria. All peer to peer networks shall conform to Ethernet protocols to preserve a nonproprietary system infrastructure. 2. All data base structures shall strictly adhere to SQL and promote an open interface with third party software applications. D. Here in after, the term CONTRACTOR shall be used to represent the party responsible to the OWNER for the WORK of this division. ' E. Scope of Work: The CONTRACTOR` shall furnish and install the DCS as specified within the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all equipment selection and supply, hardware submittal preparation, system integration, programming, supervision of installation, testing, start-up and implementation activities for both PCMLs being furnished under this Contract. The PLC hardware shall be a standardized system, which utilizes off-the-shelf commercially available configurations of hardware and software modules. F. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all installation, all labor and all engineering required to assure the proper installation and operation of the entire DCS. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing and installing a complete and operational system, fully programmed to meet all the requirements of the Contract Documents. The following work, equipment and services shall be included but not be limited to: 1. Prepare and submit for approval PLC hardware shop drawings. 2. Furnish and install a complete and operational PLC, including all peripherals and other equipment specified herein. 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP � PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17510-1 3. 4. Perform all required PL"C tests, adjustments, and calibrations. Furnish qualified labor to perform PLC installation and start-up. 5. Furnish all required PLC tools, test equipment, spare parts, supplies, operations and maintenance manuals, reproducible "as-built" drawings, and program listings as specified herein. . , G. The CONTRACTOR's attention is directed to the construction sequencing requirements contained within the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall provide on-loan, any and all PLC system equipment required for partial start-up of a process area or system. H. System Responsibility: All PLC hardware furnished in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be done so by the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall have responsibility for providing a fully integrated and properly operating DCS. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the Work of CONTRACTOR's personnel and the instrumentation supplier's personnel for the installation, interconnection, testing, calibration, and operation of all PLC equipment and coordinate the scheduling. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing equipment that properly meets the functional intent of the Contract Documents. Substitutions for PLC functions specified are not permitted. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the OWNER a listing of all alarm, status, control and data registers for the points shown on the instrument drawings and described in the Control Strategies. The CONTRACTOR shall meet with the OWNER for five (5) days to review the coordination between the field PLCs and the MMI software. � I. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with HSQ SCADA system manufacturer for PLC register assignments. The PLC configuration and register assignment shall allow monitor and control of the new chemical feed system from the existing HSQ SCADA system. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS. A. PLC-based control systems-hardware reference specifications, codes, and standards shall be provided in accordance with Section 17100 - Process Control and � Instrumentation Systems. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: DCS submittals shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. PLC submittals shall, however, be made separately from other process control and instrumentation system submittals. B. Hardware Submittals: The PLC hardware submittal shall be a singular all inclusive submittal which shall include but not be limited to: 1. A complete index appearing in the front of each bound submittal volume. System groups shall be separated by labeled tags. . 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17510-2 � L�� ' C;, � L; �� [�� 3 4. 5 C� � Complete grounding requirements for the entire PLC including any requirements for PLCs communication networks and control room equipment. Requirements for physical separation between PLC �components and 120 volt, 480 volt. Control room floor plans drawn to scale. Drawings shall be drawn in a 1/2 inch = 1 foot scale. UPS and battery load calculations to show that tti�:� k�ackup capacity and time meet the specified requirements. A complete set of DCS diagrams which depict: a. All PLCs, communication devices, and communication links. � b. All cables required to support the communication requirements. A separate diagram shall be submitted for each component fully annotated with conduit . . size and number associated with the power source. � � � 7. Data sheets shall be included for each PLC component together with a technical product brochure or bulletin. These data sheets shall show the component name as used within the Contract Documents, the manufacturer's model number or other identifying product designation, the project tag number, the project system of which it is a part, the project site to which it applies, the input and output characteristics, the requirements for electric power, the specifications for ambient operating conditions, and details on materials of construction. � 8. Complete and detailed bills of materials: A bill of � description, manufacturer, and part number, component of the DCS system. Bills of material enclosure. Li� � ►J � � � � � material list, including quantity, shall be submitted for each shall include all items within an 9. Site-specific arrangement and construction drawings for all equipment cabinets, including dimensions, identification of all components, preparation and finish data, nameplates, and the like. All drawings shall be scaled and show the position of the equipment on its intended installation location. All drawings must show a scaled representation of the placement of all equipment and its spatial relationship to all other equipment located in the abutting and adjoining areas. All acquired access and clearances associated with the equipment must be shown with a statement of compliance to manufacturer's recommendations, NEC, and other applicable codes. 10. Calibration, adjustment, and test details for all PLC components. C. Owner's Manuals: General requirements for Owner's Manuals are as described in Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. The following items shall also be included in the software manual: 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE PAG E 17510-3 A documented PLC program listing inciuding the i/O list and housing configuration for each PLC, a memory usage report for each PLC, and a register layout list for each PLC. } 2. Operation and maintenance manuals for the PLCs. D. System Test Procedures: System test procedures shall be developed by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the requirements for system testing specified in Paragraph 3.2.0 herein, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER and OWNER for review and approval. An approved submittal shall be required prior to the commencement of system testing. � E. Procedures shall be prepared for each process system. The procedures shall be in narrative form, describe sequentially the operational steps to be followed in verifying the correct operation of each process system, including all features described in the control strategies contained in Specifications Section 17300. All equipment, including the PLC " system, which function together to form a complete process system shall be tested together, including interlocks between devices performed by the DCS. F. Factory Test Procedure: The CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit a factory test procedure which incorporates test sequences, test forms, samples of database lists, a �DCS testing block diagram, and an estimated test duration which comply with 'the requirements of the factory test specified herein. 1.4 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. The CONTRACTOR representatives of the training, and start-up. OWNER. shall provide visits PLC manufacturer for These visits shall be 1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING by, and services of, technical field installation certification, system testing, at no separate additional cost to the A. All equipment and materials delivered to the job site shall be stored in a location which shall not interfere with the operations of the OWNER's personnel or interfere with construction. Storage and handling shall be performed in manners which shall afford maximum protection to the equipment and materials. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to assure proper handling and on-site storage. 1.6 A. WARRANTY The complete DCS included therein shall be guaranteed to meet or exceed the design requirements set forth in the Contract Documents. B. Equipment, and materials, which do not achieve design requirements after installation, shall be replaced or modified by the instrumentation supplier to attain compliance, at no additional cost to the OWNER. Following replacement or modification, the CONTRACTOR shall retest the system and perform any additional procedures needed to place the complete DCS in satisfactory operation and attain design compliance approval from the ENGINEER. 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP PLC-B�SED CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE Coagulant Feed System Improvements I PAGE 17510-4 � � LJ � � L�J L� L�J � � L�J � � � � � � � � � � � � � L�J L!�l � � C. The CONTRACTOR warrants the materials and workmanship used for the PLC equipment and materials and further guarantees the materials and workmanship used for any equipment and materials produced and furnished hereunder as a part of the Work to be as herein specified and agreed upon, free from injurious defects, and in all respects satisfactory for the service required. D. The CONTRACTOR warrants/guarantees the satisfactory performance of the equipment and materials under operating conditions for a period of one year after the date of final acceptance of the entire DCS (i.e., completion of all contractual items including a successful full systerim-wide 7 day performance test as specified in Part 3). In the event that tests and inspections disclose latent defects u� failure to meet the specified requirements, the instrumentation supplier upon notification by the ENGINEER shall proceed at once to correct or repair any such defects or non-conformance or to furnish, at the delivery point named in the Contract Documents, such new equipment or parts as may be necessary for conformity to the specified requirements, and shall receive no additional compensation therefore. In case of any required repairs or other corrective or remedial work covered under warranty, the warrantjes on all such corrections, repairs, new equipment, or parts shall be extended for an additional 6 months from the date of fina� acceptance or 12 months from the date of cbmpletion of any such corrections, repairs, new equipment, or parts, whichever date is later. The CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER for all costs incurred in the removal of the defective material and installation of the replacement. The CONTRACTOR shall transfer the ownership of all materials supplied under this Contract to the OWNER. PART 2 — PRODUCTS � 2.1 GENERAL A. All materials and all DCS equipment furnished under this Contract shall be new, free � from defects, of first quality, and produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of these products. � B. Where there is more than one item of sirnilar equipment being furnished all such similar equipment shall be the product of a singular manufacturer. � I�1 � Ifl � � C. All equipment furnished under this Contract shall be provided with not only the resources required to met the functional requirements of this project in addition, all equipment and resources including PLC Memory, PLC I/O cards, PLC power supplies, UPS, data base, etc., shall be provided to accommodate a 100 percent growth in project requirements. All equipment and resources shall be provided such that at least 20 percent project growth can be implemented into the DCS without.any additional cost to the OWNER. D. The entire DCS being furnished shall be capable of being modularly expanded to accommodate a twofold increase in process report/display requirements and manual input requirements. All equipment and resources shall be able to modularly accept that anticipated future expansion without the need to replace or retire any PLC component or resource. 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE PAGE 17510-5 2.2 A. B. 2.3 A. PLC ENCLOSURES PLC-based control systems-hardware PLC enclosures shall be provided in accordance with Section 17100.2.4 - Control Panels. PLC enclosures shall have 120V alarm buzzer and strobe (Crouse-Hinds, Catalog No., VDA/R and ETH2313) and alarm reset button. . _ : � �LIZ� Programmable Logic Controlier: 1. Construction: Each PLC central processing unit (CPU) shall be of solid-state design. All CPU operating logic shall be contained on plug-in modules for quick replacement. Chassis wired logic is not acceptable. The controller shall be capable of operating in a hostile industrial environment (i.e., subject to heat, electrical transients, RFI, vibration, etc.) without fans, air conditioning, or electrical filtering (up to 60 degrees C and 95 percent humidity). 2. Components-General: Each PLC shall have all of the facilities required to implement the control schemes and data base shown and specified in the Contract Documents. PLCs shall all have floating point math and PID controller modulating capability. Each CPU shall provide internal fault analysis with a fail-safe mode. 3. Central Processors: Each central processor shall contain all the relays, timers, counters, number storage registers, shift registers, sequences, arithmetic capability, and comparators necessary to perform the specified control functions. It shall be capable of interfacing sufficient discrete inputs, analog inputs, discrete � outputs, and analog outputs to meet the specified requirements plus at least 100 percent excess capacity. All PLCs shall be provided to support and implement closed loop floating and F?ID control which is directly integrated into the PLCs control program. The power supply shall contain capacitors to provide for orderly shutdown in the event the incoming power does not meet specifications. If this occurs, the processor will cease operation, forcing all outputs off. The processor shall have a key type memory protect switch to prevent unauthorized program changes. The processor shall include floating point hardware. 4. Memory: Each programmable controller memory shall be (CMOS) semiconductor memory with battery backup. The CMOS user programming memory shall be a minimum of 16K Words. An indicator shall show the status of the batteries and a reference shall be available'through the discrete outputs, to alarm the operator that the batteries should be char�ged. Each controller shall be supplied with an internal lithium battery which shall retain the program during power outages of up to one year. 5. Each unit shall be supplied with sufficient memory to implement the specified control functions plus a reserve capacity of 40 percent of the total provided. This reserve capacity shall be totally free from any system use. The memory shall be programmed in a multi-mode configuration with multiple series or parallel contacts, counters, timers, and arithmetic functions. 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP � PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17510-6 �� 1�1 LiJ � [� � L�J � L;i � �i' L;J 6. Controllers: Each programmable controller shall be capabie to programmed in a simple "ladder diagram" language Sequentiai .Functional Chart (SFC) and structured text. It shall be easily reprogrammed with a portable lap top computer or from a remote location. The PLCs shall have multiple onboard communication ports including Ethernet, remote I/O, Modbus plus and RS-232/422. 7 Q � Data Communication: Each programmable logic controller shall be equipped with the following communication as minimum: - One industrial standard, ethernet communication port. - One Modbus plus with the minimum data transfer of 1 Mbits/Sec. - One programming port. - One Remote I/O Adapter port. - One Modbus Port Manufacturer: The programmable logic QUANTUM Series. cont�ollers shall be MODICON TSX I Operator interface panel. B. The power supply shall be mounted in the PLC housing and be sized to power all modules mounted in that housing and an "average module load" for any empty housing slots plus 60 percent above that total. C. PLC InpuUOutput (I/O) Modules: All I/O housings and modules shall be suitable for hostile industrial environments as described in Paragraph 2.3.A.1 above. All I/O modules shall be isolated and conform to IEEE Surge Withstand Standards and NEMA Noise Immunity Standards. The I/Os shall be 4-20 mA DC for all analog inputs and outputs and shall be 2�4 VDC for discrete inputs and dry relay contacts for safe discrete outputs. Modules shall be removable without having to disconnect wiring from the module's terminals by means of a swing-arm or plug-in wiring connector. � D. Each PLC location shall contain the I/O modules required to provide all of the I/O points contained in the I/O Lists. As a minimum, each PLC location shall contain an installed spare capacity of 20 percent of each type of I/O used at that location. ��7 � !�i 1. Discrete Input Modules: Defined as contact closure inputs from devices external to the programmable controller module. Individual inputs shall be optically isolated from low energy common mode transients to 1500 volts peak from users wiring or other I/O Modules. The modules shall have LED's to indicate status of each discrete input. Input signal level shall be 24 VDC. The input module shall have a maximum of 16 points each. �' 2. Discrete Output Modules: Defined as contact closure outputs for ON/OFF � operation of devices external to the programmable controller module. The output modules shall be optically isofated from inductively generated, normal mode and ,� l�J low energy, common mode transients to 1500 volts peak. All output modules shall 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17510-7 have LED's to indicate status of each output point. Output contact rating shall be 2A minimum, 24V AC. Each output point shall be connected to buffer relays. 3. Analog Input Modules: Defined as 4 to 20 mA DC signals, where an analog to digital conversion is performed with a minimum of 12-bit precision and the digital resulY is entered into the processor. The analog to digital conversion shall be updated with each scan of the processor. Analog input modules shall have eight differential inputs each. Input modules shall be source or sink to handle 2-wire or 4-wire transmitters respectively. CONTRACTOR shall provide current loop isolators as required to break ground loops. 4. Analog Output Modules: Defined as 4 to 20 mA DC output signals where each output circuit performs a digital to analog conversion with each scan of the processor. Each analog output module shall have four isolated output points which shall be rated for loads of up to 1200 ohms at 30 VDC. CONTRACTOR shall provide current loop isolators as required to break ground loops. 5. Remote I/O Adapter Module: Any PLC location which requires more than one housing to mount all of the I/O modules shall be supplied with an appropriate remote I/O adapter module for each secondary housing. The adapter module shall � support all of the types of I/O modules required. The remote I/O in the secondary housing(s) shall be mounted in the same enclosure housing the PLC. E. PLC Housing: The PLC, power supply, and I/O modules shall be mounted in a suitable , standard housing. Individual housing slots shall be mechanically configurable to prevent insertion of incorrect modules. Each PLC location shall have a minimum of 3 empty I/O module slots. 2.4 A. 2.5 SPARE PARTS PLC system spare parts shall be provided in accordance with Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. FIBER OPTIC CABLE A. The Fiber Optic Cable shall be 62.5/125 micro meter cable with a glass core and glass cladding. The cable shall have a core-locked indoor/outdoor PVC outer jacket. Each cabie shall have subcable jacket with KEVLAR strength member and a 900 micro meter tight buffer. Cable loss shall not exceed 3.0 dB/Km at 850nm. Cable shall be Optical Cable Corporation, B-Series Ultra-Fox Plus Breakout Cables, or equal. B. Fiber optic waterproof termination shall be of Camlock all polymer type (including body and ferrule) as manufactured by Methode Electronics, Inc. Termination fiber must be bonded within the ST connector ferrule utilizing two part anaerobic bonding compound. Crimp type connectors and/or epoxy heat cure connectors that require ovens shall not be deemed acceptable. The fiber optic ST connector shall be the 908 Series MST Style by Methode Electronics, Inc. Upon proper termination of the fiber optic cabling, the Contractor shall measure d6 losses over the cable length using an ENGINEER approved fiber testing device. This device shall be capable of producing hard copy test results for submittal to the ENGINEER. Official fiber tests are to be witnessed by the ENGINEER. In addition to .allowing 1 dB loss per connector, losses exceeding 3dB per 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 17510-8 C= [�l � L+�J � � LiJ L�� i� � �� l■� kilometer of fiber will not be acceptable. All fiber technicians must be trained and certified by the fiber connector manufacturer. All connections must be approved by the fiber connector manufacturer. Fiber optic cable shall be spliced in dry boxes in cabinets as shown on the block diagram. 2.6 NETWORK EQUIPMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a transceiver capable of converting from 10 Base T (RJ45) to 62.5 micron fiber with Camlock connectors and 10 Base T to Coaxial. Manufacturer shall be Cabletron or Blackbox. 2.7 UPS A. UPS: The UPS shall meet the demands for the PLC loads, and linear power supplies as shown on the drawings. The UPS shall be a ferroresonant type unit and shall have less than 5% dip for one cycle when switching from battery power to normal power. The unit shall include solid state surge arrestor on the input. The UPS shall have low battery alarm dry contacts. Output wave from THD shall be less than 5%. The UPS shall provide power to the PLC processor or Operator Interface Panel for 2 hours. Unit shall be Best Power, or equal. � PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION • A. The CONTRACTOR shall utilize personnel to accomplish, or supervise the physical installation of all elements, components, accessories, or assemblies which it furnishes. The CONTRACTOR shall employ installers who are skilled and experienced in the installation and connection of all elements, components, accessories, and assemblies it furnishes. B. All components of the DCS including all communication cabling shall be the installation responsibility CONTRACTOR unless specifically noted otherwise. The installation of the communication network shall be the complete installation responsibility of the CONTRACTOR including all cables, connectors, transceivers, and any required electrical grounds. Grounding shall be shown on submittal drawings. After installation of the DCS is completed, the installation shall be inspected jointly by the CC�NTRACTOR and the Equipment Manufacturer's representatives. Any problems shall be corrected, and when both are satisfied with the installation, a written certification of the installation � shall be delivered to the ENGINEER. The certification shall state that all PLCs communication and I/O modules, modems, system grounds, communication network, workstations, printers, and all other components of the DCS System have been inspected and are installed in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines. 3.2 CALIBRATION, TESTING, AND INSTALLATION A. Calibration: All analog inputs and outputs of the PLC shall have their calibration checked at a minimum of 4 points to verify consistency with the balance of the analog loop. This calibration check shall be done in conjunction with the analog loop tests 092298 1333018-South Holly WTP Coagulant Feed System Improvements PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE PAGE 17510-9 specified in Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. PLC registers shall be verified for correctness. . B. Testing: After the PLC installation has been certified and the analog points have been calibrated, the PLC shall be tested to verify that all discrete inputs and outputs of the PLC system are correct. All points shall be checked "end to end." For example, valve status inputs shall be checked by stroking the valve and a pump start output shall be checked by using it to start the pump. Simulated testing shall be allowed only when no practical alternative exists. An I/O checklist shall be used to record test results and a copy provided to the ENGINEER upon completion. C. System Testing: When the PLC installation has been certified and analog loop calibration and discrete I/O testing have been completed, system testing shall be performed in accordance with the approved test procedures. System testing shall operate the various process systems of the treatment plant to verify compliance with all functional requirements specified, including the automatic control modes and PLC interlocks described in the control strategies contained in Section 17300 of this Specification. Tests which fail to demonstrate the required operation shall be repeated in their entirety or continued after corrective action has been completed at the discretion of the ENGINEER. D. Alarm summaries and logs shall be verified for correctness during the system testing phase of this project. During system tests, the CONTRACTOR shall have a representative on site continuously who is capable of trouble-shooting and modifying the PLC system configuration programming. E. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER a system testing completion report when each process system and all aspects of the configuration software have been successfully tested as described herein. The report shall note any problems encountered and what action was required to correct them. It shall include a clear and unequivocal statement that the process systems have has been thoroughly tested and are complete and functional in accordance with all specification requirements. F. Start-Up Test: The CONTRACTOR shall provide start-up support to include the instrumentation supplier's personnel, electrical personnel, and the PLC system manufacturer's representative as required during the testing period to produce a fully operational chemical feed systems. This support shall be provided at no additional cost to the OWNER. G. Performance 7est: Subsequent to the system and start-up testing of chemical feed systems, the CONTRACTOR shall conduct a successful 7 day final acceptance test for the DCS system furnished under this contract. In the test, the entire DCS shall be continuously operated and maintained (i.e., 7 days per week, 24 hours per day) during the test period with zero downtime resulting from system failures. If a system failure occurs, the 7 day test shall be considered a failure and not acceptable. The CONTRACTOR shall repeat the 7 day test. The DCS system shall be acceptable only after all equipment and software has satisfied the performance test requirements. 092298 , 1333018-South Holly WTP PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE Coagulant Feed System Improvements , PAGE 17510-10 �'�9 L�J '�J '�J L�� `� � L#J � L�! Lf! � U � I►�*J L*'J � � � a � U � � � � � 2. . Downtime resuiting from the following shall be considered system failures: a. b. c. d. If a component or software failure cannot be repaired/replaced within 2 hours. Downtime of any component (exclusive of I/O) whose failure results in the inability of the Operator to monitor and manipulate control loops. Downtime in excess of 2 hours resulting fr�rr� any I/O component failure. Downtime resulting from concurrent failure of 2 or more I/O components in a single PLC. e. Downtime of any componenUperipheral associated with the communication network if the failed component (1) results in a disabling of the historical functions and (2) the failed component is not repaired or replaced within 8 hours. H. The CONTRACTOR shall provide 8-hours of on-site directed training. This training shall be conducted during two separate sessions which shall be scheduled with OWNER a minimum of 3 weeks in advance. The OWNER reserves the right to video tape and record any or all portions of training performed for future usage. J. The CONTRACTOR shall provide (3) days services of a trained PLC programmer to make modifications to the process logic 30 days after the date of final acceptance. � 3.3 LADDER LOGIC DOCUMENTATION A. The CONTRACTOR shall annotate the ,PLC ladder logic by providing a descriptive label (� for all relays and function blocks and functional description of each rung. The �a CONTRACTOR shall provide an electronic copy of PLC programming files on a CD. � � �I L�] � LJ L�J - END OF SECTION - 092298 1333d18-South Holly WTP � Coagulant Feed System Improvements PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE PAGE 17510-11 �� . �� .:� Montgomery Watson INSTFUNC � LOOP SUFFIX TYPE AI � 102 B AI FAH 103 DI HS 103 DI YA 105 DO HS 106 B DO • LSH 106 � DI LSL � 106 � DI YA � 106 � B DI YA � 106 A DI YL � 106 C DI YL � 106 A DI YL � 106 B DI YL � 106 DI FAL � 108 DI ZC � 108 DO HS � 112 A DO SC � 112 AO SI � 112 AI YA � 112 � DI YL ( 112 �A DI ' YL � 112 �B DI HS � 114 � B DO HS � 114 � D DI YA � 114 � B DI YA � 114 �A DI YL � 114 �A DI YL � 114 B DI YL 114 C DI YL 114 D DI LI 126 B AI YA 126 �A DI YL � 126 �B DI YL � 126 �A DI HS' � 127 � B DI HS � 127 �C DI HS � 127 �A DI South Holly Coagulant Feed System Improvements I/O List PID DESCRIPTION � holi0l.dgn Floc Basin Train 1 pH Analyzer holi0l.dgn Emergency Eyewash Flow alarm holi0l.dgn Emergency �ewash Panic Switch _ holi0l.dgn Common LALCP Fail Ind. holi0l.dgn Mixer HOA Switch C� LALCP holi0l.dgn Lime Slurry Tank No. 2 Level Alarm High holi0l.dgn Lime Slurry Tank No. 2 Level Alarm Low holi0l.dgn �Mixer Fail Ind. � LALCP holi0l.dgn � Mixer Fail Ind. � MCC holi0l.dgn � Mixer Run Ind. C� LALCP holi0l.dgn � Mixer Ready Ind. C� MCC holi0l.dgn � Mixer Run Ind. � MCC holi0l.dgn �System Run Signal holi0l.dgn � Slurry Tank 2 Water Flow Alarm Low holi0l.dgn � Utility Water Valve Control holi0l.dgn � Volumetric Feeder HOA holi0l.dgn � Volumetric Feeder Speed Control holi0l.dgn �Volumetric Feeder Speed Ind. holi0l.dgn Volumetric Feeder Fail Ind. holi0l.dgn Volumetric Feeder Run Ind. holi0l.dgn Volumetric Feeder Ready Ind. holi0l.dgn � Bin Activator HOA Switch C� LALCP holi0l.dgn �Auto-Start Sequence Initiate holi0l.dgn � Bin Activator Fail Ind. � LALCP � holi0l.dgn �Bin Activator Fail Ind. � MCC holi0l.dgn � Bin Activator Run Ind. C� MCC holi0l.dgn � Bin Activator Ready Ind. C� MCC holi0l.dgn � Bin Activator Run Ind. � LALCP holi0l.dgn � Bin Activator Ready Ind. � LALCP holi0l.dgn � Lime Silo Level Xmtr holi0l.dgn �Compressor Fail Ind. C�3 MCC holi0l.dgn �Compressor Run Ind. @ LCP holi0l.dgn �Compressor Run Ind. C�3 MCC ___ holi0l.dgn � Lime Silo Level Alarm Silence Switch holi0l.dgn �Lime Silo Level Alarm Test Switch holi0l.dgn � Lime Silo Level Alarm Acknowledge Switch __�COMMENTS _ _ :_ I- - - - - -- - � --- � � � � --�- - - - - � � � �--- - - --- -- -- -. I-------- ---- I--- - - -- I-- -- ---- � -- -- - -- � � � � - --- ---- - - I-- - - - --- - Date: 6/2/99 Shollyioa.xls Page: 1 Montgomery Watson South Holly Coagulant Feed System Improvements I/O List INSTFUNC LOOP SUFFIX TYPE PID LI 127 B AO holi0l.dgn YA 127 � DO holi0l.dgn YA 128 � B DI holi0l.dgn YA 128 A DI holi0l.dgn YL 128 B � DI holi0l.dgn YL 128 �A � DI holi0l.dgn YA 154 � � DI holi02.dgn YA 155 � � DO holi02.dgn HS 156 � B � DO holi02.dgn LSH 156 � DI holi02.dgn LSL 156 � DI holi02.dgn YA 156 � B � DI � holi02.dgn YA 156 �A � DI � holi02.dgn YI 156 � � DO � holi02.dgn YL 156 � C � DI � holi02.dgn YL 156 �A - � Dt � holi02.dgn YL 156 � B � DI � holi02.dgn FAL � 158 � � DI � holi02.dgn ZC � 158 � � DO holi02.dgn HS � 162 A � DO holi02.dgn SC � 162 � AO � holi02.dgn SI � 162 � AI � holi02.dgn YA � 162 � DI � holi02.dgn YL � 162 �A DI � holi02.dgn YL � 162 � B � DI � holi02.dgn HS 164 � B � DO � holi02.dgn HS 164 � D � DI � holi02.dgn YA 164 � B � DI � holi02.dgn YA 164 �A � DI � holi02.dgn YL � 164 �A I DI � holi02.dgn YL � 164 �B DI � holi02.dgn YL � 164 � C � DI � holi02.dgn YL � 164 � D � DI � holi02.dgn . LI � 176 � B � AI � holi02.dgn YA � 176 �A DI � holi02.dgn YL � 176 � B DI � holi02.dgn �DES�RIPTION _ ,_ COMMENTS Lime Silo Level Ind. � SFLCP � Lime Silo Level Alarm �Blower Fail Ind. C�3 SFLCP � Blower Fail Ind. C� MCC � Blower Run Ind. C�3 SFLCP �Blower Run Ind. � MCC Smoke Detection Device Common LALCP Fail Ind. � Mixer HOA Switch � LALCP � Lime Slurry Tank No. 2 Level Alarm High �Lime Slurry Tank No. 2 Level Alarm Low � Mixer Fail Ind. C� LALCP � Mixer Fail Ind. � MCC �System Run Signal -- Mixer Run Ind. C�2 LALCP Mixer Ready Ind. � MCC Mixer Run Ind. C�3 MCC � Slurry Tank 4 Water Flow Alarm Low � Utility Water Valve Control � Volumetric Feeder HOA � LALCP � Votumetric Feeder Speed Control � Volumetric Feeder Speed Ind. � Volumetric Feeder Fail Ind. Volumetric Feeder Run Ind. Volumetric Feeder Ready Ind. Bin Activator HOA Switch � LALCP �Auto-Start Sequence Initiation �Bin Activator Fail Ind. C�3 LALCP � Bin Activator Fail Ind. C� MCC � Bin Activator Run Ind. C�3 MCC � Bin Activator Ready Ind. � MCC � Bin Activator Run Ind. C�3 LALCP � Bin Activator Ready Ind. � LALCP Lime Silo Level Xmtr Compressor Fail Ind. � MCC �Compressor Run Ind. � LCP Date: 6/2/99 Shollyioa.xls Page: 2 � � � �� I- -- ---- -- i------------- --- -- I---- - - - - - - - -- - - - � ----- ------ ------ I- - -- - - ---- I - -- -- I-- --- ---- -�-- - -- -- - -- --- I---- ------ I - ---- � -------- � ��' � �.� � �r _�...3 �-�--- �'! Q C� C� C� � C� �I ��J {� i� t� C� �7 � C� �i �7 C� Montgomery Watson South Holly Coagulant Feed S�rstem Improvements I/O List INSTFUNC LOOP SUFFIX � TYPE PID DESCRIPTION COMMENTS YL 176 A- � DI ` holi02.dgn Compressor Run Ind. C� MCC � HS 177 B DI holi02.dgn Lime Silo Level Alarm Silence Switch ------ ----- --- - - ---- HS 177 C DI holi02.dgn Lime Silo Level Alarm Test Switch HS 177 �A DI holi02.dgn Lime Silo Level Alarm Acknowledge Switch ___ __ _ _ LI 177 � B � AO holi02.dgn Lime Silo Level Ind. C� LCP YA 177 � � DO holi02.dgn Lime Silo Level Alarm YA � 178 �B � DI holi02.dgn Blower Fail Ind. � SFLCP � YA � 178 IA � DI � holi02.dgn Blower Fail Ind. � MCC YL � 178 � B ( DI � holi02.dgn � Blower Run Ind. � LCP � _ I _____ ._^ __ ____ YL � 178 �A � DI � holi02.dgn �Blower Run Ind. C�3 MCC T AI � 180 � � AI � holi02.dgn � Floc Basin Train 2 pH Analyzer � HS � 200 � � DI � holiO3.dgn �Tank Feed Select Ind. _ LAHH � 200 � � DO holiO3.dgn � Ferric Tank 5 Hi-High Level Alarm -{ � LALL � 200 � � DO holiO3.dgn � Ferric Tank 5 Lo-Low Level Alarm � LI � 200 � AI holiO3.dgn �Tank 5 Level Ind. � HS � 202 B � DI � holiO3.dgn Ferric Tanks Alarm Silence Pushbutton � HS � 202 A � DI � holiO3.dgn Alarm Acknowledge Pushbutton �� LSH � 202 � DI � holiO3.dgn Ferric Sulfate Containment Area Level Alarm High YL ( 202 � � DI � holiO3.dgn Sump Pump Run Ind. LAHH � 204 � � DO � holiO3.dgn � Ferric Tank 6 Hi-High Level Alarm � LALL � 204 � � DO � holiO3.dgn � Ferric Tank 6 Lo-Low Level Alarm LI � 204 � � AI � holiO3.cign �Tank 6 Level Ind. � LAHH 206 � � DO � holiO3.dgn � Ferric Tank 7Hi-High Level Alarm � LALL 206 � DO � holiO3.dgn � Ferric Tank 7 Lo-Low Level Alarm � LI � 206 � AI � holiO3.dgn �Tank 7 Level Ind. � _ HS � 212 � C ( DO � holiO3.dgn � Pump FSMP-1 and Alarm Reset � HS � 212 �A DO holiO3.dgn Pump FSMP-1 Hand-Off-Remote � SI � 212 � AI holiO3.dgn Metering Pump Speed Ind. SIC I 212 � AO � holiO3.dgn � Metering Pump Speed Controller YA 212 � I DI � holiO3.dgn � Pump Fail Ind. � YL l 212 � B � DI � holiO3.dgn � Pump Run Ind. � YL � 212 �A � DI � holiO3.dgn �Pump Ready Ind. HS � 216 � C � DO � holiO3.dgn � Pump FSMP-2 and Alarm Reset HS � � 216 �A � DO � holiO3.dgn �Pump FSMP-2 Hand-Off-Remote �^ HS � 216 � E � DI holiO3.dgn � Standby Pump Train Select � SI � 216 � � AI holiO3.dgn � Metering Pump Speed Ind. � Shollyioa.xls Date: 6/2(99 Page: 3 Montgomery Watson INSTFUNC LOOP SUFFIX TYPE SIC 216 AO YA 216 � DI YL 216 IA DI YL 216 �B DI � HS 220 � C � DO HS 220 � A � DO SI 220 � � AI SIC 220 � AO YA 220 � DI YL 220 A � DI YL 220 B � DI FI 224 A � AI FI 224 B � AI FI 228 B � AI FI 228 A AI YA _ 230 DI LSH 200 � DI HS 300 � B � DI HS 300 �A � DI � LAHH 302 � � DO � LALL 302 � � DO � LI 302 � AI � FAH 303 � DI � HS 303 � � � DI � LAHH 304 � � DO � LALL 304 � � DO � LI 304 � � AI � HS 310 � � DI � HS 320 � A � DO � SIC 320 � � AO � YA 320 � DI � YL 320 B DI � HS 324 A DO � HS 324 B � DI � SIC 324 � AO � YA 324 � � DI � South Holly Coagulant Feed System Improvements I/O List PID holiO3.dgn holiO3.dgn holiO3.dgn holiO3.dgn holiO3.dgn holiO3.dgn holiO3.dgn holiO3.dgn holiO3.dgn holiO3.dgn holiO3.dgn holiO3.dgn holiO3.dgn holiO3.dgn holiO3.dgn holiO3.dgn holiO4.dgn hotiO4.dgn holiO4.dgn holiO4.dgn holiO4.dgn holiO4.dgn holiO4.dgn holiO4.dgn holiO4.dgrr holiO4.dgn holiO4.dgn holiO4.dgn holiO4.dgn holiO4.dgn holiO4.dgn holiO4.dgn holiO4.dgn holiO4.dgn holiO4.dgn holiO4.dgn DESCRIPTION __ _ Metering Pump Speed Controller Pump Fail Ind. Pump Ready Ind. ____ _ __ _ _ _ Pump Run Ind^ _ _ _ _ � Pump FSMP-3 and Alarm Reset Pump FSMP-3 Hand-Off-Remote Metering Pump Speed Ind. Metering Pump Speed Controller Pump Fail Ind. � Pump Ready Ind. � Pump Run Ind. FSMP-1 Head "A" Flow Xmtr FSMP-1 Head "B" Flow Xmtr � FSMP-2 Head "B" Flow Xmtr � FSMP-2 Head "B" Flow Xmtr � Smoke Detection Device � Containment Area Level Alarm High � Fill Panel Alarm Silence Pushbutton � Fill Panel Alarm Acknowledge Pushbutton � Polymer Tank 7 Level Alarm Hi-High � Polymer Tank 7 Level Alarm Lo-Low � Polymer Storage Tank 7 Level Xmtr � Emergency Eyewash Flow Alarm � Emergency Eyewash Panic Switch . Polymer Tank 8 Level Alarm Hi-High Polymer Tank 8 Level Alarm Lo-Low � Polymer Storage Tank 8 Level Xmtr � Polymer Feed Tank Selection Ind. � Polymer Blending Unit Hand-Off Remote � Polymer Pump Speed Control � Polymer Blending Unit Fail Ind. � Polymer Blending Unit Run Ind. � Polymer Blending Unit Hand-Off Remote Flow Signal Selector Switch Polymer Pump Speed Control � Polymer Blending Unit Fail Ind. _ _ COMMENTS _ _ � Date: 6/2/99 Shollyioa.xls Page: . 4 �� .� � �,� �� '� � �� ` � �--�f C� f� L� Q C� [� �] � t� �I Q G� �.7 �£�7 C� C� !� C� �7 Montgomery Watson South Holly Coagulant Feed System Improvements I/O List INSTFUNC LOOP SUFFIX TYPE PID DESCRIPTION COMMENTS _ _ _____ __ YL 324 B DI holiO4.dgn Polymer Blendin� Unit Run Ind. _ _______ _ _ _ _ __ __ _ _ _____ HS 328 A DO holiO4.dgn Polymer Blending Unit Hand-Off Remote __ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ � _ _ SIC 328 � AO holiO4.dgn Polymer Pump Speed Control YA 328 � DI holiO4.dgn Polymer Blending Unit Fail Ind. ______ ___ __ YL 328 � B DI holiO4.dgn Polymer Blending Unit Run Ind. I . I - -- - - — - - - --- -- — I - -- - — - — — — � — -- -- -- -- - - -- - -- - - - --- --- -- --- � Date: 6/2/99 Shollyioa.xls Page: , 5 L!J LiJ L�J � LiJ � � � L�J � .. � ��' � �� L�J � PART F INSURANCE AND BONDS � � � � � � p p C� CJ � � � C.� [� C� C� C� � Q C� 0 � ' �. L!!.! L�J � CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE WITH WORKER'S COMPENSATION LAW � Pursuant to Article 8308-3.23 of Veron's Annotated Civil Statues, Contractor Certifies that it provides worker's compensation insurance coverage for all of its employees employed on City of Fort Worth Project Number �W ?? �(�t�0�7U S Ocxa9� . L�J � ( �S G9�Q CONTR r�.�G , .L►vc . l�J � lJ L�, By: / ,v � -1��/?�S L, Title � &�/ �3 I99 Date STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF TARRANT § (/�C.c /�2z�S . � BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared S7�J�� ('_ _(��ww�.� . known to me to be the person whose name is subscribed to the foregoing instrument, and acknowledged to me that he executed the same as the act � and deed of �a �oa �oNrn�crrn�(.,�_ for the purpose and consideration therein expressed and in the capacity therein stated. VEN UNDER MY HAND AND SEAL OF OFFICE thi��;� of a 19.� � � �� ` ��.�� Nota �Public in and for the St e of exas ' S'Y++�?� f.K,},�y . "' CHRISTIEANNC�A�7;: a�� '' � 4 NOTARY PUF3L�G STATE OF TEX:�� ,�� o� ��+�, My Comm Exp. Osi-2�E a{��,a• �,t,e7.�x�.. ,. 1333018 — South Holly WTP Workers Comp Form � Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 1 I� � �l � � � Isl � � u � L�J u PERFORMANCE BOND THE STATE OF TEXAS � COUNTY OF TARRANT BOND��8149-23-60 § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we (1) Oscar Renda Contracting, Inc . � g �2� Corporati.on � •, of ' hereinafter called Principal; and (3) Federal Insurance Company ' a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State and fully authorized to transact business in the State of Texas, as Surery, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Worth, a municipal corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas, hereinafter called Owner, in the penal sum of: One Milli.on Four Hundred Ei.ghtyFi.ve Thousand Dollars (S i,1�R 5, nnn ) Dollars in lawful money of the United States, to be paid in Fort Worth, Tarrant Counry, Texas, for the payment of which sum weil and truly be made, we hereby bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors, jointly and severally, firmiy by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that Whereas, the Principal entered into a certain. contr�ct with the City of Fort Worth, the Owner, dated the day of � � t' u� �- Q�99,'�4.D. 19_, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof, for the construction of: South Holly Water 7'reatment Plant Coagulant Feed System Improvements _� ; � �. . :, . ., , � designated as Project No.(sl PW77-060770 5 00090 , a copy of which contract is hereby attached, referred to, and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein, such project and construction being hereinafter referred to as the 'i�vork". � NOW THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly, and faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications, and contract documents during the original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the Owner, with or without notice to the Surety, and he shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred under the contract, �j and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the Owner from all costs and damages which it ��..1 may suffer by reason of failure to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the owner all outlay and expense which the Owner may incur in making good any default, then this obligation a shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action be filed upon this bond, venue shall lie in Tarrant County, State of Texas. I�i u lJ • AND PROVIDED FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no charge, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or �to the work to be performed thereunder, or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any wise affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice 1333018 - South Holly WTP Performance Bond Form Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 1 � � of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in six counterparts each one of � which shall be deemed an original, this the day o�� 1 O , A.D., 19_. �999 - � ATl"EST: PRINCIPAL�4) DS �A �o.��ct2wG, -�� • � BY: � � A �.��., (Principle) Secretary � � L�J � I�I (SEAL) 5�,+�ti. L _ C.��H Witness as to Principal � S�2 �L�.�So,.� �E �An�o��, l�hS 7(o2(oZ Address ATTEST: ederal In ur nce Co.By: �if�i G'�'ZG /�.�C�� (Surety) � a(S E A L) � u � I �J � � � Di.anne E. Gass Witness as to Surety 8235 Douglas Ave., 4�828 Dallas, `lexas 75225 (Address) :N C. L�w�4n� �/tt'S c A L�+aT (Address) S � � G3�.�.co,.., �,A.N E {�a,.,o.��, 1 �xA� 7� �bZ `�l7 �49 r — �? 03 Surety Federal Insurance Company ��%��: ��'�% , (Attorney-in�fact) (5) Arni.m I . Gerstenmei.er � (Address) NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract (1) Correct Name of Contractor (2) A Corporation, a Partnership or an Individual, as the case may be (3) Correct name �of Surery (4) If Contractor is Partnership, all Partners should execute Bond (5) A True copy of Power of Attorney shall be attached to Bond by Attorney-in-fact � 1333018 — South Holly WTP . Performance Bond Form Coagulant Feed system Improvements PAGE 2 �!' � L�J � L� Q L� C� C3 _�.J C� 0 L LJ CJ 0 O O 0 � ,�, _ , , : �s �-.�, — ti.� �: � . � �� L�J � I�I l� � CChubb Surety POWER O� ATTORNEY Federal Insurance Company Attn.: Surety Department Vigilant Insurance Company 15 Mountain View Road Pacific Indemnity Company Warren, NJ 07059 Kraw All by These Prcsents, That FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, an Indiana corporation, VIGILANT INSURMICE COMPANY, a New York corporation, arxi PACIFlC INDEMNITYCOMPANY, a Wisconsin corporation, do each hereby constitute and appoint Arnim I. Gerstenmeier, John L. Mondics and Larry D. Greenhaw of Dallas, Texas --------------------------- each as their true and lawful Attomey-in-Fact to execute under such designation in their names and to a�x their corporate seals to and deliver for and on their behalf as surety thereon or otherwise, bonds (other than bail bonds) and undertakings given or executed in the course oi its business (but not to include any instruments amending or aftering the same, nor consents to the modification or afteration of any instrument referred to in said bonds or obligations). In wtness Whereof, said FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, ViGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNI'TY COMPANY have each executed and attested these presents and a�xed their corporate seals o� this l Ofih day of February, 1999 . �� L.� enneth C. en el, �sta�li S�tary� ^- 1 STATE OF NEW JERSEY � ss. Countv ot Somerset � lOth February, 1999 On this day of , before me, a Notary Public of New Jersey, personally came Kenneth C. Wendel, to me known to be Assistant Secretary of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY, the companies which executed the foregoing Power of Attomey, and the said Kennelh C. Wendei being by me duly swom, did depose and say that he is Assistant Secretary of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY and knows the corporete seals thereof, � that the seals affixed !o the toregoing Power of Attomey are such corporate seals and were thereto a�xed by authorily of the By-Laws of said Companies; and that he signed said Power of Attomey as Assistant Secretary ot said Companies by like authority; and that he is acquainted with Frank E. RobeAson, and knows him to be Vice President of said Companies; and that the signature of Frank E. Robertson, subscribed to said Pawer of Ariomey is in the penuine handwriting of Frank E. Robertson, and was thereto subscribed by authority ot said By-Laws and in deponeM's presence. � Notarial Seal ��y� K• R J� q NOTAIZY � ` . Fil3LY� - .�,� OAh�JE K. AUSSA'�O�lota Public ` ��,�q5� Notary Pubiic, State o� New Jereey a No.2214608 - CERTIFICATION Cammfssion Explre��Junc 17, zco3 Extract from the By-Laws of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY: 'Aii powers of attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shall be executed in the name and on behalf of the Company, either by the � Chairman or the President or a vice President or an Assistant Yce President, jointly with the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary, under their respective designations. The signature of such officers may be engraved, printed or Ifthographed. The signature of each of the following officers: Chairman, President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, any Secretary, any Assistant Secretary and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attomey or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Assistant Secretaries or � Attomeys-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such power of attomey or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached." � I, Kenneth C. Wendel, Assistant Secretary of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY (the "Companies') do hereby certify that (i) the foregoing extract of the By-Laws of the Companies is true and coRect, (ii) the Companies are duly licensed and autF�a¢ed to trar�sact surety business in all 50 of the United States of Arnerica arx! the Dist�ic;t of � Columbia and are author¢ed by the U. S. Tr�sury DeparUnent; further, Federal and VgilaM are licensed in Puerto Rica and the U. S. Yrgin Islands, and Federal is licensed in American Samoa, Guam, arxi �ch of the Provirxes of Canada except Prince Ed�nrard Island; and (iii) the foregoing Power of Attomey is true, coRect and in fuil force and effect. Given under my hand and seals of said Companies at Warren, NJ this day of . l�l � � � � e�VHAJVpF �*��m � ��5� "�,,,�CF� �� c�a►��vG� 10 w '�0 � � � � _> � � —tk— * i9 2 � t' * �I� ! 1 �1 h � * �OI�►N►' �sc NA'� 'yEW 1f0��- 4- _ f� � �ra k . Robertson, Vc�(President , s ��g.��o Kenneth C. Wendel, Assistant Secretary IN THE EVENT YOU WISH TO NOTIFY US OF A CLAIM, VERIFY THE AUTHENTICITY OF THIS BOND OR NOTIFY US OF ANY OTHER MATTER, PLEASE CONTACT US AT ADDRESS LISTED ABOVE, OR BY Telephone (908) 903-3485 Fax (908) 903-3656 e-mail: surety�chubb.com Fortn iS70-0228 (Ed. 1-99) NON-CONSENT � � � �' �� l�J � u � C, u � L � u l■; � � � THE STATE OF TEXAS PAYMENT BOND � BOND��8149-23-60 COUNTY OF TARRANT § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we {1) Oscar Renda Coneracting, Inc. , a (2) Corporati.on pf Texas ' hereinafter called Principal, arld (3) Federal Insurance Company' , , a corporation organized and existing under the faws of the State and fully authorized to transact business in the State of Texas, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Worth, a municipal corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas, hereinafter called Owner, and unto�all persons, firms, and corporations who may furnish materials, for or perform labor upon the building or improvements hereinafter referred to in the penal sum of: One Mi.11i.on Four Hundred Ei.ghty Five Thousand Dollars �S 1,485,000� Dollars in lawful money of the United States, to be paid in Fort Worth, Tarrant Counry, Texas, for the payment of which sum well and truly be made, we hereby bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITiON OF THfS OBLIGATION is such that Whereas, the Principal entere� into a certain contract with the City of Fort Worth, the Owner, dated the day of .�I I�'� � Q_1QQ�,.D. 19._, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof, for the construction of: South Hollq Water 'lreatment Plant Coa�ulant Feed System Improvements designated as Project No.(s) PW77-060770 5 00090 , a copy of which contract is hereby attached, referred to, and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length he�ein, such project and construction being hereinafter referred to as the "work". NOW THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that, if the Principal shall promptly make a payment to all claimants as defined in Article 5160, Revised Civil Statues of Texas, supplying labor and materials in the prosecution of the work provided for in said � Contract, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. TH1S BOND IS MADE AND ENTERED into solely for the protection of all claimants supplying labor and material in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract, as claimants are defined in said Article 5160, and al) such claimants shafl have a direct right of action under the bond as provided in Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statues. PROVIDED FURTHER that if any legal action be filed upon this bond, venue shall 4ie in Tarrant County, State of Texas, that said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and 1333018 - South Holly WTP � � Payment Bond Form ' Coagu4ant Feed System Improvements PAGE 1 � � � � � t�J C � � � � P�CVPB,L�(41 Q�4�^�A9 � ;N C_ �w'�`�n� tf xc �� , (Addr�s ) S �� L�s,.�so � �4,.,E �;,ANoK�, � �,�,.s ��a�� 1.n.,c . Sure� ederal Insurance Company ATTEST: Federa Insurance Co . By; , _ . ( t orney-In-f C�( ) Arni.m I. Gerstenmei.er 8235 Dou�las Ave., S'1'E 828, Dallas. '1'exas 75225 (Surery) ��€3�i�i�jX (Address) (S E A L) NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to Dianne E. Gass L�J l�'.I LJ I■I C 0 � agrees that no charge, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any wise affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. PROVIDED FURTHER, that no final settlement between the Owner and the Contractor shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder whose claim may be unsatisfied. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in seven c nterparts each one of which shall be deemed an original, this the day of , A.D., 19_. n / ATTEST: `' � � . �J(� BY: � (�.�,bL . „ �r-r (Principle) Secretary (S �A L) _ ( �-c�,+F.,� 1� _ l �t�c c� ' Witness as to Principal �J�� Q�n,.to.a �s4.iv6 �An+arF; I��c.1S �llo•?(oZ Address Witness as to Surery 8235 Douglas Ave., ��828 Tlallac, 'I'r�xac 75ii5 (Address) date of Contract (1) Correct Name of Contractor (2) A Corporation, a Partnership or an Individual, as the case may be (3) Correct name of Surety (4) If Contractor is Partnership, all Partners should execute Bond (5) A True copy of Power of Attorney shall be attached to Bond by Attorney-in-fact � 1333018 — South Holly WTP � Payment Bond Form Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 2 � � l�l � L�J � � � � CChubb �urety POWER OF ATTORNEY Federal Insurance Company Attn.: Surety Department Vigilant Insurance Company 15 Mountain View Road Pacific Indemnity Company Warren, NJ 07059 Know A!1 by These Presents, That FEDERAL INSURANCE COM�ANY, an Indiana corporation, VIGILANT INSUFt�1NCE COMPANY, a New York corporation, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY, a Wlsconsin corporation, do each hereby constitute and appoint Arnim I. Gers tenmeier, ' John L. Mondies and Larry D. Greenhaw of Dallas, Texas ---------------------------- each as their true and lawful Attomey-in-Fact to execute under such designation in their names and to affix their corporate seals to and deliver for and on their behalf as surety thereon or othervvise, bonds (other than bail bonds) and undertakings given or executed in the course of its business (but not to include any instruments amending or altering the same, nor consents to the modification or akeration of any instrument referred to in said bonds or obligatlons). In Witness Whereof, said FEDERAL INSUiiANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNI'iY COMPANY have each executed and attested these presents and affixed their corporate seals on this 10�h day of February, 1999 . w /,�,�r �( D nneth . en el, �star�f S etary � 4- — Fra k E. Robertson, V President STATE OF NEW JERSEY 1 j �. County of Somerset On this 10th day of February, 1999 .�fore me, a Notary Public of New Je rsey, personally came Kenneth C. Wendel, fo me known to be Assistant Secretary of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY, the companies which executed the foregoing Power of Attomey, and the said Kenneth C. Wendel being by me duly swom, did depose snd say that he is Assistant Secretary of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT tNSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY and knows the corporate seals thereof, that the seals aft'aed to the foregoing Power of Attomey are such corporate seals and were lhereto afiixed by authority of the By-Laws of said Companies; and lhat he signed said Power of Attomey as Assistant Secretary of said Companies by like authority; and that he is acquainted with Frank E. Robertson, and knows him to be Vice President of said Companies; and ihat the signature of Frank E. Robertson, subscribed to said Power of Ariomey Is in the genuine handwriting of Frank E. Robertson, and was thereto subscribed by authority of said By-Laws and in deponenPs presence. � Notarial Seal _ S,y�L ^K•,pv `� r� r—r oT�_7``� �FJ\ &LIC, . ,�,� / OAk�JE �. RUSSA'rWota Public �h��' Notary Public, State oi New Jersey a No. 2214608 CERTIFICATION Commission Expire�`duno 17, 2CO3 Extract from the By-Laws of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY: � `All powers of attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shall be executed in the name and on behalf of the Company, either by the Chairman or the President or a vice President or an Assistant vce President, jointly with the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary, under their respective designations. The signature of such officers may be engraved, printed or lithogrephed. The signature of each of the foliowing officers: Chairman, President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, any Secretary, any Assistant Secretary and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attomey or to any cettificate relating thereto appointing Assistant Secretaries or � Attomeys-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writin'gs obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such power of attomey or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or (acsimite seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached" ' � I, Kenneth C. Wendel, Assistant Secretary of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMN(N COMPANY (the "Companies") do hereby certify that (i) the foregoing extract of the By-Laws of the Companies is true and correct, (ii) the Compan'�es are duly licensed and auttwr¢ed to transact surety business in all 50 of the United States of America and Vie DisUict of a Cdumbia and are author¢ed by the U. S. Tr�sury Department; further, Federal arx! Y�gilar� are licensed in Puerto Rico and the U. S. Vrgin Islands, arxi Federal is licer�sed in American Samoa, Guam, and �ch of the Provinces of Canada except Prince Ed�nrard Island; and (iii) the foregoing Power of Attomey is true, correct and tn full force and eftect. Given under my hand and seals of said Companies at Warren, NJ this day ot . � ' � C� � yvw�v�F a��m � ��'yu��F C►Q ��`,��tnt�`� ��l /� �c'0 � � � � .,�e o > —*— * � �i � �NOIAN�' � � ''f'�SC�Nr+' iyEW YO��* /� Kenneth C. Wen el, Assistant Secretary IN THE EVENT YOU WISH TO NOTIFY US OF A CLAIM, VERIFY THE AUTHEN7ICITY OF THIS BOND OR NOTIFY US OF ANY OTHER MATTER, PLEASE CONTACT US AT ADDRESS LISTED ABOVE, OR BY Telephone (908) 903-3485 Fax (908) 903-3656 e-mail: surety�chubb.com Fortn 1510-0228 (Ed. 1-�8) NON-CONSENT � � THE STATE OF TEXAS MAINTENANCE BOND § BOND ��8149-23-60 � � I�l � C COUNTY OF TARRANT § KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we (1) Oscar Renda Contracti.ng, Inc. as Principal, acting herein by and through (2) � • its duly authoriZed and (3) Federal Insurance Companq a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Indi.ana , as surety, do hereby acknowledge themselves to be held and bound to pay unto the Ciry of Fort Worth, a Municipal Corporation, chartered by virtue of Constitution and laws of the State of Texas, at Fort Worth, in Tarrant County, Texas, the sum of: One Milli.on Four Hundred Ei�hty Fi.ve '1'housa��afS ($ 1,485,000 �, 13Wful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly be made unto said City of Fort Worth and its successors, said Contractor and surety do hereby bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, and assigns and successors, jointly and severally. This obligation is conditioned, however; that, � � WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain contract with the Ciry of Fort Worth, the Owner, dated for the performance of the following described public work and the construction o t�e following described public improvements: n South Holly Water '1'reatment Plant �.,� Coagulant Feed System Improvements a all of the same being referred to herein and in said contract as the Work and being designated as Project No.(s) Pw77-060770 5 00090 ; and said contract, including all of the specifications, conditions and written instruments a referred to therein as contract documents being hereby incorporated herein by reference for all purposes and made a part hereof, the same as if set out verbatim herein; and, � WHEREAS, in said Contract, Contractor binds itself to use such materials and to so construct the work that it will remain in good repair and condition for and during the period after the date of the final acceptance of the work by the City; and, . L�J u �I � L�J u LsJ WHEREAS, said Contractor binds itself to maintain said work in good repair and condition for said term of one vear ; and, WHEREAS, sad Contractor binds itself to repair or reconstruct the work in whole or in part at any time within said period, if in the opinion of the Director of the Water Department of the City of Fort Worth, it is necessary; and, WHEREAS, said Contractor binds itself, upon receiving notice of the need thereof to repair or reconstruct said work as herein provided. . NOW THEREFORE, if said Contractor shall keep its said agreement to maintain, repair or reconstruct said work in accordance with all the terms and conditions of said contract, these presents shall be null and void, and have no force or effect. Otherwise, this Bond shall remain in full force and effect, and said City shall have and recover from the said Contractor and its surety damages in the premises as prescribed by said contract. This obligation shall be continuing one and successive recoveries may be had hereon for successive breaches until the full amount hereof is exhausted. 1333018 - South Holly WTP Maintenance Bond Form Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 1 �++t rr■�. � � �u �, � � � � �. �ra � � r� � � � �. � �> �-' :, -�:. t.� �� -;. : �t f� � aWHEREAS, all parties covenant and agree that if any legai action be filed upon this bond, venue shall lie in Tarrant County, Texas; and, � IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in si.x each one of which shall be deemed an original, dated ��, 1 n � ATTEST: I� � � �I� I�.� IJ � � L�J � L�J � ��' � , I � 1.� � -- - BY: PRINCIF�L (4)! counterparts, Fc�.,�A �-On.�1Yuc7buG, ��- ,�'_ `z�Ow �.,,� v�.� �'�cs . (Address) s�z BFNs� �� A�,O�,�'Fk�-z 710�(02 ��> l�g�- a�o3 �s-r. (Principle) Secretary � (SEAL) _ �,+�,� L,_ ��«� Witness as to Principal � S�� C.2�Rc�c. �.s f�oA,•,o•c�. I�w�s ?b �b Z Address _ ATTEST: D/l%i2� ,�� (Surety) �� r�i (SEAL) Dianne E. Gass Witness as to Surery 8235 Douglas Ave., STE 828 Dallas, '1'exas 75225 (Address) Suretv Federal Insurance Company BY' G�� a'it-P�� (Attorney-In- aCt) (5) Arni.m I . Gerstenmeier 8235 Douglas Ave., STE 828, Dallas, 'lexas 75225 (Address) NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract (1) Correct Name of Contractor (2) A Corporation, a Partnership or an Individual, as the case may be (3) Correct name of Surety (4) If Contractor is Partnership, all Partners should execute Bond (5) A True copy of Power of Attorney shall be attached to Bond by Attorney-in-fact � 1333018 — South Holly WTP Maintenance Bond Form Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 2 �i �1l � � � � l_�. C Chubb POWER Federal Insurance Company Attn.: Surety Department OF Vigilant Insurance Company 15 Mountain View Road 5urety A7TORNEY Pacific Indemnity Company Warren, NJ 07059 Know Ali by These Presents, That FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, an I�dia� cflrporation, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, a New York corporation, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY, a Wisconsin corporation, do each hereby constftute and appoint Arnim I. Gers tenmeier, � John L. Mondies and Larry D. Greenhaw of Dallas, Texas --------------------------- each as their true and lawful Attomey-in-Fact to execute under such designation in their names and to affix their corporate seals to and deliver for and on their behalf as surety thereon or othervvise, bonds (other than bail bonds) and undertakings given or executed in the course of its business {but not to include any instruments amending or aRering the same, nor consents to the modification or afteration of any instrument referred to in said bonds or obligations). In Witness Whereof, said FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY have each executed and attested these presents and affixed their corporate seals on this l Oth day of February , 1999 . ,� ��/ � enneth C. en el, �starif S�tary �� /_ _ � Fra k E. Robertson, v President STATE OF NEW JERSEY 1 j �. County of Somerset n' lOth February, 1999 On this day of , before me, a Notary Public of New Jersey, personally came Kenneth C. Wendel, �.� to me known to be Assistant Segretary of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY, the companies which executed lhe foregoing Power ot Atlomey, and the said Kenneth C. Wendel being by me duly svwm, did depose and say thal he Is Assistant Secretary of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY and knows the corporate seals thereof, � that the seals ati'aed to tha foregoing Power of Aitomey are such corporate seals and were thereto affixed by authority of the By-Laws ot said Companies; and lhat he signed said Power of Attomey as Assistant Secretary of said Companies by like authority; and that he is acquainted with Frank E. Robertson, and knows him to be Vice President of said Companies; and that the signature of Frank E. Robertson, subscribed to said Power of Attomey is in the genuine handwriting oi Frank E. Robertson, and was thereto subscribed by authoriry of said By-Laws and in deponenfs presence. � Notarial Seal �L K. Rv ��j� NOT��Y > I-�t---. � FU3LIC OAN�JE !C. RUSSA'�Niota Public �'d�� , Notary Public, State ot 1Vew Jersey No. 2274608 D CERTIFICATION Cammission Exp:res�June 17, 2G03 Extract from the By-Laws of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY: `All powers of attomey for and on behalf of the Company may and shali be executed in the name and on behalf of the Company, efther by the � Chairman or the President or a Vice President or an Assistant Vice President, jointly with the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary, under their respective designations. The signature of such officers may be engraved, printed or lithographed. The signature of each of the following officers: Chairman, President, any vice President, any Assistant Vice President, any Secretary, any Assistant Secretary and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attomey or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Assistant Secretaries or � Attomeys-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory ln the nature thereof, and any such power of attomey or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shail be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shali be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to rvhich it is attached " � I, Kenneth C. Wendel, Assistant Secretary of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY (the `Companies') do hereby certify that (i) the foregoing extract of the By-Laws of the Companies Is true and correct, . (ii) the Canpanies are duty Iicensed and a� to traruact surety business in alt 50 of the United States of America and the District of � Columbia and are author¢ed by the U. S. Tr�sury Departrnent; further, Federal and V'gilant are I'�censed in Puerto Rico and the U. S. �/�rgin Islands, and Federal is I'icensed in American Samoa, Guam, and �ch of the Provinces of Canada except Prince Eduirard Isiand; ai�d (iii) the foregoing Power of Attomey is true, correct and in full force and effect. Given under my hand and seals of said Companies at Warren, NJ this day of . �� J � � y��Sv�CFo \`�� a►�� i� ,��,,.�"�ti.,F�. 0.' , O �`� G� f 0 �4; W '�9 ` ._*_ �s }> * i � t�� • ��1, 1` ,`�1 7i *`C �bDUN�' �sc Mr� �Fw Yo��' _ �� Kenneth C. Wendel, Assistant Secretary IN THE EVENT YOU WISH TO NOTIFY US OF A CLAIM, VERIFY THE AUTHENTICITY OF THIS BOND OR NOTIFY US OF ANY OTHER MATTER, PLEASE CONTACT US AT ADDRESS LISTED ABOVE, OR BY Telephone (908) 903-3485 Fax (908) 903-3656 e-mail: surety�chubb.com Fortn 1570-0228 (Ed. 1-89) NON-CONSENT � . Q � Q � � � � � D Q � � Q� . D Q 0 � 0 pART G C��,�C� 0 L�'J �11 � L�J PART G - CONTRACT THE STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF TARRANT s � THIS CONTRACT, made and entered into �G 1 0��,�� by and between the City of Fort Worth, a home-rule municipal corporation located in Tar.rant County. Texas, acting throu�h its City Manager n thereunto duly authorized so to do, Party of the First Part, hereinafter termed "OWNER" and LI Oscar Renda Contractinq. Inc. � of the City of Roanoke ' and State of Texas • "CONTRACTOR" �� •J L�J � � � L � � , County of Parry of the Second Part. Hereinafter termed WITNESSETH: That, for and in consideration of the payments �r�d agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the Party of the First !'art (Owner), said Party of the Second Part (Contractor) hereby agrees with the said Party ,of the First Part (Owner) to commence and complete certain improvements described as follows: New Hydrated, lime feed system on existing silos, new liquid ferric sulfate feed system with two new bulk storage tanks; 'relocation of existing polymer feed system with new storage tanks; associated chemical feed piping; electrical work; instrumentation and controls. Also, includes construction of a new pre-cast Coagulant Building to enclose the new chemical feed systems and modifications to the existing plan storage room in the Chemical Building. and all extra work connected therewith, under the terms as stated in the Contract Documents, and at his (their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, bonds, insurance, and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction, in accordance with all the requirements of the Contract Documents, which include all maps, plats, blueprints and other drawings and printed or other writterr explanatory matter thereof, and the specifications thereof, as prepared by the Engineers employed by the Owner, each of which has been identified by the endorsement of the Contractor and the Engineers thereon, together with the Contractor's Written Proposal and other parts of the Contract Documents hereto attached, including the Fort Worth Water Department General Contract Documents and General Specifications, all of which are made a part hereof and collectively evidence and constitute the entire contract. The Contractor hereby agrees to commence work within ten (10) days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him, and to substantially complete same within the time stated in the Proposal. � The Owner agrees to pay the Contractor in current funds for the performance of the contract in acGordance with the Proposal submitted therefor, subject to additions and �'. deductions, as provided in the Contract Documents and all approved modifications therefor, and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. � � L�I 1333018 — South Holly WTP � Contract Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 1 � IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties to these presents have executed this Contract � in quadruplicate the year and the day first above written. ATTES�: . . , t .s .�� He�-yt' �i�tlrcfi, City Secretary � (o r�t f� `�r�oal (�EAL) � W�"xNESSES: �� r-�rc� L. f,�J�2cN �-SsT. S+FZ2r'ta,eY `' Citv of Fort Wo Texas nerl Party f t Firs a By: Bob Terrell, City Manager C-� � �5 ?1� Contract Authorization �� - 9 9 Date �S� Approved for the Fort Worth City Water Department: l ee . Bradley, Jr., Water Direct Approved as to Form a d Legality: 1lVade ins, City Attorney By c ! C� � r.�...� �l�S��vT � D � � � � � �� ' � � _ a . ��. 1333018 — South Holly WTP Contract Coagulant Feed System Improvements PAGE 2 � City of For�t Worth, Texas �1►�Ayar And C,aunc�l C,ammun�cAt�an DATE REFERENCE NUMBER LOG NAME PAGE 8/10/99 **C-17576 60FEED 1 of 2 SUBJECT AWARD OF CONTRACT TO OSCAR RENDA CONTRACTNG, INC. FOR THE SOUTH HOLLY WATER TREATMENT PLANT COAGULANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS RECOMMENDATION: It is recommended that the City Council authorize the City Manager to execute a construction contract with Oscar Renda Contracting, Inc. for the South Holly Water Treatment Plant Coagulant Feed System Improvements project on the low bid of $1,485,000. DISCUSSION: On June 9, 1998 (M&C C-16811), the City Council authorized the execution of an engineering agreement with Montgomery Watson for the design and construction management of the South Holly Water Treatment Plant Coagulant Feed System Improvements project. The proposed coagulant feed system modifications are required to comply with existing and future regulations, which require higher chemical dosage rates, and to minimize the possibility of chemical spills into the rapid mixing basins. The project will consist of modifications to or replacement of the coagulant feed systems at the South Holly Water Treatment plant. The existing quicklime feeder equipment will be replaced with updated hydrated lime feeders. The existing polymer coagulant pumps and storage tanks will be relocated to the new coagulant pump building. A replacement ferric sulfate coagulant will be installed in the new coagulant pump building. Larger coagulant storage tanks also will be installed. On July 8, 1999, the following bids were received: Bidder Oscar Renda Contractina. Cajun Contractors, Inc. Amount Bid Inc. $1.485.000.00 $1,533,000.00 Time of Completion 180 Calendar Days Oscar Renda Contracting, Inc. has complied with the City's M/WBE Ordinance by committing to 32% M/WBE participation. The City's goal on this project is 25%. The total authorized amount includes $44,550.00 for possible change orders and $12,500.00 for staff support. •r City of Fo�t Wo�th, �Texas � ��1'�tl�'�r�• � A�1'd C,at�l�l�c�1�� C�11'�f11�t11`cAt1Of1 s DATE REFERENCE NUMBER LO� NAME PAGE 8/10/99 **C-17576 I , 60FEED I 2 of 2 SUBJ�CT AWARD OF CONTRACT TO OS�/�R RENDA CONTRACTING, INC. FOR THE SOUTH H`OLL�Y�� WATER TRE�TMENT PL�NT COA�WLANT FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS � � FISCAL INFORMATION/CERTIFICATION: The Finance Director certifies that funds are available in the current capital budget, as appropriated, �of the Commercial Paper-Water Fund. � " MG:j � ` � � ,� a . � � X Submitted for City Manager's Office by: Mike Groomer Originating Department Head: Lee Bradley, Jr. Additional Information Contact: Lee Bradley, Jr. 6140 Is° 8207 I (from) ' Yn IFW77 5412Q0 � 8207 I " � � i FUND I ACCOUNT (to) .; B 9� CENTER I AMOUNT 060770500090 $1,485,000.00 C1TY SECRETARY APPROVED CITY COU�CPL niir, 1� 1999 �� City SscsetarY of the City of Fo:t Wo�th,'�exas